ANIMA'DVERSIONS OF WAR; OR, A MILITARY MAGAZINE OF THE TRVEST RULES, AND ABLEST INSTRUCTIONS, FOR THE MANAGING OF WAR. COMPOSED, OF THE MOST REFINED DISCIPLINE, AND Choice Experiments that these late Netherlandish, and Swedish Wars have Produced.  
With diverse new inventions, both of Fortifications and Stratagems. As also Sundry Collections taken out of the most approved Authors, ancient and modern, either in 

Greek.  
Latin.  
Italian.  
French.  
Spanish.  
Dutch,   or English.  
In two Books.  
By ROBERT WARD, Gentleman and Commander.  
LIPS. Pol. Lib. 5. Nunquam bonos fortesque milites habebis, nisi hac duo, velut instrumenta adhibeas, delectum & disciplinam.  
LONDON, Printed by john Dawson, and are to be sold by Francis Eglesfield at the sign of the Marigold in Paul's Churchyard. 1639.   

TO HIS ROYAL MAJESTY KING CHARLES'.  
Most dread Sovereign,  
I Having had many thoughts of the vicissitude of times, and of the mutation and change of this precious jewel Peace; And likewise observing how Sampsons' Foxes have swinged about their fiery tails of distension and discord, whereby this grim Monster (War) hath violently broken down the Pale of prosperity in our Neighbouring Kingdoms; and would subtly be picking of the golden Lock of Tranquillity, the which Omnipotency (by your Royal Majesty's goodness and well-governing) hath been so tender in preserving. And in regard neither Peace nor War can bud nor flourish, but under the well-managed Sword: according to my slender ability I have spent some few Months in discoursing upon the principal parts of the Body of War, and that in two respects: First, that some one judicious, learned, and wel-experienced Soldier, taking a survey of my defects might be thereby instigated to begin and finish a more excellent work tending to this Subject. And secondly, that my fellow Subjects who have not been versed in these affairs, might gain some profit, whereby they might be enabled to do your Majesty the better service upon all sudden occasions, when your Highness shall call them thereto. And although it may be demanded whether Reading or Practice have the first place in this Art, to be laid as a foundation to this Building; I must with Marius answer this question, who envying at the Nobility of Rome (saith) Qui postquam Consules facti sunt, acta Majorum & Graecorum Militaria praecepta legere coeperunt. Homines praeposteri, nam legere quam fieri; tempore posterius, re & usu prius est. For since that all motion and action proceedeth from the Soul, and cannot well be produced, until the Idea thereof be first imprinted in the mind; according to which pattern the outward Being and sensible resemblance is duly fashioned, how is it possible that any action belonging to War, can be well expressed, when the mind is not directed by knowledge to dispose it in that sort as shall best agree with the occurrents of such natures as are necessarily interessed both in the means, and in the end thereof? Therefore Speculative knowledge, as the Gnomon or Tramontane to direct the course of all practice, is first to be respected; But withal no man can so well rest upon such certainty through the Theoric of Knowledge, as he that hath also proved his learning verified by practice; And in regard the habitude of Arts and Sciences cannot be said to be perfectly attained, unless their particular parts are in such sort apprehended, that from the variety of that individuality; the Intellectual power frameth general Notions and Maxims of Rule uniting terms of the same nature in one head, and distinguishing diversities by differences of properties, aptly dividing the whole body into his greatest and smallest branches, and fitting each part with his descriptions, duties, cautions, and exceptions; For unless the understanding of a Soldier be in some kind qualified, and able by Logical discourse, to ascend by way of composition, from singularity to Catholic conceptions, and return again the same way, to the lowest order of his partitions, the mind cannot be said to have the perfection of that Art, or instructed in true knowledge, but guided by some broken Precepts; whereby it will follow that this Science of War being divided into many branches, and consisting in the multiplicity of diverse members being all so material, and interes●ed in the Bulk, that a maim of the smallest part, causeth either debility, or deformity in the body, so that every small and unrespected Circumstance, quite altereth the nature of the action, and breedeth such d●sparity, and difference, that the resemblance of their equal participating properties is blemished with their disagreeing parts. It cannot be denied, but he that is acquainted with most occurrences, and best knows the variety of chances in the course of War, must needs be thought a more perfect Soldier, and deserveth a Title of greater dignity in the noble profession of Arms, than those that content themselves with a few common Precepts and bro●en Rules; Therefore experience and practice doth not only make a Soldier worthy of his name; But the knowledge of the manifold accidents which rise from the variety of humane actions, wherein Reason and Error hath interchanged contrary events of Fortune: And this knowledge is only to be gained in the Registers of Antiquity and History recording the passages of former a●es, that their harms may be our warnings, and their happy proceedings our fortunate directions; Wherefore accordingly (Most gracious Sovereign) I have endeavoured to set for a Preface to this Warlike-Discourse, such accidents and occurrences as happened in the raising and declining of the four most Ancient and renowned Monarchies; a subject full of the variety of the events of Fortune. And then I have briefly run over the principal parts of the Body of War; A Subject (if not spoilt by my illiteratnesse and inability) fit to kiss your Royal hands; And like Pyrrbus in Plutarch in silence craves your Highness' tuition; I do not question your high esteem, and gracious acceptance of works of this nature; and although these my collective Anima'd versions are but shadows to the real substance your Princely mind is beautified withal, yet may they seem worthy to excite your Warlike cogitations to visit the excellent treasure of your own mind, that thence you may extract particulars for this warlike age, agreeable to your Magnanimity and wisdom, the Ambassage of this my pains is delivered and discharged. And seeing the Lord of Hosts hath fitted and enriched your Royal person with the best abilities of nature, and your Heroic spirit with true wisdom and undaunted valour; So that in your youth, your height of courage did venture to plough thorough the rude Seas, and pace over the Territories of Foreign Kingdoms to the world's amazement, (a fortunate presage that your mighty hand should afterwards Conquer, and subjugate both by Sea and Land;) Accordingly Implore the Heavens to be propitious to your Majesty, and ●owne you with Victory over all your Enemies; Thus most humbly craving pardon for my great presumption, desiring God to be your Rule and Guide, I shall be ●old to conclude with your Royal Motto, Exurgat Deu● & dissipentur Aenimici;  
Your most faithful and loyal Subject and Servant R. W.   

TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE ROBERT EARL OF WARWICK, AND TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE WILLIAM Lord Maynard of Elton, Lord Lieutenant's for the County of Essex; And to the right worshipful the Deputy Lieutenant's, and Noble Captains of the same.  
RIght Honourable and right Worshipful; 
God wins Rom. Ant.  in the ancient Roman Coin the picture of Mars was usually stamped with a javelin in one hand, a scourge in the other, and the Portrait of a Cock standing by him; The javelin intimated Prowess, the scourge Authority, and the Cock Vigillancie and indefatigable care: What was but engraven on that Coin is vively expressed in all your Honours and Worship's actions, which doubtless moved that Royal hand to confer upon you the high charge of ordering his martial affairs in this County of Essex. Your high Authority and my service under it hath moved me to present unto your views a Treatise of War; a subject in these perilous times very requisite to be regarded, especially by men of this honourable profession, since we perceive all doubts in adjacent dominions are now decided only by dint of the Sword: Proximus ardetucalligon; our neighbour's house is of a light fire, their Towns and Towers burn like Beacons: We know not how soon their flame may catch hold of our own buildings (War being in a neighbour Province like fire in the next dwellings which can hardly be kept off, but by good help) No help better to divert a war then a skilful Soldiery; for that enemy which dares do much against a numerous people unskilful in the feats of Arms, will consider well before he attempts any thing against those that be Warlike, though of far less numbers; nothing makes a people warlike so soon as maintenance of Marshal discipline, nor doth anything make the Common wealth more safe than that. This was one motive which instigated me first to undertake this hard and difficult task, and not out of any ambition to teach, since it is well known that your Honours and Worships are well versed both in the Practice and Speculative knowledge of War: And inregard your Noble professions are adorned with the truest rules adherent to these actions, it is in a manner superfluus for me to commend these unpolished Lines to your views, you being no strangers to this subject; Yet as Mela said once in his description of Italy: De Italia magis quia ordo exegit quam quia monstrari eget pauca dicentur, nota sunt omnia; the like I may justly say concerning this discourse of Warlike discipline, it is so obvious to your sight that you need not the spectacles of Letters, yet something I must say rather for methods sake unto your Lordships then necessity, and I hope it shall not seem impertinent unto your Honours, since your golden Spirits cannot admit of such effeminizing as the pythagorians which inhabited Amicle a Town in Italy, who often being terrified with a vain rumour of their enemies approach, promulgated a Law, forbidding all such reports, by which means their enemies coming unawares upon them took the Town, from hence grew the Proverb Amiclas silentium perdidit; therefore with lucilius who was commanded to he silent, I must return this answer (to those that ure not versed in these martial affairs but are altogether submerge●in security) Mihi necesse est loqui, S●●o enim Amiclas silentio perijsse. It is not unknown to your Honours and Worships who are experienced, how far both Officers and Soldiers are degenerated from former ages, in which they made the use and practice of Arms their glory; but our age makes it a burden and a shame to use and bear that name which of all attributes and titles is most honourable, if such would with Cicero consider to what end they were borne, with him they would confess Non nobis solum nati sumus sed etiam pro Patria; Wherefore the noble profession of a Soldier is a thing of no small consequence, when as true Religion cannot be maintained, the honour and safety of our gracious King cannot be safe, the possession and welfare of our kingdom cannot be enjoyed, nor the subduing of our enemies cannot be achieved but by and under the shadow of the well managed Sword: For indeed the infinite chances, hazards and events of War are so doubtful and dangerous (that as jason said to Epaminondas) he is not wise that doth not fear them, seeing as I have said before the whole world is in combustion, we ought to fit ourselves and provide for the hardest: for certainly expert commanders can easily conquer those that are Novices; and a battle once lost hath an ill tail or consequence, as the great Soldier and Statesman Commineus saith, un Battaille perdu a maunaise queúe, for it redoubleth the hope and courage of the victors, and discourageth and astonisheth the vanquished; it shaketh the fidelity of Subjects, it ministereth matter and opportunity of conspiracy to Malcontents, of revolts to Towns, and of alienation to confederates, who commonly sway with the good success: And for this cause all Princes have been very vigilant and careful to have their Commanders very expert and valiant, and their Subjects well exercised in the use of Arms; that no sudden danger should dismay them, nor no Enemy too subtle for them; for although a Nation be never so well versed in all Politic Stratagems and most able to manage a War, yet there are many accidents that the Engine of wit cannot evade, whereby mighty Armies may be dissipated and dispersed, and the greatest enterprises overthrown; A● sometimes it hath fallen out by the death of some one man, 
* Pedro Mexia in Lodo●●● Bavaro, how by the death of Constructio the Emperor the design against Florence was lost  sometimes by the dissension of Leaders and Captains amongst themselves, 
Paulus Emil. in Carolo by a schism between Vrbat and Clement the Army was ruined  sometimes by mutiny of Soldiers, 
Sigon de regno Itallico Anno 896. how Rome was surprised by Ar●ulphus the Emperor through a sudden fear.  sometimes by means of a Tempest or unseasonable weather; 
Paulus Em●l. in Ph●lipo secundo.  sometimes by Plagues or other diseases in the Camp, 
Nauclerus in Cro● the Christians overthrew the Sultan through a sudden fear.  and as Guicchardine noteth in his second Book, by mistake of a Commanmandement, either not well understood or ill executed, by a little timerity or disorder which may happen by some evil words or speeches even of the meanest Soldiers, and as Commineus further relates, 
Osorius in lib. 7. cap. 36. diverse Battles lost by diverse accidents.  that be the Counsel never so well taken, and the plot never so well laid, yet it is seldom or never executed in the field as it is ordained in the Chamber; 
Guic. lib. 5. the French were overthrown by a word mistaken  what infinite care and pains therefore (my Lords) ought every particular Officer under your Honour's Commands take in preparing themselves and fitting their Soldiers against the time of Service, that they may be able to eschew these dangers, 
Titus Livius in dec. 3. lib. 2. & d●c 4. lib 7.  and vindicate honour and triumph to themselves, that they may seem worthy to be crowned with the wreathes of victory, 
Pedro Mexia in vita Imp. Adolph.  as Valer. Max. lib. 2. reporteth that no Captain was worthy to be honoured with a Crown of Laurel, 
Guic in lib. 8. what victories hath been lost by Sun, wind and rain, etc.  clothed in rich Purple, and mounted in the golden Chariot of Fame, unless he had fought some notable battle against the Enemy, wherein above 5000. men at the least were slain; this victory begets such immortal honour and renown to the name of Captains according to their memorable actions which hath eternised their houses of descent by contrary names of glory and fame, as by the example of the Warlike Romans, the three Metelli, whereof one of them (as Sallust and some others write) because he had overcome King jugurthe conquering the Land of Numidia was surnamed Numidicus; the second conquered the King of Macedon, and was styled with the name of Macedon●cus; and the third for conquering the Isle of Crete was honoured with the name of Creticus, and the like of diverse others; and as the Romans were curious in conferring honours upon true desert, so also they were severe in punishing of base Cowardice or wilful neglect, and stupid ignorance; for if they lost honour in that kind where as by their own endeavours they might have achieved it, they had as a duemerit the basest of punishment inflicted; as whipping in the head of the Troops until the blood followed; or manacled together with Irons: And for leaving of their General or Commanders in time of fight, they were spitted upon Stakes, and diverse other rigorous torments executed upon delinquents for the like offence. Therefore with the Prophet David I implore his aid (who styleth himself the Lord of Hosts and a man of War) that he would teach our fingers to fight and our hands to Battle, 
Esay 42. 13.  that we may be ready when the Sword (which God in our time avert) shall come upon the Land, 
Psal. 18. 34.  and the Trumpet bloweth and warn the people, we may then make a valiant resistance. But he that heareth the sound of the Trumpet and will not be warned (saith the Prophet Ezekiel) if the Sword come and take him away, 
Ezek. 33. Ver. 3, 4, 5.  his blood shall be upon his own head; for he heard the sound of the Trumpet and would not be admonished, but he that receiveth warning shall save his life.  
Your Lordships and Worships Humble Servant, ROBERT WARD.   

A Table of the Contents of the several Sections and Chapters contained in in these two Books.  

The Contents of the first Book.  

SECTION I. The Mutability of Flourishing Kingdoms.  

Chap. 1.  
THere is no nation ever did, or ever shall possess a perpetual peace. Pag. 1   

Chap 2.  
Of the Monarchy of the Assyrians and the wars thereof. 2   

Chap. 3.  
Of the Monarchy of the Medes and Persians and the wars thereof. 3   

Chap 4.  
Of the Macedonian Monarchy and the wars thereof. 11   

Chap. 5.  
Of the Roman Monarchy and the wars thereof. 18    

SECT. II. How to provide in Peace for war.  

Chap. 6.  
It is good in time of Peace to provide for war. 26   

Chap. 7.  
Of the things necessarily to be provided and first of Victuals. 27   

Chap. 8.  
Of the preparation of Armour and weapons. ibid.   

Chap. 9  
Of the provision of Money. 28   

Chap. 10.  
Of the provision of Shipping. 29   

Chap. 11.  
Of the provision of Soldiers and land-forces. 30    

SECT. III. The manner of Fortification.  

Chap. 12.  
The Abridgement of Geometry, so far as belongs to the Art of Fortification. 35   

Chap. 13.  
How to line and stake any bulwark upon a Regular figure. 40   

Chap. 14.  
How to Fortify the Exagon Figure, with the second kind of Flanks. 43   

Chap. 15.  
How to Fortify a place that is not capable of a regular Fortification. 45   

Chap. 16.  
Another Irregular Figure Fortified. 47   

Chap. 17.  
A third Irregular Figure Fortified. 49   

Chap. 18.  
A fourth Irregular Figure Fortified. 51   

Chap. 19  
A fifth Irregular figure Fortified. 53   

Chap. 20.  
A discourse, how the Ancients Fortified their Towns. 55   

Chap. 21.  
A second way which the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns. 56   

Chap. 22.  
The third way the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns. 57   

Chap. 23.  
The fourth way the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns. 58   

Chap. 24.  
The fifth way the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns. 59   

Chap. 25.  
Of the measures and proportions of our modern Fortresses. 60  
Of Fortresses in general, and of their perfections and imperfections. 62   

Chap. 26.  
Of four kinds of Fortifying now in use; first of the manner of Fortifying in France. 67   

Chap. 27.  
How the French Fortify their Irregular figures. 68   

Chap. 28.  
The manner of the Spanish Fortifying. 70   

Chap. 29.  
Of the Venetians manner of Fortificati●o. 71   

Chap 30.  
A Comparison between the rules of Fortification handled in this Treatise with the rules of others: with certain Answers to diverse objections in Fortification. 72   

Chap. 31.  
The manner how to gain and defend the Fortresses. 76   

Chap. 32.  
Divers observations, Rules, and Orders which all Generals ought to observe in the besieging, and defending of Forts. 79   

Chap. 33.  
A Triangular Sconce, with direction, for the best scituating of it. 84   

Chap. 34.  
The manner of framing a Trianguler Redout. 85   

Chap. 35.  
The manner of fram●●● a Quadrangle Redout. 87   

Chap. 36.  
The manner of framing a Qnadrangle Sconce. 88   

Chap. 37.  
The manner of framing a Sconce with six Points, or Angles. 89   

Chap. 38.  
The manner of framing a Half Moon. ibid.   

Chap. 39  
The manner of framing a Horne-worke. 90   

Chap. 40.  
A second kind of Horne-worke, with its proper place. 91   

Chap. 41.  
The description of the Redouts, Forts, and Batteries which were raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda. 95   

Chap. 42.  
Divers choice Observations, concerning the beleaguring of a Fort; collected from the famous Siege of Breda Anno 1624. 98   

Chap. 43.  
How to frame a Flankered Redout. 105    

SECT. IV. The use of Artillery in Forts.  

Chap. 44.  
The office of the Master of the Ordinance, and other inferior Officers; 107   

Chap. 45.  
The names of all kind of Ordnances whatsoever, now in use, with the height of their Diametets, their weight etc. 109   

Chap. 46.  
How the Gunners of our times do divide these Ordinance, according to their quality for several service. 112   

Chap. 47.  
How a Gunner's ●s to Tertiate and measure a P●ece of Ordnance, and also how to despart any kind of Ordnance. 114   

Chap. 48.  
Divers circumstances and causes to be considered and avoided, which causeth Error in shooting. 118   

Chap. 49.  
Observations in charging great Ordnance with their due proportion of Powder, and Shot with their Ladles, etc. 111   

Chap. 50.  
Divers Rules and observations to be used in Levelling of Ordnance, by the Gunner's Quadrant, Scale etc. 124   

Chap. 51.  
Divers brief observations, concerning the Embasing of Ordnance, and shooting in Mortar-pieces. 130   

Chap. 52.  
The description of such Instruments, with the best selected Rules, which have been invented and practised, for the taking of heights and distances; whereby a Gunner may make his shot at more certainty. 134    

SECT. V.  

Chap. 53.  
The Art of conveying Letters out of a Fort, described. 143    

SECT. VI The Art of Conveying a Mine under a Fort.  

Chap. 54.  
How to conduct a Mine under ground, to blow up a bulwark. 147    

SECT. VII. The duties of Soldiers in general both in Fort, and Field.  

Chap. 55.  
The duties of Soldiers, both Gentlemen and Senteries, generally discoursed of. 150   

Chap 56.  
The duties both of Officers, and Soldiers in Garrison. 155   

Chap. 57  
The duties of Officers and Soldiers in the Campe. 157   

Chap. 58.  
Of the due obedience, both Subjects, Officers, and Soldiers should hear to their Prince or General; with a demonstration how Mutinies and Treasons have been rewarded with infinite miseries. 158    

SECT. VIII. The true Valour of Subjects and Soldiers in Fort, and Field.  

Chap. 59  
The true nature of Valour described, and how men ought to be qualified with it. 172    

SECT. IX. A discourse upon unjust Valour in Duels.  

Chap. 60.  
Of the opinions of diverse Learned men concerning Duels; with the chiefest circumstances that can be alleged for the Lawfulness of them, and so confuted both by divine and humane reasons; 183    

S●CT. X. The Office and duty of every particular Officer in an Army.  

Chap. 61.  
The duty and Office of a Drum to a pryvate company; and of the Drumme-Major of the Regiment.   

Chap. 62.  
The Office of a Corporal, and his Lantsprezado. 195   

Chap. 63.  
The Office of a Sergeant to a private Company. 196   

Chap. 64.  
The Office of an Ensign to a private Company, 197   

Chap. 65.  
The Office of a Lieutenant to a private Company. 199   

Chap. 66.  
The Office of a Captain of a private Compatie. 200   

Chap. 67.  
The Office of a Serjeant-Major of a Regiment, 203   

Chap. 68  
The Office of a Lievetenant-Colonell of a Regiment. 204   

Chap. 69.  
The Office and duty of a Colonel over a Regiment. ibid.   

Chap. 70.  
The Office of a Serjeant-Major-generall of an Army; 206   

Chap. 71.  
Tho Office of the Lord Martial in the wars, and of his high jurisdiction and command in the Army. 207   

Chap. 72.  
Of the Council of war, and of their office and duty in the time of war, 209    

SECT. XI. The Art of Drilling, or excercising a Foote-Companie.  

Chap. 73.  
The manner how every Officer should Drill and exercise their Companies of Foot, in all their Postures, and Motions, with the several ways of giving fire. 211   

Chap. 74.  
How a Captain shall cause his Officers to order and rank his Company, fit to march into the field. 212   

Chap. 75.  
How the Officers are to draw both Pikes and Muskets (one file sequenting another) into a Ring for the better and speedier exercising them in their Postures. 214   

Chap. 76.  
How an Officer is to Demean himself, in the Exercising of the Musquetiers. 215   

Chap. 77.  
How an Officer is to Demean himself in the Exercising of the Pikes. 222   

Chap. 78.  
How the Commanders shall draw their Files both of Musquetiers & Pikes, & join them in one body, fit to be exercised in gross. 225   

Chap. 79.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Company in gross in their porper motions. 226   

Chap. 80.  
Of Facing square, and how to perform it: The usefulness of Facing and the several parts thereof. 227   

Chap. 81.  
The manner of opening, and closing, both of Ranks and Files. 230   

Chap. 82.  
How an Officer shall exercise his Company in Doubling of their Ranks & Files. 231   

Chap. 83.  
Directions how to perform those several kinds of doublings, and how to reduce them again. 234   

Chap. 84.  
Of Inversion and Conversion, with their words of Command, whereby those motions are produced. 243   

Chap. 85.  
How an Officer is to exercise his Soldiers in three manner of Countermarches, etc. 247   

Chap. 86.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in the motions of Wheeling. 254   

Chap. 87.  
How a Commander shall prepare his Soldiers for skirmish, with the manner and use of firing by Forlorn Files in the Front, 259   

Chap. 88  
How a Commander sball exercise his Soldiers to give fire by two Ranks, etc. 260   

Chap. 89.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Wings of Musquetiers to give fire, etc. 261   

Chap. 90.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in giving Fire to the Rear. 267   

Chap. 91.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Company in giving fire in the Flanks. 268   

Chap. 92.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in Divisionall Firings. 272   

Chap. 93.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in giving fire to the Rear, and right Flank, Marching, etc. 273   

Chap. 94.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in a Triple way of giving Fire to the Front. 274   

Chap. 95.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in giving Fire three ways at once (viz.) to the Front, Rear, and Right-Flanke. 275    

SECT. XII. The Drilling or exercising Horse-Troopes.  

Chap. 96.  
Of the preeminency and dignity of Officers (for avoiding of disputes) with a short Declaration of the high office of the General of the Horse. 277   

Chap 97  
The Office of the lieutenant-general of the Cavalry. 278   

Chap. 98.  
Of the sergeant-major-general of the Cavalry. 279   

Chap. 99  
Of the quarter-master-general of the Cavalry. 280   

Chap. 100  
The office of the Captain of the Cavalry, Ibid.   

Chap. 101.  
The Office of the Lieutenant of the Cavalry, 281   

Chap. 102.  
Of the Cornet belonging to the Cavalry. 282   

Chap. 103.  
Of the ordering and riding of Horses to make them fit for service. 283   

Chap. 104.  
Further instructions concerning the ordering, and riding of a Horse for service, with the use of the Ring. 285   

Chap. 105.  
How to manage a Horse for service four kinds of ways. 289   

Chap. 106.  
How to make a Horse endure Pike, Sword, Gun-shot, Drum, and the like. 291   

Chap. 107.  
How the Horse-Troopes ought to be divided, and distinguished by their several Arms 292   

Chap. 108.  
How the Harquebuziers, and the Carabines ought to demean themselves. 293   

Chap. 109.  
How the Dragonnes ought to Arm and demean themselves. 294   

Chap. 110.  
How a single Troop of Horse ought to be drawn into Rank and File. Ibid.   

Chap. 111.  
What orders and distances a Horse-troop should observe in exercise. 295   

Chap. 112.  
The motions which the Cavalry are to observe in their exercise. Ibid.   

Chap. 113.  
The manner how a Commander over 120 Horse, besides Officers, should troop with them into the Field to be exercised. 296   

Chap. 114.  
How a Commander should draw this Troop of Horse into a Body, in manner of a Battalions. 297   

Chap. 115.  
How Soldiers are to be made to understand their Commanders intentions in the time of Skirmish. 298   

Chap. 116.  
The description of the Postures for the Cavalry. 299   

Chap. 117.  
Of the Exercising of the Harquebuz, and Carabine, with the Postures to them belonging, etc. 301   

Chap. 118.  
Of the excellent service which may be performed by the Dragoones here in England. 302   

Chap. 119.  
The order of exercising a Horse-troop in their motions, being drawn in Battalions, 304   

Chap. 120.  
The fashion of Horse-Battels discoursed of, and first of the rhomb. 309   

Chap. 121.  
The manner and form how the second kind of rhomb is ordered in Battalions. 310   

Chap. 122.  
The manner and form of imbattelling the third kind of rhomb. 311   

Chap. 123.  
The manner of Imbattelling the fourth kind of rhomb. 312   

Chap. 124.  
The manner of Framing the Battle called the Wedge, or half rhomb. 313   

Chap. 125.  
The Reason why we retain the custom of Ranking five deep in File. 314   

Chap. 126.  
How the Cavalry are to order, and demean themselves in proportionable Battles, fit to be joined with the infantry, with their due order of fight against the Enemy's Foot-Troopes; Likewise how they are to give, and receive a Charge of the Enemy's Cavalry in Gross, as also in single Combats and assaults. 316    

SECT. XIII. A Discourse of Politic Stratagems.  

Chap. 127.  
A perfect Demonstration of such Politic Stratagems as have been plotted, and and practised, both by Ancient and Modern Commanders. 321   

Chap. 128.  
How the Prince of Orange took in Grolle in Gelderland. 322   

Chap. 129.  
A Policy to defer time, when a Town is beleaguered, that relief may be gained Ibid.   

Chap. 130.  
How Zophirus, by a Politic Stratagem, delivered a whole Army into his General's hands. Ibid.   

Chap. 131.  
How Philip Macedon, and diverse others, by their Policy have gained Kingdoms by affording their aids to distressed Princes, 323   

Chap. 132.  
A Policy to preserve Towns from revolting, with a covert-way to banish such men as are held in suspicion. Ibid.   

Chap. 133.  
A Politic way to prevent an Enemy from stopping the March of part of an Army 324   

Chap. 134.  
A Politic way for an Army that is fallen into danger, to escape it, by securing the one half by the hazarding the other. Ibid.   

Chap. 135.  
A Policy whereby Scanderbag in a Battle against the Great Turk, overthrew his Troops of Horses. Ibid.   

Chap. 136.  
A Policy which the Duke de Alva used to fortify his Army against the Prince of Orange his Horse. 325   

Chap. 137.  
A Policy to prevent rebellion of such in high Authority as are discontented, or of a proud and haughty spirit. Ibid.   

Chap. 138.  
How a General ought to demean himself Politicly, both in giving of Battle, and in refusing it. Ibid.   

Chap. 139.  
A Politic observation of a General how he should entreat a Peace. 326   

Chap. 140.  
A Policy to prevent the assistance of a foreign friend. Ibid.   

Chap. 141.  
How to gain fortunate success to an Army, Ibid.   

Chap. 142.  
A Policy used by Marrius to try the fidelity of the French, which inhabited Lombardy. 325   

Chap. 143.  
A policy to compel an Enemy out of a Land without hazarding an Army in Battle with him. ibid.   

Chap. 144.  
How a General should use policy in letting an enemy pass without sight. ib.   

Chap. 145.  
A policy to make Soldiers fight in a pitched Battle, and to prevent their running away. 328   

Chap. 146.  
A policy of a Genoys, used to the Negotiator of Lodowick Sforza, to cause him to know the nature of oppression. ibid.   

Chap. 147.  
A policy to be used by a General to encourage Soldiers to work in time of necessity. ibid.   

Chap. 148.  
A politic way for a General to gain a difficult passage with his Army. ibid.   

Chap. 149.  
A policy to be used by a General, to further the assault made against a Town. 329   

Chap. 150.  
A politic Stratagem used by the Hollanders to take in the Town of Breda. ibid.   

Chap. 151.  
A policy which the City of Cassiline used to make Hannibal raise his siege ibid.   

Chap. 152.  
Caesar's policy in letting the Dutchmen fly, that he might vanquish them. 330   

Chap. 153.  
How by a Stratagem the Guard of the Sconce at Zutphen was cut off, and the Sconce taken, and immediately after the Town. ibid.   

Chap. 154.  
A policy used by the Romans to relieve such Towns as had Rivers running by or thorough them. ibid.   

Chap. 155.  
How the Governor of Bergen-up-zone had like to have routed Spinola's Army at his first beseiging it. 331   

Chap. 156.  
A policy used by Mennon of Rhodes to draw his enemy out of his Trenches to give him Battle. ibid.   

Chap. 157.  
How Marcellus by a politic Stratagem cut off Haniballs Forces which came to assault the Town of Nola. Ibid.   

Chap. 158.  
A Policy which Scipio used to weaken and dishearten the Army of Asdrubal, before he would give him Battle, whereby he gained the victory. 332   

Chap. 159.  
A Politic Stratagem which Titus Didus made use of, to prevent his enemy for encountering with his fresh supplies that were coming to assist him. ib.   

Chap. 160.  
A Policy of Hannibal to bring the Romans into jealousy of their General Fabius Maximus that thereby he might work his own ends. 333   

Chap. 161.  
A Politic Stratagem whereby an Army hath been disheartened in time of Battle. ib.   

Chap. 162.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Labienus in France, whereby he vanquished his enemy's Army, marching over a River. ib.   

Chap. 163.  
A Policy whereby an Army may pass over a River, when the Enemy attends the advantage to ruin them. ibid.   

Chap. 164.  
An excellent Policy for a General to put off a people that he is in league with all, and desires his assistance 334   

Chap. 165.  
The Policy of Vigetius to conv●y footetroopes over a River that is passable, so that the stream shall not offend them. ib.   

Chap. 166.  
How by a Politic device the Hollanders obtained a convenient piece of ground from their Enemy, upon which they built the Sconce called Skinkes. ibid.   

Chap. 167.  
Haniballs politic observations in placing his Battles upon advantages. 335   

Chap. 168.  
A Policy used by Pyrrhus, whereby he deluded the Lacedæmonians. ibid.   

Chap. 169.  
How Demetrius by a Politic Stratagem overthrew the Army of Ptolemy. ibid.   

Chap. 170.  
A Politic way to weaken an Enemy's Army. ibid.   

Chap. 171.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Fulvius, whereby he cut off the Sallies of the Cimbrians. 336   

Chap. 172.  
A policy whereby Alexander deceived the Illyrians, by counterfeiting the Enemy's Colours. ibid.   

Chap. 173.  
A policy used by Tamirus, and Tiberius Gracchus, whereby they overthrew their enemies whole Army at once without loss or hazard to themselves. ibid.   

Chap. 174.  
A politic Stratagem used by Eumenes to cause his Soldiers to follow him upon a dangerous attempt. ibid.   

Chap. 175.  
A policy to gain a Town whose fidelity is doubtful. 337   

Chap. 176.  
A policy used by Alexander to secure Thracia from rebellion. ibid.   

Chap. 177.  
A policy to beguile an Enemy from opposing an Army that would march over a River. ibid.   

Chap. 178.  
A politic Stratagem used by Duke Bernard of Saxon-Weymar, whereby he surprised the strong town of Manheim in the Pallatinate. ibid.   

Chap. 179.  
A politic Stratagem used by Alexander, whereby he forced his Enemy from a passage which by strength he could not have gained. 338   

Chap. 180.  
How Scipio by his justice and chaste carriage to a fair Lady (which he had taken prisoner) won the hearts of his Enemies. ibid.   

Chap. 181.  
A politic answer of Alexander unto certain malicious enemies, and his wise device to gain their love. ibid.   

Chap. 182.  
A politic course used by Tamberline, whereby he gained speedy conquests. 339   

Chap. 183.  
A policy used by Edward the fourth to suppress his Rebels. ibid.   

Chap. 184.  
A politic device used by William Rufus to get moneys. ibid.   

Chap. 185.  
A politic course to keep a new conquered people from Innovations and Rebellions. ibid.   

Chap. 186.  
A politic way to stay mutinies in an Army. 340   

Chap. 187.  
A policy used by King William, to Malcolm King of Scotland. ibid.   

Chap. 188.  
Politic observations in a confederate War▪ ibid.   

Chap. 189.  
A policy used by the Governor of Croizon to make his cowardly Soldiers fight. 341   

Chap. 190.  
A policy used by Generals to beguile hunger in a straight besieged Town. ibid.   

Chap. 191.  
A politic Stratagem practised by the Governor of Berghen against the Prince of Parma's Forces. ibid.   

Chap. 192.  
A politic observation for a General if he fears his enemy's Battle, to march from him by night. 342   

Chap. 193.  
A politic Stratagem whereby the King of Naples regained the possession of a City and Castle, formerly lost to the French. ibid.   

Chap. 194.  
A politic Stratagem used by Nauplius against the Grecians as they came for the Island of Euboea. ibid.   

Chap. 195.  
An excellent policy used by Mahomet Bassa, to conceal the death of Soliman from his Soldiers at Sigeth in Hungary. ibid.   

Chap. 196.  
A politic Stratagem used by Simon son of Miltiades, whereby he overthrew the Sea and Land-Forces of the Persians in one day. 348   

Chap. 197.  
A policy of the Duke of Bourbon, to cause his flying Soldiers to stand a Charge. ibid.   

Chap. 198.  
A policy used by Henry the fifth, being overcharged with prisoners. ibid.   

Chap. 199.  
A Stratagem whereby the Town of Fastcastle in Scotland was taken from the English. ibid.   

Chap. 200.  
A notable policy whereby the Island of Sarke was taken from the French. 344   

Chap. 201.  
A politic device used by jugurth to help his Army in case it were overthrown. ibid.   

Chap. 202.  
A politic Stratagem used by Count Pedro Navarese to beat his enemies from a Breach. ibid.   

Chap. 203.  
A policy used by the Prince of Orange to drown his enemy out of his Trenches, and then to relieve the Town by Boats. 345   

Chap. 204.  
A policy used by the Spaniards against the French to prevent the power of their Horse against their foot. ibid.   

Chap. 205.  
A politic Stratagem whereby the Lord Poynings gained a Castle at Samer-dubois, there being no access to it with Ordnance. ibid.   

Chap. 206.  
A policy used by Mounsieur Lautreck to make his foreign assistance to fight. ibid.   

Chap. 207.  
How Scipio by his policy defeated the Carthaginians of their design. 346   

Chap. 208.  
A politic Stratagem used by Philopaemen against Nabis. ibid.   

Chap. 209.  
A politic Stratagem to prevent an Enemy from entering, the Ports being blown open. ibid.   

Chap. 210.  
A politic Stratagem used by Maximilian whereby he took the Town of Arras. ibid.   

Chap. 211.  
A policy to prevent mischief when two great Princes meet to discourse. 347   

Chap. 212.  
A policy to conduct Troops of Horse over Bogges, etc. ibid.   

Chap. 213.  
A policy used by the Citizens of Priennia, which caused the enemy to leave his Siege. ibid.   

Chap. 214.  
A politic Stratagem whereby young Scipio brought Hannibal into suspicion with Antiochus. 348   

Chap. 215.  
Politic devises used by Archelaus Methridates, to cause his Soldiers to fight. ibid.   

Chap. 216.  
A politic Stratagem used by Flavius to bring Gracchus into an Ambush. 349   

Chap. 217.  
A policy whereby Hannibal had like to have caused the Romans to have fled. ibid.   

Chap. 218.  
A politic Stratagem used by Marcius to make use of the Carthaginians security. 350   

Chap. 219.  
A politic Stratagem whereby Asdrubal delivered his Army out of a great strait from Nero. ibid.   

Chap. 220.  
How Hannibal by using of a politic Stratagem (in preventing his Horse Troops) gained a victory from Fulvius. 315   

Chap. 221.  
How by the wisdom of Crispinus, the politic Stratagem of Hannibal was prevented. 352   

Chap. 222.  
A policy whereby Scipio had 300. Romans armed and instructed, without the charge of the General. ib.   

Chap. 223.  
A politic Stratagem used by the French, whereby they vanquished Lucius Post-humus and his army. 353   

Chap. 224.  
The policy of Cyrus, how to gain valiant and loyal Commanders in his service. ibid.   

Chap. 225.  
A policy to stir up emulation amongst Soldiers. ibid.   

Chap. 226.  
A policy to be used at the entering of an Enemies' Town; etc. 354   

Chap. 227.  
A politic Stratagem whereby Fabius the Consul took the town of Arpos. ibid.   

Chap. 228.  
A politic Stratagem of Scipio in counterfeiting an entrenchment. ibid.   

Chap. 229.  
A politic Stratagem whereby Hannibal gained a Town of great Consequence under the pretence of bringing in a Wild Boar. 355   

Chap. 230.  
The policy of Zenophon in electing of Hostages. 356   

Chap. 231.  
A policy of Zenophon whereby he deluded his enemy with his small army, causing them to think it to be of a mighty strength ibid.   

Chap. 232.  
A policy used by the Prince of Orange to delude an Enemy from succouring a town 357   

Chap. 233.  
An Imposture used by Sertorius whereby he confirmed his Soldier's valour. ib.   

Chap. 234.  
How a Scottish King by an Imposture caused his soldiers to be valiant, whereby he obtained a victory ibid.   

Chap. 235.  
A politic Imposture used by Boniface whereby he gained the Papacy. 358   

Chap. 236.  
A Politcike Imposture whereby wonderful things have been achieved. ibid.   

Chap. 237.  
A Politic Imposture used by Minos to bring in and establish his laws. ibid.   

Chap. 238.  
A Politic Imposture used at the Interments of Emperors to make the people believe they were highly honoured of God. 359   

Chap. 239.  
A Politic Imposture able to seduce multitudes, by walking upon the water. idid.   

Chap. 240.  
Illusions whereby diverse learned, and judicious men have been deceived. ibid.   

Chap. 241.  
How Spinola at the siege of Breda, gained intelligence of all the proceedings, both in the Prince of Orange's Camp, and in the Town of Breda, 360   

Chap. 242.  
A Stratagem whereby the Prince of Orange had like to have gained Antwerp Castle. 361    

SECT. XIIII. A Description of Engines, and warlike Instruments.  

Chap. 243.  
The description of such Engines and Warlike Instruments as are prevalent in the wars, with the manner of using them; and how to make them. 362   

Chap. 244.  
The use of Granades, how they are made, and charged with Powder, and how they are to be discharged out of a Mortar, or thrown by the hand. 363   

Chap. 245.  
The use of Fire-balls, with the manner of framing them. 365   

Chap. 246.  
The use of Lanterns, and Hollow Plates filled with stones and Bullets for the defending of Breaches. 366   

Chap. 247.  
How to make a certain stone to burn in the water or to kindle fire in rain. ibid.   

Chap. 248.  
Of certain earthen Bottles, filled with a kind of mixture, to be fired, and thrown among the Enemies. 367   

Chap. 249.  
How a Frame of Muskets are to be made and ordered. ●68   

Chap. 250.  
An instrument called a Flail. ibid.   

Chap. 251.  
The use of the Turnpike and how it is framed. 369   

Chap. 252.  
The use of Pallizadoes, and how they are framed. ibid.   

Chap. 253.  
The use of the Calthrope, and of the Spiked Plank. 370.   

Chap. 254.  
The use of the Bome, or Barricadoe. 371.   

Chap. 255.  
Of a second kind of Bonme or Barricadoe to lay over a River. 372   

Chap. 256.  
Duke Albert's invention for the staying the Hollanders Ships at Ostend, that his Batteries might the easier discharge upon them. 373   

Chap. 257.  
The manner of making a Battery to float upon the water. 374   

Chap, 258.  
The manner of Framing the Engine called the Saulcisse. 375   

Chap. 259.  
How to stop up the passage of vessels and Boats in a Channel, or to mend a breach in an arm of a Sea. ibid.   

Chap. 260.  
The manner how to make a Bridge with Cordes to convey Soldiers over a Moat or River. 376   

Chap. 261.  
How to make a firm bridge over any River both for Horse and Men to pass over and transport their Ordnance. 377   

Chap. 262.  
The use of the Leathern Boat and to how make it. 379   

Chap. 263.  
An easy and quick way to cast water with great Scoops. 380   

Chap. 264.  
How to make a Serve to wind up water with the use of it. ibid.   

Chap. 265.  
The Description of an Engine whereby water may be drawn out of any place or depth, or mount any River etc. 382   

Chap. 266.  
The description of an Engine to force water up to a high place, useful to quench fire, etc. 383   

Chap. 267.  
The description of an Engine to cast up water. 384   

Chap. 268.  
How to make water at the foot of a Mountain to ascend to the top of it 385   

Chap. 269.  
How to make a Scaling-ladder of Cordes, which may be carried in a Soldier's pocket, Ibid.   

Chap. 270.  
Of Scaling-ladders framed of wood, and how they are to be used in the Wars. 386.   

Chap. 271.  
The use of Gabions and Baskets for the defence of the Cannoneers and Musquetiers 387   

Chap. 272.  
The use of Cru-wagons, and Small Carts, with the fashion of them. Ibid.   

Chap. 273.  
The use of the Powder-pots in a pitched Battle, with the description of the form of them. 388   

Chap. 274.  
How to make Torches and Candles to burn in any weather. 389   

Chap. 275.  
How to arm Pikes with Wildfire and Pistols for to withstand a Breach. Ibid.   

Chap. 276.  
A device to make a Musket shoot with the same quantity of Powder, half as far again as her vusall shot is 390   

Chap. 277.  
Of the Bow-Pike, and how it is best to be used in the wars. 391   

Chap. 278.  
The description of an Engine whereby the diversity of the strength of Powder may be known. Ibid.   

Chap. 279.  
Of a Bridge made without Bates or Barrels, Cordage, or Timberwork, which transported 4000 men over a great River, 292   

Chap. 280.  
How Caesar made a Bridge over the Rhine, and carried his Army over into Germany, Ibid.   

Chap. 281.  
The description of an Instrument invented by Henry the fifth at the Battle of Agin-court, and since used by the King of Sweden, and by him called a Swines-Pike. 393   

Chap. 282.  
How a Case of Tin is to be made, to carry light Matches in, that the Enemy may not discover them. Ibid.   

Chap. 283.  
How the Venetians did order their Powder, after their Arsnall was burnt. 394     

The Contents of the second Book.  

SECT. XV. THe Office of a General with his Accomplishments.  

Chap. 1.  
The Character of a General, with such excellent properties (both of body and mind) which he ought to be endued withal, declared. 1   

Chap. 2.  
The things which a General is to give order for unto his sub-Officers, with Rules and Precepts, whereby the ablest Generals in former ages have stereed their Warlike course. 2    

SECT. XVI. Rules to be observed by a General in marching his Army.  

Chap. 3.  
Divers Rules and Observations to be used both in marching, and retreiting from the Enemy, whereby confusion may be avoided. 21    

SECT. XVII. Rules to be observed in Quartering, or Encamping an Army.  

Chap. 4.  
How a General is to quarter his Army, with the election of places of greatest security; what Redouts are to be raised upon the passages, and how the Outguards are to be placed, with diverse other observations thereunto belonging. 29   

Chap. 5.  
How the King of Sweden in the late Imperial Wars, used to encamp his Army, with Figures to explain the same. 36   

Chap. 6.  
The Oath of all under-officers, both of Horse and Foot, to be given at the proclaiming of the Articles following, 41    

SECT. XVIII. Articles and Military Laws to be observed in the Wars.  

Chap. 7.  
Divers Articles and Martial Laws, whereby an Army is to be regulated, and governed, both in Camp and Garrison, 42    

SECT. XIX. Rules and Observations to be used before Battle.  

Chap. 8.  
Divers Premonitions and Observations for a General to take notice of before the pitching of a Battle. 55    

SECT. XX. Rules and Observations to be used in time of Fight.  

Chap. 9  
Divers Observations which both Generals and Officers must make use of in the time of fight or skirmish. 61    

SECT. XXI. Rules and Observations to be used after fight.  

Chap. 10.  
Divers Rules and Observations to be used after a Battle is either won or lost. 65    

SECT. XXII. The manner of Framing of Battles.  

Chap. 11.  
An Excellent strong form of Imbattelling an Army, consisting of 26000 Foot, and 4000 Horse. 67   

Chap. 12.  
A second Figure showing a very strong Form of Imbattelling, and very apt for the drawing of an Enemy into a Stratagem, 71   

Chap. 14.  
A very strong Form of Imbattelling, 10000 Foot, and 2000 Horse, very proper to be used in the Champion, the Enemy exceeding in strength both in Horse and Foot. 73   

Chap. 15.  
A fourth Figure of Imbattelling, consisting of 20000 Foot, and 2000 Horse. 74   

Chap. 16.  
A fifth way of Imbattelling an Army consisting of 12000 Foot, and 4000 Horse etc. 76   

Chap. 17.  
Th● sixth way of Imbattelling an Army consisting of 12000 Foot, and 4000 Horse, etc. 78   

Chap. 18.  
A seventh way of Imbattelling an Army consisting of 15000 Foot, and 5000 Horse etc. 79   

Chap. 19  
The eighth form of Im●attelling an Army consisting of 5000 Foot, and 1000 Horse, etc. 81   

Chap. 20.  
A Description of the ninth Figure how to frame a Battle for Stratagem, etc. 83   

Chap. 21.  
A tenth Form of Imbattelling an Army consisting of 12000 Foot, and 4000 Horse, used by Henry the fourth of France etc. 84   

Chap. 22.  
The eleventh Form of Imbattelling an Army of 30000 Foot, and 6000 Horse etc. 86   

Chap. 23.  
The twelfth form of Imbattelling of 12000 Foot and 3000. Horse, partly imitating Mounsieur Bellay in his military discipline.   

Chap. 24.  
A form of Imbattelling of 15000 Foot and 2000 Horse, etc.   

Chap. 25.  
The use of Maniples of shot, with a general discourse of the Lightarmed. 92   

Chap. 26.  
Divers observations of the Ancient Grecicians in framing of Battles. 95   

Chap. 27.  
The Order and Rules which are to be obser-served by Going-Paces to know any state or piece of ground, how to embattle either Horse or Foot according to the proportion thereof. 98      

THE MUTABILITY OF FLOURISHING KINGDOMS.  


CHAP I.  
There is no Nation ever did, or ever shall possess a perpetual peace: It is good therefore in time of Peace, to provide for War.  
THe Hieroglyphic of happy Peace in this transitory World, may very well be expressed by the splendent progress of the Sun, which hath both his Summer and his Winter Solstice: The one ushering in the most pleasant Spring, The other pushing forwards the Crest fall'n Autumn. The one of them spreads the fair green Carpet on the Table of the Earth; the other (as if the Banquet were ended) withdraws, and takes away again: Thus fareth it between these two opposites, Peace, and War. Peace, like the Summer Solstice (where she goes) makes all things look buxom, for she herself (if you please to have her described) is a pure and unspotted Virgin, in whose forehead never appeared any one frowning wrinkle; she is the Mother of learning, and the Nurse of Arts: A Daughter of as royal a descent as any; 
Pax Dei. Col. 3. 13.  for she hath God for her Father, and she hath a Royal Mother also, even true and unfeigned Love; a virtue beyond comparison. Alack, that this Royal Virgin, (whose presence makes all things prosper) is of no longer durance amongst men: but it is decreed, all things below are subject to mutability. The Winter Solstice must succeed the Summer, and War must follow Peace; the Table must not always be covered, a time of withdrawing will come at last. For proof of which, le's take a survey of some of those Kingdoms which in former ages have most flourished in this World; and by their mutability, judge whether it be possible for any Kingdom, how strong and settled so ever, to perpetuate Peace unto itself: And it will not be amiss to begin at the golden head of that Image which Nabuchadnezzar saw in his dream, Dan. 2. Prefiguring himself and the Kingdom he ruled over, even the Kingdom of Assyria.   

CHAP. II.  
Of the Monarchy of the Assyrians, and the Wars thereof.  
THis Kingdom of the Ayssrians, was without question the strongest and best settled Kingdom that ever was before, or ever followed after it, in succeeding Ages: And therefore prefigured by a head of Gold. It is marvellous what Historians report of this Kingdom; but because some in these times, do doubt of the truth of their reports, I will point you only to that which the sacred Oracles of God avouch, which no man can doubt of. For the King himself, he was every way renowned, Rex Regum, a King of Kings, and that of the Lords own establishing. For God had given him a Kingdom, power, strength, and glory. Dan. 2. 37. For the amplitude of the Kingdom, it was not bounded within lesser limits than the Confines of the then inhabited World, Dan. 2. 38. and wheresoever the Children of men dwell, the Beasts of the Field, and the Fowls of the Heaven hath he given into thy hands. If you please to compare it with that famous Monarchy of the Medes and Persians which succeeded it: You shall find, that as the Persians were after it in time, so also in Power, and Nobleness, Dan. 2. 39 And after you shall arise another Kingdom inferior to you. Here now is a Monarchy, one would think so strongly seated, as that a face of War should not dare to look upon it: yet did it run many hazards, and endure many changes by dint of the sword, and that at several times also. And first in the days of that lusty Virago, Semiramis. She not content to defend the limits of her Kingdom left her by the conquest of her deceased Husband, was the first that ever with sword in hand ventured into the Indies, quo praeter illam & Alexandrum magnum nemo itravit. And this happened in the days of Staurobates, who met her in the confines of his Kingdom: and though he suffered loss in the first shock, yet renewing his Forces, renewed also the Battle, fought with her hand to hand, wounded her sore; and at last, forced her over the River Indus: where multitude of her Soldiers (the Bridge being broken) came to their ends.  
But this wound was afterwards well healed up, and the Kingdom well settled again in a long lasting Peace, which endured the Reigns of above Thirty Kings; until at last came Sardanapalus, who was Vir muliere corruptior. Into whose presence, when as Arbactus his Lieutenant in Media with much ado was admitted; he found him spinning (more like a good housewife, than a Royal King) amongst a company of tender Ladies, himself in softness excelling them all: At which sight, the great Captain disdaining, and stomacking that so many valiant men should be subject to such an estiminate King; and that those who were used to handle swords and spears should obey him, whose hands were enured to nothing but a distaff; he comes away with shame, and makes report to his fellows of that ignominious sight. Negans se ei parere posse; qui sic faeminam malit esse quam virum: Forthwith a conspiracy is made, and War denounced against Sardanapalus: which when he had notice of, he does not like a man prepare to defend himself: but as Women which are afraid of death, Primo latebras 〈◊〉, first looks about where he may hide himself; but finding no remedy there, at last, with a few, and those disordered Troops, and untrayned, he comes to battle, and being with much ease overthrown, he withdraws himself into his Palace, and there ●ires himself and all his Riches, Hoc solo imitatus virum, as some Historians says of him: And so the Kingdom was translated to Arbactus, or rather divided between him and the Lieutenant of Babylon Belochus, who is as some think called Pull King of Assyria, in the sacred Scriptures, 2. Kings 15. 19 In whose Posterity the Sceptre continued for some few generations following, until Senacherib his great Grandchild, who was betrayed and slain by two of his own Sons, 
2. Kings. 19 37.  to wit by Adramalech, and Sharezer: But Esarhaddon his Son, who governed the Kingdom in his Father's absence, stepped into the Chair of Estate, yet could he not possess it without much trouble. For first these two Brethren that had slain their Father, put themselves also in Arms against their Brother, hoping by this means to share equally with him. This trouble amongst the brethren, occasioned Merodath, which the Scripture calls Merodach Baladan, Isa. 39 1. Lieutenant of Babylon to rebel against Esarhaddon: and first drawing (partly by fair means, partly by threats) the people about Babylon to side with him: forthwith he defieth his Master; and finally, in the Twelve year of his Reign, utterly overthrew him: and so joined the Empire of the Assyrians, unto the City of Babylon. In the Posterity of this Merodach, did the Monarchy continue for three descents: To wit Nabuchadnezzar, Evill-merodach, and Belshazzar; in whose days, Darius the Mede, called by Historians Chaxares son of Astyages, and Cyrus the Persian, Grandchild to the aforesaid Astyages, subdued the Assyrians, and translated the Monarchy to the Medes and Persians.   

CHAP. III.  
Of the Monarchy of the Medes and Persians, and the Wars thereof.  
THis of the Medes and Persians, was a very strong Kingdom also, though inferior to the former: Under whose Dominion, there were no less than 127. Provinces, whose confines reached from India, to Ethiopia. Yet was not this Kingdom for all the greatness, without War and trouble. Cyrus himself raising an Army in Persia, 
Ester 1. 1.  assailed his Grandfather in Media, and overthrew his Army, under the conduct of his General Harpagus: but the King would not be discouraged for the loss of one Battle, but Arms the second time, and leads them himself into the Field, where he divides them into two Battles; Commanding the hindmost, that if they did perceive any of the foremost Bands to recoil, they should slay them like enemies: and declaring to the foremost, that unless they did carry the victory, Non minus fortes etiam post terga inventuros, quam a frontibus viros: a stratagem that put such hardy courage into his foremost Soldiers, as that with great resolution, they beat back the Persians foremost troops, which being perceived of the Women, their Mothers and Wives met them flying homewards, and earnestly entreated them to return to battle: but they delaying, Sublata veste (as justin says) obscana corporis ostendunt, rogantes in uteros matrem velint refugere: With which correction they were so ashamed, as that they returned into the Battle more furious than before: Et facta impessione, quos fugiebant fugere cumpellunt, and so Astyages was taken Prisoner, and his Crown set upon his Grandchildes' head.  
But for all this, Cyrus could not perpetuate his own, and Kingdom's peace: for the Cities of the Medes rebelled against him: the Babylonians made War upon him, and to strengthen their party, drew into their League Crassus the Potent King of Lydia, Cujus opes et divitiae, insignes ea tempestate erant: so that if he had not been a Soldier, his Kingdom had been dissolved before it had been very well settled. But through his prudence and valour, he broke through all these difficulties, quieted the Rebellion, subdued the Babylonians, and overcame the Lydian their Auxiliarie, who he used with such Lenity, as that thereby he politicly avoided a most dangerous War with the greeks, the most entire friends of Crassus. For as justin says, Tantus Crassi amor apud omnes urbes erat: re passurus Cyrus grave bellum Greciae fuerit, si quid in Crassum Crudelius consuluisset: This Cyrus afterwards was slain, and his whole Army roughted by Tomaris Queen of the Massageteses: So fickle a thing is Peace and Prosperity in this World, seem it never so firmly to be settled and grounded. After the decease of Cyrus (or rather before) for when Cyrus was gone against the Messagetes, Cambyces in his Father's absence was declared King: But for his cruelty, Almighty God, cut him short by a grievous wound in his thigh, made by the falling of his own sword out of the scabbard, as he was mounting on Horseback: He was no sooner dead, but one of the Magis, by name Comaris, or as others say, Praxaspis, thinking to transfer the Sceptre into his own Line, sets up his own Brother Oropastes, under the name of Smerdis, the deceased King's Brother: which he himself by the King's Commandment had formerly slain: Erat enim oris et corporis liniamentis persimilis. But this cozenage was quickly found out by the policy of Othanes one of the Nobility; for this mocking wanted ears: which Smerdis the King's Brother, and Heir apparent to the Crown did not, had he been alive upon this discovery. A conspiracy is made by Seven of the Nobility, and the Kingdom delivered from the slavery of the Imposture; he and his Abettors being slain. In whose stead, Darius' Son of Histaspis surnamed Artaxerxes, was saluted King, upon occasion of the neighing of his Horse: For so it was determined that those of the Nobility who had freed their Country from servitude: meeting in the Suburbs next morning on Horseback, he whose Horse first neighed, should be saluted King: 
Chrori●●r Carionis Lib. 2.  and this they did to avoid contention amongst them, which otherwise were equal. This Darius as some think, was that great King Aha●uerus, who put away his Wife Vasti, by Herodotus called Attasha, Daughter to King Cyrus, and married Ester (or Aristona as Herodotus calleth her) kinswoman of Mordecai the 〈◊〉. This mighty Prince, whose strength and power is described largely in the book of Hester, could not live without War and trouble: The Babylonians rebelled against him, and had he not had a Zophirus to gain his Master Babylon, lost his own Nose and Fares: 
〈…〉  which occasioned the King on a time (having a Pomegranate in his hand) to say, Se non optare majorem Thesaurum, ullum quam ut tot haberet Zopyrus, quot grava sint illius pomi. This Darius sought to incorporate Macedonia, the next bordering Kingdom, with his own Territories, and the rather, because he heard that there were most rich veins of mettle: And for this purpose sent Messengers to Amintus of Macedon, who required, Vt terram et aquam traderet Dario. Amintus fearing the Persian power, answered mildly, and invited the Ambassadors to a Banquet, during which, they behaved themselves laciviously towards the noble Ladies that were placed between them at the Table for their greater honour. Which thing moved both Amintus the old King, and Alexander his young Son to anger: Whereupon Amintus at his Son's entreaty, departeth as it were to take some rest: But young Alexander first for a while feigned mirth, and afterwards craves leave for the Lady's absence, for some little time, promising their speedy return. But being dismissed, he commanded so many Noble young Men to put on the Lady's garments, and secretly to carry poniard underneath them, with this charge: that when the Persians began to toy, they with their weapons should stab them: which charge afterwards was performed to purpose, Et lasciviae ac potulantiae poenas legati justus dederunt.  
After this the jones by the persuasion of one Istiaeus fell from him, and with the help of the Athenians they burned the City Sardis: But they being overcome in a Sea Battle, and the Sedition pacified with some difficulty; he turneth about, and turns all his fury against the Athenians their assistants: 
Centum millia peditum & de●●m millia equitum Car●on. Lib. 2.  being further urged hereunto by Hippias Son of Pisistratus the Tyrant, whom the Athenians had banished. Whereupon, Darius sent against the Athenians a very great Army, under the leading of the said Hippias: 
Sexcenta millia justin. Lib▪ 2.  Against them marcheth Miltiades the Athenian General, by whose prudent Conduct, and the Soldier's valour, they were routed in the Field of Marathon, and leaving behind them Two hundred thousand of there men, with great astonishment they fled to their Ships, where the proper valour of one Cynaegirus an Athenian Soldier appeared; for he not wearied with innumerable slaughter in the Battle, lays hold with his right hand on one of the flying Ships, and would not let her go, till both were dismembered from his valiant arms: and then also Veluti rabida fera dentibus demicaverit. To withstand this great Army, Miltiades had only 10000 well trained Athenians, and 1000 Plataecuses Auxiliaries: The difference being so great, it was needful that one should exceed in skill and valour, as much as the other did in number: and truly it is marvellous what a skilful leader may do, with so many valorous and well trained Soldiers, such as these were; for they were all like Cynaegirus. justin says of them, In eo praelio tanta virtus singularium fuit, ut cujus laus prima esset difficile judicium videretur. Such valour as this, must needs astonish the Cravant Persians. But some report that in the Athenian Front, there were also terrible noises heard, and terrible sights seen, which the Athenians called Species paves, which affrighted the Persians so mightily, as that presently they fled: and hence it is, that we say when one is suddenly affrighted, that he is struck with a Panic terror.  
After this Darius died, and at such time as he was preparing more forces to renew the Wars in Greece: After him succeeded his Son Xerxes, who was scarce warm in his Royal estate, ere he was solicited by Mardonius his great Captain and Counsellor, to follow the Grecian War, for which his Father had made so great preparation: and the young King desirous of glory, yields to the motion, prepares his Army, which consisted 1000000 men; whereof 700000 were Persians, the rest Auxiliaries, an Army great enough to have overcome the World, had they but had a Captain but Hui● tanto agmins dux defuit, says justin: and he gives a good reason for it in my conceit: Ipse enim primus in●uga, postremus in praelio semper visus est, in periculis ti●●dus fit ubi metus abesset instatus, a very good description of a Coward; he flies in the Front, and ●ights in the Rear, in danger, fearful, but out of it, too insolent and proud: such was this great Commander, and his success also was there after; for within less than two years, he had no less than four shameful overthrows, two by Water, and two by Land. The first fight by Water, was near Armissium in Thessal●. And about the same time was the second Battle fought also at Land, in the narrow place which for the hot Springs there are called Ther mop●lae: Here had Leonides King of Sparta settled himself with 300 Spartans', 400 Thebans, and about 3000 other Grecian Soldiers, to check the proceedings of this great Army. Xerxes' scorning their number; commands those only whose kindred were slain at the Battle of Marrahon in his Father's days, to assault the strait passage which Leonides kept upon the hill, qui dum ulcissi suos quaerunt, principium ●ladis fu●re. But other troops being appointed to second these; a great slaughter is made for three days space. Upon the fourth day, when it was discovered to Leo●●d●s that 20000 of the enemies had gotten the top of the hill, than he exhorted his associates to reserve themselves for the further service of their Country: and he with his Lacedaemon's, would try the fortune of that place: Whereupon all departed save his own 300 Spartans', 400 Thebans, and a few of the Thespiences, a maniple in respect of so great a multitude as did oppose them. Yet were they resolved to dye with their King upon the place, or to eternise their names with an incomparable victory. To these the King adresseth his speech on this wise: Noble Countrymen, our numbers are so unequal, that however we fight, yet must we fall, this I suppose is the resolution of you all: otherwise you would not have stayed the hazard of a Battle, where is such disparrity; see therefore that you show not more valour in your staying for the Battle, then in your fight in it: for the ordering of which, I am resolved not to expect, till we be enclosed by our enemies: but so soon as the night approacheth, we will fall resolutely within the bowels of their Camp▪ which rests without fear of our small numbers; for never can undaunted Soldiers die more bravely, then in the Tents of their daring Foes.  
Which speech they took with great alacrity and cheerfulness, and in sign thereof, immediately addressed themselves to their Arms, and then did Six or Seven Hundred men at most, break into the Camp of 500000 of their enemies: and having once got entrance, forthwith beat towards the Pavilion of King Xerxes: Aut cum illo, aut si oppressi essent in ipsius potissimum sede morituri. A tumult is raised in the Camp upon their entrance: and the Spartans' missing of the King at his Tent, ran like lightning through every corner, beating and throwing down every thing that stood in their way, as if they knew they fought not for the victory, but to revenge their own deaths: The Battle lasted from the beginning of the night, until the great part of the next day were spent, and at last, Non victi, sed vincendo fatigati inter ingentes stratorum hostium catervas occiderunt.  
After their fall who were to keep the straits, a fair passage was opened for the Army into Greece: but Themistocles with 378 Sail of the Grecian Navy being at Sea; Xerxes thought it was meet, first to try of what force they were, before he went any farther: wherefore he addressed himself to his Sea forces. How great they were I cannot certainly say, but take the number as justin gives them, Naves quoque decies centum millia numero habuisse dicitur: 
justin. Lib. 2.  Here are now as great odds at Sea, as before at Land: wherefore it behoved Themistocles the Athenian Admiral, to be both politic and valorous, and truly he was wanting to his Countrymen in neither: For so soon as he perceived the Persians bend for a Sea-fight; he does within him lay to work their defeat: which he does first, by getting advantage of the place where they were to fight, which was in the straits near the Island Salamis, lest they should be encompassed with the multitude of their enemies. Having gained the advantage of the place, next he sought to weaken them, in that thing wherein they had most advantage of him, which was in number. To this purpose he solicited the jonians, who were now in aid of Xerxes, to come over to his party, and those men were fit indeed to be wrought upon. For when as the Persian came against them in a former War, the Athenians had sided with them against this King's Father; which thing alone wrought this displeasure against the Athenians, and the rest of the Grecians: wherefore Themistocles wrote to them in these words. What fury possesseth you (oh ye jonians) and what an odious crime do ye commit, in waging Battle against them, that have in times past, been both your friends and founders, and of late also the revenger of your wrongs? and was it indeed for this purpose that we built your Walls that they might preserve you, who strive to ruin and destroy ours? what cause I pray you had there been, for Darius first, and now for Xerxes, to make War on us, but only this; we would not forsake you Rebels, when he desired to chastise you? but 'tis no matter, do you but only this, come from them to us; or if that be too full of danger, then when the Battle is begun, do but recoil, do but slacken your Oars, and ye may safely depart away.  
But while these things were a working at Sea, his Forces at Land sacked Plateae, and Thespiae, two famous Cities of Boeotia, and Athens on the Sea-coast, but all of them forsaken by their Inhabitants: and behold his spleen, quoniam ferro non poterat in homines, in aedificia igne grassatur: yea, which was more (as if he had Warred not only with the greeks, but their gods also) He destroyed the Temple of Apollo at Delphos so famous through the World. These things startled the Princes of those Cities which were joined with the Athenians, they knew not how soon their Cities might run the same hazard: wherefore they began to consult of their departure, for the defence of their own Territories. Which thing so soon as Themistocles perceived, lest their forces should be diminished by the departure of their Associates: he gives Xerxes to understand, by a faithful servant of his own; that now at this instant he might easily intercept all the force and flower of Greece, contracted into one place, who if they were severed (as presently they were like to do) it would be to his greater labour and cost to hunt after them in several places: and by this deceit, he necessitated the King to give the signal of Battle: and the Grecians busied with the approaches of the King, with their joint forces entertained the Skirmish. While the Battle remained somewhat doubtful, the jonians according to the advice of Themistocles, withdrew themselves; and their flight dashed the leaden courages of the Persians, so that presently they turned their backs and fled. Xerxes' being at his wits end at this overthrow, Mardonius his great Captain and Counsellor, adviseth him in his own Person to hasten home, lest the fame of this unlucky battle move sedition there: and tells him, that if he will leave but 300000 of his choice men, with them he will either tame Greece to his Master's glory, or yield to the Adversary without his ignominy. This advice did Xerxes like well enough, wherefore he delivered 300000 of his Soldiers to Mardonius, and with the rest, he prepared to go back into his Kingdom: Which the Grecians perceiving, resolved to break the bridge that he had built at Abydo●; that so his passage being cut off, he might perish with his Army: or at least being driven to despair, might sue for peace.  
But here again did the wisdom of Themistocles appear, for fearing that the enemy when he was cooped up, and so necessitated to fight, would turn his cowardice into valour: adviseth the greeks, that they had enemies too many in the Country, and it was not convenient to increase their number by stopping those that would be gone: but seeing he could not prevail with his advice, he sent his servant a second time to Xerxes to acquaint him with the resolution of the greeks; which when Xerxes knew, in a shameful affright, with a few of his servants only, he fled in all haste to Abydos; commanding his Captain speedily to March after him with their Troops: but coming to Hellesponte, and finding the Bridge broken with the Tempests of the forepassed Winter. He ferried over alone in a poor Fi●herboate, an admirable spectacle to behold: he whose followers the earth groaned to bear but a year ago, is glad to fly now without one to attend him. Cujus introitus in Greciam quam terribilis, tam turpis ac foedus discessus fuit.  
After that dishonourable flight of Xerxes, Mardonius his General followed the warfare at land: Olinthus was the first Town he sat down before, and it he took by Assault. After this he laboured to reconcile the Athenians to the King his Master, promising them restitution for the loss of their City which was burned: but after he perceived they would not part with their Liberty and freedom at any rate, he set fire to those buildings they had begun to re-edify, and so Marched into Boeotia, where the main Army of the Greeks was inquartered, consisting of a 100000 men; there they came to blows near the City Plataeae, which was not far from Thebes: Sed fortuna Regis cum duce mutata non est, For Mardonius was there utterly overthrown, himself slain by a common Soldier, his Tents, stuffed with the King's Treasure, seized on; and finally Greece freed from the Persian War. The Athenians would not lose the benefit of this victory, but with their Sea forces sailed up the Hellesponte, and by Assault took the Town of Sestos from the Persians, and sacked it. After this they turned home, built and fortified their City; and joining them with other Cities of Greece, under the conduct of Pausanius and Aristides they took Cypria and Byzantium frym the Persian.  
Thus you see this great Monarch, who had so many Millions of men under his dominions, could not live in Peace; yea, and for want of good order in his Army suffered many shameful overthrows: which together with some other iniquities of his own, brought him in contempt with his own Subjects: who before was a terror to other Nations, and by and by after, he was slain by his Lieutenant Artabanus. His Successor was Artaxerxes, 
Chron. Cairo. Lib. 2.  who was also called Longimanus: quia dextra longior fuit quam sinistra. There is not any mention in History, of any great trouble that happened in this King's Reign, after that he had put to death Artabanus and his sons, who were the murderers of his Predecessor Xerxes: and had laid their plots also against him, had it not been in a fit time discovered by one Baccabassus, a man well content with the present government. This Prince having Reigned peaceably 37. years, expired: and left his Sceptre to Darius Nothus his Sister's Husband: who in like manner governed the Kingdom peaceably 19 years, and then yielded it up to his eldest Son Artaxerxes Mnemon, whose Reign was somewhat troublesome, with the great Spirit of his younger Brother Cyrus, to whom his Father had by will assigned the government of Lydia and jonia, (where he was in his Father's days Lieutenant) but without the title of King. But this gave no content to the high spirit of Cyrus, who aimed at far greater matters: wherefore he began first privately to make preparation against the King his Brother, which being disclosed to the King; 
justin. Lib. ●▪  he sent for Cyrus, who dissembled the matter, and pleaded not guilty: yet for all that, the King bound him in golden fetters, deprived him of liberty: and had done so by his life also in matter prohibuisset: But afterwards obtaining liberty, he was so much enraged against his Brother by this disgrace, as that he began openly to threaten him with War. And for that purpose he gathered a great Army out of Asia the less, and 10000 Auxiliaries also out of Greece, with which he marched against his Royal Brother, beyond the River Euphrates. Artaxerxes was not unmindful of these affairs, but like a wise and a valiant man, prepared forces to bid his Brother battle: When they came to blows, Cyrus wounded his Brother, and forced part of his Army to give ground: but being of a hot and haughty spirit, and with weak Attendants, beating to far within his Brother's Troops; at last he was slain by his Brothers Guard. Upon the news of his death, the whole Army took the Rout, save only the 10000 greeks, who in despite of Artaxerxes, departed whole away, and came safe into their own Country. After the death of Cyrus, the fair Lady Alpasia was taken in his Tents: on whom Artaxerxes (when he beheld her) set his affections: and this Lady was the cause of a new insurrection; for being equally beloved of the Father and the Son: the Son petitioned to his Father for her, and had her granted: But the Father afterwards condoling his own loss, took her away again: Whereupon the Son conspired with one Terebathus, that they two with some armed Troops, should on a certain day, break into the King's Closet and slay him; but this plot being discovered, the King escaped the Treason: Terebathus and his Troops, were slain by the King's Guard; and Darius the King's Son apprehended as a Traitor, and adjudged to death by the Council of Princes, before whom his Father would have him stand for his trial: after his death, also the King himself languished and died, and appointed for his successor, Othus the youngest of those three Sons that he had by his lawful Queen. Othus Reigned about Twenty Six years, more like a Tyrant then a King: for he filled his Royal Palace with the blood of Princes, his own kindred: Nulla non sanguinis, non sexus, non aetatis misericordia perm tus: and for his cruelty was slain afterwards by the Prince Bagoas, who thought to have seated himself in the Royal Chair: but having not power enough to effect that, he Proclaims Arsames Son of Othus King, who he also slew afterwards: Metuens filium propter necem paternam: And here was an end of all the Stock of Cyrus, and the end of this Monarchy followed about Six years after. For when Arsames was slain, Bagoas the murderer repaired to Codomamius, who for his virtue and valour against the enemy, was first made Ruler of Armenia, and now King of Persia: After the obtaining of which, he changed his Name; and is commonly known by the name of Darius Ultimus, 
Dan. 11. 2.  a Prince nothing inferior to any of his Predecessors: And yet in this King happened, the subversion of this mighty Kingdom. Against him first of all Philip King of Macedon (being elected General of the Grecians) took Arms, 
●●ren Carionis Lib. 2. justin. Lih. 9  and sent his Forces into Asia, under the conduct of Farmenio, Amynters, and Attalus: against them Darius took Arms, and sent his Army; over which he placed Memnon of Rhodes an expert Soldier as General. But while these Wars were managed abroad by their substitutes, Philip himself was slain at home by one Pausanias a Noble Macedonian, upon this occasion: Pausanias was abused in his tender age through the lust of Attalus; which the young Man taking in ill part, complained to Philip, and craved justice against the offender, but was put off in derision; and the Malefactor honoured with a General's place in the Wars. Whereupon Pausanius turns his anger against Philip, and as justin says, Vltionem quam adversario non poterat, ab iniquo judice exegit.  
But the Persian War was not given over upon the King's death; for Alexander the great, 
Plut. invita Alexquando omnes opes suas inter 〈◊〉 distribu●ss●t, hic pe●d●● dicent●, 〈◊〉 Rex reliquam erit? spes s●la respondit.  his Son and Heir, after that he had quieted the Cities of Greece, which the Persians politicly had stirred up to rebel against him, by that means hoping to divert the War out of Asia: Having collected and shipped his Army, goes in his own Person into Asia, and divides his Patrimony in Europe amongst his friends, saying Sibi Asiam sufficere.  
His Army consisting of 32000 foot, and 4500 Horse: he wafted over in 182 Ships: An admirable thing that he durst attempt the conquest of the greatest Monarchy of the World with so small a number; 
In omni praelio non ta●● 〈◊〉; et vir●●●●docta: quam ars & excr●●tum solent traeslare victorum vegetius Lib. 1.  but mark who they were, not young striplings, prim● flore aetatis: but veterares plerosque, old beaten Soldiers for the most part, such as had borne Arms under his Father and Uncles: they were through their long experience, Non solum millites, sed magistri militiae: not only Warriors, but masters of the War: there was never a Captain which was less than Sixty years of age: Vt si principia castrorum cerneres, Senatum se alicujus priscae reipublicae vider diceres: and they all resembled the King for courage, for they minded nothing but victory, and after that, the enjoying the riches of the Orient. Against these Darius led his Army into the field, consisting of 600000 men; in whose valour and fortitude, he had such confidence, as that he neglected to take any advantage which was by policy to be acquired: Affirmans suis occulta consilia victoriae furtivae non convenire; and upon this conceit he refused to prevent his enemies landing, but received them into the very heart of his Kingdom: Gloriosius ratus repellere Bellum quam non admittere: which thing, though it showed a magnanimous and great spirit, yet it argues weakness of understanding: for truly so victory may be gained, it sticks not whether it be obtained by valour, 
〈◊〉 ●acilius re●●●●tur qu●m expellantur. 〈◊〉.  or policy: the safest therefore for him, had been to have prevented their landing if possibly he could; for enemies are more easily repelled from the Coasts, than expelled after they have got footing. But this out of a Military bravery he neglected, and it cost him no less than the loss of the battle, and afterwards of his life and Kingdom.  
The first battle between the two Kings was in the field of Adrastia, 
Plut. in vita Alexand.  where the Persians were vanquished: Non minus arte Alexandri, quam virtute Macedonium: After this, Alexander fought another Battle with Rhaesaces and Spithradates, two of Darius his Captains at the River Granicus: quos jam non tam armis quam terrore nominis sui vicit: and in this encounter, both the Persian chieftains were slain: Rhaesaces by Alexander's own hand, and Spithradates by the hand of Clitus. After their overthrow, (having yet no more to do in the Field) he fell to taking in of Cities, Sardis, Miletus, Helicarnassus, and all such places as bordered upon them, were taken in: and so coming through Pamphilia, he tamed the Inhabitants of of Pisidia and Phrigia. At last he took the City of Gordis, which above all other he desired to take, not for the spoil, but because he had heard, that there in the Temple of jupiter was kept the consecrated yoke of Gordians Wain, whose bindings and knots whosoever could unloose, Eum tota Asia Regnaturum, antiqua oracula cecivisse: these knots when he could not unloose them with his fingers, he cut them in pieces with his sword: and truly there was no knot so hard, but with his sword he could undo it to make way for his conquest of Asia. While he was in this City, he received tidings of Darius his approach: wherefore with great speed he passed over the mount Taurus, and came to Tarsus; with which extraordinary March, his body being over heat, he cast himself into the River Cydnus, whose virtues being extremely cold, cast him into a sudden and almost irrecoverable disease: but having with much ado recovered health, he marched forwards to meet his enemy, who was coming against him with a very great Army. When they were met, 
justin▪ 400000. Plutarch in vita Alexander, decies centena militum millia.  Alexander riding about his Troops, encouraged the Illirians and Thracians with the show of riches, the Grecians he inflamed with the memory of former Battles, and the ancient hatred between them and the Persians: He likewise tells his Macedonians of there conquest of Europe and Asia now so much desired; boasting that they had not their matches in the World, and if now only they would show themselves men, this Battle should be the end of their toil and labour, and the very pride of their glory and honour. Neither was Dariuses all this while idle, but like a good Captain, rid about his Troops ordering and exhorting them to be mindful of the ancient glory of the Persians, and of the honour of their Empire which they had received of the immortal gods: Then joining Battle with great courage on both sides, for a while what the success would be was doubtful: but both the Kings were wounded, and Darius after his hurt fled; and then were the Persians slaughtered on all sides until they fled as their King did before. After this Battle, there were found in the Persian Tents, much gold and other riches; and together with many other noble prisoners there were taken, the Mother, Wife, and two Daughters of Darius. This victory did well-near settle the Crown upon Alexander's head; for after this he took Babylon, and the royal City of Susa, where he got inestimable riches: and being at a feast one day under the guilded roof of the Royal Palace, he said; Then have I obtained the fruit of my labour, when I can feast so magnificently within the Palace of proud King Xerxes. After this he besieged the City of Tyre, and within the Month took it: And from thence passed forwards against the jews, 
josephus' Lib. 11.  with whom he was displeased, for that they refused to assist him in the siege of Tyre: 
Ant. jud. cap. 8.  but the jews now fearing the King's displeasure; jaddus the High Priest that he might pacify the King's mind, met him upon the way clad in his Priests vestures, and accompanied with a great number of Priests and Elders, desiring the King's favour: There did Alexander alight from his Horse, and in a reverend manner salutes the High Priest, promising Peace: at which sight his Captains wondering, asked why he received the Priests so honourably: To whom he answered, that in Macedonia before the beginning of the Wars, he had seen one habited in the like vestures, calling him into Asia, and commanding him to make War with the Persians, reaching forth his right hand towards him, as if he would be his guide: and seeing the Priest in that similitude, he thought God had some special regard of this People, and that he himself was assisted by that God whom they served: and therefore he resolved to be merciful unto them and to show them favour, From hence did Alexander March into Egypt, which he took without resistance: here he visited the Temple of jupiter Hammon, 
justin. Lib. 11.  whereby the Priest (whom before for that purpose he had corrupted) he was styled Hamonius filius: from hence he returned into Syria, where he received letters from Darius concerning the redemption of his Captives; for whom he promised to pay a great sum of money: Sed Alexander in pretium captivarum regnum, omne non pecuniam petit: Afterward Darius sends a second Embassage, proffering him his Daughter in marriage, and with her a portion of his Kingdom for a Dowry: To this Alexander answered, that as yet he had proffered him nothing but that which was his own by right of conquest; but if he were desirous of Peace, he must come and render himself and Kingdom to the mercy of the Conqueror. Darius now perceiving that all hope of Peace was taken away; begins to leavy his third Army; resolving to try if with his sword in hand he might obtain that, which by Ambassadors and treaties he could not: With this new Army, consisting of 500000 Horse and Foot: he hunts after his Adversary, but in his March he heareth of the death of his Wife in Childbed, and how Alexander in whose custody she was, had exceedingly bemoaned her loss, and given her honourable burial, agreeable to her estate and condition: Idque eum non amoris, sed humanitatis is causa fecisse: which when Darius understood, he ingeniously confessed that now he was truly conquered, 
Ab hoc enim quis non ●●●it 〈…〉.  when after so many bloody Battles, his enemy now at last would overcome him with courtesy, but herein he said was his comfort, St vincers nequeat quod a tali potissimum vinceretur. After this Darius writes the third letter to Alexander, rendering him many thanks for his courtesy to those that were his Captives, offering him also his other Daughter in marriage, and the greater part of his Kingdom, even to the banks of Euphrates for her Dowry, and 30000 Talents, for the redemption of the Captives. To this Alexander answered, that it was a thing too too vain to receive thanks from an enemy; neither had he himself done any thing to flatter his Adversary; that which he had done, was out of the greatness of his mind: which, as it had taught him to contend against the force of his foes, so not to triumph over their calamities: neither would he have Darius to think him so simple, as to suffer the victory to be taken from him, with hope of a marriage; No, no, he would have Darius know, that there was no way so safe as to come yield to his mercy: which if he did, he would promise in the word of a Prince, freely to bestow upon Darius all those things that now he proffered unto him, upon this condition, Si secundus fili, non par habere velit: For as the World could not be governed by two Suns, so neither by two Kings with any safety: therefore either that day Darius must prepare himself to yield, or the next day bring his Army into the Plains, where he should find the like entertainment that he had before.  
The next day both of them took the Field near unto Arbela, and were ranged in view one of the other: The Kings on both sides rid about their Troops, exhorting them to demean themselves like Soldiers in the Battle. Darius' assured his Persians, that if a strict account of his own and Adversaries number were taken, he was ten for one: On the contrary Alexander admonished the Macedonians, that they should not be moved neither with the enemy's multitude, nor with their Giantlike bodies, no, nor with the glittering of their Armour; only they should do well to remember that twice before they had encountered them, and doubtless in this third Battle they should not find in them greater courages then at first: for having already twice put them to flight, and that with a great slaughter, the sorrowful remembrance thereof he knew would much daunt them, who had no overplus of courage before: Furthermore, he assured them, that though Darius had the most men, yet had he the greater forces: wherefore there was nothing remained, but that they should scorn those Bands that glittered in gold and silver, among whom they should find plus praedae quam periculi, more treasure than danger, since that victory was usually carried rather by the sharpness of the sword, than the garnishing of the Armour.  
After these encouraged on both sides, the onset was given, the Macedonians rush●p in upon the enemy's weapons with much contempt, because so often before they had been conquered: On the other side, the Persians because they had been so often soiled, wished rather to die, then to lose the day: In fine, seldom was there more blood spilt in any Battle, both sides resolving to do their utmost for gaining the victory: 
Chron. Carionis.  But at last the Persians were overcome with the slaughter of Ninety thousand of their men. Darius, when he saw the Battle lost, would needs dye upon the place; but yet was compelled by those that were about him, by flight to provide for his own safety: and some there were that advised him to break the Bridge over the River Cydnus, that so his flight might be secured from the enemy's chase: but Darius refused that counsel, resolving not to provide for his own safety; by objecting so many thousands of his men as were yet ungotten over the River, to the fury of his Adversary: Debere & aliis fugae utam patere, quae patuerit sibi. This Battle finished the conquest of Persia, and set the Diadem on Alexander's head: for now the Cities yielded on all sides, the Persians patiently submitted their necks under the yoke of the Macedonian servitude; themselves having ruled the space of 200 years and upwards.  
Darius in his flight was slain by Bessus and Nabaczanes, two of his near kindred, whose body was found by Polystratus, one of Alexander's Soldiers, lying in a Chariot after a squailed manner, gored with many wounds, and weltering in that Royal blood that had issued out thereof: Which woeful spectacle after that Alexander beheld, he took it heavily; first mourning and weeping for the Royal Corpse, then covering it with his own cloak; and lastly, causing it to be buried in a most solemn and Princely manner: neither did he ever cease, till he had attached Bessus the murderer, and put him to a shameful and ignominious death. This was the end of this mighty Prince, and also of this mighty Empire, which was now brought out of Asia into Europe, from Persia into Macedonia; where the third Monarchy was settled on Alexander and his Successors.   

CHAP. FOUR  
Of the Macedonian Monarchy, and the Wars thereof.  
AS the Persian Monarchy was infested with War, so was the Macedonian: for no sooner was Alexander estated in the government, but presently he received intelligence of the overthrow of Alexander King of Epirus his kinsman, and Ally, in Italy; as also the destruction of Zopirion his Perfect in Pontus, together with 30000 men in Scythia: and lastly, of the dangerous War that was moved against him in Greece: For after he had over-intangled himself in the Asiatic War; almost all the Grecian Cities betook themselves to Arms, for the recovery of their liberty, moved hereunto by the authority of Spartans, who neither regarded Philip, nor Alexander his Son. The Captain of this War, was Agis King of Lacedamonia. But Antipater calling his forces together in good time, quieted this commotion, yet not without slaughter on both sides: King Agis when he saw his own troops turn their backs, forthwith dismissed his Guard; 
Et sia multitudine victus, gloria tamen omnes vicit.  yet he himself by his proper valour (Vt Alexandro si non faelicitate par; virtute non inferior videretur) made great havoc amongst his enemies: and at last though he were overcome by their multitudes, yet in glory he overcame them all. After this, some time was spent in the Indian expidition, and being arrived in the confines, 
Chronicon Carionis.  Taxiles was the first that he assaulted; but he like a wise Prince giving way to Alexander's good fortunes, of his own accord came into his presence, telling him there needed be no War between them two: for as for himself he had rather contend with benefits, than weapons. Et si sit potentior se daturum esse munera Alexandro, si inferior se gratum fore; si beneficia ab ipso acceperit. Alexander thought it not to stand with reason, to exercise hostility against him, who thus fairly yielded himself: wherefore he dismissed him in peace, after the exchange of some Princely gifts.  
Next he marched against Porus, 
justin. Lib. 12.  a Prince very famous both for courage and strength, who resolved to make resistance: before the battle Porus charged his men to assail the Macedonians, and he himself would grapple with their King: neither did Alexander refuse the combat: 
Sibi Regem ●orum privatum ●●stem dep●s●u.  but in the first encounter (his Horse being wounded) he fell headlong on the ground, but was rescued by his Guard; who both wounded, and took King Porus prisoner: of whom Alexander demanded what he would have done with him, 
Plut. in vita Alexandri.  if he himself had got the victory: to which Porus answered, Pro utriusque regalis fastigij dignitate se fuisse facturum. With the virtue and personal valour of this man, Alexander was so well pleased; as that he sent him safely into his own Territories. Tantum pro Rege nominari jussit Satrapam. After these victories, Alexander grew very luxurious, insolent, and cruel: he slew old Parmenio, 
Luxuriant animi rebus plerumque secundis.  and his Son Philatas, and that incomparable Clitus, three of his prime Commanders: yea, and Colisthenes that Philosopher (kinsman of his Master Aristotle) whom he had of purpose trained along with him for the writing of his Acts. All these and many more he slew; either for defending of the reputation of his Royal Father King Philip: or else for refusing to adore and worship him as a god, at his drunken bankers; so that now it is hard to say, Num armatus in acie vel in convivio sedens teribilior. These things made many mutinies in the Camp, and provoked the old Soldiers so much, as that they reproached him to his very head. Jubentes eum solum cum patre suo Hammone finere bella: Yet this sedition was afterwards well quieted.  
Yet nevertheless Antipater, 
justin. Lib. 12:  who was now sent for out of Macedonia with a supply of fresh Soldiers, seeing so many of his dear friends put to death; began to conjecture, that he was called for rather to partake with his friends in their punishment, then with Alexander in the Warfare. Wherefore he most wickedly plotted with his Sons Cassander, Philip, and jolas' (attendants on the King's Person) about his poisoning: which was afterwards performed at the house of one Thessalus, who had invited the King to a Banquet, they all giving it out, that he died of a fever, caused through excessive drinking. His sickness lasted the space of eleven days: during which time, their happened a tumult amongst the Soldiers, who suspected the King was poisoned: this he himself pacified, by showing himself unto them; and permitting such as he saw weeping, graciously to kiss his hand; yea when all about him fell a weeping, yet was he without any sign of grief. Adeo sicut in hostem; ita & in mortem invictus animus fuit. When as those about him perceived no hope of his recovery, 
Quem Imperii faciat haeredem. Respondit dignissimum.  they desired to know whom he would assign for his Heir, and successor in the Empire, he answered the most worthy. Such was the greatness of his mind, that passing by his own Son Hercules, his brother Arideus, and his Wife Roxana great with child, he declares the most worthy Person to be his Heir; quasi nefas esset viro forti alium, quam virum fortem succedere. And this had like to have set all together by the ears, every one of the great Captains esteeming himself most worthy; begun privately to procure to themselves the Soldier's favour. But this growing dissension, also was pacified by Alexander himself: for upon the sixth day of his sickness when his speech failed him, he took his Ring from his finger, 
justin. Lib. 13.  and delivered it to Perdiccas: by which sign it appeared that he appointed him for his Successor. After the death of Alexander, some time was spent in settling the affairs of Estate; for this purpose they met in the Royal Palace at Babylon, and being set in Council they were divided into three several opinions: First, Perdiccas was of opinion, that they should expect till Roxana (the late Wife of Alexander) who was great with child. should be delivered; and if she brought forth a Man-child, he should be declared Successor to his Father.  
But Meleager was of another mind; for he thought it not safe to suffer their certain consultations, to depend upon an uncertain childbirth: neither is it fit (saith he) that we should expect till a King be borne, when as we may have one that is borne already: and if a Child will please you, there is Hercules the Son of Alexander begotten of Arsine: if a young man will like you better, there is Arideus Brother and companion of Alexander in the Camp, and one that is beloved of all; not only for his own sake, but for his Father King Philips. And furthermore for Roxana; he said she was descended of the Persian blood: and was it right, that they should appoint a King to rule over the Macedonians: which should spring from them, whose Kingdom they had now conquered? Ptolemy differed in opinion from both the former; and first he utterly rejected Arideus, and that not only for the baseness of his Mother; for he was begotten by Philip ex Larisco Scorto: but also for a greater infirmity, want of wit; for as Ptolemy said, if he were admitted to the Crown; Ille nomen Regis, alius Imperium teneret: for his part he thought it better, that out of those who for their virtue and prowess were near unto Alexander, some should be elected to govern the Provinces, and manage the Wars.  
Of these three opinions the first was best approved generally: wherefore it was agreed upon, that they should expect till Roxana were delivered: and if she brought forth a Son, Leonatus, Perdiccas, Craterus, and Antipater should be his Guardians. Confestrimque in tutorum obsequia jurant. The same oath of Allegiance was also given to the Horse-troopes. But the footmen perceiving that there advice was not required in those great affairs, took it in ill part, wherefore they proceeded to a new election, and saluted Arideus King, and appointed him a Guard out of their own Troops: which thing so soon as the Horsemen heard of, they sent two of the Nobility, to wit Attalus, and Meleager to pacify their minds: But these two desiring to increase their own power by the flattery of the common Soldiers omitted their Ambassage, and conspired with them; And now that they had gotten a head, they presently armed themselves with purpose to break into the Palace for the discom●ture of the Horsemen: which being once known, the Horsemen in fear departed the City; and having fortified their Camp, the footmen themselves also began to doubt of the success. Perdiccas who commanded in chief amongst the Horsemen, perceiving the danger likely to ensue upon this division: resolutely went unto the footmen, and having called an assembly, he spoke unto them as followeth.  
Soldiers and fellows in Arms, I desire you would consider what an horrible crime you now commit in arming yourselves, and raising a sedition: Remember I pray you against whom you attempt these things; they are not Persians but Macedonians, not enemies, but Citizens, and for the most part of your own blood and kindred, Fellow-soldiers of the same Camp, and Companions of the same dangers together with you. Consider betimes I advise you, what an egregious spectacle you are about to set forth to the view of your Adversaries the Persians; look how much they grieve to see themselves vanquished by your conquering arms, so much will they rejoice to see you embruing your swords in the blood one of another: by which means it will come to pass that they shall offer sacrifice with your own blood, to the souls of those enemies which you have slain.  
With this Oration the footmen were so moved, as that presently they approved his council; chose him their Captain, and by his means also were accorded with the Horsemen: but yet so, as that Arideus should have the Empire; and only a portion thereof should be reserved for Alexander's Child, if it happened to be a Son.  
These matters being thus composed, the Empire is divided into many Lieutenantships: but there were four chief ones, who were more remarkable than the rest: Qui Reges ex perfectis facti magnes opes non sibi tantum paranerunt; Verum & posteris reliquerunt. And these were first, Ptolemy, Son of Logus who possessed Egypt: Secondly, Seleucus, who possessed Babylon (as josephus saith) Cum vicinis gentibus. Thirdly, Antigonus, who possessed Asia the less: And fourthly Antipater, and after him Cassander, who possessed Macedonia, and Greece.  
By this we see the Prophecy of Daniel fulfilled, for he had long before Prophesied that the great horn of the Goat being broken: For it, should come up four notable ones: Dan. 8. 8. Which prophecy is expounded in the 21. and 22. verses of the same Chapter, in this manner. The Rough Goat is the King of Grecia; and the great horn that is betwixt his eyes, is the first King (which was Alexander the Great.) Now that being broken, whereas four stood up for it: Four Kingdoms shall stand up out of the Nation, but not in his power. Now these Kingdoms are the four I have last spoken of: for however by the first composition, they were to be but Provinces; and these Prince's forenamed, to rule in them only as Lieutenants to Arideus; yet afterward that agreement was rejected, and every of these made themselves absolute Kings, 1. Mac. 1. 9 And this was the first occasion.  
Perdiccas (to whom nothing fell in this division, but the tuition of the weak King, and the conduct of the best Army) cast about how he might make himself equal with the rest: for this purpose he set upon Ariarathes King of Capadocia, in which War he proved victorious; yet gained little more than the bare and naked Kingdom; for his enemies being overthrown, they fly to their chief City, where they burned themselves, their houses, and all that ever they had. Vt nihil hostis victor suarum rearum preter incendii Spectacula frueretur: This Kingdom he left to the custody of his best betrusted friend Eumenes, to be a place of sure retreat upon any occasion, but as for himself he aspired after greater matters. Power enough he had in the Army he conducted, but he wanted Royal authority to countenance his Power; and Capadocia was to little to limit his high thoughts: Now that he had proved his strength to make himself equal with the other, he would try one cast more too for the superiority: to this end he secretly treated a match with Cleopatra the sister of great Alexander, by whom he hoped to attain the Sovereignty of all the rest: but belike he was jealous that Antipater (in whose power the Lady was) would cross this marriage. Wherefore to cover his intents, he feigned love to Nicaea one of Antipater's Daughters, hoping under that pretext to gain the Lady before any were aware of it, but the old Fox quickly espied his drift: Et dum duas eodem tempore uxores quaerit neutram obtinuit.  
This plot of his being overthrown by the cunning of Antipater, he sets his wits abroach again upon another design for the winning of the Lady; 
Sir Walter Raleigh▪  and that was to transfer the Army into Europe under the pretence of bringing the King into Macedonia the seat of his Ancestors, and head of the Empire; whose presence he knew would actually make void for the time, the office of the Viceroys: and so Antipater with Craterus being once in case of private men, and himself only in authority, the match with Cleopatra then might easily be effected; and so should his greatness meet with a good title, and what obstacle then could there be, to debar him from the Empire?  
There are two men taken into consideration, which he thought might be some hindrance to him in that accomplishment of this project: And they were Antigonus Lieutenant of Phrigia, and Ptolemy of Egypt. For the first, he caused to be accused of certain crimes, which might very well have served to take away his life; which Antigonus would not seem to take notice of, but prepared himself in show to come to his Answer: but in the mean while he made an escape, and came into Aetolia, where Antipater and Craterus were with their Armies, about the conquest of the Country. These tidings which Antipater brought, quickly finished the Aetolian War, and caused both Antipater and Craterus to foresee their own danger. Ptolemy also being advertised of these passages; apprehended them deeply; and therefore was easily drawn to side with Antipater his Coleagues, Craterus and Antigonus.  
Being thus joined in League, they begin to prepare for defence; And Perdiccas (understanding by the flight of Antigonus, and the League that now was between him, and the aforesaid parties, that all his drifts were discovered) resolved to carry all before him by fine force, having both the strongest Army, and the King's name to countenance all his actions. But the thing that troubled him was, against which of the Coleagues he should first attempt. This being propounded in Council, some advised he should transfer the War into Macedonia, where Olimpias the Mother of great Alexander then was; 
Justin. lib. 13.  whose presence and the people's favour, would much promote all their enterprises. Others advised that they should first attempt on Ptolemy in Egypt; lest while they were in Macedonia, he should invade Asia; and this advice prevailed; whereupon Eumenes is charged to have regard of Asia, and to him were joined Alcetus Brother of Perdiccas, and Neoptolemus as assistants, in case Antipater or Craterus should invade those parts. Sic Macedonia, in duas partes discurrentibus ducibus; in sua viscera armatur ferrumque ab hostili bello in civilem sanguine vertit. When as Perdiccas had wafted his Army into Egypt, like a wilful man he tired his Soldiers in hard erterprises without success, which brought their hatred upon him; which Pithom perceiving, called an hundred of the Captains, and some of the Horse unto him, and so entered his Tent and slew him: Thus, qui primus inter duces bellum movit, 
Sir Walter Raleigh,  primus interfectus est, says Caryon.  
Eumenes who was left by Perdiccas for the defence of Asia; when he understood of the great preparation that was made by Antipater and Craterus for the invasion of those Provinces committed to his charge; presently sent for Alcetus and Neoptolemus to come to his aid; letting them know, that the Adversary had already passed his forces and the Hellesponte. Alcetus flatly denied his assistance, alleging the backwardness of his men to Bear Arms against so great a person as Antipater, and a man so honoured as Craterus. Neoptolemus, was content to make a fair show of aiding him, but had secretly covenanted with Antipater, to open for him a way to the conquest of Asia: which thing Eumenes carefully espied, and prepared in time to prevent his evil designs. And this he did in a fierce battle, wherein he put him to flight; and received his Foot-forces (from whom he was fled for his own safeguard) into his service: 
Ad Antipatrum & Polyperchont● pro●u●it. justin.  Neoptolemus after his overthrow, fled to Antipater, and Craterus; persuading them, that if by great journeys they would hasten their march, they might certainly take Eumenes napping, being now joyful of his late victory, secure by reason of his flight. This council was put in execution, but not with such success as was hoped for: because Eumenes was watchful over their proceedings, perceived all their intents; 
Infidiae in infidiato re● verse.  wherefore they that thought to entrap him on the sudden, were unexpectedly in the trap themselves; being set upon while they were secure in their march, and much wearied with night-watches. In this battle both Craterus, and Neoptolemus were slain, and their Army routed and overthrown.  
After the death of Craterus whom the Soldiers exceedingly loved; 
Justin. lib. 14.  they chose Antigonus their General, against Eumenes; whom earnestly they desired to punish for the death of their beloved Captain. Eumenes perceiving how that by the Macedonians he was adjudged an enemy, and that their new Captain Antigonus had decreed to make War upon him, of his own accord discovered these things to his Soldiers; promising, that if any were terrified with these news, he would give him free leave to depart: with which words they were so animated, as that they promised him faithfully, Rescissurus se ferro decreta Macedonum.  
Antigonus' understanding what a Soldier Eumenes was; thought it a far safer way to cut him off by policy, then by force: wherefore taking the advantage of Eumenes absence from his Army (for he was now visiting Cleopatra, the sister of great Alexander, at Sardis) he caused letters to be spread through his Army, wherein was promised great rewards to those who could bring Eumenes his head unto him. Eumenes at his return finding out the project, called an assembly, giving his Soldiers great thanks, that amongst them all, none was found that preferred the hope of a bloody reward, before the faith they had given to their General: but withal, politicly telling them, Confictas a se has epistolas ad experiendos suorum animos esse. And by this policy he did not only affright those that were wavering; but also did provide against future times: that if any such thing should afterwards happen, the soldiers might suppose; Se non ab hoste corrumpi, sed a duce tentari. Antigonus when he saw that he could not entrap his Adversary by cunning, then prepared to set upon him by force. And Eumenes accordingly prepared to entertain him; but through the treachery of Apollonides, general of his Horse (who in the heat of the battle fled to the Adverse part) he was overthrown. 
Plut. in vit● Eumenes.  After which, he betook himself to Nora, a very strong Fort; which he manfully defended, until such time as Antigonus heard of the troubles in Macedonia (which were raised by the seditions of Cassander, and Polyperchon, 
Prius vitam se quam fidem relicturum.  after the death of Antipater,) which coming to Antigonus his knowledge, caused him labour to conclude a Peace with Eumenes, knowing him to be a man fit for his purposes (if he could win him to his side) both for his known faithfulness, and excellent skill in Martial affairs; for of all Alexander's Captains, he scarce had his fellow.  
A Peace forthwith was concluded between them, but long it continued not; because not governed by the like minds: for Eumenes was most faithful, but the other treacherous to Alexander's kindred: wherefore they fell again to the Wars, wherein (after Eumenes had been victorious in many battles,) at last by the mutinous Argyraspides, he was betrayed to Antigonus, who put him to death.  
And now let us leave Antigonus a while, 
Justin lib. 14.  and see how the affairs of the Empire were managed in other parts. Eurydice the Queen, Wife of King Aridens, so soon as she knew of Polyperchons' return into Macedonia, and that he had sent for Olimpias the Mother of great Alexander, grew full of envy and emulation: wherefore she writ letters in the King her husband's name to Polyperchon, commanding him to deliver up the Army to Cassander, whom she knew to be an enemy to Alexander's posterity. For which courtesy Cassander was bound unto her, and did many things according to her mind: and afterwards he marcheth with his Forces into Greece, making War upon diverse of the Cities. With whose destructions, the Spartans' terrified, walled their City, which in times past they had defended with Arms, and not with Walls; 
Olim interrogatus Agesil●us quare Sparta sine muris, ostendens Cives armatus dixit 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  so much now did they degenerate from their Ancestors: for in times past the virtue of the Citizens, was the Wall of the City, but now the Citizens thought not themselves safe, unless they were enclosed with Walls.  
But the troubles of Macedonia, quickly called Cassander out of Greece; for Olimpias coming towards Macedon; Aeacides King of the Mollosians also following her: they were forbidden to enter upon the borders by Arideus, and Eurydice. Yet by means of the Macedonians, who flocked to her apace, she got entrance; and being entered, by her Commandment, both Eurydice and the King were quickly slain, and she herself ruled not long after: For the Macedonians seeing what cruel massacres she made amongst their Princes, turned their love into hatred: So when Cassander approached, she having no confidence in them; retired herself to Pydua a strong City, where Cassander straightly besieged her, and forced her by extreme famine to yield to his mercy: yet he showed her but a little, when she came into his power; for by the counsel of the Macedonians, whose Children she had slain: she was (without any respect to her former estate) condemned to dye. When the Executioners came to do their office; she never shrunk for their swords, neither shrieked like a Woman for the smart of her wounds: Vt Alexandrum posses etiam moriente matre conspicere: and when she was breathing her last gasps, she covered her body decently with her hair and garments; Ne quid posset in corpore ejus indecorum videri. This was the end of this Royal Queen so famous through the World, for being Wife to such a Husband, and Mother to such a Son.  
Perdiccas, 
justin. Lib. 15.  Alcetus, Eumenes, Commanders of the other faction being all slain; one would have thought the War should have ceased amongst Alexander's Successors: but it fell out otherwise; for the Victors fell at odds amongst themselves, and this was the occasion of it. Ptolemy, Cassander, and Lysimachus required that the Treasure and Provinces taken by Antigonus, should be equally divided amongst them; but this Antigonus denied: Affirmans, se non in ejus belli praedam socios admissurum, in cujus periculum solus descenderat: Hereupon War was decreed on both sides. Antigonus feared them not, only he wanted a fair pretext and colour for his War: wherefore he caused it to be divulged, that he would revenge the death of Olimpias, upon Cassander the murderer, and deliver Roxana and her Son out of the Tower of Amphipolis, wherein the said Cassander had imprisoned them.  
These things being once known abroad, Ptolemy, Cassander, Lysimachus, and S●leucus, all join in League against him; and so on all sides make their preparations both by Sea and Land. The first battle was fought at Callamos, between Demetrius' Son of Antigonus, and Ptolemy, wherein Ptolemy got the day. Afterwards these two Generals fought at Sea, and Demetrius got the victory, and that a very great one; which filled the heart of Antigonus so with pride: as that he commanded both himself, and Son to be styled Kings: Ptolemy, that he might not seem to have less authority amongst his men, is graced also with the same Title: and after their examples, Cassander, and Lysimachus did style themselves also Kings, Sic nona Regna ex Alexandri Monarchia orta sunt, sicut Daniel predixerat.  
After these private encounters with Ptolemy, follows the general War between Antigonus, and his Son on the one side, and Ptolemy, Lysimachus, Scleucus, and Cassander on the other: 
In vita. De●●.  but when they came to join battle Antigonus was slain, and the battle on his part lost. And as Plutarch saith, through the too violent chase that Demetrius gave to young Antiochus' Son of Seleucus; For Demetrius having overthrown that part of the Army which Antiochus led, and put him to flight: he pursued so far, and with such heat, that before he came back again; the Macedonian Phalanx, and body of his Father's Army was overthrown: wherefore finding the affairs in such ill case at his return, he was glad to fly hastily towards Athens, with 5000 Foot, and 4000 Horse: where, for all his former kindesse unto them, he was forbid to enter the City, quoniam regum neminem tu●● recipere statuissent.  
This victory was the occasion of new trouble among the Victors; 
Dum ●●nis os rodit socium quem diligit odit.  for Seleucus (who was present at the battle) in parting the prey, pleased himself, but displeased his adherents (who were absent.) Wherefore Ptolemy, and Lysimachus join against him, supposing him now as dangerous an enemy, as Antigonus was before. Seleucus to strengthen himself, joined with Demetrius; and to make this League the firmer, takes Stratonice, Daughter of Demetrius, to Wife. And about the beginning of these troubles, Cassander died in Macedonia, and so did Philip his eldest Son.  
After whose deaths, 
justin. Lib. 1●.  another War also happened between Antipater, and Alexander, the two surviving Sons of Cassander: Thessalonica Mother to them both, seemed to take part with the younger Brother; wherefore Antipater the elder, slew her. The younger Brother to ●ee revenged for his Mother's death, called in Demetrius for his aid: wherefore Lysimachus, who was Father in Law to Antipater, persuaded him to reconcile himself to his Brother, rather than to admit his Father's enemy into the Kingdom. But Demetrius would not now be kept out, with their reconciliation; but by treachery murdered Alexander, and possessed that part of his Kingdom that was fall'n to his share: and Lysimachus (being at that time entangled in a dangerous War against Doricetus King of Thrace) that Demetrius might not be his enemy, delivered also up to him the other part of Macedonia, which was Antipater's, his Son in Law. Thus Demetrius being wholly possessed of that Kingdom, begins a fresh to prepare for the recovery of that which he had lost in Asia, which occasioned a new League between Ptolemy, Seleuchus, and Lysimachus; into which society Pyrrhus' King of Epirus was drawn: and so to prevent the invasion of Asia, they send against Demetrius their Armies into Europe; with which, he being circumvented, Come posset honest mori, turpiter se debere Seleuco maluit  
After the end of this War, died Ptolemy Son of Lagus King of Egypt: leaving for his Successor, 
justin. Lib. 17.  Ptolemy Philodelphus his youngest Son: After whose death, there were left alive no more but two of Alexander's great Captains, to wit, Seleuchus, 
Assiduum inter pacet discordia malum  and Lysimachus; and these two being equals, quickly fell at difference, both striving for superiority. And this was the last Battle that ever was fought between those great Captains that accompanied Alexander in the Persian expedition: and truly the sudden fall of the City of Lysimachia by an Earthquake, did foreshow the event of the battle, which immediately followed, for therein Lysimachus fell; and Seleuchus was not more joyful of the victory, then that he was the last of Alexander's train; and that he was victor over those that had been Conquerors over others: but this his great joy did not long continue with him; for about seven months after he was circumvented by Ptolemy Cerannus, whose Sister Lysimachus had married: Regnumque Macedoniae, quod Lysimacho eripuerat, cum vita pariter amittit: and within a while after, this Cerannus was slain by the Gauls, under the leading of their Captain Brennus.  
Thus have you seen the horrible Wars, and bloody Massacres that happened during the time of this third Monarchy, among the Successors of great Alexander: neither did these Wars end, when they had brought these great men to their graves; but continued still, as fierce as before amongst their posterity, until they had greatly spoilt all those Countries, and prepared a way for the Romans entrance. Of which it is high time that I now speak; for I suppose I have already said enough, to satisfy any man, concerning the troubles of the third Monarchy▪ although a great deal more might be said of those Wars, which happened between the Kings of Syria and Egypt; 
Dan. 2.  which took beginning at the murder of Brenice widow of Antiochus Theos, and Sister of Ptolemy Enargetes, of which the Prophet Daniel hath so plainly spoken; as that those that are acquainted with the Story, will I am sure testify with me, that he seems rather to write a History, than a Prophecy. But these and many more troubles I must of necessity pass by, to come to the fourth Monarchy of the Romans, which was not in strength inferior to any of the other. Dan. 7. 7. Yet could it not perpetuate Peace to itself, no more than any of the former Monarchies, as the next Chapter will make it evidently appear▪   

CHAP. V.  
Of the Roman Monarchy, and the Wars thereof.  
THe Roman Empire, whose foundation was first laid by Romulus their first King, was at the beginning of all other Empires the smallest: but in process of time, it did become the most ample and large, that any History mentioneth; containing within the limits and bounds thereof, all that ever any of the other three Monarchies had in Asia, and Africa, besides all Europe into the bargain. Lucius Florus considereth in the Commonwealth of the Romans four degrees or Ages: the first under Kings which continued about 250 years. During which time Rome strove for mastery with her mother, the City Alba, 
〈◊〉 fore unde victori●●u●●t. Livy.  under the leading of their third King Tullus Hostilius, who was the first that taught them martial Discipline, and the Art of War: in which War happened that famous Combat between the Horatij, 
Faedus inter Romans & Albans.  three brethren of the Roman party, and the Curatii, three brethren of the City Alba; upon whose victory depended the well or woe of both Cities, 
Vt cuius populi cives eo ●ertam●ne vic●ssent is alteri populo cum bona paceimperitare●. Livy Dec. prim. Lib. primo.  auceps & pulchra contentio; a brave but a doubtful fight: wherein three of the one side being wounded, and two of the other slain, that Horatius which survived, helping out his valour with his wit, feigned himself to fly, so to single forth the enemy, and then turning upon each as they were to follow, overcame them all. Sic (rarum) unius manu parta victoria est. Besides this War between Rome, and the City Alba; there were other between her and the City Fid●na. To be brief, under the rule of Kings, they conquered all the Towns round about for some fifteen mile's space, as Suessa, Pometia, Otriculum, and diverse other Towns in Latium: but because Rome was now but in her infancy, and had not obtained the Monarchy, I let these pass in silence.  
The next Age of Rome (says Florus) was from the time of Brutus, 
Livy dec. 1. Lib. 2.  and Collarinus, their two first Consuls; until such time as Apias Claudius, and Quintus julius obtained the Consulship, which was about 200 years after. During which time they had many sharp Wars: as first with Tarqvinius, their expulsed King, who was aided by the Vrientines, and Tarquiniences, for the recovery of his Kingdom. In the very first onset of this battle, was Brutus the Consul, and Aruus Tarqvinius the King's Son, 
Alterius uterque telo transfixus occubuit Plut. vit. Val. Public.  both Generals of the Horse, slain one by the other: for as Livy saith, Adeoque infestis animis concurrerunt neutrum dum hostem vulneraret sui protegendi corporis memor; ut contra●io ictu par parmam uterque transfixus. The victory was very doubtful, for the right Wings of both the Armies overcame; so that both sides feared the worst, 
Vno plus Hetruscorum cecidisse in a●●e, vincere bello Romanum. Livy. Dec. 1. Lib. 1.  till the doubt were removed by a miracle, a strange voice out of the Arsian wood, which affirmed, that the Romans had lost one less than their enemies▪  
The next War was against King Porsenuae, who would have reestablished Tarqvinius, and he wanted but little of taking the City; for he had already surprised Mountain janiculus, on the other side of Tiber; from whence he had a fair way to the City over the Bridge called Sublicius: where by good hap, Horatius C●cles a valiant Roman was present, who placed himself upon the Bridge; and with his sole body defended the passage against all the King's Army; until such time as the bridge behind him was broken down: neither could they be freed from the danger of this King, until Mutius Scaevola had made an attempt to slay him in his Camp; of which nevertheless he failed through his ignorance of the King's person, killing his Scribe, instead of him: for which fact being had in examination, he cried out says Livy: Romanus sum Ci●is Quintus Mutium vocant; hostis hostem occidere volui: When they threatened him with punishment: 
Nec unus in te ●go hos ●nimos gessi, lorgus post me ordo est idem petentium decus, Livy. Dec. 1. Lib. 2.  he answered, he was as resolved to die, as to have killed the King: for says he, Facere & pati fortiae, Romanum est, and forthwith he thrust his hand into the fire, until it were past sense. Vt sciat Rex (says Florus) quem virum effugerit. Telling the King that there were 300 valiant young men of Rome had conspired his death: with which the King was so terrified, that he presently dissolved the siege, and made peace with the Romans.  
To be brief, besides this War, they had also within the 200 years afore named; wars with the Lattins, Tuscans, Ga●●es, Sabines, Samnites; and lastly, with the Tarrentines, and King Pyrrhus, but all these within the confines of Italy, which by this time they had mastered and made their own: yet were they so far from the Monarchy, as that they had never led their forces out of Italy, and therefore I pass by these also.  
The next Age of Rome (Lucius Florus) was from that time Apias Claudius, 
Inquibus totum orbem pecavit Florus.  and Quintus Fulvius were Consuls, until the time of Caesar Augustus, which was 250 years, about which time they obtained the Monarchy of the World. Which before they could effect, they endured many sharp Wars: as with Carthage three several times: 
Simili●r victo sit populus qui vicit. Florus.  In the second of which Punic Wars, Rome was in as much fear as ever since her walls were builded. Livy saith, adeo varia belli fortuna; ut proprius periculo fuerint, qui vicere. Three overthrows Hannibal gave the Romans one after another, the first at Tic●num, now called Pavia, where the Consul Publius Cornelius Scipio had been slain, but that he was rescued by his own Son young Scipio, afterwards called Affricanus. The next was at the flood Trebia, where he overthrew the other Consul Titus Sempronius, who was very eager to fight with Hannibal, before his fellows were healed of their hurts received in the former battle. The third was at the Lake of Th●asimene, Caius Flaminius being Consul, who very rashly lost both Army and life. The ill success of which battle was foreshowen before it began: for Titus Livius saith, 
Aquile prodi●e n●lu●runt. Flows.  the Ensign could not with all his strength remove his Colours, which with some other ill signs put all the Army in affright: which thing when it was told to the unadvised Consul, 
Livy dec. 3. Lib. 2.  he said to the messenger, Abi nuntia, signum effodiant; si ad conv●llendum manus prae metu obcorpuerint. The news of this overthrow made the Romans speedily nominate a Dictator, and in good time they chose Quintus Fabius Maximus, one that followed Hannibal wheresoever he went: but with this purpose, 
Cunctando 〈…〉.  Vt cunctando non bellando inimicorum vires attereret, saith Plutarch: Thus for a while he wearied Hannibal, but his own people also were wearied with this lingering War. Minutius who was Magister equitum he cried out in the Army, 
Tandem eum militiae magistrum delegisse Romanos qui bellum ratione, non fortuna ger●ret.  Do we come hither to behold the slaughter and destruction of our Confederates and Companions? are we not ashamed that those Citizens which our Fathers sent as Colonies into Sessa, that this coast might be safe from our enemies the Samnites, which now not our Neighbour Samnite, but a Carthaginian stranger doth waste and spoil, having marched from the further parts of the World, to this place by means of our delays? So far (ah the grief) do we degenerate from the virtues of our Ancestors, that near our Coast they thought it a dishonour to their Empire, but to suffer the Carthagenians Navy to sail: the same we now see replete with the Numidians, and Moors our enemies. It is great folly to believe that we are able to subdue our enemies with sitting still: 
〈…〉 credere posse▪ Livy.  it behoves us to arm our troops, and bring them down into the plains, and encounter them man to man. Audendo, agendoque res Romana crevit, non his sensibus, Consiliis neque timidi cauta vocant.  
This trouble happening in the Camp, and the like in the City, causeth the Senate to join Minutius in equal authority with the Dictator: but still the War is prolonged by Fabius his cunning: Then does Bebius Herennius Tribune of the people, declaim both against the Senate and Nobility for training Hannibal into Italy and prolonging the War, which might sooner have been put to an end if a Plebeian Consul had been chosen. Hereupon Quintus Terentius a Plebeian is created Consul; and Lucius Aemilius Paulus is his Colleague: They follow the battle of Cannae by the rashness of Terentius Varro the Plebeian Consul, wherein the Romans were overthrown, 
Entrop●us.  and one of their Consuls slain; and with him twenty more of the order of Consuls and Praetors: of Senators there were taken and slain thirty, of Noblemen to the number of 300, of Soldiers, to the number of 40000, and 3500 gentlemen beside. Haec est pugna Cannensi clade nobilitata (saith Livy.) There had been no doubt, 
Vincere s●●s Hanibal victoria uti rescis. Livy  but that Rome then might easily have been taken: if Hannibal (as Maherbal said) had but known how to use a victory as to get one: But Hannibal quum victoria posset uti, 
Quos nulli m●li vicer●t vis, perdidere nimi● bona ac voluptates immodicae.  frui maluit. And so leaving Rome, he hastens to Capua, the pleasures of which town, utterly effeminated his whole Army, and as (Florus says) Capuam Hanibali Cannae fuisse, for him that neither the snowy Alps, nor the Roman Armies could overcome (who would believe it) Campaniae soles & tepentes fontibus Baiae subegerunt. After this diverse of the Roman Generals durst meet Hannibal in the field; and first Cloudius Marcellus the Roman Praetor, in the first year of this War, raised his siege from before Nola, and slew of his men as some affirm, 2300, himself losing only one: but Livy dares not affirm so much of his own credit; yet acknowledgeth a victory gotten of Hannibal, which he accounts a very famous exploit, if not the most famous that happened in all that War: Non vinti enim ab Hanibale, vincentibus difficilius fuit, quam postca vincere.  
At last it happened that Publius Cornelius Scipio was created Consul, who chose Africa for his Province, and had it granted, contrary to the opinion of Fabius. When he was entered Africa, he overthrew the forces of Asdrubal, and King Syphax: and forthwith besieged Carthage itself close up to the gates, which so affrighted the Citizens, that presently they sent for Hannibal to come to the defence of his own City: but Haniballs Army which was effeminated before with the immoderate pleasures of Capua, was now overthrown before his own Carthage. Premiumque victoriae Africa fuit, & seguntus Africam statim terrarum orbis (saith Florus.) Besides these Punic Wars, they had many other; as in Macedonia with King Philip, in Syria with Antiochus, in Greece with the Aetolians, Histrians, Gallogreekes, Illir●●ns, and Achaians: in Asia, with Aristonicus, and Mithridates: in Africa, with jugurth: and in Europe, with diverse, which would be to long for me to nominate.  
We will come therefore to those times wherein Rome had settled the fourth Monarchy, by making herself the Lady and Mistress almost of the whole World: which was about the time of Pompey the Great, and Julias Caesar, two the most famous Captains that ever Rome had.  
In their times says Lucius Florus, 
ipsum ●ludin exitium suum armavit. Flor.  Majus erat imperium Romanum, quam ut ullis exterius viribus extingui posset. Fortune therefore envying that people, which was sovereign of all other, armed their own selves to their own destruction: and this grew through the discord that was between Pompey and Caesar afore named. But the ground of this controversy took first root from the civil Wars between Marius and Silla: Pompey following Silla's faction, and Caesar, Marius, whose kinsman he was, 
Amentes estis si multos in Caesare Marios non videtis cavendum est a puero. Plut. in vit. Caesar.  which could not but breed a mislike each of other: and the rather, because Silla had given his friend a caveat to beware of Caesar: this dislike of each other was increased by both their ambitions: Pompey would endure no equal, nor Caesar superior; but hitherto their intents were smothered, two obstacles being in the way: first Pompey had married the Lady Julia, Caesar's Daughter, and during her life, friendship was preserved, 
Nec hic ferebat parem necille superiorem. Flor.  at least in show. Secondly, Crassus through his inestimable riches, Lineage, and eloquence, was almost in as great reputation as either of the other; and so long as he lived, the scales were equally balanced through mutual fear: 
Exinde a Crassis Juliaeque morte statim aemulatio erupit. Flor.  but Crassus being once slaughtered by the Parthians, and Julia dead; the spark of emulation that long had laid smothered as it were in ashes, now quickly burst forth, both of them being ambitious of honour, and each of them jealous of the others authority; but their emulation broke forth into open War, upon this occasion.  
Caesar having finished his Wars in Gaul, sent his friends to Rome in his name to demand the Consulship, himself staying behind within his own Province; the reason why he desired (though absent) to be declared Consul, was for fear of some enemies that had threatened to accuse him: this honour was decreed him at the first, by ten of the Tribunes with Pompey's good liking. But some of Caesar's enemies withstanding this decree; Pompey quickly altered his opinion, and then was Caesar again denied that honour, 
Veniret & peteret malorem more. Flor.  unless he would lay down his Arms, and come in person to Rome, to crave it after the accustomed manner: this Caesar yielded unto upon condition that Pompey also should give over his Army which he had in Spain; but Pompey's friends would not agree to that: hereupon Caesar refuseth to dismiss his Army, unless the Senate would make good their first decree. Forthwith at Rome are Lentulus and Marcellus made Consuls, and have charge to look Ne quid respublica detrimenti caperet. By and by, a peremptory decree is passed, that Caesar must dismiss his Army by such a day, and that he should not therewith pass the River Rubicon, that utmost bounds of his Province; declaring him an enemy, if he dared to do the contrary: this decree being resisted by two of the Tribunes, Lucius Antonius and Quintus Curio, they were both abused and thrust out of the Senate, after which they fled to Caesar: Hereby Caesar perceived the intent of the Senate, and therefore sent speedily for all his Legions, marching with them to the River Rubicon; he stayed there a while, considering with himself the danger that might ensue, if he should pass the River with his Troops. After consultation, he cried out, The Lot is cast; and giving his Horse the rain, began to march and pass the River, all his people following him, and so was the civil War begun.  
The very next morning after he had passed the River, 
〈…〉 Caesaris.  he seized on Arimanto, and so upon all Towns and Castles that lay in his way: which tidings troubled not only Pompey, but the whole Senate and people of Rome; whereupon, they all resolve to forsake the City. Pompey went to Brundisium, whither he sent for the Consuls to pass thence to Dyrrachium, a City by the Sea coast of Macedonia, there to raise as great power as they were able; being now out of all hope to resist him in Italy: he having now taken Corsin●o with Thirty of Pompey's Cohorts, and brought them to his own denomination. Having once intelligence that Pompey made head against him in Brundisium, thither he hasted: and though Pompey had fortified the City against him, yet was he glad to fly for his safeguard by night, in a torn and almost naked Vessel over the Sea (oh the shame) which not long before he had triumphantly passed.  
Nor was Pompey sooner driven out of Italy, than the Senate out of the City; into which he entered, made himself Consul, seized on the common treasury, and then began to consult about his proceedings: To follow Pompey into Greece, he could not for want of Shipping; neither would he though he could, because of some enemies behind, who were needful first to be dealt with all. Into Sicilia the Roman Granery, he sent Deputies to make all sure there, and himself resolved for Spain, against Petreius and Affranius the Commanders of Pompey's choicest Legions. Having therefore dispersed part of his forces throughout Italy, to stop Pompey's return; and having charged Dolabella to provide shipping against his coming back: away he goes and finds no resistance till he comes at Massilla, where he left Brutus to subdue them, which he did.  
Caesar after a few encounters, drives Petreius and Affranius to a composition; and having tamed Spain, he returns for Italy: where leaving all to the charge of Servillius Isauricus his fellow Consul; 
Caesar Lib. 3. bellorun. civilium.  he prepares to go into Macedonia against Pompey himself: When he came to Brundisium, though he wanted sufficiency of shipping, with those he had, he embarked seven Legions; and though it were in winter, yet he put out to Sea, and landed the next day about the hills of Epirus, and other dangerous places, and forthwith sent his Navy back to Brundisium, for the residue which were left with Antonius; which staying somewhat to long, (impatient of delay in such important affairs:) he embarked himself at midnight in a Frigate; 
Lucius Florus▪  and though the Seas went high, yet would he needs venture over: The Master of the vessel perceiving how boisterous the Seas were, grew fearful and would have returned: which Caesar perceiving, presently starts up saying; quid time's? Caesarem vebis. When all his forces were come together, he hasted to Dirrachium with purpose to surprise it; thither also come Pompey to defend it: their Camps now being somewhat near, many skirmishes happened; in one of which, the valour of Scena was wondrous, 
Cuius in scuto centum atque quadraginta tela sedere. Florus.  in whose shield was found sticking 140 darts. Nevertheless in the mean space, some overtures of Peace were made by Caesar, but none would be granted by the Pompeyans: For Labyenus cried out; Definite ergo de compositione loqui: nam nobis nisi Caesaris capite relato, pax esse nulla potest. Whereupon Caesar provoked his Adversaries to the battle, 
Caesar. Lib. 3. bellorum civilium.  but Pompey knowing Caesar's wants, and himself having the benefit of the Sea to relieve his Army, chose rather to draw the War out in length; and to waste his Adversary, without putting his own estate in hazard. But this liked not his Associates, the Soldiers, blame lying idle, the confederates, cry out upon delay; the great Lords tax him with ambition: so that contrary to his own opinion, he is in a manner forced to give battle in the Champion field of Philippi.  
After that both the Generals had put their Armies in Array, Pompey gives these admonitions to his Soldiers, 
Aperto Late●●  that when the right Wing of Caesar's battle drew near, they should assail it on the Flank, so might they chase the disordered Army being oppressed in the rear, before themselves came to cast a dart in the face of the enemy, neither is this thing very hard to be done (saith he) cum tantum equitatu valeamus.  
Caesar observing the order of his enemy's Battles, doubted that his right Wing might be oppressed with the multitude of the enemy's horse; wherefore from his 3. Battle, he drew certain choice companies, which he opposed to the enemy's horse, showing them what he had appointed them to do, affirming that the victory that day, depended upon the valour of these Cohorts. The signal of Battle being given, in Caesar's Army, Crastinus (a man of tried valour one that the year before had the leading of the Primipili in the tenth Legion) was called forth to begin the fight. He forthwith encourageth the appointed bands, saying; Follow me you that have been my Maniples, perform that duty to your Emperor that you have promised, there only remains this one Battle, which finished, both he shall recover his dignity, and we our liberty. They looking upon Caesar, he said; Fac●am hodie Imperator, ut aut vivo mihi, aut mortuo, gracias agas; after which he marched against his enemies. The charge being given, all Pompey's horse, according to his direction, passed from his left wing, and and forced Caesar's Cavalry to quit the field, and then begun the troops to set upon his battles in the Flank: Which Caesar perceiving, he made a sign to those selected Cohorts (which for that purpose, he had set apart from the other squadrons) to charge upon the enemy's Cavalry, which they performed with such force and fury, striking them (according to Caesar's directions) no where but in the face, 
Miles faciom feri. Flor.  which Pompey's horsemen unable to endure, turned head and fled to the Mountains. Which service finished, with the like force and fury, these Cohorts invaded the rear of Pompey's left Wing; also at the same time Caesar commanded his three Battalia's to charge, which as yet had not moved, so that Pompey's men, being now with fresh Companies charged, both in the front and rear, were not able any longer to sustain the Battle, but all of them turned their backs and fled. The victory being gotten in the Field, Caesar followed Pompey to the Camp, which he easily took; and than Pompey fled for his life, first to Larissa, from thence to the shore of the Aegean Sea, where finding a Merchant's ship, he sailed to Mitylene in the I●le of Lesbos, where remained his Wife and family; from thence he sailed into Egypt, where he was murdered by the sword of Septimius his fugitive, before the eyes of his Wife and Children.  
This victory being gotten and Pompey slain, the war was not presently ended, new troubles did arise in Africa: thither many principal Romans, which had escaped from the battle of Pharsalia resorted: to wit, Publius Cornelius Scipio, Marcus Petreius Afranius, Quintus Varus, Marcus Portius Cato, Labienus, and Lucius Cornelius Faustus, son to Silla the Dictator: these had associated to them Juba King of Mauritania, and altogether had raised a great Army: whereof Scipio was made General, Cato having refused that honour.  
Caesar hearing of their preparations, hastens into Italy, and from thence waftes over into Africa, lands about Adrumentum, and from thence marcheth to the City Leptis where he is received: and while he lies thereabout, Labienus comes against him with his multitude, thinking to distress Caesar's small numbers: Caesar perceiving his intents, 
Artificio magis quam viribus decertandum▪ Hirtius debello Afr.  resolves to deal with him rather by cunning than force. And first, he chargeth his men not to stir above four foot from their standards, which the horsemen of Labienus perceiving, presently compassed them about, so that Caesar's people were compelled to fight as it were in a circle: There, Labienus shows himself unto them, having uncovered his face, saying withal to one whom he saw most forward: 
Quid tumiles Tiro tam feroculus es?  Why are you so arrogant O you freshwater soldier? I much pity your hard fortune, for sure I am, Caesar hath brought you into eminent danger. To whom the soldier replied: 
Non sum tiro Labiene, sed de Legione decima veteramus. Hirtius.  I would thou shouldest know Labienus, that I am no freshman, but an old soldier of the tenth Legion: and forthwith he threw at him his dart, saying, Decumanum militem, qui te petit, scito esse. Caesar in the mean while, seeing himself encompassed, draws out his Army in length, and divides the circle in the middle, excluding the one part from the other on both sides, charging with his horsemen on the inner part of the circle, and with his footmen, their darts being thrown, he puts them to flight.  
Caesar after this Battle, perceiving the multitude of his enemies, sends for more aid of men and victuals into Sicily, which were sent him: but diverse of his Ships miscarried, and fell into the enemy's hands, in one of which was a Centurion with some old soldiers, and some newly taken up, all of them were brought before the General Scipio, and to them thus he addressed his speech. I know and am assured (Soldiers) that it is not of your own accord, that thus wickedly you pursue and prosecute good men your fellow-Citizens, but rather that you are forced thereunto by the command of that wicked Emperor of yours: since therefore fortune hath brought you within our power, if you will (as your duty binds you) with other good men labour to defend the Commonweal, you know that we will not only spare your lives, but also take you into our protection and pay, wherefore answer us what you are minded to do: To this the Centurion of the 14. Legion (having liberty to speak) answers: For thy great good will, noble Scipio, I give thee hearty thanks, and happily I should make use of thy proffered courtesy, if too great a wickedness were not coupled therewith, wherefore know you that I will never bear arms against Caesar my Emperor, from whom I have received my order, and for whose dignity and honour I have fought more than 36. years: moreover, I would counsel you, noble Scipio, to desist from thy enterprise, for if hitherto thou hast had no experience of him against whom thou dost contend, yet now at last take him into consideration: choose among all thy soldiers one whole Cohort, which thou thinkest to be most strong and valiantest, and I will take but ten of these my fellow-soldiers, which now are within thy power, and by our valour you shall understand, what trust and confidence thou canst have in thine own Troops. Scipio was so enraged with this answer, that he slew the Centurion and all the old soldiers immediately.  
After this Caesar at Thapsus fought with Scipio and King Juba, and overthrew them both in one day: 
●rjussu Caesaris 〈…〉 ●anere ●aepit. Hirtius.  at which Battle one strange thing happened, the Trumpets sounded a charge, through the soldier's forwardness, without the command of the General. The overthrow began at Juba, whose Elephants not throughly manned to fight, being but lately drawn out of the woods, at the sudden shrillness, disranked their friend's Army, 
Ante Imperium ducis sua sponte sgna cecinerunt. Flor.  and presently all fled. After this overthrow, Scipio and Cato slew themselves, and Juba and Petreius after they had feasted themselves at a banquet, slew one the other, this was the direful end of those brave Romans, and of this African war.  
But out of the embers of this war, 
Pro uno duos s●are Pompe●os. Flor.  sprang another in Spain more dangerous than the former, wherein Cneius and Sextus the two sons of great Pompey were the Generals. They, having gathered great forces amongst their friends in Spain, reduced the greatest part of that Country under their obeisance: against them Caesar goes with his choicest Legions, Sed nusquam atrocïus nec tam ancipiti marte concursum est: Their last and chiefest Battle was at Munda, wherein Cneius Pompeius fought with such resolution, as that Caesar's squadrons began to give ground, and were ready to forsake the field: what danger Caesar was then in, any man may know by his demand: 
San● & ipse Caesar ante actem mestor non ex more, & ●.  Lucius Florus saith, he was seen before the Army sadder than he used to be, yea it is reported, that in that perturbation he consulted what he should do with himself if the worst befell, and that his countenance was as one that meant to make his own hands his own executioner. He was heard (say some) to have uttered these words to his old soldiers: If ye be not ashamed, leave me, and deliver me into the hands of these boys. In good time did Pompey's Lieutenant) send Caesar five Cohorts of horse cross the Battle, to guard that which was in some danger: Caesar takes hold of this advantage, and makes his soldiers believe they fled, and chargeth upon them as open flyers, and did thereby both put fresh courage into his own soldiers, and also daunt his enemies: for Caesar's men followed on boldly, thinking themselves to have the upper hand, and the Pompeyans (supposing their fellows to run away) fell themselves to running, what slaughter then was made amongst them, 
Faedum etiam inter Barbaros. Flor.  may be conjectured by this: Caesar made a Rampire about Munda, by pyling up bodies dragged together from all about, and fastened together with spears and javelins. Caesar himself esteemed so much of this Battle, as that he used to say many times: In other Battles he fought for victory and honour, but at Munda he fought for his life. Cncius Pompeius after his defeat fled, but was overtaken and slain: but Sextus, the younger brother, was reserved for another war.  
Caesar now being victor returned to Rome, where he makes himself perpetuus Dictator, and had titles of honour given him by the State, as, Imperator, and Pater patriae: now his accepting of these titles, and some other signs of ambition, drew upon him both the envy of the people, and of some great Lords.  
Hereupon, his death was conspired, by 70. of the principle men of Rome: his friends misdoubting somewhat, advised that he should ever have a guard about him, but he rejected their counsel, saying: Mori satius est semel, quam timore semper torqueri: Neglecting this counsel, he was slain by the Conspirators in the Senate-house, and fell at the foot of the Base where Pompey's Image stood. Sic ille qui terorem orbem civili sanguine implenerat, tandem ipse sanguine suo curiam implevit.  
Caesar being slain, 
Plut. in vita Ant●n.  new troubles arise about his death: the people which desired it before it was effected, yet after hated the doers. Anthony and Lepidus instigated them against the melefactors, so that for their safeguard they were glad to fly out of the City, their houses being first burnt with brands which the people raked out of Caesar's funeral fire. Caesar's old soldiers also had a mind to be revenged of these Conspirators, 
Nec illis deerat animus adultionem, sed ducem non habebant. Flor.  had they but had one to lead them on to take it. Wherefore, after that Octavianus Caesar, Anthony, and Lepidus, were agreed upon the Triumvirate, they called these old blades of Caesar's together, and with them Anthony and Octavianus marched into the East against Brutus and Cassius, the chief of the Conspirators, and fought with them twice in the field of Philippos, a City in Macedonia: In the first Battle, the right wing which was led by Anthony, overthrew the left wing of the other Army led by Cassius, but the right wing of the other Army led by Brutus did as much for the left wing of his Army led by Octavianus. 
Plut. in vita Anton.  Augustus' being overthrown, secured himself in Anthony's Camp, but Cassius chose, not knowing how it fared with his companion, caused one Pindarus, a slave that he had maintained and manumitted, to cut off his head. Brutus the next day gathered up the scattered troops, but was loath to hazard battle any more, for two reasons: first, because he knew his enemies were pinched with want of victuals, and some other necessaries: secondly, because he saw the left wing of his Army which had been overthrown under Cassius his conduct, to be somewhat fearful. For these reasons, he desired to shun the second Battle, but his people were too violent, and forced him in a manner to fight, and were overthrown for their labour. After which overthrow, Brutus slew himself.  
Now that the murderers of Caesar were overthrown, 
Non bene cum sociis cegna venusque manent. Ovid.  and their faction extinguished, one should have thought there should now have succeeded a general peace, being there were but three men, Augustus, Anthony, and Lepidus, to divide (in a manner) the third part of the world between them: But, Nulla fides regni sociis, omnisque potestas impatibus consortis erat: Lucan. lib. 1. Augustus and Lepidus, fell first at variance, about the Isle of Sicily, after they had there overthrown Sextus Pompeius: In which debate, Lepidus was not only stripped of Sicily, but also of Africa, and his Triumvirate: yet because he submitted himself, Caesar spared his life, and gave him the dignity of highest Priest.  
Now were there but two to divide the world's Empire between them, Anthony in the East, and Augustus in the West, and these two sought each others ruins, that himself might rule over all, so hateful is a companion in authority. Both of them had their pretences for their quarrel: 
Caesar sororem videns; pell●is amore esse rerectam saep●us accusavi●. Plut. in vit. Anton.  Augustus objected against Anthony, that for the love of Cleopatra Queen of Egypt, a light woman, he had left his own wife Octavia, a virtuous Lady, and Augustus' sister. Anthony objected against Augustus, that he had deprived Sextus Pompeius of Sicily, and Lepidus of Africa, and held them both unjustly, without imparting to him any share at all of them, and that he had also divided the lands of Italy amongst his own soldiers, and never had any consideration of those that were his. 
Romanum imperium petit mulier Aegyptia & promisit, Anthon. quasi facilior esset Partho Romanus. Florus.  Besides, Lucius Florus saith, that Cleopatra desired of Anthony the Empire of Rome, and he as rashly promised it to her, as if the Romans had been more easy to be conquered than the Parthians. Both of them in this quarrel, resolved to try their fortunes in a Seabattell, leaving their land-forces which they had prepared, the one with Taurus, the other with Canidius, and this was effected by the power Cleopatra had with Anthony, 
Cleopatra voluntas plus potuit. Plut.  contrary to the advice of Canidius his Lieutenant General, and other of his Council of War. Both of them taking the Seas, they came to grapple one with the other, within the sight of their Land-Armies at Actium, a Promontory in Epyre. Anthony's ships, by reason of their greatness, were very slow and unwieldy, but Caesar's were yaire and nimble for all kinds of service, whether to charge, recharge, or levere about: so that three or four of Caesar's, could at once set upon one of Anthony's, and ply them with Darts, Prowess, and casting of fire on all sides, 
Prima dux ●ug● Regin●. Florus.  with which they scattered them at pleasure. The first that fied was the Queen, and herein she was to be pardoned, doing ●ut her kind: But (oh the mischief) with her she carried Anthony's heart and courage away, who all his life-time had been a valiant Captain, but now is mollified by a woman: She being fled, he forgets his Armies both by Sea and Land, and makes a main after her, and Caesar as fast after them both, but with a conquering mind; in Alexandria he besieged them: During the siege, he corrupted Anthony's Sea-forces, so that they came over to his part, which Anthony understanding, supposed himself betrayed by the Queen▪ this suspicion of his, puts her into a fear of his fury; this fear of hers, separateth her from his company, and being separate, she causeth to be given out that she had slain herself; 
Ad motis ad venas serpentibus quasi somne 〈◊〉. Flor.  which Usum no sooner heard but believed (oh wicked belief!) in which he slew himself: and being dead, Cleopatra would not live without him, but clapping Serpents to her breasts, she died in a slumber.  
This War being thus finished, Augustus had none to oppose him. wherefore he commanded the Temple of Janus to be shut up, which had happened so to be, but twice only, since the building of Rome, till that very time. But this peace lasted not long, it was first disturbed by the Celtiberian War; and next by the German: where the Romans, through the security and neglect of quintilius Varrus, lost three Legions, and two Standards with the Imperial Eagles. But oh the cruelty that these Barbarians showed after their victory, especially against men of Law; plucking out the eyes of some, and lopping off the hands of others: one had his mouth stitched up, after his tongue was cut out; 
Lucius Florus.  which the Savage grasping in his hand, said to it: Tandem vipera sibilare desist.  
These, and many more wars since these, hath this fourth Monarch of the Romans endured, with which it is now so wasted, as that the Empire is at this day confined within the limits of Germany as we see; which once spread itself over the face of the earth. But I will say no more: I hope, by this that is past, any one may see that none of the four great Monarchies of the world, how strong and settled soever, could perpetuate peace to themselves; and therefore much less can it be hoped, that this little Island of ours, or any other Kingdom, can preserve itself for ever from the danger of War. Wherefore, I will now proceed to the second part of the Proposition. It is good in time of Peace, to provide for War.    

HOW TO PROVIDE IN PEACE FOR WAR. SECT. II.  

CHAP. VI  
It is good in time of Peace, to provide for War.  
HE that will go to Sea, must beforehand provide himself of Biscuit; and that Kingdom that cannot avoid War, 
Non minus in secundis adversa, quam in adver●s secunda ●●●tanda sunt. Just l. 31.  must before hand be provided of means to withstand it: for nothing can be more unseasonable, than to be about provision, at such time as we should be in action. A wise State (like Hannibal) will in prosperity provide for adversity, 
Cane ne Clip●um post vulnera sumas.  as well as in adversity, hope for prosperity; if they do otherwise, peradventure they may have their heads broken, before they betake themselves to their bucklers: As may appear, by the example of Katherine Queen of Navarre, and John of Albert her Husband; whose want of timely preparatio, gave occasion to Ferdinand the Catholic King, not only to invade their Kingdom, but also after invasion, easily to subdue it. Had this Queen and her husband, been in time provided, Ferdinand would either have desisted from enterprising any thing against them, or else he would have capitulated with them concerning a peace, in which they might have had the better conditions, being provided for war: 
Pacem sub Clipeo parate. Sallust.  for the best treating for peace, is with the sword in hand. Or if he would have been so hardy, as to have given them battle, they being provided, sure might have expected far better success than they found: but they were found unfurnished, and that was the loss of their Kingdom. And the same, may be the loss of any other. For how hard and difficult will it be, for any Nation, to resist an Enemy invading, 
Inopinata magis premiunt male. Seneca.  if they prevent not his arrival by their provisions. People are discouraged, by the suddenness of danger, and rather study how by flight to shift for their particular safety, than by making head, to preserve their Country from the Enemy.  
But, if any be so virtuously minded as to make resistance, how difficult will it be for them to draw together, in such a Kingdom as ours, where we have no fortified Towns, to hold the enemy play? The enemy shall no sooner hear of any assembly, but presently he will be upon them with his horse, to sever them before they can be able to make head against him: unless they will fly to the utmost limits of the Kingdom, there to make up an Army in haste; suffering in the mean time, the Enemy to enrich himself with the spoil of the Country; and when such an Army is composed, what good can be expected from it, seeing it must needs consist of raw, and untrained people, hastily gathered together, and altogether unskilful in the use of Arms? When Caesar came against Pompey the Great into Italy, Pompey and the Senate, being unable to make resistance for want of timely provision; they were glad to forsake, not only the other parts of Italy, but Rome itself, and fly into Greece, before they could draw any competent numbers together, to give the Enemy Battle. Let Pompey's carelessness be condemned, and let wi●e Estates imitate Augustus Caesar; who at the first brute of Anthony's stirring, 
Ad priv●am novorum 〈…〉. Caesar 〈…〉. l. 4. c. 1●  provided himself, and crossed over from brundu●um, to give War the meeting; thinking it more safe so to do, than to receive it within the limits and borders of his own Italy: By these precedent relations, I hope any man may see; That it is good in time of Peace, to provide for War.   

CHAP. VII.  
Of the Things necessarily to be provided; And first of Victuals.  
THe things especially to be provided; are Victnals, Weapons, Money, Ships, 
1 Ma●ch. 8. 16.  and Men: all of them needful for the maintenance of War, 
Ne ●ut Romanae dit●o● is ●um Judais bellum gerere li●●at, nequ● prabere hostibus eorum, trit●cum aut n●vis, aut pecuntam. Joseph. An●iq. l. 12. c. 18.  and such as if they be not provided in time of Peace, can hardly be procured, the war being begun. And first for Victuals; so needful they are, as that without them no Army can be maintained, neither by Sea nor Land, nor any Town (how strong soever) without them can be defended. This want of victuals was the ●os●e of jerusalem, of San●erra, of Paris, and lately Rochel, to the French King. 
Stows Annals in vita Elizabeth.  The like want of victuals and other necessaries, hindered our Navy in 88 so that it could follow the Spaniards no further; whereby we lost a fair advantage that God had given us, of destroying that whole Fleet. If in the Field an Army be pinched with want, it must starve or fight, be the disadvantage never so great; whereas that Army that is well provided, can fight when it sees advantage, and can forbear till it have got it. And by this means alone, would Pompey have beaten Caesar out of Greece in despite of him, 
Lucius Florus l. 4. c. 2.  had not the Senate (in a manner against his will) forced him to fight in the field of Philippi. It is requisite therefore for a Prince when he is to use his forces either by Sea or Land, to appoint, not only experienced, but also faithful mento be his Stewards, to make his provisions for his Armies; such as will faithfully lay out his Treasure, according as the affairs in hand require, and not imbeazell them in riotous courses, nor hoard them up for their own private gain.   

CHAP. VIII.  
Of the preparation of Armour and Weapons,  
Look how necessary Victuals be for the maintenance of a Soldier's life; 
Plurimum adterrem hostium, splendour ●orf●rt, a● competens armorum aparatus plurimum facit 〈◊〉 recessitatem. Po●lybiis hist. l. 11.  so needful is Armour for the defence of it: Nature hath furnished us ●ut with a thin and weak defence, against either shot of Musket, 
Armanon Supellectilem decar●esse. Sallust bello Jugurth.  or push of Pike. Herein must be a supply of Nature's defect; good Armour and Weapons must be provided, else we can neither defend ourselves, 
Studium illud vestimentis seize ornand● mulieris esse, idque non admodum pudicae, armorum vero sumptum & serium studium bonor●m, virorum qui & se & patrem serv●r● cupiant, Polyb. l. 11.  nor offend our foes; as may appear by the ancient Britons, whose naked valour (though as great as might be) could not gainstand, much less offend, the Roman Arms. Wherefore, it were to be wished that all men, especially those who have the name of Soldiers, would transfer the care of apparel, which so much troubles this age of ours, unto the study of Arms, and provision of Armour; and that their former negligence of Armour, might be transferred to apparel; for so should they both provide for their own particular safety, and for the general safety of the Kingdom. But because some private men will be negligent this way, whatsoever be said to the contrary; it were requisite therefore, that those that have the oversight of the Musters, should be careful to see all Companies full; and be more diligent, to certify the defects in Arms, to them that have power to punish; and that they would have regard, that all Muskets be of one boar, and not of several, as now they are; from whence a great confusion would arise in time of need, if it be not amended: (which must be by some strict order taken with the Gunmakers, that the Kingdom be not so abused.) Also they must have regard that when a Training is done in one place, Armour be not borrowed to show in another; for such errors as these, may be very prejudicial to a Kingdom in time of danger: There must be care had also that the enemy have no odds or advantage of us in weapons, whether Musket or Pike, if we look for good success in the War; for odds in this kind, will carry a victory both against valour and number; as appeared in the Wars between Pope Alexander the sixth, 
Guiccardi●e.  and the Orsini, where Vitellozze having provided his soldiers of Pikes two foot longer than ordinary, carried away the victory from the Ecclesiastic soldiers, who had the odds of him, both in courage and number.   

CHAP. IX.  
Of the Provision of Money.  
IT sufficeth not to the strength of the Arms, 
Quemadmodum homines sine nervis ambulare ne●●●unt, ita nec bellum of ●ua● progredi sine p●cu●a. Lips. pol. l. 5.  to have flesh, blood, and bones, unless they have also sinews, to stretch out and pull in, for defence of the body; so it sufficeth not in an Army to have Victuals, for the maintenance of it; Armour and Weapons for the defence of it; unless it have Money also, the sinews of War; which above all things beareth sway with the common soldier, and causeth him to venture upon any danger, which oftentimes for want of pay he will refuse. 
Viget. l. ●  Wherefore Vegetius gives this advice; Antequam inchoetur bellum, de copus expensisque solicitus debet esse tractatus: I do marvel not that she is called Regina pecunia; seeing that all men yield obeisance to her, she it is that traineth the soldiers to the Wars, who otherwise would sleep quietly at home. The Bailiff of Diion sent by the French King into Switzerland to hire soldiers, could train none along with him, 
Guiccardine. 〈…〉 pretium nunc est, dat 〈◊〉 honores, cersus amic●●a●. Ovid.  because his Master's coffers were known to be empty: but so soon as the King's Exchequer was well filled with the money which he had of the Florentines, for the restitution of Pisa and other cautionary Towns, the Swissers came down to his aid, in greater numbers than he required. So when Rezin and Pekah Kings of Syria and Israel, 
2 King. 16. 8.  made war upon Ahaz King of judah; he with a present of Silver and Gold, easily drew Tiglath-Pileser King of Assyria, to his aid and succour. 
Imperat aut servit collecta 〈◊〉. Horat Serm.   
It is likewise Money and pay, that keeps the Army in good order, and makes it strictly to observe discipline, the preserver of all; Pay is the poor soldiers Aqua vitae, 
Dis●iplinam non 〈◊〉 servare 〈…〉. Cassi●dor.  which makes him comfortably undergo the hardest command; but want of it is such an Aqua fortis, as eats through the iron doors of Discipline, and causeth whole Armies to rush into disorders: and ever when they are commanded upon any Servi●e, their usual fashion, is to demand their Pay, and refuse the employment.  
Furthermore, Money is of such force, as that it will not only prevent an Enemy's invasion, 
Salustius in bello Jugurthino.  but also beat him back, and cause him speedily to retire; when as Arms are no way able to do it: As may appear by the example of Jugurth; who having sorely incensed the Romans by the slaughter of Hiempsall, yet nevertheless prevailed so far upon them with his money, 
Haec fuit de nobis ejus prima victoria ●lorus.  as that he drew, even the Senate, to take his part against Adherball his accuser. Afterwards, this same Jugurth was so hardy, as to cashier Adherball out of that part of Numidia, which the Romans had estated him in; then was War decreed in the Senate, and Calpurnius Bestia the Consul, 
Rex peritus fortius adversus Romanos aurum esse, quam ferrum pacem 〈◊〉. Florus.  sent into Numidia against him; but the crafty King, knowing that Gold could do more against the Romans than steel, bought his peace. Now being assured, that all things for money, were to be bought and sold at Rome; he slew even within the walls of the City, Massina grandchild to Massinissa his Competitor in the Kingdom. Now had the Romans a third cause of war against him, which was likewise decreed; and the managing of it was committed to Albinus: but (oh the shame) Jugurth so bribed this Army also, that it voluntarily gave away, and suffered him to take from them, 
Sallust in bello. Jugurth.  both the Victory and their Camp withal. Neither could the Romans ever have any hope to withstand the force of Jugurths' money, until M●tellus came to deal with him, of whom they expected very much; especially, Quod adversus divitias invictum animum gerebat.  
The like example, 
Phil. de Com l. 4.  Philip de Comines reporteth of our Edward the fourth; who by the solicitation of the Duke of Burgundy, passed into France, with greater forces than any of his Predecessors had ever done; and yet this valorous Prince, who had been Conqueror in nine several Battles before, suffered the victory at this time to be taken from him, with the payment of 72000. Crowns: as Lewis of Brettailles, one of King Edward's servants, affirmed to Philip Commines; for which we were derided by the French, as we well deserved. To conclude, money is of such matchless force, as nothing almost but a free and liberal mind (which few men have) can withstand it; there is no bait to the golden hook, nor weapon to the silver spear, nor Fort, be it never so strong, that can hold out against the Mulet charged with Treasure; 
Vrbem venalem & mature perituram, si emptorem munerit. Sallust. Bello Jugurth.  It was the opinion of Jugurth (as Sallust reporteth) that Rome itself, even then when she was at her highest pitch, was vendible; and would quickly come to ruin, had she but had a Chapman, that would bid fair for her: Wherefore seeing that money is such a real advantage in the Wars, we may conclude; that whosoever prepareth for War, must first be provided of Money, the Sinews thereof.   

CHAP. X.  
Of the provision of Shipping.  
SHipping is so necessary in Maritine Countries, especially in Island▪ (as this Kingdom is) who on all sides, coast it upon the Sea; as that no War, neither offensive nor defensive, can be well managed without it. If we be on the offensive part, our forces cannot be transported without Shipping; and if we be on the defensive part, we cannot well keep out an enemy without the same. For though the Enemy may make his approaches in one place, and endeavour to land there, yet then will the strength of the Island be drawn thither to impeach his landing; which the Enemy perceiving, can easily put out to Sea again, and by next day be in another part of the Country, where he may gain landing peradventure, with less hazard: But suppose resistance be made there also, yet can he by putting to Sea again, find out a third, fourth, or fifth place, as convenient for his landing as either of the former; and I am sure we cannot have an Army in every Harbour to impeach him, much less can we with one Army so speedily follow him, as to prevent his gaining the shore; because he can sail farther in one night, than we can march in diverse days, and if he hath gained our shore, he can either sufficiently entrench himself, before we can possible come to impeach him; or he can pillage and waste the Country, and be gone again to another part of the Island, when he perceives the approach of our Land forces; and there also do according to his own discretion.  
An example hereof we have in our own Chronicles; 
Stows Annals in vita Edmund.  Canutus the Dane, entering the Thames with a mighty Navy, besieged the City of London; but being unable to prevail there, he re-imbarkes his men, and sails into the West of England; where at his pleasure, he landed them again in Dorcetshire; there Edmond, surnamed Iron-side, after a long and tedious march met with him; which Canutus perceiveing, ships his men again, and enters the Severne; causing Edmund to beat upon the hoof, to relieve Worcestershire; which the Dane had much pillaged. No sooner was Edmund arrived there, but Canutus re-imbarked again, and came for London; after him speeds Edmund: and then the Danes repair to their ships, and so returned for the Western parts. Thus they tired Edmund and his whole Army, with continual marches; ever wasting the Country, before resistance could be made.  
The like example, we have in Maurice Earl of Nassaw, who in the year 1590. shipped his forces, with forty Canons, pretending for Gertrudenberg; and to make the Enemy believe so, he sailed up the River so far as Breda; the Enemy presently thrust into Gertrudenberg, such men and provision as was fit for resistance; which the Grave understanding, changed his course and sailed up the Rhine, and thence into the River Yssell; and so fell down the stream before Zutphen, which he surprised, before the Archduke (who was 80. miles from thence) could come with his succours; when the Archduke approached, the Count retires to his ships; and changing his course, arrives before Hulst in Brabant, which he surprised, ere the Spaniards well understood where he was; when the Archduke approached near Hulst, Prince Maurice returns to his Navy, and presents it before Nimmegem, in the Confines of Guilders, which he also surprised before the tired Spaniard could come with his forces.  
By this I hope, 
Atheniensibus Delphios Oraeulorum consolentibus, responsum fuerat, salutem Mu●is ●gn●is tucrentur, id est, Navibus. Justin. l. 2.  you may see; how difficult it is for Islanders, and Maritine Countries, without Shipping, to make resistance against an invading Enemy; wherefore Mariners and Shipping, must be maintained by us that are Islanders; else can we not long abide in safety; and so I will conclude with Saint Paul's speech, Acts 27. 31. Unless the Mariners abide in the Ship, ye cannot be safe.   

CHAP. XI.  
Of the provision of Soldiers, and Land-forces.  
AS it is needful for Islanders and Maritine Countries, to maintain Shipping and Mariners; So is it as needful for them to maintain Soldiers and Land-forces; which though they be the last refuge, yet are they the safest and strongest defence, and must wholly be relied on: For it is possible that the enemy may overpower us at Sea, or he may by help of Winds and Mists, or other advantages that may be gotten, gain footing on our shore, though we have a more potent Navy than he on the Seas; and how shall we deal with them on land if we maintain not our Land-forces and Martial discipline? for which this Island hath been very famous in times past; Should we suffer our soldiery and the Art of War to decay amongst us, ten thousand of the Enemies well trained, would foil forty thousand of ours, that are not fleshed, nor know the use of their arms, were they never so valiant; For Valour in the wars without skill, availeth but little: As may appear by the example of Alexander the Great; who with no more than 40. thousand well-trained soldiers (Macedonians) in the fields of Adrastia, overthrew six hundred thousand Persians, that were unskilful in the use of their Arms.  
I would to God that notice might be taken hereof, and that greater care might be had of our Training then is; that they might no longer be used as matters of disport, and things of no moment; but as needful for the training up of soldiers, and enabling of men for the Wars, against times of danger and hostility; so should our Prince and his Kingdoms, receive both honour and security: But as Training are now used, we shall I am sure, never be able to make one good soldier; for our custom and use is now adays, to cause our Companies to meet on a certain day, and by that time the Arms be all viewed, the Muster-master hath had his pay (which is the chiefest thing many times he looks after) it draws towards dinner time; and indeed Officers love their bellies so well, as that they are loath to take too much pains about disciplining of their soldiers. Wherefore, after a little careless hurrying over of the Postures, with which the Companies are nothing bettered, they make them charge their Muskets, and so prepare to give the Captain a brave volley of shot at his entrance into his Inn; where having solaced themselves a while after this brave service, every man repairs home; and that which is not well taught them (oh the shame) is easily forgotten before the next Training. Whereas, if we trained but twice in the year, and at each time kept the Companies together, but three or four days at the most; they would be better acquainted with their Arms and the use of them: so often practising of them at one time, would make them remember what is showed, better than seven years' practice as now we go to work.  
But, peradventure some will think, that to keep soldiers so long together at once, would damnify the Country, by reason of neglect of husbandry: But as far as I conceive, it would rather be beneficial to the Country; for now every Month in the Summer, they lose a day by reason of the Training, and the greater part of the Soldiers use to fall a drinking after the Training, and happily lose the next day also; and so in the Months of june, july, and August, which are busy times for Hay, and Harvest, they lose three days or more; which is more damage to them, than eight days in May and September, for these are the two times in the year, wherein husbandmen have more leisure, than in any other of the Summer-Moneths; in May, because all their seed is then in the ground, and no Hay nor Corn ready; in the latter end of September, because Harvest and Hop-time, for the most part is over, and wheat-seed not fully come; wherefore I think, with less damage, they might spare four days together in May, and so many also in September, than to spare in every of the Summer months but one.  
We have other inconveniences also which attend our Training, and hindereth our breeding of Soldiers; for we appoint our meetings, commonly near some great Town, as indeed it is meet for the relief of the Companies, but this inconvenience followeth thereon: when we are in the Field, many of our soldiers (so regardless are they of the Service) slip away, and are in the Inns and Taverns tippling, when they should be exercising in the field. And this is another cause, why diverse of them are so ignorant in the use of their Arms; hereby also they get an ill habit of drinking, which is the disgrace of our Nation and the loss of many of our soldiers, at such times as they are employed in foreign service: As appeared in the taking of the Groin, 
Stows Annals in vita Elizabeth.  where by immoderate drinking, many of the soldiers became senseless and unserviceable, being altogether careless both of their proper healths, present danger, and employment. By this inordinate drinking, the Plague was bred among them; and (which is worse) the sword of the Enemy might have cut them off; 
Priusquam Scythae ebrietate, quam Bello vincuntur. Just▪ lib. 1.  had not the General, for redress hereof, caused the head of all Wine-vessels, to be strucken out: according to a former precedent (upon the like occasion) in the conquest of S. Dominigo Jago▪ etc. For prevention of which abuse, the Captains must either have more power to punish, or if they have power enough already, they must better put it in practice upon such malefactors, or we shall never be able to make them Soldiers.  
Secondly, we admit into our trained Bands, without judgement or discretion, any that are offered, how unlikely, or uncapable soever they be of the Art military; yea, which is worse, we suffer them almost every Training to alter their men, and put in new ones, and how is it possible, with our best skill and pains, to make such men soldiers? Mercury's Image is not to be made of every wood, nor every dull heavy fellow, to be made a Mars or man of War; care must be had to correct this abuse also, if we will have able soldiers to oppose against an enemy. We must therefore herein imitate the worthy Citizens of London, 
Stows Annals in vita Elizabeth.  who in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth, chose out of their several Companies, three thousand of the most likely and active persons, whom they appointed to be Pikemen and shot: These that we admit into our trained Bands, must be likely and active; for every one that will be a soldier, must have these two qualities in him; Likeliness, and Ingenuity to conceive the use of his Arms, and then Activity and Ability of body, to put it in practice.  
Thirdly, some be admitted for their wealth's sake, into Captaineships, which neither have courage, skill, nor delight in Arms themselves, nor discretion to command others; but I hope of these not many, yet if any, it is too many; for how can we hope to make our people soldiers, when they be under blind and ignorant guides; 
Matth. 15. 14.  If the Blind lead the Blind, the issue (as our Saviour saith) will be; Ambo in foveam cadunt: We will not commit the teaching of our children to a Dunce, and what reason is there we should commit the leading of our soldiers to such a one? wherefore this must be remedied also, and I suppose it may easily be done by the honourable care of the Lord Lieutenant in every County: Had we but all these abuses well corrected, me thinks we might make our English trained Bands, parallel the best soldiers in Europe.  
Now because in times of danger, it is requisite that the trained soldiers should be drawn to the Coasts to resist the Enemies landing; it were fit that men should provide themselves of double Armour, that we might also have an Army of the best men of the Kingdom, to guard the heart of the Land; and to keep under dis-affected persons, if any such be; which Army as occasion served, might give succour to the Trained Soldiers, 
Stow in regno Haroldi.  in case they should be in any danger; for it is not safe to hazard all upon the fortune and success of one Battle; as King Harold did (contrary to the advice of his brother Girthe) by means of which he was defeated, his people disheartened, his Enemy Duke William animated; and finally, thereupon followed his own and all his subjects confusion: For upon his enemies marching forward after the Battle, every man for his own particular safety, reconciled himself to the Conqueror; whereas, if there had been an Army in the heart of the Land, to have seconded the other, it would both have bridled the Enemy, succoured the distressed Army, and have kept the Natives from revolting.  
For the better composing of such an Army, in the heart of the Land; it were well also if all our great Cities and Towns, would imitate the famous Cities of London, and Westminster: which have instituted the two Artillery yards, for the training up of their ablest Citizens, in the use of their Arms; from whence not only good soldiers, but also many good Leaders and Officers might be drawn, for the conduction of our forces in the heart of the Kingdom.  
Furthermore, whereas diverse Noblemen and Gentlemen keep proper men to attend them; if they would but take care to have such Servants well instructed in the use of their Arms, both on Horseback and Foot, what exceeding profit and honour might redound to his Majesty, and his Kingdoms, if he should have any sudden employments? And those Servants thus soldierlike qualified, were as easily maintained and kept, and as fit for any other service, as those brave swaggering fellows; who had rather be like Sardanapalus among light women, than among Troops of armed soldiers: And truly such Noblemen and Gentlemen their bee in diverse places, who to do their Prince Service, are at great charges to keep diverse good and well ridden Horses, and diverse Gentlemen with good furniture, to serve both on Foot and Horseback.  
Besides if every private man, whether in the City or in the Country, which keeps Coaches for their own ease and reputation, would but have furniture for the riding and managing of such Horses, what an increase of strength would this be in sudden danger?  
Lastly, whereas diverse Gentlemen of the lower rank, and rich Yeomen, keep very good Teams of Horses for their private use; if such would but have furniture for one of their principle Horses, which when they had leisure, they might ride and manage for their recreation; this would make his Majesty, if occasion served, equal if not superior in Horse, to any Prince in Europe; neither would it be any great charge to any man, only the purchase of the furniture, and arms, which once gotten, would last to Generations.  
We would easily be persuaded to these things, 
Publica privatis ante ferenda bonis.  had we but as great a care for the general safety of the Kingdom, as we have for our own particular security: which of us in there, that is not at great cost and charges, for provision of strong Gates, doors, and locks, without; and of strong Closets and Chests within, for the preservation of our own private wealth and substance; but what will this private care avail us, if we be negligent of the general safety of the Kingdom? Should we by our senseless security suffer an Enemy to pick the locks that are to keep him out of the Realm; What good would all our private Gates, Doores, Locks, Closets, and Chests do us, for the preservation either of our Estates or Lives? Wherefore, let us be persuaded rather to respect the common good in keeping out an Enemy, by provision of Arms, and able soldiers, than in looking to our own private honour and security, by building our houses strong and stately.  
But some peradventure will think, this provision of land-forces, is altogether needless; because no Enemy can make war upon us, we living in an Island; but upon very difficult terms: First, in regard of our dangerous Seas and Harbours. Secondly, in regard of our Navy and shipping; which upon intelligence, will be fitted to entertain them. Thirdly, in regard of our strong Castles, and Blockhouses; which will be able to impeach their landing. As for our Seas and Harbours, true it is they are dangerous, 
Histori● Natural. l. ● c. ●7.  in regard of their high Tides; which flow (as Pliny saith) 80. Cubits in height: yet for all this, our own, and Neighbours shipping, (having good Pilots) daily frequent them without damage or danger: and doubtless, what Enemy soever assaulteth us, will store himself with Pilots, which knows our Seas and Harbours as well as ourselves; as may appear by the practice of the King of Spain, in the year 1588. Wherefore, we may not be too secure, upon conceit of our dangerous Seas and Harbours.  
Secondly, for our shipping; true it is, if we have sure intelligence, we should be provided: and doubtless, would quell an enemy that should dare to approach them: But the Enemy to blind our intelligence, may carry his designs in the Clouds, by making his preparation in diverse parts and Ports of his Kingdom; as if they were to be sent to sundry places, and about sundry employments; and yet all these several Heets, after some time beating on the Seas, may meet and join; cutting a speedy passage through the waters to accomplish their designs. By such courses as these, our intelligence may be deceived, and so our Ships unfurnished. Yet suppose we have sure knowledge of the enemy's purpose, and have our Navy in readiness, yet are there 32. points in the Compass to sail by, and our Island the Centre; in one of these 32. points, must our Navy await the approaches of the Enemy; and he to eschew their opposition, and gain our shore, may sail by 20. other. Yea, though he sail upon the same point whereon our Ships do lie, yet may he without discovery escape them, by the help of a Mist or night. Or suppose our ships discover and fight with them, yet we know victory in every fight is doubtful; because no understanding Enemy will put out to Sea, but with such a Fleet, as he thinks is proportionable to his adversaries, whom he assaileth. Therefore, you see we must not rely upon our shipping.  
Neither may we rely too much upon our Blockhouses and Forts, for the sure keeping out of an Enemy; for they are not very many: I am sure we have them not upon every Harbour where the Enemy may land; and those we have, are not very strong, not answerable to those Forts beyond the Seas. But though they were, yet experience teacheth us that upon swift currents they are of little use; for in such streams, if a Navy have but a merry Wind and Tide, a hundred sail may pass by one of them, without having much damage; as was seen in the three years' siege of Ostend, 
Grimston.  where the Archduke had planted two Batteries, one on the West, and the other on the East side of the Haven▪ yet the ships every day passed too and fro from the Town, and scarce one vessel touched, when 70. shot had been made at a Fleet; and in the whole three years' siege, scant 50. Vessels were sunk, when thousands passed too and again, every year.  
Likewise, in Queen Elizabeth's time, the King of Denmark threatened to stop our Eastland Fleet at the Sound; 
Sir Walter Raleigh.  yet they passed by his Castles, having one of the Queen's ships called the Minion, to lead them, and received no hurt; this so provoked the King, that he made the best provision he possible could, to sink them at their return; but the Queen's ship led the way back again, and did not only pass in safety, but beat down part of the Fort of Elsenore.  
So in the siege of Antwerp the Duke of Alva so planted his Ordnance, that it was thought to be impossible for a Boat to pass them; yet the Zealanders having fair Wind and Tide, passed by daily without damage. Wherefore, you see notwithstanding all these colourable objections, Land-forces must be provided, if we will be in safety.  
Now Land-forces being (as is aforesaid) provided: Mr. Edmunds in his observations upon Caesar's Commentaries, would have them thus ordered; Those that are appointed for the guard of the Coasts, he would ha●e divided into three divisions; viz, a Body, and two Wings; the Body to double the strength of the Wings, and to be quartered in this manner: the Body to attend the principle place supposed for the Enemies landing, the two Wings to lie upon some other Haven, where also is danger of landing, being about ten miles distant on either hand of the Body. If the Enemy shall assail either of the Wings, the Body being quartered between them both, easily moves to either of their aids. Or if he assault the Body, they from either side being alike distant; as easily moves to its succour; and so doing, they may hold an Enemy play, till the forces of the Country comes down. But in regard the Land is spacious and wide, it were well that soldiers should learn to ride on Horseback with their complete Arms, for so might they move further (if a sudden Alarm should ●e given) in one day, than on foot they can march in two. These are of great use in Germany, where they want Vessels for the speedy conveying of their men, which they call Dragons, which both on horseback and on foot do very good service; and here might they be brought in use as well as there, we being as well furnished with swift highway Nags, as any Nation in Europe.  
And for further endangering of an Enemy, if there were good notice taken throughout all the Coasts of the Land, of those Marks which serves for the direction of Ships to recover their wished Harbour; these in time of danger being removed (unknown to the Enemy) might bring him in very great hazard of our dangerous Rocks and Sands; and in regard our Seacoasts are so large, and our Harbours so many, as that in every one of them we cannot have an Army to defend it, it were well that in places of advantage (such as winding waters be, which are commonly slow, and where at every turn they cannot have the help of the Wind) some more Forts were built; in such places they would endanger an Enemy, if he should dare to approach them; how ever they would secure the Coasts from rifling and robbing by Pirates, as often they be in times of Hostility.    

THE MANNER OF FORTIFICATION. SECT. III.  

CHAP. XII.  
The Abridgement of Geometry, so far as belongs to the Art of Fortification.  
BEfore we can enter into this discourse of Fortification, we must first take a Survey of the Abridgement of Geometry; so far as is necessary to be used in this Art: Wherefore to begin with the first Proposition.  

Proposition, 1.  
To divide a Line equally in the midst as A B, you must make two Arches C D, placing your compasses at the extremes A and B, closing them more than half of the Line; your Arches being made, draw your line of Intersection from C to D, and this line shall equally divide in two parts the line A B.   

Proposition, 2.  
To draw a perpendicular upon a line (viz.) a line that falls in such sort upon another, that it makes two equal Angles; neither inclining to one side nor the other, so that it falls plumb as the line A B, upon the which you must raise a perpendicular; you must demean your Compasses as in the first Proposition: and the line C D shall be the perpendicular; so that it falls right upon the line A B, making two equal Angles.   

Proposition, 3.  
A point given upon a line, let fall a perpendicular; as the point given is C, upon the line A B, you must place your Compass in the point C, and draw the Arch D E, then place your Compass again in F, and make the Arch H, and likewise in G, making the Arch I: lastly, draw from the point C, which shall answer to the point K.   

Proposition, 4.  
To draw a perpendicular at the end of a line, viz. at the point A place your Compasses; making the Arch C and D: then place your Compasses in C, making the Arch E; and at the point E, draw the Arch F G: Lastly, from the point G, make the Arch H, then draw the line I A, and that shall be the perpendicular upon the end of the line B A, at the point A.   

Proposition, 5.  
To make a line parallel by another (viz.) of equidistance; so that if they be drawn never so long, they shall never touch nor cross one the other; let there be a line drawn as A B, above the which, there must be a Parallel made: to perform this, place your Compasses in A, making your Arch: E D, place them likewise in B, making the Arch F G: Lastly, you must draw the line I K, which must touch the ends of the two Arches; and those lines shall be parallel or equidistant.   

Proposition, 6.  
To make one Angle equal to another, as the Angle A B C, of the which we desire to make one equal: First, draw the line D E, then place the point of your Compasses is B, making the Arch F G. Likewise, draw another Arch in the point D. Lastly, take the distance F G, and put it from H to I, drawing the line D K, which shall pass by the point I, and you shall find the angle K D E, equal to A B C.   

Proposition, 7.  
To make a square of a line given; as the line A B, we must draw the perpendiculers at each end of the same length, the square will have then four right Angles, and the sides equal.  
  

Proposition, 8.  
To make a Paralellagram (viz.) a long square having both the sides equally opposite; and four right Angles: this is effected by the same rule the Square is made.  
For the raising of Fortifications, we must observe what Figures are capable of Regular Fortification, and what are uncapable; which are termed Irregular.  
Regular Fortifications are such forms or figures, which contain in them Angles sufficiently equal, and capable for the direct answering one to another; six points being the least that may be admitted, and so upwards: all figures under, are termed Irregular; as the figure Pentagon consisting of Five points, the Fouresquare, the Triangle, etc.  
We will first begin with Irregular-figures used in Fortification; of which the Pentagon is the best, in regard it hath more capacity in it, than the Fouresquare, or Triangle, or Halfmoons, etc. The form of this Figure hath five points, by reason of five Lines that divide the Circumference in five equal parts, as by this Figure appears.  
The next Irregular Figure, is the Four square; and is capable of four Bulwarks, upon each point one; and is termed a Sconce, as the Figure demonstrates.  
The first Regular Figure is called Sexagon, because it hath six equal sides, dividing the Cord in six points (upon which points are six Bulwarks to be raised) The same proportion of distance your Compasses take, in making the Circumference, without stirring them, being placed six times upon the Circumference, makes the said Figure in the Margin.  
The second Regular Figure is termed Septagon, because it contains 7. points of equal distances in the Circumference, and this is of greater defence than the former; for the more points the Circumference is capable of, the greater is the resistance; as the Figure in the Margin shows.  
The third Regular Figure is termed Octagon, because it contains eight sides, the Circumference being divided by eight points of equal distance; the rest, for brevity sake, we will only name: by these already described, any Figure, of what diversity of sides soever; most easily may be framed.  
Nonagon, 
Nonagon.  is a Figure of nine sides.  
Decagon, 
Decagon.  a Figure of Ten sides.  
Vndecagon, 
Vndecagon.  a Figure of Eleven sides.  
Duodecagon, 
Duodecagon.  a Figure of Twelve sides; & sic usque ad infinitum: These are sufficient to serve for the use of Fortification; because it is very rare, that any Town hath more than twelve Bulworks; and as I have said before, these Figures are called Regular, because they have their sides, and their Angles equal: all other forms are called irregular.    

CHAP. XIII.  
How to Line and Stake out any bulwark upon a Regular Figure.  
THere can be no perfect Fortification made, without the use of these precedent Figures: as for our example, the Figure Sexagon is to have six Bulworks (viz.) one upon every Angle; and so accordingly of the rest of the Figures, so many Angles as many Bulwarks. But first, before we begin to fortify any place, we are to consider the situation, and the form and fashion of it; to the end we may the better know how many Bulwarks will be requisite: wherefore we will begin to fortify the Figure Sexagon, because it is the first Regular form; as for the Triangle itself, it is altogether unproper to be fortified, because the Angles of it are too sharp, and pointing out: and likewise for the uncapableness of the place: for such Bulwarks as are made upon three Angles, do so far point out and extend themselves, that they are of no strength to relieve each the other: Likewise the square Figure is very rarely fortified with Bulwarks, unless in case of necessity, where it may be helped and assisted by some natural strength, as Skinkens-Skonse by Cleve, is naturally fortified and strengthened with two great Rivers surrounding it. Likewise the Figure Pentagon, although the points of it are more apt to be fortified, yet it is not capable of all those essential parts, that a perfect fortification ought to have. Therefore we will begin to comment upon the Figure Sexagon; and as we have showed before, this Figure is to have six Bulwarks (viz.) one upon every Angle: We are further to suppose, that the Figure aforesaid contains in circuit 180. Geometrical paces, and five feet to every such pace; so that every side between Angle and Angle, will contain 30. paces; and being thus divided into six equal distances, of 30. paces in each, the whole amounts to 180. paces; for six times 30. makes as before, 180. Now it remains to make a Scale, as you may perceive in this Figure following, marked with A B, with the which Scale we will give all the proportions of this Fortesse, which we now intent to set forth for an example to the ingenuous Practitioner.  
The manner how to Line out a Fort, with the Bulworks belonging to it.  
The Figure being drawn, and the Scale made after the form in the precedent Figure described; then place the point of your Compass to the Scale, and take 30. paces: and setting the point upon each Angle make therewith a Circumference, as you perceive upon the angle marked with the letter C, which Circumferences will justly proportion the signs of each bulwark, as you may perceive it to be 30. paces on each side, 
Note the line of defence is 150. paces, and not longer, because it is taken from the ● part of the Curtin total, and not from the Angle of the Flank, as Errard Be●lay, Flame Catanes, and John Cales would have it, wherein they much err, as afterwards I shall demonstrate.  which makes 60. Then for the making of the Flanks to the bulwark, you must take 30. paces also: Then you must draw a perpendicular line from P to Q, of 30. paces, as the figure next following doth teach you: next we are to draw the line of defence, by which the bulwark is defended, drawn by the Curtain (viz.) from S, and passeth by the point Q, and runneth into the bulwark R: View the following Figure.  
Lastly, the Ditch ought to be drawn with a parallel line by the face of the Bulworks, (viz,) from the lines R q, the length of 30. paces, for to proportion out the length of the foresaid Ditch; as appears by the line drawn from M to N, the Bastions of this Fortress are almost flanquered, with the third pa● of the whole Curtain: And this Fortress hath the Flanks Fichans, as some Enginieres term it, because the line of defence which proceeds from the Casmats, is not parallel; and beside, the Flank Fichant produceth a longer Pand, 
This kind of bulwark that takes its defence from any place or part of the Curtin, doth cause the Line of defence proceeding from th● flanked Angle to the flank, to be a Flank Fichant, as the French terms it▪  than the other kind of shouldered Flanks do; as appears in the figure, by P and S. for the line P q, is a Flank Fichant, and very serviceable in two respects; as appears by Mounsieur Bellayes discourse, Pag. 11. Touching the Enemies securing himself from the Canon, in the point of a bulwark, after a breach made, that the Flank Fichant will be most offensive to him in that place; as will appear if a line be drawn from the Angle of the flank, to the flanked Angle, for from thence a piece of Artillery will fetch him out of the point, or cause him to go far in, or you may fetch him out from any place of the flank near to it, also by taking the defence from that part of the Curtain, you may place shot betwixt it and the flank to defend the flanked Angle: Indeed Errard hath made mention of a cheaper way of fortifying, by deciphering a bulwark with a more obtuse Angle, a shorter Pand, and a bulwark with a shorter Diameter than this I have set forth: and as it is of less charge, so it is of small defence, in regard it is deficient of parts to defend itself: Now I will further show, both by discourse and figure, another kind of fllancking, of this Exagon form in the next Chapter following:  
The figure of this precedent discourse follows.   

CHAP. XIIII.  
How to fortify the Exagon Figure, with the second kind of Flanks.  
IN the precedent Figure, you are directed how to line out the Bulwarks upon an Exagon Figure; and although the Flanks thereof are so much discovered, that the enemy may ruin them in a short time: I shall now endeavour to show you another kind of Flank with a shoulder, as the next following Figure hath, marked with, a a to the end that the Flank B should be covered from the force of the shot; So that if the enemy should plant his Ordinance upon the battery C. to shoot against the Flank B. it cannot possibly make a breach, because it must first ●atter down the shoulder A. which will nothing advantage them to do; or if the enemy thinks to pass by the shoulder with his shot, he cannot possibly hit the Flank, but must graze against the Curtin: And for this only purpose the shoulder was first invented to join to the Flank. Now for the forming the Shoulder, you must part with your compasses, the length of this Flank into three equal parts, and take two of these parts to frame the Shoulder A. the third part is the length of the Flank B. which shall be ten paces long, and fifty foot deep into the bulwark: Likewise the said Shoulder ought to be drawn right opposite to the point of the Bulwark D. view the Figure, and you shall perceive this allowance of depth into the bulwark, maketh a short line betwixt the extremes of the Curtin B. B. especially if the Wing be allowed but 120 feet: whereby some may judge it the less defensive, yet it will not prove so, in regard the Defendants (in case the enemy hath once gotten the bulwark) may place more men upon the reintrenchment, than the enemy can place upon that line: But indeed the Flank lieth more open, whereby the Artillery therein may be dismounted more easily, then if the defence did proceed from the Angle of the Flank, as you may perceive by the pieces of Ordnance planted upon the Cat E. how they directly beat into the midst of the Flank of the bulwark, passing down by the Line of defence: View the Figure following. I shall take an occasion to frame a Table of the dimensions used in Fortifying of Bulworks: with the Perapets, Footsteps, Counter-skarps, Falsebrayes, and Sally-ports described.  
  

CHAP. XV.  
How to Fortify a place that is not capable of a Regular Fortification.  
Such Figures and places may be termed Irregular, which have not their Angles and sides equal; and being constrained to fortify such places as for example, For the guarding of some ●oords of Rivers, or Fortifying upon some Rock, or upon some point of the Sea, for the preservation of some Port. In these necessities, we are to accommodate ourselves according to the nature of the place, and save the expense of money and time, which a royal Fort would cost: for indeed there is nothing so strong as such places that are strong by nature, as you may perceive by the subsequent Figure, which hath two broad Rivers compassing two sides, which makes it very strong; so that the simplest Bulwarks there, are as defensible as the artificiallist: observe the Figure, and you shall perceive the two half Bulwarks in the farthest sides of the River marked with E. and F. are but half Flanks, because it is not to be feared that the enemy can gain the work by any of those sides, but rather on that side where there is firm Land, wherefore the bulwark C. is as a perfect form. Likewise you may take notice of the half Moons, M. and N. which are places of retreat, for those that shall defend without, beyond the Mote. The Port of the Town is at P. the Bridge is O. upon that side of the great River B. because there the enemy cannot so easily approach to raise a battery, being scanted in ground, the said River not allowing them space: The place you see marked with H. and L. are the Platforms, and so called, because they are a plain form without Flankers, and are very commodious to plant along by the Rivers. Further, observe that the Engineer is to consider in all such irregular places, how many Bulwarks it can well contain: for to raise more Works than needs must; or to place fewer, whereby the distances from one Work to the other will be too far, will prove a great fault; wherefore by the scale, you may take all the true distances; as for those sides the Rivers surrounds, few Works will serve: provided always, they be well guarded and Maned; for oftentimes the enemy will put in practise some strattagem against that side you think yourself securest of: For he may make Bridges of Cords, and scale the Walls, which will be a most difficult thing for him to do, if you be provided for him afore hand, for such an encounter: Nevertheless it will be very good to make a half Moon, where the Guard may have certain Boats secure, to take a view up and down the River; especially the head of the River, towards X. lest any Boats should come down the streams; and likewise to stay all Boats that shall pass by day and night, and search them, lest they taste the same sharp sauce that Skinkens-Skons, and Breda once tasted of: the one having Soldiers embarked under Hay, the other under Turf; who took their opportunities and surprised the Forts, view the Figure.  
  

CHAP. XVI.  
Another Irregular Figure fortified.  
IN the next Figure following you may perceive fortified (being surrounded with water) only one open space, betwixt A and B. which must be very strongly Fortified, because it is the likeliest place for the enemy to make his approaches: For prevention whereof, the two half Bulwarks C. and D. are raised, with two Flanks towards one side, to the end it should be double defended (viz) from the Flanks A. and B. Likewise upon each side by the Sea, there be simple Bulwarks for to lodge the Cannons there, for the defence of the Port, the which is to be shut with a Chaine-bridge or Draw-bridge: Next you may behold a Work called a 
* It borrows the name from the ●●shion of it.  Horne-worke, which is framed of two half Bulwarks E. F. the which Horne-worke is defended from the bulwarks C. and D. and in the midst thereof is a half Moon, which serves for a retreat and defence of the Port: H These outworks are excellent good, to cause the enemy to lose a great deal of time in winning them; and when they be gained, they shall immediately be constrained to forsake them; for they lying open to the inward Works, will soon force them out with the shot that shall be made from the Bulwarks C. D. Lastly, these half Moons are of excellent use to hinder the enemy from mining under the Bulworks, as the Hollanders and others have found by experience. The Figure follows in the next page: Viewing the same, and examining the particulars of it with your Compasses, and comparing it with this demonstrative discourse, will make you familiar and better able to understand it.  
  

CHAP. XVII.  
A third Irregular Figure fortified.  
THis third Figure is fortified with five Bulworks, insomuch that it may be called Pentagon irregular; wherein we must consider, the diversity of sides, some being long, the rest short; and raising Bulworks upon these points, which falls accidentally irregular: some being too short, the rest too long, as you may perceive by the side NO, to be more by the Scale than 180. paces, which ought to be the ordinary distance between Bulworks, 
E●ards opinion is otherwise, which I shall after in this Book confute, as erroneous.  or 200. for the longest: Likewise you perceive QQ, is less than 180. and 160. shorter than the rest; here you may observe these faults, which a Regular Fort hath not, every bulwark being of an even distance, either of 180. or 200. paces at the most, or 180. and 160. at the least, is the true distance, to raise your Bulworks in an equality of distance; that which you see in the figure to be advanced beyond the shoulder, and likewise above the Curtain, as you may see from N to R, and from O to S, and from P to T, and from Q to V, and so of the rest; not taking the like distance for the other flank, as you see by PX, and QY▪ the ordering of these differences ought to lie in the judgement of the judicious Engineer: Let us observe the bulwark N, which ought to be sharp pointed, because it is upon an Angle very sharp, long, and crooked, and out of distance to be flanked as you may see by N. To prevent the advantage an enemy might take if the point should be made out its full length, 
Maro doth not allow any acute Angle to be fortified otherwise then with a half bulwark, or else to be made the Flanked angle of a bulwark, as appeareth by his discourse upon the first Irregular Pentagon.  according as the ground would require, it is thought the safest way to cut off the said point M, and to fashion it with a double point, so as it may defend itself, and strengthen the bulwark the better, and a great deal less pains and travel in raising of it; for indeed the very point of the bulwark must have been raised a great way in the water, as you may observe by the pricks. Take notice likewise of the two half Moons before each port, which have their defences from the two Bulworks on each side of them; and as I have said before, they serve for a retreat to those that guard without, and likewise defend the Ports from sudden surprises: Further, observe that the Flanks are but 20. paces, because of the small distance, for indeed their needs no such large flanks; for if they were bigger, than the bulwark should extend itself further into the River, which would be a mighty charge, and unprofitable; as you may perceive by the bulwark q, the pricked lines that are marked in the water. Lastly, observe for a general Rule, that in all works of this nature, if the line total of any side, be 170. paces, or thereabouts, that then the Curtain flanks is made about 200. paces; if shorter, than the Curtain shorter proportionably; always provided, that the flanks looking each upon other, upon each Curtain, be near of of equal length: for the shoulders, it maketh not much if they differ in the line, so they be of a sufficient thickness. View the subsequent Figure.  
  

CHAP. XVIII.  
A fourth Irregular Figure fortified.  
IN this fourth Figure, you may perceive two several Fortifications; the Angleses being accordingly divided by the water's branching out, the one being marked with A, the other with B; you may suppose it to be an Arm of the Sea, branching itself into three Rivers, in the form of a Triangle; and is fortified only upon the sides, towards the Land D, for on the waters side they are sufficiently fortified with the wall made defensive with platforms E. Likewise you may observe the forked Bulwarks. FF. This trianguler work, is of no strength to be used upon Plains, (as before I have showed) but only where great waters are; wherein consisteth their chiefest strength. And they were invented, to keep and secure the mouth of Havens; where the Governor of the ●ort is to command the Ships that ride by, from the Rampart G, and cause them to pay Toll; the Water-Port is to be below the Rampart G. The Figure follows in the next page, being the 52,  
  

CHAP. XIX.  
A fifth Irregular Figure fortified.  
YOu may suppose the one side of this Figure marked with H, to be some Rock or Moorish ground unaccessible; the other side, at the letter L, is firm land: wherefore it behoveth that the side L, should be very well fortified, according to the rules of a Regular figure, that the Enemy may find it very difficult to gain the place; upon the other side, the Walls are to be made very high, for fear of surprisal, without any works of great consequence, will suffice. There aught to be also, upon the Moorie or Rocky side, H, a good Ditch, yea though the Rock be so high, that no water can come into the Ditch; and if it should likewise happen that the other ditch L, on the Landside should be dry, and without water, yet there is a little Wall that runs along the Ditch at BB, which is very profitable, to defend the said ditch: as you may perceive by those soldiers there defending, for they cannot be annoyed by the Enemy, because they are below and under the shot of the Canon: Note this kind of Fortification is to be used but upon necessity; for no Fort whatsoever can be accounted strong, unless the ditches of it will stand full of water: Those ditches that are dry, serves only to defend the Counterscharpe, that which is full of water hinders the Enemy from making his surprises; as we shall more at large discourse of afterwards. View the Figure following in the 54. Page.  
  

CHAP. XX.  
A discourse how the Ancients fortified their Towns.  
HAving sufficiently discoursed about Irregular Figures of Fortification, it now remains, that we should take notice of such Fortifications, as in former ages have been used for the safeguard of Towns; and so take an occasion to discourse of the imperfections of our walled Towns here in England, that we may not be deceived in putting our confidence in the strength of them; and afterwards we shall observe the strength and perfection that our modern Enginieres have brought this Art unto: Wherefore note, the first Fortifications that the Ancients made use of, was natural; as strengthened by Waters, by Rocks, by Mountains, inaccessible and Moorish quag-mires. We may see this by the King Atilla, entering into Italy with great force and strength, in such sort, that he vanquished all; except, such as escaped and fied for their defence, into an Island in the Mediterranean Sea, where they relieved themselves; The place is now called Venice, being partly situated in the Sea, and partly upon Moors and Quagmires; so that the Enemy could not come at them, neither with Horse nor foot: but finding these places naturally strong, not to be sufficient to defend them, they began to join Art to help fortify Nature; laying a foundation round the Town, of Brick, Stone, and Lime; building thereon very high Walls, with square Towers, some 60. paces a sunder; from whence they did defend themselves and their Walls. Rome is the most ancientest Fortification; which by the aforesaid Walls, the River Tiber, and the great Hills, they made shift to increase their Dominions. Likewise, in England we have diverse old Towns, as Colchester, etc. But in short time, Art grew more perfect; and finding those four square Towers to be weak and unprofitable, by reason of the Corners, being broken, the rest of the Wall soon gave way to their Engines; wherefore they invented Towers of a rounder form, as being far stronger, like to the Fortification about Ipswich, and Norwich, as in the next Chapter we shall discourse of: View the Figure belonging to this discourse, following.  
  

CHAP. XXI.  
A Second way which the Ancients used to fortify their Towns.  
THe former ages finding a disability in this former Fortification; they invented round Towers, being far stronger by reason of their equalness in strength on all sides; so that the Enemy with their Rams and battering Engines, could not demolish those round Towers, until they had learned a way to get the foot of them, and to inmine themselves under, so that the Defendants could not spy them; as you may perceive by the Letter A. at the foot of the Tower: So that in short time, by help of their Engines, they would overturn their Towers; and they within could not offend them from the next Tower, as you may see by the Line drawn from A. to B. Wherefore they were constrained to find out a remedy to strengthen themselves better. By this you may see what poor strength our Ancient Walled Towns are of, if an Enemy should oppose: I could wish better Fortifications about some eminent Towns near the Sea. View the Figure.  
  

CHAP. XXII.  
The Third way the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns.  
THey having found the defects by woeful experience that accompanied this simple kind of Fortifications, they invented a third way, which was to Fortify with a kind of Angled Figure; which Angles extended equally out, and the former Ages termed them Bastions: And these kind of Fortifications were so equally framed, that the Enemy could find no place to secure themselves under the Walls of it; but that the Defendants could easily annoy them: then they thought themselves their Craftsmasters, and that they had attained the perfection of the Art of Fortifying: But experience soon taught them, that their Bastions were some longer than the other, and being altogether too little; and so consequently of small defence: wherefore they were constrained to make another Work in the midst of the Curtin, within the Ditch, as you may perceive at A. the which they called a Platform; which they thought could strengthen the defence of the Curtin: but they found it did them more hurt than profit; because it hindered the Passage of the Shot, from the Flank of the bulwark C. that it could not Scour to the point of the other bulwark B. because of the hindrance of the Platform A. So that they were new to begin, as by the subsequent Figure you may perceive.  
  

CHAP. XXIII.  
The Fourth way the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns.  
THe Platform in the Precedent Figure, which was devised to defend the Bulwarks, were soon found to be of small resistance: Whereupon they did not much change the fashion of the Figure, but the place of the Platform, whereas before it was set below: Now they placed it above upon the Rampiere, in the midst of the Curtin, in the form of a Quadrangle; the other being in form of a Circle, being in a place the enemy could not approach to: they counted the matter not great, of what form it was, so it could lodge four or six Pieces of Ordnance to defend on both sides of it, as you may perceive by this Perallellagram B. So that this hath changed its name from a Platform to a Cavalier.  
But as before I have said the perfection of Fortification being not fully found out; they found this kind of Caviliere to be a very feeble defence, because it stood in such an eminent place: For we must take this for a Maxim; that all such high places, if they be not natural, are subject to be Battered and Ruined by the enemy: wherefore in short time they invented another way; yet indeed, not very proper to defend the Bulwarks, yet very good to discover into the Plains, about the Fort; and to hind the approaches of the enemy, and to beat down their Gabions and Trenches at their first coming.   

CHAP. XXIIII.  
The fifth way the Ancients used to Fortify their Towns.  
THe Ancients having found out the precedent defects to have proceeded from the smallness of their Bulwarks; they thought the best way was to make their Works bigger: So they began to frame them according to our modern fashions, of which we shall afterwards discourse; only we will content ourselves to observe the Figure following, being the first invention of Fortresses: and this kind of Fortifying was in those days thought to be the most perfect, until our modern Wars found out the way to frame their Bulworks, with round thick Shoulders to cover and secure the ●●anckes from the violence of the Shot, as in the beginning of this Book I have showed: Now it remains in the next Chapter, to show the reasons of our modern Fortifications, with all their dependencies; And first we will discourse of the true measures and proportions of them, which at this day are in use, and accounted the most perfectest that ever were invented; which we account now to be infallible Maxims of this Art: View the Figure following.  
  

CHAP. XXV.  
Of the Measures and Proportions of our modern Fortresses.  
WE have formerly discoursed of ancient Fortresses, of their defects and remedies; Now it remains we should entreat of our modern works, which are now brought to be most perfect, in regard of those Ancient Fortifications before mentioned: And first we will speak of their measures and proportions; the which must serve us for Maxims, because they are grounded upon very good and infallible reasons, as experience hath showed, and doth teach us daily.  
I. That Fortresses are composed of many Bulwarks, and that the said Bulwarks should be of equal distances, and of equal Angles; the ground being so large, that a Regular work may be raised thereon, as near as may be equally: As for Irregular works, necessity must drive us to make them; wanting the commodiousness of ground, that the Regular Figure should have.  
II. The Bulwarks ought to be large and spacious, to the end they may Reintrench themselves, and the point or Angels as blunt as possible may be made.  
III. That the entry or mouth of the bulwark, aught to be from Sixty to Seventy paces (viz.) Thirty or Thirty five from each end of the Curtin, to the midst or point of the entrance into the mouth of the bulwark.  
FOUR That the defence of the Bulwarks, aught to be taken from the third part of the Curtin; at the least, as in all Forms or Figures of 6. 7. and 8. and of those of 9 10. 11. 12. of the half of the Curtin. As for the Pentagon, it will permit the taking of the fifth part of the Curtin, because the Angels are not so much pointed. As for the square Figure, it ought not to be put amongst the number of Fortresses, and much less the triangle; for they only are to be raised in places of advantage, which are strong by nature, or in a Camp or siege of a Town.  
V. The Line of defence (viz.) the distance that is taken from the Flank, to the point of the bulwark opposite to it; aught to be 180 paces (viz.) five foot to each pace at the least, and 200 at the most: Although Erard alloweth not above 122● Toyses, six foot to the Toyse Amounts to 735 feet: But his error I shall afterwards show; and likewise the reason why I allow 265 foot more than he doth.  
VI, The Line of the Flank ought to be Thirty paces, and if the Shoulders of the bulwark be comprised in it; then the Flank ought to be larger by the third part, (viz.) ten paces, and twenty paces for the forming of the Shoulders.  
VII. The Ditch or Moat, aught to be thirty paces broad, and running even by the sides of the Bulwarks.  
VIII. In the midst of the Ditch, there ought to be a Cave digged deeper than the rest, some four paces broad.  
IX. The Counterscarpe there, aught to be framed, with Stones without Lyme.  
X. Upon the Counterscarpe, there ought to be an Alley three paces broad, with a breast-worke ready to defend them; so that they may kneel and lay their Pieces over it to discharge: and the Ground is to be made all even beyond it, that the enemy may have no Bank to defend himself.  
XI. All the good earth which is beyond the Counterscarpe, aught to be thrown away, a Musket shot from it; and all kind of Stones to be placed there in the room of it, which will infinitely offend the enemy, being battered about with the shot from the Walls of the Fort.  
XII The half Moons which are placed in every Angle between two Bulworks, aught to be forty paces (viz.) twenty on either side; and the defence thereof, aught to be always taken as near as possibly may be towards the Curtin; the Ditch thereof being four Paces at least in breadth.  
XIII. The Ditch or Moat, aught to be Thirty foot deep; being well stored with all kind of Fish, which may be a great help to sustain them in the time of a Siege.  
XIIII. The Wall or foundation of the Fort, aught to be thirty foot high.  
XV. The Rampire above the foundation of the Wall, aught to be likewise 30. foot in height, and 20. foot broad; both Curtains and Bulworks, are to have a Parapet answerable, and a foot-step for the Musketeers to step upon, to make them of sufficient height to discharge their Muskets over.  
XVI. Upon the entry or mouth of every bulwark, there ought to be a Cavalier eight foot high, and twenty paces large: So that three or four Pieces of Canon may be planted there for the making of Counter-batteries.  
XVII. The place of the Hankes ought to be fifty foot broad, and 75. or 80. foot long.  
XVIII. The rightness of the Shoulders ought to be 50. foot long, in such sort that it may shoot right to the point of the opposite bulwark.  
XIX. That such Sally-Ports as are necessary, aught to be 15. foot broad, made under the Wall in the Hancke, between the Shoulder of the bulwark and the end of the Curtin, to be Bricked over like a Vault; and at each end of it, a very strong folded Gate. These Sallies are for the Soldiers to pass into the Falsebray to defend the Moat, and the foot of the Bulwarks and Curtains.  
XX. The False-bray, aught to be 15. or 16. foot broad from the foot of the Bulwark, to the Moat: At the very foot of the Rampires, is planted a bed of quickset, two foot broad, which will not only hinder the enemy from sudden running through it; but also stays up such earth as shall be battered down, from falling into the Moat: Next the Moat, the Falsebray hath a breast-worke, three or four foot high for the Musquetiers to shoot over to defend the Moat.  
XXI. That above the end of the Shoulder called the Orillion, there ought to be an Imbracer, for to place a Piece of Ordnance, to batter against the Ruins that the Enemy should make, in the face of the bulwark.  
XXII. That the Rampires ought to be made as much sloping, as they are high; which is their natural sloping: pinching inwards, that the Water may shoot off: View the Table following, and reason will not only allow it, But will also reprehend monsieur Bellay, page 21. who allows only one foot slope, in 8. or 10. foot height: So that a Wall being 60. foot high, by his Rule shall have but 6. foot slope; which would make it so steep, that without the battering of the Canon, every shower of Rain will wash it and moulder it down: Observe your best Fortifications, as Zutphen, and Densburge, in Gilderland are by this rule framed.  
XXIII. That such foundations of Stone or Bricke-workes as are made against Waters, or otherwise to bear up the Fortifications of Earth; aught to be 5. foot broad below, and 3. foot above, and to slope half their height: monsieur Bellay would have them Perpendicular, but he is wide from the true mark.  
XXIIII. There must be a Parapet or brest-worke, upon the outside of the Rampire, 8. foot high, and 30. foot broad, only upon the Bulwarks: the Curtains needs not be so thick by ● parts: at the foot of the Parapet is a bank a foot and half high or more to stand upon, for their easy shooting over: The Parapet is to slope upon the top of it, that they may level down to the Motes side by the Falsebray.  
Now because these proportions, of Heights; Depths, Lengths, and Bredths, with the true sloping, cannot so well be demonstrated by Figure, in the deliniating out the parts of a Fort. I have devised a way by making a Table which shall give you satisfaction: wherefore suppose every of the little squares to be five foot, every way square: So that by the number of them, you may easily perceive the Dimensions of every part of the Fortress: The Table follows in the next Page.   

CHAP. XXV.  
Of Fortresses in general, and of their Perfections and Imperfections.  
A Fortress may well be compared to a man: The Bulwarks are the Head; the Hanckes, the Eyes; the Curtains, the Arms; and so of the other parts: Now if the Head be not well-disposed, than all the other Members will be found ill: even so those Bulwarks which are not form according to the disposition which is requisite, all the Fortress is imperfect; and is subject to five kind of maladies, or imperfections.  
The first is the Battery, 
The first imperfection of a Fortress.  when the Enemy raises his Cavaliers, and with his Canon, batters down the Walls, ruining them to nothing which the Art of man artificially had built: showing that nothing can be made so perfect, but it may be defaced.  
The second is the Mine, 
The second imperfection.  which is made under the Earth, and passeth under the Counterscarpe and Moat, until it comes under the bulwark, and so blows it up with Powder.  
The third is Treason; 
The third imperfection.  enticing the chief Officers with gifts and moneys, and gaining the affections of inferior Soldiers, by fair promises and gifts; whereby they are alured to yield up the Fort into the hands of the Enemy.  
The fourth malady, 
The fourth imperfection.  is sudden surprises: as when an Enemy betakes him to a course, contrary to the opinion of many, feigning some other design, Marching all night, Arrives at point of Day, without making any noise: Plants his Petards against the Ports, and his Scaling-ladders upon the Walls, making himself Master both of Bulwarks, Ramparts, and Ports, before those of the Guards are sensible of it; especially before they can be capable of resistance.  
The fifth and last is a long Siege, 
The fifth and last imperfection.  which ruins the Works of the Fortress, wastes their Men, Money, Provision, and Ammunition; whereby the Fort and Soldiers should be sustained, being thereby brought to such an exigent of distress; that they are constrained to render up the Fort, 
The remedies to prevent these former imperfections.  rather than perish by famine, sickness, and the like. For the remedying and preventing of these grievous maladies and imperfections; we ought like the wise Physician, always to have some sovereign Salve or Antidote to apply according to the cause thereof: wherefore it is great wisdom for us to examine from point to point, the defects, that we may attain the perfect knowledge of them; whereby we may gain honour by making the perfecter cure: Wherefore first let us examine the Battery, and the defects thereof; that we may apply the remedy that is proper to it. Batteries are made after diverse fashions, as first, the Enemy making diverse Gabions or great Baskets, placing them accordingly, and filling them full of good earth, which serves them for a shelter, in making their first approaches: Afterwards approaching nearer, they raise their Cavaliers, and plant their double Canons thereon, to batter down the defences, and ruin their Bulwarks; then by their approaches in Trenches under the earth, just to the side of the Counterscarpe, 
How to help themselves against the Enemy's batteries made with Gabions.  they may come to ruin their Flanks, which the defendants cannot see to prevent; when at the first approaches they make use of Gabions: Those within the Fort must help themselves by making Counter-batteries of their Cavaliers, and batter down their Gabions; which may easily be done, if the Cannoneers be skilful, whereby the Enemy will be kept in continual action; for there is no doubt but that the Enemy makes approaches, to the end (as being Master of the Field) he shall gain his desires in a short time: But the Defendants within the Fort, may make him lose his time, which is the principal thing a good Fortress can do, for they must expect relief to assist them, to cause his departure sooner; or that the deadness of Winter will make the Enemy retreat against his will. The principal thing to be required from the strength of a Fort, is to keep off the Enemy, and delay him; making him lose his time, 
Answer to an objection.  nothing being more precious than the same: As to be always blocked up to perpetuity in a Fort, is not the thing requirable: To answer the objection that the Enemy may batter down our walls, and ruin our Bulwarks, 
A Table of the Heights and Proportions of every particular Limb of a Fort, belonging to a Fort.  L The Counter scarpe and the Brestworke. F The Walls. A The Monnt of the Rampart within. M The Curider. G The Ditch or Mote. B The Rampart. N The Fote-banke to step on, to discharge over. H The Defence in the Mote called C●●e. C The Parapets. O The plain Field lying shelving. I The little Ditch in the midst of the Mote. D The sloping of the Parapets.   E The way for the Rounds. Place this Figure betwixt folio 62. and 63. from their Cavaliers or Batteries; For the effecting of this they have but small time; and it will prove very troublesome and dangerous to scale the same Breaches; because our walls shall be raised in such sort, that the Counterscarpe shall be almost of equal height with them; so that the Enemy shall not come at them with their Ordnance, to make any deep breach; for from their Platforms they shall no more than see the top of the Works, as you may perceive by this subsequent Figure at A. B. And as for the Works of the Fort, they are made so sloping, that the Cannon Bullet cannot possihly batter it down: and they are so thick, that the Bullets rest in the midst of the thickness; they being 36 foot thick, and above; so that a Cannon cannot possibly pierce half through, especially if the earth be good, and well rammed down together.  
The Cannons A. is the Enemy's Battery, which cannot hold possibly but six Pieces, because it cannot be broader than the Mote: and these are Planted there to batter down the Flanks; which will be difficult to do, in regard the Defendants in the Fort have six other Pieces to oppose them, and a good thick Parapet for their defence, as those of the Flanks ought to be. B. is the other Battery of the Enemy which they Plant to batter down the Shoulders of the Bulwarks; which they will find hard to do, in regard of their thickness and roundness.  
Now let us discourse of the defects which may come by springing of Mines, which is the most dangeroust disease incident to the ruining of Bulwarks: Wherefore observe, when the Enemy first makes his approaches with Trenches and Vaults under the ground, being conveyed under the Counterscarpe and Mote, and so under the bulwark; having there placed a sufficient quantity of Powder, Fire being given to the Train, will blow up the Work and all within it. To redress this inconvenience, and to hinder the Enemies Mining: There must instead of good Earth, be Gravel and Stones, which would hinder their Mining: and besides these Stones would fall down upon their heads, unless they framed supporters to stay it, which would be an infinite charge and trouble: those Stones would be very offensive to the Enemy being battered about amongst them by the Ordnance from the Walls; it would more hurt and annoy them, than the Ordnance themselves: Further if the Mote be full of Water, and the Graft in the midst of it made so deep as before is declared; it will be a means to drown them in their Trenches and Mine: if the Moat ●ee dry, they may easily Mine under it: 
How to prevent the Mining under the Bulwarks.  But for prevention of this their Mining, there are diverse ways to discover it; As first, by making a Vault down deep into the Earth in the most suspected place; and there placing a Drum braced, laying Di●e or small Stones upon the top of it; if the Enemy be working in the ground, the Reverberation of their strokes, will make the Dice or Stones skip up and down: or a Basin of Water upon a Woolsack, works the same effect; this being discovered, you may suffer the Enemy to dispose his Powder in the Mine, and when they are gone to give fire to the Train, in the interim to Mine to it and take it away: The like hath been done many times in the Netherlands: But the surest way to prevent the force of the Powder in the Mine (if all other devices fail) is by making a Vault down deep into the Earth in the most suspected place●●nd from it make diverse vents for the Powder to breath out of, and cover the ho●es slightly over with Bushes and Earth to darken the place. Now when the Enemy shall come to undermine the bulwark, he shall come to work into that Vault; where diverse Soldiers being within it ready provided for their coming, shall repulse the Enemy, they having great advantage over them because the Vault is large, and form proper and fit for defence: The Trenches of the Enemy being so small, they cannot stir in them; and suppose the Enemy should work into the Mine, and finding no resistance, places his Powder, and makes his Trains; yet it cannot take any effect because of thoses hole, which let out the force of the Powder.  
Thirdly, 
A remedy to prevent Treason in a Fort.  for the prevention of Treason, by the seducing the Captain, and gaining the Soldiers loves by gifts and promises: In this case we must make choice of a trusty faithful Captain for Governor, which must be allowed sufficient maintenance, and having a good estate of his own: Likewise the Soldiers must be well paid, and suffer no discontents to be given them; there is nothing in the World discontents a Soldier more, then debarring or misreckoning him in his Pay: Further you may by the demeanor of Soldiers perceive if they be bribed; First they cannot contain themselves when they have money, but they will play or drink more then ordinarily before, or show their moneys, or buy themselves Apparel. Notice being taken of these things, the judicious Captain must have them in examination, and search them, and upon the least suspicion commit them.  
For the prevention of Surprises that the Enemy may suddenly make, 
How to prevent surprises that may be made against a Fort.  by placing his Petards against the Ports; and hanging up his Scaling-ladders in the Night, or at point of Day; this may easily be remedied, if the Garrison be well ordered and disciplined, if they keep their Guards and Sentinels, as they ought to place them in every apt and convenient place, (viz.) every bulwark to have a Corpses due Guard in it; and the Centuries placed some ten paces one from the other: Likewise at the foot of the Bridge, aught to be a half Moon with a continual Guard in it; and the said Bridge being made winding, aught to have two or three Draw-bridges, and between each Draw-bridge a Standing gate; all the Ports or Gates ought to have a Grate before it, after the fashion of a Gridiron, which must bear out from the substance of the Gate half a foot: this will prevent the Enemy from blowing open the Gates, because the force of the Petard will be spent before it can touch the massy substance of the Gate, the Grate giving way to the force of it: Besides in the midst of the Bridge ought to be a Guard built, where continually a Century must stand to open and shut the Gates upon all occasions: Further, the Captain of the Watch must send out his Rounds, and Counter-rounds one after the other; whose duty is, to see every Guard and Sentinel do his duty, and likewise to be vigilant to discover the Enemy's approaches. Further, upon the highest Steeple or Tower within the Fort or Town, aught to be a Sentinel day and night, to overview the ways and passages, and to take notice of all noise and deans, or the sparkling of Matches; and by the sound of a Trumpet to give an Alarm: if in the daytime any Troops are discovered, he is to give so many sounds as there be several persons; if the Troops be Footmen, than the Sentinel is to hang out a white-Flag, on that side the Tower which the Port is of they come; if Horsemen, than he is after the same manner to hang out a red Flag: by this the Guards are warned to be in a readiness, and the Ports (if it be daytime) immediately to be shut up, and Spies sent out to discover what they are, and their intents. Further, if intelligence should be gained that the Enemy is a Foot, then to be more wary and set a double watch; these things may seem sufficient, for prevention of the premises.  
The last malady or imperfection, is a long Siege; which spends both Men and Munition, 
Remedies to be used in a long Siege, to prevent the Enemy's purposes.  their Food and Provision to maintain them. To this we must reply. that a Fortified Town, ought always to be provided with Men and Ammunition, and all kind of other Provisions; as Corn of all kinds, Beer, Wine, Saltfish, Bacon, Vinegar, or any thing else that is sit to sustain the life of man; sufficient of Saltpetre, Brimstone, etc. for making of Powder, and Wildfire; store of Lead for Bullets, and the like. Further, such a Fort ought always to have a Troop of Horse in it, and store of Provision for them; whose Office are to make incursions upon the Enemy, and to discover his marches and designs. Moreover, there must be good store of Ordnance; 
The difference in a Siege betwixt great and small Ordnance, for their service.  especially some pieces, for they will be able to do better Servive than the great Canons, in two respects; as first, the expense of Powder will be less; Secondly, they are easier to be removed from place to place, as occasion shall be offered: The well managing and orderings in such a Fort, is of great consequence; for we must conceive, an Enemy is at three times the Expenses, let him be as provident as he can; Further, the Enemy being constrained to lose his time and spend his means and Treasure, by bringing an Army against them; which shall either cause them to raise their Siege (as Grave Maurice Van Nassaw did at the Siege of Bergen-up-zone, he marching his Army to Rosand●ll, caused marquis Spinola to raise his Siege) Otherwise a greater advantage may be taken, as the same Noble Prince once did: Ost-end being beleaguered, he thinking to have raised the Siege of Duke John de Austria, finding him so strongly entrenched, retreated with his Army, and pitched before Sluice, and suddenly took it. Thus you may see the properties of a strong Garrison, how necessary they are in all respects; such imperfections as cannot be eschewed, must be borne withal, seeking to prevent them in the best and safest manner we may. I hope this discourse will give a reasonable satisfaction to any man that is an ingenuous Soldier; as for others, I leave them to censure like themselves. In the following Chapter, we will discourse of the diversity of Modern Fortifications.   

CHAP. XXVI.  
Of four kinds of Fortifying now in use; French, Spanish, Italian, and Holland; and first of the manner of Fortifying in France.  
HAving formerly spoken of the first inventions of Fortifications, and how they have been reduced from imperfect, to better forms; but because all men's opinions and judgements are various, and not a like assenting, one esteeming one fashion to be best, and others of a quite contrary conceit, maintain that another form is better. Therefore principally I have made choice to discourse of, and decipher these four kinds of Fortifying; and the rather, because these Countries lying open to their Enemies, have been very ingenuous to fortify their Towns for their better security, very strongly; for in such places, there is nothing of greater consequence belonging to State affairs, than an absolute form in fortifying, and in discoursing of their several inventions: we will compare the properties and improperties of them together, and so follow the best form, and eschew the worst. 
The French Engineeres opinion of their Fortification.  The French are opinionated, the face of the bulwark should be defended by Musketeers, therefore they will not have the defence of the flank to the point of the bulwark, to be of greater distance than musket-shot: which is not above 120. paces. 
The proportion of a Musket's shot, is 120. paces.  Likewise they will have the defence of the bulwark to be taken only from the Flank, the reason is, because the Angle of the point of the bulwark is more obtuse, then if they should take the defence from the Curtin, and so consequently more firm and strong, for to resist the Battery: They will likewise have a good Mote with a kind of Parapet running in the midst of it, which between the two Bulwarks hath a kind of work for soldiers to defend the breach of the flanks, which they term Cune, this Mote is to be full of water; at Deusbrough in Gelderland they raised in the Mote, in the equal distance between the Bulworks only, a kind of half Moon, extending itself like to this Figure. These kind of works, they hold very necessary to prevent an Enemy from any sudden surprises, by laying over Bridges, or coming over in leather Boats; a continual watch being kept there, prevents their designs; the Figure follows.  
  

CHAP. XXVII.  
How the French fortify their Irregular Figures.  
Upon a Line of 100 Toises, they will have form a single Tenaille.  
Upon a Line of 100 or 150. Toises, 
Note, a Toise is 6. feet by the Rule, 12. inches to each foot.  they will have raised two Bastions.  
Upon a Line of a 150. or 200. Toises, they raise a double Tenaille, or two half Bulworks.  
Upon a Line of 250. Toises, they raise one Bastion and two half Bastions.  
For better demonstration of this, we will suppose an Irregular piece of ground, to be fortified; as Q, R, S, T, V, and in regard no ground is to be lost, we must first consider all the several measures at the out-most sides of it; and first, drawing a right Line, as A, B, of 250. Toises, and upon the same Line follows these precedent Rules, they raise there one Bastion, and two halves taken from the Octagon, look at the point A. Likewise, from the point A, draw a Line from A. P, of 150. Toises or thereabouts, upon the which they raise two half Bastions, then drawing the Line P, O, upon the which they raise one Bastion, and two halves, according as the first is; and also as the Line O, X, hath: and also of all the rest, according as they shall find the length or distances. Many times they desire the wall of the Town should be secured from the Curtin. Next after this following Figure, I shall draw another Figure, that shall demonstrate that kind of flanking from the Curtin.  
Moreover, when your French Engineeres fortify an Irregulrr Figure, and that the line of defence is to be taken from the Curtains; then suppose the place to be fortified, to be B, A, P, L, N, M. O, and that the Wall being set in the outmost verge of the ground, must serve for the Curtines wholly: The figure being proportioned as you see the next following is, they draw a Line from C, D, E, F, of 400. Toises, where they find there must be raised upon the same Line, one Bastion, and two halves, and one simple Tenaille (viz.) the Bastion E, the two half ones D, and F, and the single Tenaille D, C, and having drawn the Lines round the Town, leaving sufficient distance between the Walls, for to raise the Bastions; then they take the space of 100 or 110. Toises, from the flank of one bulwark, to the point of the other. Thus every Bastion will stand right within musket-shot to be defended as the Regular Figures are. This they use only for the fortifying of some old Wall in haste, and without much charge; otherwise a Rampart may be raised of earth, and these Works made to it. The Figure follows.   

CHAP. XXVIII.  
The manner of the Spaniards fortifying.  
THe manner of the Spaniards fortifying, differs nothing from the French; for they hold the same Rules; (viz.) They take their defence from the Flanks, and they observe the same distance from the flank, to the Point of the bulwark: only they use greater compassed shoulders to cover their flanks, as you may perceive by the Figure following marked A. Note that he that intends to fortify, must have a special regard to the matter he intends to put in execution, and to the potency of his Enemy, to the end he may apply a convenient remedy, to every thing that shall require it: for if we have to do with a puissant politic Enemy, we must spare no cost and charge; not only to fortify, but also to make the works large, and spacious, and of able strength to resist the battering Canon; to the end likewise, they may make diverse re-intrenchments; lest it should happen as once it did to the Spaniards, at the Fort called the Golette, which was made to keep the Haven for the King of Spain; but having by experience found the defects of it; (they having observed the true rules of forming it) their error was in making the Bulwarks too little; so that when the Turk came with his great Army, there could not men be placed to defend it. As we shall afterwards discourse of the Line of defence, of the perfection of it, as I may term it, because in the just proportion thereof, depends the conservation of the Fortress. Wherefere now we use to make our Bulwarks larger, when we first raise them; for should they be too small, there were no help; but if our Enemy be but weak in his forces, in such a case we shall not need to be at that cost and labour to make our Works so large, only the Walls, raised with earth, and Palizadoed about with Bulwarks, without shoulders: Likewise the outworks, as Halfmoons, and Horneworkes, and the like, may be spared, so that the Works be made according to Rule, and the Mote full of water will be sufficient to keep the Enemy from surprising it. View the Figure following.  
  

CHAP. XXIX.  
Of the Venetians manner of Fortification.  
THe Venetians have found by experience the Rules and Maxims of the Spaniards, touching the manner of their defences, they having small differences as is to be seen by that admirable fortified Town in the Isle of Crete named Nicolia; with his Bulwarks well ordered, only they were too little, not having space sufficient in them for retrenchment; the Turk besieged it, and won it with the Fort of Fumogasta, and all the Isle of Crete; which the Turks possess to this day; they finding the inconveniences incident to these small Works, they began to make their Works more spacious in the Town of Palma la nova, upon the flanks thereof they might place more men for defence; and likewise they might reintrench the oftener: For their Enemy the Turk was most potent, and likewise the Emperor, wherefore they made spacious Bulwarks, which they termed Bulwarks Royal (viz.) large spacious works, with large bouted shoulders, as the Figure following will better instruct you.  
  

CHAP. XXX.  
A Comparison between the Rules of Fortification handled in this Treatise with the Rules of others; with certain Answers to diverse Objections in Fortification.  
IN the beginning of this discourse of Fortification, we have fully described the Rules; how to fortify after the Low-Country manner, being the most absolutest manner that can be invented; we will not lose the time to repeat it again, they being drawn with the same proportions, that at this day is, or aught to be used in all places in Europe, that is famous for Fortification: And in our progression we will endeavour to make some comparisons, betwixt our modern way of fortifying, and the ancient manner formerly used: From thence we shall draw the knowledge of the perfection of this Art, how far it exceeds the writings and practices of former Ages. First, we will begin with the Spanish and French; and by the way, let us observe the oppositions that the French will have about the Line of Defence, in their Fortifications, The principal Enginieres in France, as also Errard de Barledce, which hath writ of Fortification; and he would have the defence of the bulwark to to be 100 Toises, which is 120. Venetian paces, that is 60. feet English by the Rule, 
A Toise is 6. Foot.  12. inches to each foot; to the end (says he) that it may be defended with Muskets; alleging further, that the Canon can do no great hurt or damage, in regard of the uncertainty of the shot; and because they cannot be discharged so often as the Muskets, but there will be a great deal of intermission betwixt shot and shot. He further opposes, that the defence ought to be taken from the Flank: because says he, it makes the bulwark more obtuse in his Angle-Flanke. To these oppositions we must make answer altogether, because the remedies of one of these faults, depends upon that of the other: And first; we must know and hold for a Maxim infallible, that no Fortress but aught to be made with all advantages: so that it may be able to defend against a great number; as if I should say; the advantage must be so great, that one man may resist ten, this being taken for a ground and Rule, we come now to confute this French opinion. (viz)  
The Line of Defence they hold ought not to be above 100 Toises, or sixty feet English, or 120 to be the most; because (saith he) 120 or 144. Toises is the furthest a Musket can shoot, to defend with them; further, the Canon they allege is of small validity, in regard of its uncertainty in shooting, so that it doth small damage to the Enemy. If the French Enginieres will maintain this Argument, they must of necessity destroy the Flanks; making them so small for the lodging of Musketeers in them; but I say that cannot be done, because they must be larger to lodge far more Soldiers, for the defence of the Fortress; for they ought to be 17. Toises large with the Shoulders, as Mr. Errard intends to give to each Flank; which amounts to some 20. paces, 5. foot to each pace, and this is but capable to lodge 34. Soldiers on the said Flank, allowing 3. foot distance for each Soldier to use his Arms in: Now do but observe, how the Enemy will have a wonderful advantage, by making his approaches in his rolling Trenches, and Mines under the earth, which shall bring them to the Counterscarpe, where being arrived, they can raise their Batteries, and cause their Ordnance to beat continually upon the heads of the Musketeers that defend the Flanks, or the place that is to be assaulted; so that they cannot be able to make resistance, or to do them any hurt from the Walls; beside, the Mote being large, the Enemy may lodge in his Works, three times as many Soldiers, which shall continually shoot against the Hankes of the Fort, and keep them under; so that their defence will be to no purpose: Moreover, the Enemy having raised his Batteries within distance, 
The opinion of defending the Flanks with Muskets disproved by argument and reason.  he will soon beat those Musketeers from off the Shoulders of the bulwark, causing them to retreat; they having then but the space, which is rescued by the Flank, being but 6. or 7. Toises, which is but distance enough for 12. or 14. Soldiers; how do you think then, they shall be able to resist 300. which shall be upon the Counter-scarp, and under it? Furthermore I demand, if he will not have the Flanks defended with Ordnance, how will he be able to impeach and hinder the Enemy from making their Traverses or Galleries over the Mote, 
View the Figure where the manne● of the Galleries and the Ordnance planting is desiphered.  for to march over and assault the breach the Canons have made in the Bulwarks. Now if you will please to observe the excellency of the Canon for the defending and offending which in a most absolute way is performed; namely, if the Enemy makes his approaches close to the Mote as before is said, yet he durst not enter the Mote, because of the shot that shall come continually from the Flanks; wherefore to prevent the danger of the shot, they are constrained to take the earth that is taken out of the Trenches, to make a sufficient Barricado against such places as they shall shoot from; so that the force of a Canon shall do small hurt, and shall not be able, 
A reason produced why the Musket is not of validity to secure the Works from the Flanks.  without great trouble, to hinder their approaches, they being secured by their Works. Much less than can the Musket-shot prevail to hinder them, so that they will soon gain the bulwark, after the Gallery is put over the Mote; because they may have a recourse securely from Gun-shot, and by this means undermine the bulwark or scale it, as the Figure before named will demonstrate.  
Moreover, the Enemy may make Galleries over of Timber, covering it over with earth, to prevent the firing of it with Wildfire, which they within the Fort may cast upon it for that purpose. Likewise, the Mote being full of water, they may prepare Bridges of Boats, covered over with earth or raw Hides, to preserve them from fire: 
The Musket is not able to beat down the Enemy's Galleries: wherefore they must have Canon shot planted on the Flanks.  I would gladly know, how these proceedings of an Enemy might be prevented without the Canon, only by Muskets, as the French Engineer would have it?  
Moreover they do reply, that although they would have the Musketeers to defend from the Flanks, yet not at all times would they be destitute of the Canon: which may serve for such purposes as to hinder the Enemy's designs. I say all good Orders and Rule so ought to be necessarily observed; contrarily, Disorder and Confusion ought to be echewed, as the greatest discommodity. The French replies, yes, he intends good order should be kept and observed, that every one may know what he ought to do: and that they should put all their strength and industry to to acquit themselves from the Enemy. To which we may truly object, that the Flanks being the eyes of the Fortress, they ought not to be employed about any other thing, but to spend the time in hindering and offending the Enemy, from making his Galleries or Traverses: Now the Musketeers are not able to perform that duty, but altogether hinders the operation of the Canons; for if the Canons comes to be discharged, they must hinder the Muskets from defending the face of the bulwark, for they being two different things that cannot stand together, one of the two must be slighted as insufficient; wherefore we must conclude, that Muskets are not proper to be placed in the Flanks, because they are not of force to beat down the Traverses, and hinder the Enemy's approaches unto the bulwark. The Engineeres in France, 
The fond opinion of the French Engineers.  can hardly be brought to believe this; but that the Canon is altogether unprofitable, and and that the Musketeers are all in all; to this we may answer without contradiction, that in all things due order is to be observed, as Errard himself confesses: Wherefore take notice, the Office of the Flanks is only to pierce and batter the Traverses, and Crosle-workes, which the Enemy shall raise upon the Counter-skarpe, and that the Muskets ought to be placed in another place, more apt for them to do the same Office, which he would have them perform in the Flanks. Now I dare say their ears glows to hear what place is aptest to place the Musketeers in, to perform the same Office they would have them do in the Flanks, (which is only to defend the face of the bulwark) they being ignorant of any other place from whence they may defend. 
The defence of the bulwark is to be taken from the third part of the Curtin.  Now you shall both see and judge their imbecility, whether it be more apt and convenient to take the defence with Musketeers from the Flank, or from the Curtin, which is far better, and also from the Cavalliaris; whereby the defence is made threefold: Let us but weigh the discommodity we have, with the commodity we ought to receive, and then make choice of one of the two, which seems probablest for our best service. Wherefore it is not to be doubted, but that a bulwark well guarded with Soldiers, is far stronger than one that is only defended with a stone or earthen Wall without men. The strength that is to be expected in a stone or earthen Wall, is the forming of the Works more obtuse, and so consequently the stone Wall is strongest: and yet there is no comparison or proportion in it, to a Work that is defended with men. Further, as before we have related, that a spacious obtuse bulwark is compared to a strong man without Arms, for his Arms are his defence, that is, the Soldiers which continually shoot from either side of the bulwark. Wherefore we may safely conclude, with that Maxim which the Hollanders and Venetians hold to be most proper & profitable; to take the defence from the third part of the Curtin: If you please to observe in the first figure of Fortification the commodiousness of it, 
It is most safe to take the defence from the third part of the Curtin.  that then I make no question, you will consent with my opinion, and conclude I have made those former Propositions clear. Now it follows I should answer another Objection of Errards', and withal, give some good instructions about the length of the Line of Defence. (Viz.) The distance from the corner of the Flank, to the point of the next bulwark opposite. He maintains, it ought not be above 100 or 120. paces, for if it be longer, he says it is out of Musket-shot; All good Rules are to be grounded upon firm reasons and sound grounds, wherefore we will discourse and illustrate this proposition, that thereby we may gain experience and profit. Because a Musket cannot possible convey a Bullet so far as a Canon, therefore the Line of Defence should be answerable to their shooting, or conveying their shot; by this we intent that the Musketeers which are ordained for the defence of the bulwark, should have their distances 100 or 120. paces, being placed upon the third part of the Curtin; and those that are placed below upon the Work in the Mote before the Cunette, which is to be esteemed one of the principal defences; and likewise the Canon may have for his Line of Defence from the Flank and Cavalliares to the point of the bulwark, 180. or 200. paces at the most; whereby the Enemy's Galleries and Traverses may be hindered and broken down. Suppose this to be the advantage and commodity we gain by this large distance in hindering the Enemy from having a distance, which otherwise he will take by reason of the breadth of the Mote, from battering down the Flanks, for he is able to batter 182. or 200. paces; yet in regard the Mote is so large, and the Works he is constrained to make before his Battery for to preserve it, causeth the Battery to stand at the least 260 paces from the Flank: Now I would gladly know what hurt a Battery can effect, shooting such a distance against a strong bulwark well Shouldered, and if he bring his Battery nearer; into what eminent danger he brings himself you may plainly perceive by this Figure following, which being viewed, we will proceed and answer other of his objections.  
You see we have fairly gotten the day of the French Engineer, both by grounds of solid reasons, and by our demonstrative Figure, which clear all his objections: Now it remains to have another Veny with him about the Mote or Ditch, which they would have full of Water to the brim; because saith he, it is very difficult for the Enemy to get over to scale the Works: Wherefore he demands, whether a dry Ditch or Mote be better than that: To which I make answer, that betwixt two extremes we ought always search out the middle proportion (viz.) not to decline too much to the one, nor the other; but to keep the Golden mean, and part them in the midst equally: Therefore we will not condemn a full Mote of Water altogether, neither will we condemn a quite dry Mote; but we will participate of both, (viz.) that one half of the Mote or Ditch should have Water, the other half should be without; so by consequence, it should be half full, one should serve to prevent Surprises, the other should be the defence thereof: Experience teacheth, that such a Mote is the best and perfectest of all; for the Mote which is brim full, is a hindrance to them in the Fort, and keeps them as if they were in a Prison, and disables them from defending the Ditch but only from above the Walls, which is but a poor defence, 
Reason's why the Mote ought not be brimful.  in regard the first thing an Enemy practiseth at his approaches, is to batter against the top of the Walls, and beat the Defendants under; so that there remains no defence for the Ditch, 
The Work in the midst of the Mote is of great defence and safeguard, as you may perceive in the precedent Figure.  but from the Flanks: Now on the contrary, those that have their Motes half dry, they can Entrench themselves therein, and keep off the Enemy without any danger to themselves; without the which the Enemy would soon find great advantage by annoying the tops of the Walls from their Batteries; so as you should not be able to shoot over without great loss of men: 
The first thing to be done in an Assault, is to batter the tops of the Walls.  and if the Enemy should give an Assault, he must first be constrained to win this Work made within the Mote by great difficulty: The Defendants are secured from the Flanks, and from the Works above them; they having a good Parapet before them for their Cover, and half the breadth of the Mote for their security; 
Note this Work within the Mote must not be made so low, that the Counterscarpe may command it; for than it will be of no force.  and likewise upon all occasions to retreat into the Bulwarks by the Sally-Ports that are placed in the Flanks: And in regard this kind of defence lies so low that the Enemy cannot see it, whereby it the harder to be gained by him; by these circumstances we conclude, that a Mote or Ditch made in this kind, is the most safest and most defensive against the Enemy. I hope this discourse will satisfy any Soldier of reasonable capacity: In the next Chapter we will frame our discourse about the manner and proceedings that ought to be observed in Assaulting and defending these Fortresses.   

CHAP. XXXI.  
The manner how to gain and defend these Fortresses.  
THe Enemy having viewed a Fort, and found out the fittest places to gain it, (which are to be supposed these following,) First, the ground being proper and easy to make the Trenches in; or if the defence be not strong and good upon that fide, whereby any advantage may be gained; then you must begin to raise your Trenches as you may perceive in the Figure following by N. N. drawing them right to the point of the bulwark, because those that defend within may not annoy the pioneers; and they are to cast the earth always towards the Enemy's Works, the better to secure their own bodies: as you may perceive by the Trench O. and G. they being drawn crooked like a Serpent; and so directing them until they come close to the Counterscarp of the Mote at the point of the Enemy's Bulwarks, 
When to mount the Canons for Battery.  where being arrived, the Enemy will be glad to quit the two half Moons that are without the Mote, whereby the Work is half won: for now you may safely mount your Canons, and make your Battery K. K. which shall shoot against the Flanks at the bottom of the Ditch: The rest of the Canons at the point of the bulwark E. (at the same instant the Enemy that is under the Counterscarpe) shall pierce the said Counterscarpe, and enter the Mote, and there make a Gallery over at F. F. not forgetting to cast up the earth for your safeguard always towards the Enemy's Works, 
How to cast the earth for your safeguard.  that Flankers you, from which you must continually shoot to beat them from their Flanks: But how ever the Ordnance planted upon the Battery K. will hinder the Enemy; 
How to preserve the Galleries from shooting down.  so that they shall do you small hurt, from their Flanks to your Galleries: The Motes having water in them, you must frame your Galleries over them of strong Timber, and so make your assault over them by the point of the bulwark C. and by the Breach E. Now for to prevent this assault, 
How to prevent an Assault.  the Enemy within the Fort prepares to Reintrench himself, as you may see by the Reintrenchment D. by the which they are able to defend the Breach: they must have always in readiness earth Wood and Timber, and all such things as are necessary for Coverture, and are proper to resist the Enemy's Batteries: but the Reintrenchment is not to be feared, because they within the Fort will be easily constrained to quit it; as they were first made to leave the point of the bulwark. Their next refuge is immediately to begin a new Entrenchment within the other, as you may perceive at S. S. to the end the other being lost, they may Retreat into this; and there they ought to plant their Canons to defend the Breach.  
And now it is high time to entreat of Conditions for the rendering up the Fort, this being the last entrenchment they can possibly make; and it shall be honour sufficient unto them that they have held it out to the last: But if the Defendants expect any Troops that are suddenly to come to their aid; or that the Works be so great that they may raise the third Reintrenchment, then let them hold it out still: But if the place be so small that they cannot Reintrench, they must give place to Fortune. Thus by these demonstrations, you see it is possible to enter any Fort that is accessible: wherefore to delay time, 
Werefore Outworks were devised.  and to waste Men and Treasure of the Enemies, we must use means to prevent an Enemy from making his approaches near the Ditch and Works: Therefore Outworks are devised, as Horne-works, Skonses, Halfmoons, Redouts, Lines, Crosse-Lines and the like, which are to be raised in the convenienst places beyond the Mote, for defence of the Ports, Mote, and Wall; whereby the Enemy's appreaches shall be hindered: not forgetting if their be any way by Water to relieve the Town, that then you raise such able Skonses, that may beat off the Enemy from hindering the passage; 
Passages by water carefully to be fortified.  as was at the famous Siege of Bergin-up-Zone: there were two Skonses which secured the Haven, so that upon all occasion's relief did enter: For had marquis Spinolla gained those Skonses, the Town had been famished: There are only three ways whereby Fortified Towns may be gained; The first is by Stratagem, as Breda, Skinkins Skense were unawares assaulted and taken: The second is by Intrenchments and Batteries to prepare a Breach, and so to make the assault, as in this following Figure I have demonstrated: The third is only by Entrenching an Army about a Fort, whereby all passages are Barricadoed up; so that relief cannot possibly come to enter the Town, so that by mere hunger they are constrained to yield upon such conditions as they may: Lastly for the defending of Works or Breaches, there must be a special care had, that all Warlike instruments be in a readiness for to beat off the Enemy, 
All warlike instruments are to be in a readiness to repel the Enemy from the Breach.  as Granad●s; to throw amongst them Wildfire, Pitcht-Ropes, Hoops, Frames of Muskets, Flails, Stones, Pieces of Timber to role down, and the like: The Fire-balls will do much good when the Enemy is wrought under the Walls, so as the Shot cannot command them: 
Divers things considerable in the defending a Breach.  The most principal thing is to Fire the Galleries; Likewise if you see you shall be forced to leave the point of the bulwark, or any Work else whatsoever: Then privily to make some Mine well planted with Powder, the Train being drawn into your Reintrenchment or Retreating place; that so soon as the Enemy is entered: Fire may be given and blow them up: Further, observe when a Breach is made, 
By the ceasing of the Canon, you may know when the Enemy intends to enter the Breach.  you may know when it is high time to make resistance, by the Enemies leaving giving Fire to the Canons; for when he assaults, he cannot shoot towards the Breach for destroying his own Men, but bends his Ordnance against the Flanks and Bulwarks on either side of the Breaches to hinder them from shooting, whereby their assault may be safer and easier. View the Figure following in the 78 Page, where you shall see how it is defended and assaulted.  
Note what is not here expressed in this Figure answerable to the discourse, you shall find by the Letters in the Precedent Figures plainly demonstrated.   

CHAP. XXXII.  
Divers observations, Rules, and Orders, which all Generals ought to observe in the Besieging, and defending of Forts.  
He that will Beleaguer a Town or Fortress, aught to have three things in his consideration: 
Divers considerations for a General, before he enterprises any attempt against the Enemy.  First, whether he can derive any right or true Title to it; Secondly, whether he be of Power sufficient to manage the Siege (viz) all kind of Provision, as Meat, Drink, Money, Soldiers; all kind of Ammunition, Ordnance, Pieces, Arms, Powder, Bullets, Match; all Warlike Instruments, Granades, Mortar-pieces; all kind of Wildfire, and the like: Thirdly, he must consider whether the profit he shall gain by it, will countervail the charge that must be spent in the Siege: Having thus well considered of all these precedent things; then he must get a true description of the frame and fashion of the Fortress, with the Ways and Paths; the condition of the grounds about it, and the number of Defendants in it: Then sharpening his valour upon the Grindstone of Resolution, let him lead his Army in good order against this Fortress, where he must be careful to quarter his Men in the best and aptest places of security; then having Environed the Fort on all sides with Skonses and Redoubts, so that there can be no Recourse too nor from the Fort; then he must Fortify against the face of the Canon, to the end it may serve for an advantage as you may see by the bulwark marked G. The other part of his Army are to be placed to keep the passages, lest the Enemy should come in the Rear of them and beat them out of their Trenches▪ Therefore strong Works must be raised well Pallizadoed to prevent them; Next he must look that his quarters be well Entrenched with Crosse-Workes, and defended by the Forts and Redouts raised for that purpose, as you may see the Trenches C. are defended from the places R. and from the Redouts P. He ought likewise to make choice of a fit place for the Army to make it his Field for Battle, as you may see by R. S. T. Next you must raise good and sufficient Batteries as near to the Enemy as possible may be; which must be secured and faithfully Guarded by a sufficient number of Soldiers, as the Battery A. is well Retrencht with the Bastions R. and beset with good Gabions filled with good earth, having a great care their be no Stones in it; lest the Canon shot from the Fort should beat them about, and do more harm to the Soldiers, than the Bullets themselves: They ought also to do the same on all sides, as we see by the Cavaliers A. D. E. Q. the which must be raised at the same instant, beginning to make the Canon's Play, to batter the tops of the Works in the Fort, with all fury without intermission; to the end the pioneers may have time to make their Trenches and approaches in greater safety and more strongly: for the Canons beating against the top of the Works of the Fort with such fury that the Defendants have no leisure to discover the design of the Assailants, and much less shall they know how to use means to prevent those blows and batterings; besides the great fears and terrors that the poor Soldiers will be in all the while▪ Wherefore there must be great diligence used, for fear they should lose that good and favourable time, wherein they may make their Intrenchments without danger: Those within the Fort in this case, 
How those should defend themselves in the Fort against the Assailants.  aught to have very experienced Soldiers and good Canoniers; and likewise all the Platforms for the Artillery or Cavaliaries should use their best endeavours by continual shooting to prevent the raising of the Enemy's Batteries and Trenches, and not to fear any colours, being they are protected with a good Parapet from the dint of the Shot: Likewise oftentimes they ought to change the places of the Musquetiers, 
How the Musqueteers ought to be demeaned at the Enemies first approaches.  those which were upon the Curtains, shall be placed upon the face of the bulwark, and so to the Shoulders of it; continually thus changing the Musquetiers from place to place, as occasion shall be offered: this will much annoy the Enemy, and the rather, because they know not how to bend their Pieces against them; because of the uncertainty of their places. Moreover the Enemy having battered those places that hindered him most, cannot help it, but he must suffer your Soldiers to set every man his Basket, being set close together that they may put their Muskets between them, and shoot continually for all the blows of the Canons; whose shottes are made very uncertain: above all things we must have an eye, that the Musketeer discharges not by Volleys, but by degrees; so that some may be always giving fire, whilst their fellow-soldiers charge. And likewise, to take good aim from between the Baskets; which ought to be placed upon every Work near the Enemy; after the manner deciphered in this Figure following.  

They use to plant the foot of the inside of the Walls, with Osiers and Willows, to make Baskets, and mend Breaches.   
A, B, are the Baskets filled with good Earth or Dung to cover the Musquetiers upon the Breach, made in the Parapet C; they are to put their Muskets between each Basket, taking their level to shoot; wherefore there ought to be great store of these Baskets, and Wheelbarrows in the Fort, to be used upon all occasions.  
If these should be wanting, they must have Sacks filled with good earth, placing them accordingly to shoot through. The Enemy seeing such prepared resistance within the Fort, will begin his Trenches the profoundlier, to the end his Soldiers may be preserved; for it is the duty of a good Captain, to have a special regard to the safety of his Soldiers: For that is a practical policy used always by the Prince of Nassaw, whereby they conceived he would not cause his men to run headlong to destruction, which made them the more forward in Service, and the valianter to execute what they were commanded by him; this aught to be a thing remarkable, for otherwise a world of Soldiers are lost, and the Captains are discomfited, for not gaining an impossible victory.  
The Enemy is to conduct his Trenches to the Counter-skarpe, 
How the Enemy ought to draw his Trenches.  and make them so deep, that the Defendants within the Fort cannot possibly hurt them; they being brought always towards the point of the bulwark, as you may perceive by the Trench C, C, because they should not be so much molested by the Ordnance and the Muskets from the Works of the Fort: and when the Enemy hath gained the Counter-skarpe, they shall make their Crosse-workes as you may see by the distance X, X, where they shall lodge a good number of Canons; raising their Batteries or Cavalliaries more spacious, although they serve for little or no purpose, only to batter against the Flanks, and make them unprofitable; during which time you ought to follow the speedy making of your Trenches, and bring them to their half Moons, and then by the assistance of your pioneers, they raising a sufficient able high Traverse, to shelter them from the force of the Cavalliaries and Bulwarks within the Fort, which otherwise would command them, and is most easy to be effected, especially if the More or Ditch be not spacious; and at the same instant your Soldiers are to make their assault, be it by Scaling-ladder or otherwise.  
The General must cause diverse Pieces to be brought, which shall be to discharge upon all parts of the Wall, to hinder their annoying of the Assailants; who must enter the Breach with a brave resolution. The roaring of the Canons having so astonish those within the Halfmoon, and battered their Parapets, that they have no time to see if the Battery be finished or not, and they being not provided for the Assault, it will wonderfully puzzle them, the assault being followed with good order and resolution; this being the time and place, where men ought to purchase honour: and these Assaults will discover, which are the valiantest spirits. The Officers at the Siege of Rhineberg, showing their resolutions to their Soldiers, threw their Colours into a Halfmoon, from which they had been repulsed three or four times, by the Musketeers and Pikes within the said Work, whereupon they ran furiously to redeem their honours upon the Pikes and Muskets, rather choosing to dye with honour, than to lose their Colours with disgrace: this Onset did so revive the Soldiers, they seeing the Noble resolution of their Leaders, at one instant assaulted the Work, and discomfited the Enemy, so as they gave way to their magnanimous resolutions.  
Having gained this Halfmoon Y Y, the Defendants for their safety retreat into the Ditch, 
What the Defendants ought to do, the Enemy having gained the half Moon.  behind the Parapet of the Work called the Cunette, with short Cudgels and Flails prepared for that purpose, to defend the entering of the Enemy into the Ditch; which will be a hard work for them to enter and obtain it, before they can be in any hopes to win the Fort, by reason they cannot come to batter this work, it being so low in the Ditch, with force of Canon.  
Now for to hinder the defence of the Work within the Ditch called the Cunette, 
How the Assailants may hinder the defence of the Cunette, or Ravelin.  the best way is to stop their passages from coming upon it; which may be effected, if there be two pieces of Ordnance planted within the Ditch by the Halfmoon M, where they must batter down the Earth right against the Sally-port, or place they are to enter unto the Work, to defend it, whereby their ways may be discovered; Their sallying out upon this work being hindered, there must be a Gallery ready prepared, made upon Barrels or Hogsheads; these must float upon the water, and from hence the Flank that defends that side, must be battered with all fury, without giving space to the Defendants to get upon their Trenches, which they will do if there be any intermission; wherefore immediately they must fa●l to entrenching, and cast the Earth towards the side of the Flanks, making the Traverse M; during which time, the Battery must shoot furiously on all sides, than those which are upon the Counter-skarpe, must be provided with good store of Granades, which they must cast over into the works called the Cunette, to the end they may cause them to quit the Work; then the Traverse being made M, M, they shall have the better freedom, to transport a great number of Soldiers over the Mote to make their Assaults: and being arrived at the foot of the bulwark, they may presently undermine it, if it happens that the Breach be not sufficient for them to get over.  
Now the Defendants within the Port, have for their refuge the bulwark, to reintrench in, as you may perceive at V; causing a sufficient Parapet to be made for the coverture of those that defend the reintrenchment: Having always a sufficient company of Soldiers, with all kind of warlike instruments, ready and in good order for to relieve them, the Enemy being so near them wrought, that they are like to be surprised and beaten back; the best defence they can then have, will be the Granades and Artificial Fireworks, which they must cast over into the Ditch or Falsebray, for to annoy them that are undermining the Bulwarks.  
But the Enemy standing upon his honour, 
How to prevent the breaking of Granades.  seeks all ways to prevent the breakeing of the Granades, and burning of the Fireworks, by choking them with water or raw Hides, so as they fall to the ground, so that they work small effect.  
Likewise, the Defendants place great pieces of Timber upon the Walls, to role down upon the Assailants as they are climbing the Bulwarks: But when the Defendants have used all their endeavours to no purpose, and the Enemy being got into the Work, than it is time to entreat and provide for a Composition: yet for all they are reduced to these extremities, they ought to make choice of such inconveniences as are least hurtful to them. 
How the Defendants ought to make their Composition with the Enemy.  The Composition is to be made, according to the Forces they have, and the hopes they have to relieve it, and according as they are able to sustain themselves, if they should put it to the last brunt. It is no dishonour for a Captain to entreat with his Enemy, in two respects; the first is, the conservation of their Arms, and Baggage: the second is, the Pillage which may be made within the Fort; the which may possibly be regained again by some stratagem, from this Enemy, in a short time after.  
Now having the Fortress surrendered upon composition, the General must consider, whether he be able to maintain it, and whether the profit of it will be answerable to the charge; which if it be, he must raze down all the out-Trenches which the Enemy made, and repair the Breaches of it: and then to draw his Army into convenient Garrisons, that they may be fit for the next employment of the Prince. Thus taking Reason and Experience for his guide, in all his enterprises, which must be just and equitable; will cause the Honour and glory of a General to shine.  
Thus have we finished the discourse of Fortification, and in regard the use of great Artillery is the chiefest thing to be used in a Fort, I have thought it fit to frame a discourse of the use of Artillery, having taken the opinions and rules of the best Authors, either ancient or modern, to steer my course by: only I shall show you a Figure of a Fort beleaguered, and of a Fort assaulted upon the Curtin. View the Figures following.  
ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss  
Here you perceive the breach made in the midst of the Curtin. At the letter B, is a Cat with Ordnance on it, to batter against the Re-intrenchments, and to 〈◊〉 it: There is a Work raised at C, to prevent them. I would wish you to peruse Jerome Cataneo, by him you shall receive further instructions. If the Breach may possible be made in the Point of the bulwark, it is far better than the Curtin; because the Defendants have far the odds, in defending the Breach from either Flank, and from the Reintrenchment; besides the Gallery that shall be laid over the Mote, will sooner be battered down from the Flanks. The next is, the Paralellagram of a Fort beleaguered; And then the use of Redouts: And then after that, the duties of Soldiers in Garrisons; shall be plainly showed.   

CHAP. XXXIII.  
A Triangular Sconce, with directions for the best scituating of it.  
THis kind of Triangular Sconce, must be situated in a place strong by Nature, otherwise it is of poor resistance, and little better than a Redout: they were invented to be placed in some spot of ground, naturally environed with strength, being a place that could not be capable of any other Figure, in regard of the smallness of it: Likewise, it is a small charge to raise it, and speedily done; the place must not be of any great consequence, where this Figure is situated, for it cannot withstand any great resistance: it is form with earth, after the same manner the other be: only high and thick to resist Ordnance.  
  

CHAP. XXXIV.  
The manner of framing a Triangle Redout.  
ARedout is a kind of sleight Fortification, used for the defence of some few men; And of these principally there are three kinds, which are to be made use of, according to the quantity of men you place in them, and the consequence of the passage they are to be raised in, for they are not to be used but for Outguardes, to prevent the Enemy from making any sudden surprises: the greatest defence they can make is against the Horse, to hinder them from passing by any Ford of Water, or other Passage, if the Passage be thought convenient for the  
The Paralellagram of the discourse desiphering the manner and order observed in the Siege and defence of a Fort.  
Pla●e this Figure betwixt ●olio 84. and 85.  
Enemies approaches, then place two of these Redouts a square, on one side the way, and this Triangle a little wide of the other, on the other side of the way; the Brest-worke of them is to be some four or five foot thick, and eight foot high, with a good broad foot-step, and convenient height to stand on; so as they may discharge over the Worke.  
The Pallizadoes are to be wrought in two foot from the top of the Work, the grea●ends to be laid downwards into the Work, so that the sharp ends may rise upwards, they are to lie three foot into the earth, and as much out: the outside of this work ought to be good solid earth, being digged taperwise (viz.) six inches thick at the end that should lie outmost, and some two inches the end that lies inward; by this means they will not slip out, and make the work decay; in the midst is your rubbish earth to be rammed down: the Ditch ought to be six or eight foot wide, with a Draw-bridge to enter into the Worke.  

Note, if there be 60. men to guard the passage, the Redout must be 60. feet square on all three sides, allowing, 3. feet for each man to use his arms in, viz. 20. men on 1 side.    

CHAP. XXXV.  
The manner of framing a Quadrangle Redout.  
THis four Square Redout, is to hold a hundred or 150. Soldiers, and these are to be raised, where you conceive the Enemy hath most advantage to gain a passage to come to annoy your Camp; it serves also in the beleaguering of a Fort, to place one or two of these Redouts betwixt two Forts, that they may flanker it, and so to Trench in the Fort round, that no access may be, either to or from the Town; it must be well Pallizadoed, as you see by the Figure; especially, if it stands upon any passage of consequence. The Prince of Orange, made use of these Redouts to surround his Camp, one to stand Musket-shot from the other, so that the Enemy could not possibly pass, but to the loss of his Men; but however the Enemy could not possibly do any design upon his quarters, but there would be a convenient alarm; so as the whole Army would be at the Brest-worke of their Trenches to entertain them: In the discourse of Encamping, we have taken occasion to speak of these kind of Forts more fully  
  

CHAP. XXXVI.  
The manner of framing a Quadrangle Skonse.  
THis Fouresquare Sconce, is of greater strength than your Triangle, and if it be favoured with a strong Situation, as great Rivers, or upon a Rock, or where it may be flankered from the Bulworks of a Fort, it will stand in great stead; otherwise it is not to be taken for a strength of any moment: The Bulwarks and Curtines are to be made very high, thick, and strong, that it may endure the battering of the Enemy's Ordnance.  
  

CHAP. XXXVII.  
The manner of framing a Sconce with six Points or Angles.  
THis Figure following, is a kind of Fort, and is used in the Entrenching or Belaguring a Town round; it is spacious to hold 200 Soldiers or more, as occasion shall be offered; You may perceive by the Lines drawn how every Angle is Flanked one from the other: It is made of good Earth very substantially after the same manner the former are; you shall see how they are situated in the Page in the Figure of the Fort Beleagured.  
 
  

CHAP. XXXVIII.  
The manner of framing a half Moon.  
This precedent Figure, is a kind of a half Moon and is thus form, because it lies open to some Curtin or bulwark behind it, so that if the enemy fortunes to gain it, he shall be beaten out from the bulwark that Flanks it: the Brest-worke of it ought to be of the same thickness and height that the former Redouts were.   

CHAP. XXXIX.  
The manner of framing a Horne-Worke.  
THere are two kind of Horneworkes which are to be made without the Fort of great height and strength, being the only place of safety for all the outworks to Retreat into when occasion is offered: it likewise safeguards the Counterscarpe, keeping the Enemy from approaching; it defends the Works of the Fort from being battered by the Enemy's Ordnance; it lies open to the Fort, so that if the Enemy should gain it, they should be Repulsed from the Bulwarks; It is to be situated betwixt two Bulwarks, and it hath its defence from them, they Flankering each side: The other fashioned Horne-worke is made out with two Points, and is of greater strength than this, as in the next Page we shall discourse of; It is called a Horne-worke from the fashion, being like a Beaugle-horne; some halfmoons are of this form, but not of half the greatness this is to be of, in regard this is always well Maned; For those that have the Works against the Enemy one night, are relieved the next, and here they repose themselves; the third night they take their ease in the Town.  
The manner of framing of a Horn-worke described; with diverse Ou● works belonging to it, whereby it may be defended from all Assaults, most proper to be placed before some weak bulwark of a Town beleaguered, or any other part of the Walls thereof, that may seem easy for the Enemy to batter down. By the Letters you shall find each Circumstance described, belonging to this work.  
A. The Front of the Horne-worke. H. The Ditch of the Towne-walls. B. The Ditch 30. foot broad. I. A Fortification before the Outworks 140. spaces distant from the Horne-worke. C. The half Moon.  D. The Parapet. K. A three-pointed Fortification before the Front and corners of the Horne-worke. E. The Ditch without the half Moon. L. The Ditch. F. The Counterscarpe. M. The Pallizadoet upon the Counterscarpe about the Ditch. G. The Towne-walls.   
Place this Horne-worke between Folio 90. and 91.   

CHAP. XL.  
A second kind of Horne-worke, with its proper place.  
THis second kind of Horne-worke, is of greatest strength to resist the Enemy next the bulwark, they are to open toward the Works of the Fort, and to be situated betwixt two Bulwarks that it may be Flanquered by them: These are made without the Mote and Counterscarpe, a Muskets shot, or not all so much, according as the situation shall permit: These aught to be always in readiness, if the Town be a Frontier, and according as the fieldding may be favourable for the Enemy's Intrenchments their to raise one of these Works, or if any place of the Wall of the Fort should be weaker than the rest; We had three of these ready raised at Zutphen in Gelderland to prevent the Enemy's approaches in those great Marshes about the Town; there is no watch kept in them except the Enemy be at hand: They are to be framed as your Bulwarks, Canonproofe, and of height sufficient to secure the Walls of the Fort; Likewise they must be well Pallizadoed and strongly Maned, View the Figure.  
The Figures of the three famous Batteries, which were raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda.   

CHAP. XLI.  
The description of the Redonts, Forts, and Batteries, which were raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda.  
YOu must observe in these Precedent Figures (both of the Forts and Batteries which were raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda) Those sides of them which looked towards the Town, were made Canon-proofe (viz.) 25 foot thick.  
The first of the three Batteries was 160 foot long, and 125 foot broad; in the Rear and Flanks of it, it had a Wall 15 foot thick, saving that one side of this Wall was thicker than the rest, rising with a walk and a Parapet on the inside: in the Front it was lined with two exterior Angles, the face of it rising with Nine open Windows, for so many Pieces of Ordnance to play out at; each Window was 2 foot 1/2 wide, opening wider outwards by degrees: On the inside a Groundselling was raised like a bed of Turf and Faggots, 8 foot in height, and 35 foot broad, covered over with Planks, for the speedy removing and recoiling of the Artillery: Behind this groundsel, was a place of Arms 130 foot long, and 50 foot broad. The outside of the Wall under the Canon Windows, was Pallizadoed with sharp long Stakes.  
Before the Battery there is a halfmoon raised, wherein was a Guard of Musquettiers, and compassed with a Counterscarpe and palizado, these were for the safety of the Battery: Round about the Battery a Ditch was sunk seven foot deep, and 48 foot broad; the sides of the Ditch were cut sloping from the top to the bottom, so that in the bottom it was but 38 foot broad; Upon the outmost shore of the Ditch, was placed a long palizado to hinder all sudden assaults, View the Figure.  
The second and third Battery had their dimensions much after the former, only the least being the second Batery had a Fort about it for its defence, by the Figures you may perceive the difference both in their length, breadth, and corners: The foregoing Forts which Spinola raised against Breda, I have drawn the Figures of them, which if you please to view, you may observe that the Walls of them were 28 foot thick at the bottom, and so were raised 15 foot high with a Parapet upon the top of the Wall for the safeguard of the shot, 6 foot high the Parapet; the Wall was made sloping and Pallizadoed round; the Ditch about these Forts were 22 foot broad, 10 foot deep, and 12 foot wide in the bottom, View the Figures.  

A Redout made o● Turf used by Spinola at the Siege of Breda.   

A Fort made of Turffeused by Spinola at the Siege of Breda.   
A Battery raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda, upon the Heath near Osterhout.  
A Battery joining to a Fort, raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda, upon the Heath towards Osterhout.   

CHAP. XLII.  
Divers choice Observations worthy to be taken notice of, concerning the Beleaguering of a Fort; Collected from the famous Siege of Breda, Anno 1624. With the Description of the chiefest Trenches, Forts, Redouts, and Batteries, which were raised by marquis Spinola, against it.  
YOu having taken a view of the precedent Figure of a Fort beleaguered, being surrounded with Trenches, Redouts, Forts, and Batteries; for your better understanding the manner and way how an Army should be brought and pitched in convenient Quarters, and how the Trenches and Redouts, Forts, and Batteries, are to be placed in places convenient: I have taken some pains to bring to your view the orderly way which that famous General marquis Spinola observed, at the remarkable Siege of Breda: It being the Queen of Garrisons in the Netherlands, beautified and strengthened with the absolutest Fortifications that either Art or Nature could afford: So that it was conceived to be impregnable.  
Wherefore in the first place, take notice how Spinola divided his Army (which consisted of 198. Foot Companies, and 32. Troops of Horse) into three parts; purposely to distract the Hollander: to which end they took their marches severally to other places, then that which was intended; but at last they met, and joined together at a Dorp near Breda.  
The Town of Breda fearing their design, did immediately strengthen their Garrison, with 45. foot-Companies, and only two Troops of Horse: these Forces of the Town were quartered in the Outworks, and Walls, where they caused immediately to be raised diverse Horneworkes and other Fortifications beyond them, as the precedent Figure of the Horne-worke will demonstrate: the Soldiers of the Town passed into these Outworks through Sally-Ports, made under the Wall of the Town.  
Spinola having encamped his Army two Leagues from Breda, he rested certain days not doing any thing; which made the Hollander think they had some other design: But having weighed all difficulties in his Balance of reason, upon the 26. of August about twilight, he sent Medina with 10. Troops of Horse, and 4000 Foot, to pitch down upon one side of the Town of Breda.  
Ballion had order the same time, to march with his own Regiment, and 14. other Companies of Foot, and a certain number of Horse, with diverse Canons; and these were to pitch down in another Quarter, near the Town, just opposite to the former Troops, and there they raised diverse Works, and entrenched themselves.  
The next Morning, by break of day, Spinola arrived with the rest of the Forces, and entrenched them upon the other two sides of the Town: Then from these four several quarters, they began to draw a Trench of earth, from quarter to quarter, in which they raised diverse Redouts and Forts, about 400. paces one from the other, which served for a prevention of all sudden Sallies out of the Town; each Colonel from his own quarter wrought towards the next; and manned the Works with parties of Soldiers: The first, Trench was but 5 foot high, and 7. foot thick at the bottom, and three foot broad at the top; the Ditch was 6. foot deep and 7. foot broad at the top, and two foot at the bottom. This Trench was 3600. paces in circuit, but in regard of the overflowing of the grounds in Winter, they quitted these first Works, and were constrained to raise more solid Works further off from the Town.  
Wherefore they raised a second Trench near ten foot high, and fifteen foot thick at the bottom, and made somewhat sloping; there was two foot banks for the Musquetiets to step upon, to give fire over the Brest-work, this Brest-work was raised above Foot-bankes, five foot high; ten foot thick at bottom, and six at the top: This second Trench contained in Circuit 16000 paces.  
Likewise, beyond this second Trench from the Townewards, distance about 200. paces, they were constrained to raise a third Trench, with diverse Forrs, Redouts, and Batteries, as the precedent Figures will show you; this Trench was of the same demention that the former was; being made very solid and strong to defend their quarters from the Prince of Oranges his Forces, who did seek to raise their Siege, or to relieve the Town; This last Trench fetched a Circuit round about the former Trench, it being 52000. paces in compass.  
Upon the outside of both these Trenches, a Ditch was sunk seven foot deep, 15. foot broad at the top, and 8. foot at the bottom. The Soldiers of Breda sallied out upon Spinola's men, as they were raising the first Trench next the Town; and if they had fall'n upon them in several places at once, they would by all probability have beaten them from their quarters, they being very weary, and but few in number at the first: So that they were constrained both to fight and fortify themselves, the space of three hours: afterwards a greater resistance was made to beat them back.  
The Redouts of Earth were made of a quadrant Figure, 
The Description of the Redouts.  and were so placed in the Trench, that no Angle or corner appeared outwards, they were 50, foot wide in the inside, and on the outside 80. and strongly fortified with a palizado of sharp spars, placed in the outward edge of the Parapet, they had a ditch about them, and a Counter-skarpe beyond the Ditch, and upon the verges of the Counter-skarpe another palizado of Spiles was placed, to hinder the Enemy's approaches.  
The Forts were raised with green Turf, 
The Description of the Forts.  with four irregular Bulwarks 35. foot thick, and 13. foot high; their Curtains 100 foot long, as the Figures of them will show you: These were of the strongest sort which were placed near the Town, their Ditches were 12. foot wide, 
The Description of the rest of the Forts and Redouts.  and 8. foot deep, these were to endure the battering of the Canon from the Town. The other Forts and Redouts, were raised 13. foot high from the ground, and 15. foot thick, the Ditches 12. foot broad, and 8. foot deep, the inside of these Forts and Redouts were but 8. foot high, and raised perpendicular; at which height, a walk was made five foot high and broad: and upon this was a Parapet round the Works five foot high, and ten foot thick, this was to shelter the Musquetiers from the shot of the Town.  
These Works had a kind of Plank to lay over the Ditch, for the Soldiers to go over into the Works; and being these Bridges were drawn up with Pulleys and fastened with iron haspes to the Posts of the Gate they both served for Bridge and Gate; And before these Works, upon the outside of the Ditch was a halfmoon raised well pallizadoed, to defend the entrance into the Forts.  
These mighty vast Trenches, with the Forts, and Redoubts, were (by the diligence of the Soldiers which wrought both night and day, they being continually relieved with freshmen) finished in 17. days. You shall find amongst the precedent Figures diverse great Forts, one of them was form in a form quadrant, with four half Bulwarks, made very solid for Artillery to be planted upon; it was Canon proof. The Curtains were 120. foot long, 28. foot thick, and 15. foot high, pallizadoed round, to hinder the Enemy's assaults. Likewise, you shall find the Figures of 4. Forts more proportionable in strength to the first; these had a Trench raised, which ran from one to another, very strong and solid, as before is showed: these Works differed in form, but were of one and the same demention; these were placed upon an eminent passage, upon a little heath; by which the Prince of Orange might possibly have conveyed provision to the waters side, by which means the Town might have been relieved.  
There were two Batteries raised at the entrance of each quarter, with half Moons before the entrance upon the out side, and diverse Forts beside, according to the different situation and danger of the place: the Figures of these Batteries I have likewise drawn for your better information.  
There were three great Batteries raised, in three several places near the Town, which battered against the Flanks of the Bulwarks of the Town, and those sides both of the Batteries, Forts, and Redouts, which beheld the Town, were made Canon proof, 25. foot thick.  
The greatest of these Batteries was 160. foot long, and 125. foot broad, in the Rear and Flank of it, it had a Wall fifteen foot thick, it was made rising with a Walk, and a Parapet on the inside; in the Front it was lined with two exterior Angles, the face of it rising with nine open Windows, for so many Pieces of Artillery to shoot out at, each Window being a foot and a half wide, opening more and more out wards by little and little. On the inside, a Groundfell was raised, like a bed of Turf and Faggots, eight foot high, and 35. foot broad, covered over with Planks, for the speedy removing and recoiling of the Artillery.  
Behind this Groundfell, was a place of Arms 130. foot long, and 50. foot broad, the outside of the Wall under the Canon-windowes, were pallizadoed; and before the Battery was two half Moons, guarded with Musquetiers, and compassed with a Ditch and Counterskarpe, and a palizado of Spiles upon the Counterskarp, for the safety of the Battery, the Ditch was 7. foot deep, and 48. foot broad, at the bottom but 38.  
The two other Batteries were raised indifferent large, the manner of framing them, was much after the former; saving that the least of the two became the largest, by the Addition of a Fort: the Figures will better inform you, in the difference both of length, breadth, and Angles.  
Spinola raised upon all Passages, very strong Forts; and upon the Causies (where there was no passage on neither side of it) he caused very strong Pallizadoes of young Stadles droven into the earth, and framed together 15. foot high. Likewise, cross the waters that drowned the Meadows, he made a double palizado, to prevent the Boats from going to the Town.  
Also, he blocked up the Rivers with a strong Bridge, and a guard of Musquetiers upon it, with sharp pieces of timber lying pointing out of split their Boates. Also, he had Boats lay at Anchor in the River, to hinder the passage; beside, diverse Boats bored through at the bottom, which were to be sunk upon the sudden; and diverse other Boats of Combustible stuff, to burn the Enemies Fleet. Also, within the River, at four several places a good distance one from another, there were strong Spiles of timber droven down, and coupled together with Crosse-beames, in manner of Pallizadoes, which made the River unpassable.  
The Townsmen raised five great Horneworkes, to secure their own Counterscarpe and Mote, before every Port of the Town one, and the rest in other convenient places; the Levell-side of these Horneworkes, were 210. foot long, and 150. foot broad. I have presented to your view, the Figure of the largest Horne-worke, which was raised before the Castle, it is 240. paces long, and 200. paces broad, it was pallizadoed thick round about, to hinder the Enemy's assault; beyond this Horne-worke is a Halfmoon, fortified with a Counterscarpe a cubit high, and environed with another Ditch, as the Figure thereof will better inform you: these Outworks, were flanquered from the Town walls; there was a Trench drawn from one Work to another, to beat off the Enemy from the Counterscarpe.  
The ordinary Carrison of this Town, which consisted but of 15. Bulwarks, were 1600. Foot, and five troops of Horse; but the brute of this Siege caused them to be reinforced with 28. Companies more; beside there were 1800. able Townsmen, which were to manage the Walls.  
The Governor sent away 3. troops of his Horse, because they could afford them no service in the Siege.  
The Provision laid in against winter for these Soldiers, was 8200. measures of Wheat, of Oats 2800. 3600. weight of Cheese, and as much dried Gaberdine; and every Townsman was (besides) to furnish himself for a year.  
And in regard Spinola could not have his Provision for his Army come by Water, he was constrained to convey it by Land, it being 12. hours' march; for the same purpose, he had all his Provision brought to one of his own Towns that lay nearest to the Camp, named Lyre. But the Prince of Orange his Camp lying at Ros●ndall, they were constrained to march about, and to fortify diverse Dorpes in the way for the resting and securing of the Convoys and Provisions.  
Count Henry Van den Bergh, had the greatest part of the Horse, and as I take it, 4000 foot with him; beside, there was 1000 Horse more newly raised; with these forces he was to conduct the Provision.  
His manner of proceeding was this; In the morning before day, he gave Commandment to put in order the disordered multitude of Carriages and Wagons; then he sent some Troops of Horse before to discover: He commanded them to March, he placed Artillery both in the Van, and in the Rear to give warning by their discharging, of the Enemy's approaches; so that his men might gather together as he had given them order, for to repair to the place which stood most in need.  
He guarded both sides of the Way near where the Prince of Orange's Army lay with loose Wings of Horse; and he lined these Horse with Guards of Musquetiers, and with the rest of the Horse he brought up the Rear.  
Upon occasion of fear he made use of his Wagons instead of a Trench, drawing his Foot-forces within them: He had daily and hourly Spies to know the Hollanders intentions and proceedings; He cut down all Bridges that might afford the Hollander a Passage to come at him in his March: By this means they sustained their Camp in despite of the Hollander: And as Vanden Bergh was to make his Retreat, he fearing the Prince of Orange would have set upon his Troops, he ordered his Forces accordingly, by dividing them into three grand Squadrons; and so Marched ready to receive any charge.  
The Prince of Orange then having Encamped his Army at Mede a Dorp 2 hours distant from Breda, thinking to have relieved the Town; So soon as Spinola understood it, he left all the Works about the Town well Manned, unto the charge of Medina, and Marched himself with 7000 foot, and 30 Troops of Horse to a convenient place near Osterhout, where he Encamped within three miles of the Enemy, where he confronted the enemy, and anticipated the place of great advantage for the Prince of Orange to have relieved the Town by it.  
After that the Prince of Orange did perceive their was no hopes of relieving the Town; he provided for his safe Retreat, to which end he raised diverse Works to hinder Spinola from pursuing him: As first upon a convenient passage he raised a Fort to Retire his men into, and to defend them from the sudden pursuit of the Enemy; and upon the side next Spinolas Camp by which he was to make his Retreat, he raised a Brest-worke along the Causey, with a deep Ditch to cover his men from the Enemy's shot, and also to obscure them in their Retreat: Spinola fearing the Prince of Orange should have assaulted some of their Garrisons with his Army, He commanded Grave Hendrick Vanden-Bergh to dog him with his Army to prevent his designs.  
This Siege having lasted part of Summer, all Winter, and part of the Summer following; which was a thing thought impossible to have been done being eleven Months: The Governor of Breda founded a Parley, and was content to surrender the Town (they being almost famished) if Spinola would agree to such Articles as he should propound: For the performance of which Articles there were sufficient Hostages from either side to confirm the Agreement.  
I have set down the Articles, they being a most fit pattern for all Governors to shape their Agreements by, The Articles follow.  
First a Captain of the Garrison of Breda, brought Spinola two Copies of the Articles betwixt them, that he might first sign them both; which done he carried them back to the Governor for him to sign, one part of them was brought back to Spinola: Upon the signing of these Covenants, the Governor demanded 1200 Wagons, and 60 Boats, to carry away sick and maimed persons, and others with their Carriages and householdstuff, which was by Spinola granted.  
Imprimis, It shall be lawful for the Governor of the Town; with the rest of the Officers and Soldiers, both of Horse and foot, to March out of the Town armed Soldier like, (viz.) The Foot with flying Colours, Drums beating, completely Armed, Bullet in mouth, Match lighted at both ends, their charges full of Powder and Shot: The Horse, with their Trumpets founding, Standards displayed; Armed in such sort as when they March towards the Enemy: And that no Soldier shall be (of what Nation soever) questioned or detained for any cause or pretext whatsoever; not though he had formerly been in the Enemy's service; All without exception, having free liberty to march the best and most commodious way to their next Garrison, without injury, hindrance or wrong done to their own persons, their Arms, Horses, or Baggage, and this with all safety and assurance possible: And further, it shall be lawful for them to take their Wives, Children, Household, householdstuff, Horses and Carts, with the Arms of all Soldiers dead or hurt, sick or run away without any search or inquiry made after them.  
Item All Ministers or Preachers of the Word, Commissaries of Musters, Officers of Contribution, with their Clerks, Ingineers, Gentlemen of the Artillery, the Auditor of the Soldiers, Masters of Fireworks, Captains of pioneers, Canoners, Surgeons of Regiments, and private Companies; with all such as belong to the Train of Artillery, Mariners, Notaries, Overseers of Works, Provosts, pioneers, Carpenters, Smiths, Commissaries of the Victuals, and all persons whatsoever, any way belonging to the Artillery or Engines, with their Wives, Children, and Servants, Horse, and Arms; shall be comprehended in the former Article, and enjoy the same privileges.  
Item All Boats found about or in the Town at this present, as well those which arrived last with the Colonels, as with any others; shall be permitted with all their necessaries and tackling, to return to their next place of refuge, guided by their own Pilots and Mariners; in which it shall be lawful for them to Embark their Families, and householdstuff, with the Arms and Baggage of the Colonels, Captains, and other Officers of the Army, sick persons, with such as attend them; and all others whosoever desire to pass by Water into their next safe Garrison: And to this purpose the River shall be open for them, during the term of twelve days, and then within that space they may safely repair to— and join themselves with their other men of War; and from thence take their journey to what place they please, the Boats remaining still to their own Masters and owners: And during the said term of twelve days, no man shall dare to molest or hinder those Boats, but shall permit them to pass freely with their Passengers, without searching them, for any cause or pretext whatsoever: And if it chance that the passage of the River be not yet freed and made Navigable again, (by which their journey may be any way hindered) the time in which by that means the journey hath been stayed, shall not be reckoned amongst those twelve days; which term they enjoy freely and withal assurance, as well in the River itself, as upon either shore of it, where Mariner or any other Passengers shall have occasion to land, for their commodity or affairs: And if any of the Boats belong to any man, who shall desire to reside still in the Town of— they shall be tied notwithstanding to help to transport Passengers, and Baggage out of Breda, and afterwards return home to their Masters.  
Item Spinola shall allow the Governor any reasonable and sufficient number of Wagons as he shall demand, to transport his own, the Colonel, Captains, Officers, and other men's Baggage of the Garrison, to their next Garrison, from whence they shall return them safe and faithfully again.  
Item It shall be lawful for the Governor to carry out with his Garrison any four Pieces of Artillery, and two Mortars he shall make choice of, with all their appurtinances, and as much Powder and Ball as they will bear at six charges; and it shall be at his choice to transport them with their Carriages either by Water or by Lane: And for this purpose the marquis Spin●la shall allow the Governor if he shall demand it, all Canon-Horses and others, with their Wagons, and Waggonmen, as shall be requisite for the transporting of these Pieces of Artillery and Mortars, with all their appurtenances.  
Item What goods or householdstuff belongs to the Prince of Orange, it shall be lawful for him or his Deputy to transport them to what place he pleaseth, within the time of six Months; at which time a free passage shall be given without any molestation or hindrance, in the mean time the goods to be safely preserved.  
Item If it chance that any man comprehended in the two first Articles, shall be unable for his sickness to go out of the Town with the Garrison: it shall be lawful for such to remain in the Town, with their Wives, Families, and Servants, without any wrong offered them, until they have recovered their health and strength again, and then a free pass shall be given them to depart to what place they please.  
Item No Officer of the Army, Soldier or Captain, or any other whatsoever comprehended in the aforesaid Articles, who shall now go out with the Garrison, or shall remain in the Town till he have recovered his health, shall afterwards be troubled, as not being comprehended in the said Articles; for by virtue of these Articles, it shall be lawful for him to go freely at any time, and he shall have credit for Money upon his Bond, or any other assurance he shall be able to give.  
Item The Governor, Captains, Officers, and Soldiers comprehended in these Articles, or any other whatsoever being in Pay, and subjection of the united States; shall have in Breda any houses or possessions, moveables, or immovables (comprehending as well the Captain, Officers, and Soldiers of the Companies of— as the Widows and Children belonging to those Troops etc. or any other Companies, which for two years before have been in Garrison in Breda) shall have a year and a half (beginning within a Month after the signing of these Covenants) to transport their goods to what place they please; or to Sell, Mortgage, Alienate, or exchange them, according to the Laws and Customs in that particular: And in the mean season they shall enjoy all Rents, Profits, and Commodities of their Inheritance, accrueing to them for the present, or to accrue; and in conclusion they shall enjoy any thing belonging to them in the Town.  
Item The Soldiers either of the Garrison, or our Camp, being now Prisoners either in the Town or in the Camp, at the signing of these Covenants, shall be set at liberty without Ransom, paying only their charges, according to the taxation of the place.  
Item No man shall take any thing from any of the Garrison of any price he hath made; all such things being to pass under the title of the Soldiers own goods.  
Item After the signing of these Articles, it shall be lawful for the Governor of Breda, to send any Officer or whom so ever else, to the Prince of Orange, who shall be permitted safely to go and come.  
Item After the signing of these Covenants, there shall be a suspension of Arms on both sides: Howbeit, on each side the Soldiers shall maintain their Works, permitting no man to come near them either by day or night.  
Item Before the Garrison march out of Town, two sufficient Hostages shall be given, who shall accompany the Garrison to the next Fort or Town of strength; and shall remain there the twelve days in which the River is to remain open, and the Covenants to be fulfilled; and this term being expired, if the Covenants in any point have not been broken, they shall return back again.  
Item These Covenants being signed, Hostages on both sides shall be given of equal number and quality; and ours shall return home again upon the delivering of the Town.  
Item It shall be lawful for the Hostages of the Garrison of Breda, to return as soon as the said Garrison hath quit the Town, that they may depart away with the Garrison.  
Item The Governor and Garrison of Breda, promise to march away upon Thursday next ensuing, early in the morning, being the fifth day of June.  
Under the place of the Seal the Governor wrote as followeth;  
We, Justin of Nassaw, do promise to see the contents of the former Articles fulfilled as much as lieth in us: In Witness of which, with the consent of the Colonels, and Council of War here, We have signed these this second day of june, 1625.  
In the next place you shall see what Articles the Magistrates and Burghers of Breda, did demand of Spinola, as followeth.  
Imprimis, Pardon is granted to all Burghers, and Town dwellers of Breda, of what quality or condition soever, for any offence committed before or since the surprising of the Town, which was in the year— no inquiry or information shall be taken against any man, not so much as under the pretext of Treason, or of other offence whatsoever.  
Item All the said Burghers or Town dwellers either absent or present, of what condition soever, whether they be actually in service of the States, or the Prince of Orange, or the Town, or whether they be not in service, may safely remain in Breda the two first years, no inquiry being made after them for matters of Religion; nor having no obligation to change their Religion (provided they carry themselves modestly, and without scandal) that in the space of these two years, they may resolve either to continue their residence here, or to go to any other place, and whensoever they shall desire to depart, they shall be permitted to go freely; and in like manner they shall be permitted to enjoy their goods, carrying them with them, Selling, Mortgaging, or Alienating them at their own liberty, or at the liberty of such as shall have the administration of them: The goods of such as dye within or without the Town; shall accrue to them to whom they shall leave them by their last Wiils, or if they die Intestate, to the next Heirs.  
Item It shall be lawfully for any of the said Burghers or Town dwellers, whether he be now in service or no; (if after these Covenants he have a desire to depart out of the Town, either to change his habitation, or for any other respect) to depart at any time either by Water or by Land; with his Wife, Children, Family, Householdstuff, Merchandise, or any moveables whatsoever, without any impeachment for any respect whatsoever, only by virtue of this Covenant, without any other Passport: And such as desire to make choice of their residence in the Kingdoms, Estates, or Provinces, either neuterall, or such as pay contribution; may at any time pass, or repass into the Towns and Countries subject to the King of Spain, and traffic or dispose of their goods, moveables, or others whensoever they think good: And the Catholics shall not stand in need of any other deed more than these Covenants, by virtue of which, to return and make their residence here, and possess such Houses as they have in Breda.  
Item It shall be lawful for all such as desire to go about their occasions into any of the united Provinces, to take their journey thither four times in the year; giving first the Governor notice of it, of whom they must of necessity demand licence, who shall not refuse them without just cause; and they shall return within the two years agreed upon in these Covenants, to continue their residence in the Town, or make choice of any other place under contribution, in all which places, they shall enjoy the aforesaid liberty of passing freely to any place about their businesses, and make use of any other benefit of these Covenants.  
Item, All Ministers may depart freely with their Wives, Children, Families, goods and moveables, without any wrong or offence offered them; for which purpose they shall have Boats or Wagons allowed them, and the aforesaid term to dispose of all their goods.  
Item, All such, as since the taking of the Town have executed the Office of Elders, Deacons, or any other Ecclesiastical charge, shall be comprehended in these Covenants.  
Item, All Officers, Commissaries, Receivers, and other Burghers or Town dwellers, who have had any Office about the Money, Rents, or Pays of the Soldiers; or any Office whatsoever, shall enjoy the same conditions and privilege, to depart with their papers and other movables; and all other benefits (jointly with other Townsemen) of this agreement.  
Item, The same is vuderstood of all Mariners, and others who have Boats here; with which in like manner they may lawfully depart.  
Item, If it chance that in the Town there be no Wagons, or Boats sufficient to accommodate the Burghers, or Town dwellers who shall desire to depart with their Movables and other goods; it shall be lawful for them, within the aforesaid term of two years, to cause Wagons or Boats to come out of Holland or any other place for this purpose, which may return freely by virtue of these Covenants, without any other Passport.  
Item, No other impost or taxes shall be imposed upon the Burghers or Town dwellers of this Town, than such as generally all other Towns of Brabant great and small, Pay.  
Item, The Garrison of the Town both Horse and Foot, shall be orderly lodged, with the least hurt or damage that may be of the Townsemen.  
Item, All such as are now absent about the Town business, or their own; shall participate of these Covenants, and may freely return to the Town: And the Peasants who had retired themselves to Breda, may as freely return again to their own Villages.  
Item, All such of other Religion as shall chance to die in Breda, within the aforesaid term of two years, may be honourably buried in any Garden, or their bodies if it please their friends carried out of Town.  
Item, All sentences pronounced by the Magistrates or other criminal judges called etc. shall hold and be in force; if no appeal have been made from them in time.  
Item, It shall be lawful for all such as have lent any Money to the Town, to demand their Principal, and their Interest; and all Rights and Rents which fall; shall in like manner be yearly paid.  
All these Covenants, Points, and Articles have been concluded, agreed on, and granted, by the marquis Spinola, and the Commissioners of the Town; who have signed them severally: The marquis undertaking to procure to have them rattified and approved by the Infanta within 15 days, with her Letters Patents and broad Seal; Dated the 2. of june 1625.  
Thus much concerning the siege of Breda I thought good to insert; and I rather made choice of this, then of the taking of it again by the Hollander, because they trod the same steps to regain it again, that Spinol a had before made use of: Neither had Grolle, Mastrike, or Skinkin Sconce in their Besiegements such choice circumstances belonging unto them, as this famous siege ●ad▪ Neither had any Town in Germany beleaguered by the Swedes, the like passages that were made use of at this Town. And this Compendious discourse, may serve to give a better light into our former discourse of Fortification; whereby the Ingenious Soldier that hath not seen the manner of a Siege, may hereby inform his judgement, and better his understanding.  
Let me request you to take a view of the precedent Figures, which will represent to you all manner of Redouts, Horneworkes, Forts, and Batteries that are to be raised against a besieged Town; and the foregoing discourse will direct you in the circumstances belonging to the framing and ordering of them.   

CHAP. XLIII.  
How to frame a Flankered Redout.  
THis kind of Redout is the strongest, and can best defend itself, in regard every side hath an Angle to Flank it, this is to be placed for the safeguard of some Siege, or to prevent the Enemy from making there excursions over Rivers; this may be built of Brick, and Roofed over with a Soller and a falling door for the Soldier's safety if the Enemy should break in: Likewise on every Flank, loopholes to shoot out at; from the top of the Roof is a kind of Pully set out which draws up a Pitch-pan, which they must fire in manner of a Beacon to warn the Country, and the next adjoining Redout, of the Enemies being there. The Hollanders made diverse of these alongst the River Isell in Gelderland to prevent the Enemies getting over into the Vello.  
If it be pallizadoed it is the stronger, the principal defence is the Flanks and the third part of the Brest-worke, as by the two Lines, one drawn from A to A. the other from B to B. View the Figure.  
The next discourse is the use of Artillery, and then after that the duties of Soldiers in Garrisons, shall be plainly showed.    

THE USE OF ARTILLERY IN FORTS. SECT. IV.  

CHAP. XLIV.  
The Office of the Master of the Ordnance, and other inferior Officers; and Munition, with diverse other Circumstances thereto belonging.  
HAving finished the former discourse of Fortification; we are now to proceed, and take a Survey, how both in Ancient and Modern times, Artillery hath been used; and so collect from the best Writers, such observations as shall be most pertinent for our discourse; and add such things to this Work, which others have been defective in, and so we will endeavour to make it perfect. And as there is great variation in Authors opinions, so the Reader may make as various constructions in his contemplating on them. Therefore, I shall endeavour to reconcile their opinions, and reduce all things material to a perfect method.  
Wherefore, first we must begin with such instructions, as aught to be inherent to the Master of the Ordnance; and in this discourse, for brevity sake, we shall give a touch of all other inferior Officers duties, and of what things particularly are to be committed to their charges: And in regard it is an Office of great importance, and diversity of things run through his hands, and are by his wisdom, to be rightly ordered: Therefore it behoves him to be a man of excellent performance, both in Valour and Learning, and not daring to thrust himself into this great Office, not being well qualified and fitted for it. 
The parts a Master of the Ordnance is to be endued with.  He must be a geod Arethmetician, Mathematician, Geometrician, and besides an expert old Soldier: for in this, if the Practice be not joined with the Theoric, and so both inseparable in this Officer, there will be a deficiency in the execution of this Office. The care and charge of this place being so weighty, and impossible to be performed by one man, therefore diverse Substitutes and inferior Officers, are allowed for his assistance, and the chiefest under him, is his Lieutenant; who must be a man most able, in his judgement and carriage, to take a great part of this heavy weight off the Master's shoulders. Wherefore, in what place of consequence the Master of the Ordnance is absent, there the Lieutenant is to be present: if the Master be in the Camp, then must the Lieutenant be at the Battery, Breach, or Curtin; if the Master be present in the afore-named places, than ought the Lieutenant to be at the Storehouse, the Mines, or some other place of most necessary importance and employments.  
The residue of the Sub-Officers are these, Master Gunner, under Canonires, Wagon-Master, the Furrier, and diverse Clerks, besides Gunmakers, and Carriage-makers, and others of meaner dependency. Great care is to be taken, that the Gunners perform their duties, in managing their places, both in mounting, dismounting, charging, levelling: and where he sees a defect, these superior Officers being expert and skilful in this Art, may be able to instruct, correct, and control the ignorant, and see those escapes amended, in what sort soever committed; he is to make an Inventory of every small and particular parcel that accompanies the Pieces of Ordnance, and of them the service being performed, to give his account.  
Against the Army march, it is requisite he make provision, that every Piece hath his sufficient number of draught-Horses, and Oxen, apt to draw the same according to the nature of the ways, 
Those that wait upon the Ordnance, must lodge near his own Piece, day and night, to be in readiness to execute such commands as shall be delivered to them.  with sufficient Attendants to assist upon all occasions. Likewise every Piece hath his Gunner, with his Co-adjutor or Mate, and a man to serve them both, and help them charge, discharge, mount, wadde, cleanse, scour, and cool the Pieces being overheated. Further, there must be a Master of the Timber or Wood, and a Smith; their duties must be to see the Garriages fit, or to amend them.  
Over the aforesaid Gunners, there is a Corporal or Constable chosen, to view or take charge of all the inferior Gunners, 
The Gunner must be careful in giving directions for the safe placing and keeping the Munition and Powder.  and of their actions. The Master of the Ordnance must be very careful, to see his Storehouse be continually furnished with all manner of Provision; both for Artillery, Munition, and manner of Arms, and Engines; both offensive and defensive; all kind of Ordnance ready mounted upon the Carriages; Quintals of Canon-powder, and other powder, Oxe-hides to cover and defend the same, shot of Iron, Lead, and Stone, in great quantity, fitted for all manner of Pieces; 
These Tools ought to be marked with the Gallows, he that steals them dies without mercy.  Match, Iron-shovels, Mattocks, Pickaxes, Axes, Hatchets, Hooks, Plants, Boards, H●rdles, Mandes, Baskets, Wheele-barrows, small Tumbrels for one Horse's draught, Nails for the Tires, and all other purposes; Saws, Sledges, Iron Bars, Crows, A●gers, Skrewes, Chargers, Ladles, Rammers, Sponges, Chains, Cart-clouts, Weights, all sorts of Smiths-tooles, Horse-shoes, and Nails, Cordage, Coffers, Candles, Lanterns, Scarclothes, Soap, Grease, Tar, Scaling-ladders; all sorts of Smallshot, Weapons and Arms belonging both to Foot and Horse; he is likewise to have those that are skilful in making Trunks, Balls, Arrows, and all other sorts of Wildfire, and Fireworks; and for the continual supply of them, there ought to be had in a readiness; great store of Sulphur, Salt-peter, Rosin, Caly-vine, Quick-peall, Lint-Seed oil, common Lamp oil; Pitch, Tar, Camphor, Wax, Tutia, Arsenic, Quicksilver, and Aquavitee; hereof are to be framed Balls of fire; Cressets, and Torches; that storms of Rain and wind, cannot extinguish, Murdering Bullets; to be shot out of pieces and the like; as shall particularly be shown hereafter in this discourse: Further the Master of the Ordnance upon the receipt of a Ticket from any of the Captains of the Army, is to give speedy order to his Clerk to deliver both Powder, Match, and Bullets; He must have under his Command a Band of pioneers, the Captain over them aught to be very discreet and careful; he must likewise see these pioneers be sufficiently guarded, whilst they are at work, lest the Enemy surprise them, he is to see every man carefully paid his means, he is to be a very expert Engineer, with a most approved judgement in all kind of Fortifications, and able to direct all kind of Officers under him, as the Lieutenant of the Ordnance, Engine-Master, Captain of the pioneers, and the Trenchmaster; he is to have all kind of Boats and Bridges, he is also to appoint under his hand-writing, the number and proportion of all manner Provision of Munition, which shall attend the Army: and the Lieutenant must see it performed and distributed, to the inferior Officers. Lastly, he is wisely and discreetly to order all his affairs, and whatsoever he is put in trust with, for his own honour, and the welfare of the Army. In the next Page, follows a Table of all kind of Ordnance, with their names, and proportions of Weight, Length, and Bigness, etc.   

CHAP. XLV.  
The Names of all kind of Ordnances whatsoever, both for Field and Garrison, now in use for offensive or defensive Service, with the height of their Diameters, their weight, and length; The thickness of the Mettle at the Breech, Trunnions, or Neck; The number of Men, Horses, or Oxen, requisite for the draught of each Piece; the height, weight, and compass of the Bullet, belonging to each Piece; how much Corn or Serpentine Powder, is requisite to charge every several Piece; and also the length and breadth of the Ladles fit for every Piece; the distance every Piece shoots at Pointblank and utmost Random, etc. First invented by Mr. Smith, but in some kind rectified, with Additions thereunto, Fit for all kind of Officers to understand and observe; ut sequitur.  
The Names of the Pieces of great Ordnance now in most use. The height of the Diameter of each Piece. The height of the Bullet. The weight of the shot in pounds. Compass of the shot in Inches and parts. Weight of Serpentine Powder. Weight of Corn Powder. Weight of the Piece in Pounds. Length of the Piece in Feet. Thickness of Mettle at the Touchhole, inches. Thickness of the Mettle at the Trunnions. Thickness of the Mettle at the Neck. Ladles length. Ladles breadth. Length of the Planzes of the Carriage of the Piece. Depth of each Plank in Inches at 〈◊〉. Depth of the Plank at the lower end in feet. Thickness of the Plank in inches and parts. The number of men to draw each Piece in service. The number of Horse to draw each Piece. The number of yoke Oxen. Distance of pace the Piece carries at pointblank. Distance of paces each Piece carries at utmost random. Length of the Coyler Repes. Canon of 8 7 ⅙ 64 25 1/7 40 32 8000 12 8 6 1/4 4 23 1/2 15 16 ●/4 32 20 8 90 16 9 300 1500 70 Canon Serpentine. 7 1/2 6 3/4 52 23 4/7 25 1/4 26 7000 11 1/2 7 1/2 5 1/3 3 3/4 22 14 1/2 16 1/4 20 18 1/4 7 1/2 80 14 8 340 1600 66 French Canon. 7 1/4 7 46 1/4 22 11/14 25 23 1/4 6500 12 7 1/4 5 2/● 3 5/● 21 13 3/5 16 1/4 29 18 7 1/4 70 12 7 360 1740 64 Demi-Canon eldest. 6 3/4 6 1/2 36 5/8 21 3/14 20 1/4 20 6000 11 1/4 6 3/4 5 1/● 3 ●/● 22 12 15 1/2 27 16 ●/4 6 3/4 65 11 6 370 1800 60 Demi-Canon Ord. 6 1/2 6 1/4 32 20 3/7 20 18 5600 10 1/2 6 1/2 5 3 ●/8 20 11 1/2 15 1/● 26 16 1/4 6 1/2 60 10 5 350 1700 54 Demi-Canon. 6 5 3/4 24 1/2 18 6/7 18 16 5000 11 6 4 3/● 3 ●/● 21 11 16 24 15 6 56 9 5 340 1600 46 Culverin. 5 1/2 5 1/4 19 17 ●/7 16 15 4500 13 1/4 ● 1/2 4 1/● 3 22 9 ● 18 1/4 22 13 1/8 5 1/2 50 8 4 420 2100 40 Ordinary Culverin. 5 1/4 5 16 1/4 16 1/2 15 12 1/2 4300 12 5 1/4 4 1/● 2 3/4 21 9 17 ● 21 13 ●/4 5 1/4 46 8 4 400 2000 36 Semi-Culverin. 4 1/2 4 1/4 11 3/4 14 1/7 9 9 3000 11 4 1/2 4 2 1/● 20 8 ●/● 16 3/● 18 ●1 1/4 4 1/2 36 7 4 380 1800 34 Dem-Culverin less. 4 1/4 4 9 13 5/14 8 7 1/2 2300 10 4 1/● 3 ●/4 2 2/3 19 1/27 7 1/4 14 ●/● 17 10 ●/4 4 1/4 28 6 3 320 1600 30 ●●ker ordinary. 3 1/4 3 1/2 5 1/4 11 11/14 5 1/2 5 1900 9 1/2 3 3/4 3 1/4 2 1/2 16 6 3/4 14 15 9 ● 3 3/● 24 5 3 300 1500 28 sakeret or Minion. 3 1/4 3 3 1/4 10 3/14 5 3 1/2 1100 8 3 1/4 2 1/4 2 1/4 14 5 11 1/2 1● 8 1/● 3 1/● 20 4 2 280 1400 24 falcon. 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 1/3 8 9/14 2 1/2 2 1/4 750 7 2 3/4 2 1/3 2 12 4 1/2 10 1/4 11 7 2 ● 16 3 2 260 120 20 ●●●conet. 2 ●/4 2 1 1/7 7 1/14 1 1/2 1 1/2 400 6 2 ●/4 2 1 3/4 10 3 3/4 8 2/3 9 6 ● 2 1/4 10 2 2 220 100 20 ●abinet. 1 ●/2 1 1/4 3/4 3 2/4 3/4 2/4 300 5 2/● 1 1/2 1 1/2 9 1/2 2 1/2 7 1/2 8 5 1/2 2 8 2 2 150 700 18 ●●se. 1 1/4 1 ●/● 3 2/3 1/4 200 4 ●/4 1 1/2 1/4 8 2 6 1/4 7 5 2 6 2 2 100 560 18  
In the precedent Table of Mr. Smith, he hath only named such Ordnance as are most usual in England. Wherefore, before we proceed to our intended discourse, we will observe the conditions of diverse Canons of a larger extent, 
Note, there is but 14 ounces haberde poise, to each of these Venetian pounds.  as the Canon of 9 inches Diameter, the shot weighs 110. pound, and hath in Corn-powder 76. pound for her Charge.  
The Canon of 10. inches, the weight of the Bullet is 174. pound, and requires for her charge in C. powder, 136. pound.  
The Canon of 11. inches, the weight of the Bullet is 205. pound, and requires 146. pounds of C. powder for its charge.  
The Canon of 12. inches, hath for its Bullet in weight 245. pound, and requires 162. pounds of C. powder for her charge.  
The Canon of 13. inches, the weight of the Bullet is 285. pound, and requires 190. pounds of C. powder for its due charge.  
Canon of 14. inches. hath for the weight of its Bullet 348. pound, and requires 232. pounds of C. powder for its charge.  
There are likewise diverse of those Ordnance specified in the precedent Table, that are reinforced, 
The description of Ordnance reinforced  as the  
Dragon, or double Culverin, whose mettle weighs 14000. pounds, and shoots 357. paces Level, and 4252. paces at its best random.  
The whole Culverin weighs 8500. pounds, 
Master Norton says these kind of pieces requires the just weight of powder, with the iron cast shot for their due charge.  carries Level 315. paces, and at its best random 3703. paces.  
The Demi-Culvering weighs 4600. pounds, shoots level 235. paces, and at its best random 2796. paces.  
The Saker or halfe-Culverin weighs, 2650. pounds, and shoots level 183. paces, and at its best random 2181. paces.  
The Falcon weighs 1500. pounds, shoots level 889. paces, and conveys his shot at its best random 1659. paces.  
The Fawlconet weighs 850. pounds, shoots pointblank 107. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 1280. paces.  
The Rabinet weighs 425. pounds, shoots pointblank 82. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 669. paces.  
The Base weighs 300. pounds, 
A difference in legitimate Ordnance, in regard of their debility in mettle.  shoots pointblank 63. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 725. paces.  
We are further to observe, that there are of these kind of Ordnance, of a less weight and force in mettle, and yet of the same Diameter or Boar; as first,  
The Dragon or double Culverin weighs but 11000. pounds, shoots level but 325. paces, and at the best random 3164. paces.  
The whole Culverin weighs 6300. pounds, shoots level 285. paces, and conveys its shot at its best random 3391.  
The demi-Culverin 3150. pounds, shoots pointblank 217. paces, and conveys its shot at the best random 2588. paces.  
The Saker weighs 2000 pounds, and shoots pointblank 167. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 1838. paces.  
The Falcon weighs 1100. pounds, shoots pointblank 127. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 1514. paces.  
The Fawlconet weighs 600. pounds, shoots pointblank 98. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 1163. paces.  
The Rabinet weighs 350. pounds, shoots pointblank 75. paces, and conveys its shot at best random 482. paces.  
We are further to observe, 
The nature of bastard pieces reinforced & lessened.  that there are diverse Ordnance that bears the same denominations, the former legitimate Ordnance did, which the Gunners term bastard Pieces, in regard the length of their Chase, and height of their Boar differs: and of these, there are some reinforced by Mettle, and others of the same Nature are lessened; those that are reinforced, I will first describe; as the Ordinary Basilisk, or Bastard double-Culverin, 
Ordinary Basilisk or Bastard Double-Culverin.  is about 26. Diameters in length, shooteth an Iron castshot of 48. pounds, and requires in powder for her charge 30. pounds of fine powder, or 39 pounds of common; the weight of her Mettle is 14660. pounds, shoots by Mettle 659. paces, by level 329. paces, and at best random 3511. paces.  
The Serpentine or Bastard-Culverin, 
Serpentine or Bastard Culverin.  is in length 27. Diameters of her Boar, and shoots 24. pounds shot, with as much Common powder, or 19 l. 1/●. of 〈◊〉 powder for her charge; her weight in mettle is 8100. l. shoots by mettle 590. paces, by level 295. paces, at best random 3511. paces.  
The Aspic or Bastard-demi-Culverin shooteth 12. l. shot, 
Aspic or Bastard demi-Culverin.  with 12. pound of fine powder, and is 28, Diameters long; weight is 7600. l. shoots by mettle 440. paces, by level 220. paces, and by its best random 2618. paces.  
The Pelican or Bastard quarter-Culverin is 29. Diameters of her Boar in length, 
Pelican or Bastard quarter-Culverin.  the weight of her shot is 6. l. with as much fine powder for her charge, the weight of the Piece is 2550. l. she conveys her shot by mettle 344. paces, by level 172. paces, by best random 244. paces.  
The Bastard Falcon shooteth 3. l. shot, 
Bastard Falcon.  with t●ree pounds fine powder, and is 30. Diameters long, and weigheth 1500. l. conveys her shot by mettle 261. paces▪ by level 131. paces, and by her best random 1553. paces.  
The Bastard Rabinet dischargeth an iron shot of one pound and a half, 
Bastard Rabinet.  with so much fine powder, and is 31. Diameters of ●er Bore in length, weighing 800. l. and shoots by mettle 200. paces, by level 101. paces, at her best random 1198.  
The Base weighs 450. l. and shoots by mettle 120. paces, 
Base.  by level 72. paces, and at her best random, 916. paces.  
As for the lessened Bastard Pieces, 
The description of the lessened Bastard pieces, their weights▪ and the distances of conveying their shot.  I shall now describe the weight of mettle and the distance in conveying their shot.  
The Basilisk weighs 10500. pound▪ shoots by mettle 595. paces, by level 298. paces, at best random 3540. paces.  
The Serpentine weighs 6300. l. shoots by mettle 530. paces, by level 275. paces, at best random 3153. paces.  
The Aspic weighs 3700. pound, shoots by mettle 400. paces, by level 200. paces, at best random 2028. paces.  
The Pelican weighs 2100. l. shoots by mettle 310. paces, by level 155. at best random 1844. paces.  
The Falcon weighs 1200. l. shoots by mettle 212. paces, by level 118. paces, at her best random 1407. paces.  
The Rabinet weighs 650. l. shoots by mettle 182. paces, by level 92. paces, at her best random 1086. paces.  
The Base weighs 155. l. shoots by mettle 136. paces, by level 70. paces, at her best random 825. paces.  
Thus much shall suffice in describing the Names and natures of these kind of Ordnance; We shall afterwards take occasion to speak of all kind of Mortar-pieces, and the like; and draw out some particular discourses of the conditions and qualities of all sorts of Ordnance whatsoever, and the right uses of them. Thus taking it for granted, you are perfect in the Names and conditions of these Ordnance, I will proceed in the next Chapter to speak more fully of the Canon; how they are divided according to their conditions, for several services either offensive or defensive.   

CHAP. XLVI.  
How the Gunners of our Times do divide these Ordnance, according to their qualities for several services.  
IN this Chapter we are to take notice how our modern Gunners divide these Ordnance, 
To what use the Canon is employed in service, and of their several kinds.  according to the condition of the Piece for each proper service; and we are to take them in Four kinds; as namely, First of the Canons, which are divided likewise into 3. sorts: 
The particular use of the Culverin in service, and of their several kinds.  The Canon Royal or double Canon; Secondly, the whole Canon, or as it is called the Canon of 7. Thirdly, the Demy-Canon, whose diameter of the Boar is 6 Inches 1/2 parts; these three kinds are only used in Batteries against strong Walls and defences of the Enemy, 
Note, these kind of Ordnance shoot iron bullets; but if the marks be soft substance, than stone bullets will do as well, and save great charge.  because their shot being so weighty, doth shake and ruin more than the inferior Ordnance: Note by the way, that all Foreign Ordnance are called or named according to the weight of the Shott: and for the most part 18 times the diameter of their Boar is the true length of their Chases, yet many times they are more and sometimes less. The second kind of Ordnance used in service are the Culverins▪ which we will reduce to five sorts, 
The use of the Canon Periors, and of their several kinds.  (although the table mentions more) Culverins and demy-Culverins serve to pierce and Slice out in Batteries, what the Canons have loosened and shaken; 
The fashion and bo●e of outlandish Periors  The Saker and Falcon serves to Flanker any bulwark or half Moon; the other smaller sort of this kind serves for Field-pieces, for assaults, or to shoot at Troops of Men or Horse: 
Note, the difference between the lower end of the Chase, and the upper end of the Chamber is this; the upper end of the Chamber is called the Orloe, or Relish.  The third kind of great Ordnance are Canon-Periors, and Perieraes; and of these there are four kinds which are used for several purposes; these kind of Pieces never shoot any Iron or Leaden Bullets, but Stones, Grandees, and other murdering Shot and Fire-balls: The Canon-Perior is most serviceable to defend a Breach, keep a Passage, and to murder and spoil the Enemy being within its reach; All Foreign Pieces of this kind are either Taper, or Belbored in their Chambers; the mouth of the Chamber is either 2/● or 1/2 in Calibre of the height or Calibre of the mouth of the chase of the Piece; 
The Canon Priors before mentioned shoot ●/3. parts of the weight of the Stoneshot in corn powder, only abating proportionably 5 pound of powder for every 100 weight of shot:  their Chambers are to be in length 4 Diameters of the mouth of the said Chamber: Our English Pieces are equally bored the length of their whole Chases, but the other Taper-bored, are better and stronger, so that the mouth of the Chamber be equally in height with the rest of the Boar forwards towards the mouth.  
The next sort of these kinds are termed Perieraes, and they are far inferior Fortified with mettle to the former: For the Canon-Perior is usually allowed 80. Pound of mettle, 
The length of the Canon Perior are about 8. Calibres of their Boars at the mouth of the Chase; the thickness of the Chambers are 2/●. parts in metal at the touch hole.  for every Pound weight of their Stoneshot; and these Perieraes are allowed but 60 pound, the Chamber thereof is 1/2 parts in boar of Calibre at the mouth; her charge is 1/4 parts of the weight of her Stoneshot in cornepowder.  
The third kind of these sort of Ordnance are the Port Pieces, and Stock-Fowlers, these are likewise cast in Brass, but are open at both ends, and are to be loaded with Chambers at the breech fitted close thereinto, with Shoulders as your wooden Pipes which conveys water, are tapewise fitted in.  
The fourth sort of this third kind of Ordnance, are Sling-Peeces, and Portugal Bases, 
The length of the Portugal base is about 〈◊〉 times ●her Calibre, the sling-pace 12.  which have Chambers fitted likewise into their breeches as the former had: both in these kind of Pieces and the former, the Shot and wad is first put into the Chase, and then is the Chamber to be firmly wedged into the tail of the Chase and Carriage: These last mentioned Pieces have no Carriages, but stand upon a strong forked Prop, 
The murderers port-peeces, and Fowlers, 8 at the most, besides their Chambers, and their Chambers about 3 times the Diameter of the Boar in length, and weighs the 6 or 8 part of the whole Chase.  upon the ends of which the Trunnions rest, and unto the end of the Chase is a long steal of Iron with a Cord tied unto it, which raiseth it higher or lower, according to the assigned mark these Shoot: Base, Burr, Musket, or any kind of murdering Shot, being put up in Bags or Lanterns fitted to the Boar; these are usually loaded with 1/4 or 1/● of the weight of their Shot in cornepowder, and most usually made of wrought Iron.  
The fourth and last kind of Ordnance, are likewise subdivided into four several kinds, and not only differ from the former Pieces of Ordnance, but diverse in themselves, and are various in their uses one from the other: The names are these, the Morterpeece, Square-Murtherers, Toctles and Petards; the Mortar-pieces are very necessary and useful, as well for the Assailants, as Defendants; for being duly used, they annoy the Enemy much in his Forts or Trenches: First, by s●ooting Granades either single or double, Iron Bullets, Stone or Leaden Shot.  
The nature of other Ordnance is, to convey the shot in a right line, to perform such service as they are assigned to, and there must be no hindrance neither of Hills, Houses, 
These pieces are likewise used in besieged Towns to shoot blazing Fire balls in a dark night into the Enemies▪ Works to discover what they are a doing ●or it the Enemy be approached to the foot of the wall to undermine it, or to enter a breach when no other ●●ot can hinder them, than these will work good effect.  or Walls betwixt the Pieces leveled, and the mark intended to be hit: but these kind of Pieces are ordained and fitted to shoot in an oblique or crooked line, to convey their Fire-balls or other Shot, over Walls, Hills, or any obstacle that may hinder other Pieces at 90 degrees of the quadrant they shoot right upwards; but most commonly they are mounted from 80 degrees, to 70. 60. 50. or 45 according as the distance is in farnesse from the Piece, or the height of the Hills, Walls, or Houses shall hinder: Some of these Pieces have their Trunnions in the midst, some a little lower, and many even with their Breeches; they are Fortified with mettle 1/2 of the height of the mouth of the Chamber at the touchhole, and ● of the Calibre or Boar of the mouth of the Piece; the length of their Chases are diverse, some are two, others 3 Diameters of their mouths Boars, in length; the Charge in cornepowder is 1/1● part of the weight of the Shot; if it Shoots at Mounture above 40. Degrees, but if it Shoots Level or downwards ● parts of Powder of the weight of the Shot; not forgetting to put a good Wad always between the Powder and the Shot, unless it be charged with Fire-balls; then nothing is to be put to hinder the Powder from firing the Balls.  
Moreover, great care is to be had least cracks or holes be in the Granades, lest they Fire in the Piece; and endanger the breaking of it, wherefore it is safest to coat it over: If these kind of Pieces be loaded with Granades of Potters-earth, or Glass; then 1/2 parts of their weight in Powder will be sufficient, otherwise they will break; But if Stone, or Iron Bullets 1/● or 1/4 of Powder; for the less you mount your Piece, the more Powder is required to charge her.  
For the charging of these latter sorts of Mortar-pieces, 
You may charge these pieces with cartouches.  is sufficiently discoursed of; only much care is to be taken in spunging and cleansing the Piece before the Powder be put in, the mouth of it ever standing upright: The due charge of Powder being put in the Chamber, there must be a Wadde rammed down either of Hay, or Ockham, 
Note the Wadde between the Tamkin and the Shott, is to save the Shott from being broken by the Tamkin.  and after it a Tamkin of some soft Wood, of such breadth and thickness as will fill up the Chamber, that no vacuity may be between the Powder and Wed, or Wadde and Shot; after the which the Shot being put in, with another wad after it, to keep the Shot from too speedy flying out: Note that in mentioning the Mortar-pieces, I intent the other two, namely the Square-Morters, and Tortles.  
The fourth and last which remains to be discoursed of is the Petard, which are only used to blow open Ports, and Portcullis; they are diverse in their magnitudes; according to the strength of the opposition they are to Ruin: Their proportions are some to hold one pound of Powder and less; others to hold 50 or 60 pounds or more: They are fashioned like to a Mortar or Saints-Bell▪ somewhat tapered, they are 1/4 parts Diameter of their mouths Calibre at the bottom of their Chase; and in thickness of mettle 1/8 parts Diameter at their Breech, and up towards their mouth, lessening in thickness; there is usually allowed five pounds of Mettle, be it Brass or Iron to every pound of Powder, according to the proportion of the greatness of it; so that for 50 pound of Powder, your Petard must weigh 250. pound, or 300 pound weight of mettle: a strong hook is to be screwed into the substance you intent to ruin; and upon this hook hangs the wringle of the Petard, and likewise to be shored up with a strong forked Rest to stay the Reverse of it; the chargeing them is after this manner.  
First, the true quantity of Cornepowder being rammed down hard to the bottom of the Chase, little by little, until it be fil●ed within a finger's breadth of the mouth, than bore a hole down to the bottom of the Powder, through the midst of it with some square piece of Iron, into which concavity, diverse quills of quickesilver are to be put; then a plank made fit of 3 or 4 Inches thickness to lay on the mouth of it, which is to be strongly plated with Iron; between the plank and the top of the Powder, you are to place a waxed cloth just the wideness of the mouth of the Petard, then fill up the residue of the Chase between the cloth and the top of the mouth with molten Wax, mingled with Flax, Hurds, or Tow, there is a Pipe to come from the touchhole, 
The Petardire must be careful to avoid the danger of her reverse, by retyting in a side line from it.  which is to be filled with slow and sure receipt of Fireworks, which by a priming of quick-powder fire may be given safely.  
For to prove the strength and sufficiency of these short Ordnance whether they will hold and endure; you must charge them with once and ⅓ parts of powder of the weight of the Shot: 
They are to be cooled with vinegar and water, or wine lees, or urine and water.  Note that when any Piece of Ordnance of what kind soever grows hot, there is a discretion to be used in lessening the Charge of Powder, otherwise the Piece will break; the Figure of this Petard shall afterwards in this discourse be described.   

CHAP. XLVII.  
How a Gunner is to Tertiate and measure a Piece of Ordnance that he be not deceived in Charging it; And also how to despart any kind of Ordnance.  
ALthough we have formerly spoken in a particular way of all kind of Ordnance which our modern Gunners make use of; yet we must be farther instructed before we can attain the perfection of this Art, how each sort of Ordnance differs in their Fortifications, be they of the kinds either of Canons, or Culverins; for there is a great difference in these, as formerly we have discoursed of, in regard they are either more Fortified in mettle, or lessened and abated: So that those ordinary Pieces expressed in the precedent Table, are as it were a mean betwixt these extraordinary Pieces discoursed of in the foregoing Chapter.  
Wherefore if a Gunner do not rightly conceive of the constitution of each Piece, he will fail either in overcharging the less fortified or weaker, or under-charge the more fortified or stronger Pieces: 
Three differences in Fortification of each sort of Ordnance.  For prevention whereof, Gunners have distinguished them into three sorts; As namely, first either ordinarily fortified, or lessened, or double fortified; that is to say, common or Legitimate Pieces, Bastard-peeces, or extraordinary Pieces: Common or Legitimate Pieces, are those that have a due length of their Chases proportioned according to the height of their proper Boars, 
The difference of Pieces described.  as the Table aforegoing hath demonstrated: Bastard-peeces have shorter Chases than the proportion of their Boars do require; and extraordinary Pieces are such Ordnance as have longer Chases than the proportion of the Boar allows: Therefore to be certain of what constitution the Piece is of, the readiest way is (if your Calibre compasses be wanting to measure or tertiate her with) to take a cord or packthread, and girding the Piece at the Touchhole, at the Trunnions, and at the Neck, taking ⅓. parts thereof, for the Diameter of the body of her mettle, in each place after this manner following.  
The Canon or ordinary Culverins have about 11. Diameters of their Boar at the touchhole, at the Trunnions 8. and at the neck 6. Diameters in their circumferences; 
How to tertiate piece of Ordnance.  But the Canon commonly employed in Batteries, have but 9 Diameters at their touchhole, at their Trunnions 7 ½. parts, and at their necks 5 2/●. in the circumference of their metals there: Lastly, the Demy-Canons are but 1/8 of their Boars, in thickness of mettle at the touchhole; If any Piece be more or less, than they are either reinforced, 
How to konow when a Piece is reinforced.  or lessened, and according to the force or feebleness of the Piece, to allow her a convenient charge of Powder: The double Fortified or reinforced Canons of Battery, have one whole Diameter of their Boar, in thickness of mettle at the touchhole, and 11/16. at her trunnions, and 7/16. at her neck, and can endure to burn 34. pounds 1/2. parts of fine powder, or 43. 1/2. 2. parts of common powder: Contrarily, the lessened Canons of Battery is ●/4. at the Chamber, at the trunnions, 9/16. and at the neck ●/16. of the Diameter, of their Boars in thickness of mettle, 
Note, every Piece 〈◊〉 Ordnance that is truly Fortified with mettle, aught to contain as much mettle in thickness round about, so far as the Chamber where the powder lieth as the Bullet is in height.  the poorness and debility of her constitution in mettle will not endure 25 ½. of fine powder; or 31 pound of common powder notwithstanding her Iron Bullet weighs 60. pound.  
Moreover, if a Piece of Ordnance be not truly cast, so that one side is thicker in mettle then the other; She ought to have but such a proportion of powder, as the thinnest part will bear, otherwise it is in danger of breaking, beside it will never shoot right: Therefore to examine the Piece, you must mount the mouth of it upon a Skidde or piece of Timber; than you must divide the circumference of the Basering at the Breech into four equal parts; and in the same manner likewise divide the circumference of the Mossell-ring at the mouth into four parts, 
How to know when one side o● the Piece is thicker than the other.  every particular point of the Basering answering unto each point of the Mossell-ring, in a right superficial Line; then stretching a chalk Line from the uppermost mark of the Mossell-ring alongst the Cillender of the Piece, unto the uppermost mark of the Basering; then striking the Line that it leaves a perfect mark behind it, then in the same manner strike the rest of the points; so that there will be four equal Lines dividing the body of the Piece into four equal divisions: then take a strait rod, and put it into the mouth of the Piece holding it close to the side of the concave, directly in it as the Lines directeth; one Line whereof lying directly upwards, the opposite will lie directly to it underneath, and the other two Lines will be on both the sides of the Piece: Then take the quadrant, and place one side thereof even with the Rod; and look what degree the Perpendicular plumblyne entteth thereon, 
How to know when a Piece of Ordnance is truly bored.  and so turning the Piece that one of the Side-lines may lie upwards as the former Line did; and if the plumblyne falls not upon the same degree at each of the 4. Lines, the quadrant being applied in manner aforesaid, than the Piece is truly Bored: Likewise if the Boar of the Piece lie awry in the mettle, either to the right or left hand under or over; it must be truly disparted before a true shot can be made: 
How to despart a Piece of Ordnance Arithmetically, he● bore not lying right.  To perform the which, take with a pair of Callibres the greatest height of the mettle at the mouth of the Piece, and likewise at the Breech, abating the less out of the greater ½. parts, the remainder is the just disparture of the Piece, as for example, A Culverin that is 19 Inches high at the Basering, will be 13. Inches high at the Mossell-ring; which 13. Inches abated from 19 rests 6. which being divided into two equal parts, the quotient being three Inches, shows the true disparture of the Piece: It may also be done by taking a Line and measuring the greatest circumference of mettle in the Basering; multiplying that measure by 7. dividing the product by 22. the quotient is the Diameter or height of the circumference; likewise measure the circumference of the Mossel-ring; and multiply that measure by 7. divide by 22. as before, the quotient will show the Diameter of the mettle at the mouth; then subtract the diameter last found, from the diameter of the breech ½. that remains is the true disparture: Or for want of Callibres, take a cord and measure the greatest circumference of mettle at the Breech, then multiply that measure by 7. dividing the product by 22. the quotient is the Diameter or height of the circumference: Likewise measure the greatest circumference of mettle at the mouth, multiply that measure by 7. divide by 22. as before, the quotient will show the Diameter at the mouth of the mettle; subtract the Diameter last found, from the Diameter at the Breech ●. the remainder is the true disparture, Exempli gratia. Suppose a Piece of Ordnance 132. Inches circumference of mettle at the Basering or Breech, and at the Mossel-Ring or mouth, 88 Inches: To know the Diameter of mettle at Breech and mouth, and the true disparture; you must multiply 132. by 7. the product is 924. this being divided by 22. the quotient is 42, the height of the mettle at the Breech; likewise multiply 88 by 7 you have 616, divide this by 22, the quotient is 28, the height of the mettle at the mouth; which 28. abated from 42. rests 14. the which 14. being divided into two equal parts, 
Note, which side of the Piece is thickest of mettle, towards that side the Bullet will fail, because the thinner side is more smart, and the thicker side more dull in heating.  yields 7. Inches for a part, the true disparture of the Piece.  
Moreover, if you find your Piece thicker of mettle in one part then another, she will convey her Bullet towards the thickest side; wherefore after with your instruments, and such Rules as before is described for the finding it out, you understand where the fault lies, and which side is the thickest; you must to remedy it, divide the overplus of mettle in two parts, setting the disparture of your Piece, one of those parts towards the thickest side of the Pieces mouth, and bring the middle part of mettle at the Breech of your Piece, that disparture, and the midst of the mark, taking a direct level with your eye, and laying it in a strait Line, Fire being given the shot will hit right; but if the thickest part of the mettle be above, than you ought to make your disparture one Inch more, if under towards the Carriage, than one Inch less.  
Now to know how far such a Piece will shoot wide, 
A general rule to know how far a Piece that is thickest of mettle on one side will carry wide to any mark assigned.  there is a general rule set down by Gunners; that so oftentime the length of the Cillender or Concave of the Piece is to the mark, and then knowing how much the Piece is thicker on th' one side then the other; the one half of that overplus being multiplied by the quotient first found, the product will show how much the Piece shooteth wide of the mark; (as for example) If a Governor finds a Canon to be thicker of mettle by two Inches on the right side then on the left; she being 9 foot in length, and the mark assigned to be shot unto is supposed to be 500 paces from the Piece: To work this, you must bring the 500 paces into feet, which makes 2500, feet, the which being divided by 9 feet, being the length of the Concave: Cillinder of the Canon, yieldeth in the quotient 277. feet 7/9. the which multiplied by 1/2. the superfluity of the mettle being one Inch, makes 272. feet 7/9 still, and so much wide the mark should the said Piece have shot at such a distance, although she had been laid full against the midst of the mark.  
These observations I thought fit to gather and present to the view of the Studious Soldier, which I question not, but will be taken well by any Soldier that understands himself: As for Imbellicke fools, I leave them to Travel for more wit, Valour, and experience.  
So let this suffice for the Tertiating and measuring a Piece of Ordnance, which otherwise the Gunner may be deceived in Charging it; and also it shall be sufficient for the disparting any Piece of Ordnance, otherwise their will be great errors in making a true Shot: In the following Chapter we will discourse of diverse circumstances and causes, which a Gunner must take into his consideration otherwise great errors will ensue every shoot he makes.   

CHAP. XLVIII.  
Divers circumstances and causes to be considered and avoided, which causeth error in Shooting.  
THere are such diversity of Implements, Materials, and circumstances, belonging to great Artillery, which being not truly planted, form, and framed, causeth sundry accidents to proceed from them; so that if a wonderful care and vigilancy be not had to prevent and amend the same, it will be impossible to make a true shot in all kind of Pieces, and upon all kind of Platforms: Therefore it will be most convenient to discourse of every particular thing that may let and hinder the true performance of a Shot, and likewise show the best remedies to redress them: 
Rules to be observed in laying Ordnance upon their carriages, so that they may shoot truly.  And for the performance thereof, we will take the Rules and advises of the best and ablest Gunners that have wrote upon this discourse: Wherefore first observe if a Piece of Ordnance be not truly laid upon her Carriage, or her Carriage not truly framed, will produce an error; the remedy for this, is helped by this Rule: 
Lovis Collado, and Alexander Bianco differ about the dimensions of the carriages.  First measure the just length of the Cillender or Boar of your Piece, then note, the Planks of the Carriage ought to be once and a half that length; also measure the Diameter of that Piece, and the said planks at the fore-end shall be in depth 4 times that Diameter, and in the midst three times ½. the Diameter, and at the end next the ground, two times and a half the Diameter, and in thickness once the Diameter.  
Next observe whether the wheels have their due proportion in height, or whether one wheel be higher than the other, 
The second observation, is about the wheels and the parts belonging to them.  or one wheel reverse faster than the other: Observe the due proportion for the wheels should be ½. parts the length of the Piece: The Saker and Minion, the height of their wheels must exceed this former proportion by ●. parts: For the Falcon and Faulconet 1/6. and for the Base one quarter; The Vellowes must be in length 4 Diameters and 11/1●. of the Boar. and six of these makes the whole circumference, and each of them one Diameter in breadth, and one in thickness; The Nave ought to be three Diameters thick, and three Diameters and a half long; The Spokes are to be two Diameters in length, and let into the Nave one half Diameter, and into the Vellowes one half Diameter more; each Wheel is to have twelve Spokes, and each Spoke, a quarter of a Diameter square; The Axletree must be one Diameter ●. in thickness; The Arms thereof must be in the thickest place one Diameter, 
The third observation, is about the trunnions if not placed in a diagonal line, with the Axis of the Piece, it will shoot wide.  and at the ends thereof ●. parts of a Diameter in thickness, and where the Limbs or sides of the Carriage rests on, it must be one and a quarter in breadth, and one and 2/●. parts in height.  
Thirdly, if the Trunnions be not duly placed directly in a diagonal Line with the axis of the Piece, it will shoot wide: Therefore observe, first to measure the length of the Concave, Cillinder, or Bore of the Piece from the mouth to the Breech; divide that measure by 7. then multiply that sum that cometh in the quotient by 3. the product will show you how many Inches or other measure the Trunnions ought to stand from the end of the lowest part of the concavity of the said Piece at the Breech; 
Note, the trunnions ought so to be placed, as ● parts of the circumference of the piece may be seen in that place whereas the trunnions are set, and one right against th' other.  or otherwise you may multiply the length of the concave of the Piece by 3. and divide the product by 7. the quotient will show the true place how far the Trunnions ought to stand from the lowest part of the Boar: For Chamber bored Pieces, this Rule fails, for they must be placed more backwards, because the thickness of mettle towards the Breech, exceeds in comparative proportion to equal bored Pieces, which would become Breech-heavie and very troublesome in managing; 
If the carriage or trunnions ●ares lie higher or lower, one than the other; or the carriage be to wide, so that the piece lie not fast, but starts aside in her discharge, causeth error in the shoot.  and if the Trunnions should be placed according to the former Rule, the mettle of such Chamber bored Pieces would be thin and weak at the proportioned place, so that a due place must be found to place them more near the Breech, the better to support the great weight of the mettle, and the better to keep her steady in her discharge, and not to be too unwildie, but near equiballancing for the mounting and managing thereof.  
Fourthly, if the Platform be not laid with planks very level and smooth, so that neither of the Wheels, nor neither side of the tail of the Carriage takes a rub in the reverse, 
The fourth observation, is about the platform, etc.  or rest harder on the Platform upon one side more than upon the other.  
Fiftly, when the shot is too low for the Boar of the Piece, and at the delivery toucheth upon one side, 
The fifth observation is about the bullet.  causeth the Shot to err, and if the Shot be not equally round, or the bore of the Piece not lying strait, but more on the one side then the other; or if the Shot be rammed too far home, or too short.  
Sixthly, 
The sixth observation is the wind, etc.  if the Wind be too vehement either with you or against you, the thickness, or thinness of the Air will cause error.  
Seventhly, 
Note, a piece of Ordnance will shoot further from sea to land, then from land to sea; the thickness of the A●re at sea hinders the passage.  the heating or cooling the Piece, and Note that a Brass Piece being made hot with often shooting, is more apt to break then when it is cold; and any kind of Artillery of what mettle soever, is more apt to break in a great Frost (being cold) at the first or second shot, then afterwards being hot with often shooting: Moreover a Piece of Ordnance over hot with shooting, will not range so far not pierce so deep, as being temperately cold, and the slower the Powder is in firing within the Piece, the greater her reverse will be, and the shot of less execution: In the next Chapter we will observe some Rules in charging great Ordnance, with their due proportion of Powder and Shot to every particular Piece, with sundry other circumstances thereto belonging.   

CHAP. XLIX.  
Observations in charging great Ordnance, with their due proportion of Powder and Shot to every particular Piece belonging: with their Ladles, Tampions, and Sponges, and all kind of Circumstances; Fit to be learned of every Commander, both concerning Pieces, Powder, and Bullets.  
WE having travailed thus far in observing what our famous Gunners of this latter Age, have through their industry and experience found out, to perfect and beautify this noble Art, which is now brought to a most excellent perfection; I hold it most fit to discourse of every particular branch in an orderly way; and to perform this, I shall endeavour to pick and cull out of the ablest Authors their best practical experiments, and so briefly and distinctly handle them, that the ingenuous Commander may profit thereby. And first, not forgetting how we have formerly showed the nature and quality of all kind of Ordnance, 
Note, in spunging your piece, you are to stand on the right side, the sponge being drawn out, you must give it a knock on the outside of the mouth of the piece to shake off the foulness.  their due due strength and Fortitudes, with diverse accidents that may hinder their true shooting; Now remains, diverse further Observations and Curiosities, which may not be omitted in lading or charging them Gunner-like: Wherefore having Powder, Bullets and Match, with other implements in readiness for Service, and before you charge your Piece, you must clear the Touchhole, and sponge the Piece well.  
A Piece of Ordnance is either to be jaded with Cartrages or with the Ladle, Cartreges is the readiest way, 
How to frame Cartrages of Canvas or paper, which shall hold the due charge of powder for any kind of piece if they be made of paper, than the seams are to be glued, if cloth, then towed.  they are framed either of Canvas or paper royal: For the making of these in a due proportion; that they may neither hold more nor less, but a due charge. You are to take the height of the Boar of the Piece without the vent of the shot, then cut the cloth or paper of the breadth of three such heights, and if it be for a Canon, the length must be three Diameters of the Boar, for a Culverin 4 and for a Saker, Falcon, and other inferior Pieces 4 ½. parts of the height of their proper Boars: Note, you are to leave in the midst, top, and bottom, one other such height, at each of these places to lie over, and make a Cover and a bottom for the Cartreges; 
Some use Former's of Wood, made the just height of the Boar, to wind the paper or cloth about to fashion it.  moreover, you are to augment or diminish these Cartrages, according as your Powder is in strength or weakness, or according as your Piece is hot.  
If your Piece be an ancient cast Piece Taper bored, the former of Wood must be made accordingly, that the Cartreges may go to the bottom; if Chamber-bored, 
The papers of the Cartrage must be oiled, and the canvasse must be tallowed over to defend them from wet▪  the Cartrage must be laid in a thin instrument called a Chassela, which will convey it into the Chamber, but if right bored your Rammers head put it close home, and with a threesquare sharp priming iron make a vent through the Cartrage at the Touchhole; so that the priming powder that is to take fire may come to the powder in the Cartrage.  
The next thing considerable, 
How to charge a piece with a Cartrage.  is to know how to give a true charge with a Ladle; First, we are to consider (as formerly I have said) whether the Piece be double fortified or not, 
How to give a Canon her true charge.  or whether inferior in mettle; a double fortified Canon, is to be charged with two Ladles full of powder, 
A Ladle containing a true charge for a Canon, described.  the Ladle is to be two Diameters and a half of the shot in length, the socket of the Ladle-plate that is fastened on to the Staff, is to be one Diameter more of plate, the breadth of the plate of this Ladle must be two Diameters. 
An exact Rule to make a Ladle by, which shall contain the due charge of any piece of Ordnance.   
Or rather observe this Rule, take a Cord and measure the Circumference of the Bullet in the midst, laying the same measure to an inch Rule, then divide the same measure 5. into equal parts; Note, that three of these parts, is the just breadth the plate of the Ladle ought to be of: which being orderly placed on the Staff as before, and bend circularly, serves to hold the powder in; the other 2/●. parts being cut off, and so left open, serves to turn the powder into the Piece: the Length of this Ladle, is to be made according to the fortifying of the Piece with mettle. For a Canon, the length is to be 23. inches 1/●. parts. For a Canon Serpentine 22. inches, a French Canon 21. Demi-Canon eldest 22. Demi-Canon ordinary 20. Demi-Canon 21. inches, and so for all inferior pieces, according as the Table in the beginning of this discourse, doth plainly demonstrate.  
To charge with this Gunner-like; 
How to charge a piece Gunner●like with a Ladle.  so soon as this Ladle is filled so full that it may be struck off with a Rule, the same being put into the mouth of a Piece, and your thumb being fixed upon the upper part of the Staff, so thrusting it home to the bottom of the concavity of the Cillender, turn the Staff so, as your thumb falls directly under the Staff, so the Ladle will disburden itself orderly.  
Now to know the ●/5. parts of the Bullets Circumference, that the Ladle may fitly hold her true charge; 
How to find out the ●/5 part of the bullets circumference, that the Ladle may truly▪ be made thereby.  Lay the measure of the Bullets whole Circumference to an inch Rule, then multiply the same by 3. and divide the Product by the Denominator 5. the quotient will justly tell the breadth the plate ought to be of; As for example; You shall find in the Table, a Canon whose Bullet is 7. inches high in Diameter, this will be 22. inches in the Circumference, 
An arithmetical example, etc.  that multiplied by 3. makes 66. which divided by 5. the quotient is 13. inches, 1/2. the true breadth of the plate, for a Canon Ladle of 7. inches Diameter.  
But if it should so happen, 
An observation how to charge a piece of Ordnance truly without ladle, cartrages, or scales, or balances.  that neither Ladle nor Cartrages were to be had, nor balances ready to weigh out the due proportion of powder for a charge, than thrust your Rammer into the Cillender of the Piece just to the Touchhole, and there mark the Staff even with the mettle at the pieces mouth: then pull the Staff back three Diameters for the Canon, and 3 1/2. for the Culverin, and 4. Diameters for the Saker, falcon, and the rest inferior Pieces. Likewise, mark there another mark, between these two marks, is the place of distance, the powder will supply in the Chamber of the Piece. Then take Paper, Parchment, or Cloth, as long as the distance betwixt the two marks, then being wrapped up round, equal with the Boar of the Piece, only 1/20. part less; the sides and bottom being glued, fill it with powder, and gently put it into the mouth of the Piece, and thrust it home with the Tampion, and see there be just so much powder, as will occupy the place between the two marks, so as the last mark be equal to the swatte of the mouth, the Rammers head being home to the powder.  
But by the way, 
Observations about the strength and conditions of Gunpowder, and accordingly to order the charge to make a perfect shot.  let us take some observations of the mixture of Gunpowder▪ so that the Gunner may not deceive himself, in the over or undercharging his Piece, according as the strength or weakness of the powder shall happen, by means whereof it shall be impossible to make a true shot; for there is a certain proportional charge of powder to be found for every Piece, according to the strength of the Piece and the weight of the shot, some hold that the truest charge is a just quantity of fine powder, that shall all fire within the Cillender of the Piece, and what is more is superfluous.  
Now we are to observe, 
The three sundry e●gredients that powder is made of, with the quantities of the composition described.  there are three sorts of powder in use of several forces; the first is a small corned powder for Birding-peeces, and Fowling, the ingredients is 7. or 8. of Peter, and one of Cole and of Brimstone, and this is quickest and of greatest force; the second is for Muskets and Pistols; called sine-powder, the Composition is 5. or 6. of Peter for one of Cole and of Brimstone. The third is called Ordnance powder, and that hath 4. or 5. of Peter for one of Cole, and of Brimstone: to distinguish the force of these several kinds, or of any powder decayed, there is an instrument invented, the Figure and use of it follows in this Book, in the discourse of Warlike instruments. 
How to know when powder is decayed through mutation or corruption, three several ways.   
Besides, it is easy for a Gunner to know if powder be decayed through mutation or corruption, three several ways; the first by the sight. Secondly, by the se●ling; the third and surest way, is by firing it: If it looks black and dark, or if it moulders or clammes together, it is naught and decayed; for good powder will feel nimble, and look of a blush or tawny colour: if good powder be fired upon a piece of white paper, if it rise quick being fired, and spread in a moment, smoke little, but rise in a clear flash, and leaves no pieces upon the paper, but carries all away clean, without firing the paper, the powder is very good, otherwise not; by these symptoms, a Gunner cannot be deceived in proportioning his due charge.  
Next, we are to know the difference of Bullets; both in their heights, weights, Circumferences, and Metals, which being not observed, a world of errors will be committed, and a true proportionable charge can never be found to make a right shot.  
Wherefore, first observe our best Gunners do allow for all kind of Bullets 1/●. part of the Diameter of the Pieces Bore for vent.  
Secondly, 
According to the weight of the shot, the powder must be proportioned, whether it be Iron, Lead, or Stoneshot.  according to the weight of the shot, the charge of powder must be proportioned. Therefore it is most necessary, first to know the true weight of any shot by the Diameter thereof. Secondly, to know the different weights of Bullets, being of one and the selfsame Diameter, proportion, circumference, and height, but of several substances: as Iron, Lead, Stone, and the like. Wherefore take notice, the proportion in weight of Iron to Lead, is as 30. to 46.  
Likewise, 
The difference in weight betwixt a Bullet of Lead, Iron, and Stone, they being all three of one Diameter and Circumference.  Stone to Lead is as 18. to 72. and Stone to Iron as 18. to 48. the powder due to every charge, must be proportioned according to the weight of the Bullet, be it more or less, as Mr. Digges in his 17. Theorem doth show, and as Mr. Norton Comments upon it: That if a Gunner shoots three several shots in a Saker, the Bullet of the first being Lead, the second Iron, the third Stone, the true charge of powder being 12. pound as the leaden Bullet requires, than the Lead out-rangeth the other two, and that of Iron will out-range that of Stone; but if these three several Bullets be discharged with other several proportions of powder, as the Iron Bullet requires 8. l. of powder, 
The true quantity of Powder each kind of Bullet requires for its proportional charge.  then will the Iron out-range the Lead, and the Lead the Stoneshot. But thirdly, if these three kind of Bullets be severally shot with 4 l. of powder, being the true proportional charge for the Stoneshot, then will the Stoneshot out-range the Iron, and the Iron the Lead.  
Further in his 18. Theorem, the convenient weight of a Bullet altars according to the quantity or validity of the powder, 
Zote, these proportions have been observed to do best execution.  for as formerly is showed, that the Lead shot requires the whole weight of ordinary powder, or ●. of Corn powder, and the Iron-shot ●/2. of ordinary, or 2/3. of the best powder; and the Stone-bullet 2/●. of ordinary, or 1/● of the best powder.  
Moreover, these precedent things being considered, yet there is further to be observed the length of the Piece, 
The length of the Piece is to be considered, before a due proportion of Powder can be allowed for its charge.  for although there be a convenient ponderosity of Powder and Bullet, answerable one to the other, which might cause a perfect shoot, yet if the Cillender of the Piece be not proportioned in length, but is either longer or shorter, it will cause alteration; for the longer Piece will require more powder to be fired in her, before the shot can arrive just at the mouth of the Piece to be discharged than the shorter will, 
A difference in firing the Powder in a long, from a shorter Piece.  for if all the powder be fired before the shot arrives at the mouth, the after running thereof within the mouth of the Cillender, will hinder the swiftness thereof: So likewise if the Piece be too short, so that the Bullet be out of the mouth of the Piece before all the powder be fired, having received all the force of powder, for want of sufficient length in the Cillender of the Piece, it cannot possible do the true execution. For conclusion, we are not to forget to learn the weights of all kind of Bullets by their Diameters, and by having the true weight of a small Bullet, thereby to find out the weight of a greater; as also, by having the weight of an Iron Bullet, thereby to find out the weight of a Bullet of any other mettle.  
An Iron Bullet; whose Diameter is 12 inches, the weight thereof is 240. l. the same Diameter of Lead weighs 360. l. and the like in Marble Stone, 90. l. as you may perceive by a Table following, exactly calculated by Mr. Norton.  
In the next place, 
An example, whereby to find out the true weight of a great Bullet, by having the true weight of a small one performed by Arithmetical Rules.  by having the weight of a small Bullet, thereby to find out the weight of a greater, is performed by this Example following.  
An Iron Bullet of 6. inches Diameter weighing 30. pounds; by this I would know, how much a Bullet of 12. inches Diameter weighs, being of the same mettle. This is performed by multiplying the Diameter of each Bullet cubically, where I find the Cube of 6. to be 216. and the Cube of 12. to be 1728. Then by the Rule of proportion I say, if 216. weighs 30. l. weight, what shall that Bullet weigh whose Cube is 1728. So multiplying 1728. by 30. l. the weight of the lesser Bullet ariseth 51840. which being divided by 216. being the Cube of the lesser Bullet, yields in the quotient 240. l. So much shall the Bullet weigh, that is of 12. inches Diameter.  
How by the weight of an Iron Bullet, to find out the weight of a Bullet of Marble Stone, being of the like Diameter, or by the weight and height of a Marble Bullet, to find out the weight of an Iron Bullet of like height, is thus performed.  
As for Example.  
An Iron Bullet of 12. inches height, is of 240. l. weight; to know the weight of a Marble Bullet of like Diameter: 
How to know by Arithmetical Rules the weight of a marble Bullet by an Iron, they being both of one Diameter.  You must first observe, that a Bullet of Iron to the like Bullet of Marble Stone, shall bear such proportion as 18. to 48. (as before is showed) and therefore I multiply the weight of the Iron Bullet known, being 240. l. by 18. the proportion the Stone Bullet beareth thereto, of which ariseth 4320. this being divided by 48. the quotient is 90. l. Thus much shall the Marble Bullet weigh, that is in Diameter equal with the Bullet of Iron of 12. inches Diameter.  
After the same manner take the height and weight of a Stone Bullet, 
By the same Rule to find out the weight of an Iron Bullet, by a Marble, being both of one Diameter.  being 12. inches Diameter, which weighs 90. l. and multiply this 90. l. by 48. the Iron Bullet beareth to the Stone, which Product being divided by 18. which is the proportion the Stone beareth to the Iron▪ the quotient will be 240. the number of pounds the Iron Bullet weighs.  
After the same manner, a Leaden Bullet being of the same Diameter that either an Iron or a Stone Bullet is of, by knowing the proportion between Iron and Lead, or Stone and Lead, you may find out the weight either by the other, as before is showed.  
Moreover, if there be two Bullets, one higher in Diameter than the other, if you want a pair of Callibre Compasses to take the just height, you must take a Cord and girt the Bullet or Bullets (whose height you desire to know) just in the midst, then lay the measure to an inch Rule, observing how many inches or other measure the same containeth, which being done, multiply the said measure by 7. and divide by 22. the quotient will show you the just Diameter, 
A Rule to find out how much one Bullet is higher in Diameter then another.  then abating the less Diameter from the greater, the remainder will show you how much the one is higher than the other.  
As for Example.  
If the Circumference of one Bullet be 20. inches, and the Circumference of the other 30 inches; in working as above is taught, I find the Diameter of the less Bullet to be 6 4/●. and the Diameter of the greater Bullet to be, 9 6/●. so abating the lesser from the greater, the remainder is 3. inches 2/11. parts of an inch, showing the great Bullet is so much in height more than the less.  
To find out the Circumference of any Bullet, 
A general Rule to find out the circumference by the Diameter.  there is a general Rule for it; first, the height of the Diameter being known, you are to observe in the next place, that the height of the Circumference is as 7. to 22. As suppose the Diameter to be 12. inches, which 12. I multiply by 22. the Product is 264. which being divided by 7. the quotient is 37 ●. the true Circumference of a Bullet 12. inches height.  
Likewise, having the Circumference of any Bullet, you may find out the height of the same; but this is to be wrought contrary to the former conclusion. As suppose the Circumference to be 37 ●/●. as in the former demonstration you may perceive. Therefore, first you are to reduce both the whole and broken numbers, being 37 ●/7. into his proper fraction, and it will be 264/7. then observing Archimedes' doctrine, multiplying by 7. and dividing by 22. the quotient will be 12. so many inches is the Diameter of the same Bullet. And for your greater ease, I have borrowed Master Nortons' Table, wherein is plainly showed the height or Diameter from one inch to 14. with the weight of every particular Bullets Diameter, both of Iron, Lead and Stone, fitted to the Assize of our English Measure of inches and parts.  
Likewise, 
The use of the following Table described.  according to our weight of Haberdepois of 16. Ounces to the Pound, the left Margin is to find out the height of the shot, in the first two Columes of inches and quarter of inches, in the two second Columes under the title of Iron, pounds, Ounces, you shall find the weight thereof: The like may be understood if the shot be Lead, by the third Columes, or of Stone by the two last Columes, each under his proper Title, and over against the height assigned.  
As for Example.  
An Iron shot of 6. inches the weight will appear to be 30. l. and if it were of Lead, it would be 45. l. and of stone 11. l. 4. ounces, view the Table following; only learn these Rules following for your help, if an exact Table should be wanting.  
First, take the disproportion that Iron bears to Lead, and Lead to Marble Stone; for as formerly is showed, Iron is in weight to Lead as 30. to 46. Lead to Stone as 72. to 18. and Stone to ●ron as 18. to 48. An Iron Bullet of 6. inches Diameter that weiges 30. l. to know what a Leaden Bullet of the same proportion weighs; First, multiply the weight of the Iron Bullet known being 30. l. by 46. the disproportion Lead beareth thereto; there ariseth 1380. which being divided by 30. the quotient is 46. As appears in this Table.  
Secondly, if you would know what a Stone Bullet weighs, of the same proportion a Leaden is of, being 6. inches Diameter, and weighing (as in the quotient before is showed) 46. l. and likewise observing the disproportion in weight to be 72. to 18. as before; you must multiply the weight of the Leaden Bullet known being 46. l. by 18. the disproportion the Stone beareth thereto, so ariseth 828. which being divided by 72. the quotient is 11 ●/4. and thus of the rest of those weights.  

A Table, showing the height, and weight, of Iron, Lead, and Stoneshot; The use of this Table, is demonstrated in the foregoing Page.  Inches high. Quarters. Iron pounds. Ounces. Lead pounds. Ounces. Stone pounds. Ounces. 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 1/4 1 1 ● 0 0 6 0 3 1 2 ● 0 0 9 0 4 1/2 1 3 1 0 0 13 0 5 ●/4 2 0 1 1 1 11 0 7 2 1 1 9 2 0 0 9 2 2 2 2 3 0 0 12 2 3 2 14 4 3 1 0 3 0 3 12 5 0 1 4 3 1 4 12 6 9 1 8 3 2 6 1 8 1 2 0 3 3 7 5 9 14 2 7 4 0 8 15 11 5 2 13 4 1 10 10 15 15 3 10 4 2 12 10 17 15 4 3 4 3 14 14 21 5 5 9 5 0 17 5 24 12 6 3 5 1 20 1 30 0 7 8 5 2 23 2 35 10 8 14 5 3 26 6 39 9 10 10 6 0 30 0 46 0 11 2/4 6 1 34 0 51 0 12 12 6 2 38 0 57 0 14 3 6 3 42 0 63 0 15 12 7 0 48 0 72 0 17 10 7 1 53 0 79 8 19 14 7 2 58 0 87 0 21 12 7 3 64 0 96 0 24 0 8 0 72 10 106 8 26 12 8 1 78 0 117 0 28 8 8 2 87 3 130 8 32 8 8 3 95 0 141 8 35 10 9 0 101 0 150 0 37 10 9 1 109 6 161 8 40 4 9 2 121 10 181 13 44 2 9 3 132 11 198 5 49 8 10 2 138 0 207 0 51 10 10 0 164 2 246 0 61 2/4 11 0 184 0 275 8 69 8 11 2 216 0 324 0 81 0 12 0 240 0 360 0 90 0 13 0 305 0 457 8 114 8 14 0 389 2 583 8 146 8  

A Table, showing the Square Root unto 3848. and the Cubic Root, 238328.   1  1024 32 32768 4 2 8 1089 33 35937 9 3 27 1156 34 39304 16 4 64 1225 35 42875 25 5 125 1296 36 46656 36 6 216 1369 37 50653 49 7 343 1444 38 54872 64 8 512 1521 39 59319 81 9 729 1600 40 64000 100 10 1000 1681 41 68921 121 11 1331 1764 42 74088 144 12 1728 1849 43 81307 169 13 2197 1936 44 85184 196 14 2744 2025 45 87120 225 15 3375 2116 46 97336 256 16 4096 2209 47 103823 289 17 4913 2304 48 110592 324 18 5832 2401 49 117649 361 19 6859 2500 50 125000 400 20 6800 2601 51 132651 441 21 9261 2704 52 140608 484 22 10648 2809 53 148877 529 23 11197 2916 54 157464 576 24 13824 3205 55 166375 625 25 15625 3136 56 175616 676 26 17576 3249 57 185163 729 27 19683 3364 58 195112 784 28 21952 3481 59 205379 841 29 24389 3600 60 216000 900 30 27000 3721 61 226981 961 31 29791 3844 62 238328 The Square Root.  The Cubick Root. Square Root.  Cubick Root.  
I have adjoined this Table, of the Square and Cubic root; to the Table of the height and weight of iron, Lead, and Stone Bullets; because Mr. Norton conceives that a man of a small capacity and practice, may find out the weight of any Bullet by the help of this Table of the Cubick-root.  
As for Example.  
Suppose an Iron Bullet of 4. inches Diameter and 1/2. now by dividing the Cube of the Shot by 8. and take the quotient for pounds, 
Note, to perform this the solid square inches must be found out, by multiplying the measure of the known inches of the Diameter of the Bullet cubically, and then again multiply the Cube by 1●, and divide the last Product by 21, and the number in the quotient, is the solid square inches: The square inch of an iron Bullet, weighs four ounces, and so of the rest.  and each unite of the Remainder for two Ounces; and so the Cube of 4 ½. being 91. and divided by 8. the quotient will be 11. l. and the 3. remaining will be 6. ounces; the like in all kinds may be done for Stoneshot, by the Rule of 3. only: Saying, if 48. the proportion of Iron▪ give 202. ounces, what shall 18. the proportion for Stone give? 76. ounces, which is 4. l. and 12. ounces for the weight of the Stoneshot, which is 4. inches 1/2. in height.  
Now to proceed in our discourse, the powder and length (being considered) of the Piece, and the Bullets weight observed, to the end that a convenient proportion of powder be found, answerable to the heaviness or lightness of the Bullet. For if one proportion of powder should be taken, for the three several weights of Bullets, being of diverse metals, as this Table doth distinguish the disproportion between Iron, Lead, and Stone, there would prove an infinite variation and confusion. As Mr. Norton well observeth, that a man's hand is able to throw a weight of four pound Lead, further than a weight of 20. pounds of Iron; or then two pounds of feathers: 
Mr. Nortons' Art of Great Artillery, p. 36.  As he exemplifies it by a Saker, having made 3. shots; the proportion of powder being 12. pounds, as the leaden shot weighs; in this case the shot of Lead, will out-range the other two, and that of Iron will out-range that of Stone But the quantity of powder being altered to 8. pounds, as the Iron shot weigheth; then the Iron will out-range the Lead, and the Lead the Stoneshot, Thirdly, these Bullets being severally shot again out of the same Piece, with the proportion of 4 pounds of powder, then will the Stoneshot out-range the Iron, and the Iron the Lead Bullet.  
Moreover, this observation is not to be forgot; the higher a Piece is mounted, the more doth the weight of the shot resist the powder, 
Mr. Nortons' observations, about the true charging a Piece of Ordnance, with the due proportion of powder allowed to Bullets of each kind of mettle, prescribed.  and the lighter the shot is, the easier it is forced out of the Piece; so that if the Bullet weighs either too much or too little for the force of the powder, the motion thereof will be various. Wherefore he holds, the Leaden shot requires for its due charge, the whole weight of ordinary powder, or 4/●. of Cornepowder; and the Iron-shot 4/5. of ordinary powder, or ⅔. of the best; and the Stone ⅔. of ordinary, or ½. of the best. This shall suffice; next, we are to entreat of the Levelling of Ordnance, with the instruments for that purpose, showing the several proportional ranges, according to the mounting or embasing of the same, as follows.   

CHAP. L.  
Divers Rules and observations to be used in levelling of Ordnance, by the Gunners quadrant, Scale, Inchsight Rule, and other Instruments very material for every Commander to understand.  
IN levelling of Ordnance to make a true shot, 
Three things to be considered in making a true shot.  there is three things considerable; The first is the distance to the mark assigned within the reach of the Pieces level, 
The first is distance to the mark.  called pointblank, and in this there is neither mounting nor embasing of the Piece.  
The second, is when the mark assigned is far beyond distance of a true level, 
The second is beyond the distance of pointblank.  or pointblank; and for the bullet to reach this, the Piece is to be mounted unto some one degree or other of the quadrant, according as the distance of the mark shall be found.  
Thirdly, 
The third is under pointblank.  if a Piece of Ordnance be to shoot at a mark which lies under the true level of pointblank, then accordingly she is to be imba●ed: Now from these observations there is a fourth ariseth of equal consequence to be observed with the former (viz.) the finding out the true proportion of distance or paces of ground, whether it be to shoot beyond, or under, or near the true level of pointblank; If both Art and judgement be not used in this, it will prove impossible ever to mount or embase a Piece to any point to perform a perfect shoot.  
Wherefore I hold it best to discourse of the diversity of ways used by most experienced Gunners in levelling of Ordnance; wherein we shall be something large, in regard the subject requires it; and in the next Chapter I shall discourse of the instruments and rules which which are to be used in taking a true distance of paces to any mark assigned.  
And in this our present discourse, I shall first describe a quadrant, and then show the use of it; and so briefly proceed to other instruments invented for the like uses, with such due observations as befits this Theme; for indeed this quadrant is an instrument by which diverse conclusions belonging to this Art may be wrought,  
This Gunners quadrant is a Geometrical instrument, containing in circumference one quarter of a circle, 
The quadrant described with its parts, which is to be made of Brass or some hard Wood  divided into 90. equal parts or degrees in the outmost limb; and in the second limb within, there is 12. equal parts or divisions, and likewise each of those are subdivided by means of parallels, and diagonals, into 10. equal parts so that each side will be thereby found distinctly divided into 120 equal parts; the use of them is to take all Geometrical mensurations, both of distances, heights, breadths, and depths, which are either accessible or inaccessible, as shall in the next Chapter be declared.  
But as for the degrees and points, principally they are to help the Gunners practice to level and shoot at the best certainty, both in the right line called point blank, and also upon the advantage of all kind of Randons' or marks assigned; only you are to make use of certain Tables, Scales, and directions which I shall entreat of and demonstrate by Figure.  
Wherefore observe this quadrant must have a ruler made very strait about two foot long, which is joined firmly to one of the sides or Semidiameters thereof; or rather to have one of the sides extending itself out in form of a ruler; this subsequent Figure represents the true proportion of it, as for the several parts of this Instrument, which only belongs to the taking of heights and distances, I omit altogether in this place, reserving it for the next Chapter.  
Now therefore observe this Ruler to which the qudarant is artificially joined, being two foot long, divided into equal Inches and parts, with a hollow S●●t in the midst, upon which is placed a plate with a round hole in the midst thereof; The use of it is to set the ruler upright at the breech of the Piece, the plate before named moving up and down as you shall see cause, to take a perfect sight; by this you may know, what length, or what Inches and parts any Piece requires to reach any mark.  
Moreover, before you go about to levelly your Piece by the quadrant to make a Shott; you must first by the use of this ruler, take a true view through the two ●ight holes, upon the back of the same, then accordingly let the plumbline fall at liberty on the degrees of the quadrant; and if the plumbline falls on the line of level, than the mark is of equal height with your eye; but if the thread falls towards you, the mark is above point blank; otherwise, if from the Line of level, it is under pointblank▪ by this you shall know whether your mark assigned be higher or lower than your platform or the Cillender of your Piece, for it is most necessary, first to see whether the Base or lowest part of the said mark or altitude be above or under pointblank.  
Now in levelling your Piece, you are to put the ruler into the mouth of the Piece close to the lowest side of the mettle, 
The mounting o● embasing of a Piece is performed by putting in o● drawing out the quines, as reason shall direct.  within the Concave, Cillender or Boar; then mount or embase your Piece in her Carriage, until the plummet fall directly upon the Line of level, and then the Axis of the boar or Concave or Cillender thereof, will lie strait and level.  
But if the mark assigned be found by this instrument to lie beyond the reach of the Piece at pointblank, so as she must be mounted at some one degree or other▪ according as the distance shall be found; in this you must make use of certaine●Tables exactly framed, which hereafter shall be demonstrated. But before you can attain to any understanding in them, you must first learn to find the right Line or right Range of any shot discharged, (out of what kind of Piece soever it be) for every elevation.  
Next you are to find out how much of the Horizanticall Line lieth under the crooked range of the Shot, at any elevation that shall be assigned.  
Lastly, 
Read Mr▪ Nortons' practice of Artillery pag. 97▪ 98. and it will show you by example how to perform these things; but you shall find error committed by the Printer, which must be amended.  the knowledge of the violent, crooked, and natural motion or course of a shot discharged out of a Piece, at what distance soever assigned.  
Further by observing the several Diameters of diverse Pieces, and their various lengths, causeth much alteration in their ranges; yet for the ease of the lngenious Soldier, our modern Gunners have taken wonderful pains in framing a Table of the proportions of right ranges; the use of it is thus to be understood: Let your Piece be of what kind soever; you must first know and prove how far this Piece conveys her shot at any one degree of the quadrant; as suppose you find your Piece shoots at 6 degrees of mounture, 200 paces in a right Line, not sensibly crooked; now your desire is to know how far the same Piece will further convey her shot in a strait Line, she being mounted to ten degrees.  
For this you must repair to the Table following, and propound to yourself, if 285 the number against six degrees giveth 200 paces, what will 354 the number in this Table against 10 degrees give.  

A Table of proportions of right ranges or point-blanks:  0 192 1 209 2 227 3 244 4 261 5 278 6 285 7 302 8 320 9 337 10 354 20 524 30 695 40 855 50 1000 60 1140 70 1220 80 1300 90 1353  
This being wrought by the Rule of 3, the quotient will be 242 paces, view the Table of the proportions of right ranges in the Margin.  
Yet by the way observe these Tables are not absolutely true, nor cannot possibly correspond in a just exactness, in regard of diverse Fractions; wherefore practice must be the best Schoolmaster in these conclusions.  
Now to proceed in our discourse; the next thing to be observed, is the finding out how far a Piece shoots at every degree of mounture at its dead range, and for to perform this, the right range and crooked being added together into one, is then called the dead range, which is to be understood the whole distance from the platform, from which the Piece is discharged, unto the first fall or graze of the Bullet upon the level Line, or Horzianticall plain.  
And likewise as formerly is said, the differences in the Boars and lengths of Pieces, and likewise the strength and feebleness of the powder increaseth or diminisheth the course of the Shot, and therefore most difficult to find out the true range, but by Diagrams, Tables, or Scales made from experiments; and to that end and purpose our late practitioners in this Art, have beaten their brains and laboured to arrive at some exactness; by their experiments and industrious endeavours they have attained to some seeming perfection, far better than uncertain guessing, and for that purpose framed Tables, as appeareth in the Margin, which Mr. Norton hath as he confesses grounded upon often observations and trials; the use of this Table of the proportions of dead ranges he hath thus demonstrated; First you must take the right range of the Piece experimented, from the right range of the mounture assigned, and divide the remainder in such reason as the said angle of mounture is to the angle of the compliment thereof; and to the quotient add the said right range found, and the product thereof will be the dead range for that Piece: he further gives this example, Suppose a Piece mounted at 30 degrees, shoots 300. paces in the right range, and 300. at the dead range; if you would desire to know the dead range at 40 degrees; to perform this you are to work in this manner following: First divide the dead range into any number of parts as you shall please, which being set out in a Line, at one end of the right line make an angle (as Euclid demonstrates by his 23 proposition) and from the other end of the aforesaid Line, you must erect a perpendicular Line (by Eucledes 11 proposition) until it intersect the Line that framed the angle given, and note well how many such parts it containeth; than you must multiply the parts of the dead range, by the parts of that line which framed the angle containeth; then the product being divided by the number of parts, which you divided the Line of the dead range into, and the quotient will be the secant range, which being known, than you must work after this manner following.  

A Table of the Proportion of dead Ranges.  Deg. Paces. 0 192 1 298 2 404 3 510 4 610 5 722 6 828 7 934 8 1044 9 1129 10 1214 11 1396 12 1394 03 1460 14 1544 15 1622 16 1686 17 1744 18 1792 19 1849 20 1917 25 2013 30 2185 35 2249 40 2289 42 1/2 2296 45 2289 52 1/2 2283 60 1792 67 1/2 1214 75 1000 85 1/2 0192 90 0000  
As suppose by the rule before, you find the secant range to be 1555. paces; And for the dead range 1000 paces given: Then by the Rule of three you must say, if 1555, gives 1000 the whole sign, what shall 1000 the dead range give? 643 1/●. the right sign of the angle the Piece must be mounted unto, upon the advantage to shoot 1000 paces.  
Further this industrious Gentleman Mr Norton hath made use of a Table of Randons', calculated by Alexander Bianco, which he hath reduced for the six first points of the quadrant, with a Table of secant ranges thereunto annexed, as follows very necessary to be understood and made use of.  
 1 2 3 4 5 6 Double Canon of 8. 750 1275 1690 1710 1785 1800 Whole Canon of 7. 675 1147 1431 1489 1606 1620 Demy Canon. 625 1602 1325 1425 1487 1500 Culverin. 750 1275 1590. 1710 1785 1800 Demy Culverin. 725 1232 1537 1653 1725 1740 Saker. 625 1062 1325 1425 1487 1500 Minion. 450 765 954 1026 1071 1080 Falcon. 550 935 1166 1254 1039 1320 Faulconet.. 375 637 795 855 892 900  

The Table of secant Ranges.  0 1000 1 1000 2 1000 3 1001 4 1002 5 1003 6 1005 7 1007 8 1009 9 1013 10 1015 11 1018 12 1023 13 1026 14 1030 15 1035 16 1040 17 1045 18 1051 19 1057 20 1064 30 1154 40 1305 50 1555 60 2000 70 3923 80 5758 98 Infinite  
Wherefore observe, if you have mounted your Piece to any of these six points, you must look against the name of the same Piece you intent to use, and right under that point you mount it unto; In the common angle, you shall find the number of paces of her Random; Likewise this Table of secant Ranges are numbers proportional, whose use is easy to be understood by the former examples.  
Moreover, we may further observe by the Inchsight rule, any Piece of Ordnance that is not in length above fifteen foot, and not shorter than six, may be mounted to any degree of the quadrant under twenty Grades, as well as by the quadrant itself or any other instrument: The Table follows in the next Page, and by the help of the Inchsight rule it is to be made use of.  
● Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot.  Foot. ● 6 1/2 7 1/2 8 1/2 9 1/2 10 1/2 11 1/2 12 1/2 13 1/2 14 1/● 15 ● Inch.                   ● 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 ● 2 5 2 7 2 9 3 1 3 3 3 5 3 6 3 8 4 0 4 2 4 5 4 7 5 0 5 2 5 4 5 6 5 8 5 9 6 0 ● 3 7 4 0 4 3 4 6 4 9 5 3 5 5 5 7 6 0 6 3 6 7 7 1 7 4 7 7 8 0 8 4 8 8 9 0 9 2 ● 5 0 5 4 5 8 6 2 5 5 7 0 7 5 7 9 8 4 8 8 9 2 9 6 10 0 10 4 10 8 11 2 11 6 12 0 12 4 ● 6 2 6 8 7 4 7 8 8 2 8 7 9 3 10 0 10 5 11 0 11 5 12 0 12 5 13 0 13 6 14 2 14 8 15 2 15 6 ● 7 5 8 2 8 9 9 4 9 9 10 4 11 0 11 9 12 6 13 4 14 6 14 8 15 0 15 7 16 4 17 1 17 8 18 3 18 8 ● 8 7 9 5 10 4 10 9 11 7 12 1 12 8 13 8 14 5 15 3 16 0 16 7 17 4 18 2 19 0 19 9 20 8 21 3 21 8 ● 10 0 10 8 11 9 12 3 13 3 13 8 14 2 15 8 16 6 17 5 18 3 19 2 20 0 20 8 21 ● 22 7 23 0 24 2 24 6 ● 11 3 12 3 12 5 13 7 14 5 15 1 15 9 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 6 21 5 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 0 25 8 26 6 27 3 ● 12 3 13 0 13 8 15 4 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 8 20 8 21 9 22 9 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 27 8 27 9 29 2 30 8 1 13 7 14 8 16 3 17 0 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 7 21 7 24 0 25 4 26 8 27 4 28 5 29 6 31 1 32 6 ●3 3 34 0 2 15 0 16 2 17 5 18 7 20 0 21 1 22 2 23 9 24 8 26 2 27 6 29 0 30 0 31 2 32 4 33 7 35 0 36 2 37 4 3 16 2 17 6 18 9 20 3 21 6 22 9 24 2 25 6 26 9 28 2 30 0 31 6 32 4 33 9 35 2 36 5 37 8 39 2 4● 6 4 17 4 18 9 20 3 21 8 23 3 24 6 25 9 27 5 28 9 30 4 32 0 33 ● 34 8 36 5 37 8 39 0 40 6 41 9 43 6 5 18 6 20 2 21 7 23 3 14 9 26 3 28 1 29 8 30 9 32 8 34 3 35 8 37 2 34 8 40 4 41 9 43 4 45 0 46 6 6 19 8 21 5 23 1 24 8 26 5 28 1 28 8 31 4 33 0 35 0 36 8 38 4 39 8 41 5 43 0 44 8 46 2 47 9 49 6 7 21 2 22 8 24 0 26 3 27 9 29 8 31 2 33 5 34 9 37 1 38 9 40 0 42 4 44 0 45 8 49 3 49 0 50 8 52 6 8 22 4 24 1 25 9 27 1 29 9 31 5 33 0 35 4 36 8 38 3 41 2 43 8 44 8 46 5 48 2 51 0 51 8 53 7 55 6 9 23 5 25 3 26 9 29 3 31 4 33 2 34 8 37 5 38 7 40 2 43 5 45 7 47 0 48 8 50 6 52 0 52 9 55 5 58 6 ● 24 6 26 7 28 7 30 8 32 8 34 9 36 9 38 9 41 0 42 1 45 8 47 6 49 4 51 3 53 4 55 4 57 4 59 5 61 6  
Further we may observe another ready way to level, mount, and embase a Piece; by a Holbert, Linstocke, or any other staff, which Mr. Norton hath been very industrious in making and inventing of it, the manner of performing it is in this kind.  
First mark from one end of the staff a distance equal unto the pummel or height of the Caskable of the Piece being placed level upon the platform. 
The staff to level or embase a Piece of Ordnance described, read pag. 13●. how to embase a Piece by this staff.   
Next you must take the distance betwixt the Centre of the Truan●o●s, and the pummel o● Caskable; which make or imagine a Semi-diameter of a circle, and divide it by diagonals, and parallels, or otherwise into 1000 equal parts.  
Thirdly, you must repair to the Table of Sines, and take the number answering unto every degree out of the said 1000 parts, and set that distance from the said mark downwards; and if the total sign of the Table be 100000, you must omit the two last figures of each number thereof towards the right hand; and if it chance to be 10000000, than you must omit 4 figures of each number you find in that Table, and the remaining number will show how many of those 1000 equal parts are to be set downwards upon the staff; from the mark beneath the said level for each several degree,  
Fourthly, 
Note you must place your Rule upon the highest part of the mettle at the breech of the Piece, coining the Piece up or down▪ until through the fight o● 〈◊〉 the rule (be listed to the part or division in your rule that answers that degree you desire) you espy the Corno●ze or highest part of mettle at the Pieces mouth, and the mark, all 3. in a strait Line▪  you must draw 10 parallels and diagonals, from the first degree to the second, and from the second to the third, successively continued from each to his next, making every degree with arithmtticall Characters; by this you may from six minutes to six minutes, by those right Sins mount your Piece.  
This staff being this framed and ordered, the use of it is thus; You are to bring down the Centre of the pummel or Caskable of the Piece, to any number or degree thereon so marked for the Piece, you setting the lower end of the Staff to the platform, which being performed; the Axis of the Boar of that Piece will be found to be elevated unto the degree assigned.  
Further, if all these instruments should be wanting, yet the industrious Gunner by arithmetical skill, may by an Inch rule mount any Piece of Ordnance unto 10 de-degrees of the quadrant, by measuring the just length ●f the Concave, Cillinder, or Barrel of the Piece; then reducing that measure into Inches, and double the same, afterwards multiplying the number of inches so doubled by 22, and divide by 7 taking notice of the number of the quotient, which last quotient being likewise divided by 360, the degrees contained in the whole Circumference of every Circle, the last quotient Number, will demonstrate the number of Inches, and parts of an Inch that will make a degree in the quadrant for that Piece, as Smith in his Art of gunnery demonstrates it, by example of a Saker, whose Concave Cillinder or Boar is just seven foot long, if you would desire to know what parts of an Inch Rule, will mount her to one degree of the quadrant you must work it thus.  
First, 
Note, the like order is to be observed in mounting any other Piece of Ordnance by an inch Rule, of what length soever ●●e be.  reduce the seven foot into Inches, and there ariseth 84, that 84 Inches being doubled makes 168, the which being multiplied by 22, ariseth 3696, the which being divided by 7, the quotient will be 528; then again dividing this quotient number by 360, that will yield 1 1/●, which is as much as one Inch 1/2, wanting 1/15 part of an Inch; by this example you see it confirmed, that any Piece of Ordnance, whose Chase is but seven foot long, being mounted by an Inch Rule, unto one Inch and ●/15 parts, that Piece shall lie just the height, she would have done if you had mounted her unto one degree of the Quadrant.  
Moreover, if you would mount the same Piece unto two degrees of the Quadrant, by the inch-Rule aforesaid; than you must multiply the measure in your Rule last found, being one inch ●/● parts, by 2 in the order of Fractions; and you shall have 4/● the which 44 being the Numerator of the fraction, being divided by the Denominator, which is 15, the quotient being two inches 14/● is your desire; by this you perceive three inches wanting 1/1● part, makes two degrees of the Quadrant.  
Lastly, observe if you would have your Piece mounted by an inch Rule, for to answer any number of degrees under 10, either you must Multiply that number, by the number of inches, and parts of an inch, that makes the degrees of a Quadrant, otherwise you may work as you did the first Conclusion, Multiplying the first product by the number of inches desired, and dividing the product by the numbers before mentioned, your last quotient will resolve you.  
As for a further example, the piece of Ordnance before mentioned, you desire to elevate by an Inch rule to answer to 8 degrees of the quadrant, first you reduce the length of the Boar into Inches, as formerly is showed, doubling that measure, & it makes 168 (as in the first conclusion) which 168 Inches, multiplied by 22, yields 3696 Inches, the which Product being now multiplied by 8, ariseth 29568, which sum divided by 7, the quotient is 4224, the same divided by 360, yields in the Quotient 11 Inches 1/15 parts of an Inch. So many Inches, and parts of an inch, must the same Piece be elevated unto, with an Inch-Rule to answer unto 8 degrees of the Quadrant. But to lay your Piece point-blank without instrument, you must bring the height of the Mettle at the mouth, equal with the Horizon, and then the Concave Cillinder will lie pointblank.  
But Master Norton doth mislike Master Smith's ways in shooting by the Mettle or Mira commune; and he hath been very zealous in finding out a more perfect way, and Says to shoot with any Piece by the Mettle, or Mira commune; the difference or mount, about the level which the Mettle causeth being considered, and exactly examined, will show the angle of the Pieces Mounture, with the which you must repair to the precedent Table of proportional Mountures for the several Randons' upon each point or degree of the Gunners quadrant in page 127, which is thus to be appropriated unto any Piece; first having made one shoot with her at the Mounture of a certain mark assigned, and finding her dead range for the same; which being reverted to the given elevation, will soon yield the range required; the example is after this manner given; That suppose by examination it be found out, that by reason of the eminency of the Morsel Ring; and length of the Chase of the Piece; the directions of the Mettle at the breech, and the Morsel ring, to mount the Piece higher than it would, if the assize of her Boar were duly directed by a true desparte unto any Mark assigned by six degrees, and let it be imagined that the Mark is elevated six degrees above the Horrizon, so found by the Quadrant, and observing that at the mounture, the Piece did shoot 850 paces for her dead range; the question is, how far the same Piece would convey the like shot, with the like loading and accidents, if she wear by the highest of her Mettle at Britch and Morsel, directed to the same mark.  
Say then if 722, the number in the Table of dead ranges against 6 degrees gives 850 paces being the measure of the shot made in her at six degrees of mounture, what shall 1394 the number against 12 degrees of Mounture give? By making use of the Rule of three▪ and multiplying the third of these three Numbers, by the second dividing the Product by the first, the Quotient will be 1534 paces. Thus having collected, and fitted this discourse, so that the ingenuous Soldier may gain some profit by it, I leave it to his discretion, to cull out such Rules and Examples, as shall best fit his practice.   

CHAP. LI.  
Divers brief Observations, most necessary to be learned and understood, concerning the Embasing of Ordnance, and shooting in Mortar-pieces.  
IN this Chapter we must observe, that as formerly we have spoken of Mounting a Piece of Ordnance, from degree to degree, until she come to about 45 degrees▪ causeth the Piece to convey her bullet at each elevation, one time farther than the other; but being elevated past those degrees, she shoots every degree shorter than the other, until she come to shoot perpendicular, or in a Line right up; and this last kind of elevation is only used in levelling of Mortar-pieces; whose use is to convey her shot upwards, according to the distance of the farnesse, or nearness of the mark assigned; And so the shot falls right down out of the air upon the mark; of this we shall speak largely, towards the finishing of this Chapter.  
Now, for these long Pieces of Ordnance; to cause them to shoot ●nder pointblank at any mark of nearness; they must be imbased (as your Gunners term it) or their mouth laid in some proportion nearer to the ground, according as the mark is in nearness; and so to perform this, we will only make choice of the Staff before in that Chapter described, invented by Master Norton for that purpose, where you may please to remember, the Staff was to have the lower end of it set upon the platform, and so to bring down the centre of the Caskable or pommel of the ●eece to any number of degrees thereon ●o marked for that same peace, and then the Axis of the Boar of that Piece will be found to be elevated unto the degree assigned. 
The manner of ●●aming this Staff is described, pag. 129.  But for the Embasing a Piece, we must use a contrary way, by advancing the breech of the Piece upwards, above the first named mark unto those lines and numbers there deciphered, which will direct the Shot to any mark that lies under pointblank; Likewise diverse other instruments are invented for this purpose, but in regard there asks small cunning to perform this only practice, and use will guide a man to direct the shot by Imbasure to her right mark; I will leave it, and proceed to the use of Mortar-pieces, 
The best of a Mortar-pieces Randon is between 50 and 45 degrees of the Quadrant. For what end Mortar Pieces were invented▪ and of the things to be considered in the true levelling of it, for the less way she shoots▪ the higher must her mouth be raised to some degree above the best of the Random as is sufficient to reach the mark.  only by the way observe, there must be less ●owder used in the charge, and the Bullet must be very fully and strongly rammed in; and further, that it is the nature of all Pieces to shoot above the level of the Mark, if the object be upright, as a side-banke, or the like.  
Now for the Mortar-pieces, how they are used, and leveled we shall crave your patience to be more large, in relating the Collections of the rules, and observations of those that have been ablest practitioners in this Art.  
The Invention of these Mortar-pieces was to annoy the Enemy, when other Ordnance cannot possibly be used against them: and for the making a perfect Shot in one of these pieces two things are requisite to be known.  
First, how far your Morterpeece will carry a Bullet or Fireball at the best of her Random.  
Secondly, you must know how far it is from the Piece to the mark you intent to shoot; these being known, you may make a perfect shot; as for example, if you find your Morterpeece will shoot a Bullet, 
How to make a perfect Shot in a Mortar Piece, proved by example.  or fire ball, 700 paces at 45 degrees of the Quadrant; and that the mark you intent to shoot at, is but 500 paces▪ then (by the Rule of three reverse) you must say, 
Note the due charge of a Mortar Piece is 1/10 part of the weight of the shot in powder, shooting upon any Mount above 45 degrees, but with 1/2 parts shooting level, or downwards.  if 700 paces requires 45 degrees, what will 500, thus multiplying the second by the first, and dividing the Product by the third number, you shall find it must be mounted to 63 degrees of the Quadrant to hit that mark.  
Further, observe if a Mortar Piece will shoot 450 paces, at the best of the Random, if you should elevate her one degree above the utmost Range, she will shoot 10 paces shorter: to prove this you must divide the distance of the utmost Range (being 450 paces, as before is said) by 45, the degree of the best of the Random, and you shall find the quotient to be 10, as before is related. But by the way, great care must be had in ordering your Mortar Piece, so that she shoot not wide, either upon the one, or other hand; Wherefore to prevent it, you must lay a straight Ruler, upon the mouth of the Piece, and upon it place a Quadrant cross-ways, and the plumbline will direct you; but withal observe how the winds blow, and so accordingly order your Piece.  
Then if you please, you shall make use of such further Rules and Tables, as have been approved to be certain and good; the Table follows, and the use of it is after this manner;  
Having once made known the distance the Piece did shoot at, being mounted to what point or degree you have first resolved upon, as suppose it be 53 degrees from which she conveys her shot 700 paces, to know how far she will shoot at any other degree of the Quadrant, the Example is this;  
You shall level your Piece at 60 degrees, now because 700 degrees is not at all in this Table, but you shall find against 60 degrees there stands 529 paces, therefore say by the rule of 3, if 562 being the number against 53 degrees, gives 700 paces, what shall 529 the number against 60 degrees give; now according to the Rule, if you multiply 700 by 529, 
Note your Piece must have the same proportional charge of powder and shot, that it had at 52 degrees.  and divide the Product by 562, the quotient will be 649 ●/4, the number of paces which the said Mortar Piece will shoot at 60 degrees mounture. Thus for any other number of paces or degrees, you may help yourself by this Table following, which was Calculated by Captain Vffanio, for every degree between the Level, and 90 degrees for the Randons' of the Mortar Pieces.  
Degr. Paces. degr. 0 100 89 1 122 88 2 143 87 3 164 86 4 285 85 5 104 84 6 224 83 7 243 82 8 262 81 9 280 80 10 297 79 11 314 78 12 331 77 13 347 76 14 393 75 15 377 74 16 362 73 17 406 72 18 419 71 19 432 70 20 445 69 21 457 68 22 468 67 23 479 66 24 490 65 25 500 64 26 510 63 27 518 62 28 524 61 29 529 60 30 534 59 31 539 58 32 543 57 33 549 56 34 552 55 35 558 54 36 562 53 37 568 52 38 573 51 39 477 50 40 580 49 41 582 48 42 583 47 43 584 46 44 582 45 582  
Now for the mounting your piece to any of these degrees, it is not so proper to put the Ruler of the Quadrant into the mouth of the Piece, in regard there may be error, because many of these kind are taper-bored, or galed at the mouth: to rectify this, your Gunners have invented a very apt instrument, framed after this manner; First, there is a Ruler of 18 Inches in length; at the middle point or prick thereof must be another shorter Ruler framed artificially above a foot long joined close, and falling perpendicularly on the middle point of the longer Ruler; Whose containing Angle lighteth justly on the middle point of the longer Ruler, from which point is drawn by Art the 1/● part of a Circle, and divided into 45 equal divisions or degrees, so as the 90 degrees stand just on the Centre, or middle point of the longer Rule.  
The use of it is thus, by laying the longer Rule cross the mouth of the Piece, you shall immediately perceive at what degree the said Mortar Piece is elevated by the Plumb-line, the Piece being mounted at any grave above 45, observe the Figure.  
And for to conclude this Chapter remitting all further Circumstances, we will only take notice of another Table which Vffanio hath likewise Calculated for a Mortar Piece to shoot thereby, fitted to the 12 points of the Gunners Quadrant, as you may perceive; Thus having run over such rules and examples as I conceive most apt and necessary for the true levelling of Ordnance; It now only remains in the Chapter following to take a view of such Rules, and Instruments, as are most proper and commodious for the taking of heights and distances, without the which it is impossible ever to accomplish any design belonging to this Art of gunnery, or to the Art of Myning; Wherefore be pleased to take a Survey of the subsequent Chapter.  
Points. Paces. 0 100 1 24 2 377 3 468 4 534 5 570 6 583 7 566 8 532 9 468 10 377 11 243 12 0●0   

CHAP. LII.  
The Description of such Instruments with the best selected Rules, which have been invented, and practised, for the taking of heights and distances, whereby a Gunner may make his Shot at more certainty.  
IT is one of the most necessariest things, (and not to be sli●ghted) the knowledge and understanding of these kind of Instruments, the true use of them, with the Rules and documents, which our ablest Practitioners have through their pains and industry, invented for future ages to practice; For the ignorance of this, makes both the Art of gunnery, and Myning, lame and imperfect; wherefore I will endeavour to be as brief, as the matter will permit in discoursing of the several parts of it. And by the way you may remember, that in the fiftieth Chapter, page 125. I began to describe the Instrument, called a Gunner's Quadrant; but I left the description how it should be used, about the taking of heights and distances, to be discoursed of in this Chapter; only be pleased to have a regard, and reference to the precedent Figure of the Quadrant; and then I shall indeavoure to describe those parts of it; that serve for our purpose.  
Wherefore observe, as I have said in the Figure, that from the Centre A, there is a line drawn aslope (called the Hipothenusall line) which comes to the corner C. upon which if the plumbline falls upon the Centre A, looking through the sights OF, and withal, beholding the extremes or highest parts of any Altitude; Note, than the distance from the middle part of your foot, to the base thereof, is the just height of the said Altitude, adding thereto the height from your eye; But if the Plumb-line, falls on the line A. B. then that mark you view through the Visual sight OF is of equal height, or level with your eye; Now the square lines or Scale, which extend itself from B to C, and from C to D, are divided into 12 equal parts; and if it were divided into 90, or a 100 divisions, or ten times as many, the better it were for the use of Shadows, Length, and Heights. Now by the way forget not to remember that the side C D, is called the right Shadow; and this serves to measure all the Heights, with the length thereof; but the side B C, is of contrary shadow, and that serves to measure all heights, without the length thereof; the Rule we have described the use of it in page 125.  
Now, suppose we were to take the height of a Castle wall, of a Fort, or any other Altitude aproachable; first we must approach as near to the object, that we guess we are near about the length of the height of the same, than set your quadrant to your eye looking through your visual sights, beholding the extreme or highest part of the Altitude, then moving too, and from the same, until the thread and plummet cut, or fall upon the part 12 of right shadow; then measuring how far it is from the middle part of your Foot, to the base of the said Altitude; You have the just height of that Altitude, only adding the height from the ground to your eye. You may further find out any upright height, with the length thereof, both by the shadow and without shadow, if the ground be plain; wherefore you must approach as near to the Base or foot of the Altitude, that the plumbline may fall on the part of Right shadow; then measuring the distance from the midst of your foot to the Base thereof, multiplying the measure by 12, adding thereunto the height, to your eye, from the ground, and you have the true Altitude.  
Or letting the Sun beams pierce through the Vissuall sights, the Plumb-line falling at liberty upon that part of Right-shadow (then measuring as before is showed) and multiply that measure by 12, and dividing by the parts whereon the Plumb-line cuts, the quotient will tell you the true height of the same Altitude.  
And note this for a general rule, 
General Rules ● for the taking the heights by the right Shadow.  that upon what part of Right shadow the Plumb-line cuts; if you measure the height or Altitude, it will prove more than the shadow by such proportion, as 12 exceedeth the part or division of the Scale, where the Plumb-line pointed unto; As for example, if the Plumb-line be found to fall on the part 2 of right shadow, if you measure the distance, from the midst of your foot to the Base for the Altitude six times, that measure is the height of the same, adding from your eye to the ground, for you must observe that the part 2 is contained in 12, being the division of the Scale 6 times.  
Likewise, what part soever the Plumb-line falls on of right Shadow, look how oft that part is contained in 12, just so many times as the measure is from your foot to the Base, is the height of the thing you measure, adding from the ground to your eye.  
The contrary Shadow shows to measure all Altitudes without the length thereof; first multiplying the length of the shadow, by the Point or, division of the Scale, where on the Plumb-line falleth, then dividing the Product by 12, the quotient thereof, is the true height of the Altitude.  
In measuring any Altitude without shadow, you must go as near to the same, that you perceive you are within the length thereof, then lifting up your Quadrant, orderly going to, 
Note, in this rule the farthest stationis twice the length of the height of the Altitude, adding the distance from the ground to your eye.  or from the same, until you espy the top of the Altitude through the Visual holes, than the thread falling upon the part 12, standing upright with your body; at the midst of your foot make a mark, then go directly backwards from the same, until through the visual sights you espy the highest part again; the plumbline falling on the part six of contrary shadow; and as before make another mark; the distance between these two marks, the height of your eye from the ground being put to it, 
Note, the farthest station is three times the length of the Altitude, if you measure from the Base thereof.  is the true height of the altitude.  
Further observe, if the plumbline falls on the part 6 of contrary shadow; and at the second station on the part 4, the distance betwixt these two marks is the height of the altitude, adding as before.  
Or if the plumbline falls on the part 4 of contrary shadow at the first station; then upon the part 3 at the second, you shall find the distance between your two stations to be the just height, and the furthest station is four times the length or height thereof.  
Or suppose your Plumb-line falls upon the part 2 of contrary shadow; 
Note if the Scale of the Quadrant were divided into 100 or a 1000 divisions, by so much further from the thing to be measured, you may find out the height thereof▪  and at the second station, it falls on the part one, than the space between the two standings, will be six times the length or height of that Altitude, or the sixth part of the measure is the height of it, and your further station will be twelve times the height thereof.  
In the next place we must observe some rules for the taking of distances from the Platform, or Batteries your Ordnance are planted on, to any Mark you are to shoot at; 
Divers Rules how to take the true distance from the platform to any mark assigned by the help of the Quadrant.  And to perform this, you must lay your Quadrant flat upon some steady thing, as a stool or staff, firmly and perpendicularly set up, then placing your Quadrant upon the same, and turning the edge of the Rule to the mark you desire to measure the distance of, then espying the Mark through the Visual sights, at that place or station set up a Staff; then turning your body round, not altering neither Rule nor Quadrant by the Line of level; then through the Visual sights, make choice of some other Mark athwart the ●rst, and set up the second Staff, the distance whereof suppose to be 60 feet; then coming to the first station where the Quadrant is placed, viewing through the visual sights upon the Rule, some other mark in a straight line back from the first station, the distance whereof suppose to be 100 feet, and there place a third Staff, so as the first and the third Staff, will be in a straight line with the mark, then removing the Quadrant to the third station, turning the right Angle or Line of level overthwart towards the second station, so as the Visual line may be paralleled to the Line that crosseth from the first station to the second, there you must place a fourth Staff, so as the Visual line passing from the same, and running by the second Staff may cross the mark, or end in a point there with the first Visual line; The distance between these two last stations, suppose to be 65 feet; The Staves being thus orderly placed, you must abate 60 feet the distance between the first and second Staff or station, from 65 the distance between the third and fourth Staves or stations, the remainder is 5 for your Devisor, then multiply the said 65 by 100 the distance from the first to the third there ariseth 6500, the which divide by 5, the quotient is 1300 feet, the distance from the first Staff to the mark; Observe this figure following, where the Tower represents the mark, the Vnit. 1. the first Staff or station; the figure 2▪ the second Staff; the figure 3, the third Staff; and the figure 4, the fourth Staff.  
Or you may find out the distance to any mark near hand by the quadrant and Gunners Staff divided into even portions; First placing the angle of the quadrant upon the top of the Staff, it being erected perpendicularly; and then through the sights of the rule view the mark you desire to measure, letting a long thread fall to the ground, from the centre of the quadrant whereon the plumline hangs; which thread must be drawn alongst the Line of level or edge of the quadrant to the ground, observing where the thread points at on the ground, and beholding the mark through the visual sights, and looking what proportion that part of ground between the Staff and where the thread points at, hath to the Staff, the same proportion shall the length to the mark have to the height or length of the Staff, as by this subsequent Figure more plainly appears.  
Wherefore observe the Gunner's Staff A. B. is to be supposed eight foot long, and the distance between the Staff and the ground where the thread points you to; (being the space C. B.) 
Note, the higher the Staff is, the further may you measure any distance by this Rule.  is but eight Inches; Therefore look what proportion C. B. beareth to the length of the Staff, (which being reduced into Inches, will be 96 Inches) the same proportion shall the length to the mark D. have to the Staff, which by making use of the Rule of three, will discover unto you in this manner; for example; If eight Inches yields 96, what will 96 Inches; if you multiply 96 by 96, the product is 9216 Inches, and this divided by 8, yields in the quotient 1152 Inches, the true distance from the Staff to the Mark.  
Moreover, by the quadrant you may foresee whether Waters or Springs may possibly be brought to any place desired, which indeed is a thing of much consequence in the Wars; Wherefore observe, that by going to the head of the Spring or Waters, and by setting your quadrant to your eye, being in height equal with the Water, so that the plumline falls preciesely on the Line of level; now if you may see above the place through the sights, than you may judge the Water is possible to be brought; but if you sight falls under, than it is impossible: It cometh commonly to pass when the place to the which you would have Water conveyed, is of any great distance from the head of the Spring, or Rivers banks; the Hills, Valleys, and such like impediments, hinder the visual Line from having its free course: wherefore observe this remedy.  
At the head of the Spring or River-bancks you intent to cut out; you shall look through the sights of the instrument (as before) and take notice of some mark in in the next Hill towards the place, then go to that mark, and in like manner observe some other mark if any other Hill happen to be, and so proceed until you may see the place desired; if then your sight running through the sight of the Rule, (the thread ever falling upon the Lane of level) exceeds that place, the conveying of that Water is possible, otherwise not.  
If it should chance that a quadrant be wanting, yet you may take the distance to any place by the Carpenters square; First you must have a safr divided in certain proportions, 
Euclid shows this 33. pro●●● Book, and the fourth proposition, 6 Book.  a 100 or a 1000 parts; at the beginning of your length upon the very top directly standing, set the inward angle of the square; lift up or put down this instrument, until you see the farthest part of your longitude, your sight running through the visual holes of the square; The square so remaining, and the Staff not removed from his height, mark where the other end of the square next unto you noted upon the ground, see then what proportion the Staff than beareth to the part of the ground, which the nearest end of the square pointed unto from the Staff, the same shall the length have to the quantity of the same Staff, as you may more plainly see by the next Figure; where the Staff A. C. is imagined to be 6 feet, and the space A. D. 2 foot; Considering now that 6 the length of the Staff, containeth 2 thrice; therefore the longitude desired A. B. must consequently contain three times the Staff being 6 foot long, that maketh 18 foot, as by the Figure following you may view the truth of it. 
Note, you cannot take any far distance, unless you ascend some Tree or Turret, the length thereof being known, must stand instead of your staff.   
But if the ground be not level and plain, their will arise error: Moreover it behoveth you to have a fine cord made fast to the upper part of your Staff C. which must be tied even with the inward edge of the square, and so drawn to the ground, where the near end of the square, from the Staff pointed as you perceive at C. D. the other end directeth truly to the object or distance desired.  
Now it remains we should take farther observations concerning latitudes and bredths; the which upon the matter may serve for the taking of any distance either in the way of latitude or longitude, being a thing most requisite in diverse respects. As suppose diverse Ordnance being planted upon a Battery against the Enemy, and having Battered sufficient for an assault; the breadth of this breach is to be required that the forces may accordingly be ordered for to enter it; And this may be done either by the help of the quadrant, or the jacobs-staff, if by the quadrant, than you must suppose two marks at each end of the breach; then going directly towards one of the said Marks, that by supposition you are distant from the same about the length betwixt the two marks, whose distance you would measure: Then laying your quadrants flat upon some Stool, or placing the same upon some screw of a Staff being perpendicularly erected, moving the same to or from the mark you stand against, placing the quadrant so as the visual sights passing from the Centre of the quadrant by the Lines of level, may direct you to the said mark; and the visual Line passing from the Centre of the quadrant, by the 12 point or division of the scale, which is called the Hipothenusal line, may direct you to the other mark, and then the length of your standing to the mark, which the Line of level doth direct you to, is from the same just the distance between the two marks you intent to measure; then looking athwart by the other edge of the quadrant, or through your sights on the Rule, espy another mark directly against the mark you mean to measure, and the visual Line passing between the station and the said mark will be parallel to the Breach of the said Wall or Line passing between the two marks, whose distance you would measure; then removing your quadrant before the other Mark, placing the same so as the Line of level may direct you to the said Mark, and the Line passing by your sights on your Ruler may direct you to your first station; the distance betwixt your two stations being measured, is the just space betwixt the two Marks or two ends of the Breach, as by this demonstrative Figure appears, where the Line A. B. showeth the length or distance of the Breach to be measured, as suppose it to be 100 paces, and the like number you may perceive to be in C. D. as also in the Line C. A. and D. B.  
Moreover, the distance of both the Marks may easily be taken by the former conclusion at one Station; 
The Table of the square and Cubique ●oot, is joined to the Table of the several weights of Bullets, page 123.  As suppose the Windmill C to be your first standing, and the distance C to the end of the Breach A which the Line of level directs you to, is just 100 paces, that some being squared, makes 1000 paces; the like number of paces you may perceive in the Line between the two ends of the Breach A. B. being multiplied in itself: These two sums being joined together, make 2000 paces, the quadrant Root hereof, makes 141 paces and almost 1/2 parts, showing the true distance from your standing to the farthest Mark B.  
Likewise by the divisions of the Scale of your quadrant, by knowing the distance to any Tree, Windmill, or Steeple or other mark not far distant, you shall thereby know how much the same is higher or lower than your standing; as suppose from your standing to such a Steeple be 200 feet, then in viewing the same mark through the sights on your Rule, the index or plumbline falls on the part six on the scale of your quadrant being contrary shadow: Wherefore you must divide 12 by 6, the quotient is two, then by the same quotient number again, I divide 200 feet the space betwixt my standing and the mark; and so I find 100 foot higher than your eye.  
If you turn the contrary angles of the quadrant to your eye, you may find out all defents.  
If a quadrant be wanting, by the help of a jacobs-staff any height or breadth is to be taken by setting the end to your eye, and taking your visual Lines by the end of the little Staff that is cross the long one, which is called the movable Rule; then go forwards and backwards, until you see the foundation and top of the Mark you intent to measure, as the example following shows, where I desire to take the height of the Tower A B, I take my first station at C, and my eye runs in the Line by the end of the Cross Rule to the top of the Tower B; and at the same instant without moving, my eyesight runs by the lower end of the Crossestaffe to the Base of the Tower A, for so you must order the Crosse-Rule on the Staff D ● So that at once, both head and foot of the said mark may be seen; then where you stand, set a mark at C, then measuring the distance betwixt the Lines D E, putting the Crosse-rule to G, at the second station, you must go back until you can the second time see the two points A B, then from that station, I measure how many feet betwixt C and H, where you shall find 25 feet, and so much is the Tower in height from A to B; View the Figure following, which will give you a farther insight how to work it.  
For to take a distance either accessible, or inaccessible, as suppose we are to take the distance of A. B. and that the place were accessible only in the midst upon the Line C. F. Then you must dispose your Instrument as before is showed, and the cross Rule that moves up and down, must be set firm upon the first point of the Index: then advancing frowards, or backwards, upon the line C. F. and viewing with your eyes from the end of the Staff, each end of the cross movable, so that a true line may go to A. and to B. then measure the distance of C. and F. and that shall be the half of the distance A. B. But if the place be inaccessible that you cannot approach near enough to make a right Angle, as in C. then shove up the cross rule two points on the Index, and fall back into the point D. and as before, bend your visual rays towards A and B. setting there a mark in D. then once more shove up the Cross rule a point on to the Index, than again retreat back upon the line C D E just to the point E, there taking your sight again towards A. and B. then measure the distance between D and E, and you shall find it the just half between A and B. by this Rule you may perform it, were it of a further distance, the figure belonging to this discourse follows on the next page.  
A second way to take a distance inaccessible; Let it be the distance A B, that is to be taken, and that B is the nearest place that can be approached; you must therefore stick down a Mark at the point B, and retire directly backwards towards C, and count the distance between D and C, and there stick down another Mark in C, then retire directly to the place F, counting your paces to the just number found between B and C, there also stick down a third mark; then taking your Instrument, view into the Points B and C, either putting up or pulling down the Crosse-rule upon the Index, as you shall see it meet: your Instrument being set fit, without any more removing the Rule, go from D towards F, and in your going, have a regard in what place your sight doth agree with the point A and C. So that you may arrive at the point E, 
The Demonstration of this proposition is grounded upon the second and fourth Proposition of 6. of Euclid.  and not otherwise; at which place stick down another mark: then let the distance be measured between the two observations D E, and that shall be the just distance you desire to know, between A and B. View the Figure following.  
The third may take a distance by the Jacobs-Staffe at one place; as suppose we should take the distance A B, the which is not to be approached unto no● to be 〈◊〉 upon the Line K C, and that we must work only upon that Line. We must f●●●t take a right Line as K C, where must be placed a mark parallel to the Line A B, the mark being placed in K, then retiring back to the point D, taking your sight by your instrument towards B and K, by the two extremes of the movable 〈◊〉 G H, then leaving your instrument so fitly placed without varying of the Rule, leaveing a mark in D, you must retire back again towards C, until you come to such a distance that your visual lines accord in A, 
The Demonstration of this Proposition, is grounded upon the 29 and 33 Proposition of the first of Euclid.  and K, being arrived at the point C. and not otherwise, and there place another mark; then measure the distance between C and D, and the same breadth you find the distance between C and D to be of, the like shall be between A and B, which is equal to C D. View the Figure following, by the help of your Compasses you shall find the truth of it.  
We might have proceeded further, to have shown how to have taken any height or distance by the Compass of proportion by the way of Sines, Tangents, and Secants; but herein I should be tedious, desiring the courteous Reader to be content with these Collections, Rules, and Demonstrations, which I hope will be acceptable to the ingenuous: as for others, the hurt I wish them is, they were bound to take the same pains to amend them, that I have taken to fit them for their Service.    

THE ART OF CONVEYING LETTERS OUT OF A FORT, DESCRIBED. SECT. V.  

CHAP. LIII.  
IN regard the secret conveying of Letters is of great consequence in the time of War, I have thought it very necessary to discover such secret ways, as have formerly taken effect; and likewise, some new ways in writing of Letters whose secrecy cannot possibly be discovered, the use and knowledge whereof may bring a double conveniency to Soldiers. First, in making them cunning to interpret and discover an Enemy's Letters and intentions. Secondly, in causes of extremity to make use in conveying such Letters, as they conceive may be most prevalent, and difficultest for the Enemy to discover, if they should be surprised. For great inconvenience attends the surprising of a Letter, if the Enemy should understand the contents of it; as was well seen by Claudius Nero, interpreting Hasdrubals Letter directed to his Brother Hannibal, to meet him at Vmbra to join both their powers together, for the subversion of the Romans; presently upon the intercepting and reading it, he left his fellow Consul in the night unknown to Hannibal, and with 6000. Foot and 1000 Horse, came to Livius, another Roman Consul, who lay to intercept Asdrubal, coming from the Mountains into Italy; and there joining force with his, gave battle to Asdrubal, in the fight overcame him and slew him, before ever Hannibal knew of his being in Italy. Thus was Hannibal brought to distress, by the knowledge of the Contents of a Letter, whereby time and opportunity was taken to fight: the consideration of which, hath made me larger in this discourse following.  
Paradine in his History of our times writeth; That when as Rhodes was besieged by the Turk, a Friar being treacherous in the Town, made show of careful looking to the Watch, and finding his fit opportunity, shot a Letter from the Walls bound about an Arrow into the Enemy's Camp, whereby he gave them adverstisement in what estate the City stood.  
Hystiaeus desiring to write to Aristagoras, did shave the head of one that was his trustiest Servant, and wrote upon the Skull-skin the scope of his mind in certain brief Characters, than kept him in his house until the hair was grown as thick as before; then sent him to Aristagoras, willing that he should cause his hair to be clipped close at his first arrival: by this he understood his friends intents.  
Some Philosophers, and others of great insight in the hidden qualities of the Magnes-stone; Have recorded how two friends may discourse upon any subject, although they be a thousand miles distant: the manner to perform it is thus. Take two pieces of round Boards being smoothed, about the bigness of the top of an hourglass, upon these must be glued a piece of clean paper, which being done, a Circumference must be drawn on either of them, and the Letters of the Crosse-row being set down distinctly a pretty distance a sunder round the said Circumference, of each of them. Then after the manner of a Sundial, there must be a Steele-needle placed in either of them, of one length and weight, these Needles must be touched with the Magnes-stone both at one instant; your Friend is to have one of these instruments, the other to remain with yourself; the just time of the day being appointed when the discourse should begin, you must with your finger direct the Needle to such Letters, one sensibly after another, for the making up a word, then pauze so long as you think he may well write it down; then removing the Needle again to those Letters, which do spell such words as your mind may be understood, and as you remove your Needle, so voluntarily will your Friend's Needle point at the same Letters, whereby you may discourse what you please. Viginerius in his Annotations upon Titus Livius 1316. Column of his first Volume, doth report that a Letter may be read through a Stone-wall three foot thick, by this only device.  
Harpagus writeth to Cyrus concerning the treason of King Astyages, having cunningly unboweled a Hare, put his Letter therein, and after he had ingenuously sowed it up again, delivered it with the Nets to one of his Huntsmen, the faithfullest of all his household, and he carried it to King Cyrus.  
Frontinus, Lib. 3. Chap. 13. Many (saith he) being desirous in actions of War to send their Letters missives secretly, whereby their friends may know their minds, and yet to avoid all means of discovery, have written within the Scabbards of their swords, and sent them as acceptable presents.  
Machi●vel in his Art of War makes mention, how a Captain in a besieged Town: may cause his friends to understand his mind; the manner of acting it is thus. He that desires to relate his mind, must write his whole scope down in paper first; and holding it in one of his hands, and a Torch or two Torches in the other hand▪ Likewise, taking the advantage of a high Steeple or Tower, and the opportunity of a dark night, whereby the Lights may be further seen by his friend, that should observe the same; (wherefore having Ink, Pen, and Paper ready) and for the better understanding how it should be performed, take notice of the Letters of the Crosse-row, how they are placed, that you may discern how the Lights shall describe every several Letter for the making up a word.  

A B C D E F G H I K L  
This part of the Crosse-row with one light.  
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11   

M N O P Q R S T V W  
This part of the Crosse-row with two lights  
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10   
Now observe that all the Letters of the first Division of the Crosse-row, are to be demonstrated with one light; As for example. If you would Copy down the Letter A, you must hold up one Light but once, if you desire he should copy down B, you must show one light twice, likewise C, one light is to be shown thrice, and so of the rest▪ as the Figures underneath the Letters will guide you.  
The second part of the Crosse-row beginning at M, is to be demonstrated with two lights once N, with two heights twice, O with two lights thrice, and so of the rest, as the figure underneath each Letter shows how many times you must hold up your Light to demonstrate such a Letter.  
Suppose I would have my friend Copy down the word Man, M, being the first Letter of the second part of the Crosse-row, must be signified with two lights showed once, then obscuring the lights until you think he hath copied it down; next you must show one light once which signifies A, then obscuring the Light as before, you must next show two lights twice which signifies N, being the second Letter of the second part of the Crosse-row; the word being finished, you must obscure the Light twice as long as you did it for a Letter; otherwise, a Letter cannot be distinguished from a Word, nor a Word from a Letter; by this you see the word Man, signified by the help of the Light: and by this device your friend may understand your mind being a mile off.  
If you desire to let your Friend, understand your secrets so that they should not be discovered, take a whole sheet of Paper, and with Pen and Ink write upon one side some formal Letter of discourse, far from the matter you intended to participate in secret to your Friend, which being finished, turn the Leaf over, and with the juice of an Onion or Leman, write your secrets between the Lines written with ink; your Friend knowing the secret of it, will read it against the fire-light, or putting it into water.  
Demoratus desiring to make known to the Lacedæmonians, how King Xerxes was armed, and prepared for his journey against Greece, did write the counsel of the King in small Tablets of wood, which he covered over with wax; and in that manner sent them to the Lacedæmonians, they taking off the wax, read all the Contents thereon written.  
●ontius likewise reports, that Pachorus sent Letters in a Nosegay of Violets to his beloved Lucretia, likewise he wrapped letters in Balls of wax, and threw them in at his Mistress' Window.  
One of the surest ways to write a Letter, which is not possible to be read, but by him that is to receive it and knows the device, is in this kind to be performed; First, you must have two flat Rulers, three or four inches broad, and half a foot long, they must be both of a breadth, to a hair's breadth, then take a sheet of clean Paper, and cut it out into narrow pieces like your smallest Tape, then with mouth-glew fasten the ends together, and wind it even about the Rule, giving the end you begin to write at a privy mark, then write your secrets upon the Paper, either in Letters or Characters, which being unwound from the Rule, can never be possibly brought together to be read, unless it be wound about your Friend's Rule, whereby he may understand your mind.  
There is a most excellent way to write, so as it is impossible to be understood, which is performed after this manner; Take two half sheets of Paper, and Rule them one upon the other, so as the Lines may be of equal distance, then take your Penknife, and just upon the Lines cut through both the half sheets of Paper a Loophole, so broad and long as a man may write a word through it; then a pretty distance from that hole in the same line, and after the same manner, cut another; thus doing through the whole Paper in convenient distances one from the other; this being done, let your friend keep one of these papers, and yourself the other, and when you intent to write your secrets, lay this paper upon a clean sheet, and write your mind through those holes, which being done, take off the paper, and with your Pen write some other circumstance in the line between word and word, which may alter the sense, and make it more obscure; this being sent to your Friend, so soon as he placeth his Paper with the holes over it, he may read through the holes your intentions, and without this it will seem impossible ever to make sense of it.  
Further, you may take notice of certain Characters whereby a man may express his mind freely, and secretly, to his friend; the manner how to perform it follows.  
First, you are to observe the fashion of each Character, whose property is to demonstrate the Letter that stands within it, as you may perceive by the first which hath a standing in it, and represents the Letter a. Likewise hath b in it, and represents the letter b; and so of the rest. Further, you must take notice, that the Characters of the first figure are without any pricks; the Characters of the second Figure, hath to each of them one prick, as which represents k. and represents l, the third Figure hath to each Character two pricks, as represents t. represents u As for example; If you would write this word Acknowlidg in Characters, ●●●●●●●●●● This kind of writing cannot possibly be understood, if it were writ upon the Paper wound about the Rule, as before is showed.  
We may likewise write without ink, that it may not be seen nor read, unless the Paper be wet with a kind of water prepared for the same purpose; To perform this, you must take some Vitriol and powder it finely, then temper it with fair water in a clean thing, when it is dissolved you may take a Pen and write what you please, and it cannot be read, except you draw it through water, wherein some powder of galls hath been infused, and so it will show is black as if it had been written with ink.  
Further, we may take the yelke of a newlaid Egg, and grind it upon a Marble with fair water, so as you may write with it; having ground it on this wise, then with a clean Pen dip into it; and draw what Letters you please, upon fair white Paper or Parchment, then being through dry, black all the Paper or Parchment over with ink, and let it also dry on; afterwards you may scrape it with a knife, and all the Letters you wrote with the yelke of an Egg will be fair and white; those that knows not the devise will take it to be a blurred Paper.  
There is likewise a most excellent way to send Letters by wild Pigeons out of a beleaguered Town; the manner to perform it is thus; When you suspect a Fort shall be beleaguered, take diverse old Pigeons, from such a place as you intent to send your Letter to, which being kept in a Basket, and let loose with a Letter fastened about the neck of it, she will speedily ●lee home; where he that knows the mystery of it, may take the Pigeon, whereby he shall understand his Friends intentions; This shall suffice for the secret conveying of Letters.    

THE ART OF CONVEYING A MINE UNDER A FORT. SECT. VI  

CHAP. LIIII.  
How to conduct a Mine under ground to blow up a bulwark.  
THis kind of undermining hath been very Anciently used both by the greeks, 
Note, the Trench is to be made 7 foot in height, and 5 foot in breadth.  and Romans, and of late days by the Hollander, whereby they have much annoyed their Enemies, and blown up their Outworks, yet many times it proves dangerous to the Pioniers, if they be not careful to sustain the earth over their heads with props and boards of two inches thick; if the ground be moist and full of Springs, a gutter with a descent must be made that the Water may run to some lower evacuation; if that cannot be, a Well at the month of the Mine must be made for a receptacle for all the Springs to run into, and Pumps and forcers are to be set sufficient to mount the Water.  
There are four principal causes to impeach the working of a Mine; first, the ill stopping of the Forne; 
4. things that hinders the effectual working of a Mine.  secondly the weakness of the sides by Countermines or Caverns; thirdly by failing of the Train through moisture or ill contriving; fourthly, the most important is, that the Frame whereon the Barrels stand be not placed too low, as under the level of the entrance, which it must ever exceed, because the quality of fire is ever to ascend.  
Now for the conducting of this Mine, their are diverse circumstances to be considered; First, the distance from the place you intent to sink your Mine, to the Wall or bulwark you intent to blow up; Secondly, whether the ground be rising or declining towards the object; Thirdly, whether there be any Rocks or Ponds which may hinder the direct carrying your Trench to the place assigned: These circumstances being considered, there are diverse Instruments to be used in the orderly conveying of them;  
As first, the quadrant or jacobs-staff to take the distance; Secondly, the Mariner's Compass, (if a fitter instrument cannot be had) by this you must observe in what point of the Compass the place you intent to Mine unto stands, from the place you intent to break ground first; than you must have a level by which you may see how the ground riseth or declines, and accordingly be guided, so that you work not yourself too far out of the ground, nor too deep in.    

THE DUTIES OF SOLDIERS IN GENERAL, BOTH IN FORT AND FIELD. SECT. VII.  

CHAP. LV.  
The duties of Soldiers, both Gentlemen and Senteries, generally discoursed of.  
NOw before we proceed any further, it seems to me convenient to take a Survey of the duties, and compliments every Soldier is to be fitted with; wherein I shall be somewhat large, in regard I must handle two subjects (Viz.) Valour, and Obedience, being things most requisite for a Soldier to understand; and I hope this discourse shall teach every man how to be qualified, and bear the honourable name of a Soldier, well beseeming a generous person of that Noble quality; And as in a great building there are several Pieces fitted to such places, as they shall be used in; The like course I intent to take, to fit and show every Soldier and Officer their duties, to fit them for the weighty employments of war; 
Four principles each Soldier should ground his worth on.  Wherefore they must ground their obedience, valour, and noble deserts upon these four principles following; First, to show their Magnanimity and forwardness to the uttermost of their powers, to the last breath and drop of blood, in the defence of true Religion. Secondly, we are tied in a strict bond of obedience, to seek, gain, preserve, and defend, the honour of our King. Thirdly, we have all a share and real interest in the defence of our Country, our lives, lands, wives, children goods, which are as goads to prick us forwards to trample upon all miseries, and to level all oppositions that should seek the ruin of our Land. And fourthly, for the better performance of the precedent principles; every man, of what degree and quality soever, must and aught to be diligent, and careful to learn the art of War; Whereby we may not only be equal in skill and judgement to our Adversaries, but also to exceed and transcend them, so that our Valour, Obedience, and Policy, may be antidotes, sufficient to qualify, and reprocusse the venomous treachery, and subtle actions of the Enemy. And to move people to be in love with this most necessary profession, let them take notice how very mean men of birth, have been jaded with Honours and Riches gained by their prowess, and valiant performances, as Caius Mazzius, Valentinan, Maximinus, Nicholas Pichinino, and diverse others that were of base birth.  
In the first place, let a Soldier's resolution be truly, and sincerely to serve God; keeping a quiet conscience within their breast, which otherwise will gnaw at the roots of valour, and undermine all resolutions, wherefore a just and righteous conversation ought to be a Soldier's companion, for his life is daily in danger.  
And for our obedience to our King and Officers, that are in authority under him, we may learn even of the brutish Turk, as Pietro Bizari hath recorded in his History, the marvellous obedience that those enumerable Armies, honour their God and King withal, they being in their warfare so just and strict, that they would not transgress their Edicts in war, 
The obedient behaviour of the Turks in their wars.  nor abuse one another, when their Armies consisted of 400000 Soldiers, yet not one of them durst transport a woman for his delight, but contenting themselves with mean diet, (as Alexander's Army did) who in a Famine were constrained, throughout their Army to eat bread made of Roots and Herbs, they banished Wine or any delicacy that might effeminate them; And this mighty Army of the Turks were so well governed, that no quarrels, mutinies, nor distractions was ever seen, nor heard through the whole Army, but low and soft speeches; Always both evening and morning recommending themselves, their safeties and prosperous success of their actions to their God; The consideration of this should make us that are Christians, if not surpass, yet equal them in such laudable actions.  
In a Soldier is required six special virtues, 
Six special virtues required in a Soldier.  as namely obedience, which is a duty both to God, and to Kings duly to be administered: and as a learned Gentleman hath demonstrated Authority, in the resemblance of diverse Pictures, as the principal in authority, whose commission from God is very large, he is therefore pictured or portrayed, amply and fully, from the crown of the head, to the sole of the foot, in token of his great Sovereignty.  
The next in authority is drawn but to the middle, his Commission being but limited, having but part of authority.  
The last is portrayed but with a face only, 
An Illustration of Authority, by the draughts of Pictures.  or visage of a man drawn to the neck, his commission being of the meanest extent; Yet all these, though they have not the ampleness that the principal Picture hath, yet they bear the face of it, and so ought to be honoured and obeyed; 
How Soldiers must be obedient to th●r Officers, be they of never so low a degree.  So that Soldiers must be circumspect in obeying all those that have but the face of authority, so far as their Commission extends, in as due and obsequious manner, as those in higher authority; for the meanest Officer in a private Band, resembles the authority of the greatest General.  
The next thing that is to be attributed to the honour of a Soldier, is silence, and that is to be taken in a very large sense, but intending brevity, I will be concise.  
First, Soldiers are to be silent in the times of their exercise, that the words of Command may be understood, which are delivered by their Officers.  
Secondly, they are to be silent upon their Guards and Watches, lest any Enemy discover any thing by them.  
Thirdly, they are to be silent in the execution of any assaults, which are to be made in the night, lest the Enemy discover the design, and prevent it.  
Fourthly, they are to be silent, when Authority commands any one Regiment, Division, or private Company in the Army, to give an assault, or onset, they are not to murmur and cavil, as if they were the men appointed for the slaughter, as the Frenchmen did before the City of Antwerp, whereby the whole enterprise was frustrated; But Soldiers ought rather to take it as the greatest honour to be employed upon any onset; for indeed no wise man can think the General doth it upon a spleen, in regard every Regiment, throws the Dice upon the Drums head, and as his chance falls, so he is to take his fortune.  
Fifthly, a Soldier is to be silent in all adversity, as when penury, Famine, wounds, or if pay grows short (if the General cannot help it) these things happening in an Army, every man ought to lay his hand on his mouth, and wisely to bear the affliction and cross, otherwise confusion would soon betide an Army, as appeared by Duke Albert at the Siege of Ostend, he being in some wants, both of money and victuals, some few foul-mouthed fellows, raised a Mutiny, so that 2000 of his Soldiers fled to the Enemy, and had like to have confounded his designs; so that a Soldier in all his ways and carriages, must have that ornament of silence never wanting.  
The next thing required in a Soldier, is to be secret in all his ways and actions, fearing lest he should disclose any thing which might be advantageous to the enemy; as many times when Soldiers have been taken prisoners by the enemy, they have out of a base cowardly fear revealed what they knew concerning the state of their own Army, which many times hath proved obnoxious unto them.  
The next thing required in a Soldier is Sobriety, which is a virtue that makes a Soldier's honour to shine most bright, and advanceth him into the stirrup of preferment; for drunkenness is such a Lethargy in a Soldier, which brings present confusion and death to himself, and utter ruin to a whole Army.  
The next thing which should adorn a Soldier, is Hardiness; and this is to be taken in a double sense; viz. Hardy in manly carriages and performances, and likewise, hardy to endure and undergo any misery or pains that accompanies the Wars.  
Lastly, every Soldier is to be girt with Truth and Loyalty; not only to his Prince, but to all in authority, even to the meanest in Office; this Truth is such a virtue, and that it exceeds the capacity of man to discourse of it, it is such a precious jewel, that neither promises, gifts, affections, nor hopes of preferment can undermine; and likewise no torments, threats, or miseries, are able to make Truth and Loyalty change that unchangeable colour, which duty and affection hath died it in. This makes Soldiers ever bound to obey the Commandments of Superiors, and Superiors likewise are to love and embrace such deserving Soldiers; And further, if Soldiers desire to be prosperous and to attain to honours, let them be chaste and honest in their living, refraining all sensuality, and avoiding all occasions which might seduce them to that vice; for those that give themselves that base liberty, are ever infected with cowardice, and are most fit to attend upon that lascivious General Sardanapalus, whose pastime it was to exercise himself with Queans, in all base postures of dalliance.  
Hanibals Army, by woeful experience, knew what it was to be lulled in the pleasures of women, having been Garrisoned but one Winter in that delicious Town of Capua, the edge of their valours, and their steely hardiness, was softened to poor base cowardly dispositions; so that Marcus Marcellus took his opportunity to conquer them.  
Further, Soldiers must be obedient in every respect unto those in authority over them, although such Officers should be infected with any notorious vice; as very few but have been blemished in one kind or other. As Cyrus was cruel, covetous, and miserable, yet obeyed and beloved of his Soldiers; in the same kind was Cambyses and Marcus Cato; also Marcus Antonius swom in his Dalliances, Gluttony, and Riotousness, yet his Soldiers would have suffered themselves to have been crucified, to have done him any grateful service; and the reason was, indeed his excellent way of justice, which he caused to be administered duly and daily in his Army; this did work upon his Soldiers more than his defects in virtue could infect them. And indeed, it is very requisite for all Commanders to beware of giving ill examples, and to be chary how they do or speak any thing, that hath but the shadow of unseemliness; For as one says well, Multa sunt honesta factu quae sunt turpia visu; 
Plato in lib. 1. de Legib.  There are three principal parts in the body of Man; wherein are lodged the three principal powers of the Soul; Concupiscence in the Liver, Anger in the Heart, and Reason in the Head, as being the Citadel; in like manner, there are three several virtues that do command and govern them; Sobriety or Temperance to oversway Concupiscence, Courage against Anger in the Heart, and Wisdom in thinking and judging with reason.  
But here I must take an occasion to speak of our Trained Soldiers, which are or should be fitted for a defensive War; they do not consider how deeply every man is interessed in it, for if they did, our yeomandrie would not be so proud and base to refuse to be taught, and to think it a shame to serve in their own Arms, and to understand the use of them; were they but sensible, that there is not the worth of one penny in a Kingdom well secured, without the due use of Arms, and that the Gospel, which is the Garland of our Kingdom, cannot prosper and flourish but under the shadow of a sword: This should encourage all Gentlemen and Yeomen to be forward in the practice of Martial Discipline, I am certain we can find times large and sufficient to negotiate trifles, and to hunt after our own pleasures, solacing ourselves in vain delights, which produceth naught but folly, and ends in grief; half that time, and charge so ill spent, would make us expert; and gai●● us honour; for as one truly saith, that our times are consumed, either Male agendo, Nihil agendo, vel Aliud agendo; either in doing naughtiness, or nothing, or impertinences; and by this means the principal is neglected.  
And because that people are ready to make their excuses, to be spared from serving in their Arms, either for their youth as being too young, or for their age, as being too old; to decide this question, we will borrow the opinion of the ancient Warriors, and as Caius Gracchus, one of the Consuls of Rome, instituted a decree that none should be exercised in Arms under 17 years of age. Which questionless is a fit time for the inition of young Soldiers, having more aged to sort with them, for they prove the best and ablest Soldiers, that profess the use of Arms from their youth.  
And whereas some imbellicke fellows holds the opinion that forty years is too late to receive them into the Wars, they are deceived: for a man is of ability to do good service at 50. years and upwards. Besides, their wisdom and judgements are more settled; and indeed, your Romen would not admit of a Commander, unless he were forty or fifty years of age: But some may object, that nature is decayed in this last age, men's strengths are not as formerly they have been? To this I answer. That the world waxeth old, yet not in post-haste; although Sensim, & sine Sensu, it is soft and fair, and by degrees insensible; as in reading Hackwels' Apology you may find sufficient satisfaction to confute this Objection.  
And as Crinitus in his Seventh Book de Honesta Disciplina, reports of Terentius Varro; from the authority of Discorides, a great ginger: That the Egyptians, who took especial care by the embalming of dead bodies, and by their witty reasonings, found out how the utmost age of Man was confined, taking their estimate from the weight of the heart; which every year receives the increase of two dams, until 50 years be expired; after which period, it decays yearly two dams▪ until fifty more be expired: So that by this, it should be fond for any man to plead insufficiency, unless at the least 50 years were passed.  
Likewise, we find in Demosthenes; that the State being in danger, men of 45 years of Age and upwards, did tug at the Oars; and certainly, a man at 50 and upwards is of more sufficiency to do service, than youth at or under 17: As in the second Punic Wars they made choice of, as Livy reports; Tum decretum ut Tribuni plebis ad populum ferrent, ut qui minores annis 17 Sacramento dixissent, iis perinde stipendia precederunt, ac si 17 annorum aut majores milites facti essent; It was decreed that the Tribunes should tell the people, that such as being under 17 years of Age, and had taken their military Oath, should in like sort receive their pay, as if they had been full 17 or past; but the hopeful age for performance, is between 20, and 50 years, because strength, gravity, wisdom, and experience, at such years, hath a corrival in managing the actions of men; King Edward the fourth, was Conqueror in 8 or 9 several Battles, before he was 41 years old. Likewise, Alexander the Great, had in a manner conquered the known world, at 33 years of his Age.  
I confess, Nature is sooner perfect and ripe in some men, than in others; and likewise, decays sooner in some constitutions than in others; for if Strength be not the comfort of Age, and Wit the grace of Strength; and Virtue the guide of Wit, in all Soldiers, they are not to be allowed of, either young or old; for Strength without Wit is dangerous, Wit without Virtue hurtful and pernicious; so likewise, Age without Strength is but tedious. Therefore Commanders ought to be of a prime judgement in making choice of such Soldiers as are likely to prove serviceable. And in regard our Weapons are of a diverse Nature, as Pike and Musket; it is to be observed, that Nature hath framed men fit in stature and qualities to use them The tallest and ablest men, aught to be trained up to manage the Pike, the men of meaner stature are to serve in Muskets; and to enable them the better, every man from his youth should exercise themselves in manlike actions, which might make them hardy, settling their joints, and breeding strength; so that in a short time their Armour and Weapons would seem very easy and light.  
Likewise Soldiers must be very careful to observe their Ranks and Files, and especially in time of Battle, taking notice that upon all occasions they must make their Leaders place good, if he should chance to be slain before him; for if the Front of the Battle be not kept complete, the en●my will soon ruin it: The consideration of which, caused Manlius Torq●●tus for example to posterity to put his Son to death, because contrary to command he observed not his Ranks.  
Likewise, no Officer nor Soldier ought to go beyond his Commission, although a Conquest might ensue; the reason is, because none may trench upon the jurisdiction of Authority, and also in regard, for the most part, a thousand times more mischief may ensue than good possibly can, which made Posthumu● 〈◊〉 use martial Law against his Son Aulus Posthumus, at his return from his conquered Enemy.  
If an Army be so fortunate as to gain a Conquest: so many as are appointed for the execution of the victory, must be diligent in the execution; and not to fall to pillaging, whereby the Enemy may take an opportunity to rally his broken forces and overthrow you.  
It were very good for Soldiers to practise all kind of Weapons, and to be singular in the use of them. Likewise Soldiers must be very perfect in the diverse beats of the Drum; they ought to be very expert in swimming, by reason many exploits are to be achieved by it, and the lives of many Soldiers saved by it. They should use themselves to carry heavy burdens, that they may be the fitter to carry provision in a March, and to carry earth up the Trenches without wearisomeness; for a Soldier must look to be exposed to all manner of toil, upon occasions of necessity; In consideration whereof, the worthy Commanders of ancient times 〈◊〉 choice of Country labouring fellows to be their Soldiers, because they could endure pains and hardiness, rather than out of Cities and Towns, for such are fittest to be Horsemen.  
Soldiers are further to take notice, that in Garrison or in a settled Camp, their duty is upon all occasions (not making any delay) at the sound of the Drum, to repair to his Colours, with his complete Arms be it to answer an Alarm, or to relieve the Watch; where no Soldier, of what birth or degree soever, should not take it in scorn, or hold it a disgrace to stand Sentinel, until such time as he understands himself better; and then being a Gentleman of a Company, he must not refuse to be instructed and taught by the meanest Officer; it must be far from any Soldier to disobey any of his Officers precepts, and especially, such as are given in charge by the higher Authority; neither to contemn or slight the Martial laws, lost death be his reward.  
Soldier's must be very wary how they undervalue their Officers, especially their General; or how they speak invectively, or reproachfully of any service or design that hath not taken effect.  
Soldier's must rather choose death then cowardly to run from their colours, neither must they have any converse with the enemy, either by speech, sending or receiving of Letters, were it from his dearest Friend without the General's Licence. A domestic Traitor is a Monster amongst enemies; and let such a one know that never any prospered. 
There may be use made of the Treason, but the Traitor shall ne'er be trusted.  For as Queen Elizabeth once said in the like case, that she would make use of the treason, but never trust the Traitor.  
Now lastly, we must take notice of each Soldiers particular duty, both in Garrison, and in field, as the next Chapter shall declare.   

CHAP. LVI.  
The duties both of Officers, and Soldiers in Garrison.  
EVery Fort or Garrison hath a Governor, a Major, and a Captain of the Watch, these are the principallest in authority; Next, there are diverse other Captains and Officers, both of horse and foot, with their Companies to each belonging; of the duties of each I will discourse briefly of, and I thought it fitting to place this discourse here, rather than in the end of the tract of Fortification. The duty of a Governor is to be vigilant and careful, that all Officers and Soldiers under his jurisdiction, 
The duty of a Governor of a Garrison.  do punctually perform their duties, and where default is, according as the offence is to punish; he is to have daily intelligence of the enemies proceedings, which he must procure, either by sending out parties of Foot, or certain Horse, or else by the Country people; he is to see all the Works, and Fortifications about the Town preserved, and kept; and what defences else he in his wisdom shall think necessary to be raised, the Garrison must endeavour to do it; what out-Watches, either of Horse or Foot, he sees sit to be placed upon places convenient for the prevention of the enemies secret approaches, he must command it, and his Major must see it executed, he is the chief judge in place of judicature, only assisted by the chief Officers, who have each of them a voice, and the Governors stands for two; by which means a Malefactor is according to his demerit punished or freed, according as most voices shall agree upon; by his authority he may commit the chiefest Officer for any misdemenour, and cause him to be brought to his trial. By his care and wisdom all things are to be managed; his Major, 
The office of the Mayor of a Fort.  is his eye, mouth, and hand. His duty is to see the Watches set, to see the Gentlemen of the round do their duty; the Sentenells stand at their postures, the Ports well guarded, he is to receive no Troops into the Fort, but first he must go to them with a sufficient guard of Pikes and Muskets; he is to receive the patent from the Captain of those troops, which if he finds it to be the Prince's hand and Seal, he is immediately to acquaint the Governor withal, and by his permission to conduct them in; if there be diverse Companies, that Company which first enters the Town hath the preeminence, the rest inccessively in order, and so accordingly they are to take their turns to watch, the Major is to give to every Officer his billet for his convenient lodging, and the like to every Soldier. At the Drums beating for the relieving of the Watch, the Major is to have a billet for each several guard, which being put into a hat, 
A Corporal is to order his Watch by the burning of a piece of Match so many inches for an hour.  one Sergeant of each several Company, or in his absence a Corporal shall draw one of those Lots or billets, and accordingly is to conduct his squadron to that guard which is specified in the billet, and there he is to set out his Senteryes in convenient places, the Corporal hath the chief command of that squadron, and is each hour to relieve his Sentries, if his squadrant be complete, otherwise he is to order their standing according to the strength of his squadron. The Major is likewise to see the Ports shut, and the keys brought to the Governor, he is to receive the watchword from the Governor, and after Port-shutting, he is to deliver it secretly in the ear of every Sergeant, who immediately must carry it to their Officers.  
Every morning the day being perfectly broke, 
The Mayor by the Governors' commandment is to see every Captain exercise his company twice aweeke at least in the Summer time, and the Squadrons upon the guard in the Wint●● every night.  and the Sun up, the Major is to come to the Captain of the Watch, and cause his Drum to beat, than the Captain of the Watch, and all the Gentlemen of the guard, with the guard of Burghers or Citizens, are to troop to each Port, and stand ready upon their postures; the Major is to go out at a wicket, with a small guard to discover if the enemy should be near, the coast being clear, he sends out certain Horse a mile or two, fearing lest the Enemy should lie in ambush; the Ports being opened, the Squadrons are brought thither to guard, there is one Sentinel to be placed without the Ports at the Turnpike, who is to suffer none to pass, unless well known; there is likewise a Centrie to be placed upon the Portcullis, who is suddenly upon occasion to let them fall, he is to let fall the middlemost first, because than no Cart, nor Wagon can be brought to hinder the fall of the rest. Always at twelve a clock the Major must see all the Ports shut for an hour or more until dinner time be passed, if he finds any Soldier negligent in passing upon his duty, whether by day or night, he must imprison him; the easiest punishment is bread and water two or three days, or the strappado, or present death; He is to suffer no Cart, Wagon, nor Boat to arrive at the Ports of the Town, but he must gauge them with Iron Spits, fearing lest the enemy should be hid in them. If any party of Soldiers should be appointed to be sent out upon any service towards the Enemy, the Mayor must cause the Ports to be shut a long time after their departure, fearing lest s●me intelligence might be conveyed from the Town to the Enemy, which might mar their design, but for the most part they are sent out in the night to prevent all surmises.  
If the Enemy should send his Drum or Trumpet for a Prisoner, or upon some Ambassage, he is to have a note written, and sewed on to his h●t, what his business is with the Governor's hand to it, he is not to come within Musket shot of the Town, but he must beat, or sound a parley; to whom the Mayor must go with a guard, and blindfold him, and so conduct him into the Town first to the Governor, and then to the Prison; where being courteously used, and his business dispatched, he is again to be blinded, and conducted out of the ports; The like is to be done to any prisoner that is brought in, lest they should discover the weakness of the Town; every Sunday, and Holiday in the afternoon all the Summer long, the Mayor is to see the companies in complete armour about five a clock to stand in parrado in the chiefest street, the Governors' Company first, than the eldest Captain, etc. The Companies being viewed by the Governor and the Mayor, they are to march every Company to his guard, and the Captain of the Watch to the round-house, which is a guard so termed, because the Gentlemen of the Round, watch there.  
The duty of the Captain of the Watch is to see his guard complete, and towards evening shut; He by himself, or the Mayor with him, and a sufficient guard are to walk round the Walls of the Fort, and every Corporal is to come to him from his guard, and give him the word, whereby he understands they have the word right▪ Thus having viewed every guard, he is to return to the Round-house, and immediately is to send two Gentlemen, who are to have the word given them; With these should go a Burger or Citizen, for they watch by Companies, and have their Captain of the Watch also; every Centeries is to let these pass until they come to the guard where that Sentry is to make them stand, and not suffer them to come within him; he is to call the Corporal, who is to command one or two to attend him to them; then the Gentlemen of the round must softly give the Corporal the watchword, which if they cannot, the guard is to take them in, and not to suffer them further to pass, fearing that they should be enemies: the Gentlemen having passed by all the guards, and seen all things right; if they should hear any noise, or discover the lights of any Matches; then they must acquaint the Captain of the Watch with it at their first coming in, who must send out double rounds; and perceiving the truth must raise the Town: If any Alarm should be given, the Captain of the Watch is to keep his guard in the chief street: and every Captain, Officer, and private Soldier, at the first beat of the drum must repair to their Colours with their complete Arms and there attend the Governors' pleasure; but for the most part they are speedily to repair to that Port or guard, which their Squadron have the Watch at.  
The Captain of the Watch may commit any Soldier for his misdemeanour as well as the Governor or Major, for he is chief next the Governor for that time being; he takes his Place from the Watch setting until the Watch be relieved the next evening following.  
If any execution of Malefactors be, he must command his Guard, and such other Companies as the Major shall appoint to guard the place of Execution.  
The Captain of the Watch with the Major and his guard are to go the 〈◊〉 about the streets, to 〈◊〉 there be no abuses plotting, nor quarrel, fire, and the like, he is not to be absent from his guard: every Captain is to take his turn to be Captain of the Watch, beginning first with the Governors, than the 〈◊〉 Captain; and so in order.  
Every Company is divided into three Squadrons, if the Company be 200 strong, than they are to be divided into four Squadrons, 
In every bulwark ought to be a Corpse 〈◊〉 Guard, and over each Port, for the Soldiers to guard by night in.  and one Squadron of each Company is to watch from Sun to Sun; the rest have their freedom, unless the Enemy be at hand; then happily, half Companies or whole Companies, must watch in complete Arms.  
The Governors' Drum, with the Captain of the Watches, are to beat about the Streets to gather the Soldiers together, to cut the ice in Winter time, the Burghers and Citizens do the like; every Company hath his just allowance to cut, it is to be cut 16 or 18 foot wide, that the Enemy may be hindered to pass to the Walls.  
The Mayor is to deliver out Powder, 
The Mayor must see his store-house be filled with Ammunition and Victuals fit to entertain a long Siege.  Match, Bullets, and all kind of Tools, to the Sergeants for the use of the Soldiers, the Tools are to be returned safe again; this shall suffice at this time: Next, I will briefly discourse of the duty of Officers in the Field, and also of Soldiers.   

CHAP. LVII.  
The duties of Officers and Soldiers in the Camp or Field.  
THe duties of Officers and Soldiers in the Field or Camp, do not much differ from those in Garrison; wherefore I shall be very short in this, and then I will proceed to discourse of the particular Office of each Commander, beginning at the meanest; and so proceed to the chiefest in Authority; demonstrating every particular thing belonging to their Offices. Now by the way, observe that every Army consists of a General, lieutenant-general, Field-marshal; Treasurer, Master of the Ordnance, Serjeant Major General; These are the chief Officers of the Field, and are ●mployed daily in the Council of War with their Prince, about State-affairs; then the Troops are divided into Colonies, both the Infantry and Cavalliary, the chief whereof is the Colonel, the the Lieutenant Colonel, the Sergeant Major; these are the chiefest in command in each Regiment. Every Regiment is compounded of diverse Companies the chief of them is the Captain, the Lieutenant, Ensigne, Sergeants and Corporal●; These last, are exposed to do their duty in person, with their Companies; the other in higher authority for the most part, leave it to their inferior Officers, unless it be in times and cases of Danger.  
The Army being Encamped, the Colonel's Lieutenant of each Regiment, who bears the titular name of Captain, takes place to be the first Captain of the Watch▪ than successively according to the antiquity of the Captain: Their watch is set after the same manner as it is in Garrison, only no drum is to beat neither for the setting of the Watch at night, nor for the relieving of the Guards in the Morning, until the Drum-Majors drum beats, than all are to imitate him. The Captain of the Watch is to go no further than the Limits of his own quarters, where he is to be attended with the Gentlemen of the round, and to take the Word, as before is showed; that Night his turn is to be Captain of the Watch, the whole Company is to watch upon some convenient place by the Brest-worke before their quarters. The Serjeant-Major of each Regiment, Colonel, or Lieutenant Colonel, may walk the limits of his own Regiment. The Serjeant-Major General of the Army may ride through all the quarters of the Army, 
Note it is not above one or two Companies of a Regiment that guards in the outworks at one time.  and take the Word.  
If there be any Outworks, as Redouts to be guarded; then the Serjeant-Major of each particular Regiment, is to give Billets to every Captain, what guards they shall keep; then accordingly the whole Company is to march to those Redouts, leaving their colours in the head of their quarters, which is to be guarded by certain Senteries appointed out of the next Company, whose duty is also to guard the quarters and Huts, that no abuses be committed. The Arms that the Captain and Ensign bears with them is a Pike, and his Armour of proof; he is to set out his Sentrye Perdues upon all passages; and likewise a Sentery within the Redout, these are to be relieved by the Sergeant or other Officers every hour or two at the most: That Company which shall come to relieve the Watch, must stand in their complete Arms, until such times as their Senteryes be placed out and the Bridge drawn up, lest the Enemy should take an advantage to fall upon them when they are in a confusion: To resist the Enemy in their work, they are to place betwixt each two Pikes a Musket; Any of the chiefest Officers in high authority may command a Guard from one Redout to another, and visit them at any season of the day or night, and are to take the Word from the Captain himself.  
Every Soldier must be very careful of giving a false Alarm, because all the whole Army will be disturbed and presently in Arms: If the Enemy comes upon the Sentry perdue, he is to retreat to the next Sentry behind him, then if the Enemy seem many, they are to retreat into the Work and prepare to give them a Valley: Those Horses that watch, must be placed to keep some passage, they must send out their Horse Centryes to stand upon some way (which the Enemy must take,) their stations are to be a quarter of a mile beyond the foot; the whole Company must not move off their saddles until they are relieved.  
Those Perdues that are laid out against a besieged Town, 
Unless some trees or banks may safeguard them.  are to lie flat on their bellies because of the Enemy's nearness and continual shooting; and this shall suffice, and before I proceed any farther, I will have a more particular discourse of the obedience and valours both of Soldiers and Subjects.   

CHAP. LVIII.  
Of the due obedience, both Subjects, Officers, and Soldiers should bear to their Prince or General; with a demonstration how Mutinies and Treasons have been rewarded with infinite miseries.  
NO Kingdom so Fortunate and happy, as those where obedience flows in a clear stream; so far from the power of gusts and storms, that gentle calms are perpetuated to times, and all seasons are as Haltion days; when Subjects of all conditions, and in all respects sympathize with their Sovereign in authority to his lawful behests and commands, as the shadow imitates the body, or as the parts of the body are ready bend to observe and execute the pleasures and intents of the heart and faculties of the mind; Obedience and loyalty are the Nerves and Sinews which strengthen and unite the members of a body politic to the head, and the strongest Fortifications that Kingdoms can be defended with; These are they which are the only conquerors in War, and steadfast preservatives in Peace; these are the precious jewels which make the Crown and dignity of a King most splendent and glorious; these are the most precious Diadems that a State can be adorned with, the commanding power thereof is so potent, that in an excellent transcendency they daunt the puposes of an Enemy, forfeiting his designs; they so far strengthen the body of authority, that none of the members can possibly be infected where these Cordials are placed next the heart; without these, Kingdoms are falling into a consumption, and nothing can be expected but ruin and destruction, as may evidently be seen by taking a survey of such Histories which record the confusion of Empires and Kingdoms: And first the flourishing Romen whose hearts were elevated by their famous conquests; the whole Orb of this terrestrial World was filled with the Echoes of their resounding honours. So long as they stayed themselves upon these Diamond Rocks of obedience and loyalty; their loyalties being ready embarked to steer such courses in the streams of fidelity, that their Princes and Generals (which were their Consuls) should direct and command, by which they victoriously not only conquered their Prince's love and affections, but withal gained Cities and Countries to be in subjection to their Royal Sceptre; As Italy, and the Carthagenians, whose conquests made a fair way, for sundry other spacious possessions to be cast into the lap of Rome; they not forsaking their Generals until they had gained footing in all quarters of the earth, both in Europe, Asia, and Africa, subduing people of all conditions, as the Helvetians, Germans, Gauls, Belgians, Swissons, Neruijans, Sedunians, Veragrians, Aquittanians, and Britons; So that they made themselves to be admired of the World, that with such constancy they should persevere and trample over such eminent dangers, wearisome toils, and pinching penuries, as there indefatagable constant spirits led them through.  
But at last, the pride and ambition of those Cheifes in authority being confultiated and propped up with their infinite treasures, and vastness of their Territories, began to draw a Regency to themselves: The heat whereof, melted their loyalty and obedience into a Sea of Factions, Mutinies, and dissensions; the Waves and Billows sometimes flashed and foamed between the Nobles and Commons; Sometimes the Tribunes swelled over the Banks, and many times the Consuls prevailed: So that in Towns and Cities were light Skirmishes.  
The seed of Civil War being sown, soon sprung up like an ill weed in fertile ground, choking, and extirpating that tender precious Plant of Loyalty; they most inhumanely, like Beasts of prey, conspire the destruction of their valiant Prince they had chose their General, Caesar; which was wrought by degrees through the frets and wounds which they secretly made in the Empire, that a daily falling off from the State was exercised; until Constantine's Reign, who neither by Art nor Physic could keep it from falling into the Hectic consumption: So continuing in a decaying condition, until Augustus; In whose days the whole Monarchy sunk under the burden of their base disloyalty. They not only slighting such commandments as Authority commended to them, but altogether neglected the use of Arms, and became most degenerate spirits, made up of nothing but Mutinies, and perverse courses, 
Hist. Italy,  whereby the Barbarous Nations adjoining, made use of those times, and took their fit opportunity with advantage to invade the Romans, and brought Italy seven several times to the brink of destruction by fire and sword.  
Attila, King of the Huns, spoilt Florence, and Lombardy. Genserius, King of the Vandals, Biergus, King of the Lithuani; five, Goacer, King of the H●rulij, who drove Augustulus quite out of Italy: The Heavens in reward of their disobedience, neglects, and factions, laid the Country desolate twice in thirteen years: Sixtly, by Theodoricus King of the Goths; Seventhly, by Gundiball, King of the Burgundians; he had the pillaging of all Lombardy, and so left it to the Goths, they enjoying this perfidious Country 17 years, and had nothing to trouble them, but that they were troubled with nothing; which caused the Moss of security to grow on their backs, so that pride, and riches made them esteem themselves too great to live under the Rules and Commands prescribed by sovereignty; but grew factious and rebellious.  
Whereupon Bellisarius, and Narses, took a fair opportunity to destroy them, being a just reward for such mutinous Rebels.  
Likewise in what a blessed estate and happy prosperity did the Subjects of the house of Burgundy live in, until divisions and rebellious thoughts were hatched and nurtured: And though they were a free State of themselves, whereby they might have assumed some colour for their detractions and rebellions, yet the Heavens would not be propitious to such monsters, who were bound in Allegiance to Lewis the King of France: But they slighting that regal bond (which men and Angels honour with titles of dignity) began to conceive and project how to set a foot diverse inovations, thinking politicly the greater part would have sided with them, whereby they should have wrung themselves out of their golden fetters of Allegiance, which their base minds (delighting in charge) esteemed a heavy yoke: The Fates would not suffer their expectations to be answerable to their thoughts and wished desires.  
They having prepared an Army, and brought them before Paris; (their baseness was repaid with their own base Coin) their own Soldiers refused to be subject to their Officers, and would not be commanded by Authority, neglected altogether their duties (A long peace having worn out the stamp of Mars) they were routed and defeated by the King of France, suffering the sword to range amongst their Troops, their blood being the sacrifice which made their new atonement.  
In the Reign of Henry the First who invaded France, and prosecuted Wars many years; his Subjects and Soldiers being very loyal, trusty, faithful, and obedient unto him, that neither penury nor death could betray their fidelities which they had sworn unto him, was the chief and principal thing (adding their valours) which possessed him in most of the chief Cities, Forts, and Territories in France, whereby they had heaped up such infinite store of riches, 
Comines lib. 1. Pag. 22.  which was the immediate occasion of puffing up his Subjects and Soldiers, thinking then most arrogantly their abilities would bear them out to peek beyond the Pillar of obedience; although they very well knew it had the Herculean inscription; Nil ultra: Whereupon the Nobles began to fume, and parts taking amongst inferior Subjects, whereby their happy Peace was turned topsy turvey both in France and England; so that by degrees, that which by their loyalty and valour they had gained in France, now by their baseness and discords, melted away like Ice against the Sun.  
Then Henry the sixth Reigned in those critical days, when Samsons Foxes had swinged their fiery tails of dissension about this Kingdom, that no security could be enjoyed neither by Peer, nor poor; so that this Ratsbane of disloyalty wrought so strongly, that the murdering of three of their lawful Kings was hellishly effected.  
But mark what was their success; The vengeance of Almighty God would not be appeased, until these abominable Traitors were scourged with their own rods; They employing their disloyal malicious brains, like mad dogs to tear and devour one the other: The chief of these Rebels being the Duke of York was slain In battle, and his head smitten off; all the Nobility of the house of Warwick & Somerset were either slain in these civil broils, or by due course of Law beheaded; The Duke of Gloster most inhumanely murdered his Brother's Sons, to usurp King Edward's Crown.  
But was not the Almighty a just avenger? yes questionless; He stirred up a poor prisoner the Earl of Richmond, (who had been in durance in Britain in France) who by poor means, and altogether unexpectedly, was furnished from those parts with aid to come against England; and at his arrival gave the usurpers' battle, and ●●ue that bloody butcher.  
Thus the Almighty avenger, rewarded disloyalty, stubbing them up root and branch; as Edward at Forth was constrained to hazard his Person in six or seven bloody battles, to suppress the distempers of his disobedient Subjects, wherein the sword of vengeance cut off most of his Nobility, and much of the Comonalty slain and put to flight: Some young Noblemen made an escape into Burgundy, thinking to have been there secured from the fury of God's revenging sword; yet they were deceived, for God's justice did not only prosecute them thither, but persecuted them there with overwhelming penury, and reduced them to the greatest exigent of misery that nature could possibly undergo; as was seen by that young Nobleman the Duke of Excester, who was constrained by extreme poverty, to run (barelegged up to the ankles in dirt) after the Duke of Burgundy's train, begging an Alms for Christ's sake.  
The serious contemplation of this very one thing (a man would think) should make the hair of a disloyal, treacherous hellhound to stand upright, and that it should be a precedent of matchless misery for such future times, wherein such Vultures, and Bafilisks, and Cockatrice's should be hatched in; for did these devouring Dragons consider how in all age's God by his mighty Arm in a transcendent way, hath used the height of severity against such delinquents, they would not dare to harbour the least thought of disloyalty, no not in th●ir seeretst Closets, fearing lest the Birds of the Air should reveal it; for God will have Subjects know how he is interested and stands engaged to defend the right of Supreme authority with his right Arm; establishing and supporting such Laws and Edicts, as the Royal Majesty of a King shall constitute, being lawfully grounded upon the Laws of God, of Nature, and Nations.  
King's Prerogatives must and will swim above the infectious distempers of seditious Subjects, like the precious oil over the billows of putrified waters; and as one truly says, Lex est Sanctio, Sancta, Jubens honesta, prohibens contraria; had wisdom been the guide to those geare-braynd transgressors, they would have had a respect to the end; whereas their fancy extended no farther than the beginning; for had they fixed one eye upon the act, which is both in the sight of God and man detestable: and the other eye upon the consequence, which determines their own confusion; They would have prized obedience and loyalty, (although a severe government had been exercised over them) as the most sovereign preservative against all mortal infections that might betide a Kingdom either in War and Peace. But as Sallust: well observed, Illis quieta movere, magna merces videbatur; the baseness of people is such, that they think the very disturbances of things established to be a hire sufficient to set them on work; and as in times of Pestilence, all diseases turn to the Plague; so, in general discontents, all turns to Mutinies, Tumults, and Rebellions: And this is the Sunshine wherein an Enemy desires to make his Hay in; and they expect the best crop when their labour and tillage hath made fit to receive the seeds of Sedition and strifes, wherein they spare no cost in manuring such persons with great sums, as they shall find fit and tractable for their purposes; for neither gifts nor promises of honours and preferment shall be wanting to accomplish their ends, as was well seen by Barnavelt, who was an Annual Pensioner to the Court of Spain, whose deeds and projects are yet fresh in memory. How had they seduced those monsters of Men by their gifts and promises, to the subversion and cloudy destruction of State, King, and Nobles, had not God been propitious to our Land by a miraculous discovery; 
Daniel 2. 28.  which suits with that of the Prophet Daniel; There is a God in Heaven (says he) which revealeth secrets, and maketh known to the King what shall be.  
How had Lewis the Eleventh of France, wound in diverse of the chief Subjects of King Edward of England to be his Pensioners; he distributed 16000 Crowns a year amongst them: 
Comines.  The chief whereof, was the Lord Chancellor, the Master of the Rolls, the Lord Chamberlain, etc. These were to dissuade the King from assisting the young Lady of Burgundy; and likewise when any Ambassage came, they were to set it forwards: Though these things might seem tolerable, yet few Kings would like such familiarity; though a wise Statesman may perform wonderful good service to his King, by being inward with the Estates of another kingdom; but there must be a great deal of grace and honesty to the groundwork, for a King and State to build their confidence upon.  
In all the Histories that either I have heard or read, either divine, or profane, those Subjects never escaped unpunished, which had maliciously and wrongfully perpetrated any disloyalty to their Sovereign, 
Deut. 4. 2.  nay not amongst barbarous Nations; much rather Gods correcting hand will be known amongst Christians; 
joshua 1. 7. and 7. 13.  but that either they have perished before the act of their conspiracy, 
Pro. 30. 6.  or in the act, or after the act: The holy Scriptures make mention of diverse punishments inflicted upon the Israelitish Forces, 
Revel. 22. 18.  for their Murmurings, 
Numb. 16. 3.  Mutinies, and disobediences committed against their chief General Moses.  
Divines distinguish obedience in a double respect, as filial and legal, which holds good in the duty of a subject to his Sovereign, or to such as he shall constitute over us in the managing of public affairs; and I hope none are so devoide of reason, but will submit to what Sovereignty shall lawfully enjoin, in regard punishment attends in a readiness to be put in execution. But those are a degree nearer, who wear the true character of obedience wrapped up in a tender loving heart, fearing to displease, because love enjoins them to obey; and the frowns of their Sovereign are like needles at their hearts ever pricking, until the sunshine of his favour be regained. This was the obedience and loyalty the ancient Romans honoured their Senators withal, for their loves did flow in a freer current than their Laws and Edicts did enjoin; they were prodigal in bestowing their lives and goods (when Authority commanded) in their Country's behalf. How famous was Artillus Reg●●us that noble Consul of Rome being taken prisoner by the Carthaginians, and by them sent home to redeem diverse of their Captains which the Romans had in custody; He made a learned Oration to the Senate, letting them understand that he was old, and worn out with years, and that his zeal for the good of his Country was such, that he would not admit of the sending back those able Carthaginian Officers, 
The bound him and cut off his eyelids, and set him in a hollow tree upright, filled full of sharp nails, there continuing in horrible pain till he died.  who might do much harm to Rome, but would rather return back, and suffer a cruel death with his enemies; Further in the same Wars which the Romans managed against the Carthaginians, by the unexpertnesse of the General their whole Navy was overthrown, yet the wonderful love and loyalty of the Commons, freely demonstrating their sincerity and obedience (as a rule for Subjects in future ages) at their own proper costs and charges, built a new Fleet in all points fit for service; I would this age wherein we live, were so mindful of their loyalties and obedience, and not to mutter and repine, when Authority justly commands such a poor thing as an Annual stipend for the setting forth a Navy, for the honour and safety of our Kingdom. The Netherlanders are to be admired and commended, for setting their loves afloat above their Laws, daily tendering their lives and goods, in doing their State's service; they are so free from grumbling, or having any seditious thoughts or actions, that even voluntarily they condescend to pay an Impost out of their Meats and Drinks, towards the maintenance of their Wars, besides their patience in enduring their goods many times taken, and their houses ruined by Soldiers; they are so far from repining, that they think all well bestowed that tends to the public good; they banish desire, and will not acknowledge it an act of their obedience, the property thereof being only to look at things to come, but rather ground their actions upon Love, which points at things present. We can protest we desire his Majesty's wants were supplied; but where is the love that should command our purse-string? I say no more, let every obstinate fellow blush, and see if his desires without performance can command the advice and costly Drugs from his learned Physician, for the prevention of some eminent sickness, which the Physician by his wisdom and skill foresees, that without speedy prevention will prove an incurable destruction to his body; let him rest upon it that hath a desire, that either his body or his estate should languish.  
Let us but take a further survey of this duty of obedience, and you shall find it defective, where fear only binds, and love doth not join with it; Triplex amor, as Scholars define it; Emanans, imperatus, & elicitus; Natural love, all sensitive creatures participate in, being led by an instinct to their objects, there being a kind of necessity enforcing; as the Pismires love and care is to provide in Summer against Winter; Even so Man in the same kind guided by certain reasons, is by love transported to his object. Commanding love is, when firm reasons demonstrate some good thing fit to be beloved, and then our wills command us to affect the same; Free love is when the affections makes choice of some good thing of excellent quality, freely; and in contemplation of the goodness and privileges, that is thereby enjoyed, drives the spectators into admiration, and the circumstances that attend the actions, and demeanours of the object, begets his free love, and the prosperity and welfare that it is possessed withal, satisfieth the whole desires.  
Natural love, seeks only its own profit; but that is not here meant, nor commendable in a Subject, when he loves his Prince, only for the quiet gaining or enjoying of goods; in this a Prince is not really to return love again.  
Secondly, when a Subjects will and affections, commands love for by-respects, and ●inister ends, as to be favoured in wicked and impious courses, this of all the rest is not to be respected, but utterly rejected.  
The third kind of Love, is the true root from Whence Loyalty and obedience springs, and that is pure without by-aymes or ends, of an enargeticall and working quality, ever seeking and working such things as may bring Honour and safety to their Prince and State; Nam anima magis est ubi amat, quam ubi animat; The members of a Commonwealth, should take instructions from the Philosophers, who hold that the Parts love the being of the whole, better than itself; As for example, the water being but the fourth part of the Elements, that the great World is compounded of, ascends up to the air, that there should not be a Vaccuum or emptiness in the universe, for the Elements touch one the other, as may be further proved by a small-mouthed glass, the water contrary to the nature of it, runneth up to the air, as it is pouring out, that there may not be a void place, it prefers the good of the whole, to its own proper Centre; and so in the little world Man, when occasion of danger is offered, the hand is ever ready to defend, and preserve the head; Even so ready bend and pressed, should every member of a body politic be, to defend and preserve their Prince and State, and to administer such helps, as his necessities require with a free consent: he being our head, and all in all to us, we should, and are bound in duty to hazard all for him; For if we consider the large commission which Almighty God hath been pleased to give to his Vice-Roys upon earth, and in such a copious manner estated them in their thrones of Regency, that the sons of men never had the like privileges, as may be seen by the large Commission granted to Moses, his chief, and General over his peculiar people, where God commands him, to make him a Trumpet of silver, to assemble the people, and to remove the Camp; 
Numb. 10. 12.  It was a thing of such great importance, that in the infancy of the world, God himself did immediately by his own mouth assemble the Congregations, and directed them how, when, and where to encamp, limiting the times of their removals; But after he had made choice of a chief, to be his General over the people; he committed his care, and his office of command over to Moses, and left him ample power to go in and out before his people, as formerly he himself had done, and to take and claim such privileges as are due, from inferiors to a Majesty: Which made our Saviour Christ very forward for examples sake, to work a Miracle, rather than he would stand in contention with Caesar, he would disburse for himself and his friend, (although he might have pleaded his freedom, as being a man freeborn, or might have claimed the due to himself, as being King of Kings) but he well knew affairs of importance belonging to a State, could not be compassed without daily revenues, this made him so willingly pay his tribute, which the wisdom of Caesar had imposed upon his Subjects, for the securing of his kingdom, and especially in times of war: as our Saviour Christ drawing a Parable from the chargeableness, and dangerousness of it, wished a King first to sit down and count, before he entertains war; Whether his power and ability, that is to be understood, not only the quantity of armed men, but the quality, to sustain them with; which is Money, Munition, and Victuals; and these are to be derived from the inferior members; as they may well be paralleled to the roots of a high spreading Cedar, which draws the sap out from the earth, and by the influence of the attractive rays of Sovereign authority, forceth it up to the head; so that both blossoms and fruit may ensue; Without this neither War nor peace can be safely managed; This made David send to Nabal for relief (after he was anointed King) whereby he and his Army might subsist; And although the wisdom of Abigal diverted his intentions from shedding his blood, and destroying his goods, for his base denials; 
Lactantius.  Yet after the omnipotent hand had enlightened his dunghilly conscience, as a just reward, he gave up the ghost; Vt poena impii sit cruditio justi; Though Princes are as men before God, 
Virgil.  yet they are as Gods before men; Virgilius saith that Princes are merely by God's providence placed in the highest seat of honour, and owe equal justice to their Subjects; so ought the people to owe dutiful obedience to their Prince, 
Tertul.  in reverencing his Person, and fulfilling his commandments. Tertullian saith, he that honoureth and obeyeth his Prince, honoureth and obeyeth God; for the Prince is God's Vicegerent upon earth, and representeth amongst meant the glorious state, 
Rom. 13. 1, 2.  and high Majesty of God in heaven. And St. Paul's holy counsel was that every soul should be subject to the higher powers; for there is no power but of God and the powers that be are ordained of God: Whosoever therefore resisteth the power, resisteth the Ordinance of God; But do you think this disobedient resisting shall vanish without its due recompense? no certainly (saith St. Paul) they that are so audacious to resist, 
Proverb. 19 12▪  shall receive to themselves condemnation: For saith Solomon, The King's wrath is like the roaring of a Lion, but his favour is like the dew upon the Grass: 
Titus' 3. 1.  And in Titus, there is urged a subjection to Principalities and powers, with a due obedience; and further, exhorting Subjects to be forward and ready to act and perform every good work that shall be required.  
But how far are Subjects in all Nations swerved from this strait rule of obedience, and follow the Serpentine parallels of some factious spirits, sprung up from some self-conceits, or discontents, as there are too many in this our age, by the strength of their windy Oratory, moves the Sea of waves and billows of common people to inveigh and batter against their shores, and rocks of Authority, and to their powers ready to submerge them; And this ariseth from the curiosity of diverse Subjects of our Litigious times; who strive to soar above their own Sphere, to peep into the Arcanity of State affairs, and their fond and false commenting upon the actions and passages of those in high Authority, and according to the fancy of their distempered brains, shape to themselves improper Hieroglyphics, whereby they would demonstrate as on a stage, what Comedies or Tragedies are in their weak judgements to ensue. These are to be likened unto unskilful Astronomers, that only have heard of the operation and influence of some Stars and Planets, and in perusing their Almanac find some one to have the predominancy for that day, they presently conclude, that according to the disposition or efficatious working of the said Planet, such ill seasons, or such weather must consequently follow; they not having a respect to the Fortunate Conjunctions, and favourable Aspects that may, and doth moderate and allay the malignity of the most ominous influence (if they so shall deem it) they being ignorant of that primum mobile that fools, both Astronomers and Astrologers; 
Astra regunt homines, Sed regit astra Deus.  These are the Novelists, which (ever since there was a monarchial government) have been very pernicious, both to Generals and chief Officers of the Field, as also disturbers to the quiet of the State at home. For like unskilful Peasants that desire to pry into the Art of Navigation, and for Novelty sake repair to some promontory that looks over into the Sea, where they espy a careful Pilot well experienced in the conducting of the Vessel he had charge of; and according to his Rules steereth his course, striving might and main, to gain the wished Haven of his harbour; yet being denied the direct course, which formerly a fair wind and Tide did gently waft him in, the gusts of wind and waves of the Sea being opposite, he in his wisdom is constrained to leviere about quite from the wont Channel, and all to fetch the wind, and to gain the best advantage to sail safe by the waves and gusts, for the security of the Bark, and in this tempest if a leak chance to spring, which might endanger the Vessel and all in her; How is this careful Pilot constrained to lay her on one side, that the expert Shipwright may securely stop the leak! These simple fellows being not acquainted with such Maritine affairs, are presently conceited that this Vessel cannot but suffer shipwreck, when alas a General or Prince's greatest and insupportablest burden, pains and care is to safeguard, and defend his charge, and seek the safety of those under his authority.  
This age of the world hath hatched such a strange Brood called Novelists; these are always possessing the brains of simple people, with such strange fixions, either deifying some one man for deserts which they esteem consonant to their minds and courses, or otherwise vilifying others, and detracting from their goodness and worths, making them a scorn, and ridiculous to all such as shall join in their factions, and favour such vituperating courses, that it is a wonder how those in authority should have a heart to bear such callumnyes, did not their wisdoms and goodness pass by with a smile the simplicity of such creatures, although many times their aspersions are credited, whereby men in high Government and authority are by their means hated, and ill opinions and false censures always opposing any action that shall be intended, or put in execution for a general good, either in time of peace or war: For the nature of these Novelists is such, that those they cannot fancy, let their actions be never so good, and politicly carried for the public welfare, yet to them it shall be distasteful, they being clothed with jealousy and suspicion, that they look for that they do not desire to see nor find; for under every fair harbe they dream of a Serpent lurking, and that every laborious Bee, which strives to extract Wax and Honey for the preservation of its Commonwealth, in their squinteyed opinions are Spiders which gather poison to ruin the same; it is a cruel reward which is returned as a recompense to those which these kind of people hate; Quem metuant oderunt, quem quisque odit pruiise experit: To verify this I shall need make choice, but of one example still fresh in memory, which will serve to exemplify and prove the truth of this discourse, and that is the Duke of Buckingham, who once, none then living so highly in favour, and generally honoured of the Cominalty, and especially at his return from Spain, with our gracious King that now is, it was their whole discourse to magnify him with their applauses of his worth, wisdom, and fidelity; but how suddenly those of the Corporation of novelists had changed the wind of his true fame into a contrary quarter, blowing their flie-blowes of aspersions and disgraces so fast upon him, that he grew more hateful and odious in the same men's conceits, which formerly so highly honoured him, (and yet for his own particular the same man, and to his power endeavoured to do the same good for the Commonwealth which formerly he had done) so that what design soever the people conceived his finger to have but touched, was by them vilified, or some doubtful various constructions made of it, which at length grew to the height of censuring, that when those Foot forces which returned from the I'll of Ree were to be quartered, and Billeted in Towns, until his Majesty's pleasure was to dismiss them, or farther to have employed them; the common voice was, it was the Duke's plot to detain these forces, to take his occasion to side with the Enemy, and so to ruin our Kingdom: and what base Libels and scurulous songs were made of him? so that at last they did hate his very person, so that by their calumnious reports, and invective inventions they had set on his shoulders (according to the fiction in Ovid) another head, so that his own friends and Soldiers did not know him for their friend, but wrought their own Master's death most villainously by their wishes, which was acted by the cruel hand of a hellish Murderer to their contents; but let them put the gains they purchased by his loss in their eyes, and I believe they may still see, whilst he lived the Commonwealth fared not the worse; I think none can be ignorant of the mischiefs and inconveniences which are engendered by these Monsters of impudent censurings, and bold scrutinies of these Novelists, which they engross to themselves to please their palates of a covetous desire of news, and then to gain a popular applause, or to maintain Tabletalk they retail it out again, either to the honour or disparagement of some one or other, as they shall stand affected; or as the time, place, or occasion shall be offered: Reports soon works upon the weakness of ignorant people, who are apt to believe any thing, especially if it comes from one that hath a habit of seeming sanctity, and by such they will be drawn, and lead to any thing. These Hitrogeniall courses either of Subjects or Soldiers used to those in Authority over them, makes an Enemy rejoice, they perceiving by such ways and courses, their paths are ev'ned and swept; and at their pleasures they can shape their designs and projects, according to the distempers and humours of the time, sailing with full wind and tide unto the haven of their expectations; for men's fancies are like to surfeited blood, that what infection soever comes first, is most surely taken; and indeed an enemy will not lose his opportunity to fish where the waters are troubled.  
And as in the little Empire of the body natural, the beginning of all motion is from the head, having the Conjugation of all sinews, and the architecture framed, built, and fashioned with joints fit for motion, and by a secret instinct and light of Creation annexed to the head from whence the whole strength is produced; now if any of these sinews or joints are shrunk or dislocated, it mars and hinders the sudden motion of the whole frame, causing the limb where such a defect is, to be altogether unuseful, and much hindering the orderly work of the rest of the limbs, which would be more quick and apt to help and defend the head; the Magnanimous Eagle is easily surprised if but the least joint of her wings be perished. This corrupting, putrifying, and disjointing the members of a Commonwealth, hath been a policy ever used by the Enemy, and hath afforded him more freedom to set afoot his projects and designs, than any one conclusion he hath made use of; And such dislocations and distempers are usually the forerunners of confusion. Histories make mention of many Nations that have been infected with this Contagion, and have languished in this dea●ly sickness, when as the art of Physic was not able to purge the glut that lay in the stomaches of these diseased persons, so that their breaths infected all that came near, and made them unuseful burdens to their heads, so that the Engines of Wit, Art, and Policy, was not able to set them in a right frame and temper.  
France once deeply tasted of this deadly cup, until ruin and confusion rend them from their head to a deeper destruction, like gangrene members they were cut off from the body Politic; the residue being weary of their former smarts began then to comply with the times, and saw it the peaceablest and safest way for all degrees to join in one, for the aiding and supporting their King, and honouring and obeying all in Authority under him; then they showered their transcendent terms of loyalty and obedience upon Lewis the ninth; 
Jo●●●ille▪ cap. 16.  (and indeed he truly deserved them) the Commons with one voice styled him their Father; the Nobility reverenced him with title of just Prince, and faithful preserver of their Laws; The grave Doctors and Fathers of the Church ascribed to him the name of Tutor, and Defender against all oppositions, and the whole body of France viva voce, and with one consent proclaimed him the King of truth, and those in Commission under him, true Preservators and Administrators of justice: the crabbed fruits of their former follies had wrought good effects, so that contestings, scrutinies, censurings, and oppositions, 
Lycurgus▪ his witty answer.  were quite banished; They having learned of Lycurgus, to answer those that did desire to meddle out of their Sphere, as he once answered one that was oppinionated, that a Democrasticall government was most pleasing, he wished him to try it first in his own house if such Corrivals in authority would breed any content; If every busie-braind fellow would make trial of this, shame would make them blush, and ill-shapt discontents would stop their mouths, causing them to be ready to imitate the Egyptians, who anciently consecrated to their God Harpocrates, the Peach tree, the leaves thereof resemble a Tongue, the fruit a Heart; simbolizing thereby, that their hearts should henceforth serve him, and their tongues set forth his praise. The same Emblem should every loyal and obedient Subject and Soldier have within his breast and mouth, which he should dedicate to Supremacy, and to all in subordinate authority under him; then every door would turn merrily upon the hinges without jarring, and a gentle stream of Peace would have a currant channel through Kingdoms; then there would be no fear of an enemies sowing his seeds of discontents amongst the inferior members, nor enticing them by gifts and promises to disloyalty or distractions.  
It is recorded of Caesar, 
De Bello Gallico, lib. 6.  that he conquered more in France by complying with the people, proffering them favours and courtesies, and giving them large gifts, to those that would yield to maintain Disputes, factions and contentions against Authority, he thus exercising his wits but one Winter, gained more Towns and Provinces, than he and his potent Army could conquer of them in ten years' wars.  
Factions, Murmurs, Mutinies, contestations, oppositions, detractions, disloyalty, and disobedience, are far more dangerous in an Army, than they possibly can be in a settled Kingdom, in regard the members of an Army are to be ready pressed to go upon execution, upon every sudden occasion, being always in action tending towards the finishing of the design it was provided for, so that if any Mutinies or detractions should be, it would far with that Army, as with a Traveller that by some dangerous slip in his earnest journeys over a dangerous Forest is taken lame, so that he is disappointed of his expected arriving: being exposed to the dangers of the night; and bereft of his means of defending himself from the cruelty of devouring Beasts, which most certainly will take the present opportunity to fall upon and devour him; Whereas in a State (no Foreign enemies being near) such distempers, bruises, and dislocations, time itself may wear out the malady, or some sovereign course may be used to supple and lythen such dislocated joints, and stiff members, so that use may be obtained of them, before any urgent occasion shall command their assistance. It is not the least of all things to be thought of, if occasion should offer itself to make use of the Commonalty, for a speedy defence against an approaching enemy, those that have been so offward, and refractory in obeying the Edicts of Sovereign authority, and in yielding the least of their assistance in contributing towards the mighty charge which is expended both by Sea and Land, for our peaceable and safe preservations; how strange shall these men be found in subjecting themselves to Marshal laws, and to such Commanders as shall ●ee in command over them; or how will they venture their flesh, which were scrupulous in venturing a few shillings: Besides their ignorance in the use of Arms; and no marvel, because our Yeomondry scorn to subject themselves under a Captain to be taught, but put their servants into the List: And the cheifer sort that should be the strength of our Kingdom, slip their necks out of collar, and every silly poor mecanicke fellow must make the Soldier: Thus dishonouring our Sovereign, and weakening our State, by putting trust in a company of poor ●●eas that have neither estate nor reputation to lose, but are fitter subjects to entertain mutinies, or commit mischiefs, then to be brought into orderly subjection.  
You may give Officers leave to complain, being too well acquainted with their wonderful disorders in our daily musters, which being not redressed will be pernicious to our Kingdom.  
Moreover, our people are so metamorphized from that true worth which in former ages was inherent to our English, but now so effeminized by their voluptuous living, that they are not fit to undertake the pains and care of a Soldier; their hearts melting like butter, upon the supposition of meeting death in the face; as was seen not many years since by the manly carriages of brave fellows, when the rumour was of the Enemies landing at Wackring, betwixt Maulden, and Lee in Essex; what uproars and disorders it bred, two or three bestriding a Horse to eschew the danger, partly naked, fearing lest the Enemy should have over-taken them, being so stupid, that many of them knew that it was so far from affording an Enemy a landing, that a Goose might be gravelled, before she could obtain shore.  
And I think the two fearful mistake of the Enemy's approaches at Wethersfield in Essex, 
1623.  the people being Congregated in a time of Fast; at the discharging of a poor Pistol by a Horseman returning from training, all the Church was in such a strange uproar, every one running to hide himself; tearing the Air with their shrieks and cries, deeming they had seen their Neighbours slain; when they in their haste tumbled one over another, some running a Mile or two before they durst look back.  
Likewise some few years after in the same Church, at the running down of the weight of the Clock (which made to their thinking a fearful noise) caused such an uproar as if the Devil and a lease of Bears had been amongst them: these things plainly shows the pusillanimity and imbellick constitution that Peace and security, with the lasciviousness of the times hath hatched in them; it would have been hard for a General or Captain to have gotten these people to have made a stand, and opposed the Enemy at push of Pike, if occasion had been of the Enemies landing: A County might have been pillaged before they would have assumed the countenance of a Soldier, they being so fearfully affrighted. If we did but truly weigh these things, it would make every man more forward in his contribution towards the maintenance of the Navy, which must secure us from these panic fears.  
The ancient Gauls accounted no man further worthy then to serve in the affairs of the house, that was not publicly called and generally thought worthy and meet to bear Arms; and being Armed before the general Counsel, than he was acknowledged a commonwealth man, and fit to be employed to do his Country service: And these were of the best and chiefest sort that strove to obtain these honours: How far are we dissenting from those, yet we would be accounted good Commonwealth's men; but we must first leave our factious jars and disputes, by which we think to attribute to ourselves the name of good Commonwealth's men; and as the Gauls did, betake ourselves to the service of our King, and the good and safety of our Country.  
Tacitus makes mention, 
Tacitus.  that the youth in those days did use no other recreation, but in preparing themselves and fitting themselves for the Wars; having that expertness, that they would leap voluntarily being naked against swords and javelins opposed against them, wherein they had an Art to disarm their Enemies, and defend themselves: He adds moreover, that they would play upon such dangerous adventures, as would make a man blush to be a spectator.  
The Ancient Romans upon their theatres, tutored up valiant young men in the Art of Fencing; and when they grew expert and hardy, they were renowned with the name of Gladiators, our Gentry and Yeomen are not of that mettle; for either they through covetousness, are addicted like Boars to root up the earth, to scrape base dross together, (which they deify as their god) or else they swim in a more dangerous stream of drunkenness, and riotousness, which weakens both their bodies and estates, making them not fit to do neither King nor Country service; for it may truly be said of those that sail in these extremes, that they are ignorant to what end they were borne into the World; which next their duty to God, they are bound in all loyalty and obedience to do their best service to their King and Country; men's own private ends ought to be the last thing to be thought upon.  
The Ancients in former ages were not acquainted with such baseness, as this Age is addicted unto; they would not suffer such distempers amongst them: for as Caesar reports, that the Nervians were the most couragio●est of all the Belgians; his reason was, their Governors would not suffer any Wine to be brought amongst them; 
Strab. lib. 3. of the Venet.  or any thing that tended unto delicacy; they held it for an infallible rule, that such things would abate the courage of men: And Strabo further testifies, that Caenus a grave wise Commander persuaded the Geteses to pluck up their Vines, for fear of effeminatizing their people; 
Tacit. lib. 4. cap. 5.  they neither delighted in delicacies nor riches; as Tacitus speaks very nobly in the behalf of the ancient Germans; who so highly hunted after honours, condemning base cankered wealth, that in their marriage circumstances instead of a great dowry, the husband presented a yoke of Oxen; a Horse furnished and fitted for service, a Target with a sword and javelin: The Virgin likewise presented her beloved with some weapons of War, simbollizing that in all perils and dangers be it either in peace or War they join to run in one fortune. Our age is so far from this, that although by Statute they are bound to find Horse and Armour, they will have tricks to shift it, or being compelled, will borrow of their Neighbours to blind the eyes of authority; so that in a Troop of Horse of a 100, there is not 80 of these Horse their own, which ought to be employed for the King's service; were these people allotted their possessions, and yet bound to find Horse and Armour, as Aristotle, testifies of Phaleas, the Calcedonian that he first published in the Commonwealth; 
Aristot. lib. 4. de anim. cap. 6.  that all goods and chattels should be equally divided, to the end that two principal plagues to mankind (which are Riches, and Poverty) might be banished their Cities.  
The Warlike Germans put this in execution, by a custom received amongst themselves; as Caesar avoucheth in his sixth Book of his Commentaries; that they had no certain measure of Land, nor any particular habitation limited them, but as the Princes and Magistrates assigned every year unto particular kindreds and Parentages, so much ground or Land, or such a City or situation as unto them seemed best and convenient, and the year following they were constrained to seek elsewhere: The reasons of this used by the same Author, were first, lest the people being retained by customed continuance, in one place they should be out of love with the profession of Arms, taking more delight in their beneficial and pleasing courses of life: secondly, from the occasions of withdrawing their minds from the enlargement of their Territories: thirdly, lest they should be over curious in building and defending themselves from cold and heat, and so prove stark cowards: fourthly, lest a covetous desire should arise amongst them, scraping and gathering goods together, whereon customarily issues threats, dissensions, and blood.  
These inconveniencies former ages have been reduced unto, to deter them from effeminate courses, and were constrained for all their uncertain means to furnish themselves with Horse and Armour for the Wars: We have our complete possessions from generation to generation defended by his Majesty's Laws; Yet how grievous it is to diverse men to have a just taxation of Moneys, Horse, or Arms imposed upon them; when they know without it, the Realm cannot be secured. Let any sensible man compare these our days with these precedent circumstances; and let him judge what good service, or what loyalty and obedience may be expected of a people, either merely given over to sensuality, or altogether begrumbled with covetousness, for we are now grown to that height that we make it an Article of our faith; that the possessing of goods and enjoying of pleasure, is the Sumum bonum required.  
When as the people of the jews, that God so highly delighted in; that he would give kingdoms for their ransoms, and hedged them about with his favours, whereby they might have presumed to have lived in security: Yet it was the Almighty's pleasure so far to wean them from their eager dispositions of fortifying themselves, which they aimed at for their better security, that they might live uncontrolled, and wallow in their pleasures, and some in their covetousness, void of fear of the Enemy's surprisals; both their hands were commanded to be employed, the one about their daily and common affairs, the other was to manage the sword: So that one eye was employed about finishing and contriving their livelihood; the other had due respect to the Enemy to prevent and resist them upon the first view: Is our Nation more confident of a miraculous preservation, than they might have claimed? I rather believe the contrary, for it is just we should suffer, if we slight (as most of us do) both God's precepts, and the commands of Authority which enjoin us to a due preparation and daily vigilancy, which now is generally disobeyed and slighted, the noise of the Enemy's Canon sounding so far off, neither as yet hath the Enemy played his part upon our Stage; so that we shall fear like the Shepherd when the Wolf comes; indeed we shall hardly gain succour and resistance, in regard the common people take all warnings but as mocks and scarecrows, which by these consequencies following may be plainly seen.  
First, in our refractory carriages, when Authority commands any service for the gaining experience in the use of Arms, as namely our Musters; what murmurings are breathed out for the expense and charge of a little Powder and Match, and the loss of a days Worke.  
Secondly, what boysterings and stomacking there is against Officers that shall give true information of men's sufficiency, when accordingly Arms by Authority are imposed.  
Thirdly, what strange circustances are used to gain freedom, and the posting it over to another, happily far insufficienter than himself.  
Fourthly, when necessity compels the finding of Arms; what fond delays, and slight excuses are set abroach to defer the time; and in this they have a double aim: First, either that the dallying with time shall be the means to bury it in oblivion, or, Secondly, the removing themselves out of the division they conceive to be prevalent, until notice be taken of some other to amplify the List: Others of less rhetoric, take it to be the cheapest way to borrow their Arms; so that many times one Horse or one Armour, is fitted to the service of diverse bodies.  
Fiftly, those that are complete in appearance, will hardly be entreated to be tutored one third part of the day, but some one evasion or other is put in execution; many times they are so brittle, that they can hardly endure the calling over, which makes them so skilful at the years end, that they can hardly distinguish a Rank, from a File.  
Sixthly, their backwardness and unwillingness in answering to the commands of Authority, and many times some of them are altogether deficient both in their Arms and appearance, and usually all or the greater part will borrow two or three hours of the set time, before they come to the place where they are to be called over; that days work above all other is so tedious, that they desire only to trifle it to an end.  
Seventhly, a base scorning and inveterate hating of such Officers as have a desire to take pains with them, in exercising them and showing them their postures, and causing them to bring in complete Arms.  
Eighthly, the negligent and beastly keeping of their Arms, that hardly half the Arms of the Band are fitted as they should be for a present use, but altogether defective, and making any trash serve to pass the Muster, not regarding future services: In all these particular faults, our Horsemen are guilty of, and may blush for their shameful abuses to King and State; and in one thing they surpass our Foot-troopes, and that is the employing of such Horses as are sequestered from common rural uses, and only appropriated to the King's service; they instead of riding them and managing them for the War, set them to Blow and Cart, or to perform some journeys either in a Coach or otherwise; or rather more absurdly make a Carthorse or Coach-horse serve to bear the great Saddle, which they think sufficient to blind the eyes of Authority; should there be any sudden use that our forces should stand in competition with an Enemy, I fear we shall fall short of what is to be expected.  
And although these defects may seem but as a shadow to such points of disloyalty and disobedience, as formerly we have discoursed of; yet these defects argue and savour of stupid security, and a base undervalluing esteem of the use of Arms, which all Nations do most highly honour and esteem, as the means for safety of Kingdoms, the preserver of Laws, and above all, the preserver and defender of God's Gospel, which without it, would soon be dashed under feet, and a confusion overflow our Realm: Therefore let us endeavour to amend what hath been amiss, and in all dutiful obedience follow such directions as Authority shall prescribe, banishing our own ends, and every day furnishing and fitting ourselves to the largest extent of our abilities and powers to do our God, King, and Country the faithfullest, and best service we possibly may, and that willingly, and with a delight; for this end we were first borne, as was truly verified by Pompeius Magnus that famous Commander, he having shipped his men, and ready furnished them with Victuals and Munition for the relief of the City of Rome, which was then by the Enemy besieged and in great distress: In the interim, a wonderful tempest of Wind, Raine, Thunder, and Lightning arose, so that nothing but ruin to him could be expected; his friends and Soldiers besought him not to venture his life and the Navies loss; He returned this noble answer, I am borne to obey Authority; Et necesse est ut eam, non ut vivam: He knew the Rules and Edicts of Sovereign Authority were not to be deferred, but he took them as his Card to steer his course of loyalty and obedience by.  
If we should but draw examples of obedience from the Creatures, and observe how in all things they stand conformable and obedient to the Laws of Nature; How the great unruly Ocean observes the course of the Moon in bringing in her tides: The Massy earth waits the time and pleasure of the Sun's revolution, to yield up the fruit and hidden treasures contained in her bowels to the uttermost of her power: All Creatures both Vegetative and Sensitive, are precise and ready bend in all obedience when Nature enjoins; And yet Man a Rational Creature most obstinate and hetrogeniall in his duty, loyalty and obedience to his Superiors, which Nature doth not only challenge as a right, but God claims it as a due: And how siily and foolish are men above all other Creatures in making provision for their safety there is no Creature but Nature hath armed it with some defensive weapon, not so much but the poor Bee hath his Pike, which most valiantly and skilfully he can use for his defence and preservation: But the times we live in are such, that we have neither will nor skill; but we refer all to a general Providence, thinking it sufficient if they be roughcast with riches and prosperity: and the liberty and peace which here hath been plentifully enjoyed, breeds a boldness and fool hardiness to do evil; for long peace and large freedoms makes men as unfit to follow the Wars for the present, as pampering and youthfulness doth a Colt unridden; he that should have a sudden occasion to backe him for present service, cannot but expect the Rider should be overthrown, and work confusion to himself and all that depend on him.  
It was partly seen and tried at the Isle of Ree in France at the Siege of Rochel, and although our English had been some short time tutured and exercised under the banners of Mars; yet the right valiant and judicious Captains had no more command of them in the time of need, when the trial of their obedience, skill, and valours should have been brought, then of a Herd of Deer: For all they saw by flight there was no safety but eminent destruction, yet they could not be persuaded to make an honourable resistance, whereby they might either have freed themselves, or have died like men with their faces towards the Enemy: Now judge you, if such cowardly baseness was found in those that scorned to give their heads for the washing being the prime spirits of our Kingdom, we cannot but expect worse of these here behind remaining, which will fall short many bows length of their worth, (if we do not flatter ourselves) for they will find war a wearisome stage where Soldiers must play their parts against their wills; for truly it may be said of a people that are unexercised, and know the Wars but by hearsay: quod valentes sunt, & prevalent ante pericula, in ipsis tamen periculis discedunt; They have ability enough and to spare, until danger appears; but when peril indeed comes, they get them gone as Vigetius says, there is a rule in the Philosophy of the War; In omni praelio non tam multitudo, & virtus in●●cta, quam ●rs & exercitum, solent prestare victoriam; In every Battle, skill and practice doth more towards the victory, than multitudes and rude audacity. But certainly our age is possessed that an Enemy will dare at our brave carriages and gay clothes, as the Lark doth at the Hobby, until they beat them down with their bolts. Let such make trial that please, it will prove but Dulce bellum inexpertus. Matters not useful prove inductions to terror; for there are three things which aggravates fear; Inexpectation, unacquaintance, and want of preparation; The first distracts the mind, and flails the faculties and affections from their due consultations of remedy; the second makes an earthquake in the soul, being not sensible of the event, as the Imbellicke Peasant quakes at the report of a Musket at his first hearing of it. The third dejects the spirits being void of all hopes, either of evasion or defence, much less of conquering; Therefore lest we should make our Enemies more terrible to us then indeed they can be, let us daily expect them, that when they come we may not be to seek how to expulse them.  
And for conclusion of this seventh Section; 
The wonderful loyalty and valour of Pro●es●l●us.  let every truehearted Subject imitate the Thracian Captain Protesilaus, son to Iphiclus; who to show the truth of his love and loyalty to his Sovereign, would be the first man of all the warlike greeks, that should set foot on Troy; albeit he knew that he should surely die that first touched the Trojan Land, which came to pass, for he was slain by Hector, about whose Tomb the Poets were pleased to record to his perpetual honour, that diverse goodly tall green Trees did divinely spring up, whose branches covered the ruins of Troy; By this we may see in what estimation and honour, loyalty and valour was honoured withal; as one truly says, such men deserve all respects and honour that may be to mortal men ascribed, for they are as the Locks and Bars of the King's Palace, and so long as they are kept, fix, strong, and close, they preserve all in safety; but if infected with Cankered disloyalty, rusty cowardice, and mossy security, they leave all open as a prey to Thiefs and Robbers.    

THE TRUE VALOUR OF SUBJECTS AND SOLDIERS IN FORT AND FIELD. SECT. VIII.  

CHAP. LIX.  
The true nature of Valour described, and how men ought to be qualified with it, to make them sit Subjects and Soldiers.  
TRue Valour in Subjects and Soldiers, is the summoning of the Faculties of the irascible parts to a mature Consultation with Reason, judgement being the principal Engine, and Resolution the Model that turns all the Wheels, both of Invention and execution, which makes a man truly valiant, to undertake without rashness, and to perform without fear, bearing down dangers with a lofty courage, trampling on them with success; it makes a Soldier look Death in the face, and pass by it with a smile; it makes him afraid of nothing, but to be betrayed by fear, desiring rather to have his blood seen, than his back; it makes a Soldier disdain life upon all base conditions; Making him prodigal of his blood, when God, his King and Country shall command it; His boldness proceedeth neither from Ignorance nor senselessness; But first he values the danger, and then disdains it, having his fears least, when perils are greatest; His Magnanimous mind scorns flatteries, esteeming such as Flies blowing corruption upon sweet virtues; he hates to feed his spirits upon the fulsomeness of surfeiting ease; his confidence keeps him safe, and his unapaled looks doth daunt a base attempter; it is more prevalent than Briareus with his hundred hands, and more potent than Chiron the Centaur, whose strength and wisdom was matchless; Valour hath double odds of a fearful Coward, for the undaunted carriage of a valiant man, drives fear up to the hilts in a Coward's heart, so that he hath no ability left to offend his enemy, or defend himself; This makes victory so easily gained, for the spirits of a Coward are so retired, and penned up with anguish and distress, being wrapped up with fear of the approaching evil, and despairing of his fortitude to avoid it, that there is hardly strength left to make the least resistance; whereby Valour takes his advantage to achieve his Honourable ends without much trouble, and less danger; for as boldness fortifies the passions of the soul against the greatest miseries which are most difficult to be avoided, and encourageth it to pursue Honourable achievements that are most hard to obtain; so many times fearful cowardice doth wannesse in itself its strength failing; many times fearing that which is not to be feared; having only but a show of danger, Saepius opinione laboramus quam re, Many times more troubled and dejected with conceits then the thing itself. A Coward's eye is of the nature of an augmentation glass, dilating a small danger, and causing it to appear ten times greater than the accident can be; whereas Valour acordeth with the diminution glass, contracting the dimensions of perils into so small an Image, that they appear as shadows. In a poor faint leaden spirit there are four kinds of fear that undermine the Heart; first a natural fear, whereby every thing shuns the destruction of itself, and this is most proper in beasts. Secondly humane, which ariseth of too much desire of this life. Thirdly a base worldly fear, when a man despairs to hazard the loss of goods and credit. Fourthly, a stinking servile disposition which causeth a fear of receiving wounds and death; any one of these is able to subvert the whole fabric of Valour. That warlike Caesar was free from the least tincture of any of these fears, when his boiling worth in the midst of eminent perils, cheered up his Soldiers and Mariners, and banished their fears with the comfortable words that Caesar and his fortunes were aboard: He was very expert in the operations of conceits, and passions of the mind upon the body; He being a warlike Physician (in the prescription of Regiments to his fearful Soldiers) he did always consider Accidentia animi to be of greatest force to further or hinder the achieving of Victory and fortune; for questionless imagination is prevalent in altering the faculties and spirits of the imaginant, having a manifest power to hurt, deject, and weaken, the operation of the spirits; so that there is to be observed an art in war, and to be used to coroborate, and strengthen the imagination, that they may like the Loadstone, fix their conceits upon nothing but honours, victory and riches, which elevates the spirits into a majestic Sphere.  
There is a great deal of difference between a natural inbred hardiness, and a soffisticated valour; a silly sheep may be made, managed, and tutored, to oppose and use violence to a dog, but when the victory comes to competition, the wing is preferred before the claw, whereas in a Lion his natural inbred magnanimity cannot be altered, without the bereaving of life. The subject of War is variable, and is only judged by the success and event; Whereas other Arts and Sciences are judged by acts, as the Pilot is judged by directing his course aright, and not by the fortune of the voyage; it is otherwise with valour, for that may have an aspersion of timerosity, and taxed with indiscreet judgement, when the event is not answerable to the acts performed, when as Imbellick fellows may stumble on a victory by some strange accident, when neither art nor courage did attend them, which by the weakness and credulity of men shall be highly esteemed, as may be manifested by the overthrow of the Duke of Brunswickes' Army, who were known to be very valiant, and had so declared and manifested themselves in diverse bloody skirmishes, and principally in a battle fought against Signior Tilly, where he had all the advantage both in force and place, yet most valiantly the Duke forced a way thorough the enemy's Army; the greatest loss to himself was only the loss of his hand; yet these brave Soldiers not long after were routed and ruined, by a few base country Boars joined with a few Soldiers which were privately drawn out of the adjacent Towns, to hinder the Enemy's pillaging; these in the dead time of the night found sufficient advantage to set their base mettle a work, the Brunswickians being confusedly quartered (and their guards neglected) upon a plain near Brafford in Gelderland, so as the divisions could not have the privilege to draw themselves into order of Battle to make their resistance, for I dare then say those Grollians and Boars would have fled at the first charge, like Sheep from Wolves.  
True valour is of the nature of perfect coin which goes currant in all places without contradiction, and dares endure the touchstone, when as seeming hardiness, like base mettle will not endure the trial, nor pass currant in valuation, yet happily it may to the view seem very splendent, as courage raised by the spirits of Wine, may seem more headstrong and violent (as one truly terms it a madness, or a worth out of the wits) than the true valour which goes upon the feet of judgement and resolution, yet it will be nipped in the bud, and fall before the fruit be mature; when as true hardy●Souldiers well exercised, and acquainted with dangers, fear them not; Neglecto periculo iminentis mali opus ipsum quantumvis difficile agrediuntur; They go about the business itself, how hard soever it be, although they consider the danger with the mischief over their heads it may probably bring, which would distract a Coward.  
A Soldier must be so qualified, that adversity must not lessen his courage, nor prosperity his circumspection; our English in former Ages, have been esteemed the best tempered metals, transcending other Nations of the world for true valour, and expertness in the use of Arms; whereby they have achieved great victories: as in the Battle of Poitiers, where the French had all advantage against the Black-prince, both in number, force, show, Country and conceit, with the chief strength of the Horse of his Kingdom, which were esteemed the best in Europe, assisted with the greatest and wisest Captains of his Realm, so that the French Army consisted of 40000. men well appointed, and expert Warriors, nothing wanting in them; but the golden spirits of our English, whose Army consisted but of 8000. men, overthrew the French Army, and took their King Prisoner.  
The like difference of worth in Soldiers, was manifestly seen at the Battle fought by the Estates of the Netherlands, and the Archdukes forces, near Newport in Flanders, where our English did works of Supererogation, by the prudency and valour of the Veres, with a handful of disbanded men, routed the Battalia's of the Enemy, and redeemed the victory lost of their own side, snatching it out of their Enemy's hands, when in the judgement of all men it was lost. And that incredible animosity and courage of a poor handful of Soldiers, which attended Charles King of France, in his junenesse unto the Wars which he intended in Italy! after the sacking of diverse Towns there, he marched with his Army to the Gates of Rome, and entering a breach in the Wall, drove the inhabitants to such perplexities, that the Pope gladly condescended to any conditions which they should propound; so as the World did admire their valour, wondering to see that no opposition could withstand their warlike hands; so that Kingdoms trembled to see with what facility they suodued in all places.  
Alphonso understanding this Army approached near Naples, fear so far possessed him, that he crowned his Son Ferand, thinking that he more valiantly would have defended his Country; for his own security he fled into Sicily, being indeed touched in his conscience, for his abominable wickedness: but no sooner were the French arrived at the Ports of Naples, but the sheepish Neopolitans durst not once offer a repulse, but yielded themselves with their Kingdom to his mercy, where he was crowned King of Naples. By these examples we may see the wonderful difference betwixt an inbred natural valour, and a forced made hardiness.  
As there is a virtue in the Loadstone to draw Iron or Steel to it, the virtue not extending to other metals; of the same nature is Valour, which in a valiant Commander, will draw all his Captains, Officers, and common-Souldiers, to step the same paces to gain honour and renown; so that they will follow him in all desperate attempts, if they have the least grain of steel in them; which being wanting, all the policy in the world is in vain to seduce or draw them to any performances; but like Lead (before other metals) when it comes to the fire of trial, will soon melt and run.  
As much may be said of an Effeminate Commander, whose mettle is no better, than the Mineral which Saturn engenders; if he be infected with the Pestilent disease of Cowardice, all his Soldiers under his command will soon be infected, and participate in his running fore, before his begin to rise; Soldiers are very superstitious, dreaming there is more worth and wisdom in a Commander, than many times is found; and when they perceive timerosity, doubts, and no apt performances in him, they conceit some strange effects are approaching, that may tend to their confusion; and so like valiant Cravens, bethink themselves best how to be secured, reposing more confidence in one pair of Wings, than in two pair of claws; as was well observed by the Battle between Po●●bus Diazius a famous Leader of the Portugals, and Alvara King of Congo, who had in his Army 1200000. Soldiers, who by the poor spirits of their Commanders were so astonished, 
Heylin.  not daring to maintain the ground they stood on, were utterly ruined by a handful of Portugals.  
Caesar one of our Schoolmasters in the Rudiments of War, was not ignorant of the strange effects that the worth of a Commander begets in a Soldier, and what poor Spirits and aghast countenances are bred by the sickly courages of Commanders; which made him haste to the Sea-coast, understanding his Navy was assaulted by Achilles, 
Heylin.  as it lay at Anchor by Pharas in Egypt, over against Alexandria, he being intercepted of his passage by the Egyptians, was compelled to leap into the Sea, swimming for his life, diverse times being constrained to dive into the water, to preserve himself from their Darts, with much difficulty and danger arrived at his ships, whose presence, with his valorous animating of his Soldiers, got the victory; which otherwise had been doubtful.  
Likewise, to confirm the base impression of fear that a cowardly Commander stamps in his Soldier's dispositions; and likewise to manifest the worth and courage which is wrought in poor imbellicke Creatures, by the forwardness and bold hardy courage of some in chief, you shall find by the Story of Contarenus the Venetian Governor; 
Knoll●s.  he having intelligence of the invasion of Vluz Ali with a Navy of 60 Galleys, was so stricken with a quaking agne, so that by his cowardly and unmanly carriage caused all the Townsmen to run after him, leaving the strong Town of Curzola to be defended by none but their silly wives; the simple women perceiving eminent danger and destruction to approach, pluck up their womanly spirits, and defended the Walls with stones, fire, and such other weapons as they had, beat the Enemy from the Walls, and God being propitious to them in sending a sudden violent Tempest, which forced the Turks General to remove his Galleys to a place of more safety.  
The like pusillanimity was found in King Etheldred, who in the year 978. swayed the Sceptre in this Kingdom, being invaded by Swayne King of Denmark, with a Navy of 350 Sail, durst not withstand the storm, but took his opportunity the speediest way into Normandy, leaving his Subjects to the mercy of the Danish King, who tyrannised over them until his death. In all the passages of Martial Affairs, I have only observed three several passages, whereby valiant men have been subdued.  
The first may be said miraculously, as when God is seen plainly and manifestly to be the Author of a Conquest by a secondary means of less worth and power used; and that is most usually, when God and his Glory is interressed in it: as in sacred Scriptures, the overthrow of Goliath a man of mighty strength and valour, by David although valiant, yet a Child in comparison to the Giant: (for valour and strength must have a cerrivall to make a man complete) Also the overthrow of King Saul and jonathan, who had ever been victorious against their Enemies: Yet the Almighty being at odds with them for their rebellions, in not performing execution against Agag, they were subdued by their Enemies; yet David styles them (in his Lamentations for them) valiant men.  
Also Marcus Antonius the Emperor making War against the Quadi, 
Xiphilinus.  being a Warlike people that inhabited Silesia; who by their worths and policies had gotten the Emperor's Army in such a strait, the mountains environing them on the one side, and the Quadi ready to give battle in their teeth; And as calamities seldom walk alone, the season of the year was very hot, and infinitely dry; the Emperor being ready to compound his safety with his Enemy rather than hazard all, fear had taken such possession of him and his Army: being in this deep agony, a certain Captain presents himself, letting the Emperor understand that he had diverse Millitents, meaning Christians, which by their prayers to their God could obtain victory, for whose sakes God was pleased to interest himself in this conquest, by sending a miraculous Thunder and Hail, which so beat in their Enemy's faces, that they with ease vanquished them.  
Secondly, Valiant Commanders may be foiled by their own presumption; it being a domestic traitor which attends the ruin to valour, and so near allied to it, that it's hard to be separated, and many times it doth train and usher forth valour upon extraordinary disadvantages, or blinds it with a superstitious remissness and looseness, in suggesting and acting such things as should be requisite for safety; abandoning all such rules and means as might tend to preservation and furtherance in their designs, making mere naked valour the Rock to ground their confidence upon, as in the Battle between L. Silla and the Romans, against Archelans General to Mithridates' King of Pontus, whose Army consisted of 120000 Soldiers, these reposing their confidence in their valours, and great multitudes of men, having an overweening presumption of their own strengths and deserts, caused them to neglect such courses and advantages as might have been prevalent to a victorious conquest, whereby L. Silla took an occasion to give them an overthrow with the loss but of fourteen of his own men; But Archelans paying for his presumption the lives of 2000 of his valiantest youths.  
Thirdly, as we have discovered Valour to be of too high a temper, that is compounded with presumption; so likewise when it is of too soft a temper being compounded with fear, as in Instruments of Steel, that which is absolutely Steel, and of too high a temper, is of hardness sufficient to file in pieces any Mettle of a softer temper, only it is brittle and subject to break through its own hardness; So that Sword that is partly Steel, and partly Iron, so far as the Steel is in it, and of a true temper it will endure the stroke, and will give no more way, but equally to that which is all Steel, but when the Steel is chopped, and hacked through to the Iron, then that which is all Steel, soon destroys and cuts through the softer Mettle; accordingly when two valours meet in opposition, happily both sides endures the brunt a long time, so far as strength and worth will give way, but being cut and worn to the quick, the tempered edge is taken off, and a softer mettle appears, which is soon fretted asunder by the true tempered weapon, that hath not that quantity of Iron in it to soften it; So that that Army which endures the assault longest, is most sure of the victory; so that too hard is better than too soft, but the golden means betwixt them is the best temper of all, which is tough and apt to endure any hardship that shall be opposed; as that famous Battle fought for a Kingdom, between King Harold and William the Conqueror, their Metals were so near of a temper, and so truly tempered, that the victory was uncertain which side it would favour, until the edge of the English valours was worn through by the ominous death of King Harold, than their courages grew so soft and poor, that the hardy Normans destroyed them like Grasshoppers.  
It was far otherwise with the true mettalled Swedes, although the Emperor's Army had deeply worn into them, by seeking to blunt their edges by the slaughter of the most valiant King Gustavus; Yet in regard there was nothing but true tempered mettle remaining, they endured the force of their Enemy's opposition, and enduring their greatest onsets and assaults, they were predominant over their enemies, standing to their tackling until they had consumed their foes; Thus you see the two ill tempers (as before I have said) which attends fortitude is fear and rashness; The golden means between these two, is only to be chosen by a Soldier; this is a path so difficult to walk in, that few there are but errs; As one compares this mean to the roof of a Church, on whose top there is scarce room to turn a foot upon, but on either side a broad road to ruin, if once falling, the stay is rare, and a recovery miraculous.  
There are sundry opinions argued between Valour and Policy, some are opinionated that policy transcends valour, having a respect to the speech of the Philosopher Achimedes, who saying of himself that he could conquer more with his gown in his study (meaning his studious way of contriving of Politic plots) than all his Enemies could perform in the field by their valours; others hold Valour of most force, comparing it to the Saltpetre in gunpowder which is irresistible; and Policy to the Gun, which being not charged with this spirit of Saltpetre, it cannot of itself be prevalent; but from both these ariseth a third thing which effects all, and that is the Bullet; Wherefore Valour and Policy must go inseparably together for the effecting of any matter of consequence; For the policy which judith had contrived within the City for the destruction of Holofer●es, had been to no purpose, 
Two things requireable in a valiant Soldier to make him fit to undergo the greatest misery war can reduce him unto.  had not her valiant hand put it in execution.  
In a valiant Soldier there are two things required to make him able to sustain so honourable a weighty burden; First, a love to the Wars; Secondly, a contented mind to bear any misery, that the fortune of the Wars may reduce him unto; he that hath a love to follow the Wars, takes a pleasure and delight in it, which ariseth from the sweetness of the object, which is honour and riches; All the passions of a man's soul depend upon pleasure or pain, which ariseth from contentment or distaste received from the object; Contentment is a firm prop to sustain a Soldier in the bloodiest Wars, after the love of that profession hath invited him to the managing of Arms; and unless a Soldier keeps these two companions close to him in his Warlike progress, the stamp of Mars will soon be eaten out; For although content be of an excellent virtue to qualify a Soldier's disposition in all matters of grief and misery, yet there was never any but had some occasion of grief betided him, War having so many alterations and sudden changes attending the issue of it: But however it bears him up by the chin from sinking into a muddy sadness, 
The definition of grief and sadness.  which is a base humour properly hanging about the understanding, which heavies and dulls the spirits, and extends to evils passed, present, and to come, following the understanding which comprehendeth all these times.  
There are three kinds of this blemish of valour which a Soldier should not once communicate with: 
Three kinds of sadness which blemish the valour of a Soldier.  The first is a sadness which ariseth as Scholars define it, praeter rationis Imperium, besides the command of reason; as motions suddenly ejaculated into the affections, do surprise a man.  
Secondly there is a sadness, Erga judicium rationis against the judgement of reason, and this subdueth reason for a while.  
Thirdly, there is a sadness, Secundum Imperium rationis, according to the command of reason, for his reason commands to be sad: These sadnesses dim the bright spirits that should enlighten a Soldier's actions; and as Seneca saith, Tristitia turbans non est in sapiente, Although sadness may trouble a wise man, yet it perturbs him not.  
Comines makes mention of a noble Family known by the names of the Laylands in France, 
Philip de Comines.  who held the Wars in such high estimation and love, and received such joyful content in them, that diverse generations of them spent their blood and lives in their Majesty's service, so that scarce one of them but died in some honourable attempt.  
Also Verticus, a chief Commander over the Rhemi, whose worth neither War nor age, could consume or blemish, having always borne a love, and taken content in that honourable profession; that even in his decrepit age being hardly able to bestride a Horse, he would not consent that any Battle should be fought in his absence.  
Of the same disposition was Camilogenus a noted Soldier amongst the Alerci, 
Treasury of time.  he could not be importuned to favour his aged body and to bid the War adieu, but returned this answer; that although his strength failed, yet his judgement and counsel should be of value and esteem.  
Also Strabo makes mention of certain Frenchmen which were taken prisoners; Alexander taking a survey of their manly dispositions and carriages; 
Strabo. lib. 7.  demanded of them if they were not fearful in the Wars, and what it was they most feared; they returned unto him this peremptory answer, (we, said they) fear nothing, except the Heavens should fall on our heads.  
Times have wonderfully altered those noble conditions which former ages have been endued withal; for in this age we fall short, (being altogether effeminized, and for want of exercise and experience) even of diverse feminine Sexes, whose worths are recorded in history for our learning and imitation, and to their immortal praise. As first the Warlike Amazons, after their chief Leaders Plinos, and Scholpythus were treacherously murdered with all their Warlike forces, 
Pezelin Sl●id.  which inhabited in Capadocia; their Wives with the rest of the feminine Sex, being possessed with grief and fear which bred desperateness in them; like Bears ravished of their Whelps, they plucked up their mad desperate spirits, making choice of Lampedo and Marpetia for their Conductors, who furiously set upon the conquerors, and in battle overthrew them, and afterwards wonderfully enlarged their dominions.  
After this Hippollite and Menalippe challenged the single Combat of Hercules and Theseus.  
Likewise Penthesilea assisted Priam's King of Troy with a brave troop of Virgins; the valour of these Feminines was grown to that height, that they scorned their male kind which proceeded out of their own loins, banishing them their society; and only chose to train up the Females in the feats of War; they invented diverse Warlike weapons, that the lubberly Males were not capable of the use of them.  
Further, in the Province of Palmira in Syria lived a famous Governess named Zenobla; being of such worth that she stood in contestation with Gallienus for the Empire of the World, She swayed all the Eastern parts.  
Also the unconquered spirit of Semiramis, who led in her Army 100000 Chariots of War, three Millions of Foot, and half a Million of Horse: She subdued the Ethiopians, the Indians; and She having re-edified Babylon, news was brought her (as she was plaiting her hair) of the revolt of this Town; whereupon leaving her hair half undressed, shoe went and besieged it, never ordering the rest of her hair until she had again recovered it.  
And our late Queen Elizabeth of famous memory may be a pattern to the world for her true worth and undaunted spirit, She managing both her foreign and domestic affairs beyond the capacity of man to conceive, that the World admired her high temper: Which was well seen in 88, with what a brave undaunted courage and heroic spirit of resolution, she comforted, her Subjects in their fears and eminent dangers: The consideration of these unmatclesse spirits might beget worth in our effeminate age, to drown our childish spirits in their seas of valour, or cause us to imitate the worths and valours of former Ages, who plucked out their Calvish hearts and infused the spirits of Lions into themselves, whereby they accomplished deeds which merited wonder; and the rather the more to be admired because of their mean breeding and simple parentage which could not afford them education; As we find it recorded in holy Writ, David, Saul, Gideon of mean parentage brought up in rural affairs; one keeping Sheep, the other Asses, the last with his Flail; yet when they assumed the countenance and spirits of the Valiant, what wonders they wrought, and with what honours were they dignified; the dangeroused enterprises that ever happened in their times they feared not to attempt, which was the stirrup that elevated them into there Thrones of highest dignity.  
Likewise we find in Histories, what admirable parts men of mean parentage have attained unto, and what Warlike wonders they have wrought; As Achilles the Son of Aeacus, was a long time hid under the garments of a Woman amongst the daughters of Licomedes; yet afterwards his spirit aspired so high, that he concluded the Trojans greatness, and overthrew their City from the top to the bottom.  
Galerius Maximianus borne and bred up basely; wherefore he was termed Armentarius, because he was a Neat-heards Son: he grew very fortunate in the Wars, being endued with great valour and courage, was after for his deserts made Emperor.  
justia was first a Swineherd, afterwards a Cowherd, next a Carpenter, a common Soldier, a Captain, and by his conquests which he obtained by his valour was made Emperor.  
Pompienus Maximus Son to a Smith, gave himself to virtue, and Military services, proving fortunate against the Polonians and Germans in diverse valiant Conquests, was after created Emperor of Italy.  
Also Maximinus a silly Shepherd, at his first inition into the Wars, behaved himself so honourably, that he was by the Soldiers made Emperor.  
It is wonderful remarkable what strange adventures the worth and valour of men have spurred them unto, to undertake for their Country's good, and their immortal honours: It were worth the observation, if one of a thousand in these our days would endeavour to perform the like, either for their private or popular good; As the Phileni did for the Carthagenians, 
Heylin.  who were in controversy with the Cyrenians about the bounds of their Territories: They being willing to end the quarrel, chose certain men of either City that should set out at one instant, and where they met, there the confines should determine; These Phileni being swift of foot, got far into the Country of Cyrene before they were met; whereupon the Cyrenians being enraged, wished them either to return back into their Country, or dye on the place; the valiant young men preferring the common good before private safety, accepted to be slain.  
That Reverend Feather of the Church Swinglius, a man not only endued with divine knowledge, but great learning, thought it a dishonour to him to withdraw his hands from the Wars for his Country's good; and the rather because he had incited others to be valiant in their Country's behalf, and to spend their blood in the defence of it; was himself the foremost man in the Battle fought near Zurich in Helvetia, where by his eager valour pressing upon all disadvantages, he was slain: Many Divines of our Age are not of that temper, but had rather appropriate some strange irregular ways to themselves, whereby contentions and factions may breed at home amongst their brethren, then to exhort men to do their Cowtrey service; but by their detractions rather dissuade them, then stretch out their own hands or hazard their bodies for the good of their King and Country; for we are grown so far from encouraging one th' other to follow the Wars, or to distribute any maintenance towards them, that we altogether discourage those that would venture their Purses, and hazard their bodies for the good of their Country: But we may learn of that ever renowned Lady Tiphania, Wife to Bertran du Gues●lin, and let her be the pattern to all such detractors which seek to deter men from their due service and honourable performances: This Warlike knight renowned in diverse Histories for his worthy enterprises, espoused himself to this fair Lady of a noble Family; his fame and honour being one chief cause she settled her affections; perceiving she by her amorous courses did withdraw his spirits and love from following the Wars, whereby his honour began to diminish; she gently reproved him (as he was courting of her) and blamed him for effeminizing himself, and leaving the Wars, whereby formerly he had achieved his greatest reputation; and that it neither suited with the nature of valour, nor duty of a true Gentleman, to lose the least repute of honour won before, by over much affecting his new made choice; as for my part (quoth she) I ought to shine by the bright radiance of your splendent fame; and shall think myself too much dejected, if you do not prosecute so honourable a course begun, and lose your spirits in doting on love: These her noble and wise corrections, did so near touch and trench upon the knights worth and valour; that he re-assumed a Warlike course, presenting his body against the hottest assaults that ever our English Nation tendered to the Kingdom of France; he fought against Edward called the black Prince; He restored Henry the eleventh king of Castille in his Kingdom, maugre the English Forces; he was after made Constable of France, and highly endeared unto Charles the Fifth.  
I could gladly wish all Ladies and Gentlewomen of so noble a temper, esteeming no honour to the fame purchased by Warlike actions, and instead of their tears and fond embraces, to rouse their noble Husbands to prosecute the use of Arms; as the brave spirited women of former ages have done; and for an example of their worths it is recorded in History, how the Women of Aquilegia a City in Italy, did so animate and assist their Husbands and other Soldiers being beleaguered by Maximinus, that when their Bowstrings failed, they cut the hair of their heads and made them new strings, all other materials being spent, whereby they preserved their City, and confounded their Enemies, to their never dying honours. I hope I have said sufficient concerning this subject, and I take it for granted, that all men's spirits have taken this Cordial of valour; so that now it stands requisite we should give some Rules, how and when we should set our Valours a broach, and when to refrain.  
First, when two Armies are daily in readiness to give Battle, 
Upon some occasions Soldiers ought not to misconstrue the forbearing to join Battle, and take it as cowardice.  there are three principal things to be considered; as namely, if we shall gain less profit by the Victory, than we may fear detriment if we should suffer an overthrow, upon this occasion we are to forbear, and Soldiers must not construe it as a trick of cowardice: To give you an example of the Duke of Guise when he invaded the Kingdom of Naples; the Duke of Alva had been unwise if he had given him Battle, for the French could have lost no more but their Army in that battle; but if the victory had inclined to the French, the Neopollitans had lost their Army and Kingdom with it; for it is a maxim amongst the rules of Mars, to delay an Enemy that is of greater Potency and far from his Country to gain relief, whereby his Victuals and Ammunition may be wasted, so that distractions and mutinies might breed in the Army, the Soldiers being overwearied in expecting the fatal day of loss or gain; so that the Natives may take at pleasure their best and safest occasion to give Battle, so that victory may be achieved.  
The second reason why an Army may refuse to try their valours in a pitched Battle, 
A second reason, why a General may refuse Battle without the imputation of a Coward.  and shall not be imputed as cowardice unto them; is when a General understands that his Enemy's Army will be broken and scattered without fight; whereof the Emperor Charles the Fifth may be example: For when he made War against the Protestants in Germany he would never join in Battle with them; for he was credibly informed that their Army consisting of diverse Nations could not long agree, but be dispersed without Battle.  
Thirdly, an Army may shun Battle and yet be void of Cowardice, if he certainly knows his power to be inferior by much to the Enemies, 
The third reason why a General may refuse Battle without the imputation of a coward.  so that he can in no wise hope for victory: In this case a General had better do as once a famous Warrior was wont to say; He would rather make his Enemy a Golden Bridge to March away, then give Battle upon unequal terms, for it is never good to assault an Enemy if he be perceived to make means to March quietly away without blows; for many times an Enemy having been brought into a desperate case, hath been the only thing which hath gained them the victory; as was well seen not only by the black Prince in France, but also by the Duke de Alva; he having beleaguered Aultmore in Holland, having blocked up his Enemy in the Town, would neither cappitulate of quarter, nor suffer them to steal out of the Town by flight; this made the Townsmen and Soldiers resolute, in regard they expected no favour▪ and with their manly courages resisted the Duke and put him to the foil, who otherwise would have fled and left the Town to the Conqueror: For indeed it is a great indiscretion to detain an Enemy that is flying to stop his passage: for without question, such valours are deprived of the sinteresis and light of natural principles, becoming equal to beasts, managing their proceedings without fear or wit; that will wilfully spill the precious blood of man, and may accomplish their ends without the hazard or loss of it: This was the honourable observation of a famous Warrior who left it in Rhyme for future Ages to consider of; the words were these,  
Spill not the blood of man, to win that hold,  
At which an Ass may enter at with gold;  
A Soldier's honour shines as bright  
In politic Conquest, as in bloody fight.  
Now it still remains we should take some observations, in the true discerning of Valour in an Army, that Soldiers may not flatter themselves with a false gloss of Magnanimity; 
The first observation of an Army endued with valour.  and in the performance of this, there are diverse circumstances to be considered;  
First, whether any sudden news or Alarms, amazeth or feareth them.  
Secondly, 
Second observation.  in time of danger, whether the currant of all men's opinions are levelled a like in their resolutions, to encounter and withstand those storms of perils to their utmost abilities.  
Thirdly, 
Third observation:  when danger hath enveloped and surrounded them, that nothing but Herculean blows can free them; whether then they manfully hew out their safeties, or basely yield, upon conditions far base.  
Fourthly, 
The fourth simptome of valour in an Army.  whether their great brags and high ostentations in time of safety and peace, continues in the same strain of action in time of danger; for Cowards are forwardest in words, and backwardest in actions.  
Fifthly, when an Enemy shall have the better of some one Wing or division of the Army, 
The fifth simptome of valour in an Army.  whereby they seem to be distressed; and for their particular safety, seek to save themselves by flight, or to desire quarter, by which others may seek to do the like, preferring their lives before their honours; thus disheartening the rest that would sell their lives at the dearest rate, such must be branded for Cowards, and are fit for no use but to make a Barricadoe for the Enemy to shoot against.  
Sixthly, when Victory is obtained, if there be not clemency and mercy used, as discretion shall see it meet, 
The sixth Simptome.  without an insulting way over poor Captives▪ for it is natural and consonant to the disposition of a Coward, to use all rigour and severity as he is a conqueror, that the World should take notice of him to be that which he is not.  
Seventhly, an Army being only in a supposed danger▪ and to eschew it, run themselves into an eminent destruction; 
The seventh Simptome.  for a Coward thinks the presentest danger greatest, and will strive to preventit, though a thousand times greater doth immediately by this occasion ensue.  
Eightly, 
The eight Simptome.  if there be disputes and detractions upon the point of service who shall give the onset; for it is far from a coward's temper to give an Assault, but valour will strive to have the honour of the onset.  
Now it remains to show how Warlike valour may be begotten bred and cherished in the breasts of Soldiers. 
How valour may be begotten and bred.   
The first is, to be conversant in reading such Histories as treat of Warlike actions; this will beget a speculative knowledge of all actions honourably performed by valour, and withal, it will acquaint them with the events that have happened, whereby dangers will be made more familiar to them; so that by this the least spark of valour will be kindled in a kind of emulation, to be possessed of the same honours in performing the like victories or undergoing the like perils; as we read of famous Tamberlin, who made it his practice to read often the heroic deeds of his Progenitors, which did so inflame his virtues, that he proved the mirror of the World. For noble acts of Predecessors are as flaming Beacons that fame and time hath set on hills to call us to the like occasions.  
Secondly, the Theory of War being truly understood, the stomaches of the valiant will boil with the conceit of the due honours and renowns that are thereby to be attained, and will force a man of courage to enter into the Lists of Mars, to perform in action, what before he only conceived incontemplation; in which large field he shall see all proceedings and events, whereby his body and min●● will 〈◊〉 habituated unto it, so that the very jaws of death cannot affright such a Soldier, who will sooner choose to be bereft of life, then stain his honour.  
Lastly for conclusion, such valiant Soldiers as take delight in the rudiments of War, will always have the faculties of their mind busied in plotting and projecting all kinds of circumstances, which may tend to the beautifying of this Profession; as it is recorded in the commendations of that valiant Soldier Pyrrhus; that in what place so ever he became, he in his walking would take notice of the Situation of each place he came into, and in his fancy would contrive how he should order his Battle there with the best advantages; observing the fittest places to hide some Ambusheadoes in to fall upon the Enemy's Flanks or Rear; and also which were his convenientest places for his retire, or for the safe encamping his Army, what passages were fittest to be guarded, and the like: Also in Fortified Towns he would observe the strength of their Fortification, and which place he could have best advantage to make his assault; with the nature and quality of the ground for the most advantageous placing his Engines of Battery, with millions of plots and devices, which in his fancy he contrived; whereby he grew so expert, that neither time nor place could pose him: This caused Hannibal to answer Scipio, that Pyrrhus was the best Soldier.  
And to conclude this discourse, let us observe and follow the command that God himself gave to his General joshua in charge, which was That he should be strong and of a valiant courage, 
joshua 1. vers. 6. 7.  whereby prosperity should follow him wheresoever his Army should go: The Lord of Hosts seeing it was a thing of such high consequence, He reitterated his former charge in a more emphatical speech, being a charge so special, that only and above all things, they should be strong and of a valiant courage, for without this nothing could be effected in the Wars.  
In consideration of this necessity of courage and valour, that valiant General Consalus, when he had drawn his Army before Naples; he gave his Soldiers to understand by his earnest protestations, (hoping they would imitate him) that he had rather dye one foot forwards, then to have his life secured for long, by one foot of retreat: Such noble acts and honourable deeds of valiant Soldiers cannot be buried in oblivion; but like the Phoenix, from whose preserved ashes one or other still doth spring up like unto them.  
The Ancients did so esteem of a famous name that they deemed it immortal, which made them ever ready to sacrifice their lives to gain honour, which was esteemed above the World's endowments: Thus according to my poor ability I have finished this discourse, though not so exactly as the subject requires, in regard my Scholarship and capacity are corrivals in simplicity.  
In the next place I intent to bring in a discourse concerning Duels, being a thing which assumes the cloak of valour, and may challenge a place in this discourse: but I have thought it most fit to make a particular draught of it by itself, wherein is showed, who hath favoured this kind of vindicating of honour by the sword; and what circumstances may be alleged for the supposed lawfulness of it, with diverse admonitions for the regaining of friendship; and lastly the unlawfulness of it, proved both by Laws divine and humane.    

A DISCOURSES UPON UNJUST VALOUR IN DVELS. SECT. IX.  

CHAP. LX.  
Of the opinions of diverse Learned men concerning Duels, with the chiefest Circumstances that can be alleged for the lawfulness of it, and so confuted both by Divine and humane reason; and so concluding with diverse exhortive reasons for Enemies to entertain a reconciliation.  
IN regard this discourse of Duels hath so near a correspondency to the former discourse of valour, I thought it meet to entreat of it in this place; and I must confess it is a high pitch of Magnanimity could it be warranted by divine and humane authority; and having duly weighed the nature of Duels, and likewise observed the opinions of diverse learned, they holding it altogether unlawful in regard it is repugnant to God's commandments, and the Laws of all Nations, which hate the idle expense of such precious blood, and will not licence the spilling of it, without a lawful calling for the preservation of King and Country; to these I must assent; Yet diverse hot spirits have desired to pry further into this subject, thinking to screw out a lawfulness, of the which they have fall'n short; I have therefore used my best endeavours to summon up the likeliest arguments, and pregnantest examples that my poor reading can afford, to set the best gloss on it for their sakes, although to little purpose; wherefore give me leave to speak my best in the behalf of the duelist, and afterwards I will be an Attorney of the other side; wherefore suppose there are diverse probabilities that may induce to conceive a lawfulness in some particular cases, having a respect to the limitations, and cautions that ought to attend upon Duels; and first having a regard to the necessity of War, and then duly weighing the circumstances belonging unto it; we shall find a secret policy lie hidden, which will plead for itself, and will go near to prove that combats are necessary, and happily within the limits of lawfulness.  
And although Yno Bishop of Chartres did complain against the French Churchmen, and especially in his letter to the Bishop of Orlians he assenting with diverse other learned men, which had taken a mature consideration of the good effects, the which might be produced from it; and having likewise scanned the ill and mischief that might consequently follow, did manifest and ratify the lawfulness of challenging the Combat, which I must likewise suppose they did upon good grounds, they having considered the manifold abuses, and most horrid aspersions that the 〈◊〉 of some degenerate spirits would invent, and falsely lay to the charges of those they hated, whereby both reputation and life of innocent men are endangered by false accusations, which being beyond the wit of man to screw out the truth, in regard no proof can be produced, to lead Authority to discern where the abuse lies, but only the justifying and denying of the parties accusing, and accused; so that the Engine of wit cannot invent a more politic and discreet way, 
A safe argument to prove the lawfulness of duels.  then by deciding the controversy by their Weapons; for reason tells a man, that in a just cause there is no man but will be resolute to defend his honour, and put forth his best valour to offend his Antagonist, his Combat being to maintain the truth, and having a good conscience on his side, doth add vigour to his courage; whereas contrarily a guilty conscience will so detract from the worth and valour of the false accuser, that fear will under mine his heart, whereby he cannot perform in such a manly way, as that party which hath right on his side; But admit there were no such thing in it, yet it would be prevalent to make men cautelous in abusing their Neighbour, causing to weigh the peril they must hazard; And although some have made this objection, that all men are not of like strength and valour, so that in that kind it may seem unjust; Yet it is to be supposed in way of answer, that an inferior man will not offer his superior in skill and valour, to scandalise him; and if a Superior in skill and valour should be so base, as to abuse or lay aspersions upon his inferior, yet the inferior hath the advantage to choose his weapon, which shall be fitting to his strength and skill, whereby he shall be able buth to defend himself, and offend his enemy; for we daily see by experience that very little weak men have had the better, as by the example of Sir john Vere, he (being a very little Gentleman) to maintain his reputation, being abused at the Hage in Holland by a French Colonel, being a proper brave fellow, who so far undervalved Sir john, that at his coming to the place appointed for their Combat, seeing a Country Bore at work near that place, he demanded of him if he did not see de cline manicke, meaning the little Gentleman, who presently came, and at a few encounters at single Rapier, slew the brave Caviliere. And for my own part I have observed, that in all quarrels that were decided by Duels, he that had done the injury, and did justify it by his Sword, did ever go by the worst, if not lose his life. But some may further object, that there is provision appointed by Authority to take up, and decide quarrels, and that the party abused shall have satisfaction by compelling the abusive to ask pardon, and to show contrition for the wrongs offered.  
I must confess this is somewhat and very colourable, yet reason and experience tells that such forced acknowledgements of satisfaction, doth not so fully cover the sore of dis-reputation, as when the party grieved compels his Adversary, either to give him satisfaction by justifying the disgrace he hath done, with his sword, or otherwise to bethink himself and cry peccavi; for although the Gentleman abused hath satisfaction before Authority, which God forbid but every man should obey, yet there remains a secret tincture of disrepute, which will sum in the stomaches of Soldiers, when they conceive Authority binds the hands of the offender, and strengthens the proceedings of the offended; a Soldier's honour and reputation ought to shine so bright, that no blemish should be descried in it, for the smallest stain of baseness or cowardice pierceth through the heart of Honour and Valour, reducing them to the secret scorn of all that knows them, in which respect it behoves Gentlemen and Soldiers to manage their actions and courses without giving offence, that they may live blameless and untaxt. Besides these reasons let us take a survey of the proceedings of the ancient Worthies of former ages. Amongst the Saxons Duels were very frequent and upon such occasions, which indeed are not to be tolerated; But I find principally in History, that the Gauls and the Saxons ordained a Law to decide such controversies, as no certain proof could be produced, and that by four ways, as Aenius Silvius reports.  
The first●was Camp fight or Combat, the accuser was with the peril, of his body, to prove the accused guilty, and by offering him his Glove or Gauntlet to Challenge him to his trial, which the other must accept or acknowledge himself culpable of the crime; if the crime deserved death, then to fight on horse or foot until one were slain; if imprisonment, than the vanquishing of the Adversary was sufficient, and to take him Prisoner; In this kind of Combat the accused had liberty to take another in his stead, but not the accuser.  
Secondly, they had another kind of way to try out the truth, which they used to Imbellick persons, and to feminine spirits, they termed it Fyre-ordeall, and was used upon accusations without manifest proof, although not without suspicion: He or she was after many prayers and invocations to take in their hands a red-hot Iron, or else to confess guilty.  
Thirdly, they were to be blindfolded, and diverse hot Shares and Coulters laid, and the parties offending were led over them; if they escaped without touch, or received no harm by touching them, than they were adjudged guiltless; it was practised upon Emma the Mother of King Edward the Confessor, being accused for dishonesty with Alwin Bishop of Winchester, which she performed without hurt; It is likewise reported of Runigund, Wife to the Emperor Henry the second, being falsely accused of adultery, that she to prove her Innocence, took seven hot Irons one after the other in her bare hands, and received no harm thereby.  
Fourthly, 
Numb. 5. 26, 27.  in holy Writ Almighty God himself ordained, that such women as were suspected of Adultery should drink of the bitter water of the Sanctuary; which if she were guilty, it should make her thighs rot off, and her belly burst; if innocent she received no hurt.  
Before we travel any further in this discourse, let us but duly weigh God's omnipotency, and his forwardness from time to time in protecting and assisting the innocent, which hunts after no wrong; and how ready and near he is in power to inflict vengeance upon those that are abusive, and seek the disgrace and detriment of their Friends and Neighbours; which power of the Almighty questionless did inflame the heart of David to answer the just Combat with Goliath, who had vilified, and dishonoured the Host of Israel.  
Solomon the wisest that ever the heavens shadowed, hath delivered it for Divinity in his book of Proverbs, that an evil tongue wounds like a twoedged Sword, and if it wounds so deep, it may endanger a man's life; therefore by the law of God and Nations, a man may make use of his weapon in his own defence, and his blood be upon his own head, that dares give the occasion, and stand to justify it; let this be but by the way.  
The third trial of hot water was used after the same fashion that the former was.  
Now the last was the trial of cold Water, which they performed in this manner, the party suspected to be guilty had a rope put about him, then being thrown into a deep Pond, if he sunk than he was freed, but if against nature he swum, than he was adjudged guilty, because the water abhorred to receive such a base person.  
Such hidden secret injuries, scandals, and abuses, perpetrated against the innocent; God did ever favour the manifestation of them, pointing out the truth in a miraculous way by his own finger: and in the bosom of the Church, where the horns of the Altar were a refuge for base bloody Malefactors, yet God would have the Lot to be in use for to discover, and make manifest the truth.  
Likewise David a man after Gods own heart, could not brook the scandalous railing of Shimei, although he would not act it himself in person, and in hot blood, he considering his own gross sins deserved no less, and that his invective vaporing somewhat trenched upon the truth; Yet the good King upon mature consideration gave express command, that his hoary head should not go in peace to the grave:  
There hath been, and still remains a custom of challenging the Combat for title of Lands, where the truth cannot be otherways decided; as Corbius challenged the Combat of Orsua for the title of a Lordship, which was performed upon a solemn day of Tilts and Tournyes.  
In England, Edmond Ironside fought a Combat with Can●tus the Dane for a Kingdom.  
In Edward the thirds time there was a fight between the Earl Momfort, and the Earl of Bloys, their contending was for the Duchy of Brittany; there were thirty English fought against thirty Britain's. Likewise upon the accusation of life, the Lord Henry Bullinbrooke Duke of Harford, and Mowbray Duke of Norfolk.  
Also between Sir john Ansley, and one Catterington, whom Ansley charged with Treason, and proved it upon him being victorious.  
The like between the Navaroys and one Welch of Grinsby; this Navaroys having accused Welsh upon Treason, was by him beaten, and confessed he had maliciously wronged Welch; whereupon he was drawn out and hanged. These and diverse other examples do plead hard for an Implicit lawfulness, seeing God doth by a supernatural hand favour it by bringing the truth to light, and that the Innocent are never put to the foil; thus former ages were opinionated of the lawfulness of Duels, and did give free liberty to Challenge an Adversary in the upholding their honours and rights; yet they would not make it a thing common, neither would they urge it upon every petty trifle, as now●adayes it is, who upon the giving the lie, will be ready to take the life of his Adversary: although indeed of itself, it is a very unsufferable thing, yet it is a thing the truth of it may easily be construed; for if he that gives the Lie do speak falsely, the dishonour redounds to himself, and shall need no greater punishment; but if he to whom the Lie is given proves guilty of it, indeed it were unconscionable and dishonourable to challenge him to do you right, that hath told you the truth (and he that gives the Lie, although it be upon good grounds shows ill breeding, and no gentle carriage) but this humour we have borrowed from the French, which they have held for a custom ever since Francis the French King, upon a breach of Faith, sent the Lie unto the Emperor Charles the fifth, thereby to draw him to a personal Combat, which afterwards grew to an humour through the whole Realm to make the Lie mortal, whereas formerly none would presume to challenge a man, unless it were upon some peremptory abuse done to their persons, or to their honours and reputations, which by it was so far eclipsed, that it was irrecoverably stained, unless they skrewed out the truth by this means, and before they would adventure to challenge their Adversaries, they would search and seek out the best means to gain the truth, and did use the fairest means they could devise, to bring their Enemies by fair means to confess his abuse, so that the Sword was their last refuge. Many times Authority would undertake the sifting out of the injuries, and then they were very punctually to observe, and stand to such Injunctions as should be given them in charge to observe or perform.  
Many times Friends would seek to mediate peace, and to sift out the truth; to this they would not be refractory, but did condescend to whatsoever might stand with their reputations and honours.  
Moreover, if their Enemies did desire to be reconciled, and would voluntarily ask pardon, and acknowledge their fault before such Friends, as best knew the carriage of the quarrel: then the party offended would not refuse this satisfaction, unless it were such an injury as did touch his life.  
Further, those that were injured, if they were constrained to challenge the field of their Adversary, in regard of their Enemies peevish refractariness, yet they would banish all envy, hatred and malice; not once admitting any of these to be the subject of their strokes, and that the ground of their challenging was rather to gain their wounded reputations, then thirsty to shed blood.  
In the next place the ancients of former ages did attribute a great deal of honour to such persons as were injured, yet were not furious and speedy to challenge his enemy, but would wait a convenient time to see if his enemy will come in, and acknowledge his abuses, for it could not be accounted a dishonour if the party offended did challenge his enemy within a year and a day; of all the dishonours that might be done a Gentleman the lie with a blow was held the greatest, and deserved presentest rebuke, because they esteemed a blow an absolute undervaluing, and a high disgrace which had no circumstances of arguing belonging unto it, for it did argue a voluntary and envious act, and there could be no plea of mistaking in it; but in all other abuses they conceived there might be a mistake which being argued might be acknowledged and reconciled.  
Lastly, they held that a noble enemy would bear himself so valiantly that he would scorn to take any advantage, although his judicious forwardness might have put his enemy to the worst.  
Now I have showed you how former ages did account of this kind of duels, 
The Combat is denied to a Christian in action, sufferance and right.  and how they did tolerate them as lawful, now I can do no less but like Penelope's web, unweave what before I had done, and show you how in diverse respects these kind of Combats are unlawful and not to be tolerated amongst Christians.  
In the first place the Duel or single Combat is denied to a Christian man, to do it, to grant it, and to see it, by reasons both divine and humane, as well Canonical, as Civil.  
It is prohibited by divine reason according to this argument, every act whereby God may be tempted, is prohibited to a Christian by the Commandment of God; for it is written, thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God: That God is tempted by the Duel or Combat, I prove it in this manner; To make trial of a thing, which cannot be reduced to an end by natural means, but only by the hand of heaven: such attempting is to tempt God, as it happeneth in these cases of Combats, where it is plainly and evidently seen (that by natural course and disposition) the strongest, active, and most powerful person ever vanquisheth the weaker, and of less ability; chose that the stronger body shall be overcome by the weaker, cannot happen but miraculously.  
Bringing then two such unequal persons into the field, victory is desired for him that hath the right on his side, to the end that the truth may be made apparent; But than God is tempted, 
Miracles only pertain to the power of God.  in seeking that he should perform a miracle; which must needs be so, when the weaker man conquereth the stronger, being a thing as it were directly against nature. I prove it further forbidden by divine reason; after this Argument, when a Law prohibiteth a thing, it forbiddeth also the doing of it, and a man performeth an especial inhibited thing, when he knoweth (by the divine Law) that he is not to kill a man; 
Murder may happen by Combats.  the Combat than is flatly forbidden, because thereby murder may happen.  
I prove it otherwise thus; The divine law forbiddeth every action, that differeth from the fountain of Charity, which is the scope and end of all virtues, and utterly expelleth vice; the act of Combat is far off from Charity, leaning unto vice, because charity is nothing else, but to love God and thy Neighbour, and he that enters the Combat to kill his Neighbour, is out of obedience to God. 
The act of Combat killeth charity.   
It is likewise forbidden by the Canonical Law, because it evermore followeth the divine Law, and in plain reason what the one inhibiteth, the other never allows. Combat is also forbidden by the Law of men; and the proof is, that every thing, which repugneth and contradicteth natural equity, is likewise prohibited by the reason of Man; because reason is grounded upon natural equity: the reason of equity amongst men, willeth that he which committeth a crime, should be punished, and the innocent cleared: not withstanding by Combat it falleth out many times quite contrary.  
It is further proved by this Argument; Natural equity whereon (as we have already said) all reason in men is grounded, 
Natural equity is for the conservation of mankind and combat is for his destruction.  is entirely for the conservation and increase of them. The act then which turneth unto the diminution and destruction of men, it is quite forbidden: so ought Combat to be, because thereby men kill one another, and men are of greatest price in the world.  
Moreover, every act which repugneth the Precepts of natural equity is forbidden by man's reason, because it is grounded thereupon: one of the Precepts is, that no man shall desire profit or honour, 
The two main precepts of natural equity are broken by the act of Combat.  by the prejudice of another. The second is, that no man shall wish that to another, which he would not have done to himself. The act of Combat contradicteth them both, because he which cometh so prepared into the field, coveteth his own glory, by the shame and harm of him against whom he fighteth, which is his Neighbour, and wisheth that to him which he would not have executed on himself, for he would vanquish and kill him.  
It is also forbidden by civil reason, and this is the rule; civil right prohibiteth every act whereby justice may be denied to men, or injury done them; Now in the case of Combat, oftentimes it falls out quite contrary for the innocent man dyeth, and the guilty offender remaineth alive, so that by this means justice cannot take her due place.  
Last of all, the honour of God, and the honour of men are laid into the Balance, or stand in competition; 
King james his observation upon Comb.  if Gods honour be slighted to set up the wounded reputation of a man, it maketh the sin most damnably presumptuous, and not to be tolerated amongst civil men. Now if you please, we will take a brief survey of what King James hath delivered in his publication against Combats, and Combartants; where he saith, Pag. 2. 
Pag. 2.  that the Law of Nature, never warranted the presumption of a Subject, to challenge any person to the Combat for his life, in cold ●loud, and upon advisement, nor any other act, than a necessary defence upon a violent assault, because a life might otherwise be lost before a complaint could be made, the weapons working their outrageous effects and ends in an instant, and without hope of redress. And yet the Civil Laws, which speak with the voice of Nature among men, do not admit so much as this defence of life by the sword, but upon necessity, and as they speak themselves, Ratione inculpatae tutelae, which is in such distress, as destruction cannot be declined, nor avoided otherwise: For if it fall out that the party set upon, 
Pag. 3.  be able to secure himself without sword, either by stepping aside, or by craving aid at the same leisure, that a Gentleman or any other wronged in his reputation, may take his remedy without rage or violence, before a lawful judge. The Duellers of these days must want this thin cover for an excuse of their audacity.  
For nothing can be more certain (saith he) than that Gentlemen do first offend against the Law of Nations, 
Ibidem.  which is indeed the Law of Nature among men that are endued with Reason, and created according to Gods own Image.  
They spare not in like manner to transgress the written Laws of God himself, which providently refers all kind of complaints, actions, and suits that concerns the bodies, 
Pag. 4.  and fortunes of men; all kind of strife between Title and Title, Plea and Plea, blood and blood; not to the humorous construction of the party's humour that is interessed (and therefore partiality corrupts) but rather to the strength of testimony, to the justice of Laws, and to the conscience of an upright judge; who bending neither to partiality nor prejudice, but looking upon the matter with uprightness of conscience and knowledge, is more likely than the persons whom the case so nearly and dear concerns, to resolve according to the strait level.  
We make no question but that if honour had been reputed such an Individuum vagum, or such a wild transcendent in former ages, as neither Civil Courts were able to contain (which notwithstanding judge of all matters concerning liberty and life, 
Pag. 6.  which are reckoned with reputation, Inter res inaestimabiles) nor the Court of Honour to confine (which was errected to no other end but to preserve men's reputations, and prevent the effusion of blood; which the other Laws of the Land did omit as things not appertaining to their ellement) some other course would have been found before our days, that had been more indifferent to have decided between the sense of honour, and the severity of Law: But we see the Laws of the Kingdom proceed capitally against all those that are found to kill their Enemies upon private quarrels in the field after a fair manner (according to the phrase) that is without treachery or fraud; and that there is no protection for such offenders either by the Court of Chivalry, or those strict Laws qualified or repealed by Parliament; although there have been many members of the said house, which have been Allied near in blood to those Gentlemen that have been guilty of these crimes.  
Thus you see it evident, 
Pag. 8.  how far all Challenges in cold blood swerve from all prescription and forms of justice that ever were; We may further add, that against the State of a King (whose Office is to take a precise account of all wrongs) and the justice of a Kingdom, that make distribution without defect, they transgress wilfully; for what can be more repugnant both to duty and humanity, than to snatch the sword of justice out of our hands, which these Duelists draw and exercise in their own wills, as if it lay in their own election to obey or not obey, as if they might keep a Postern Gate ever open, without Watch or Ward, to which it should be lawful for young Gentlemen, without consulting either Prince or judge to run headlong to their own ruin, or as if it could stand with the tender care, which we profess of concerning the Subjects in security, the State in strength, the Government in peace, to open the great vain, by which the Commonwealth might bleed, not as Fevers pestilent, ad animi diliquium, but rather as in the heart of Seneca, when hopes are desperate, ad vit● exitum; For this must be the issue of an unlawful act, which excludes all manner of satisfaction for wrongs, besides that of the sword, which observes no measure.  
These Challengers, 
Pag. 9  do likewise strongly cross the line of their own pretended level, and if malice did not stand too much in the light of reason, they would easily confess. For they pretending above all things to regard honour for a flourish, yet to satisfy their own inordinate desires, they fly the certain judgement of the Court of Honour, which is purposely erected to scourge such delinquents, as shall dare to transgress, causing them to give sufficient satisfaction, for the regaining of the Honour lost.  
The wrongs which are grounded of quarrels, 
Pag. 4●.  are either verbal; that is, when one Gentleman accuseth another of some dishonest fact, 
The distinguishing of abuses from whence quarrels arise.  or gives the lie: Or Real, by which is meant blows, stripes, or hurts in all degrees, though they differ in proportion; and beside, all scornful looks, acts, or figures, that imply contempt; all Libels published in any sort to the disgrace of any Gentleman, or person, whom that Gentleman is bound in credit to defend as himself; for all these (says his Majesty) trench as deeply into reputation, as the stab itself doth, into a man that esteems honour; wherefore whereinsoever reputation is aggrieved though it be but in the weight of one grain, it ought to be repaired and as much restored as hath been diminished; by which the seeds of Quarrels shall be bruised in the bud, before they come to bear the bitter fruits that are ever gathered in storms.  
Wherefore, he hath commanded the Lord High-Marshall, and the Lords Lieutenants and their Deputies in their several precincts, 
Pag. 45.  that so soon as they shall have notice of any abuses either by blows, or speeches, whereby a quarrel may be grounded, 
The party offending is to be immediately committed.  that they commit the party thus offending either to his own house or chamber, only in respect of disobedience to his royal prohibition: Leaving him to the Earl Marshal's discretion in what kind he shall give the party aggrieved satisfaction, according to the rules and forms, which upon like occasions; aswell within our Kingdom, as in foreign States are usual, before he be set at full liberty: For it is true, that this small instrument, the tongue in the body of man, being kept in tune, by the wrist of awe, prevents many fearful accidents that are apt to spring up out of neglect of discipline.  
If from a foul word, upon which a quarrel is begun the answer leap at the first bound to the lie▪ or a blow be given from which a Challenge is produced, or if Choler breaks apruptly into a Challenge at first; (as many times it happens, because the property of distempers is to confound all dealings, & to put custom out of course, it ought to be punished both for itself, and in itself ab origine;) the Saxons laid a fine of six shillings, as appears by antiquity, upon every one that uncivilly misgreeted his Country men. In Spain Vn hombre dislingado, a man that useth ill language, out of his liberty or looseness, according to his rank, is either whipped in the open streets or sent to the Galleys, and especially for this verbal injury the Lie, which works such conceit of horror unto gentlemen well borne, 
The Lie, ranked with the highest Verbal wrongs.  that they had rather endure the rack, than the reproach; this his Majesty was pleased to rank with the highest verbal wrongs and to be punished by the Earl Marshal accordingly.  
Wherefore his Majesty leaves the Earl Martial and other Lords authorised by Commission, to use their best discreet endeavours, in devising means to satisfy the party that is wounded by the giving of the Lie; wherefore his Majesty manifested his pleasure, that whosoever should stand convicted thereof in the presence of the Earl Martial; 
Pag. 50.  or of the Lord Lieutenants, or their Deputies; by proof sufficient, should be presently committed to prison; and that he be not suffered to depart out of durance, before he shall acknowledge both an error in his judgement▪ and a breach in duty, in upbraiding anyman with that uncivil term, which his tender caution hath very sharply prohibited; he shall also ask forgiveness of his fault in presence of the Lords, and renounce that interest which men claim in these days, in righting themselves by the fury of the sword, when justice, either Marshal, or civil, or both, provides with so great tenderness for their indemnity.  
Touching the first branch of actual offences by blows with the hand, stripes with a rod, 
pag. 52:  bruises with a Cudgel, stabs with a Dagger, or hurts with a Rap●er, his purpose was out of the sense of honour, to extend his punishment, as far above those ordinary degrees which are now in use, as the facts themselves exceed all humanity; wherefore he leaves the proportions and degrees of satisfaction, for such inhuman wrongs; to the caution and temper of the Earl Martial, or the Lords Lieutenants or their Deputies: 
pag. 53.  For we resolve (saith his Majesty) in this offence by blows, as in the other coming upon words, to punish the breach of order before, or in a higher strain than wrongs of reputation; wherefore all offenders in this kind that shallbe convicted orderly before the Lords, either by the strength of witnesses or by their own confessions; of striking hastily for any other cause, than their own defence upon assault, shall instantly be committed to prison; to the end, that during this time of breathing and respiring, they may learn, that Princes remit not actions, of such high presumption and contempt, 
pag. 54.  without due punishment; So that if any man shall so transgress by quarrelling, if he were not in commission of the peace before the fact committed, it was his Majesty's pleasure he should be peremptorily disabled from being put in, for the space of seven years' next ensuing, and if he were of the peace, upon notice given to the Lord Chancellor, from the Lord high Marshal or the Lords Lieutenants, he is to be removed and put out instantly; beside such parties offending shall not be quite free before they have acknowledged their offence at the Council Table, for breaking the King's ordinance; he shall promise before the said Lords solemnly never to offend upon like occasion in the like contempt; he shall be bound to the good behaviour, 
pag. 56.  during the space of the next six Months ensuing; and if they be of his Majesty's household, they are to absent the Court; besides his Majesty's pleasure is, that the person which is either hurt or stricken shall (besides these satisfactions given him) take the benefit of his action of battery at common Law, with a meaning that such censures be reputed rather Cumulative, then privative, of any lawful help that ●ustice yields.  
Further it is his Majesty's pleasure; 
pag. 57  that the very least abuses should not pass with out due correction; not so much as the trip of a Foot, the thrust of an Elbow, the making with the Mouth, or the hand an uncivil sign; and although these do neither bruise the bone nor maim the parts; Yet since the malice, the disgrace, and scorn in these things do so far exceed the fact itself (expressing the base and disgraceful reckoning, 
Ibidem.  which they that offer these contempts make of the person upon which they brave them) is to be taxed and corrected by the Lords, upon like terms, and with like severity.  
The party that kills, 
pag. 67.  if he escape with life out of the Field, shall be brought by a course of ordinary proceeding, without dispensation, or connivancie to the common Bar for trial of the fact: And (for a greater discouragement of all men that prefer their passions to civil duties) His royal Majesty doth potest and promise by the word of a King, that he would never by the strength of his royal prerogative, grant to any such offender; any pardon for his life, or any lease for life nor any other kind of grace or favour that might put such audacious adventerours into the least hope of life.  
But if it happen both parties after meeting, 
pag. 8●  upon Challenge in cold blood return alive out of the Field, (though generally we may observe, that neither the principals themselves that went of purpose to make good their agreements, nor the Seconds, that in a sort assisted, are punished by an ordinary course, which slackness rather multiplies offenders, then cuts off offenders) yet it was his royal purpose without regard of issues or events, 
pag. 86.  to punish very sharply and severely the presumption itself, in seeking either by the sending or accepting of a Challenge, to revenge that out of passion which justice would examine and correct, with greater indifferency.  
Whosoever therefore shall presume; (as it were in despite of Laws and Magistrates (either to send any Challenge, or to declare a voluntary acceptance, of the Challenge that is sent, 
pag. 87.  whereby Subjects may be drawn to trial by the Sword for their lives in the Field, his royal pleasure was that he or they, as number hit, be first committed to some prison used in the County for Malifactours that they may learn at good leisure to repent with sorrow what was committed with temerity. The punishments prescribed against reproachful quarrellours, 
〈…〉  and strikers, with provisional regard and tender care, shall be added in like manner Cumulative, to the censure of these Challengers in cold blood, as the wreckful executions of all passions, that those preparatory means, and outrages have kindled; They shall moreover for the space of seven years be suspended from the Court, 
pag. 88  without hope of forgiveness, that it may be found more easy for the Sea to brook a dead carcase, than the Court a quarrellor.  
Wherefore beside the penalties expressed in that which goes before, not with the quill of an Ostrich which may bow; but as the Prophet speaks, Vngue Adamanti●●, which cannot break; He doth further bind his purpose, Verbo Regio; that during the seven years' suspension formerly decreed, both from the Royal presence and his Court; He would never use nor employ any Gentleman, etc. in Peace or War, at home or abroad, 
pag. 90.  directly or indirectly in his Royal affairs: He vowed never to bestow on them the least fruit, or effect of his grace or favour, in Land, Lease, Pension, or by Letters commendatory to their advantage in the least degree, nor repute them other then as Sear fruitless branches, cut off from the body of the Vine, being made thereby uncapable both of sustenance and support, by which the members of all bodies as well Natural as Economical and Politic both subsist and flourish.  
His Royal Majesty did further commend unto the Lords; 
pag. 93.  the binding of all men to the good behaviour, that after fight upon Challenge, happen to return alive out of the field for six months at the least: for as the plagues that hang upon this censure are both many, and those very heavy; so doth the quality of the contempt deserve them all; moving busy fellows that are giddy, rash, and inconsiderate; to be well advised before they leap. 
pag. 97.  Those that think themselves secure by agreeing to fight in Foreign parts, where the Kings writ runs not, neither can the Laws of the Kingdom take hold of any Subject in that case, though the Romans, and in the Reign of the first potent Emperors, would have thought it strange, that the life of any Subject, taken by another Subject wrongfully, should not be lawfully accounted for. This reason happily did move the States of Brabant, before the dutiful admittance of Duke john to be their Lord in the right of his wife, 
pag. 98.  to bind him by oath never to spare the life of any Subject in that State, that should kill another in the field, though the act were done in a Foreign Government; the same reason may be, why the Lord Segrave (as appears upon Record) attempting only to pass over into France from Dover, for to perform a private quarrel, was condemned judicio Parium, by the judgement of his Peers, as if he had preferred by this act, the justice of Foreign Countries before his own.  
But for a redress of this, 
pag. 100  his Majesty having conferred with the learned judges upon this point, that though there can be no proceeding by the Common Law against one Subject that hath slain another, by agreement upon Challenge to fight in Foreign parts: Yet by appeal, so often as it shall please his Majesty to appoint a Constable and Marshal of England (for the present only) both to hear and add judge the cause; the party thus offending may be condemned in that Court to death (as by an Act of Parliament, made in the first year of King Henry the Fourth is evident) and to this his Royal Majesty did protest by the word of a Religious just King, to put this in execution; wherefore there should be no hope of former impunity, but that such offenders thus condemned, should without remitting or forgiveness be executed.  
As for Seconds which these Combatants make choice of, (to make the best of them) they are only stout assistants to bad ends, and their supporters being restrained upon pain of so deep penalty, they cannot but shrink Sublato principali, omnia cadant accessario. Between an Actor and an Abettor the difference cannot be great, wherefore his Majesty did find by the modern use of France, of the Archdukes Dominions, and many States in Italy, that the carriers of Challenges, and they that bring back answers, are both condemned and punished in a very high degree, upon a violent presumption, that they either blow the coal, or endeavour not to quench the fire; wherefore his Royal Majesty lays the same proportion of punishment upon the Seconds, the Carriers, and Intercommuners that is due to the principals themselves.  
His Majesty chargeth all persons of whatsoever rank or quality, 
Pag. 17▪  which are present in the place where a quarrel first begins, that upon pain of his Majesty's high displeasure, they first apply their best persuasions and endeavours, to the taking of the ground of the contention away, and the reconcilement of the parties minds if it be possible, if not, to call in with all expedition an Officer of the peace, that may bring the matter before the Lords in Commission before it be too far exasperated and ●nvenomed.  
Further, 
Pag. 113.  his Royal Majesty's pleasure was, that whosoever published a Challenge, or any one that did but relate any part of the quarrelous business should be brought o'er tenus, or otherwise as the cause requireth into the Star-chamber, and there be punished at the discretion and censure of the Court for their high contempt against his Majesty, and to be banished the Court, etc. And which is heaviest of all, his Royal Majesty did protest for his own part, he should never account of them but as Cowards; for it is ever held the part of a man to show his courage, when he is by Authority put to it in action: but he that seeks his reputation by plurality of voices amongst simple people, it is to be accounted to proceed from the knowledge and jealousy of his own weak imbellicke parts, as if a man could not winn● honour, but per ●●●dicata suffragia, in Ordinaries and Taverns.  
And to conclude his Majesty's publication; 
Pag. 114.  he wills every man that should find himself grieved with any whisperings or rumours spread abroad, or any other way abused, to resort to the Earl Martial, who shall right him in his reputation, if he finds he be wronged. Thus you see what a sovereign salve it hath pleased his Majesty to prepare for the saving and repairing of gentlemen's reputations; so that now you must confess with me, that there is no door left open for the Sword to pass out at, unless men would run willingly to destruction, by undergoing the penalty of the Law here, and the eternal wrath of the great God of heaven, who hath reserved revenge to himself, and none but himself shall repay it; and let us bless God that his Royal Majesty hath Authorized an Earl Martial of so Noble blood, and so conscious and respective, in desciding such affairs; he according to his own worth hath a tender care to render the due rights of honour and reputation to those that shall sue to his Nobleness, giving them a free admittance to crave his honours warrant for the conventing any such delinquent before him, and upon conviction, imposing due punishment upon such refractory fellows, with his Noble Injunction to the party offending, to restore the blemished reputation of the complainant, before he depart his presence, so that never any that came before his Lordship had ever cause to complain of partiality, or remissness in his Honoured course of judicature.  
And for mine own advice to gentlemen, having three several times tasted of this bitter fruit which hath grown by the Sword in the field, not so well then understanding myself, as riper years and more mature considerations hath since engraven in me, I do rather wish a fair reconciliation than a foul fray, for the reconciling of an enemy is more safe then to conquer him; my reason is because victory only deprives him of his power, but reconciliation, of his will, and there is less danger in a will that will not hurt, than in a power that cannot, and again power is not so apt to tempt the will, as the will is studious to find out means to provoke power; if the enemy be base it is a dishonour to meddle with him, if he be worthy let his worth persuade thee to atonement, for he that can be a worthy enemy, if once reconciled may be thy worthy friend, for if in a just cause he dares fight against thee, in the like cause as valiantly fight for thee.  
It is policy to be reconciled to a base enemy, be it but to charm his slanderous tongue, and use him as a friend in outward fairness, but beware him as an enemy, apt to reassume his base quarrels, for a base foe cannot but prove a false friend.  
And further let Gentlemen know that take a delight to busy themselves in such litigious affairs, Sicut not Martyrom pana, sic non fortem pugua, sed causa; as it is not the punishment that makes the Martyr, so it is not fight that declares a valiant man, but the fight in a good cause, when his King and Country enjoins: And he that makes use of this dangerous Salve to skin up his Honour, let him not use it as a delight, but as a necessity to constrained him; for the lawfulness is not to be questioned when a man is pressed with injuries or violent abuses▪ he may by the law of nature and of all Christian Kings fight in his defene● to preserve his person and honour.  
I have taken the greater pains in this discourse, in regard Gentlemen and Soldiers might be fully satisfied of the unlawfulness of Duels, which is proved by undeniable arguments: likewise to inform them if ●ase injuries be offered them how they may gain lawful satisfaction by the aid of Authority provided for that purpose. In the next place I shall proceed to discourse of the particular duties of all Officers, beginning at the meanest, and so proceed until I shall come to the office of the General of an Army.    

THE OFFICE AND DUTY OF EVERY PARTICULAR OFFICER IN AN ARMY. SECT. X.  

CHAP. LXI.  
The Duty and Office of a Drum to a private Company, and of the Drum-Major of the Regiment.  
BEfore we can further proceed in our intended discourse I hold it fit to entreat of the duties and offices of all the officers belonging to an Army, and that for two respects; first that all young Officers that never followed the Wars, might at the first view know their places, and the duties belonging to them; Secondly, that all Soldiers might likewise observe and take notice of every particular Officers duty he is to perform, and the Command he is to bear, that they may the better learn to obey them, and observe such documents as their Officers shall give them in charge; wherefore first I intent to begin with the meanest Officer of a private Company, and then proceed to discourse of every particular Officer of a Regiment; and likewise of the chief Officers of the Field, with their dependences.  
A Drumm● is one of the 〈…〉 Officers to a Company and diverse 〈◊〉 of weight and moment he is to be employed in; for many times they are sent to Parley with the Enemy, and to redeem Prisoners from the Enemy; therefore he ought to be a man of personage, faithful, secret, and trusty; He ought to speak several Languages, especially the Drum of a Colonel's Company ought to be thus qualified, he hath the command of all the Drums of the Regiment, and upon a March he appoints every Drum his place, and time to beat, using a due proportion to every one for their times of relief; In a Camp or Leaguer, no Drum must offer to beat for the relieving of the Watch before the Drumme-Major first begins; Most usually he is sent upon all employments too, and from the Enemy; he ought to have a small Drum for lightness to carry with him; he is also to have a paper wherein is writ the Contents of his Message, which is to be placed upon his Hat; When he approaches near the Enemy's Town, he is to make a stand a Musquet-shot from the Ports, and to beat a Parley, whereby they may know his intent; he ought to be of a singular good carriage, and discreet, to observe and take notice of all passages, that may give any intelligence to his Officers of the state of the Enemy; He must be very wary that nothing be screwed from him, neither by ●ayre nor foul means; wherefore he must be wary of the Enemy's friendship, in bestowing courtesies upon him especially in giving him drink, least in his cups he reveal any secrets: When a drum is sent out of the Enemy's Camp, he must not be suffered to approach near the Guards nor Ports until an Officer ●ee sent unto him (who must be attended with a guard of Musquetires) and having blindfoulded him; he is to be conducted into the Camp to the General's Pavilion where a guard must pass on him lest he should discover the weakness of the Campe. A drum ought daily in the day time in time of peace, to frequent the Guards and beat to the Soldiers, that they may distinguish, and know one kind of beat from th' other (viz) a Call, a March, a Troop, a Charge, an Alarm, a Retreit, etc. He ought to pass precisely upon the hours appointed for the relieving of the watch, to beat their drums for the summoning of the Soldiers together, and to do such other duties as shall be required: he must be obedient to his Captain, and the rest of the Officers, whensoever they command him to go, or stand, or to beat any point of war, every private Company ought to have two Drums at the least.   

CHAP. LXII.  
The Office of a Corporal and his Lansprezado, and how they are to demean themselves, both upon their Guard, and in the Company.  
A Corporal, being an Officer a degree above a private Soldier, aught to be a man of stayed years, of no less Wisdom, Valour, and Experience, than a Sergeant of a private Company should be; in regard many times, he is to officiat for him, his duty; his carriage and behaviour should be, such that all his Squadron might take good example thereby, he should be free from all Vices, especially the besotting Vice of drunkenness, by which infection a whole guard will soon be tainted; he ought not to suffer any drunkenness or misbehaviour upon his guard; for by this abominable vice of drunkenness, an Enemy hath had the advantage to cut off whole guards, and thereby have surprised Towns and Forts, as by diverse examples may be seen; as that of Breda, when the Turffe-boate lay before the Town with diverse Soldiers immured in it, the Enemy had no way to gain the wall but by the Skipper, who had recourse to the next guard and made them drunk: So that their duties were neglected; some being a drinking and most a sleep, the Enemy stole upon them at unawarres and slew them, and having gained the watchword from the Corporal, they soon surprised the rest of the guards, and by a sign given to the Troops that lay in ambush without, they entered the Forts and surprised the Garrison before there was any alarm given.  
Wherefore he ought to pass precisely upon his watch and guards; and to be very vigilant and careful in setting out his Sentries and duly relieving them, dividing the time of their standing, by the number of Soldiers in his guard, so that they may bring evenly the seasons of their watch about, one Soldier not standing longer than another; which he may do by the burning of a match, so many thumbs breadths allowed to each; he is duly to frequent and visit the Sentries fearing lest they should miscarry or be negligent, or sleeping: it is at his choice to command any one of his guard to stand at Sentury, first or last.  
He may make choice of one of the sufficientest Soldiers of his guard to be his Lansprezado, who shall negotiate his duty and office upon all occasions; and all the Soldiers upon the guard are to obey him; the Corporal is bound once a day to teach his Squadron their postures, in the presence of his superior Officers; he is to observe the same order and dutiful obedience that the rest should do; his Command is no further than upon the Guard, where he bears his Captain's authority; upon all Alarms, he is to draw out his soldiers, and to order them so, that the best and safest resistance may speedily be made, until more aid shall come to succour them; He is to have continual fire upon his Guard, to refresh his soldiers in Winter, and 〈◊〉 to light their matches thereby; He is to be allowed certain Candle, that every man may see to arm themselves; he is to examine every Soldier's Bandiliers, what powder is in them, and what Match and Bullets they have; and in time or War, every 〈◊〉 is to be loaded with powder and Bullet, and every man his match continually light● After the Watch is set, and he hath the Watchword from the Sergeant; neither himself, nor any soldier shall depart the Guard, upon pain of death, until the Watch be relieved by sound of Drum; their duty is to keep their Guard from Sunne-setting 〈◊〉 the Evening following, and then they are to be relieved by their Sergeant with another Squadron, at which time they are to stand ready before their Guard in complete Arms, until that Squadron which relieved them, have set out his Sentinels.  
Every Sentinel that is placed before the Corpse du Guard, is to stay and cha●ge his weapon against any man that shall come upon the Wall, not suffering him to pass, until he calls out his Corporal to take the Word of him, which Word is very secretly to be given and taken; he is to give the Word to the Governor, Major, or Captain of the Watch, but to none else; The Corporal is to command two or three Soldiers to guard him; he is to have his sword ready drawn, and to place the point towards the breast of him that gives the Word, for fear of treachery, and if he falters in the Word, and cannot deliver it right, he is to take him into his Guard, and there keep him until the morning, and then send him with a guard before the Governor; also in times and places of danger, he is to set out double Sentries, a Pike and a Musket, so that if the Enemy approacheth, he may discharge his Musket, to put the Guards in a readiness to make their resistance; The Corporal is to be a Musketeer, and is to have the chiefest place in his Squadron, according to his eldership.   

CHAP. LXIII.  
The Office of a Sergeant to a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in the Field, declared.  
A Sergeant of a private Company ought to be a man of good experience; and sufficiently instructed in all Marshal exercises, and if it were possible he should not be inferour in knowledge and skill to his superior Officers; he ought to have a quick spirit, and active body, able both suddenly to conceive, and painfully to execute, his superior Officers, orders, and commands, it importeth much that he be a skilful valiant Soldier; in regard he is put upon weighty and dangerous services; he ought to be very ready and skilful, in ordering and rancking the Company, and in knowledge of exercising the same, he ought to take all occasions in time of peace, to call forth such squadrons as have the guard, and duly to exercise them there, also to show every particular Soldier their several postures, and so fit them in readiness for the chief Officers to exercise in gross; he ought to be learned both in writing and in Arithmetic, he is to have always a Squadran-rowle about him, wherein he should distinguish every man by the arms he bears; his duty is when the drum beats for the watch setting, to repair with his Holberd to his Colours, where he ought to call over particularly every Soldier of that Squadron, and view the fixenesse of their arms, and what match, Bullets, and powder every man hath, he is to rank the Squadron, and if no superior Officer be there, he is to troop away with them to the guard with his Holbert advaned.  
He is to attend the coming of the Major of a Garrison, or the Sergeant Major of his regiment, 
What order the Governor gives him in charge, ●he is to let his Captain understand of it.  (if they be entrenched in the field) for the watchword; and to receive such orders from him, as he hath received from the Sergeant Major general of the Army; or from the Governor of a Garrison, he is to give the word to his Captain first if he be in place, and then to each superior Officer, and lastly to the Corporal; The eldest Sergeant in a March leadeth up the division of Musqueti●es in the rear, 〈…〉 of training they are to look that every man keeps his Ranks and files duly, help order the company all the time of exercise; in time of War he is employed upon parties which are sent out to discover, or to fetch in Booty and Farrage; likewise many times to the guarding of passages; also in laying out of Perdues and visiting them: Also in ordering of Troops that are drawn out to charge some part of the Enemy, where he is to bring up the Musquetiers to his superior Officer in good order to skirmish, and to give fire upon the Enemy, and so orderly to lead them off again, seeing them rank themselves fairly, and causing them to make ready their pieces to come up to give fire again; also in retreat, he ought to assist the Soldiers discreetly in keeping their orders, lest confusion betides them; Also in time of fight to see the Soldier's Bandeliers filled ready that no stay be made, and to see the Powder transported after them securely; he is also (when his Captain, is Captain of the Watch,) to call out the Gentlemen of the Round to do their duties, and to give them the Word, he ought to assign every Soldier his due and proper place to March in, that no contention may arise; he is to place the chief Gentlemen in the Front on the right hand file; the next in degree is to lead the lefthand file, so placing every man according to his degree; he ought to see that every Corporal be a Musquetiere; he is to fetch the powder, shot, and match from the Magezine, and distribute it to each Corporal, and so to each Soldier of their Squadron: He is at his Captains command to carry all delinquents to Prison, and see Irons put upon them; If scarcity of Victuals should be in the Camp, he is to procure it from the Ammunutioner of the Army, lest the Company fall in want, which being procured, he is to distribute it to the Corporals, and they to their Squadrons; He is also to instruct the Drums the true tone of beating, viz. a Call, a March, a Troop, a Charge, an Alarm, a Retreat, etc. He ought to be resolute and forward in times of skirmishing, showing worthy examples to the Soldiers, that they might imitate him; He ought by his serviceableness, and care to gain the love of the whole Company, it must be far from him to be addicted to the hellish vice of drinking, drabbing, or dicing, using his best endeavours to shame such as should in that kind transgress; Also he is not to permit any Soldier that is in drink to perform any duty of charge for that time, for fear of sleeping or quarrelling, whereby much inconveniences may ensue, but rather seek to punish him severely, that all may take example by him to beware of the like oversight; He is every night at Drum-beating to draw Billets for his Guard, and accordingly to lead his Squadron to it; and thus behaving himself wisely and valiantly, 
If the Guard be at a Port then the Sergeant is to guard with his Holbert all the day with the Squadron, and many times all night in times of danger.  he shall gain honour and reputation, which will be steps to advance him to higher fortunes: And to define the office of Sergeant truly, he is to be the eye, ear, mouth, hand, and feet of his superior Officers; I could wish our Sergeants of Bands here in England were thus qualified for their Captain's sakes; but I fear the blind will lead the blind, and so fall both into the ditch; it were happy if they would endeavour to learn to understand their office, against his Majesty should have occasion to use them.   

CHAP. LXIIII  
The office of an Ensign to a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in Field declared.  
AN Ensign being the foundation of the Company, aught to be endued with Valour and Wisdom, and to equal his superior Officers in skill if it were possible; The honour and reputation both of Captain and Soldiers, depends upon the welfare of the Colours, and contrarily there can be no greater dishonour then to lose them; 
Ensign Epps at the Battle of Flanders, etc.  I have read in History of Ensigns that rather than they would undergo the dishonour of losing their Colours, being so dangerously charged by the Enemy, that either they must yield them up, or be slain, have chosen rather to wrap them about their bodies, and have leapt into the merciless waters, where they have perished with their Colours most honourably to their immortal ●ames: after any Company is 〈◊〉, if the Ensign hath behaved himself honourably, the Captain ought to bestow the Colours on him as a favour; in the absence of his superior Officers, he is punctually to supply their places, and to pass upon those duties which they should, whether it be to be Captain of the Watch, or to be commanded our with some Troops for the guarding of some passage to prevent the Enemy's approaches; He is to exercise his Company in all their postures; he ought to be gallantly apparelled▪ with a fair Sword and Brigandine; if he be commanded to pass upon any Service with part of the Company, he is not to carry his Colours; also, if the 〈◊〉 Company are to guard some dangerous Outworks, as a half Moon, or a Redou●, the Company is to troop thither, and he is to leave his Colours in the quarters with a sufficient guard over them, and he is to take for his weapon a good Pike.  
Also, every Soldier's honour is highly engaged to defend and preserve their Ensign, and if occasion of necessity should happen, they must not spare to run upon the Pikes to relieve him, as divers valiant Soldiers formerly have done: Histories have eternised to their immortal fame the honourable exploits of Captain Morerula and his two Brothers, one of them being his Ensign at the siege of the City of Africa in Barbary, in Charles the fifts time, when john de Vega Viceroy of Sicilia scaled the Walls of it; this Ensign being sore wounded and overthrown his Brother being Sergeant seconded him, and recovered the Colours, who advancing forwards like a valiant Soldier was slain; the Captain Brother to them both, took up the Colours, and performed the Ensigns office, who in the scaling of the Wall, was sore hurt and died thereof; thus three valiant brethren died honourably in defending their Colours: if an Ensign should lose all his Colours from the staff and hose, it is no dishonour; When an Army is drawn into Battalions, the Ensign ought to stand out before the front of it some five paces, and if the General, or some other chief Officer of the Field pass by, he is gently to veil his Colours holding the butt end of his staff at his girdlested: Also a maxim that no Soldier moves Hat or Helmet to the greatest Commander that is, but only to bow his body to him; Likewise in time of Battle the Ensign is to withdraw himself for his safety into the middlemost Rank of the Pikes. Likewise in a March the Ensign is to march before the first division of Pikes with his flying Colours.  
If a King or great Prince passeth by, the Ensign is to veil his Colours close to the ground with his knee bending, in token of Allegiance and submission; every Ensign of private Companies ought to observe how the Ensign of the Right hand of the Battle order his Colours, after the same manner he is to order his; every Soldier upon an Alarm is speedily to repair to his Colours; likewise not to forsake them until they be lodged; when any Company shall march either into Camp●▪ Guard, Fortresse, or Castle, no Soldier ought to disarm himself, until they see first the Colours placed, and the Ensign disarmed; Likewise, no sooner shall a Soldier see the Ensign take up his Colours, but they should arm and rank themselves immediately.  
No Ensign ought to disarm himself upon any Guard, Camp, or Field, until he sees that with safety he may do it; Likewise an Ensign should show himself forwardest with his Colours in assaulting a Fort, or entering a Breach to encourage the Soldiers manfully to fall on to defend, and make way for them; he ought to behave himself so, that he may gain the love of all the Soldiers, whereby his own person shall be in the more safety, when he shall attempt any perilous exploits, for love will command a Soldier to fight, when all things in the world else 〈…〉 him forwards, and let him know that the virtue of the Ensign 〈…〉 the virtue and valour of the Captain, and his whole band; I could wish 〈…〉 Captain's would be pleased to be more circumspect in their election of 〈◊〉, and not to put undeserving fellows, of base birth and quality into place of 〈◊〉, which deserves Gentlemen of quality to officiate, the Office of 〈…〉 place of repute and honour, doth not s●te with every Yeoman, Taylor, or Fidler, as I have known to one Company in Essex, all these o● the like Mechanic fellows have had the honour to bear the Colours before a generous Captain of Noble birth, whose name I forbear to relate, but let it be an 〈◊〉 to all generous Captains to make choice of Officers that are well bred and deserving, otherwise they do but disgrace themselves, and abuse his Majesty's service, and the reputation of our Country.   

CHAP. LXV.  
The Office of a Lieu●tenant to a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in Field declared.  
A Lieutenant is an Office of high credit and reputation, and he ought in all respects to be well indoctrinated and qualified in the Arts Military, and ought not to be inferior in knowledge to any Officer of higher authority; for an unskilful Captain may better demean himself with an experienced Lieutenant, than an unskilful Lieutenant can ●adge with a skilful Captain; because all business belonging to a Company, is for the most part ordered by the Lieutenant, the Captain having other employments of great importance; he is to see the company fitted in all respects for service, he is the right hand to his Captain in aiding and assisting him as well in the brunt of Battle, as in Peace; he is to see to the fitting and furnishing of all things necessary belonging to the Company; he is to keep a perfect roll of all the Soldiers in the Company, and to observe that every Squadron be complete, he is to view the sufficiency and ●●●enesse of the Arms, and to give order for the repairing of such as shall be found defective: he is to order and rank the Company fit for his Captain to March with; he is to divide his Company into four divisions, making two divisions of the Pikes, and two of the Musquetieres'; he is to rank the first division of Muskets in the Front, and the second division of Muskets in the Rear of the Pikes; he is to March in the Rear of the Company into the Field, and in Marching out of the Field, the Captain is to March in the Rear and the Lieutenant in the Front; he is carefully to pass upon his duty to see the squadrons drawn to the Guards for to Watch; he is to be very careful and diligent in exercising his Company, either by squadrons upon the Guards, or the whole Company in the Field, assuming fit and convenient times; he is to lead on the left Wing of shot in time of service; in time of exercising he is to help order the Company so that his Captain may have the more ease and freedom; he ought to be silent, and to cause silence in the Company during the time of his Captain's exercise; he ought to be in the Rear of the Company to instruct the Soldiers how to act and observe the Captain's commands, he ought to call over the Company, and take a particular survey of every defect; he ought to rule over the Company, and take a particular survey of every Soldier in his Captain's absence, for than he is in absolute authority, and the Soldiers are bound to obey him as their chief in all respects; he ought not to refuse to be put upon any service by his Captain; or Colonel, or any chief Officer of the Field; also he is not to be sent upon any convoy, or to guard any passage without a sufficient Troop of Soldiers, fifty or sixty at least, if less, than the Ensign is of sufficiency to command them: he is to view his Captain thrice a day, Morn, Noon, and Night, but especially in the time of War to see what he hath to command him; he is to take notice of what discords, quarrels and debates arise amongst the Soldiers of his Band, he is to pacify them if it may be, otherwise to commit them; he is to judge and determine such disputes with gravity and good speeches, and where the fault is, to make him acknowledge it and crave pardon of the party he hath abused; he is duly to see the Watch set, and to follow them to the Guard and see the Sentinels set out, and give them their charge what they are to do: If he be in the Field, he is to visit the Sentry Perdues very often, he is to command the Soldiers in a kind of perswasory way to obey their Corporals, and Sergeants; wherefore he ought to give good language, in a discreet and wise manner to move and persuade them, with 〈◊〉 reasons to the observation and obedience of Military discipline, 〈◊〉 his Captain of many ●oyles; he is to be careful that every Soldier have a sufficient lodging in Garrison and in the Field a Hut: he is also to take due care of the sick and maimed, that they perish not for want of means or looking unto; he is also to take care that the Sutler's do not oppress and rack the poor Soldiers in their victuals and drink; he is to see the Company provided with all kind of Ammunition, with Axes, Mattocks, Spades, and the like to build their Huts withal; these instruments are to have the mark of the Gallowse set on them, in token of death to them that steal them; He is in his Captain's absence to sit in the Christrade or Marshals Court, to define of the punishments which are to be inflicted upon Delinquents and Malefactorus, their punishment going by most voices; he is to set a Guard at his Captain's Tent, and likewise at the Colours, where he ought to give order for a fitting place to hang up loose Arms; His Hutt ought to be in the head of the quarter upon the right hand, and the Ensigns on the left, and the Sergeants at the Rear of the quarter; he is to be always in a readiness to answer an Alarm, and with all speed draw his men if they be in Garrison, to that Port or Guard his squadron hath the Watch at; if in the Camp, then to the Brest-worke before their quarters, where he is to place betwixt each Musket a Pike for their better defence: In Garrison he is to be Captain of the Watch in his Captain's stead, only for the ease of his Captain, where he must be very circumspect upon his Guard; he is to have his Ensign and his Sergeants to attend him, he is to go the first round with a Sergeant and two Gentlemen at the least to attend him, where he is to take the Word of every Corporal, and to see that the Sentinels be duly placed out, and to give them charge to be very circumspect in their Watches, that upon the sight of the Enemy, or the seeing of their Matches sparkle, or hearing their Armour clatter; they presently inform the Corporals, so that an Alarm may be given to the Town, but he that shall give a false Alarm is to be imprisoned; The Lieutenant is to go the Patroule with a sufficient Guard about all the Streets within the night to prevent treason in the Town, or to discover fire or ill orders as quarrelling, etc. He is to March in the morning with the Major of the Garrison at the Drum beating to the opening of the Ports; he is to be guarded with all the Gentlemen of the round; In Summer time at Watch set, he is to draw his men in Parrado in the Market place, with all the rest of the Companies in the Town, their Companies being complete: If in the Field and to go upon service, he ought to see prayers read in the head of the Troops every night, and every Sabbath all those Soldiers that have not the Guard, he is to compel them to go to their Colonels Tent to hear Prayers and preaching; he is to be religious, valiant, and wise, his Arms is only a Gorget and a Pattisen.   

CHAP. LXVI.  
The Office of a Captain of a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in the Field briefly declared.  
THe Office of a Captain being so honourable, and a place of such great consequence that it ought not slightly to be considered of; wherefore they ought to be men of excellent quality and of undaunted valiant resolution; he should not be inferior in knowledge and skill, in all the circumstances and actions belonging to War, in as profound a manner as the chiefest Officer of the Field, for he hath a charge of great importance committed unto him, he being many times called to execute the Office of Sergeant Major, or Lieutenant Colonel; beside he is exposed to all manner of danger in the Wars, for no Captain but must lead on his men in the face of the Enemy, and charge them in the teeth, which if he be not skilful as well to lead them off as draw them on, he may be the occasion of spilling of much blood; he ought not to be a man chosen altogether for Birth, Means, Personage, favour or affection; but for his wisdom, civility, valour, and experience; the unexpertnesse of a Captain hath been the ruin of Armies, and destruction of Commonwealths; In the time of peace every brave fellow desires to be honoured with the name and charge of a Captain; but when War approacheth and the Enemy is at hand, they quake their swords out of their scabbards, and had rather make use in fight of their Wings, than their talents: A Captain ought to be well seen and read in all the Liberal Sciences, to be acquainted with History, and to have what speculative knowledge that may be to join with their practice, all kind of Stratagems should be similiar with him, and nothing should be wanting that might make him an accomplished Soldier: A Captain ought to have regard to the due exercising of his Soldiers, fitting them in all points for service; he ought to see his Soldiers furnished with all things needful; as Arms, Munition, and their Weekly pay duly at the appointed times; he is to be very conscionable in delivering them their off-reckoning and apparel; he is to pass very strictly (if it be in time of War) upon his Watch; being Captain of the Watch, he is to command the Gentlemen of the Rounds to be set out, and to have the Word given them. If he be in the Field, he should lead out the Perdues and see them visited in due season; then afterwards his Lieutenant, and other inferior Officers are to do the like: If he be in Garrison, in time of danger, he is precisely to go the first Round himself, being aided with his Sergeants and diverse Gentlemen, where he must view the strength and sufficiency of every Guard, and how every Officer doth dispose of his Soldiers; he is to take the Word of every Officer in his Round at every Corps-du-guard▪ If he be Encamped in the Field, than he is to go the Patroule through his own Regiment, and cause all Sutler's to extinguish their Candles, and to suffer no drinking after the warning Piece is discharged: If his Company be 200 strong, he is to have four Corporals, and to divide his Company into four even parts (viz.) Fifty Soldiers in a Corporal-ship: In the time of Peace and being in Garrison, one Squadron only watcheth, beginning with the eldest Corporal-ship the first night, and so successively one Corporal-ship relieving the other: In time of War, half or whole Companies, specially being in the Field, no Guard shall be relieved but once in 24 hours; he is to make choice of the chief and ablest Soldiers being men of quality to be Gentlemen of his Company, and they are to Guard with the Captain of the Watch by turns, and to walk the Round about all the Walls and Bulwarks; they are to give the Word to the Corporals at every Guard; they are to discover the Enemy, and to see the Sentinels do their duty; which if they cannot or mistake it, the Guard is to charge them with their weapons and apprehend them as Enemies; The Captain is to lay out these Gentlemen Perdue upon convenient passages ●nd apt places, to discover if the Enemy should Sally out, according as the place is in distance from the Enemy's Trenches, so must the number of Perdues be laid, one a pretty distance behind the other, so that if occasion be they may retreat back one to the other, and so give notice to the Camp that they may prepare for an Assault: those are to be relieved every hour or half hour; also the Captain is to instruct his Soldiers how to make an Assault against the Enemy, and also how to defend an Assault: He must be a good Engineer, to know how to raise all kind of Works and Trenches, and how to place his men upon the Flanks to scour the Bulwarks by the line of Level; upon a Brestworke in the Camp he is to place betwixt every two Muskets, a Pike, the Musquetiers are to give fire and fall off, and another immediately to present in his place, the Pikes are to stand firm: the Captain is to have his Armour of proof, and a fair Pike for his defensive and offensive Arms: He is to have two great Bougets made of dry Neats-leather, which will hold a hundred weight of Powder a piece to furnish his Musquetiers withal: He is to see the Bandyliers filled with Powder, with sufficient Match, and Bullets; he must be ever in a readiness to answer an Alarm, and the first that shall charge the Enemy: If the Enemy makes his approaches against the Camp, after the Captain hath drawn his men up to the Parapet to make resistance, and being all ready to give fire, he is to command that no man gives fire until he gives order, and so suffer the Enemy to come up as close as may be, and then give him a brave volley of Shot altogether in his teeth, 
If it be in the dark, or night season.  one Musquetire relieving the other, the Pikes charging manfully and steadfastly; at all convenient times he is to drill his soldiers very accurately, showing them all the postures of the Pike and Musket, then how to march, countermarch, to double their Files, and Ranks, the middle men to double to the Front, to advance forwards, and to retreat backwards at the sound of the Drum, to wheel about his Musquetiers, to make ready, present, and give fire, to give fire in the Front, in the Rear, and upon either Flank, to fall off by Files and give fire, as we shall hereafter more largely discourse of. A Captain ought to march into the Field in the Front of his Company, and his Lieutenant in the Rear; but marching out of the Field, the Captain's place is to bring up the Rear, and the Lieutenant to lead the Company; the Ensign is to march before the first Division of Pikes, the eldest Sergeant is to bring up the next Division of Pikes, and another Sergeant the last Division of Musquetiers.  
The Captain ought not to do any real act in the Wars, without Commission from higher Authority, he is to lead up the right Wing of his Musquetiers to charge the Enemy, and his Lieutenant the left: when a Captain makes choice of a Lieutenant or Ensign, he is to draw his Company into Arms, and one of the Gentlem●n is to carry the Pattisen or Colours, and being marched into the Field, the Captain is to deliver the Pattisen or Colours (in the head of the Troop) to the Officer he hath made choice of, commanding the Soldiers to take notice of him, and to obey him as their Officer; he is to make choice of diligent Sergeants, and vigilant Corporals, a trusty Clerk, and good Drums; he ought to have one Wagon at the least, to carry his Baggage, and to conduct sick soldiers; he is to be as little pestered with luggage of his own, or his soldiers, as possibly may be▪ lest it should hinder their march, and also upon any service, be rather forward to fight for goods, than have their minds homewards, fearing to lose their own; he ought not to be covetous nor niggardly, but forward to gratify all good services with some gifts and courtesy, whereby he shall endear his Soldiers to be prodigal of their lives to do him service: he must be familiar, and eloquent in persuading and dissuading his Soldiers, and to stir up their valours to undergo pain and peril; if a Soldier transgress, 
Note, the Captain is not to release any prisoner that is committed by any of higher authority, without their consent.  he ought not to beat him, but to send him to the provost-marshal to have Irons laid on him, by beating of a Soldier, a world of hatred will be stirred up, and happily private revenge; he ought to be very careful to keep his Soldiers in action, whereby idle expense of time (as drinking and playing) may be prevented which usually ends in quarrelling and bloodshed: He is to have Lanterns and Torches, such as will burn in any Storm and Tempest, for they may stand him many times in great stead: he is to have his Tent in the head of all his Troop, and to be conversant with them, showing them ensamples of hardship; he ought always to have his Colours and his Drum in the Field when he exerciseth his Company, as well to give the more reputation unto the action, as also that the use of them may be well known.  
Lastly, 
Quem 〈◊〉 oderunt quenquisque odit perisse experit,  a Captain ought to carry himself in such a way, that his soldiers may both fear and love him, too much familiarity breeds contempt, and too stern a carriage begets hatred; and so let him not over-value his life, but expose it to the fortune of the War, using his best skill and endeavours to annoy his Enemies, and to be diligent and forward in executing such commands as Authority enjoins him, and so to persist in a resolution to fear nothing but infamy.  
And I will conclude, with an Exhortation to all Noble Captains, desiring them for their credit's sake, and for the honour of our gracious King, and welfare of our Kingdom, to be more diligent in the discipling of their soldiers, and not to chop and change so many new men into their Companies that between muster, and muster the third part of the company are new untutored fellows, that knows not their right hand from their left, so that it is a labour in vain to instruct them; and they are the means of putting all those that have some knowledge out of square, by their awkward doings, besides all base beggarly fellows are admitted into the muster Rowel, when as the best and chiefest yeomen ought to do their King and country service in their own persons. Then lastly that every Captain would command his Officers to instruct the pikes and muskets whilst the rest are a calling over, and then either himself or his Lieutenant to exercise them in gross all their postures; and cause them to give fire in way of skirmish; and not to go into the Town until all the exercise be finished.   

CHAP. LXVII.  
The Office of a Serjeant-Major of a Regiment, and his duty both in Garrison and in the Field, briefly declared.  
A Serjeant-Major, is the third principal Officer in a Regiment; and in regard he is an Officer of the Field, he ought to participate of all the perfections that Officers of higher Authority should have; His Place and Office doth somewhat correspond with the Major-Generals; only his duty is tending to Officiate between the Colonel, and the Officers of the Regiment; he is to be learned in all the Liberal Sciences, he ought to have both Speculative and Practice knowledge in all things belonging to his profession; he must be very civil, wise, and discreet, in his carriage and actions, in regard he is to manage a world of affairs of high consequence, which may serve to the conserving or ruining of the Army; he is duly to attend his Colonel's pleasure; and Morning, ●oone, and Night, he is to wait upon the Major General, and to receive such orders, as are by the General of the Army delivered unto him; he is speedily to certify his Colonel what the orders are, and what the General's pleasure is, and also, with all celerity, to execute such things as his Colonel shall give him in charge: He is not only to be a good Scholar, and witty, but he must be quick in apprehension, and furnished with an able memory; he must have a Paper-book, with Pen and Ink, to set down all Orders and Commands that he, may not err nor vary one title from what was delivered him in charge; at Drumsbeat, he is to repair to the General's Tent, and take the Word of the Major General, and Orders for that Night's proceedings, than he is to repair to his Colonel's Tent, where he is to deliver him the Word, and to his Lieutenant Colonel, with such orders as he hath received.  
The Sergeants of every Company of his Regiment; 
Many times the Captains themselves are sent for to take the Word themselves, and the Orders, if they be of importance.  are to repair to him to take the Word from him, with such Orders as he shall give them, and they are speedily to acquaint their Captain, and other Officers with it, all the inferior Sergeants are to stand round about him, and he is to deliver the Word very privately in the ear of that Sergeant which stands at his right hand, and he is secretly to whisper it in the ear of the next, and so from one to another round, and the last man is to give it to the Serjant-Major again, if the last man gives it to him wrong, than he must give it over again. 
The Serjeant-Major is to draw the Billets from the Major General, and the inferior Officers to tak● them from him.  He is to have them draw Billets for their Guards, in regard much disputes may arise, because many Guards are more subject to the danger of the Enemy, than some others are, and also to prevent treason, so that no Officer knows his Guard beforehand; he is also to provide Powder, Match, and Bullets, and distribute it amongst the Officers of his Regiment; he ought to have able Officers to his own Company because he cannot tend unto them his employments are so great; he ought to have a swift Nag to carry him about the Quarters, and to visit his Guards, for his business lies very confusedly in the Army; he is likewise to view all outward Gvards, both in the day time and in the night, where his Regiment hath command, every Captain is to give him the Word, and from one Guard to another he is to be guarded with certain Musquetiers; He is to instruct and show such of his Officers, as are to pass upon Watch, where to place their Sentinels and Perdues, he is likewise to show every Officer, whether to draw his Company, to join with the rest in Battalia, if the Enemy should give an Alarm. He is to exercise all the Companies of his Regiment at convenient times.   

CHAP. LXVIII.  
The Office of a lieutenant-colonel of a Regiment, and his duty both in Garrison and in Field, briefly declared.  
A Lieutenant Colonel to a Regiment is a place of high consequence and great dignity, being the second person in the Regiment, he is not to be deficient in all kinds of Literature, but to be as able both in valour and experience as the Colonel, in regard in the Colonel's absence, he hath the sole ordering of the Regiment, and upon all occasions as his Colonel shall command, he is to be ready and dutiful to perform: there is much toil and pains belonging to his office, in regard he frees his Colonel's execution●● 〈◊〉 his duties; he ought in time, and causes of present peril to give his best advice to his Colonel, and to give him notice of every particular passage in the Regiment; he is not of his own authority to act any thing without his Colonel's command; All the Captains and Officers of the Regiment ought to respect and obey his commands; He is to see the Regiment well ordered, the Watches set, and the guards duly relieved; in time of Battle he is many times commanded to draw up divisions to charge the Enemy: In besieges he relieves his Colonel, taking his command by turns, it is his charge to see to the Regiment that all things are orderly performed, and that all necessaries be provided both for food and Ammunition; he is to see every Captain demean themselves fair to their Companies, that their pay be duly distributed amongst the Soldiers; he is to see their Arms fixed and fitting for service: Every Captain is to have two Powder bo●gets with Powder, Bullets, and Match; he is to command the Captains to draw out their Companies into the field, and to see them exercise them; he is to exercise every Company in the Regiment himself at his pleasure; he is to observe how every Captain clothes his Soldiers, and to have his ear open to the complaints of poor distressed Soldiers, and see them righted; he is to take notice of all quarrels and disputes amongst the Officers, and endeavour to reconcile them, otherwise to lay his command on, them, and to confine them to their lodgings until his Colonel understands of it; he is to release no delinquent from Prison, that is laid in by the consent of his Colonel; he is to sit in the Marshals Court in the absence of his Colonel; he is to see the Sergeant Major order the Regiment for the march, and he is to assist him in ordering and drawing up the divisions into Battalia; And to conclude, he ought to be discreet, wise, valiant, and religious, so that he should be a pattern to all the Officers of his Regiment to steer their courses by.   

CHAP. LXIX.  
The office and duty of a Colonel over a Regiment, and his Command both in Garrison, and in the Field.  
THe office of a Colonel is very honourable, and a place of great consequence in the Army, wherefore he ought to be a grave experienced Soldier, religious, wise, temperate, and valiant; his Command is not of so high an extent as the Sergeant Major Generals is; for his command extends no further than ten or twelve Companies, which he is to see well ordered, and strictly governed; he that hath his Commission first, is to be accounted the eldest, and is to take place, both in the quarters, and in the March, and so every one successively according to the date of their Commission; He hath under his command two special Officers, his lieutenant-colonel, and Serjant-Major; His office is in time of War to see his Regiment complete, and to order his Divisions, and draw them into form of Battle; His place in the Battle is various, according as he shall be commanded by the General, but most usual, he takes his place before the right Wing of his own Regiment, ordering his Officers as he shall have directions from his Superiors in authority; He is to be forward in showing good examples to his Officers, that his worth and valour may not be blemished; his eye is to be duly upon his own Officers and Soldiers, to rebuke them that are negligent, and cowardly, and to animate those that are forward; he ought to have all the Colours of his Regiment to be alike both in colour and in fashion to avoid confusion, so that the Soldiers may discern their own Regiment from the other Troops; Likewise, every particular Captain of his Regiment may have some small distinction in their Colours, as their Arms, or some Emblem, or the like, so that one Company may be discerned from another; he ought in the time of skirmishing in Battle, to pry and take serious notice of the Enemy's Battallias, how they are ordered, and what advantages are to be gained, which suddenly he is to encounter and achieve▪ he must be as cautelous and circumspect in taking notice how the Enemy plays his game, as himself is to be wary and cunning in 〈◊〉 and managing his own; he is not to be put upon any desperate service, unless 〈◊〉 ●ath the command of five hundred, or a thousand Soldiers; he ought to be very expert in raising of Fortifications, and in all kind of stratagems, in as ample manner as the General, because many times he hath the sole command in beleaguered Towns, and in certain quarters in the Trenches against a Fort beleaguered; Also many times he is to command diverse Troops as General in some kind of services; he is to have a well-governed and Religious Preacher to his Regiment, so that by his life and doctrine the Soldiers may be drawn to goodness; He is to cause so many of his Regiment as are to relieve the Watch, morning and evening to be drawn in parado before the head of the Quarters, where Divine duties are to be performed by the Preacher amongst them: Every Sabbath day he is to have a Sermon in his Tent forenoon and afternoon, and every Officer of his Regiment is to compel his Soldiers that are freed from the guard to repair thither; and that no Sutler shall draw any Beer in the time of divine Service and Sermon: He is to have a special care to see such duties performed by his Officers as are given them in charge: there is no impunity or remissness to be used in the Wars, to any one that shall neglect or slight any duty b● command: He is to see that all guards, passages, and Fortifications, wherein any of his Regiment are to guard or maintain, that it be sufficiently guarded with Soldiers; He seldom watcheth himself in person in the Camp, only in beleaguered Towns he passeth upon his duty; he is to cause his own Drum to beat to prepare for the relief of the Watch morning and evening; Likewise, all the Drums of the Regiment are at the same time to beat; He is to appoint the Captain of the Watch in his Regiment; the eldest Captain first beginneth, and successively one after another according to their antiquity; he hath only a Lieutenant and Ensign, his Lieutenant is titularly called Captain; he is to have a sufficient quartermaster to his Regiment; he is also to have an under-Marshall, whose office is to lay Irons upon such delinquents as shall be committed to his charge, he is likewise to look to all the Sutler's, that no abuse be in their excessive prices, or ill measures; There are able and sufficient Sulters to be provided for his Regiment: The Colonel is to sit in Counsel with the General, and to advise according to his wisdom and experience about all States affairs: He is to sit in the Marshal's Court, and to give his voice for the punishing of delinquents; He is to be a man free from all vices; he is to be religious, grave, wise, and truly valiant.   

CHAP. LXX.  
The office of a sergeant-major-general of an Army, and his duty both in Garrison and Field briefly declared.  
THee office of a sergeant-major-general of the Army: is a place of great honour and renown, there being committed to his charge, the affairs of a whole Army, for through his hands all the affairs, practices, and actions that betides an Army daily runs; He being the conduit-pipe to convey all orders and instructions from the General, to all the subordinate Officers, wherefore he ought to be a man of a ready wit and conception, of a sound judgement, of a strong memory, so that he must conceive and retain such things as are given him in charge, for 〈◊〉 mistake may prejudice the proceedings of a weighty consequence; therefore his Pen and Paper-booke must be ready to take the true notes from his General, that he may not err in delivering of his orders to the Majors of each Regiment: He is to be at his Tent ready at a prefixed hour, both morning and evening, to deliver them such orders and instructions as are delivered unto him, that so speedily they may be conveyed to each Officer in every particular Regiment throughout all the whole Army; He must be very vigilant and circumspect, to pry and dive into all passages that concerns the good or safety of the Army: Above all other Officers, the major-general ought to be a good Scholar, and well indoctrinated in the Liberal Arts; 
He is to have a Catalogue of the just number of the Army, together with the true sortment and division of every weapon, and in his memory he must have the forms of all kind of Battles.  he is to be a good linguist, he is to be well skilled in ordering and forming of Battles, and in speedy reducing them from one form into another, as occasion shall offer; He is to inform his General that such things as he sees needful and of consequence, either for the safety or good of the Army may be put in execution, as the raising of Sconces, Redouts, etc. for the fortifying of passages, and securing of Bridges, and guarding of shallow Ford's, by which an Enemy shall be impeached from taking an advantage to endanger an Army; he must take a serious view how every Officer, both Colonels and Captains perform their duties; he is at his convenient leisure to ride from guard to guard, being conducted with a sufficient guard of Musquetiers, to see such orders put in execution as was given the Captains in charge, and that their Guards be not too slightly manned, and where neglect shall be, he is to punish the delinquents, and to see those defects supplied; He is to be in his General's presence as oft as his occasions will permit, but especially morn, noon, and night, either to inform the General of such news, and passages as are of consequence, or to receive instructions from him, which he is suddenly to put in execution: he is by the General's command to call his Officers before him to sit in Council upon such things as may seem difficult, so that the best advice may be taken. Every Officer is to order and demean his Troops according as he shall please to give them directions; he is of himself warrant sufficient to order and dispose all Commanders, and they are to obey him and execute what he is pleased to give them in charge. Every Officer ought to relate unto him what wants and defects are to their knowledge in the Army, whether Arms, Ammunition, Victuals, or the like, that there may be present order taken by the General, to supply all wants and defects; all the Serjeant-Majors of every Regiment in the Army are to attend the major-general morning and night, to receive the Word and Orders, which they must take from his secretly, and as secretly impart it to the inferior Officers: his command extends over all Regiments whatsoever, and in time of Battle he may draw forth what divisions he pleaseth, he may command what Officer he pleaseth to lead them to such services, as he shall in his wisdom think convenient, either to assist the Wings that are in fight, or to strengthen some one part of the Army that is most assaulted, so that he is to be endued with all the properties that the General should be accomplished with; He is also in time of Battle to be near the General to advise in cases of extremity, what is best and safest to be done: also to go from Regiment to Regiment, to give Commanders such orders as are delivered to him: he is of power sufficient to command the Captain of the Watch, and if he perceive any disorders or neglects in his duties, he may punish him: The Sergeant Major ought to premeditate how to bring his men into order the easiest and most readiest way in time of Battle, causing every Major of a Regiment to draw up their divisions into even squares, or otherwise as he shall please to think fittest; he is to give order to the Quarter-Masters how they shall pitch their Standards that accordingly the Troops may range themselves, what distances betwixt the Forlorn hopes, and the main Battle, and betwixt the main Battle, and the Battle of succour, etc. What distance betwixt the Horse and the Flanks of the foot, and where the Ordnance are to be placed most convenientest, etc. He is to draw out no Wings of shot to give fire upon the Enemy, but must have a competency of Pikes to guard them from the fury of the Horse; he is lisiewise in time of Battle to appoint every Colonel his place, and every other chief Officer their places, some in the Front of the main Battle, others to command the Forlorn ●opes, some in the Battle of succour, others in the Rear.  
Likewise in Marches, in regard diverse Officers i● high authority are not to March with their private Companies, but are employed 〈◊〉 General upon other weighty affairs; the Major may command such Officers as he shall think fitting to lead such Troops as he shall command them; and such Officers as he placeth, are to command with as much Authority, and the Soldiers bound to obey them with as much diligence and dutifulness, as if they were their own Officers; also he may command any Colonel or Major of a Regiment to send out what Officer of his Regiment he pleaseth, and what forces he shall think fitting either upon Convoys, or to the guarding of passages or the like. And to conclude, he is to be the eyes, ears, mouth, hands, and feet of the General.   

CHAP. LXXI.  
The Office of the Lord Martial in the Wars, and of his high jurisdiction and Command in the Army.  
THe Lord Marshal of an Army above all other Officers ought to be a most approved Scholar, in regard his Office is to sit many times in the seat of judicature, he is also to be a most approved Soldier; for howsoever in the greatness of other great places in the Wars there may be a dispensation of skill, yet in this Office it may not be so; for above all others it hath the greatest place of action and direction in all the Army, and he Commands in a higher strain than any the fore mentioned Officers in the Army, he having them all at his command; yet all of them cannot assist him to dispense or lessen the least duty belonging to his place or person; for though the General or Lieutenant General preceds him in place, 
Some have held that the Earl Martial i● chiefest in the General's absence, and aught to have the principal command of the Army.  yet they ought not in knowledge and experience, in regard both themselves and the whole Army both Horse and Foot are bound to move at his directions; and though he may not command his General, yet he may in a directory way advise, and say your Excellency ought to stand here in this place, or order your Armies according to such rules; Wherefore, he must be a man of great performance, accomplished with Wisdom, Temperance, Valour; and Virtue; It will be hard for a Prince to find a man fit and suitable for this employment.  
Next the General, the Lord Martial is said to have the supreme command of the whole Army; wherefore usually his Trumpet is first in the morning to discharge the Watch, and his Troop ought first of all to be mounted; for it is an honour due to his place, and allowed him by the Army, by reason of the infinite pains which he taketh in his own particular person; neither ought his Troop to Watch or Ward, but are freed of that duty, by reason of their more serious occasions; After he and his Troop are mounted, he marches to the out-m●st borders of the Camp, and 〈…〉 his stand until the whole Army are R●●ged, neither ●●its his station until the last man be Marched away: He is himself in all things both assistant and directive to the General of the Horse, and the Sergeant Major General; all the day long he is tied to no Battalion, but at his pleasure may dispose of his own Person, sometimes accompanying the General, and sometimes conducting his own Troops; and indeed always where the greatest occasion of necessity is, and where the Enemy is most likeliest to assail, there he should be to make resistance: Also as his Person, so is his Troop not tied to any especial or certain place, but may vary and alter, as danger shall offer itself for them to oppose, still supplying whatsoever is weakest, and ever ready to entertain the Enemy upon all his approaches, upon all Retreats; the Rear is his place which he is to bring up with safety, and to defend it with courage: When the Army is to be Encamped, he stayeth until every man be dismounted and the whole Army lodged; then he with his Troop dismounteth; he taketh order for the Scouts, he adviseth with the Sergeant Major for the Guards, vieweth the strength of the Camp, etc.  
When the Army is to be Encamped in any new place, the Sergeant Major General, the Quarter Master General, the Sergeant Major of Regiments, the Scout-Master, and all inferior Quarter Masters, with a sufficient Guard of the best Horsemen, are to attend the Lord High Marshal; and he out of his own power, with the discreet advice of the Sergeant Major General, and the Scout Master General, shall assign the Camp where the fittingest place is to pitch it in, the manner, form, and proportion it shall carry, the bounds it shall contain, and the distinction of every place and commodity, advantage, strength, or discommodity, which it shall please him to annex unto the same, and according to his pleasure and demonstration, so shall the Quarter Master General see it divided, leaving the Intrenchments to the Trenchmaster; and the other inferior divisions to the Sergeant Major General, the Sergeant Major of Regiments, and their Quarter Masters.  
It is in the power of his Office also (after the Army is Encamped, having taken a survey of all the convenientest places for the Guards) to appoint all the Regiments, in what manner they shall place their Corps-du-guard, the Scouts, and Sentinell●, so as no man may pass either in or out, but to be continual upon their discovery; and likewise to provide for the raising of all Outworks, as Skonses, and Redouts upon all passages and Ford's, for the safety of the whole Army.  
And as in the constant settling of the Army, so in the Marching and removing thereof; the Lord Martial is to have a special regard to his strength and ability to encounter with the Enemy, and whether it be meet to enter into the face of Battle or no, or whether the time be mature and ripe for matters of execution; or else to defer and prevent all occasions of encounters, in which if he find himself the weaker, he shall order his March through woody places, and places inaccessible; thereby to add a natural strength to his Army, and to hinder the execution of the Enemy's Horse; he is to have the lighter sort of Horsemen to March so near unto the Enemy, that continually upon every alteration he may have sudden intelligence of the Enemy's designs: But if the necessity of the March be through the Champion and Plains, where the nature of the ground affordeth no assistance; then the Lord Martial must so order his Horse Troops in such sort, to make them show great and innumerable, for to a maze and distract the Enemy in his approaches.  
He is to have a most special regard in removing his Camp, whether it be by night or by day; it is very bold and audacious to remove a Camp in the day if the Enemy be near hand, but to remove in the night, it argues a weakness and disability in the Army, 
In the Discourse of the marching of an Army you shall more fully read how to dislodge a Camp by night.  for it is little better than a flight: Wherefore there must be great licie used with silence and diligence, and the March and good Array to be held with all care and industry; and therefore it requireth all the skill and Art of the Marshal, and all the care and obedience that can be required in a Soldier, for it is a Rul● in Martial Discipline, that no remove by night can be absolutely secure.  
It is the Office of the Lord Martial, to give order to the Master of the Ordnance, both for his March and his passage; both where, when, and which way all his Provision shall go for the best advantage and safety: And at the planting o● Artillery or making of Batteries, the Marshal is to oversee the proceedings, and to give directions upon any doubt or misse-adventure; He is to give order unto the Victual Master, Wagon-master, and all Officers of their natures, both for their allodgements, stores, and all other necessary accommodations, and against all violence and injuries which shall be offered them, he is to see careful and speedy reformation.  
The Lord High-Marshall, is the supreme and only powerful judge, in all causes of life and death, in criminal offences and controversies in the Army, of all manner of natures, and provideth for the due execution of all the Laws, Articles, and Institutions, which shall be appointed by the General to be observed, and to see due punishment executed for any breach of the same: Wherefore he ought to be exceedingly well read, and learned in all Marshal Laws, the custom of Countries, the degrees of Honour, and the distribution of Bloods, places, and employments; and that he may the better proceed in these affairs, he is to be assisted with diverse learned and experienced Officers under him, as the judge-marshall, and provost-marshal, an Auditor, and two Clerks, the under-Provost, etc. He is to have twenty or thirty Gentlemen for a continual guard about him; the judge-marshall is to assist him in all difficult and curious interpretations of the Law, and in deciding such controversies, as shall happen in the taking of Prisoners, etc. He is to direct the Scout-master in all his proceedings, and to receive from him all the intelligence and observations which he hath found out in his discoveries, and to deliver unto him any other instructions, which had formerly been neglected: what the Lord Martial is to do about the restoring of gentlemen's honours which have been maliciously disgraced, and his deciding of all quarrels, I have formerly entreated of, in the Discourse of unjust valour; but this will suffice to let the ingenuous soldier see a glimpse of this noble Office.   

CHAP. LXXII.  
Of the Council of War and of their Office and duties in the time of War, the Army being in Camp or otherwise.  
THere is nothing in this sublunary World, which requires more mature Consultations, Deliberations, and grave advise then the Subject of War; in regard the welfare of Cities, Countries, and Kingdoms, wholly depends upon it: Wherefore, above all other Marshal men, those of the counsel of War, are to be best experienced, and of most approved judgements: And that General is happy that hath for his Counselors, grave, wise, skilful, experienced, virtuous, and painful men, for his assistance, to expostulate all matters, and occurrences, which shall appertain to the good and safety of the Army; and to the weakening and ruining of the Enemy.  
When a General is engaged in these great businesses of the Wars, and hath for the government and ruling of his Army and the affairs thereunto belonging, appointed his superior Officers; he is then out of the whole and entire number to select an especial company of the most religious, valiant, expert wise men, whose years, and judgements, are mature, to be of his Counsel; as namely all Colonels, and their equals: Yet it is to be understood; that from hence, hath grown a distinguishment of Counsels, and according to the variation of Marshal Courts, so they have altered both in emminency and application, some being General, as in the trial and judging of criminal offenders; and to this all Captains enrowled within the General's list, may freely and by their own right be admitted; others are more especial, as where the debatement of provisions, the Raising of Taxes, and the ordering of the public affairs of the Camp are handled; and to this all Colonels and Officers within their rank are admitted; and do consult and conclude with the General, for all the welfares and benefits which do appertain unto the Army; But the last Council of all is a great deal more private, and the matters which are handled therein are of that consequence, for secre●ie and ●ffect; that it were unfit and not allowable so many should be drawn thereunto; ●or that all sorts of men should partake of every Stat● Negotiation; or those powerful stratagems which indeed should lodge in the strongest and safest bosoms; for notwithstanding men of great experience and valour, or men of high birth and Rank may in a short space of time, ascend to command a Colonels place in the field; yet may Learning, judgement, Secre●ie, and diverse other virtues (without which a privy Counsellor cannot subsist) be so far removed and distant from his nature; that it were a great solicisme in State to admit such trust to his Bosom: So on the other side men of meaner and lower advancement; who are not capable of those high places in the Army; may yet be much apt to advise, and have a better and stronger Fort wherein to keep secrets from perishing, than those of a higher calling; and therefore (not without good warrant) are many times chosen and admitted to this noble place of trust and preferment; Alexander taken ●armenio, Clitus and all the ouldest of his Father Philip's Commanders; to advise, counsel, and strengthen him in all his Warlike affairs: Caesar likewise made choice of Cato that by his advice he might ruin Pompey; thus Antony prevailed during the life of Publicalo; and Augustus held himself fortunate in the Counsels of 〈◊〉. Likewise we have modern instances how Philip of Spain gave to Don john Duke of Austria; (that brave Soldier) Don Lewis de Zuniga to counsel him in all Marshal occasions: and our Edward the third did the like for the black Prince, He made choice for his Councillors the Earl of Warwick, Suffolk, Salisbury, and Oxford; by the strength of whose advice in the Battle of Poicteirs; he not only overthrew all the Flowers of France; but also took john their King and Philip his Son Prisoners. Those Generals that have run in precipitate courses rejecting both Counsellors and Counsels, have soon ruined themselves and their Armies; as Crassus, when he brought himself and eleven Legions to be routed and massacred in Parthia; and Tiberius Gracchus when he had his brains dashed out in the Capitol: After the same manner did Caius Gracchus, who was made a bloody sacrifice on the top of Mount Aventine, for the much advised tempting of his fortunes.  
By this we may see, there is nothing more necessary, than a sufficient Council of War, for their counsel and advice is more prevailent in Martial-discipline, than either Armour or Weapons, and more brave exploits have been achieved by wisdom and policy, than ever could be brought under by violence and daring.  
To speak generally of this especial and private Council of War, 
The especial Officers named for the private council of War.  and who are to be supposed meetest to succeed and rise unto the same, they are these especial Officers following, who by virtue of their first place, are ever capable of the second; because none of less merit and desert, may or aught to assume unto the sway or command of this prime dignity. Of these privy Councillors, the lieutenant-general of the Horse hath the first place, the Lord Martial hath the second, the Master of the Ordnance hath the third, the Treasurer of the War the fourth, and the eldest Co●●●ell in the Field the fifth: But if the number of Councillors arise to any great extent, than they are chosen out of other great personages of eminency and worth, at the discretion of the General; these private Council of War, are to negotiate and deal in matters that are profound, dangerous, and difficult, and are to argue and dispute them, with sound understandings, and deep judgements; And this shall suffice to conclude this discourse. As for other Officers belonging to the Army, I omit to discourse of their Offices, in regard they have no charge of Soldiers under them; as the Treasurer, the four Corporals of the Field, the Quarter-masters, the Muster-masters, Scout-master, provost-marshal, Victuall-master, Forrage-master, Wagon-master, Trenchmaster, Captain of the pioneers, etc. Happily, I shall take occasion to discourse afterwards of some of these Offices, in the Treatise of Encamping the Army, and in the Discourse of Framing of Battles, where I shall more fitly give a touch of them: We are in the next place to discourse of the Exercising of the Foot and Horse.    

THE ART OF DRILLING, OR EXERCISING A FOOT COMPANY. SECT. XI.  

CHAP. LXXIII.  
The manner how every Officer should drill, and exercise their Companies of Foot in all their Postures, and motions with the several ways of giving fire.  
ALthough it be a thing familiar to diverse men to Drill, and exercise a Foot Company, and that some men have formerly to good purpose, entreated of the Postures both of Pike and Musket; yet in regard my intent is to write a general discourse of every part of the body of War, I think it convenient in as short and brief terms as the subject will require, to demonstrate the parts requisite to be understood in the exercising of Companies; showing the grounds and reasons of every Posture and motion that is material, either to offend or defend, the reasons why they were invented, and what advantage is in them; for although a Soldier should know how to order, and demean himself exquisitely in this Art of drilling, yet if he doth not conceive the reasons to what purpose they were invented, and the several advantages they afford against the Enemy, in time of necessity he will be to seek, whereby the whole grounds of Souldiarisme may miscarry, and the ends they were invented for, lose their effect; and let no man expect that I should invent any new antic Postures, there being more already in use then are profitable; But I could wish a Soldier should only make use of such circumstances as are really most fit, and apt for employment of Wars, and of quickest dispatch in execution. far be it from me to discommend a comely manlike gesture and a correspondency in the agitation of the limbs, when a Soldier handles his Arms; yet upon the point of service all superfluous Postures are lopped off, and reduced only to these three actions, 
The three usual words of command in time of Service.  Making ready, Presenting, and giving fire. For should a Commander nominate all the Postures in the time of service, he would have no breath to oppose his Enemy, neither could use any circumspection how to encounter with him; wherefore I would rather wish all Commanders to affect the plain and readiest way in exercising, which may best suit with the actions and capacities of plain Soldiers, which will prove more substantial and essential; and those thus educated, are men likeliest to sustain the brunt of an Enemy's fury, and stand to their tackling, when others with their Circumstantial compliments and superfluous slender devices, may take a retreat for a charge, Wherefore in the first place let us observe that in composing of multitudes into an orderly way of exercising, they must be reduced into Ranks and Files,  
A File is a certain number of Soldiers standing in a direct line one behind another face to back, which number must not exceed ten in depth.  
A Rank is a number of Soldiers standing in an eeven line sideways, shoulder to shoulder, and this is not limited to any certain proportion of number, but increaseth or decreaseth accidentally, according to the greatness or smallness of the number.  
A Company being thus ordered into Rank and File, the next thing considerable, is the distance, or orderly space between File and File, Ranke and Ranke.  
There are four orders or distances, observable between File and File, or Rank and Ranke, being these under maimed;  

Close order  
Order  
Open order  
Double distance 

which is both in Rank and File 

one foot and a half.  
three foot.  
six foot.  
twelve foot.       
There is further to be considered in distance, three especial circumstance, viz.  

Distance 

For March.  
For Motion.  
For Skirmish,     
The distance for March is to be three foot between File and file: and six foot between rank and rank.  
The distance for Skirmish and for wheeling, is three foot in rank and file; only in receiving a charge from the Horse, it is convenient the Files of Pike-men should be at close Order.   

CHAP. LXXIV.  
How a Captain shall cause his Officers to order and rank his Company sit to march into the Field.  
THE Drums having called the Soldiers together to their Colours, the Ensign standing forth with them; then the Lieutenant and Sergeants shall command the Pikes and Musquettiers to rank themselves 4. 5. or 6. abreast as the Captain shall be pleased to command; observing the Files to be at order, and the Ranks at open order.  
If the Commander will observe the French manner of Marching, 
Note the Musquetiers of the right Flank are to make the Van.  than you must divide the Muskets; the first Division is to March in the Van next after the Captain, 
Note that between each division in march there ought to be 12 foot distance, viz. 6 foot before the Office●, and 6 foot behind.  the Pikes are to make the Battle, and to March after the Ensign in two Divisions, the second Division being led by the eldest Sergeant; the Musquetiers of the left Flank (called the second division of Muskets) makes the Rearegaurd, which is to be led commonly by the second Sergeant; the Drum is to be placed in the third Rank of Musquetieres'; the second Drum between the third and fourth Rank of the second Division of Pikes; The third Sergeant is to march in the left Flank of the Muskets in the Rear; the fourth Sergeant is to be on the right Flank of the Musquetiers, and the Lieutenant in the Rear, 
Note in march the Files must be at order and the Ranks at open order.  as by the sequent Figure you may perceive two hundred men in order to March into the Field, the Captain leading his Company with a Soldierlike gesture, the rest of the Officers following in their due places in a fair equipage: And being arrived at the place of exercise, you are to draw your Company into Battalia after this manner: First you are to command your Front division to stand, than the Ensign is to draw up his division of Pikes upon the left Flank of the first division of Musqueteires, with his Colours flying, and the Pikes to continue shouldered so long as the drum beats a March; but if it beats a Troop, than they are to advance and close their Ranks forward to their order, and then the Ensign is to Troop them up with his Colours firled: The eldest Sergeant is to lead up the second division of Pikes. The second Sergeant is to lead up the second or Rear divisions o● Musquetiers; each division still marching up to the left of that division next before it; the manner you may plainly see in the Figure upon the right side of this Page; where the first division is marked in the Rear with the Figure 6. the first division of Pikes with the Figure 7. the second division of Pikes with the Figure 8. the second division of Musquettiers hath in the rear the Figure 9 In the next Page you shall find a Figure in form of a square, as they stand in a Battalia.  

Front.  

C  
s s s s s  
S 4  
s s s s s  
s s s s   

D. 1.  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s   

E  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p   

S. 1.  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p   

D 2  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p  
p p p p p   

S 2  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s  
s s s s s   

L  
Rear.   

C  
S 4.  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss   

D  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
6   

E  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
7   

S  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp   

D 2  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
ppppp  
8   

S 2.  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
sssss  
9   

E C  S. 2. sssss D pppppppppp D sssss S. 1.  sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss   sssss  pppppppppp  sssss  S. 3. sssss  pppppppppp  sssss S. 4.  
In this precedent Figure, you see the divisions of the Company drawn up into an even body or Battalia, all the Fell-leaders standing even in Front together making one Rank.    

CHAP. LXXV.  
How the Officers are to draw both Pikes and Muskets (one File sequenting another) into a Ring for the better and speedier exercising them in their postures.  
THe Company standing in an even body as the former Figure shows, before the Captain shall exercise them in gross as they now stand; the easiest, readiest, and most convenient way, is to see every man particularly do his postures both of Pike and Musket; Wherefore first draw out the body of Pikes from the shot, then command the right Wing of shot to face to the left hand, and the left Wing of shot to face to the right hand; then Marching forwards, join their Files together, so facing as they were makes them stand in an even body: That Officer which intends to exercise the Pikes, is to draw them into one side of the Field, and some other Officer is to take the Muskets and draw them another way a convenient distance apart, so that one division may not interrupt the other; then either Officers drawing out their Files one following another, leading them round into a Ring, the Officers standing in the midst, every Soldier facing towards him so that he may see all their actions; and likewise they may hear his words of command, and observe how he handles his Arms, that they may imitate him, and where he sees any one awkward and ignorant, he is speedily to step to him and to show him how to demean himself, the words of Command and the postures follow in the next Chapter.   

CHAP. LXXVI.  
How an Officer is to demean himself, in the Exercising of the Musquetieres', and how every Soldier is to observe and imitate him punctually, from Posture, to Posture.  
THe Officer having disposed his men as before is showed, himself standing in the midst of them, taking a Musket in his hand, and Bandelieres about him, he shall command silence, and being presupposed they stand with their Bandiliers on, their match between their fingers, their Muskets shouldered, and their Rests in their hands; the Officer commands them to  

1 Rest your Musket. 

This Pocture is performed, the Musket being shouldered; First by slipping it, 
Note, in all the Postures of a Musket, the hand and foot must move at one instant, for the better grace of the posture.  then bringing about the right hand, and grasping the Musket at the breech, and at the same instant drawing in your right heel to your left ankle, with a small jutte of the shoulder, you raise the Piece, and poise it in the right hand being stretched out, with the Musquet-rest in the left hand likewise stretched out; then bringing about your left hand and foot, you meet the Musket with your Rest, placing it upon the ground aslant from you, your Thumb pressing the side of the Barrel and the Fork of the Rest together, your right leg being brought a little forwards, standing with a full body towards the mouth of the Piece, the But end close to your side above your huckle bone.    
2 Poise your Muskets. 

This Posture is performed, 
Note, the Musket is rested when this Posture is to be performed.  by bringing up the right leg to the ankle of the left, the Piece being stayed upon the Rest by the pinching of the Thumb, the right hand at the same motion grasps the Piece at the Breech, the middle joint of the forefinger placed under the Pan, 
The Musket being shouldered, it is to be poised as I have showed you in the first Posture here mentioned at Resting your Musket.  the upper joint next the hand just with the breech-pin, the Thumb upon the inside of the Stock, a little pressing down the right hand, and raising the left with the Rest, you receive it and hold it at arms end, with the mouth plum upwards, the Rest in the left hand, with the Arm outstretched, the right foot being removed sideways, at the same instant with the right hand, the body will stand full and comely.    
3 Shoulder your Musket. 

The Musket being poised, 
Note, after the Musket is settled on the shoulder, the Rest must hang almost perpendicular towards the ground.  you must bring about your right hand, drawing up the heel of your right foot, to your left ankle; and as your Musket is ready to touch your left shoulder, you must at the same instant, bring about your left hand over the But end of the Piece, with the Rest in it, the ground end of your Rest pointing towards your right thigh, joining the Sear● of the Piece close to your shoulder; Note, when you intent to poise it as in the former posture, you must turn the point of your Rest inwards toward your left thigh, and withal let the Piece slip a little, the Breech will lie fit for the right hand to receive it.    
4 Take your Rest in your right hand fit for march. 

There needs no great commenting upon this Posture, only when the Musket is shouldered, you are take the Rest into your right hand, for to be a stay unto you in your march.    
5 Take your match between the fingers of your right hand. 
Note, here they begin to make ready, which they may do either standing or marching.  

This Posture is performed by bringing about your right hand, and between the forefinger and thumb thereof, take the Match within an inch of the Coal, from between the little and third finger of the left hand, then holding your right hand out from your body.    
6. Put your Rest string about your left wrist, and carry your Rest in your left hand. 

There needs no great circumstance about this Posture, only you having the Rest in your right hand upon a March, you now put on the String upon the left hand, holding the Rest in it over the But end of the Musket, by which you are in a readiness to make present use of it.    
7 Return your Match between the fingers of the Left hand. 

This Posture is performed, having the Match between the finger and the Thumb of the right hand; you are to bring your Arm about towards the left hand, there placing the Coal end of the Match between the middle and third finger thereof, the light end to the back of the hand-ward, then taking the other end of the Match, and place it in like manner between the third and little finger, by this means it is not troublesome, but ready to be used upon all occasions.    
8 unshoulder your Musket. 

This Pcture is performed, by turning the point of your Rest outwards towards your left knee, and withal letting the Musket slip a little down your breast, the Breech of the Piece will lie fair for the right hand to take it with a grasp, just under the pan, with the middle joint of the forefinger; the uppermost joint next the hand against the Breech-pin, and the thumb upon the Stock on the inner side, and with a small jutte (the left hand with the Rest being taken off from the Stock) the right hand will poise it up, standing with a full body, the mouth of the Piece right up, and arms outstretched, as more plainly in the first Posture is discourced of, not forgetting to let the foot act with the hand.    
9 Join your Rest to the outside of your Musket. 

The Musket being poised, you are to step forward with your left leg, and withal bringing your left hand with your thumb pressed against the inner side of the Fork of your Rest, then drawing in your right elbow, you gently let the Musket and the Rest meet, the upper side of the Fork placed against the outside of the Stock, the thumb pressing the lower; and the end of the Rest locked in the in●ide of the But end of the Piece, it rests in an equal balance in the left hand.    
10. Open.  
11. Clear  
12. Prime  
13. Shut 

your Pan. 

The Musket and Rest being joined together, with your two fore-fingers thrust between the Barrel and the tip of the Pan, thrusting them sideways makes it open with ease, then with the boale of your thumb pressed down into the Pan and wrung about clears it; then take your Primer in your right hand, and knocking it gently against the side of the Pan, until the concavity of it be filled, then with your fingers shut ti, and a little turning the butt end of your Musket from you give te a jog or two.      
14. Cast off your loose corns. 

The Musket being primed, 
This Posture is as usually done when the Musket and Rest is joined together.  and the Pan shut, you are to turn the butt end from your right side a little distance, as the Piece rests upon the Rest, then with a shogge or two shake off the superfluous corns of Powder, to prevent taking of fire when you try your Match.    
15. Blow off your loose corns.  
16. And cast about your Musket to your left side. 

This posture of blowing off the loose corns is to be performed, either the Musket being rested (as I have said before) or when the Musket and the Rest are joined together; for the first you are only to stoop with your head, and with a puff or two blow them off, otherwise you are to bring the Musket towards your head, tilluing the pan somewhat from you, and with a sudden strong blast beat them off, so that when the Match is tried, it may not endanger the firing. Now for the casting about your Musket after the loose corns be blown off, it is but slipping back your left leg, and you holding your Musket and Rest together in your left hand; with your right hand you convey the butt end of the Piece on to the left side, and in the motion turn the stock upwards, and letting your Rest slip, you may easily charge.    
17. Trail your Rest.  
18. Balance your Musket in your left hand. 

This posture is performed after the Musket is brought about to the left side, 
Note you ought to take the Piece in such an even balance, that the butt-end rests not against the ground.  stepping forward with your right foot, and at the same instant you bring about your Musket; and withal your right hand grasps the barrel of the Piece some foot from the mouth, until the Rest be slipped and trailed, and the Piece balanced in the left hand fit for to charge.    
19 Charge  
20. with 

Powder, Bullet. 

This Posture is performed after the Musket is balanced in your left hand, by taking one of the Charges of your Bandelieres in your right hand, and pulling the lid of it off with your teeth; then thrusting the mouth of the charge into the boar of the Piece, giving it a shogge or two, that the Powder may empty into it; then giving the Piece another jog with the butt end of it against the ground, to make the Powder sink to the bottom of the barrel; then having your bullet ready in your mouth, and taking it in your right hand between your forefinger and thumb, setting your right leg forwards towards the mouth of the Piece, as you bring your hand to the same, letting the bullet drop in with a jog to sink it to the Powder; or by ramming it down with the Gunne-sticke.      
21. Draw forth  
22. Shorten 

your scowring-stick. 

This Posture is performed by drawing forth the Scouring-stick with the right hand, at three even pulls, the lower side of your hand towards the upper end of the Musket; the Scouring-stick being thus produced, you are to shorten it against your breast, your hand slipping down almost to the lower end of it, so that with ease it may be put into the mouth, then thrusting it down part of the way, at the second motion, and ramming down the Powder at the third.      
23. Put your Scowring-stick into your Musket. 

This Posture is performed (as before is said) after the Scouring-stick is produced and shortened, the right hand holding it close by the lower end, the right foot being set out a pretty step towards the mouth of the Piece, is with ease put in, and rammed down.    
24. Ram home your charge. 

This is performed after the Scouring-stick is entered the Boar of the barrel about a handful, then at two motions more you thrust it down to the Powder or Bullet, giving a good jobbe or two down, that the Bullet may be home to the Powder.    
25. Withdraw  
26. Shorten  
27. Return 

your scouring stick. 

This Posture is performed by taking the Scowring-stick in your right hand, the upperside of your hand towards the mouth of the Piece, so that all your fingers takes the stick flat about the middle, the joints upon the outside of it, and the thumb upon the inside, then making three even distinct pulls in withdrawing it, turning your hand, so as the small end of the stick is towards your breast, then shortening it against the same, you have it fit to return into the stock, which is to be done likewise at three even portions.      
28. Bring forward your Musket and Rest. 

This Posture is performed after the Scowring-stick is returned by drawing back your right foot, and bringing your Musket with your left hand before you, so as the barrel of the Piece may be towards your breast; the Rest is to trail after by the string that hangs upon your wrist.    
29. Poise your Musket, and recover your Rest. 

This Posture is performed, your right heel being drawn in towards the small of your left foot; at the same instant your right hand is to take the Piece below under at the great screw; then poise it upwards, setting your Right foot out again, then bringing your Rest forwards with your left hand, so far as the string will permit, you shall easily receive it, and so with a full Body stand poised.    
30. join your Rest to the outside of your Musket. 

The Posture is performed after the Musket is poized, by drawing in your left heel towards the small of your right foot, your left hand holding the Rest close by the fork; and your thumb pressing the end of the fork close, you bring it to the Musket; then joining the Rest to the outside of the Musket, and locking them fix together by pressing the lower side of the fork with your thumb, the Piece lies firm in your left hand in one even balance, your right hand being at freedom, and your left leg set out again.    
31 Draw forth your Match. 

This posture is performed by drawing in the right heel to the small of the left foot, at the same instant bringing your right hand with a kind of circumference towards your left; you are to take the Match betwixt the thumb and second finger, then holding it out towards your right side, at the same instant you are to set out your right leg again, your Musket being held in a due height.    
32 Blow your Coal. 

Having taken the Match from between the little finger and the third finger of the left hand, betwixt the thumb and second finger of the right hand within an inch of the coal of it; then bringing it towards your mouth, turning your head towards your right side stooping very little, you gently blow it, your right leg being let out forwards.    
33 Cock  
34 Fit 

Your Match. 

Having blown your Match as aforesaid, you are to bring it with a little circumference to the Cock, and are to fit it into the same with your thumb and finger, not screwing it in, having before directed the wideness of the Cock to the thickness of the Match; your left leg being set forwards with the knee somewhat bending out.      
35 Guard your Pan. 

Having tried and governed the Match with your thumb and second finger, to the end you may set it higher, lower, shorter, or longer; and your left heel being drawn towards the small of your right foot, you are gently to lay the two fore fingers of the right hand full upon the Pan to defend the Powder from the sparkles of the Match.    
36 Blow the ashes from your Coal. 

Having guarded your Pan as aforesaid, and your left heel being drawn towards the small of your right foot, you are gently to raise the Piece up towards your mouth, and without stooping, blow off the ashes from your Coal.    
37 Open your Pan. 

Having blown off the ashes from the Coal (standing in the same posture as aforesaid) you are at the same instant, handsomely with your middle finger to shove aside the Pan lid; and removing your left leg forwards with the knee bending out.    
38 Present upon your Rest. 

Your left leg being set out as aforesaid, and your right hand having grasped the Musket with your thumb in the small of the Stock, and your middle finger placed against the tricker; then having placed the Musket in the Rest, the mouth of it being kept at a reasonable height, and the lower end of your Rest being set forwards, the Butt end of your Piece will be placed full upon your right breast; then setting your right leg somewhat out sideways, standing with a full body towards the mouth of your Peeece, you shall be ready to give fire.    
39 Give fire breast high. 

Having as before is showed, presented well (viz) holding the Musket and the Rest in the left hand, bearing the right Arm or elbow somewhat up, and turning a little the body to the left side, the left knee bowed, and the right leg strait, and not laying your cheek to the Stock before you shall set the Musket to your breast; then taking your aim breast high, without starting or winking, you are gently to pull down the tricker, and so give fire with a full body upon the Enemy.    
40 Dismounte your Musket, joining your Rest to the outside of your Musket. 

You having discharged, must pull in your right leg a little; then thrusting your Musket a little forwards, you shall join your Rest to the outside of your Musket, holding it in an even balance in your left hand, not forgetting to hold the mouth up; (especially if it hath not gone off) for fear of hurting any man.    
41 Vncocke and return your Match. 

Your right heel being drawn towards the small of your left foot; you are to bring about your right hand in a comely manner, and with your thumb and second finger pull the Match out of the Cock, and return it between the two last fingers of the left hand.    
42 Clear  
43 Shut 

your Pan. 

You standing in the same posture as before; after you have returned your Match, you are with the thumb of your right hand to run the Pan and clear it, that no sparkles may remain: then with your forefinger you are to thrust the cover of the Pan close: after you have blown off the sparkles.      
44 Poise  
45 Shoulder 

your Musket. 

After you have cleared and shut your Pan, you must grasp your Musket with your right hand close by the britch-pin, as in the second Posture is showed: then raising the Musket with your left hand, you poise it up, holding the mouth of it right upwards, your right arm being stretched out, your rest remaining in your left hand likewise extended: then drawing your right heel to the small of your left foot, at the very instant your right hand brings the Musket to your left shoulder; your left hand with the Rest in it being ready (the same moment) to embrace it at the butt end, the Seare being thrust close to your shoulder; then removing your right leg again to his former station, you stand upright with a full body.      
46 Take the Match between the fingers of the right hand. 

To perform this, view the posture before described at the figure 5. only the Match is to be placed between your fingers of your right hand; as before it was in the left:    
47 Take your Rest into your right hand, clearing your string from your wrist. 

This is to be performed first by drawing in your right heel to the small of your left foot, and withal bringing your right hand to your left, you receive the Rest, clearing your left wrist from the string.    
48 Return your Rest into your left hand, the String loose. 

This is performed as the former Posture is, at the Figure 47 in reverse.    
49 Return your Match into your left hand. 

This is performed as the former Posture is at the Figure 5.    
50 unshoulder your Musket and Poise. 

This is performed, as the former Posture is; at the Figure 8.    
51 Rest your Musket. 

This is likewise performed, as is showed in the former Posture, at the Figure 1.    
52 Set the But end of your Musket upon the ground. 

You are to dismount your Musket off the Rest, then placing the But end of it upon the ground, close by the outside of your right foot, with the Stock towards you, your right hand holding it somewhat more than half way towards the mouth; you stand with a full body bolt upright, with the Musket in the same manner by your right side.    
53 Lay down your 

Musket & Rest. Match 

This Posture is performed, by stepping forwards with your right foot (your self and Piece, standing as in the precedent Posture) then declining with your body, you lay it down gently with the mouth in a right line from you, and and the lock upwards; after the same manner also your Rest and Match is to be disposed of.      
54 Take off  
55 Lay down 

your Bandeliers. 

After your hands are free from your Musket, Match, and Rest, you may with your left hand take off your Hat, which may hinder you, and with your right hand neatly convey them over your head, and so (as before) lay them down along by the side of your Musket, but so as the Match may not fire them.      
56 March from your Arms. 

This is principally used to make the Soldiers apt and ready to find their own places again, and to be quick in re-arming themselves upon a sudden Alarm.     
The Sentinel Posture is no otherwise, then having your Musket rested, primed, and charged with powder and Bullet, for your better ease and readiness to give fire upon the Enemy, to make an Alarm, you, stand at that Posture with the But end of your Musket at your right huckle bone, with a light match cocked, the mouth of the Piece somewhat mounting, and your hand grasping the Stock, with your finger upon the Seare: And this shall suffice for the Postures of the Musket, only you are to draw your Files into an even body again, fit to join with the Body of Pikes.   

CHAP. LXXVII.  
How a● Officer is to 〈◊〉 himself, in the 〈◊〉 of the Pikes, and 〈…〉 Soldier ●s to imitate him punctually from Posture to Posture.  
THe Officer having disposed his Pi●●emen as before is showed, and standing in the midst of the Ring with a Pike in his hand, after he hath ●●●●●●ded silence, and being presupposed that the Soldiers stand with their Pikes advanced; The Officer commands them to  

Order your Pikes. 

This Posture is performed (the Pike being advanced) by drawing in your left heel towards the small of your right foot, and at the same instant raising your left hand as far as you can indifferently stretch it, you grasp the Pike in it, towards the top of your head, than loosening your right hand which holds the But end of the Pike, and withal sinking your left hand with the Pike in it as low as your skirts, you again raise up your right hand, and guiding the Pike with your left, you place the But end of it by the outside of your right foot, your right hand holding it even with your eye, and your thumb right up, then removing your leg to his former station, your left arm being set a kimbo by your side, you shall stand with a full body in a comely Posture.    
Advance your Pikes. 

The Pike being ordered as in the former Posture is showed, without changing of your hold, you must with your right hand lift the Pike a little from the ground, and taking it suddenly again with the left hand towards the 〈◊〉 end, leaving so much length below, as you can afterwards reach well with the right hand, where it is stayed in the fist at the full length of the arm, hanging right downwards; your forefinger and thumb close at the But end, resting it close to your thigh, and bearing against the shoulder close to your breast, causeth it to stand firm and upright, without wavering.    
Shoulder your Pike. 

This Posture may be performed, either when the Pike is advanced, or ordered; (If advanced) than your left hand is to be brought about to your right side, and being stretched upwards, you are to take hold of the Pike towards the top of your head, than loosening your right hand which holds the But end, the left hand sinks the Pike downwards, sloping in a right line forwarns; so that the right hand receiving the second hold as high as it can conveniently reach, and grasps the Pike with the thumb long-ways upon the Pike, and underneath it. Then your left hand leaving its former hold, immediately grasps the Pike just below your right hand, and so both hands being joined together, they gently conveys it unto the right shoulder, leaving the right fist close pressed to the Plate bone thereof; with your right elbow close down by your side, and your left elbow set a kimbo, you stand with an upright full body. Note, that in acting this Posture, your feet are not to be removed either backwards or forwards, but occasionally sideways; as the hands are employed in the executing this Posture: some never stir any foot at all, I leave it as a thing indifferent.    
Level your Pikes. 

This is performed the Pike being shouldered, by bringing your left hand to the Pike, and grasping it close under your right hand (and withal at the same instant drawing in your left heel towards the 〈◊〉 of your right foot) then with an even motion of both your hands, you are to raise the butt end of your Pike, until it lies level upon your shoulder; then returning your hand and foot to their due places, you shall stand in a fai●● Posture. This may be performed without moving the foot, but than it hath not the like grace with it:    
Slope your Pikes. 

This Posture is performed in the same kind the former was, only the hands presseth down the butt end of the Pike, within half a foot of the ground, which causeth it to lie right sloping.    
Charge your Pikes to the Front. 

This Posture may be performed; either when the Pike is advanced, or shouldered; wherealso you must further observe, whether it be to be acted standing, or Marching; If so be your Pike be advanced, and you are to act this Posture standing; Then you must only slip back your right hand, and your right foot a good stride, placing your foot sideways from your body; Then with your left hand, you are to receive the Pike about a yard from the butt end, holding your elbow, in an even distance from your body, with your hand close to your breast, so that the Pike may have the more freedom to play forwards and backwards, just breasthigh of a man, your left knee being bend for wards, and your body yielding towards the point of the Spear, so as you may not easily be thrust back by the Enemy. If your Pike be shouldered, than you must receive the Pike in your left hand a pretty reach downwards, towards the butt end of the same; at the same instant you are to raise the Pike with your right hand from your shoulder, and with your left hand draw in the butt end of the same towards the outside of your right thigh, then slipping back your right foot and hand, you receive the butt-end of it, you charge it as before is showed.  
If this Posture be to be performed Marching (your Pike being shouldered) then first step forwards with your right foot, and let your left hand receive the Pike, and equal distance (from your right hand) towards the butt-end of the same, raising your Pike forwards with your right hand from your shoulder, then at the same instant step forwards with your left foot, and receive the butt-end of the Pike, with your right hand, just behind the side of your right thigh.  
But to perform this Posture, ●rooping, and your Pike advanced; then you are only to step forwards with your left foot; and with a little shogge of the shoulder, and drawing back the butt-end of your Pike in your right hand, will cause the Pike to fall forwards, where your left hand is at the instant to be ready to receive it between the Thumb and the forefingers at a convenient distance.    
Charge to the Horse. 

Note in charging to the Horse it hath been in former ages used, to place the butt-end of your Pike in the ground by the inside of your right foot, and so to draw your Sword over your left arm; and diverse Ranks of Musquetiers placed to shoot over their heads behind them: No question it is a very good way for your Bow-pikes; but the former charging is most in use.    
Charge to the Rear. 

You may by the precedent Posture conceive how to charge your Pike, either to the right or left hand; But for the charging to the Rear, the Pikes being either shouldered or advanced, is somewhat difficult.  
Therefore you may please to observe, that if the Pike be advanced, you must with your left hand take it in his proper place up towards your head, then suddenly turning your body about towards your left hand, and being faced about, you are to thrust back your right hand with the butt-end of the Pike in it, and withal your right leg is to be set out with it; this will bring you into the right Posture.  
But if your Pike be shouldered (and you are to charge to the Rear) than you must take the Pike in your left hand, a good distance from your right hand towards the butt-end, and at the same instant with your right hand, raise the Pike from your shoulder as high above your head towards your left side as possibly you may, then standing firm with your left leg, you are to bring about your right side and leg towards the left hand about, and being half turned, you are to let loose your right hand, and with your left hand you are somewhat to advance the point of the Pike forwards, so that the butt-end may be drawn back by your right side for your right hand to receive it, your right foot also at the very instant being stepped back, makes you stand fully charged.    
Port your Pikes. 

This Posture is performed by holding the Pike a half distance between advancing and charging; and was only invented to case the hind most Ranks from the intolerable labour of continual charging, and to secure the Pikes from the Bullets, which would have more power to break them if they hold them advanced.  
Besides, it is the most aptest and comeliest Posture for a Company to use in marching thorough a Port or Gate, and most readiest for to charge upon a sudden.    
Check your Pike. 

This Posture is to be performed at three Motions; First if your Pike be shouldered, you are to raise it with your right hand from your shoulder, and with a tick of your left hand, you are to convey the butt-end of it by your right side, then thrusting back your right with the Pike in it so far as conveniently may be; you are to take a fathom with your left hand as far towards the Spear end of the Pike as possibly you may; then conveying the Pike in your left hand baackward as before, you are again with your right hand to take another fathom, within a foot of your Pikes end; Lastly, stepping forwards with your left foot, you bring your left hand withal, which receives the Pike within a quarter of a foot of the Spears end, Provided always that in all the motions of the hands, you suffer not the butt-end to touch the ground, until you have checked it with your left hand. Pikes as you were.    
Trail your Pikes. 

This Posture is performed after you have used the Circumstances in checking (as in the precedent Posture is showed) by bringing up your Right foot even with your left, and by removing your right hand just before your left, close to the end of the Pike, than you are to withdraw your left hand, and place it a-kimbo by your side, and your right hand will hold the end of the Spear just above your right hucklebone, with your body standing full forwards. Pikes as you were.    
Lay down your Pikes. 

This Posture is to be performed your Pike being advanced, by stepping forwards with your right foot, than your right shoulder with a small bearing forwards, and with it a little jog, causeth the Pike to meet the left hand, which gently conveys the Spears end to the ground, then turning about your right arm in a kind of Circle, will cause the back of your hand to be next the outside of your right Thigh; then leaning your body forwards, you convey the butt-end to the ground, close at the side of your right foot, so as the Pike will lie in an even line from your foot forwards.    
Recover your Pikes and charge. 

This Posture is performed your feet standing even together, only owing your body forwards, you cause the back of your right hand to be put down close by the outside of your right foot, then in the raising of the butt-end of your Pike, you turn your hand with the Pike in it, so that the inside of your hand will be towards your right side; Then your left hand in the raising, taketh the Pike at a convenient place or distance, and elevates it either to the Posture of charging or ordering, as the Officer shall please to command; The word of Command which the Officer is to use for the reducing of these Postures to their first station is; Pikes as you were.  
There are diverse other Postures which I do here omit, referring you to the book of Military discipline, Composed by that worthy Gentleman, Master William Barrife, Lieutenant to the Artillery Garden, who hath merited much honour in performing so Noble a work, in a most concise, and exquisite way, for the which our Kingdom is much bound to him.      

CHAP. LXXVIII.  
How the Commanders shall draw their Files, both of Musquetiers and Pikes, and join them in one body, fit to be exercised in gross.  
YOu have seen every Soldier perform his Postures well, than you must draw out the File-leader of the Right-hand-file, with his whole File, Commanding every File-leader successively to draw up his File, either of other; And being drawn into a body, command them to advance their Pikes.  
In the mean time the Lieutenant or some other Officer is to divide the Musquetiers (they being drawn into a body, as aforesaid) into two equal parts or Divisions; if there should be an odd File in one of the Divisions, it makes no matter.  
Next you are to draw up your body of Pikes between those Divisions of Muskets, fronting them with the Muskets in an even line.  
Or otherwise, you may draw your Musquetiers upon the left wing of your body of Pikes, their Front and Ranks being placed even one against another; you are to command the Pikes to open their Ranks, and to order their Pikes; the Musquetiers are to have all their Muskets Rested.  
Then commanding the right-hand-division (only) to shoulder their Muskets, and to face to the Right-hand.  
Then commanding them to March even, through the Ranks of the Pikes an ordinary distance beyond them, and causing them to face to the lefthand, will bring them into true order with the Pikes.  
Next you are to command the residue, or left wing of Muskets to shoulder their Pieces, and to face to the right hand, and advance them forwards to the side of the Pikes; observing their distance betwixt them; then facing them to the Left hand makes them stand even with the Pikes.  
Or if you please, you may make use of a third way, to draw your Musquetiers upon either Wing of your Pikes.  
Your Pikes being first drawn into a square body, and your Musquetiers in a like square body, being drawn up to the rear of the Pikes.  
You may command them to double their Front to the Right and left hand by Division, which is in this kind performed;  
One half of the Files of Musqueteirs are to face to the right hand, and the other half to the left hand, either Division marching after they are turned right forwards about six foot beyond the flanks of the Pikes.  
Then that Division of Musquetiers which marched towards the lefthand, you are to command them to face to the right hand.  
And the division of Musquetiers that marched to the right hand, you are to command them to face to the Left.  
Then both the divisions of Shot at one instant in an even order, are to March up by the side of the Pikes, until they front even with them.  
These things being thus performed, you are to command your Musquetiers to shoulder their Muskets and slope them.  
You are likewise to command your Pikemen to advance their Pikes, and then begin to exercise them in their Motions as followeth, having first ordered them in their distance for Motion at six foot both in Rank and File.   

CHAP. LXXIX.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Company in gross, in their proper Motions, after he hath drawn the Shot upon either Wing of the Body of Pikes: with the words of Command for the performance thereof; as also for the reducing them to their first station.  
HAving duly performed those Circumstances specified in the former Chapter, and now standing in the head of your Company; the Lieutenant in the Rear, and the Sergeants upon either Flank, after you have commanded silence, and also to stand right in their Ranks and Files, you shall command them to.  
Faces to the right hand.  
This Motion is performed only by turning your body to the place where your right hand stood, 
Note the Soldiers must be placed in their distance for Motion six foot both in Rank and File.  not moving your right foot at all, but turning it a little upon the ball; and to reduce them to their former station, you must use this word of Command (As you were) so turning to the left hand again, brings them to their former station.  

Faces to the left hand. 

This motion is performed by turning your body to the place where your left hand stood, 
When your Soldiers begin any motion, let them; advance their Arms when they come to a stand, and have performed their motion, let them order their Arms.  bringing your left leg somewhat about, and only turning your right foot a little upon the Ball: and to reduce them to their former station, you must use this Word of Command (As you were) so turning off to the right hand, brings them to their first Station.    
Faces to the right hand about. 

This motion is performed, by turning of your body round about by the right hand, so that your face stands where your back parts did, and to reduce them to their former station, you must use this Word of Command, (To the left hand about as you were) so turning back again by the left hand, brings them to their first Station.    
Faces to the left hand about. 

This motion is performed, 
As for the causing your Soldiers to face to the right and left, or to the right and left inward, or to the right angle or left angle, or to the four Angles, I leave it to the discretion of the Commander, either to do it, or leave it, and the like for the facing of half files.  by turning of your body round about by the left hand, so that your face stands where your back parts did: and to reduce them to their former Station, you must use this word of Command (To the right hand about as you were) so turning back again by the right hand, brings them to their first Station.     
These motions of facing being perfectly done, you shall command the whole Company to front to the right hand, and cause them there to begin anew the aforesaid motions; where ten to one, you shall find them anew to seek; so fronting them from hand to hand round about, will make them perfect; otherwise, they will be to seek, as oft as you alter your Front.   

CHAP. LXXX.  
Of Facing Square, and how to perform it; The usefulness of Face, and the several parts thereof.  
Face are so useful and necessary, that a Commander may as well dispense with any one of the grounds of Discipline as with them; for upon all occasions in Service they are useful, and not only sooner executed than any other of the motions, but may be needful when wheelings and Countermarches cannot be used, as in a strait. There are no more than four faces entire, besides Angular; as in the precedent Chapter is showed; But as for your divisionall there be diverse which I have omitted.  
Entire Face, are so called, when the aspect of the whole Company is directed one way.  
Divisionall Face are so called, when the aspect of the Soldiers is at one and the same time directed diverse ways; as to the Front and Rear, the Right, the Right and Left, or to all four at once, etc.  
Angular Face are so called, when the Aspect of the Company is directed to the right Corner man, which is the right Angle, or to the left Corner man, which is the left Angle, or to the four Corner men, which are termed the four Angles.  
These Angular Face, amongst the Grecians were of great use, for they made use of them by reducing out of the Square, a Diamond Battle; and from the Diamond, they reduced two Triangles, by cutting or dividing the same in the midst at the two flat Angles; and of two Triangles they framed a Shear Battle; and of three or four Triangles, they framed their Saw-Battell, etc.  
Now for the instructing of your Soldiers how to Face Square (if the body be but eight in depth) you must command the two first Ranks to stand fast, likewise the two last Ranks are to face about, the rest of the Body, are to face to the Right and Left; if the Body be deeper, than you must command more Ranks to the Front, and so likewise to the Rear; and in the viewing the subsequent Figure, you shall the better understand the manner of performing this motion of Square Facing.  
Face Square, and March.  
Proper Front.  

It is nccessary for Soldiers to move 10. or 12. paces upon every motion of facing, whether entire or Divisionall.   
Front accidental.  
Front accident all.  
The Front of the Rear.  
The Words of Command commonly used to produce this precedent Figure, are these as followeth, if they be 10 in depth, and 20 in Rank.  
The first three Ranks stand.  
The three last Ranks face about.  
The rest of the Body face to the Right and Left, (then) March all.  
To reduce them to their first Order:  
Face all about to the Right; March, and close your Divisions.  
Face all to your Leader, (who then stands at his Front proper.)  
Another way of facing Square, and Marching upon it.  
The Front proper.  
The Front of the left Flank.  
The Front of the right Flank.  
The Front of the Rear.  
The words of Command customarily used to produce this Figure, are these as followeth.  
Musquetiers, face to the right and left.  
Halfe-files of Pikes, faces about to the right (then) March all.  
To reduce them to their former order.  
Face all about to the right, March and close your Divisions.  
Face all to your Leader.  
In the next Chapter I shall show the manner of Opening and Closing both of Files and Ranks; and then some instructions of doubling them, with their use and parts.   

CHAP. LXXXI.  
The manner of opening, and closing, both of Ranks and Files, and how to double them with the use and parts thereunto belonging.  
IN the opening, and closing of Ranks and Files, there are diverse things considerable, as first in the motion of Files, you are to observe your Leader.  
Secondly, in your motion of Ranks, you are to observe your right-hand 〈◊〉.  
Thirdly, when Files open to the right, the Left-hand-file, must stand fast, every 〈◊〉 taking 〈◊〉 distance from the File next his left hand.  
Fourthly, when they open to the Le, than the right hand File stands; every File taking his distance from the File next his Right hand.  
Fiftly, in closing of Files if it be to the right, then contrary to the opening the Right-hand-file stands: the rest closing to the right taking then Distance, from their next right hand-file.  
Sixthly, if you close to the left, than the Left-hand-file stands, the rest of the Files closing to the left, taking their distance in like manner.  
Seventhly, when Files close to the right and left, than they close inwards, taking their distance from the Files within them, nearer to the midst of the body.  
Eighthly, note when Files are commanded to open to the right and left (or by division) it must be outward.  
Likewise you must observe when Ranks open forwards, than the last Rank stands, every Rank taking his distance from the Rank next behind him.  
Secondly, when they open backwards, than the first Rank is to stand, and every Rank is to take his distance from the Rank next before him.  
Thirdly, if Ranks close to Front and Rear, than the first and last Rank stands, the other taking their distances from them.  
Fourthly, if they close Ranks towards the Centre or midst, than they close towards their two middlemost ranks.  
Lastly, you are to observe, that in opening of Files and Ranks, you are (in the acting of it) either to face to the right, or to the right about; these things being considered, and you having commanded them to even their Ranks, and straighten their Files, you are to use these words of Command following  
Ranks and Files to your close order. 
Of the several distances you shall read before.   

Files open to the right  
Ranks open forwards 

to your Order.    
Files open to the right  
Ranks open forwards 

to your open order.    
Files open to the right  
Ranks open forwards 

to your double distance.    
Files close to the Right  
Ranks close forwards 

to your open order.    
Files close to the right  
Ranks close forwards 

to your order.    
Files close to the Right  
Ranks close forwards 

to your close order.    
Files open to the Left  
Ranks open backwards 

to your order.    
Files, open to the left.  
Ranks, open backwards. 

to your open order.    
Files, open to the left.  
Ranks, open backwards. 

to your double distance.    
Files, close to the left.  
Ranks close backward. 

to your open order    
Files, close to the left.  
Ranks, close backward. 

to your order.    
Files, close to the left.  
Ranks, close backward. 

to your close order.    
Files,  
Ranks, 

open to the 

right and left  
front and rear. 

to your order.        
Files,  
Ranks, 

open to the 

right and left  
front and rear 

to your open order.        
Files,  
Ranks, 

open to the 

right and left,  
front and rear, 

to your double distance.        
Files,  
Ranks, 

close to the 

right and left inward  
midst, 

to your open order.         
These motions being performed by the Soldiers fairly, and with out mistakes; you may proceed to exercise them, in their doublings; and show them their use and parts; as the following Chapter will direct.   

CHAP. LXXXII.  
How an Officer shall exercise his Company in doubling of their Ranks and Files with the use thereof, and the several parts and branches thereto belonging.  
THe use of doublings were invented for the strengthening of any part of the Battle, according to the discretion of the wise Commander, and are distinguished into these two generals, viz. doublings of length, and doublings of depth.  
Doubling of Ranks doth make the number double so much as was before, whereby the length of the Battle is extended to the double proportion of ground.  
Doubling of Files (or Flanks) doth likewise double the number in depth; as the former did in length: and before we proceed to particularise these doublings; let us take notice of these observations following.  
First, that in this motion of doubling there is one part of the body stands firm and the other part moves, viz. the standing part is to be doubled, the part moving are those that double.  
Secondly, observe that the distance for particular and divisionall doublings, is open Order in Ranke and File.  
Thirdly, observe that the ordinary doublings of Ranks and Files is or aught to be performed by three steps; viz, first stepping forth with that foot which is next unto the place named.  
Fourthly, in the reducement to your former station, you must return by the contrary hand.  
Fifthly, observe in doubling of Ranks and Files, viz, if you double Ranks either to the right or left hand; if you double your Files to the contrary hand, reduceth them into their former station; or in doubling of Files to either hand; doubling of your ranks to the contrary will reduce them.  
Lastly, observe the several parts or branches of doublings; which are, 

Doubling of 

First, Ranks.  
Secondly, Halfe-Files.  
Thirdly, Bringers up.  
Fourthly, The Rear.  
Fifthly, Files.  
Sixthly, Halfe-Rankes,      
The first is doubling of Ranks, which is performed when every Even-ranke is doubled into the Odd.  
The second is, when the half Files double their Ranks forwards into the Front.  
The third is, when the Bringers-up double their Ranks forwards into the Front.  
The fourth is, when the Front half Files doubleth the Rear: these first four being doublings of Ranks, causeth the length of the Battle to be extended either simply in number, or both in number and place.  
The fifth is, the ordinary doubling of Files, viz. every one of the even Files being inserted into the odd Files; accounting from the hand named.  
The sixth and last is, the doubling of half Ranks; which is to be understood when one Flank doubles the other, either by passing through, Countermarch, doubling entire, or divisionall;  
The words of Command most properly used for doublings.  

Ranks, to the 

Right  
Left. 

double.      
Ranks, as you were.  
Files, to the 

Right.  
Left. 

double.    
Files, as you were.     

Bringers up, double your Ranks forward to the right.  
Bringers up, face about to the left: march forth into your places.  
Bringers up, double your Ranks forward to the left.  
Bringers up, face about to the right: march forth into your places.   

Files, to the right and left double. 

Outward,  
Inward. 

Files, as you were.       

Half Files, double your Ranks forward to the right.  
Half Files, face about to the left: march forth into your places.  
Half Files, double yur Ranks forwards to the left.  
Half Files, face about to the right: march forth into yrur places.   

Front half Files, face about to the Left. 

And double the Rear to the right.  
March forth into your places.     

Front half Files, face about to the right. 

And double the Rear to the left.  
March forth into your places,     

Front Halfe-files double the Rear to the Right by Countermarch.  
Front Halfe-files face about to the left; March forth into your places.  
Front Halfe-files double the Rear to the left by Countermarch.  
Front Halfe-files face about to the right; March forth into your places.  
Half Ranks to the Right by Countermarch double your Left Flank,  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the Right; March forth into your places.  
Halfe-Rankes to the left by Countermarch, double your Right flank.  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the Left; March forth into your places;  
Halfe-rankes of the Right, double your left flank.  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the right; March forth into your places.  
Half Ranks of the left, double your right flank.  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the left. March forth into your places.  
Halfe-files double your front to the right entire.  
Halfe-files face about to the left; March forth into your places.  
Halfe-files double your front to the left entire.  
Halfe-files face about to the right; March forth into your places.  
Halfe-files double your front inward entire.  
Halfe-files face about to the right; March forth into your places.  
Halfe-files double your front by division.  
Halfe-files, face about to the right and left; March forth into your places.  
Front halfe-files, double your Rear by Division.  
Front halfe-files, face about to the right and left inward; March to your places.  
Front halfe-files, double your rear to the right entire.  
Front halfe-files, face about to the left; March forth into your places.  
Front halfe-files, double your Rear to the left entire.  
Front halfe-files, face about to the right; March forth into your places:  
Halfe-rankes of the right, double your left flank, entire to the right.  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face about to the left; March forth into your places.  
Halfe-rankes of the left, double your right flanks entire to the left.  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face about to the right; March into your places.  
Halfe-rankes of the right, double your left flank by Division.  
Halfe-rankes that doubled, face about to the right, and left inward; March forth into, etc.  
Double your Ranks to the right entire.  
Ranks that doubled, face to the left; March forth into your places.  
Double your Ranks to the left entire.  
Ranks that doubled face to the right; March forth into your places.  
Double your Ranks by Division.  
Ranks that doubled, face to the right and left inward; March forth into your places.  
Double your Files to the right entire advancing.  
Files that doubled, face about to the left; March forth into your places.  
Double your files to the left entire advancing.  
Files that doubled face about to the right: March forth into your places.  
Files double your depth entire to the 

Right,  
Left. 

Files that doubled, as you were.      
Files double your depth to the Right: every man falling behind his Bringer-up.  
Files that doubled, as your were.   
Thus have I run over the Words of Command, whereby the doubling both of Ranks and Files are produced, and also the aptest way and terms to reduce them to their first form and station, as for demonstrating them by Figure, it would be too tedious; in regard I am to discourse of all the parts belonging to the Body of War; wherefore I shall only exemplify them, by discourse in the following Chapter.   

CHAP. LXXXIII.  
Directions how to perform those several kinds of doublings: and how to reduce them again, according to the foregoing Words of Command, for producing and reducing them.  
HAving spoken briefly in the foregoing Chapter, concerning the several kinds of doublings, and mentioned both the words of Command, which produceth them; and also the words of Direction for the reducing of them to their first Form and Station; In this Chapter, I shall endeavour to set down brief directions, how they may best be performed; with the readiest way for the executing of them. The Words of Command (you shall find in the Margin) which produceth each several motion, of doubling both of Ranks and Files.  

Ranks to the Right double. 

This doubling of Ranks to the Right, is naught else but the inserting of the Even-rankes into the Odde-rankes; wherein you must note, that in the doubling of Ranks, the Even-rankes are to double into the Odd, beginning always to reckon from the first Rank; so that the second Rank doubles into the first, entering in upon the Right hand of him that stands in the Rank right before him, and so stands even abreast with them. The fourth Rank, after the same manner doubles upon the right hand of him that stands before him in the third Rank. The sixth Rank after the same manner doubles into the fifth Rank. The eighth into the seventh, and the tenth into the ninth. So that the Right-hand man of that Rank that doubleth to the Right, is always to take his place upon the outermost side of the Right-hand man of that Rank that was doubled, the rest of his Rank doing accordingly. After the same manner, it is to be performed to the Left hand, only now you are to take the left hand of him that stands in the Rank before you after the same manner as before you did the Right. For the reducing of them, those Ranks that doubled, must turn off to the contrary hand of that they doubled unto: The Command is, Ranks as you were. Or otherwise you may reduce them, by commanding the Leaders to draw out their Files, (viz.) those Ranks that doubled, are to stand firm; and those that were doubled are to march out, until their last Rank be a pretty distance before the first Rank of them that doubled, and then they are to step into their Even distances, and stand even in Rank and File, as before.    
Files to the Left double. 

The words of Command which produceth this doubling of Files is placed in the Margin: 
The manner of doubling of Files described.  And the way to perform it is as followeth; First each of the even Files doubleth into the odd Files, beginning from the hand named; as in this doubling of Files to the Left; The Left-hand-file stands fast, and the second File doubleth into it by stepping behind his Left-hand-man at three steps; The fourth File doubleth into the third, and so for the rest; If your Command be to double your Files to the right; then chose the Right-hand-file stands fast; the rest of the even Files doubling into the odd, accounting from the Right, as before from the Left; And by the way observe, that as in doubling of Ranks any way, you are to observe your Right-hand leader; So in doubling of Files you are to observe your File-leader; so that as near as possibly may be, you may either in Rank or File, be altogether in one motion; Also take notice that this kind of doubling, is a doubling of number, and not of place, for the depth of the Battle is not thereby extended, the words of Command used for the reducing of them is, Files as you were.    
Bringers up, double your Ranks forward to the Right. 

In this doubling of Ranks by Bringers-up, as likewise in all other of like nature; 
The manner of doubling of Ranks by the Bringers-up, described.  they that are to move, are first to advance their Arms; in the next place they must be sure to observe their Right-hand-men. This doubling of Ranks by Bringers-up differeth from the other doubling of Ranks before demonstrated, both in quantity and quality: In quantity it differeth, in regard the other leaves a large distance between Rank and Ranke, being double the distance they formerly stood at. This chose continuing and preserving the same distance they formerly stood at between each Rank; It differeth also in quality, because it brings the best, and second sort of Soldiers, together into the Front; The words of Command, and direction (whereby this motion is produced) is placed in the Margin; The manner of performing this Motion is thus; the tenth or last Rank, which are the bringers up, are to pass forwards even in rank, through or between the Intervals to the right of them that stand before them, until they come even in Rank with the Front; the ninth Rank following those which marched from behind them, placing themselves in the second Rank. The eight eight Rank in the third. The seventh Rank in the fourth. The sixth rank or Halfe-files, in the fifth or rear of the front halfe-files. This doubling maketh a very able Front in bringing the ablest Soldiers together, and although the depth of the Battle be diminished, yet the length of it is double in number; this doubling is in quantity of number, not of ground.  
When you march into your places, you must not forget, that the Rank which last took his place in the execution of this Motion, must first march into his place in the way of reducement, for as they are led forth by their bringers up, chose they are led off by their halfe-file Leaders. As for the doubling the Front to the Left hand by Bringers up, it is the same; only differing in this, that whereas it was to the Right, this must be performed to the Left; The Words of Command and direction for reducement of this motion is, Bringers up, face about to the left, march forth into your places.    
Files, to the right and left double outwards; 

I will in the first place describe the manner of doubling of Files outwards; 
The manner of doubling of Files outward and inward described.  which worketh the same effect, as to double Files to the right and left; for the right Flank is to double to the right, and the left Flank to the left; by this doubling of Files to the right and left outwards both the Flanks at one instant are strengthened by doubling their number in depth; but it weakeneth the inward part, where it taketh two Files clean away, leaving a large interval in the midst; after the word of command is given; the outmost File of each Flank stands, and the second File doubles into them; the third from each Flank stands, and the fourth File doubles into the third, the sixth into the fifth, and so likewise of all the rest. Note, that in doubling of Files you must always step behind the side-man that you are to double into.  
If you would double Files to the right and left inwards; it is to be done the contrary way: 
Of doubling Files to the right and left inwards.  for whereas in the precedent doubling the outmost Files stand; and the other doubling outwards in to them: chose in this; the two inmost Files shall stand, and the rest are to double inwards to them; and whereas in the other there is a larger distance in the midst then in any other part; but in this doubling inwards the midst will be as close as any other part; the words of Command for the reducing of them into their first form is; Files, as you were. Then the Files which doubled inwards upon the right Flank are to turn off to the right, and those of the left Flank to the left; and so step into their places.  
This doubling of ranks forewards by halfe-files; 
The manner of doubling of Ranks by half Files described.  is a motion generally approved of to be very serviceable. It differeth from the other doublings by Bringers-up in quality though not in quantity (for in quantity they keep one and the same proportion) In quality it differs thus: the doubling by Bringers-up doth bring the best and second sort of Soldiers together into the Front; the fourth and third sort into the Rear; so that the Rear is 4/7 worse than the front. But this doubling by halfe-files brings the best and the third together into the front; and leaves the second and fourth in the Rear; so that the Front is made more able than the Rear by 1/3.    
Halfe-Files, double your Ranks, forwards to the right. 

It differeth like wise in motion thus: for whereas in the other doubling by Bringers-up the motion was begun by the last rank, ever rank following the rank which came from behind him. But this chose is directly led forth by the sixth rank from the front (they being ten deep in File) and so is executed more surely and suddenly.  
After the words of Command are give (as you see placed in the Margin;) then the sixth rank passing up into the first; the seventy rank into the second; the eighth Rank into the third; and so for the rest. For the reducement the words of Command are, Halfe-Files face about to the left, march forth into your places. Then as the motion was led on by the half File Leaders; so in the Reducement they are led off by the Bringers up.  
You may double your halfe-Files to the left after the same manner of the former; only changing to the contrary hand.    
Front, half Files; face about to the left, and double your rear to the right. 

This doubling the Rear by front half Files; is differing from the doubling last discoursed of more in manner then matter; 
The manner of doubling the Rear by the Front halfe-files described.  For they both correspond in Substance, only they differ in circumstance: After the words of command, and direction are given (as is expressed in the margin;) then the Front half Files are to face about to the left (the Pikes being all advanced, and the Musquetttiers all either poized or shouldered) and so being led by the half File Leaders to the Rear they March directly forwards to the right of the other part of the body, which stood faced in opposition, until the Leaders of the doubling have ranked even in rank with the bringers up; the rest ranking even with the other standing Ranks, according to their places: If this doubling be used in service, than the whole body is to face about to the rear, being the part to be doubled; but in way of exercise the Commander may keep his place, and the doubling being performed; and the whole body faced to the leader. Then for reducement you may command Files to the Right entire adllancing; then every man falling before his Leader will reduce each man to his first station.  
Or otherwise you may command; Front Halfe-files, face about to the Left, march forth into your places; which they performing accordingly will reduce them.    
Front halfe-files, double your Rear to the Right by Countermarch. 

This kind of doubling of the Rear, by the Front half Files, 
The manner of doubbling the Rear, by Countermarch described.  is performed contrary to the former, for it is done by way of the Lacedaemonian countermarch, and doth produce the same effect to the rear, as doubling the Front by Bringers up doth into the Front: the countermarch by which it is performed, is a countermarch of loss of ground: 
It is at the discretion of the Commander, to face the Company which way he pleaseth, either for motion or Reducement.  where note, one part or moiety of the body countermarcheth; thereby not altering the number of the length and depth of the figure; but only transferring one part into another.  
You must further observe that if the rear be doubled to the right, than the countermarch must be to the left: If the doubling be to the Left, than the Countermarch must be to the Left; If the doubling be to the Left, than the Countermarch must be to the Right. The way to reduce them is (if the Commander stand at the head of that part that is doubled) to Command: Front halfe-files, face about to the Right, March forth into your places. But if he keeps his first standing, and having faced them to him: Then, Front halfe-files, march forth into your places; To double the Rear to the Left is the same, only changing the hand.    
Half Ranks to the Right, by Countermarch double your left Flank. 

Halfe-rankes (or Flanks) are then said to be doubled when the depth of the Battalia is increased, 
The manner of doubbling Flanks by way of Countermarch, described.  to double their former proportion of number, or place, or both; this doubling of halfe-rankes to the left Flank by Countermarch, is a doubling of number and not of place, for the depth still retains the same proportion, only augmented by one man, but the length of the Battalia is diminished both in number and place, the right Flank being wholly inserted into the left Flank; after the words of Command is given (that produceth this motion) which you shall find placed in the Margin; then the half Ranks to the Right, are to face to the Right, and then even in Rank together they are to counter March between the intervals, until to the outmost File to the Right, be come into the outmost File of the Left Flank, (the body being 20 in Rank, or breast) than the second into the nineteenth, the third into the eighteenth, the fourth into the seventeenth, the fifth into the sixteenth, and the rest in like manner. The use of this doubling is to strengthen one of the Flanks; by bringing more hands to do present execution, the other Flank being in more surety. The way for reducement of this motion is after this manner, the half Ranks last doubled, being faced to the Right; then they which were the Last, which took their places in the motion; now are the first which take their places in the reducement, orderly Marching in Rank together until they come to their places; then facing to their Leader they become Files again. The left Flank may in like manner, double the right by Countermarch; the difference is this: The right Flank stands, the left Flank is inserted into the Right as before the Right was into the Left.    
Half Files double your front to the Right entire. 

If in this doubling of Half Files to the Right entire, it should be performed, 
The manner of doubling Halfe-files to the Right entire, to accommodate the doubling of Halfe-rankes described.  as the body stands in an ordinary Square, Flanked with Musquetiers, than it would produce a mixture of Arms; wherefore to avoid this, before you enter upon this doubling of passing in, through or between your half Ranks: Cause your half Files to double the Front to the Right entire; which being performed, you may then proceed to the doubling of your Flanks, any way you please without Mixture of Arms. This doubling of the Front by Halfe-files to the Right entire, is thus performed; After the words of Command are given, the halfe-files are to face to the Right; then marching out forwards until the lefthand File belonging to the Rear, be marched past the right halfe-file belonging to the Front, then facing to the left, they march up even abreast, until the Fileleaders of the halfe-files to the Rear, be placed even in rank with the Fileleaders of the Front; all the rest of the ranks placing themselves even with the other ranks. This manner of doubling halfe-files is a doubling both of number and place, for the length of the Battle is not only double so many abreast as they were before, but they also have extended their Length to double their proportion of ground which formerly they did occupy; now you are to conceive that this doubling of Half Files which I have now discoursed of, is performed for this purpose, that when the Half Ranks of the Right, double the Left Flank; there shall by this means be no mixture of Arms.    
Half Ranks of the right double your left flank. 

In the next place let us demonstrate the way how the Half Ranks of the Right should double their Left Flank, 
How the Halfe-ranke of the Right, are to double the left Flank, is described.  which is thus performed; the Left Flank stands, the Half Ranks of the Right are to face to the Left; and then the inmost File of the Right Flank (all the Files of the Right Flank, being by this facing become Ranks) is the Leader of this motion, marching forth Right to their Left hands, between the intervals of the Ranks of the left Flank; until the twentieth File (accounting from the Right Flank which now is become a Rank) have placed themselves orderly in the fortieth File, 
The half files having doubled the Front to the Right entire, causeth them to be 40 in Rank or Breast, before they were but 20.  which is the outmost File of the Left Flank; the nineteenth in the nine and thirty, the eighteenth in the eight and thirty, and so of all the rest; this doubling is of number and not of place. For reducement to both these doublings; first cause the half Ranks, which last doubled, to face to the Right, and so to march out into their places: They that last took their place in the motion, are the first that take their places in the reducements: the doubling of Half Ranks being thus reduced, You are next to reduce the Half Files; by commanding them to face about to the Left, and to March forth into their places: Note these kind of divisionall doublings requires open order in Rank and File. And for your Entire doublings there is only the distance of order in Rank and File required.    
Halfe-files double your front to the left entire. 

All doublings aer either Entire or divisionall; 
The difference between entire and divisionall doublings, and of doubling half files entire, described.  Entire doublings are to be understood, when as Files or halfe-files, Ranks, or halfe-rankes; (according as the Command is given) do March forth jointly together without division or dissipation, to double the part Commanded.  
Divisionall doublings, are such as formerly is showed (viz.) when the Files or halfe-files, Ranks or halfe-rankes, are disranked and divided into more parts, or places then one,  
This doubling of halfe-files to the Left entire is thus to be performed, first the halfe-files to the Rear, face to the Left, and March forwards until they are quite clear of that part of the body, which stands, than they face to their Leader; and so March up until they are become even in Rank with those that stand upon the Right Flank, and then, the form is perfect, the word of Command which produceth it, is placed in the Margin.  
For the Reducement, the halfe-files that doubled having faced about they March strait forth until they be clear of the Front halfe-files; then they face to the Left, and March strait forth until every man hath his right place, and then they are to face right after their Leaders, the words of Command and direction for this Reducement is, Halfe-files face about to the Right, March forth into your places.  
This kind of doubling of halfe-files hath been held a better doubling, then either the ordinary doubling of Ranks, or the usual way of doubling by halfe-files, or bringers up, the reasons are these, first it makes no disturbance to the other part of the Battalia; but that it may either be executed in time of Motion, Exercise or Skirmish: Secondly it appears another solid body; to the great disheartening of an Enemy: Thirdly it is very apt for over Fronting; it being a doubling both of number and place.    
Halfe-files double your front inward entire. 

This Motion of doubling the Front inward entire, hath been of great request; 
The manner of doubling the Front inward entire described.  and is most commonly used by great Bodies; as when a Regiment, Division, or Maniple, Moveth forwards, between two others, thereby seconding or relieving them: Whereby the Front of all the three Divisions become ranged in an even Line; the words of Command & direction that produceth this Motion is placed in the Margin The Motion of this doubling is thus to be performed: The halfe-files of the Front, faceth to the Right and Left; and either Division Marcheth right forth until they have left a distance between them sufficient to receive the halfe-files of the Rear, and then they are to stand and face to their Leader: Then the halfe-files March up and even their Front.  
For the Reducement of this figure; Let the halfe-files face to the Rear, and March until they are clear of the Front Halfe-files, then stand and face about to their Leader or Commander; then the other halfe-files of the Front, are to close their Division, and they are reduced. The Words of Command used for this reducement are, Halfe-files, face about, and march. Front halfe-files, close your Divisions, face all to your Leader.    
Halfe-files double your front by Division. 

This kind of doubling, 
The manner of doubling the Frong with half files by division, described.  as before is showed, is of singular good use, because it may be performed in time of fight, without disturbance to the other part of the Battle. The way to perform this motion, is as followeth; first, the halfe-files of the Rear are to face to the right and left; and then to march rightforth until they are clear of the Rear part of the Front-division, than they are to face to their Leader, and march, until they become even in rank with the Front, and so stand; which perfects this doubling.  
The way to reduce them is as followeth; viz. the halfe-files are to face about to the Rear, and to march forthright, until they are clear of the Front halfe-files, and then they are to face to the right and left inwards, and so to march and close their Divisions; then being faced to their Leader they are reduced. The Words of Command for reducement, are Halfe-files face about inwards, March forth into your places.    
Front halfe-files double your Rear by Division. 

This doubling of the Rear by the Front halfe-files, will work the same effect to the Rear, 
The manner of doubling the Rear with halfe-files by division, described.  as the last doubling by division did to the Front. It may be useful in the passing of a River, when the Enemy chargeth or pursueth in the Rear, the Front-division either opening and suffering the Rear halfe-files to pass through them, they maintaining the skirmish, until the other have attained the further Bank of the River: Or else the Front halfe-files being opened to the right and left, and faced upon the Enemy, march valiantly up and receive the charge, whilst the other provide for themselves; for the manner and way of this motion, it may be thus performed. After the Command is given, the Front halfe-files are to face to the right and left, and march right forth until they are clear of the other halfe-files of the Rear, than they face to the Rear and march on, until they have attained to be even in rank with them whom they had command to double; which perfects the doubling. The way to reduce them followeth; if you keep your place of the first Front, then let your half-files face about, and march until they are clear of the Rear halfe-files which stand, than face to the right and left inwards, and close their Division, and being again faced to their Leader, they are reduced to their first form. The words of Command properly used for this reducement, is; Front halfe-files, face about to the right and left inward, March forth into your places.    
Front halfe-files double your Rear to the right entire. 

This doubling of the Rear to the Right entire by the Front halfe-Files, 
The manner of doubling the Rear entire, by the Front halfe-files, described.  is thus to be performed; after the Word of Command is given, the half Files of the Front are to face to the Left, and march strait out, until they are clear of that part of the Body which stands; then they are to face again to the Left (which is the Rear) and march outright until they rank even with the last Rank of the Reere-division; which gives conclusion to the doubling. For reducement thereof, your Front halfe-Files face about to the left, and march right forth until they are clear of the Rear halfe-Files, than face them to the Right, and let them march into their places; then if the Commander go to his first Front, and face them all to him, they are reduced as at first. To double the Rear to the Left entire, may be done after the same manner, only differing in hand. The Words of Command which reduceth it, are Front halfe-Files, face about to the left, March forth into your places.    
Half Ranks of the right, double your left Flank entire to the right. 

This doubling of the left Flank by advancing the right Flank, 
The manner of doubling by half Ranks entire described.  and placing it before the Leaders of the left Flank, which is a doubling both of number and place, being very useful for the strengthening of any Flank where it shall seem needful.  
And if you desire to have your Musketires to double even with the Musketires of the contrary Flank; than you must first cause the half Ranks of the right Flank to march forthright, until the Rear-Rank of the right Flank be advanced about 3 foot before the Front of the left Flank; and then cause that Flank so advanced to countermarch their Ranks to the right, and then all your Musketires will be together, and the Pikes likewise by themselves. The manner of performing this motion according to the words of Command in the Margin, is as followeth: First the left Flank stands, and the right Flank marcheth forthright, until the Rear of the right Flank be advanced before the Front of the left Flank (as before is showed) than face them to the left, and cause them to march until the Pikes are even in Rank with the Musketires, which perfects the doubling. For the Reducement, let the half Ranks that doubled face about to the left, and march until they are clear of the left Flank, then cause them to face to the right, and to march strait down into their places: then the Commander being at his first Front faceth them all to him, which reduceth them as at first. The left Flank may also double the right Flank entire after the former manner, only changing the hand; the Command for reducement is Half Ranks that doubled, face about to the Left, march forth into your places.    
Half Ranks of the left, double your right Flank by division. 

This motion of doubling Flanks by division doth make a strong form of Battle to give fire three several ways at once; 
The manner of doubling Flanks by division described.  The manner of performing it after the word of Command is given as followeth: The Rear half-Files of the left Flank face about to the right, and then both the Front half-Files and Rear half-Files march forthright until they are clear of that part of the body that stands; then each division faceth that way which they are to double (which the Front half-Files must do to the right, and the Rear half-Files to the left) & so march forthright until the doubling be performed. For reducement, if the Commander stands at the right Flank (which is the part that was doubled) then the reducement is as followeth; the half Ranks that doubled are to face about inwards, and march forthright until they are clear of the right Flank which stands; then the Front half-Files face to the left, and the Rear half-Files to the right, and then close their division. The Commander going to his first Front and facing the whole body to him, they are reduced as at first, If that the right Flank would double the left Flank by division, the way is the same, only differing in the hand. The words of Command to reduce it, are, Half Ranks that doubled, Face about inwards, March forth into your places.    
Double your Ranks to the right entire. 

This doubling of Ranks entire to the right, 
The manner of doubling Ranks entire described.  is a doubling both of number and place, and in some sort worketh the same effect as the doubling of half Files doth to the right entire; but differeth in regard of the parties which are the doublers, and in the distance left after the doubling. The motion of this doubling aught to be thus performed: After the word of Command is given for the doubling to the right, as in the Margin is expressed: then every even Rank faceth to the right. The right hand man of each Rank becoming the Leader of his Rank, likewise leading them forth, and in their March of moving forwards, a little bending to the left, that when the lefthand man of each Rank (which are the bringers up of the motion) are clear of the standing part of the body, by only facing to the Front, they may stand even in Rank with the rest of the Company. For reducement of this doubling, you must observe that the lefthand men are the Leaders of the motion: wherefore command the Ranks that doubled to face to the left, and march forthright into their places. Or you may command the half Ranks of the right to face to the left, and double the left Flank; this will work the same effect with the former.  
To double Ranks to the left entire, is to be done after the same manner, only observe the difference of the hand. This kind of doubling may also be done by division. The words of Command used for this reducement, are, Ranks that doubled, face to the left: march forth into your places.    
Double your Files to the right entire, advancing. 

This kind of doubling of Files entire to the right advancing, 
The manner of doubling Files entire advancing, described.  is also a doubling both of number and place; for it increaseth the depth, to double their former proportion of number, as from ten to twenty. It also gaineth so much ground the more before the Front, as formerly the Battle did contain, by transferring the even Files of the body into the ground before the Front of the odd Files; But this doubling doth diminish the number of the length of your Battle, although it preserves their place. The manner of performing this motion of doubling is thus to be done; first the word of Command being given (as in the Margin is specified) the odd Files are to stand, beginning your account from the outmost File to the hand named; the Musketires and Pikes of the even Files are to advance their Arms and follow their Fileleaders, every File-Leader leading his File forthright before his next File to the right, until the bringers up of the even Files are orderly placed before the Leaders of the odd Files. For reducement, Let the Files that doubled face about to the left, the bringers up of each File leading them forthright down the distance or spaces which are on their left hand, until they are come even with the Rear, and then stand and face about to their Commander, and they will be in their first form and station. The doubling of Files to the left entire advancing is after the same manner, only differing in the hand. The words of Command used for this reducement, are, Files that doubled, face about to the left: march forth into your places.    
Files double your depth to the right, every man falling behind his Bringer up. 

This kind of doubling of the depth of Files to the right doth sympathise with the former doubling last discoursed of, 
The manner of Files doubling their depth described.  both for number and place; only it differeth from the other both in the manner of executing, and in some sort of the matter executed: for whereas the other doubling by advancing of Files did transfer all the even Files into the ground before the Front; chose, this doubling doth transfer them into the ground next behind the Rear. And as in the other doublings, half the Fileleaders did remain in the Front, and the other half were halfe-File-Leaders. Now in this doubling half the Fileleaders are to remain in the Front, and the other half are brought down and placed in the last Rank of the Rear, and those which were Bringers up, are now in this motion become the middlemost Ranks. The manner of performing this doubling, is thus first having given the word of Command that produceth this motion (as is specified in the Margin); then every man falling behind his Bringer up, the even Files (accounting from the hand named) immediately are to face about to the right, and the Bringers up of each of the even Files are to turn behind the Bringers up of the odd Files that stand; And so every man as he cometh down to the Rear, turneth to the left behind him that marcheth down the next before him, until those that were Leaders of the even Files are become the Bringers up to those that were the odd Files.  
The reducement is thus to be performed, according to the words of Command used for that purpose, Bringers up (that now are) double your Ranks forwards to the left. The instructions for this doubling the Ranks forwards (by the Bringers up) into the Front, is discoursed of in the beginning of this Chapter: where you shall find in the Margin the manner of doubling of Ranks, by the Bringers up described. In the next Chapter following I shall endeavour to show the difference between Inversion and Conversion, with the words of Command and Reducement belonging to those motions.      

CHAP. LXXXIIII.  
Of Inversion and Conversion with their words of Command, whereby those motions are produced, and the way of reducing them described.  
FOR Etymology of these words, you may be pleased to observe, that Inversion doth always produce File or Files; and Conversion Rank or Ranks.  
Inversion consists of the Files filing, or of Ranks filing; but Coversion consists of Ranks ranking to the right or left.  
Or by increase of Files ranking by even or uneven parts, and of Ranks wheeling to the right or left. But in performing these motions there is a larger distance of ground required than in any other motion. The words of Command with their several reducements are as followeth.  

Files File on to the 

Right.  
Left. 

This word of Command is performed by causing the right-hand File to march away single: 
Inversion.  the second File from the right falleth into the Rear of the first, the third behind the second, the fourth behind the third, & so consequently all the rest of the Files fall into the Rear of their next right-hand Files, until all the whole Company become one File. This was invented to pass narrow Bridges or strait Paths in Woods, where but one at once can pass; for the reducing of these into their former stations, the word of Command is, Fileleaders Led up your Files as your were: which is performed, every File-leader leading up his File to the left of him that marcheth before him, until all the Fileleaders are even in Rank together, 
This sort of inversion is called filing on sequence.  and their Files orderly following of them.  
For the Files filing on to the left may be performed after this precedent manner, only altering the hand etc.      
This filing by division is to be performed after the same manner the precedent was, only this difference; that Files, File to the right and left, by division. 

The right-hand File of the Company, and the lefthand File of the same begin to lead forth at one and the same time, in their several places, viz. The Files of the right Flank falling likewise behind the right-hand File; the Files of the left Flank falling in like manner behind the lefthand File, so that if the body of Pikes be flankt with Musketires, than this filing by division bringeth all the Musketires into the Front-division, and the Pikes into the Rear of them. The word for reducement, is, Fileleaders, Lead up your Files as you were.    
Ranks, File to the 

Right.  
Left. 

To perform this, all the Ranks are to be inverted to the outmost File to the right. Wherefore let all your Files be closed to their order, or close order, and your Ranks opened (either forwards or backwards) to double distance, or twice double distance (according to your number of men in Rank).  
Then let every Rank move after his right-hand man until all the Ranks stand right in one File, after the right-hand Leader of his Rank.  
If the Commander will perform this upon a March, than the Ranks shall not need to be opened to any distance, but let them take their distance in the execution of it, which is the easiest way thus to perform it, viz. The right-hand man of the first Rank marcheth forthright, all his Rank facing to the right, and marching likewise after him.  
The right-hand man of the second Rank falling immediately after the lefthand man of the first Rank, all his Rank in like manner following of him.  
The right-hand man of the third Rank falleth into the File after the lefthand man of the second, his Rank likewise following of him; and so of all the rest of the Ranks until they become one File; this kind of filing by Ranks is sooner performed than Files filing; and is readier to be reduced to make resistance against any opposition in the Front.  
The word of Command to reduce them, is, Files, Rank as you were. The manner to perform this reducement, is, if they were ten men in the foremost Rank, than the first ten men rank to the left into the Front as they were at first. The next ten men next after them, which makes the second Rank. The third ten men ranking to the left, makes the third Rank; and so of all the rest, until they be reduced into their first form or station.  
As for Ranks filing to the left, etc. it is to be performed after this very same manner, only it differeth in the hands: for in this the lefthand man of the first Rank marcheth forthright, and all his Rank facing to the left, marcheth likewise after him; and so of the rest.  
If you desire to avoid the mixture of Arms, you may march forwards your Musketires of each division, and close them before the Pikes, and invert them first: or you may march forwards your Pikes first, and leave the Muskets to come in the Rear; or you may invert the Front-division of Shot, than the Pikes, and last the Rear-division of Shot.      
Ranks, File to the 

Right.  
Left. 

Ranks filing to the right and left, is a doubling of the depth by an unequal proportion: for in other doublings, either the number of length or depth is augmented. But this doubling of Inversion makes their depth so many times more in number as there are Files to double; or half so many, if it be done by division: the use of it is to avoid the Shot of great Ordnance; it serves also for a guard for any great Personage or Commander to pass through: It is also commonly used for the Lodging of the Colours.  
The manner to perform this motion is the same with the last precedent motion, differing only in this; that whereas in the former all the whole Ranks turned to the right, behind their right-hand men; in this motion the left Flank (or half-Ranks to the left) fall into the outmost File to the left, and the halfe-Ranks to the right behind their several right-hand men.  
For reducement, the word of Command for it, is, Files, Rank to the right and left inwards, as you were: viz. the Ranks which before inverted into Files, now are to convert into Ranks as they were.       
The nature of this motion, which is performed by conversion, produceth Ranks, as the former motion of Inversion did Files. Wherefore you may use this word of Command,  


Ranks, Ranke. 

3. 5. 7. or 9 to the right.  
4. 6. 8. or 10. to the left.  
By increase, 2. 4. 6. 8. etc. to the right.  
By increase, 1. 3. 5. 7. etc. to the left.  
Entire to the right, into the Front.  
Entire to the left, into the Front.  
By division into the Front. 

The word of Command to reduce these into their former station, is.  
Rank, Ranks as you were.      
Ranks Wheel to the 

Right.  
Left.  
Right and left.    
Files, Rank. 

3. 5. 7. or 9 to the right.  
4. 6. 8. or 10. to the left.  
By increase to the right, 1. 3. 5. 7. etc.  
By increase to the left, 2. 4. 6. 8. etc.  
To the right,  
To the left, 

into the Front. 

The word of Command to reduce these into their former station is,  
Ranks, File as you were.          
Now observe, that the several parts of this motion, which is distinguished by the name of Conversion, consists of 

Ranks Ranking 

In equal parts.  
In unequal parts.  
Entire into the Front.  
By division into the Front.  
By wheeling to the Flanks.    
Files Ranking 

By equal parts.  
By unequal parts.  
Entire into the Front.      
First of Ranks ranking in equal parts, it is thus to be understood; when there are 12 or 20 (more or less) marching a Breast, and the Commander finding his passage narrow, or for any other intent, commandeth his Ranks to Rank 3 or 6 a Breast, or 5, 10, or any other number, every Rank holding equality of number.  
Secondly observe, that Ranks then Rank by unequal parts, when they Rank by increase or decrease: as for example, when the first Rank shall be 3, the next 5, then 7, 9, etc. which is commonly used in triangular figures, as the Horsemans-wedge, or the Diamond-Battell.  
Thirdly observe, that Ranks then rank entire into the Front, when the first Rank stands, the second Rank placeth itself upon the right or left of the first; the third by the second; the fourth by the third; and so forwards for all the rest, until all the Ranks, according to their Command, either to the right or left, are become one Rank in the Front.  
Fourthly observe, that Ranks then rank by division into the Front, when the second Rank, and all the rest of the Ranks behind open to the right & left, the one part going to the right, and the other to the left, ranking even with the first, as is showed in the former; and all these being joined together, makes one entire Rank.  
Fifthly observe, that Ranks then rank to the Flank or Flanks, when either the right-hand man of each Rank, or lefthand man (or both together) are as it were the Hinge of the motion; the residue of each Rank wheeling about them to the right or left (or to each hand by division) until that every Rank be brought into the distance which was before the Rank, between the right-handman of the Rank next before, and the right-hand man of the same Rank you stand in. If it be to the left, than they wheel into the distance between the lefthand Leaders of each Rank. If it be by division, then half the Rank wheeleth to the right, and the other half to the left, which produceth two Ranks.  
Sixthly observe, that Files then rank by equal parts when they rank 3, 4 or 5 a Breast (be it more or less) still keeping the number of men in Rank, of due proportion. If you rank three a Breast (either to the right or left) and your Files be but ten deep; then the first nine men makes three Ranks, and the fourth Rank must be made up by the Leader, and the next that follows him of the second File: and so for all the rest. If you rank five, and the Files be ten deep, than every File makes two Ranks, etc.  
Seventhly observe, that Files then rank by unequal parts when they either rank by progressionall increase or by decrease: as when every Rank exceeds the Rank before it, by two, three or four, be it more or less; or else that each Rank decreaseth after the same manner.  
Eighthly observe, that Files then rank entire into the Front, when there is so much distance between File and File, as will contain each File Rank-wise, every man in the File marching forwards to the right or left, as shall be commanded, until he stand even in Rank with the Leader of his File, which brings the body into one Rank.  
As for Ranks wheeling by Conversion to the right and left, or Ranks ranking to each Flank by wheeling, it differeth from Ranks filing both in manner and matter.  
In differs in manner thus; whereas in Ranks filing to the right and left, the right and lefthand Fileleaders preserve and continue their places: in this wheeling by Conversion to the right and left, you shall find it contrary to Ranks filing: for the innermost Fileleaders become the outmost men in that part where the Front stood, the other Fileleaders rank even within them; for when the word of Command is given for wheeling, you are to wheel your aspects unto the hand or part named, whereby you either become a Rank or Ranks, and not Files.  
This way of wheeling is a very speedy motion for a great body (if they have their due distance) to give fire to one or both Flanks. The manner or performing it follows.  

Ranks, wheel to the right and left by division. 

To perform this wheeling by division, the right and lefthand men of every Rank are to become the hinges of the motion; the rest of each Rank wheeling by equal division to the right and left about, and above the right and lefthand Leaders, until they become Ranks to the Flanks.  
If you will avoid mixture of Arms, then place all your Muskets in Front or Rear, or else wheel only your Muskets and leave your Pikes standing; or else it may be done, the body marching at length, the Muskets being in the Front & Rear division. The word for the reducement, is, Ranks, Rank as you were: which is performed by facing to the Rear, and then to wheel back into their places; then face to their Leaders, and they will be in their former station.     
Now it remains to demonstrate the way and manner of Files ranking by Conversion in equal parts; the word of Command is, 

Files, Rank ●our to the left. 

To perform this motion, the right-hand File-leader leadeth forth his File, & the three next men behind him move forwards to the left hand of each other, until they rank even a Breast with their File-leader. The next four in like manner ranking to the left, do make the second Rank, they being but eight deep. The File-leader of the second File placeth himself next after him that was the half-File-leader of the first, which now is become the right-hand man of the second Rank: the three next men behind him makes up his Rank; and so in like manner for all the rest until the motion be quite perfected. This converts each File into two Ranks, and brings all the proper Fileleaders and half-File-leaders to make the outmost File to the right. The Bringers up both of the Front and Rear half-Files, maketh the outmost File to the left. For the reducement of this motion of Files ranking four to the left, is thus to be performed: first cause your Ranks to file (or invert) to the right; which being done, command every File-leader to lead up his File to the left, and so every man will be in his first station.       

CHAP. LXXXV.  
How an Officer is to exercise his soldiers in three manner of Countermarches, which are to be performed two manner of ways, viz. one by File, the other by Rank.  
THe next thing to be performed after you have exercised your men in the doubling of their Ranks and Files, 
Three kinds of Countermarches, viz. the Chorean, Lacedaemonian, and Macedonian, described by Ael●an in his Tac. pag. ● 125 cap. 28.  is, to teach them how to countermarch. Wherefore you may first begin with entire Countermarches by File. The word of Command which produceth it, followeth.  

Files, to the right-hand Countermarch. 

As soon as the word of Command is given, 
The distance for Countermarch is 6 foot in Rank & File.  if they be to countermarch to the right; then all the Fileleaders are to step forwards with their right-legs, and face about to the right-hand: every File-leader with his File following him, passing down towards to the Rear, through the Interval on his right hand, still observing to keep even in Rank with his right-hand man; 
Note, when there is a Countermarch commanded without any other addition, than it is always intended a Chorean Countermarch.  and note, That no man must turn until he come to the ground where at first his File-leader began the Countermarch. This motion is performed when the Bringers up have attained unto the place where before their Fileleaders stood.    
Files, to the lefthand Countermarch. 

To countermarch to the lefthand worketh the same effect, and is done after the same manner, only differing in hands.  
For reducing them into their former stations, If you countermarch to the right, by countermarching again to the left, brings them into their first form.    
Files, to the right-hand Countermarch, every man turning after his Leader, on the ground he stands. 

This Lacedaemonian Countermarch is to be performed as followeth: 
Of countermarching to lose ground.  the Fileleaders of each File are to step sideways to the right-hand, and therewithal to face about to the Rear, and so march even in Rank down together between the intervals or spaces of ground between File and File; no man advancing a foot forwards, but turning off the ground they stand on after their Leaders when they are passed by them; still observing to keep their due distance: and so Rank after Rank, still turning off to the right, until the motion be performed.    
Files, to the lefthand Countermarch; every man turning after his Leader on the ground he stands. 

To countermarch to the lefthand, worketh the same effect, and is to be performed after the same manner, only differing in hand. For reducing them into their former stations, If first they countermarcht to the right-hand, by countermarching again to the left, brings them into their first form.    
Bringers up face about to the right; the rest pass through to the Rear, and place yourselves before your Bringers up. 

This Lacedaemonian Countermarch doth lose the ground also whereon it formerly stood, and takes the ground behind the Rear. The manner of the motion is as followeth, viz. the last Rank of Bringers up face to the Rear, and stand: the rest of the Body facing about in like manner, and passing through, or between their bringers up, and placing themselves even in Rank before them. The Motion is begun by the Rank next the Bringers up, and so continued successively by the rest, until the Countermarch be ended. It is to be reduced by performing the same motion to the contrary hand; or the next subsequent motion following will reduce this into its former station.    
Bringers up, stand; the rest pass through to the right, and place yourselves behind your Bringers up. 

This Lacedaemonian Countermarch (by which the former may be reduced) is thus to be performed. The last Rank (or Bringers up) are to stand firm, and the rest of the Body are to face to the Rear, and pass through to the right, & place themselves behind their Bringers up, contrary to the Countermarch last shown, in which they placed themselves before. The motion is also begun by the second Rank from the Rear, the rest following successively, until the Fileleaders are become the Bringers up; then face them about after their proper Fileleaders, and they are reduced.    
Fileleaders, face about to the right; the rest pass through to the right, and place yourselves behind your Leaders. 

The motion of this Macedonian Countermarch is from the Rear to the Front: 
The Macedonian Countermarch to gain ground.  quite contrary to the Lacedaemonian, whose motion was from the Front to the Rear. This Macedonian Countermarch makes semblance in the Rear of flight, but presently produceth a settled Front, when perhaps the enemy with a too early pursuit hath broken the order of array.  
The way to perform this Countermarch is as followeth; The Fileleaders or first Rank face about to the right, the rest of the body pass through between the Intervals (or distance betwixt Files) to the left, and place themselves behind their Leaders, every Rank (beginning with that next the Fileleaders) passing through successively, and taking their places, until the Countermarch be fully executed. This may be reduced as the former were, by doing the same to the contrary hand; or as formerly is said by any entire Countermarch of File: or it may be reduced by another Macedonian Countermarch, which in the next place shall be described.    
Fileleaders, face to the Rear; the rest of the Body pass through to the left, following your Bringers up, placing yourselves behind your Leaders. 

By this Macedonian Countermarch the precedent Countermarch may be reduced to its former station; and it is thus performed: The first Rank or Fileleaders face to the Rear, than the last Rank begin the Countermarch: passing forwards between the intervals, the seventh Rank following the eighth, the sixth following the seventh; and so likewise the rest until the whole body be trans-ferred into the ground before the Front, and then jointly together facing to the right about after their Leaders: the Countermarch is ended. For reducement, take this for a Rule, that any entire Countermarch of File may be reduced by another entire Countermarch by File, of what kind, or to what hand soever.    
Fileleaders, stand; the rest pass through to the right and place yourselves before your Leaders. 

This Bastard Countermarch being partly derived from the Macedonian and Lacedaemonian Countermarches, is thus to be performed; The Fileleaders stand, the rest of the Body advance their Arms. The second Rank first passing through to the right, and placing themselves before the first Rank, the third Rank before the second, the fourth before the third, and so forwards for all the rest, until the last Rank (or Bringers up) are become the foremost, which perfects the motion. You may reduce it by countermarching to the contrary hand; or if you please, you may reduce it by another like itself.    
Ranks to the right-hand Countermarch. 

This Chorean Countermarch of Ranks, 
Of countermarching Ranks to maintain ground.  is an altering or changing of one Flank for the other, the Battalia still keeping the same ground; only the right Flank becomes the left, and the left is changed into the right.  
To perform this motion, you are to command your Company to face to the right (by which the Ranks are become now Files) then countermarching them down the intervals (or distance between Rank and Rank) marching forthright unto the part which was the left Flank, with their Ranks File-wise following them. Being come unto their ground, they face as before; and the Countermarch is performed.  
For the reducement, let them countermarch to the lefthand back again, and they will be in their first station.    
Ranks, to the right-hand Countermarch, every man turning after his right-hand man, on the ground he stands. 

This Lacedaemonian Countermarch of Ranks is a falling on upon the left Flank, 
Of countermarching Ranks to lose ground.  the motion being begun by the right; it leaves all the ground the Battalia stood on, and assumes in place thereof the ground besides the left Flank, turning the aspect to the left: It is thus to be performed. The whole Body faceth to the right, and then the right-hand File being faced (becomes a Rank) begins the Countermarch, turning down the intervals of the Ranks (which by this facing is made the distance between the Files) and so marcheth forthright beyond the left Flank, every man following of him that was his right-hand man, but not stepping forward one foot of ground until the Countermarch be performed.  
For the reducement of this Countermarch, you must command them to countermarch again to the left, and they will be as at first; or if you please, you may reduce it by another of the same kind as followeth.    
Right-hand File, face to the right; the rest pass through to the right, and place yourselves before your Right-hand men. 

This Lacedaemonian Countermarch of Ranks makes a falling on upon the right Flank, the motion being from the left Flank to the right, leaving all the ground whereon the Battalia stood, and in lieu thereof takes the ground besides the right Flank. It is performed after this manner. The right-hand File faceth to the right, and passeth through the intervals or Spaces to the right, placing themselves before their right-hand men, until the lefthand File become the foremost Rank▪ if you do this Countermarch by itself; then for reducement, first face them to their Front proper; then let the lefthand Files face to the left, and do as much to the left, and they will be in their first station.    
Right-hand Files, face to the left; the rest pass through to the right, placing yourselves behind your right-hand men. 

This Macedonian Countermarch of Ranks is contrary to the former, for it dismarcheth from the enemy upon that Flank where he approaches & presents the contrary Flank to receive the Charge. It is performed after this manner; The outmost File to the right faceth to the left; the rest of the Body or Battalia faceth to the right, every man passing through to the right, and placing themselves behind their right-hand men.  
For the reducement of this Countermarch, do but command them to do as much to the left as first they did to the right, and they will be in their first form.  
Or if you please, you may make use of this following Bastard Countermarch to perform the same.    
Right-hand file, stand, the rest pass through to the right, placing yourselves on the outside of your right-hand man. 

This Bastard Countermarch of Ranks doth alter both ground and Flank (still reserving the Aspect without alteration): the manner of acting it followeth.  
The outmost or right-hand File standeth; the rest of the Body facing to the right, pass through to the right, every man placing of himself on the right side of his right-hand man, and so standing even in Rank, the motion still continuing until the lefthand File is become the right, and the right-hand File the left. If you command this Countermarch to be performed alone, then to reduce it, you must cause the lefthand File to stand, then do as much to the left as before you did to the right, and they will be in their first form.    
Countermarch Front and Rear into the midst. 

This divisionall Chorean Countermarch brings your Fileleaders and Bringers up together in the midst, and the Ranks that were in the midst into the Front and Rear. Every man is to march up into his Leaders ground before he faceth about to countermarch. To perform this, you must cause the halfe-Files to face about; 
Note that for countermarching Front & Reor into the midst, the Front half-Files are ever to turn off towards the right-hand, & the ●ear half-File to the 〈◊〉; which being truly observed, they 〈…〉 even in the midst of the Battle, otherwise not.  then the Fileleaders stepping forwards with the right leg, are to face about to the right, passing down the intervals upon the right hand; the rest of the Front half-Files following their Leaders, and not turning until they come to the ground where their Leaders turned down before them. The Bringers up with the Rear half-Files at the same instant are to turn down their intervals, upon the lefthand, the rest of their division following them, until the Fileleaders and Bringers up meet together in the midst of the Battle, and then having faced all to their Leaders, the motion is performed. You may reduce it by doing the same thing over again, or any other divisionall Countermarch of File.    
Fileleaders & half-File-Leaders, stand; the rest pass through to the right, and place yourselves before your Leaders. 

This Bastard Countermarch doth bring the Leaders and Bringers up together into the midst, 
Of bringing Front and Rear together in the midst of the Battle & Countermarch.  and saves two face, and is more readily performed than the former; The way to perform the motion is as followeth.  
The first Rank stands, and the halfe-File-Leaders stand, than those of the Front half-Files are to pass through their intervals to the right, placing themselves before their Fileleaders: the second Rank are to place themselves before the first, the third before the second, the fourth before the third, etc. The Rear half-Files at the same instant are to perform the like, placing themselves before their half-File-Leaders as the other did before their Fileleaders.  
This motion may either be reduced by acting the same over again to the contrary hand, or else by countermarching the Front and Rear into the midst, or by any other divisionall Countermarches of Files. Only observe by the way, that as the Front half-Files emptieth the spaces of ground between the Leaders and the halfe-File Leaders, placing themselves in the ground before the Front. So in the mean time their places are to be replenished by the Soldiers of the Rear halfe-Files, who are to march up and supply their rooms.    
Fileleaders and Bringers up stand; the rest pass through to the right, and place yourselves before your Leaders and Bringers up. 

This divisionall Lacedaemonian Countermarch makes semblance of falling on or charging the enemy both to Front and Rear, 
Of countermarching to make a large Interval between the first and last Ranks.  and leaves all the ground whereon they stood, transferring them into the ground before the Front, and behind the Rear, the ground or place of their former standing being vacant. The motion is thus to be performed: The Rear halfe-Files are commanded to face to the Rear; and then the Front halfe-Files pass through to the right, placing themselves before their Leaders; the second Rank before the first, the third before the second, the fourth before the third, etc. The Rear halfe-Files at the same instant passing through to the Rear, placing themselves before their bringers up. To reduce this motion into their former stations, (if you have not closed their distance) you may face them about, and so let them return into their places: or else by doing the same Countermarch over again, or to the contrary hand, or any such like way will reduce them. Note, if you reduce them by another Countermarch, you must first close their divisions.    
Fileleaders face about, Bringers up stand, the rest pass through to the right, and place yourselves behind your Fileleaders and Bringers up. 

This divisionall Macedonian Countermarch doth little differ from the last; only that turned the aspect outwards to the Front and Rear, but this Countermarch turns the aspect inwards toward the midst, placing the best soldiers in the midst, with a large lane or distance betwixt them, through which any great Personage may be conducted cross the length of your Battle, whereby the bravery of the soldiers may be seen.  
This motion is thus to be performed: The first Rank (or Fileleaders) face about, the last Rank stands, the Rear halfe-Files face about, and so the Front-division pass forwards and place themselves behind the Fileleaders; and the Rear halfe-Files behind their bringers up. Note, that when the Rear halfe-Files face about, the last Rank which are the bringers up, are still to keep their standing.  
The way to reduce this motion is to be done either by the same word of Command which produced it, or else by any of the precedent divisionall Countermarches.    
Front halfe-Files, interchange ground with the Rear passing through to the right. 

This Bastard Countermarch of interchanging ground is not truly derived from any one particular ground of Countermarch, but rather participating of them all; and yet in itself it differs from them all: for whereas the other Countermarches of Files in division did bring their Front and Rear into the midst, yet their Front half-Files continued still on the same part, and their Rear halfe-Files did not alter into the place of the other. But this, contrary to any other of the divisionall Countermarches, transfers the Front halfe-Files into the ground or place of the Rear halfe-Files, and them into the contrary part, bringing the Fileleaders and bringers up together into the midst.  
For the performing this motion, you must cause the Front halfe-Files to face about, passing forwards to the right (being led by the bringers up of the Front half-Files) between the intervals towards the Rear.  
The Rear half-Files, at the same instant, in like manner marching forwards between the intervals on their right hands into the Front, until the Front-division have attained the place of the Rear, and they chose the place of the Front. For the reducement of this countermarch, do as much back again; or if you would reduce it some other way, you may first make an entire Countermarch of Files, and then countermarch Front and Rear into the midst. Under two Countermarches it cannot be reduced.    
Countermarch your Flanks into the midst. 

This Chorean Countermarch of the Flanks into the midst by bringing the outermost Files to be the innermost, is thus to be performed; You must first command the whole body to face to the right and left hand by division. The outermost Files by this facing becoming Ranks, every man in the right-hand File being a Leader in his half Rank, File-wise: and so likewise in the lefthand File the same. Then you are to countermarch the right Flank to the right, and the left Flank to the lelft, which you must always observe to do; and your Flanks will meet just in the midst of your Battalia. Lastly, having faced them to their first Front, the Countermarch is ended.  
To reduce them, you may either make use of the same Countermarch again, or any of these following divisionall Countermarches of Flanks, unless it be that of interchanging of ground. Note that upon the Countermarching of Flanks into the midst, the right Flank must always observe to turn to the right hand, and the left Flank to the left hand: for if they should both turn off to the right, they will meet wrong, or if they turn off both to the left it, will be as bad.    
Outmost Files of each Flank, face outward; the rest pass through to the right and left, placing yourselves before your outside men. 

This Lacedaemonian Countermarch of half Ranks or Flanks makes show of charging the enemy with both Flanks, 
Of Countermarching to take the ground before the Flank.  but leaves a waste distance of ground unoccupied between the two outermost Files or midst of the Battle: the way to perform this motion is after this manner; First you must cause your right-hand File to face to the right, and the lefthand File to the left; the rest of the body faceth to the right and left, the right Flank passing through to the right, and placing themselves before their right-hand men; the second File from the right begins the motion on the right Flank, the left Flank in right manner passing through to the left, and placing themselves before their lefthand men, the second File accounting from the left begins the motion on the left Flank: but you must note that the Files become Ranks with the facing. For reducement, if you will first face them to their proper Front, you must command the two inmost Files to stand, the rest are to pass through to the right and lefthand inwards and take their place: or you may make use of a Chorean or a Macedonian Countermarch of Ranks by division and with a facing, and closing their divisions they will be in their first form.    
The out most File of each Flank face inwards, the rest pass through to the right and left, placing yourselves behind your outside men. 

This Macedonian Countermarch corespondes with the last; 
Of Counter-marching to take the ground on the outside of the Flanks, and to direct their aspects inwards.  only it differs in turning the Aspct inwards, whereas the former directed their Aspects outwards; and it is thus performed: The outmost Files of each Flank are to face inwards, and the rest of the body are to face to the right, the left are to face outward, those of the right Flank passing through the right, and placing themselves behind their right hand men, those of the left Flank passing through to the left, and placing themselves behind their left hand men, the motion is to be begun by the second File from each Flank.  
For the reducement of this Countermarch, you must first face them to their first Front; then commanding the two innermost Files to face outwards, and the rest are to pass through to the right and left inward, placing themselves behind their right and left hand men, which being done, the whole body will stand faced to the right and left outwards; then being faced to their Leaders they are reduced into their first stations.  
Or you may make use of the Counter March next before, or of the next following, or of any other divisionall Countermarch of Ranks (which do not interchange ground.)    
The outmost file of each flank stand, the rest pass through to the right, and left, & place yourselves on the outside of your right and left hand men. 

This divisionall Bastard Countermarch produceth the same effect which the other two next before it wrought, 
Of taking the ground on the outside of the flanks, not altering the aspect.  only differing in the Aspect; for the Lacedaemonian turned the Aspect outwards, the Macedonian turned the Aspect inwards, and this keeps the aspect still directed the same way. To perform this motion you must command the outmost File of each Flank to stand, the rest of the body are to face to the right and left outwards (viz) the right Flank passing through to the right, and the left Flank to the left; those of the right Flank placing themselves on the outside of their right hand men; in like manner those of the left Flank are to place themselves on the outside of their left hand men.  
It may be reduced either by any of the foregoing divisionall Countermarches of Ranks, or else being faced to any of the Flanks, than the Ranks become Files. And by divisionall Countermarches of Files you may reduce devisionall Countermarches of Ranks, or by Ranks Files: only you must observe some face, yet you may reduce this motion by commanding the two inmost Files to stand, the rest are to face to the right and left inwards, and so march into their places.    
Interchange Flanks: 

This exchanging of Flanks or Bastard Countermarch is differing from all the other divisionall Countermarches of Ranks, 
Of interchanging ground by the Flanks, and bringing the inmost Files of Pikes to become the outmost Ranks.  for this transfers the right Flank into the place of the left, and the left Flank into the place of the right: it is very proper to receive a sudden charge from the horse, for so soon as they shall be commanded to interchange their Flanks they face to the right and left inwards, and then the inmost Files of the Pikes begins the motion; the rest of each Flank following orderly, likewise the Pikes are to port so soon as they begin to move, and are to charge as they see occasion; if need be the Pikes may charge at the foot, the Musquetiers giving fire over their shoulders; if the Pikes have too large a distance, they may close at their own pleasures as soon as they have passed through.  
For reducement you may interchange ground again, or otherwise you may Countermarch your Flanks into the midst, and then an entire Countermarch either of Ranks or Files will reduce them. And this shall suffice to finish this discourse of Countermarches, wishing every commander to be ready and well versed in all of them, but principally to make use of the three first entire Countermarches of Files, as also the same of Ranks, for those you cannot possibly omit in your drillings, the rest you may dispense with all at your pleasure: And having thus exercised your men in these motions of Countermarch; the next things you are to teach them are wheelings, and they are of two kinds, as in the next Chapter shall more fully be demonstrated.      

CHAP. LXXXVI.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in the motions of wheeling, with the description of their kinds and uses, with their several words of command placed in the Margin.  
WHeelings are of two kinds (viz.) wheelings Anguler, and wheelings on the Centre, and these are either entire or divisionall.  
The use of entire wheelings is to turn the Aspect of the front proper, either to the right, to the left, or to the rear, either for the gaining of the Wind, Sun, or some such like advantages, or to entertain their enemy with their best Soldiers; and for your better performing of these motions of wheelings, you must first close both your Ranks and Files to their order, which is three foot both in Rank and File; and likewise upon all wheelings you must be sure to observe your Leader, and follow him keeping your due distance, your Muskets are all either to be poized, or shouldered, your Pikes are to be advanced: further observe that upon the exercise of the motions whether it be distance, face, doublings or Countermarches, or wheelings; the Musquetiers ought to be all upon one and the same Posture either poized or shouldered, and the Pikes in like manner either shouldered or advanced; the words of command follows in the Margin, and the directions how to perform the motions, right against them: Wherefore first you are to command them to, 

Wheel your Battle to the right. 

This Anguler wheeling transfers the Aspect or Countenance of the front proper into that part which was the right Flank: 
Of wheeling Anguler.  it also remove the Battallia from the ground whereon formerly it stood, and placeth it on the part before the front; the Hinge of the motion is the right corner man which hath the leading of the right hand File, he with a gentle motion moveth to the right, and every man the more remote his place is from the right Angle, the swifter must be his motion, because he is to go a greater circumstance. For reducement, wheel your Battallia to the left in the like manner as it was wheeled to the right; but withal note, that this will not bring you back into the same ground you formerly stood on, because it hath advanced you the length of your Battallia before the place of your first Front, wherefore to reduce you into the same place you stood on first; you must face your Battallia to the right, and being so faced wheel your Battle to the left, which being performed, face to the left and then they are completely reduced to their first form and station.  
This also is an Angular wheeling and transferreth the Aspect of the Front proper towards the Rear; it is performed after the same manner of the former, only the motion is twice as much, wherefore observe the directions in the former; Note the ground you formerly did possess will be twice the length of your Battallia to the left of your left Flank: For the reducing them as well to their first ground as their first aspect, you must face them to the right, and then wheel then to the left about; which being performed, face them again to the left and they are reduced perfectly to their first form & station: Further observe that every following wheeling is a reducement unto that which is placed next before it, and the wheeling next before may reduce that next following: as to wheel your Flanks into the front, by wheeling your Flanks into the Rear it is reduced; or to wheel Front and Rear into both Flanks, if you wheel both Flanks into the Front and Rear, they are likewise reduced as before.    
Wheel your Battle to the right on the same ground. 

This wheeling on the Centre is more suddenly performed then the Angular wheelings, 
Of wheeling on the Centre.  and may be done in far less ground, for the left Flank advanceth forwards, still wheeling to the right, the right Flank chose facing to the left, and so falling backwards; if you have an odd File then the middle File leader must be the Centre of the motion, but if you have an even number of files, than the middlemost file leader from the left, or if your wheeling bee to the left, than the middlemost file-leader to the right must be the Centre; This hath been used by the Grave van Nassaw in the Netherlands.  
For the reducement you must wheel your battle to the left on the same ground and they will be in their first form and station.    
Wheel your Battle to the right about on the same ground. 

This wheeling is also a wheeling on the Centre or midst of the Front, whereby the aspect of the Front proper is transferred towards the Rear and withal the Battle is remomoved from off the ground whereon formerly it stood, and is placed upon the ground before the front; it requires the very same action the former did, only the motion is double to the other. To perform this motion every man of the left Flank is to observe duly his right hand man, and the right Flank must keep even and strait after their left hand man, which becomes their Leaders filewise, until they have attained their ground, after which they face as before, making an even Front.  
For the reducement, wheel your Battle to the left about upon the same ground, and they will be in their first form.    
Wheel off your front by division. 

This motion of wheeling by division in great Battallias is very efficatious to oppose several enemies at one and the same time with the front of your Battallia, whereby your ablest Soldiers will be first brought to action; but if you wheel off your Battle by division, and join them again when they be in the Rear, than all your Musquetiers are brought from the flanks into the midst of your Battallia, and your Pikes will be upon the flanks; this motion is easy to be performed, for all the fileleaders to the right flank are to wheel about to the right, the rest of each file following their Leaders; the fileleaders likewise of the left flank are to wheel about to the left, and then join or close their divisions. To reduce them you must wheel them off again by division, or the wheeling next following will perform it.    
Wheel your Front inwards to the Rear. 

This divisionall wheeling of the Front inwards to the Rear may serve for a reducement unto the precedent wheelings, 
〈◊〉 wheeling the 〈◊〉 inwards to the 〈…〉  and so it brings the Musquetiers to the flanks again, but if you perform this motion, the company being first reduced, than it brings the Pikes to the flanks, if you chance to be annoyed with Horse in the Rear upon a March, you having gained some place of advantage as aside hill or the like, then by wheeling your front inwards to the Rear, you may persuade the enemy you are taking your flight, but you shall be ready to entertain his aproches with a settled orderly body, for your shot will be in the midst, and the Pikes impaling their flanks, so as the Horse can have no power over the shot to rout them, but they shall be able to give fire upon them continually; this motion is thus to be performed: The right hand file-Leader, with all the Leaders of the right flank are to advance forwards, and so are to wheel about to the left, every file still keeping close to their right hand file: likewise the left hand file-Leader, with all the Leaders of the left flank are to advance forwards, and wheel about to the right, every file of the left flank closing close to the left, thus the outmost file of each flank will meet and become the innermost, the front being metamorphized into the Rear.  
For reducement you may wheel them again off to the right and left by division, or else wheel your front inward to the Rear    
Wheel your Flanks into the Front. 

This divisionall wheeling of the flanks into the front is Cosen-german to a doubling, 
Of bringing Flanks into the Front of the Battle.  for by it all your shot are brought from both the flanks into the front, and thereby so many shot more are brought to do execution accordingly as the depth will permit. This motion of wheeling your flanks into the front will not only secure your shot, but also is very proper to baricado up any passage with your Pikes, so as the enemy's horse will be defeated of their expectations; upon the first motion of dividing, every division wheeleth about his own angle until the outmost file Leaders of each flank meet together in the midst, then facing to their Leader performs it: For reducement of this motion; wheel your flanks into the Rear, or else four times the same, although the further way about.    
Face all about to the Right, and wheel your Flanks into the Rear. 

This divisionall wheeling of the Flanks into the Rear is also near akind to a doubling, 
Of wheeling the Rear into the midst of the Battle.  and is to be performed as the other in all respects, for this wheeling brings your two outmost Files to be the first Rank, the bringers up of the right and left hand files meeting together, the bringers up of the left flank meeting face to face with the bringers up of the right flank, and so being faced to their Leader they which before were complete files, are now become half Ranks, either to the right or left; but you must note that before you begin to wheel, you must face your body about to the Rear, and then the action will be all one as if you wheeled your flanks into the front; It shall need no further explaining in regard in the motion before this it is fully expressed. But by the way take notice that in all wheelings you must observe to follow your Leaders, which must be understood as well of those which are accidentally become Leaders (by reason of face) as of those which be the first and propet Leaders, as for example, in this wheeling you must note that the bringers up are become the Leaders of the motion; also you may further observe that the two middlemost bringers up are the Hinges of the wheeling.  
For the reducement of this wheeling, the Commander being at his front accidental, may command them to wheel their wings into the rear, and so passing through to that part where his proper fileleaders are●, and then face them to him and they are in their first form. Or else when the Commander hath passed through to the Rear, and faced his company to him, than (his pikes being foremost) let him wheel his flanks into the Front, who being faced to their leader are reduced.    
Wheel front, and Rear into the right flank. 

This divisionall wheeling of the Front and Rear, into the right flank; doth quadruple the depth: as for example if the body of your Battallia be but ten in depth, 
Note that if the length of your Battle be double the number of the depth as is showed in this mo●●r, than this wheeling of Front and Rear into the right or left flank doth quadruple their form in depth If the number be equal in length and depth then by this wheeling they will but double. If the number of your length exceeds more than double your depth; by so much the more, will the extension of the depth be beyond quadruple.  this wheeling to the right flank makes them forty deep in file, and but five in rank or breast; you may observe how the Musqueteires of the left flank are divided (viz) the one half of them wheeling to the front; and the other half to the rear; Likewise the Musqueteirs of the right flank are to wheel together into the midst. The Pikes are likewise divided: those that were the front half files; are to wheel into the midst of the front division of Musquetiers, And those that were the Rear division of Pikes are to wheel into the rear division of shot; After the word of Command is given to wheel front and rear, into the right flank; you must cause your Soldiers for to face to the right: (that being done) they are to wheel together; about the fifth and sixth men in the right hand file; which is the half file leader to the front, and half file leader to the rear; this motion being performed right, the two half files to the right, will be converted into the two middle ranks of the Battallia; and the fileleaders to the front, and the bringers of the rear will be the right hand file.  
For the reducement; there may be many ways; according as the body of the Battallia may be faced; but suppose they stand faced in the same form that this Battallia did before the Motion began and then the wheeling of front and rear into the left flank will reduce them to their first station, they being faced to their Leader; Or if you please to face them that way which they wheeled in the Motion which was to the right, than wheel your flanks into the rear, and then facing them to their proper front they are reduced.    
Wheel front and Rear into the left flank. 

This divisionall wheeling of the front and rear into the left flank; 
Of wheeling the left flank into the midst of the Battle.  is a doubling of the depth as the former was: and the nature of the Motion is the same with the precedent, the difference is only in the flanks wherefore first you must cause the Battallia to face to the left; and than you must wheel them as before you did wheel the flanks into the front. But suppose that all the shot are placed upon the right flank before you begin this motion; then this wheeling will bring the one half of them into the front and the other half into the rear: and the motion being performed and they faced towards their Commander they will be 40 deep in file, and five in rank as the precedent motion was.  
For reducement: the usual way is to wheel the front and rear into the Right flank, or if upon occasion, you have faced your Battallia to the same way they have wheeled (which was to the left flank) and would give your Command from thence, than you must cause them to wheel, their flanks into the rear, this being done, you must pass to your first front, then causing them to face towards you they are in the same form they were at first: Then cause the five files of shot, to face to the left: and then to pass through their places. Lastly, you must close their ranks and files to their due distance and all is performed.    
Wheel both flanks into the Front and Rear. 

This divisionall wheeling of both flanks into the front and rear: 
Of Wheeling Front and Rear into the midst of the Battle.  doth double the depth, making them from ten deep to be twenty. It doth also transfer the Musquetiers from both the flanks into the front and rear, making a division between the front half files, and the rear halfe-files. So that of one Body flankte with shot it maketh two, each having their shot in the front. To perform this wheeling you must take these following directions. The word of Command being given as in the Margin is expressed, the first thing the Soldiers have to do; is for the half files to face about to the rear and then the front half files, and the rear half Files are to wheel at one and the same instant. The front division are to wheel about their two innermost file Leaders; until the file Leaders of the right flank meet together in the midst with the file Leaders of the left flank; the residue of their divisions orderly following of them. The half files in like manner being faced about, the bringers up in the same order as the former did are to wheel together being now the leaders of the motion in the rear. This being performed and the Commander standing at the place of his first front, he is to cause them to face towards him: then he is to Command them to close their division, which being done all your file Leaders are in the two innermost files of the front division file wise, and all the bringers up, in the rear division of the same files.  
For reducement you may face them to either of the flanks, and then Command them to wheel both flanks into the front and rear: then facing them again to their proper front, and closing their divisions, they will be as at first; or if you please the Subsequent motion of wheeling will reduce it.    
Wheel front and rear into both flanks. 

This wheeling of front and Rear into both flanks is also a doubling of depth. 
Of wheeling the Flanks into the midst of the Battle.  So that from ten deep it makes them twenty. And by this motion the shot which in the precedent wheeling was placed upon the flanks, by this motion of wheeling are transferred into the midst between the front and the rear of the Pikes; and whereas in this former motion, their wheeling was about the two middlemost file leaders, and Bringers up. This wheeling chose is about the two half file leaders of the outmost files of each flank. In the other wheeling the file Leaders and bringers up, made the Inmost file, but in this they make the outermost file of each flank. This motion being performed, it leaves a large Interval (or division) from front to rear between the flanks: which if the Commander pass into the midst, between each division, and face them all to him, causing them to close their divisions: and then he being marched forth into his first place, causing the soldiers to direct their aspects to him, then will the Pikes be in the Front and Rear.  
For the reducement of this Motion of wheeling to its first form and station, you must cause the Battallia to face to one of the flanks, which being done, you must Command them again to wheel Front and Rear into both flanks, then facing them to their first Front, and closing their division, they are reduced, or you may wheel both flanks into the Front and Rear, and then face them to their Leader and close their division.  
Thus having showed the ways and properties of wheelings, in their several kinds wishing every Commander at least to make use of the Entire wheelings: and to make their Soldiers perfect in them, so that they may wheel to the Right, to the Left and to the Rear, and as for the rest you may use your pleasure: (if time will not permit you) to exercise your Soldiers in them. The next thing that a Commander is to teach his Soldiers, is the several ways of giving fire, and the fitting and preparing them for Skirmish which in the next Chapter shall be discoursed of.       

CHAP. LXXXVII.  
How a Commauder shall prepare his Soldiers for Skirmish, with the manner, and use of firing by forlorn Files, in the Front.  
WHen a Commander hath exercised his Company in their Postures, Doubling, Countermarches, and Wheelings, the next thing requisite to be taught the Soldiers, is how they should skirmish, with the manner and use of firing, wherefore your Company being first drawn in Battallia, every man observing his order both in rank and file. The Officers in their due places (viz) the Captain and Ensign in the Front of Pikes, the Lieutenant in the Rear, the Sergeants on the flanks, the Drums on the Front and rear Angle of the Pikes: Every man thus standing in his right equipage, the Captain shall command the Drums to beat a march, the colours flying at the head of the pikes, the pikes and Muskets shouldered marching at their distance of order in file, and at their open order in rank, the Commander is to give a sign to the Drum to bear a preparative, at which time the Ensign is to furle-up his colours, and to retire into the midst of the Pikes, every man is to advance his Pike, and to close all their Ranks forwards to their order, the Musquetiers art to make ready every one preparing himself for skirmish, But before we proceed any further it will be very convenient to show the manner and use of firings that the Soldiers may be the better able to perform them, 
The manner and use of firing described.  when they come to the proof and trial, wherefore observe that all firings are either direct or oblique. The manner of firings, are sometimes advancing against an Enemy, 
That General seeks his own ruin, if he assails an Army upon all qua●ters unless his power be fouretimes more than his adversaries.  sometimes receiving the Enemies charge upon a stand, or else retiring (for we may be constrained to give fire in the Rear, marching from the Enemy) or in, flank marching by an Enemy, or it may fall out that the Enemy may charge in several places at once, as in Front and Flank or in Front, Rear, and Flank, these particulars shall be more fully discussed in the following discourses.  
And first to begin with the firings in Front, both advancing and standing. I will follow Master Barrifes directions, who hath excellently well described them, both by discourse and figure.  
Wherefore first take notice of giving fire by forlorn files, which most commonly is used two manner of ways in the exercising of companies.  
The first is, for the two outermost files of each flank of shot to march forth (being led on by the two youngest Sergeants,) a convenient distance beyond the Front of the battle, who being there arrived aught to make there stand, the foremost Ranks are to give fire, wheeling off both to the right, (or to the right and left if it be commanded) and to place themselves in the Rear of their own Files, the rest of the Ranks firing and doing of the like, until they have fired once, or twice over, according as they shall be directed, this being performed, the next two out most files, of each flank are to march forwards unto the place assigned, and are there to do the like.  
Those files which formerly faced are in the mean time to troop back, 
Note the Shot are to prime and charge as they troop down into the Rear to place themselves to the Flanks of the Pikes.  and place themselves next the flanks of the Pikes, upon the inside of the division of Musquetiers.  
The rest of the shot after the former manner are to march up and give fire, placing themselves as before is showed, when they have fired all over and placed themselves according to these directions they are reduced into their first stations.  
The second way of firing by forlorn Files is thus to be performed: The outmost files of each Flank are led forth by the Sergeants unto the place assigned, and then they command their Files to rank inwards, and to present and give fire all at one instant as by the subsequent figure you may perceive.  
Sergeant Serjeant  
Captain Ensign  
Serjeant Serjeant  
Lieutenant.  
The first two files having ranked inwards and joined together making one breast as you may perceive at the figure 4. and having presented and given fire, they are to wheel off to the right and left, each man following his Leader in single file (and performing their postures of priming and charging, etc.) as they troop down to place themselves on the inside of their division of shot alongst by the Flanks of the Pikes: The next outmost File which followed the first in the Rear in the mean time are to rank themselves inwards, and are to give fire and wheel off as the former did, placing themselves alongst by the Flanks of the Pikes, after the same manner all the rest of the Files are to perform their endeavours. Note the odd Files may either march up and give fire single or else the next outermost File may sequent them.   

CHAP. LXXXVIII.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers to give fire by two Ranks, advancing them ten or twenty paces before the Front of the Battalia, than even with the Front, and lastly even with the halfe-Files.  
THis manner of advancing two Ranks a certain distance before the Front of the Battle is commonly used, when two Battles make their approaches one against the other, whereby they are brought within distance to do certain execution; a Sergeant from each Flank is to lead these two foremost ranks up to the place assigned: The first Rank of each wing of shot is to present and to give fire, wheeling off either to the right, or to the right and left, the second Rank stands ready with their Muskets rested, their Match-cocked and pans guarded, mounting the muzells of their Pieces clear of their Leaders, and standing the distance of three foot behind the first Rank, are ready to Level and give fire so soon as their Leaders are wheeled off from before them. The first Ranks having presented and given fire (as aforesaid) in their wheeling off they are to march down in single File close by the outside of the wings of shot, until they come to the Rear of their own divisions where every man is to place himself in the Rear of his own file. The second Rank having discharged are after the same manner to wheel off, and to place themselves in the Rear as the former did.  
The next two Ranks are to begin to advance forwards, when they see the last of the two former Ranks presented and ready to give fire, and they also having given fire are to wheel off as the former did, and so successively the rest of the Ranks advancing are to imitate the former in all the points.  
The body of Pikes are to march very slowly forwards, all the while that the shot are drawn up to give fire before the Front, and if the enemy's Battallias be not near, the Pikes may march shouldered.  
But when the enemies Battallias be approached, 
The shot are to give fire even with the front of Pikes, when the enemy's battle draws near.  within six or eight score, or less, than the Musquetiers are to give fire even with the Front of the body of Pikes, and then the Pikemen are to advance their Pikes, and close their Ranks to the distance of three foot, and the shot to advance up even with the first Rank of Pikes, and there giving fire, they are to wheel off to the right and left, as in the former directions. Note when the first Rank hath given fire and wheeled off, the next Ranks are to move forwards at three motions into their place, 
* First blowing your coal, set out your left Leg, next opening your Pan, set forth your right Leg, lastly presenting, set forth your left Leg again. At the Battles joining, the shot are to give fire even with the half Files of Pikes. When the battle retreits, than the shot ought neither to advance nor retreat but every rank is to give fire upon the same ground he stands on, & so wheel off that the next may do the like.  and there to give fire after the same manner wheeling away again, and placing themselves according to the former directions, every Rank still making good their Leaders ground, by this means they may continue giving fire until the two Battles are ready to join at push of Pike, at which time, the shot are to give fire either retiring, or else not to advance further than the half files of Pikes, for there they shall be secure from the enemy's Pikes offending them, beside they may do as good execution there, as being placed even with the front.  
If so be the Drum beat a retreat, than the shot ought neither to advance nor retreat, but every Rank is to give fire upon the same ground they stand on: and then wheel off that the next rank may do as much.  
Never the less, when the forlorn files march forth, or that two Ranks march forth ten paces (or more) before the Front, than they are to give fire as upon a retreat, unless the enemy flee.  
The Skirmish being ended, the reducement is easy, the Leader of each File, being in his place at the head of his File is to draw up the shot even with the Front of Pikes, and then they will be as at first.   

CHAP. LXXXIX.  
How a Commander shall exercise his wings of Musquetiers to give fire, they being advanced a small distance before the Front of the Pikes, in manner of a Horn battle, and also how to reduce it.  
THis kind of giving fire, (the shot being advanced before the Front of the Pikes, the bringers up of either wing of Musquetiers being ranked even with the first rank of Pikes in the Front) is of the same use that the firing by two Ranks, ten paces advanst before the Front, is of, & cannot choose but be more serviceable upon some occasions, in regard the shot do their execution more readily without intermission of time, or straggling from their bodies; besides it is an apt form for over fronting, and they are easily to be wheeled, whereby they may charge the enemy in Flank; each of these wings of shot may be led up by a Sergeant, (or some other superior officer) unto the place assigned by the Chief. After the word of command is given for the bringing them into this form, as in the Margin is expressed, the manner of giving fire is thus to be performed.  

Pikes stand, Musquetiers, march until the bringers up rank with the Front of Pikes. 

The first Rank of Musquetiers presents and give fire wheeling off, either all to the right, or to the right and left, (according as they shall be directed) and placing themselves orderly in the Rear of their own Files; The next Rank (after the same manner) are to give fire and wheel off placing themselves behind those which were their Leaders; thus is every Rank successively to do the like, until they have all given fire.  
If you desire to continue giving fire still in this form, than your shot must move forwards into the ground of them that fired before them and the form will be still the same.  
But if you desire after once, or twice firing over, to have your shot flank their Pikes; then the Musquetiers, must not advance into their leaders ground, but contrarily every rank is to present & give fire upon the same ground they stand on, falling off into the Rear one after another, by which means they will be brought even with the Pikes.  
Or if you please, the Pikes may advance, and march up, to make their Front entire with the File Leaders of the shot, whereby they will be reduced.    
Pikes stand, Musquetiers, advance before your Front of Pikes and close your divisions. 

The form of this next kind of firing is produced according to the words of Command placed in the Margin, 
The several ways of firing belonging to the Demie-hearse Battle described.  the manner of the form is thus, the two wings of shot are advanced before the Front of the body of Pikes: and closing their divisions they shelter the Pikes from the fury of the Enemy's shot. And there may be as great execution performed by this form of firing, as by any of the former, in regard it is so solid and stable. In the former firings, the Pikes either ranked even with the wings of shot, or else the division between the wings of shot being open, the Pikes are liable to the danger of the Enemy's shot, the Pikes are not able of themselves to do any thing either in the way of offence, or defence, until the Enemy be within push of Pike. But this kind of Demie-hearse Battle covers the Front of their Pikes securely with the wings of their own shot, until the Enemy be come within distance.  
There are two principal ways of giving fire belonging to this form, namely first the Musquetiers may give fire in the Front, and so wheel off by division, or if the Commander pleaseth, they may wheel all off to the right, placing themselves in the Rear of their own divisions and Files of shot just before the Front of the Pikes.  
The next Ranks are immediately to move forwards into their Leaders ground, and are likewise to give fire and wheel off placing themselves after the manner of the former, the rest of the ranks of Musquetiers performing the like, until they have all given fire: Thus having fired once or twice over this way, you may make use of a second way of firing, which shall serve for reducement of the former.  
Wherefore observe that in this second way of firing, when the first Ranks have given fire, they are to wheel equally off by division, each part falling file wise down close by the flanks of the wings of Musquetiers, until the Leaders of the ranks of shot are come down as low as the first rank of Pikes, which being performed they are to face outwards: and to move so far forth in a strait line until they have ranked even with the first rank of Pikes, not forgetting to leave there a distance betwixt the Inermost Musket of each Flank, and the outermost File-Leader of the Pikes. So soon as the first Rank hath given fire and wheeled away, the second Rank is to give fire, wheeling off as before, and passing down between the intervals of the Flanks placing themselves after their Leaders. The same is every Rank successively to do until all the shot be drawn from before the Front, & placed on the Flanks of their Pikes. But when all the shot in the front hath discharged unto the two last ranks, than the Pikes are to port, and when they have all fired and wheeled away, than they are to charge their Pikes; then advancing their Pikes again, the Battallia stands reduced as in its first form.    
Musquetiers make ready to give fire by Introduction to the right.  
Files of Musquetires open by division to your open order. 

You shall find in the Margin the words of Command that produceth this form of giving fire, 
The several ways of giving fire by Introduction described.  by way of Introduction, it being a kind of advancing against the Enemy, and of gaining ground, although not used (in these our Modern wars) but in way of exercise. It is to be performed two ways. The first, when the motion is begun by the second Rank from the Front. The other when it is begun by the bringers up; wherefore observe before the firing begin, you must open your Files of Musquetiers, to their open order, so that the shot may pass between the intervals of each File to give fire in the Front. The manner and form of this kind of firing by Introduction may be thus performed. The Pikes being flanked with the Musquetiers, the first rank of each flank is to present and give fire, and having fired, they stand and make ready again in the same place. The second Rank passing forwards before the first, do there also fire and stand. The third Rank then passing forwards, after the second, and standing even in Rank with them that first fired, that so soon as the second Rank hath fired, they may presently step before them and fire in like manner. In this firing still the rank which is next to fire, stands even in rank with them which last fired, until those which stand presented have first given fire, after which they then pass before them; the Rank which was their next followers, passing forward, & Ranking with those which last fired, every man following his Leader successively, until the bringers up give fire and stand in the Front of all; and then this form will be like the figure of a Horn battle. All the while that this firing by Introduction is continued, the Pikes may be shouldered, if there be no fear of the Enemy's Horse. If you continue this firing twice over the Musquetiers will have their right place: which being done, march up your Pikes and Rank them even in Front with the shot, and they are reduced.  
The second way of firing by introduction: The first Rank, (or File Leaders) are to give fire as before, and to stand. The last Rank (or bringers up) in the interim of their firing marching up, and ranking even with the second Rank: the rest follow their bringers up, as they do when bringers up double their Front: the first Rank having fired, the bringers up step immediately before them, present, and give fire, the rest still successively doing the like, until every rank have given fire once over: observe with all, that the File Leaders are to give fire twice over, being the first, and the last, and then to stand, the Pikes marching up even with their Front of Musquetiers. And thus they are reduced as at first. If the two first ranks of Pikes in every Battallia should have bows fastened to their Pikes, 
The several ways of bring, belonging to the Diamond form of Battle described.  they might do good service against the enemy whilst the shot performs their duties in giving fire.  
The words of Command which produceth this form of a Diamand Battle, is in the Margin, Amongst the Ancients it hath been of great account, but in these late ages Musquetiers, Rank, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc. by increase to the left.    
Files of Pikes ranked by decrease after your Musquetiers. 

not used in the wars, The manner of forming it is thus: first you must cause your Musquetiers of the right flank, to open to the right, to a sufficient distance for the receiving the shot of the left flank. Then you must Command the left flank of Musquetiers, to pass through into the space of ground on the right. This being done, for to frame this battle you must command your Files of Musquetires to rank, 1, 3, 5, 7 etc. by increase to the left, than you must command the Files of Pikes to rank by decrease after the Musquetiers; The Musketeers may give fire from this form of Battle two ways principally, the first is the giving fire in Rank (viz.) the first man (or point of the diamond) is first to give fire, than he is to wheel off to the right, and place himself just behind the single Pikemen in the Rear; then the next Rank consisting of three men are to give fire, and to wheel off by division, and are to place themselves in Rank behind the single Musquetiere as they were before the firing began, next the Rank of five Musketeers gives fire wheeling off in like manner by division, ever observing that where the number is odd, and they commanded to wheel off by division, there the greatest number always goes to the right: And after this manner every Rank gives fire successively, and place themselves after their Leaders, as before is showed: when all the shot have given fire and are wheeled off, then let the Pikes charge, which will be fiveteene in the first Rank, the rest decreasing (having advanced your form) will stand like two wedges with their points joined.  
If you would reduce your men from this form, without giving fire, then let the Musketeers stand, and the Pikes face to the Rear, and then the wedge will stand faced in opposition: Next you may command them to interchange ground, the Musquetiers advancing forwards into the ground of the Pikes, and the Pikes moving into the ground of the Musquetiers, and then by facing the Pikes to the former front, the body will stand in form of a diamond again. If you would give fire from this form in regard all the Musquetiers are placed in the Rear, the body must face about, & so the firing will be contrary to the former. But if you wheel them about, than they may give fire the same way: However after fire is given they must wheel off by division, and place themselves in the Rear of the Pikes, even in Rank again as they were when they gave fire: Thus having all fired over & wheeled away, the Pikes may charge, & being again advanced, the body will stand in form of a diamond.  
The second way of firing on this Diamond form is by way of Countermarch, and is an oblique firing, for whereas in the other firing by Ranks in the Diamond Battle, each Rank fired by increase of two, beginning with one, and ending with 15. 17. or 21, etc. (according to the quantity of your Soldiers) in a Rank; this second kind of firing contrary wise may begin with 15. 17. or 21, etc. and end with one, still decreasing two; and to perform this firing your Files must be at open order, because the Musquetiers must Countermarch down between the Intervals of their own Files to the right, every Musquetiere that finds him-himselfe without a Leader, being to present and give fire, and then to Countermarch to the right, and to place himself in the Rear of his own File behind the Pikes, when the first Rank (if it consists but of 15.) have given fire, than the next Rank of 13. is to present, give fire, and Countermarch, still placing themselves in the Rear of their own files; next there fireth 11. then 9, etc. And in this manner of firing they that fire together stand neither in Rank nor File, but obliquely when all the shot have fired, and are Countermarcht into the Rear of their own Files, than the Ranks will become two, and two of a number.  
Your men standing in the form before described if you please you may produce another form by facing them all to the Rear, then command your Musquetiers to march ten or twelve paces, your Pikes to stand, and your Musquetiers will make resemblance of a hollow wedge, and your Piks of a solid wedge. Lastly, to reduce all these several forms into the first proper square battle; first let the solid wedge, close forwards into the hollow of the other, then let the shot make ready, present, and give fire as before (viz.) every Musquetiere that finds himself without a Leader is to give fire and Countermarch to the Rear of his own File, and the rest doing the like successively, when they have all fired and are all Countermarcht clear, let the Pikes charge and then the body of your Battallia will have the form of a Diamond again.  
Next face them all to the Rear and command the Ranks to file 8. etc. to the right, which being done, pass the shot through which belongs to the left flank into their places, and close the Musquetiers to the right Flank to their due distance, and then they will stand in their proper reducement.    
Wheel your Flanks into the front, and face the body to one of the flanks, and wheel your battle into a Convex half Moon. 

The manner and use of the several ways of firing belonging to this form of the Convex, 
The several ways of firing belonging to the semicircular form of Battle described.  half Moon, or semicirculer Battle, is a form which our Schoolmaster in the rudiments (Julius Caesar) did highly esteem of, it makes show but of a few Soldiers in regard of the rotundity of it, yet being drawn out in Length it makes a very long Front, it may be for the Landing of Soldiers in the enemy's country, or being secured in the Rear with Rivers, Bogges, Ditches or the like, it hath been accounted very prevalent to be opposed against an Army of greater power, It may be framed either with the shot outermost or innermost or lined.  
If your battle be in form of a Hearse then wheel them to the right and left about, until they have attained this form of a Semicircle, but if in a square than you must make use of those words of command placed in the Margin which will produce this Convex form.  
Having brought your Soldiers into this Semicircle, you may face them all inwards the better to hear such speeches or orations as shall be by the Commander delivered unto them, but for to receive a charge from the enemy you must face them outwards, there must be certain intervals or distances betwixt each division for the shot to wheel off and march down in: The outmost Arch or first rank of each division is to present and give fire, those of the right Flank wheeling off to the right, and the left Flank to the left, placing themselves in the Rear of their own divisions of Musquetiers, still making good their Leaders ground, the rest of the Ranks are to do the same until they have all given fire.  
Never the less if the enemy's horse should be too potent then let them give fire by division as is showed before, passing quite through their intervals, and placing themselves in the Rear of the Pikes, every rank is to make good his Leaders ground. Thus also are the rest of the Musketeers to give fire, placing themselves in the concave part of the body as aforesaid, following the Pikes which now makes good the Musquetiers ground; the Pikes may either charge over hand or upon occasion at the foot, drawing forth their Swords over their left arm, and couching down their heads, by which means the Musketeers may play over their shoulders for the first rank having fired may kneel down and charge again, and so the second rank may give fire, and kneel in like sort making ready again, and so all the rest, until the first rank riseth up with the rest and give fire over again. So the skirmish may be continued the Pikes still opposing the Horse.    
Pikes stand; Musquetiers face to the rear, and march until your are clear of your body of Pikes. Then face inwards, and close your division, than face to your Leader and double your Ranks 

For the reducement of this form, and to bring every Man to his place. Let your shot (either by firing, or passing through) be brought into the place they were in, before they first gave fire, than face the whole body to one of the flanks; and march them until they have evened their Ranks, and straitened their Files, this done then if all your Pikes be upon the right flank, wheel your right flank into the midst, if on the left flank wheel Front and Rear into the left flank. This being preformed the Commander must pass to his proper fileleaders, and face the whole body to him, and they will be in their first form.  
This way of firing by extraduction is also a firing in Front, it is of singular good use in a Straight or narrow passage, 
Of extraduction, the several uses firings & reducements described.  where the wings and Rear may be secured from the fury of the Enemy's Horse, you must fill the mouth of the Passage with your Pikes, and if the length of your Company be not sufficient to do it, then double your Ranks, and your Pikes being charged, Your Musquetiers being in the Rear are to march up into the Front, and give fire, as in the next place shall be demonstrated, only first by the way observe the words of directions placed in the Margin, which produceth this form. The battle being ordered as a foresaid Let the first Rank of Musquetiers, (which are those that follows next after the Pikes) face to the right and march forth (File-wise) up close by the right flank of Pikes, until he that is the conductor of them become into the Front of the Pikes, than he is to lead them quite cross the Front of Pikes, until he have attained the further part of the Front to the left: which being done, they are all to stand present and give fire. You must observe withal that he in this firing that was the right hand man of the Rank, and was the Leader of the motion: now becomes the left hand man when he gives fire, and when they have fired they are to wheel off to the left close by the left flank of Pikes and so to fall into the Rear of the Musquetiers. In the Interim whilst that the Rank that first fired, is wheeling away, the second rank is marching into their places to give fire. And in this manner they may maintain their skirmish so long as they please: the Pikes either porting or charging all the while. The Musquetiers in their time of their crossing the Front, are to couch, or stoop under their Pikes, that they may be no impediment to them in their charge.  
There is another way of firing by extraduction, which is that the Right hand Leader of Musquetiers placeth himself before the right File Leader of Pikes, 
A second way of giving fire by extraduction described.  the rest all falling beyond him but this is a more imperfect way then the former and not worth the further describing.  
For Reducement you must command your Pikes to stand, and your Muskets to double their Front by division. But if you want room to do it, than first double your Files to the contrary hand of that which you doubled your ranks, and so having doubled by division, as a foresaid they will be reduced as at first.    
Wheel your flanks into the front, face to your Leader. 

The firings belonging to a broad fronted battle are of singular use either offensive, 
The several ways of firings belonging to a broad fronted battle described.  or defensive. The words of direction that produceth this form is in the Margin, and the manner of performing it is thus, first cause your Pikes to stand, and your Musquetiers to march until the rear rank of Musquetiers be advanced a little space before the Front of the Pikes, then let the Musquetiers face inwards, (or in opposition) and close their division, and then face to their Leaders, And if you would bring more hands to fight, double ranks to any hand. But the speediest way to produce thus form, is to wheel both flanks into the Front. For the manner of firing, there are intervals made for each division to the right; that so they may either fall into the rear of the shot, and there continue the firing; or else fall into the rear of the Pikes: and be thereby secured from the enemy's horse. Wherefore be pleased to observe the words of Command whereby this form is produced (which is placed in the Margin,) For the performance of this firing, the first rank is to present and give fire, than wheel off to the right; all passing down the intervals to the right and placing themselves in the rear of their own shot, the Musquetiers making good their Leaders ground. Likewise after the next ranks have fired, they are after the former Manner to wheel off and to place themselves. This way they may give fire once or twice over, and then make use of a second way. And that is to place themselves in the rear of the Pikes; either standing or advancing: Or if need be the Pikes may close their divisions, and charge at the foot, the Musquetiers giving fire over them. For Reducement: If you make this form of battle by wheeling your flanks into the front and there having given fire, as foresaid; Then you must cause them to give fire over again, and so fall into their former places: for you must observe that the second firing will cause the body to face to the Rear, which then becomes a Front accidental, and then by wheeling your Flanks into the Front again, and facing them about to the right; will bring them into their first station: or if you would reduce them without giving of fire over again; than you must Command your shot to double their Front by division, that being done, you are to wheel both Flanks into the Rear, then facing to their Leaders, you must again Command the Musquetiers to double their Front by division, and they will be in their first form and station.      

CHAP. XC.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in giving fire to the Rear, with the several ways there to belonging, and how they ought to be performed.  
HAving in the former discourse showed the divers and sundry ways of giving fire in the Front. It seems now requisite I should do the same Office, in demonstrating the several ways of giving fire in the Rear. Wherefore after the Commander hath taught his Soldiers these ways, (or at least the chiefest of them) in giving fire in the Front, he must perform the like pains in exercising them in their firings in the Rear. And first having Commanded them to face about into the Rear, or wheel them about, or perform it by Counter marching. The Company, we presuppose stands in Battallia, with the wings of shot, upon each flank of the body of Pikes: the Pikes being shouldered you may cause them to march easily forwards; the Enemy being supposed to appear in the Rear, Command your last rank of Musquetiers to face about, present, and give fire, wheeling off by division, File-wise marching uptoward the Front, and there placing themselves before the foremost rank of shot, (the outmost man of each rank, being the Leader up of those which have fired) where first taking their place on the outside, the rest wheeling about them, and ranking even with them on the inside, ever observing that they rank even with the second rank of Pikes; the rest of the shot also doing the like, and in this manner to continue the firing: as occasion shall require. This kind of firing may easily be performed if Soldiers will but observe these following directions, (viz) when the last rank of Musquetiers have presented to the rear and are giving of fire, than the rank which marcheth next before them must blow, open, and present at three motions 
* In giving fire to the Rear; when you blow your Coal you must step forwards with your right foot, opening your Pan, stepping forwards with your jest foot; Present to the Rear stepping forwards with your right foot ●  still keeping along even with the body of Pikes, until that (lastly) they present to the rear, by which time the rank that last fired, will be wheeled away. The next rank so soon as the other hath presented, is likewise at three motions, to do the same; and so successively for all the rest, every rank observing, upon each ranks firing, to lose one, and to march one rank nearer to the rear of the battle, that so that part may still be kept absolute, Captain Swan, (at the giving over of Deventer, in Gilderland, by Stanley, and York) did defend himself from the enemy's Horse by giving fire in the rear until he had gained a place of strength, which honourable performance will never be buried in oblivion.  
But suppose the Enemy's horse shall still pursue your troops in the rear, you having gained some strait, or place of advantage, than your best way will be to wheel your Flank into the Front, and then face them about into the rear, and with your charged Pikes defend your shot, which will be in the rear of the Pikes, after they have wheeled as aforesaid. The Body standing in this form, the shot may sleeve up by way of Extraduction, or otherwise you may cause your Pikes to charge at foot, and the Musquetiers to give fire over them.  
For reducing them having thus fired, you must command them to wheel their Flanks into the Front, and to face about after their proper File Leaders, and they will be in their first form.  
A second way to give fire in the rear, 
A Second way of giving fire in the Rear described.  is to place all your shot marching, in the rear of the Pikes. The manner of performing the motion, is as before is showed. But the placing of the men after they have given fire, may be diversely performed. As to wheel off by division, placing themselves in the Front of the Musquetiers, next behind the rear of the Pikes.  
Or if the Body be Large, to wheel all off to the right, through distances for that purpose made, and so to march into the Front of the Pikes.  
Or otherwise they may wheel off by division and Flank their Pikes, and so give fire over again as at first.  
If in giving fire in the rear, your Musquetiers wheel off and place themselves before the Front of the Pikes, then to reduce them, you may either wheel the body about, and give fire in Front causing your Musquetiers to fail off by division, and to flank their Pikes; Or if you will reduce them with out a firing, cause your Musquetiers to open to the right and left, and the Pikes to march up into the midst, and then facing them to their Leader and they will be in their first form.  
Let these Instructions suffice, for the giving fire in the rear: desiring every Commander to be very careful, and punctual, in exercising their shot in these kind of firings in the rear, It being a thing of great Consequence, and very advantageous for the preservation of Foot troops from the fury of a prosecuting enemy, that would seek to cut them off: or at least deter them from arriving at their place of strength where they may be secured. In the next place, shall be shown, the ways of giving fire in the Flanks, so that a Company may be made complete in their performances of Exercise.   

CHAP. XCI.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Company in giving fire in the Flanks, with the Circumstances there unto belonging.  
THe Manner of giving fire in Flank is used in two respects; The first is, when the Enemy shall make his approaches to charge your Troops on the Flank in a march.  
The second, is when as by some sudden attempt or ambushment, the whole Body of an Army is engaged: and so forced to stand, and to face to the right, or left, or both; by which face the flanks become Fronts accidental, and their firings will be after the same manner of the firings in Front, wherefore I will endeavour to show such firings in Flank, as are of use in a march, which are these following.  
The first is for the outmost File to give fire, and stand, until the next File hath fired.  
Secondly, after they have given fire in Flank they are to be led up between Musquetiers and Pikes.  
The third way of firing in Flank after they have performed it, they are led off by the bringers up.  
The forth way after they have given fire, they are placed as sleeves upon the contrary flank of Pikes.  
The Fifth way is after they have given fire in flank, they are drawn up between the inmost Files of Pikes: of these I shall discourse severally, in their due places. In the mean time suppose all your Musquetiers to be placed upon the right wing of your Pikes, and casting your eye into the Margin, you shall find the words of Command, which produceth this firing in the Flank.  

Musquetiers give fire to the right, and gather up your Files. 

The Command being, to give fire to the right, presently the outermost File to the right faceth outward, and presents, the rest of the body still marching forwards. Then the presented File gives fire, and stands facing again to their first Front, by that time the body will be marched clear of the standing File, than the next outermost File, presents, and fires in like manner, the body facing as before; having fired they in like manner facing to their first Front and stand, a Sergeant Leading up the File that first fired on the outside of the File that last fired, Then they both stand together, until the third File hath given fire after the same manner, and then the Sergeant Leads up the two Files, even with the third which last fired. And after this manner all the Files of Musquetiers are to face to the Flank, and give fire successively, and stand; until the Sergeant Leads up the rest of the Files which fired, even with the Front of the File which last fired. Thus having all fired over they are to march up again even with the Front of Pikes, and this reduceth them, as at first.    
Musquetiers give fire, in flank, march up be●eene the Pikes and Muskets. 

The second manner of giving fire to the Flank is a more secure way, 
The second manner of giving fire to the Flank described.  than the former: and yet full as Serviceable for matter of execution, for this way after the shot hath fired, they shall be secured from the Enemy's shot, far better than the former, and also the body shall continue more entire without separation. And this form is of very good use when two Enemies are divided by a River, or by some such like means secured from the Incursions of Horse, for then the shot being drawn up between the innermost Files of the Musquetiers and the outermost File of Pikes to the right, your skirmish may be continued as long as occasion shall serve. The words of Command which produceth this form is placed in the Margin. And the way to perform this motion of firing is as followeth (Only take notice that as in the former manner of firing, the shot were placed upon the right flank of Pikes, after the same manner they are placed now, with a distance betwixt the outerflanke of the Pikes and the inmost flank of the Musquetiers for the shot to march up into after they have given fire).  
The outermost File of Musquetiers being Commanded to face to the right, and present: the rest of the body marcheth away, and the standing File gives fire. This done and the body is marched clear of the standing file, the next file presents to the right, and the file that first gave fire, faceth to the first Front, and is led by a Sergeant cross the rear of Musquetiers up into the distance between the Muskets and Pikes. The Musquetiers are still open to the right, as they march that so there may be Room for one File to march between them and the Pikes. And so successively each file having fired marcheth up next unto the right flank of Pikes: when all your shot hath given fire once over, they are reduced as at first.    
Musquetiers give fire to the right, wheeling off after your bringers up, and placing yourselves between your divisions. 

The third way of giving fire in flank, 
A third way of giving fire in Flank described.  differeth nothing from the former. But only their manner of wheeling off, and placing them, doth differ: for you remember in the former, that the File of Musquetiers, after that they had given fire were led off by their proper File-Leadere, but this must be led off to the contrary by their bringers up, and this indeed if the body be upon a slow march is the readiest and quickest way, and doth more speedily secure the shot after they have given fire: The Pikes and Shot being placed in Battallia as before is described, you may take the words of command and direction which produceth this firing, as it is placed in the Margin, and the way of performing this firing is as followeth.  
First you must presuppose your body to be marching (as before is showed upon all these firings in Flank) with their Pikes shouldered. The command being given, the outmost File presents to the right, and giveth fire, then faceth to the right, after their bringers up who leadeth them off, cross the Rear of Musquetiers marching them up between the divisions, the bringers up supplying the Fileleaders place, and marching even in Rank in the Front with the Fileleaders, and the file Leader of the same File becoming the bringer up in the Rear. The Files of Musquetiers or Pikes, (according as the Command shall be given) are as they march, to open, thereby giving way to the Musquetiers, after they have fired to come up between the divisions; and so soon as the first file that fired is clear from the right Flank, the second File is then to present and give fire, and in like manner to wheel off as before, and so to march up between the Pikes and Musquetiers; every File successively giving fire, and wheeling off as aforesaid. This firing may be performed as often as the Commander pleaseth: Never the less if it be twice performed the men are reduced as at first, every man possessing his right place. There is another way for the bringers up to wheel off, and each of them to lead off his File until he comes to the Rear of his division, which is between the Muskets and the Pikes, and there he is to stand and rank with the bringers up, the rest that follow passing on forwards by way of introduction, and every man ranking before him that was his Leader in the wheeling off, until the proper File-Leader be come into his place again, and after this way they may give fire, each firing being his own reducement.    
Musquetiers give fire to the right, placing yourselves on the outside of the left Flank of Pikes. 

The fourth way of giving f●re in the Flank differeth nothing from the former, 
The fourth way of giving fire in Flank described.  but in the manner of placing the Files, that they may be the better defended from the fury of the enemy's Horse, after they have given fire upon them in the Flank, for the same purpose therefore after the shot have fired, they are to be drawn up on the outer-side of the left Flank of Pikes for their safeguard: if there be any Rivers, Ponds, Ditches, Hedges, Marish grounds or the like, whereby the Horse may be disabled from performing any execution against them, and then the Pikes are to make their best defence, if need be charging at the foot closely seried together with their Swords drawn, so that the shot may give fire over them. Now by the way you are to presuppose that the shot and Pikes are ranged in form, as before is described in the former ways of firing in the Flank; and taking with you the words of command and direction placed in the Margin, you shall perceive the manner of firing and placing of the men as followeth: First the outermost file having presented to the right, the rest of the body continueth the march, whilst they in the mean time are giving fire, which being done and the body clear, the next outmost File presents: The File that last fired in the interim facing to the left after their proper File-Leader, who leadeth them cross the Rear, both of Muskets and Pikes a good round pace, sleeving them upon the outside of the left Flank of Pikes; the next File having in like manner fired, doth also troop up on the outside of the File led off before: Every File having given fire and placed themselves as before is described then the Pikes may charge. Having ●●●en fire to the right Flank and drawn all your shot upon the left ●●nke, you may cause them in like sort to give fire on the left Flank, 〈◊〉 bring them back again to the right Flank, by which means they will be reduced into their first form: Or if you would reduce them without firing, then either pass your Musquetiers through between your Ranks of Pikes, or else let your whole division of shot be drawn cross, either the Front or Rear of Pikes, into their places.  
Or if you please your shot may give fire in Flank by division; the first fire sleeving on the left Flank, the rest of the Files still falling between the Pikes, and the Musquetiers that wheeled off before the last before them, and this is a very good way of firing and may be reduced with doing the same way back again.    
Musquetiers give fire to the right, marching up between the midst of the Pikes. 

The fifth way of firing in a Flank, 
The fifth way of firing in Flank, and placing the shot in the midst of the battle of Pikes, described.  and bringing them off between the midst of the Pikes, is to be used at such times when as you would secure your shot from the enemy's Horse, there being no other natural strength to defend them; and upon occasion you may draw three or four Files of Pikes (more or less, according to your number, or the danger) cross the Musquetiers both in Front and Rear which 〈◊〉 in the midst betwixt the Pikes, which may serve for an impalement 〈◊〉 defend the shot both in Front and Rear as in Flank. The form ●f this battle is after this manner; the shot are placed upon the right ●●ing of the Pikes, as is described in the former firings, and the Pikes are divided in the middlemost File, leaving such a proportionable distance as may conveniently receive all the Files of shot after they have fired. The word of command and direction you shall find placed in the Margin: The command being given for the outermost File to present to the right, (as formerly is showed in the other firings in the Flank) the rest of the body still marcheth on until that the outermost File hath fired, and is faced to the left again, following their Leader: He now leading them off to the left, marched up in the distance which is made between the middlemost Files of Pikes, who are then to open to the right and left, so to give them room to march up between them; in the mean time the next File having given fire, wheeleth off in like manner, marching up on the left hand of the File that fired last before, and so successively for all the rest of the Files of Musquetiers, all which are to give fire and wheel off as before, placing them still on the left hand of the Files which last fired; wherein still is to be noted that the Pikes are still to open to the right and left, for the receiving the shot between them after they have discharged. This firing, as well as all the former firings in Flank may be led off by their bringers up, as well as by their Fileleaders, and then the reducement will be answerable. The shot having all given fire the Pikes may seek to defend themselves by charging at push of Pike, or at foot; if there be any Bow Pikes they may gall the enemy in the mean time, or the shot may play over the shoulders of the Pikes as they charge at the foot, one rank giving fire after another, for the foremost Rank having fired may kneel down, and there make ready again until the next Rank behind hath also fired, etc. For reducement and to bring the Musquetiers into both flanks again as they were before we discoursed of these several firings in Flanks; you must first command your Pikes to face inwards, and your Musquetiers to the right and left outward, and so to pass them through and interchange ground, then facing them to their Leader they will be reduced as at first.  
You must observe that all these firings in flank may as well be performed to the left hand and with the same words, only the words of right must be changed for left, and left for right.  
The next discourse shall be of divisionall firings.      

CHAP. XCII.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in divisionall firings (viz.) front and rear upon a March.  

Musquetiers give fire to the Front and Rear, and flank your Pikes. 

YOu may please to remember how that in the last foregoing firings in the flank, the Shot were placed in the midst of the Pikes, and now before we can give directions for these divisionall firings in Front and Rear, we must observe the way of reducing the Musquetiers into the Front and Rear of the Pikes, from the form wherein they last stood. To perform this, you must command the half Files of Musquetiers to face about, which done, let the Pikes stand and the Musquetires march, until they are clear both of Front and Rear of Pikes, then let them stand and face to their Leader, then command your Pikes to close their divisions, and the shot will be one half of them in Front and the other half in the Rear, in a readiness to perform this firing which we are now about to discourse of: The Pikes being shouldered and the words of command and direction given (as in the Margin is specified) the first Rank in the Front presents, and the last Rank faceth about to the Rear and doth the like, and so by giving fire together wheel off by division, (viz.) the one half of the Rank following after the right hand man of the same Rank, the other half after the left hand man who leads them close down by the sides or flanks of the Musquetiers until they come to the Pikes: The first Rank of Musquetiers in the Front are to rank even with the first Rank of Pikes, and the last Rank of Musquetiers in the Rear are to rank even with the last Rank of Pikes, leaving a sufficient distance betwixt them and their Pikes for the other Musquetiers to march between. And by the way take notice that he that was outermost when they gave fire, must likewise be outermost when they have taken their places on the Flanks; the first and last Rank having fired and wheeled off, the next ranks (the body marching on, three or four steps) are in like manner to present and give fire, wheeling off by division, and passing between the divisions, there placing themselves, they of the Front division are to place themselves behind those which fired last before them, and they of the Rear division before them which fired last in the Rear behind them; and thus they may continue to give fire after the same manner until they have all given fire over once, then may the body make a stand and the Pikes charge to the Front and Rear if occasion be; or if the Commander would continue his firing to the front and Rear still upon this same form, then let the shot of the Front place themselves (after they have given fire) behind the Musquetiers of their own division, and those of the Rear division are to place themseleves betwixt the Rear of Pikes and the shot of their own division, and so the body moving but slowly forwards they may continue the firing.    
Musquetiers give fire to the Front and Rear, placing yourselves between your divisions. 

In the precedent discourse after fire was given to Front and Rear, 
A second way of firing in Front and Rear described.  the shot flanked the Pikes, now from this form I will endeavour to show you a second way of firing to Front and Rear, which may easily be effected if the Soldiers be well instructed. To perform this firing take these words of command and directions (placed in the Margin) which will produce this form of firing following. The command being thus given the first Rank presents to the front, likewise the last Rank of Musquetiers in the Rear faceth about and presents towards the Rear, then both at one instant gives fire, wheeling off by division, and placing themselves between the Musquetiers of their division, These, namely, which were of the Front half files falling into the Rear of their own divisions, and those of the Rear half files (contrary wise) falling before their half Fileleaders, and ranking even with the half Fileleaders of the Pikes, the next Rank successively firing and wheeling off after the same manner: Having fired once over they are reduced every man to his place. The Officer must take some pains in teaching his Soldiers these two last firings, otherwise they will seem very difficult at first for them to perform.      

CHAP. XCIII.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in giving fire to the Rear and right Flank marching, and likewise to both Flanks at once marching, and also to both Flanks standing.  

Musquetiers, give fire to the right flank and rear, placing yourselves between the Pikes and your own divisions. 

THis kind of firing in Rear and Flank upon a march, is very serviceable at such times as the enemy shall skirmish with the body, to annoy them in their passage in Flank and Rear at one time, And this kind of firing you may perform two several ways, as first your Musquetiers being placed in their ordinary place upon the Flanks of their Pikes: The second and more securer way for the Pikes will be, to draw the Musquetieres' from that flank which is least in danger, cross the Rear of Pikemen. The words of command and direction you shall find in the Margin, which produceth this latter form of firing: the words of command being given to fire to the Rear and right Flank: The outermost File of Musquetiers presents to the right; and the last Rank of Musquetiers presents to the Rear, and so both give fire; the rest of the body in the mean time marching a reasonable pace: The right hand File on the right Flank; and the last Rank of the Musquetiers in the Rear of the Pikes, having fired, the File facech to the left after their File Leader, and so marcheth up between the Musquetiers of the same division and the Pikes; the Ranks also wheeling off to the right, and placing itself next after the Rear of Pikes: and if you please you may make an Interval or space between the Musquetiers in the Rear that so one part may wheel off to the right on the outside, & the other part wheel off to the right, and march up between the intervals into their places. The first File file upon the Flank, and the first Rank in the Rear that presented, having given fire and wheeled clear of the body; the next File and rank is to present and give fire; after the same manner wheeling off and taking their places as aforesaid, and so successively the rest, both Files and Ranks gives fire, observing the same order, and having given fire once, twice or oftener over they are still reduced to the same they were before the firing began; then draw your shot from the Rear to the left Flank again, and they will be in their first form and station.    
Musquetiers give fire to both Flanks, marching up between the Pikes and your own divisions. 

This kind of firing to both Flanks marching, 
Of firing to both Flanks Marching.  may be upon some occasions serviceable, and the shot after they have given fire may be either placed between their own divisions and the Pikes, or between the midst of the Pikes, for their better security; the shot being placed upon both the Flanks of the Pikes, as we left them in the former discourse, you must make use of the words of command and direction (which is placed in the Margin) which will produce this form of firing. The command being given the outmost file of each Flank presents outward, the rest of the body still continuing of the march; the presented Files (in the interim) giving fire, then facing after their proper Fileleaders, who are to lead them up between the Musquetiers of their own divisions and the Pikes) in the time of their wheeling away) the next two outermost Files are to present, firing after the same manner, and leading up as before; the rest successively doing the like until they have fired all over, which brings them to their former places.    
Advance your Pikes, and stand, face to the right and left; Musquetiers give fire and Flank your Pikes. 

This kind of firing to both Flanks upon a stand, is produced by the words of command and directions placed in the Margin, 
Of firing to both Flanks standing.  only observe, the Musquetiers are placed upon both Flanks of the body of Pikes, as you left them in the precedent discourse. The words of command being given, the whole body both of Pikes and Shot are to face to the right and left hand, and then the foremost Ranks of Musquetiers (which before the facing were the outermost Files) are to present and give fire, and then wheel off by division, Ranking even with the foremost Ranks of Pikes, and leaving sufficient intervals for the rest of the Musquetiers to march between them and the Pikes: The next Rank presenting and firing after the same manner, but not advancing forwards, only firing upon the same ground and wheeling off by division: afterwards passing down between the intervals, and so ranking after their Leaders; but you must observe by the way, that they that were outermost when they gave fire are likewise to be so, when they have taken their places: All the Ranks of Musquetiers having fired and wheeled off as before, the Pikes if need be may charge, and the Musquetiers giving fire over again, wheeling off outwards, and placing themselves in the Rear of their own divisious: Having advanced your Pikes, and faced your body to their first Front, all your Musquetiers will be in Front and Rear, and then if your half Files about and give fire (after the same manner formerly discoursed of) to the Front and Rear, having faced them again to their first Front, they will be reduced as at first into their ordinary square.      

CHAP. XCIIII.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in a Triple way of giving fire to the Front.  
BY this triple firing to the Front the precedent form of firing to both Flanks standing may be reduced, for the Musquetiers of the Rear division opening to the right and left, and sleeving upon the Flanks of the Pikes, until the Leaders of the Rear division, (who then were the half Fileleaders) rank even with the Front of Pikes; and those in the front division are placed before the Pikes in the Front, securely covering them from the enemy; The word of command and directions that produceth this form of firing is placed in the Margin.  

Musquetiers of the Rear, double your Front of Pikes by division. 

The one half of the shot being placed before the front of the Pikes, and the other half placed upon either flank even with the first Rank of Pikes, and the word of command being given, than the first Rank of Musquetiers (both of front and flanks) presents to the front and gives fire, wheeling off to the right and left by division. The Musquetiers of the front division being wheeled off (as aforesaid) close by the flanks of their own Musquetiers, pass directly down between the Intervals, and place themselves even in Rank behind the Musquetiers of the Rear division, which are upon the flanks, like wise the Musqueters that fired at the same time on the flanks wheel also off the right flank to the right, & the left flank to the left) marching directly down even with the rear Ranks of the Pikes, and there place themselves again even in rank with the last rank of Pikes; this done the rest of the ranks successively give fire, and do the like, every rank taking his place, after the rank that fired last before them; the other Ranks moving one rank forwarder; the Musquetiers having given fire once over, and falling off according to this direction, they will all be reduced to the Flank again as at first. View the figure in the next page.     

The Figure of the Triple firing to the Front.  
Front.  
Sergeant Serjeant.  
Sergeant Sergeant    

CHAP. XCV.  
How a Commander shall exercise his Soldiers in giving fire three ways at once, (viz.) to the Front, Rear and right Flank.  
IN performing this firing three ways at once, first you may suppose the Musquetiers to be placed upon either Flank of the Pikes, then by commanding the half Ranks of the left, to double their right Flank by division, than the Rear half Files of the left Flank are to face about to the right, and then both the Front half Files, and the Rear half Files are to march forthright, until they are clear of that part of the body that stands, than each division faceth that way they are to double) which the Front half Files must do to the right, and the Rear half Files to the left) and so march forth right until the doubling be performed, than the Rear division that doubled is to face to the Rear, and the Front division is to face front proper, and the right flank that stood is to face to the right hand, whereby they are fast ready to give fire three several ways at once; the manner of firing is thus performed, the foremost Ranks of Musquetiers on each part having fired, they wheel off to the right or to the right and left (according as they shall be commanded) placing themselves in the Rear of their own divisions, the next Rank in the mean time moving forwards into their Leaders ground, there in like manner firing wheeling off and placing themselves as before; the rest of the ranks performing the like successively; for reducement face them all to their Front proper, then command the half ranks that doubled to face to the left, and so to march into their places, the figure of this precedent discourse followeth in the next Page.  
Front proper.  
Sergeant  
Serjeant  
Front of the right Flank  
Serjeant  
Front of the Rear. 
The word of command and direction that produceth this triple firing is, Half Ranks of the left, double your right flank by division.   
There are diverse other ways of firings which I am forced to omit, desiring you to turn into the excellent book of Military discipline, composed by Lieutenant Barriff, wherein you may be further instructed, and see the Poligons or Figures belonging to most of these instructions which I have briefly discoursed of, wishing you by all means not to omit any of them in your exercises, if time and patience may give you leave and if you should pass by any▪ let them be only your divisionall Motions, as for your entire motions either of doublings, Countermarches or wheelings, etc. you must be very circumspect and careful to perform them all, otherwise all your pains will be to no purpose.  
Now for the marching out of the field, your Company standing in a square form (viz.) the shot upon each flank of the Pikes; the Lieutenant leads away the first division of shot with a Sergeant attending him, the Drum beating between the third and fourth rank of the same division of shot; the Ensign is to march before the first division of Pikes, following a pretty distance behind the first division of shot with the Drum placed as before: The eldest Sergeant is to march before the second division of Pikes: The second Sergeant marcheth before the last division of shot, with the Captain in the Rear of all: and being marched to the place where the Colours should be lodged, let them as they march invert to the right and left (viz.) the ranks are to file to the right and left by division, than all the Musquetiers are to face in opposition, to cock their matches, guard their Pans, and rest their Muskets; the Pikemen in the mean time are to advance their Pikes, and close their Ranks and Files to their order, which being done, (the Drum beating a Troop at the head of the Pikes): All the chief Officers in their due places are to pass through this guard into the appointed place for the Allodgement of the colours, than the Sergeant is to cause all the Musquetiers to face about to the right, and present, and upon the first beat of the Drum they are all to give fire in one volley; then the Drum beating a call and makes proclamation of silence the captain is to deliver them such orders as he hath in charge to acquaint them with all either from the Lord Lieutenant's or the Counsel, which being done he is to dismiss them until the next summons for their appearance.  
In the next discourse I shall entreat about the exercising of Horse-Troopes; and so make a general discourse of all the parts belonging to the body of War.    

THE DRILLING OR EXERCISING OF HORSE TROOPS. SECT. XII.  

CHAP. XCVI.  
Of the preeminency and dignity of Officers, for the avoiding of disputes, with a short Declaration of the high Office of the General of the Horse.  
HAving finished those instructions concerning the exercising of foot Companies; 
In omni praelio non iam multitudo & virtus indocta quam ars, & exercitium; solent prestare victoriam, Veg. lib. 1.  by which means they may be fitted and prepared for Service: And before we can come to entreat either of Marching, Encamping, or Imbattelling; It is necessary we should show some brief instructions for the Drilling and exercising of Horse troops; in regard no Army can be complete in power and strength, for the exercising of such things of Importance, as the cause may require, unless compounded of Foot and Horse; otherwise it must of necessity haut, and make use of the stilt of some peculiar place for advantage and safety, and not to look the Enemy in the face in all places. 
Montaniss locis & impeditis; quasi nullus equorum usus: ex quo intelligitur magis necessarios ped●tes; qui possunt ubique prodesse, Veg. lib. 2.   
And in regard diverse Nations are diversely opinionated; some esteeming the infantry better than the Cavalliary, as our English hath done; others esteem the Cavalliarie better than the Infantry, as the French, yet according to the nature and situation of the country or place, the Army is to be employed in, whether Enclosures, or Champion, accordingly it must be compounded, of more or less, of th' one or th' other. 
Vbi bona & composita, millitia, pedes prevalet: apud rudes, aut Barbaros contra, Lip. pol. l. 5.   
But for the avoiding of disputes which may arise amongst the Officers of either part for place of preeminency and dignity: you shall find by this Aphorism amplified with the authority of the Ancient Sages: 
Ab equity & pedite, omne Bellicis negotijs proflu●t robur, & sine quibus quamvis egregia fint illa consillia; sunt tamen invalida, Tacit. lib. 1.  that in profession either Civil or Military; those are more honourable, which have greater charge, or require greater knowledge; as to rule a State is more noble than to govern a City; and this more eminent, than to order a Family; In which respect though the true end of Horse and foot be one and the same, to defend aright, and redress a wrong: and per case that of foot be generally more useful, yet this of Horse is the more honourable Service; 
Neque quisquam expraeciaris pe●sis, usquam pedes incedere sua qui●em sponte videbatur. Xeno. Cy. lib 4.  because his virtue and knowledge is exercised as well in Managing and defending of his Horse, as of himself: upon whose safeguard his life and honour depends, as well as in immediate defence of his own person: thus much for the dignity of place.  
As for the Officers of the Cavallrie; 
In equity apud antiquos omne Rubur: quia ratio ordinandi militiam pedestrem illis in●●gnita suit Arist. pol. lib. 4.  I will only with all brevity touch such things for instruction as are most natural in every particular Office; and then transfer them to the taking of a practical Survey of what is commended to the General of the Army, and to the rest of the Officers of the infantry; for if it were possible there ought to be no difference in experience, Wisdom and Valour, amongst all Officers if they could attain unto it.  
The General of the Horse hath the eminent control and command of all the Cavalry or Horse Regiments, 
The Office of the General of the horse.  of what nature or composition whatsoever, and is respectively bound, as other Captains are to look to the happy government of his own Troop, and so consequently to his own Regiments; which done he is to have a General eye of Survey over all other Colonels of Horse, their Regiments, Officers, and Soldiers; for that part of the Army which consists of Horse are comprised within his charge: 
Quantò quis magis inficiatur vitium suum; tantò magis in ipsum penetrate, & quanto magis intro fugies; tantò magis in caupona e●is; Pl●t prop. vic.  wherefore it behoves him to see his Troops fairly de●●e●●ed; for what offence or disparagement happens amongst them, the spot of it will stain his reputation: wherefore not only his eye, but the eyes of every particular Officer ought continually to watch and guard over all their affairs.  
The General ought to have delivered unto him by the Mustermaster general; and the Colonels and Captains of the Cavalry, a true role containing the Catalogue or List of all his Commanders belonging to the Cavalry, with the distinction of the Arms they serve in, as namely which are Harquebuziers, Carbines, Curassies or Dragoones; by which he shall the better know how to order them in Service.  
He must be very politic, and wise to set his valour rightly on work, otherwise he is liable to do more mischief to his own foot Troops, by the misgoverning of his Horses, then possibly he can offend the Enemy by his well managing of them.  
There is nothing so dangerous in a Camp, 
Austeri duces, suis facies, hostibus sunt utiles, Apipan.  as soldiers to contemn their General, and there is nothing breeds it sooner, than remissness and Lenity: for he that suffereth one mischief pass unpunished inviteth another, which brings his command into discredit; 
Corbuloni plsus molis adversus ignaviam militum quam contrà perfidiam hostium erat. Tacit. An. 13.  and the service into despair; wherefore as in men of great rank it is less blame worthy; to be overstately and imperious, than overfamiliar and base: So for a General it is a less fault to be overrigorous, than not to punish delinquents at all: Likewise not forgetting to reward desert in a bountiful manner; 
— Gaudet tamen esse timo●i: Tam magno po●●lu, & see net ●allet omari, Lucan. lib. 3. de Civ  for hereby his Officers and Soldiers will be kept in an awful readiness to do as they are Commanded; for neither his maturity of judgement to undertake, nor his alacrity of spirit to execute, avails in the perfecting of his resolved enterprise, if he want a powerful Majesty in his command: likewise if he hath never such obedient and valiant soldiers, 
Amil. tibus, imperator potius quam hostis, metui debet, quem admodum homines fine nervis ambulare nequeunt; ita nec bellum usquam progre●i sine pecunia, Lip. pol lib. 5.  fitted with all kind of warlike habiliments, yet all his strength is but lame, and unable to move itself without money the sinews of war.   

CHAP. XCVII.  
The office of the Linetenant General of the Cavalry.  
THe Lieutenant General of the Horse; besides his excellent worth and knowledge in the Art of war: Is like wise to be the eye and hand of the General, spying out all defects, and a ready hand to demonstrate and point out what is to be performed.  
The General for the most part is absent from the Troops being with the General of the Army to assist him in his consultations, and aiding his judgement, in contriving what shall be best and fittest to be put in action, for their own safeties, and the defeite of the Enemy.  
First it is his duty to take notice how the Troops are exercised, and the Officers and Soldiers dem●ened? 
Exereitus labore proficit; labour consenescit. Veget.  next he is to imitate the noble General Pyrrhus, whose daily course was to bethink himself what ways and courses; or what advantages the Enemy may take to offend him, 
Consuetudine levior labour fit. Livi. lib. 25.  as also to consider what places are most advantageous to hinder his proceedings; he did always premeditate how commodiously he might assault the enemy when occasion was offered. 
〈…〉 tantum ad notat● sed etiam picta habeat: ut non solum 〈◊〉 mentis, verum aspectu oculorum 〈◊〉 profecturis, 〈…〉 i●●doneum, eugat, Veg l▪ 2.   
He had always true and exact map of the place or country he was to go puon execution, whereby he did the better know, whether and how far to march always providing commodius places to quarter his Army in; it behoves this Lieutenant General to do the like; and also to see the Camp well secured by setting out sufficient guards, and placing Sentinels; he is to cause the ways to be discovered by sending out parties of Horse before the Army; he must have all kind of stratagems and policies at his finger's ends, the which wisely he is to put in execution.  
And let this be a caution to him and to all in authority that they stand upon Glass; 
Fortuna levis est, 〈◊〉 reposcit quae dedit, Senec. Sent.  which by its slipperiness and brittleness may cause them to fail at once; for as to rise to preferment is craggy. So to fall downwards is icy; for the least aspersion will cause him slip; 
Non enim in gradibus quibus ad summum perventum est, itur: Saepe inter fortunam maximam & ultimam nihil interest. Sen de Ben.  and between the highest fortune and the lowest ebb there is no stay.   

CHAP. XCVIII.  
Of the Sergeant Major General of the Cavalliary.  
THis great officer is to walk the same path that the Sergeant Major General of the Infantry steps in; for he is not only to be the eye and hand, but also to be the ear and legs of the General and Lieutenant General; for he must be the Ambassador between the General and the inferior Officers; he is to attend the General thrice a day at the least, both to bring news of the Enemies proceedings; and of the defects in the army; as also to receive such Orders as shall be given him in charge from the General to deliver to the Colonels and the rest of the Officers. He is likewise to take the watch word; and secretly to deliver it to the General, and to the Lieutenant General of the Cavalry, and so to the Quartermaster General, that he may distribute it to the inferior Officers: He must be ware of doing ill Offices between the head and inferior Officers.  
He is never to report any news from what others do say, 
Nihil tam leve est quod non magnam inter●●●m faciat res Momentum. Liv. l. 25.  but from his own immediate knowledge, or from some trusty friend that hath informed him▪ likewise, whatsoever he is truly possessed with, it is necessary he should truly relate, although it be never so small an accident. 
V● p●tit accid●st, est sounventes foys ce commencement des grandmaux. Am. Pleut. Agis.   
Likewise he must be very careful, as he officiates his duty in visiting the Guards, and going about the quarters, that he gives no occasion of alarm to the soldiers, nor take no alarm unless it be justly, for it may breed much inconvenience.  
When he is to visit the outmost Guards; 
Nocturni terrores Clearcht exercitum invaserunt: At ille precepit, si noctis tumultus 〈◊〉: nemo rectus consurgeret; hoc preceptum docuit 〈◊〉 contem nere nocturuam terrorem, Polyoen Strat▪ lib. 2.  he is to have a sufficient guard of Horsemen to attend him, for fear of being surprised by the enemy. Such orders as he shall receive from the General; he must not betrust his memory with, but commit it presently to writing, for a small mistake can plead no excuse in the wars, but is highly to be punished, for by mistake a world of mischief hath ensued many times to the ruining of part, or of the whole Army.   

CHAP. XCIX.  
Of the Quarter Master General of the cavalry.  
THis Office is of great respect, and importance; he ought to be full of sound knowledge in Marshal discipline; and well read in diverse of the Liberal Sciences, but especially in Arithmetic and Geometry, so that he is to have an insight in the Art of Surveighing and measuring of grounds, being able upon the first view, to take the best advantage thereof for any singular purpose; especially for the Quartering or Encamping his Troops in the best and safest manner that may be. 
Tuum & hostium exercitum, lacorum situm; naturam regi●●is nos●e. Livi. lib. 2●.  He is likewise to be skilful and well experienced in the use of Maps; that thereby he may truly know how all the Roads and ways lie: with the Situation and distances, between Town and Town.  
He is to keep a List of the Guards, and is to visit them both day and night, showing the Alarm place, to all the inferior Quartermasters, when they come to take the word of him  
When the Lord High Marshal takes a view of the ground whereon to Encamp the Army; he is to Summon all the inferior Quartermasters, belonging to every Regiment, and those Quartermasters are to call together every Furrier and Harbinger; and so are to attend the Lord Martial to the intended Camp; then the Chief Quartermaster is to stake out the form of the Incampement or entrenchment, and also the distances for each Regiment, and then every particular Quartermaster is to allot out the distances for the alodgement of every private Company.  
He is to give his due attendance to the General, and to the Lord High Marshal to be employed about such things as they shall give him in charge; If any order for haste be given him by word of mouth, himself must go and deliver it, and not trust it to others; the Inferior Quartermasters are to assist him in all his affairs.   

CHAP. C.  
The Office of the Captain of the cavalry.  
THis Officer ought to be qualified with all those Noble parts, 
Miles be tris 〈◊〉 deb●t: Corpus, ut quam validis●●●●m & perniciss●m●m habeat, a●ma ap●a animum paratum ad Sub●ta imperia. Ceterad●is immortalibus & 〈◊〉 curae esse. Livi. l. 44.  which are to be expected in a foot Captain, and rather in a fuller measure, in regard he is to govern man and beast: He must be a perfect and absolute Horseman, teaching his Horse by the Motion of his hand, leg, and body, to understand all things belonging to the Rider's pleasure; he must be careful in making his whole Troop good Horsemen teaching them how to sit a horse in a comely posture; carrying his body upright, the right hand bearing his Pistol or Carbine couched upon his thigh: the left hand with the bridle raines under the guard of the Pommel of the Saddle; and his legs close and straight by the horses sides, with his toes turned a little inwards; 
If any Horse be jadish and apt to st●●ke his fellows or strangers that shall come near him: he is to have a little Bell placed on his Crupper behind; that such as know not his qualities may be aware of his jadish tricks.  his horse so well managed that he will stand constantly without rage or distemper: then he is to be made sensible (by yielding the body, or thrusting forwards the rider's legs) when to put himself forwards into a short or large trot; then how by the even stroke of both is spurs to pass into a swift Career; then how to gallop the field either in large rings; midles or less rings, either to turn with speed upon the one or the other hand; then to put him into a gentle gallop right forth in an even line, and suddenly to stop, and upon the half stop to turn swiftly and roundly.  
Then lastly how to retire back, or to make him fly sidewayes, on the one or the other side according as the advantage of fight shall give him occasion; he is likewise to see his Soldiers well horsed, with complete armour, their furniture sufficient their bridles well rained and lined with a wire chain, their Pistols and Carbines strong and fix; and he must strive to make all his Soldiers, as good Shot or marks men as himself, 
Temporl aptari decet, Senec. Med.  or else all his labour will be to little purpose.  
He must be wary of over slipping any opportunity, 
Vl●eriora Mirari, praesentia sequi, Tac. hist. 4.  which may be taken either in offending the Enemy, or securing himself; for not to adventure when he should is cowardice and not prudence, 
Consilium nobis resque l●cusque dabunt. Ovid.  and to dare when he should not is rashness and not valour; wherefore he must frame his Counsels and actions, upon the Mould of necessary circumstances, 
Consilia nova pro novis rebut, aut ubi priora in prospera. Cip. Ao. lib. 3.  He must further know that the weapons of Victory are form on the forge of Discipline; for it both Captain and Soldiers have not this temper; they will lose the edge of their valours in the trial, and turn the points into their own Bowels. 
Pauc●s vi●os fort●s natura procreat bona institutione plures reddit industria. Veg l. 3.   
Further, there is nothing snatcheth victory out of the hand of the Conqueror, so much as untimely falling to the spoil, upon such disorder fortune always turns her wheel, and maketh victors of them that before were vanquished.  
He must diligently observe the orders which shall be given him from his Superiors, 
Exercitus predator, & ipsa preda hostium. Sallust jug.  and not fail to be with his Troop, at the time and place required.  
Upon all occasions he is to be first mounted on horse back, 
Eventus preliorum inter initia contra illes fuit, quibus victoria debebatur veg. l. 3.  and is to have his Company full and complete, and what ill fortune so ever should seem to befall him, he must not discover any fear, for upon his courage and countenance the soldiers depend, wherefore he must have a good resolution attend him.  
In a pitched battle he must seldom or never seek to charge the enemy in the Front, 
Nam necesse est, ad fugam pa●at● sint, qui ducem suum sentiant desperare. Veg. l. 3.  especially if the two armies are near joining, fearing lest his horses wrong his foot troops, by a disorderly retreat than possibly he can offend the enemy, wherefore the best and safest place to charge the enemy upon, is the flanks and rear.  
When the enemy shall charge you with one of his Troops, do not you rush forth to meet them, but if your ground be of advantage keep it; if not advance softly forwards; until the enemy be within 100 paces of you, and then fall into your Career, by this means your horse will be in breath and good order, when as the Enemy will be to seek.  
The Captain of the Cuirassiers hath the Priority, the next is the Captain of the Harquinburies', the Captain of the Carbines hath the third place, the Dragon's are of the meanest account, although many times they do the best service.  
And for conclusion let all noble Captains, that desire the honour of their King, and welfare of the Country, not suffer themselves to be gold and deluded by their Soldiers; which bring them borrowed horses, and furniture not of their own; and chopping and changing of their men, and not appearances; so that our Troops are so deficient, that if an enemy should approach we shall be to seek of half our Troops, and them not half exercised.   

CHAP. CI.  
The Office of the Lieutenant of the cavalry.  
THis Officer is to bear the true Image of his Captain, 
In the Roman coins the picture of Mars was stamped, with a lavelin in one hand and a scourge in the other: and the portraiture of a cock by him; intimating his prowess his command and his vigilancy: Godwin: Rom. antiqui.  for he is employed upon many services by his Captain, more than any other inferior Officers are; as guarding some particular passages, riding out upon parties to scour the Country, and to gain intelligence (from the Country people) of the enemies proceedings.  
He is many times sent out to command a certain number of horse for the safeguard of the Foragers and for the intercepting and guarding of some Fords and passages. 
Quem m● tuunt oderunt; quem quisque ●dit, periisse expetit.   
He is to exercise and Drill his men wisely and orderly, using his command over them; that he may be more beloved than feared.  
He commands in his Captain's absence solely, he is to March in the rear of his Troop; causing the Soldiers to follow their Captain and Corner in good order: not suffering any to straggle from the Troop.  
When he is to pass upon any duty, he is first to gain the best instructions for the advantage in managing the service he is employed about.  
He is to be always armed during the time of his guard, and is not only to place out the Sentinels, but also to visit and revisit them: if they be quartered in any village, in case of an Alarm, the Soldiers are to repair to the Cornets Lodging.  
He is to see every Soldier have his Billet delivered him from the Quartermaster, unless it be in Garrison, than the Major of the Town performs that office. He is to see good orders kept by visiting their Huts, and commanding their fires to be extinguished immediately after the warning piece is discharged. 
Multa sunt honesta factu, quae sunt turpia visa.   
He is to be very careful of his own demeanurs for example sake.  
He must have some Scholarship in him in regard he is to keep a List of all his Soldier's names, 
Inquibusdam notarum peritia calculandi computandique usus ex●g●tur Veg. l. 2.  and by reason of orders or letters sent to him from his Superiors, which he is to keep secret, and not to show to others.  
The company being drawn to the guard in any place, and approaching near it; the Lieutenant is to ride before to take notice of the Corpses duguard, and is to confer with the Company, who are then to be relieved, what Sentinels are to be placed out, and what ways are to be scoured, and all other things requisite.   

CHAP. CII.  
Of the Cornet belonging to the Cavalry.  
THe Cornet of Horse ought to be a man of a haughty courage, and of a singular behaviour, he commandeth the Company in the absence of the Captain and Lieutenant, his place of March is in the Front, before the first rank; yet behind the Captain. In fight he is not to regard the breaking of his Standard in regard it shall be an honour unto him although the enemy should gain a piece of it, his usual place in time of Skirmish, is to be in the middle of the Troop, those before him must be the aprovedst Soldier and best armed.  
He is to keep a List of the Company to send so many to the guard as the Captain or Lieutenant shall appoint.  
Once a day at the Lord Generals first passing by the Troop, he is to do obeisance by inclining his Cornet towards the ground.  
And because I intent brevity, I will only name the residue of Officers belonging to the Cavalry, referring the Reader for his better satisfaction to Markham's Decades, and to Captain john Crus●e his Military Instructions.  
The Quartermasters of every particular Regiments duty is to assist the Quartermaster general in making the Quarters; 
The office of the Quartermasters to a Regiment.  they are to distribute the Word and the Billets for the Soldier's lodgings.  
The Corporals to a Troop are usually three or two at the least, 
The office of a Corporal.  they are to assist the Lieutenants in placing the Sentinels, and in ordering of the Troop, they have the command of a Squadron to guide some passages, or to ride out upon discovery; he is to keep a List of his Squadron.  
There aught to be two Trumpers at the least to each Troop of Horse; 
The office of the Trumpets.  whose duty is beside their knowledge in distinguishing their sounds and points of war. But they must be wise in delivering Embasses and Messages, and very observative how the Enemy demeans his forces, and how his guards are kept, one Trumpet is to lodge with the Cornet, to be in a readiness for all sudden Alarms.  
There is but one Auditor or fiscal general allowed to the Army, 
The office of the fiscal.  both of Horse and foot.  
The Provost Martial is an Officer under the high Marshal; 
The Office of the Provost Martial.  he is to keep in safe custody all delinquents, every Regiment hath an inferior Marshal belonging to it, they are to see to the Victuallers, Butchers, and to the Weights and Measures of Bread, Bear, and the like; they are to inform the Commissary, and Auditor what rates the Sutler's, Butchers, etc. may afford their provision for that they may set the Tax accordingly.  
They are to carry a Trunshon with a Ribbin in it by which they are distinguished.  
They are to attach all straggling soldiers in a March, to prevent him from pilliging.  
And to conclude this discourse, I would have all Officers of such a true temper of valour; 
Is demum vir est, cu●us animum nec prospera statu suo efferant nec adversa infringant Liv. l. 45.  and so constant in all their proceedings, that honour and prosperity should not make them Imperious; nor the worst of fortunes deject them. For that man that bears his prosperity, neither with moderation nor prudence but is full blown like a bladder with the wind of pride; he seldom in adversity shows either constancy or courage, 
Si nihil possis sperare desperes nihil. Senec.  for one prick of disaster will empty his swollen heart of all hopes; and will make him prove like an unskilful and dejected Sea man, upon every little storm to cut his Cables, 
Humilis & parcus animus prosperitatibus effertur; adversit autem rebus deprimitur, Epicar.  and Maste, and throw all over board; where as a Noble resolution would find a remedy by slacking of some few Sails to endure the storm, and save all he hath in charge.   

CHAP. CIII.  
Of the ordering and riding of Horses to make them fit for Service.  
IT is a thing of great consequence for soldiers to understand how to order themselves, 
The art of Riding horses is most noble, as appears by Virgil in his Encidor, where he terms King Picus for his excellency and greater praise, a breaker or rider of horses.  towards their horses, to make them the apt to understand the Rider's meaning, and to be fitted for exercise, for an Officer shall find it a thing impossible to exercise a troop of horses, unless they be first prepared for that service; Therefore let me request you to apply your endeavours to such documents, as the best experienced Riders have observed. 
Likewise the Poets fain that Bellerophon. the son of King Glaucus road upon a Pegasus when he slew the Monster Chi●era.   
And first a soldier may fit and help his horse six manner of ways (viz.) with his Voice, with his Tongue, with his Rod, with his Bridle, with the Caulfes of his Legs, with his Sturrop, and with his Spurs, likewise when your horse hath performed his exercise well, you have two ways to cherish and coy him, which is by your voice in speaking to him gently, or else by scratchiug and coying him with your hand, or with the end of your Rod.  
And although helps and corrections may seem one, 
You may take notice that a horse is a very sensible creature, and apt to learn and conceive of any words, or active demonstrations, as appears by the French man's horse, that he had taught to fetch and carry like a Spanell; at his command he would lie down, or rise up and kick, or st●mpe as many sto●●ps as he pleased to command him with diverse other things.  yet there is this difference, having a respect to the time, for the one goeth before error, and the other cometh after: for you help your Horse to the intent he should not err; but you correct him because he hath already erred.  
For the first of the seven helps before specified, which is the Voice, it is used diverse ways, as in the way of Correction, for his obstinacy or wrestinesse: a terrible voice is used with some opprobrious terms, but in the way of helping or cherishing him, you must use mild terms with a cheerful voice; as in running him, you must say, hay, hay, or the like; if to retreat, you must use a low voice, Back, back boy, back, I say.  
If you would help him to advance at the stop, you must say cheerfully, Hup, hup, or Hoist, hoist.  
Likewise to make him light behind, you must say Derier, or such terms as you shall please.  
In cherishing your horse, or coying him for doing well, your voice must be most mild of all, as saying, well boy, well. 
Use of the voice.   
The next thing observable it the tongue, which is only a clocking it to the roof of the mouth, and likewise the lips, with a kind of Chirrupping: doth much put a horse forwards in a gentle strain.  
The Rod is a very necessary instrument if used aright (viz.) not to correct your Horse with it out of season, 
There are five things observable in the use of the rod or riding wand; first when the horse is fitted to use a wand; secondly, how to take it for scaring; thirdly, how to bear it at all times: fourthly, the use and ends it s●●ves for; lastly, how and when to use it as a help correction or cheerishing to your horse.  but only at the very instant he erreth: for there is no such way as a good wand, well laboured upon a stubborn horse that is wresty.  
The Bridle governs a Horse as the Helm doth the Ship, and it is the principal instrument about him, to bring him in subjection; and to fit him for service, wherefore diverse things in it are considerable: as the fashion of the bit, suitable to the tenderness of his mouth, the Musrowle, the Cheeks, kurbles, ports, treaches and such like bits according to the discretion of the Rider. He most likewise know when to ride his Horse with a Bit, then with what manner of Bit, and how to use it at first putting on, and in what part of his mouth it must rest.  
Likewise how to hold the Raynes, when even together; and when one shorter than another, and what measure he shall keep with his hand, in bearing hard or loose, 
When your horse is managed, you must learn how to handle your sword, Harquebuz or Pistol.  high or low, when to use the false Raynes or Musrowle, and when to leave them; when and how to correct him with the Bridle, and when to help him.  
Many men spoil their Horse at first, by using to sharp a Bit; wherefore the safest way is to take a plain Cannon with right cheeks, and that hath been formerly used, 
The Rod is to be borne in the right hand, with the point right up to your right shoulder when you troth your horse.  placing it a little above his great teeth, anointing it with a little honey mixed with salt, which will make him lean to it, and delight in it the better.  
The Raynes you must hold in your left hand; so as your little finger, and Ring finger be betwixt the two Raynes, and your thumb may lie close upon the Raynes, with the brane thereof turned towards the saddles pummel; being destitute of a Rod, take the overplusse that hangeth down by the midst in your right hand, holding just by your right thigh.  
In bearing your bridle you must observe three several ways: first, by bearing the Raynes low beneath the pummel of the saddle, even with the wither●, which is a ready way to correct him.  
Secondly, 
Note the left hand is only to be held up so high to rest your Harquebuz or Carbine, upon when you discharge, and not otherwise.  bearing your hand higher towards the midst of the pommel, th●● maintains him.  
Thirdly, bearing him just above the Pommel, that is used in managing him; to bear the hand higher is by sundry Authors disallowed; first, in regard it wearieth the arm; secondly, if need require, you have not so much power to stop your Horse when you would.  
Thirdly, being upon Service in the field against your enemy, the bearing of your hand so high, would be a trouble unto your defence, and a commodity to your enemy, for thereby he may easily cut your Raynes in sunder.  
Lastly, you can have no steady hand upon your horse, for any continnance, by means whereof he can never rain well, nor port his head steady, unless you bear your hand low, remembering when you turn your horse, neither to draw your arms nor hands more on the one side than the other, but keep it even with the horses crest, and only to turn your fist a little inward, or outwards, to signify unto him what hand you would have him turn unto: for the help of the calf and heel in riding the Ring, you must consider diverse Circumstances, as first a single stroke of the contrary leg, 
Use of the Calf.  to the side you intent to turn upon: as for example, if you would have him turn on the right side, 
You must not forget to spur behind the gifts towards the flank.  than you must touch him with your left leg, if on the left hand, then with your right leg.  
Secondly, a double stroke, striking him with both your legs together with an even stroke, and this is to make him thrust forwards.  
Thirdly, the closing stroke; as for example, when you would have your horse close his turn well, as namely to the right hand; then in his turning touch him with your left leg in the spurring place, 
Th●se actions of the heels are performed with out spurs, if the horse will not endure the spur.  and with your right leg immediately after more backwards towards his flank.  
Fourthly, to strike with both heels one after the other four or five times, serves for a correction when your horse transgresseth.  
The use of the Stirrup availeth much in helping a young horse in his beginning; for if he carries his head or neck a wry, 
The use of the Stirrup.  or hang on one side, more than another by striking him with the Stirrup under the shoulder, on the contrary side, will cause him to amend his fault.  
The use of the Spur is to help when the horse hath been first backed half a score times; 
Use of the Spur.  and when you first use them, 
You may stuff old boots with sand, and put spurs on them, fastening them in the saddle, the ●orse running about with them in the pasture, will make him endure the spur.  let it be in a new fallow field which lies upon stetches, and then trow: the Ring; and when you put spurs to him, forget not to help him with your voice or lips.  
How and when to use the spur, you may observe what is before spoken of the calf and heel.   

CHAP. CIV.  
Further Instructions concerning the ordering and riding of a Horse for Service, with the use of the Ring.  
NOw let us proceed further, 
Note you are to teach your horse only in the morning before he hath provender, not failing to ride him every day once, until he be perfect, afterwards twice a week will be sufficient.  to the instructing of horses, and fitting them for the employment of war; wherein the Rider must use great diligence in making him tread loftily to keep one path, and to troth clean, which is one of the chiefest points; then to go softly, to run or to gallop. Secondly, you must teach him to be light at stop: Thirdly, to advance or rise up with his fore legs. Fourthly, to turn readily upon both hands, with single turn or double turn. Fiftly, to make a sure and ready manage. Sixthly, to pass a swift career; for which purpose you must take a new fallowed land with deep furrows to make him lift up his feet; then trotting him right out about the length of a hundred paces cross the Ridges; then ride him a good way up one of the furrows, 
How to ●read out the Ring.  in such part of the land as will admit space enough; Then begin to turn on the right hand, making him easily tread out a round circle twice together, containing twenty five, or thirty paces; and being come about at the second time to the place you began; then tread out the like circle Ring on the left hand, after twice going about it; then begin again on the right hand, and so shift from Ring to Ring, treading each of them, twice about, until you have gone about the left Ring four times, and the right Ring six times; this being performed, 
Note the same Ring you beg●n with all, the same you must end with, whereby there is two turns difference of that hand you begin on.  troth him right out in the same furrow where he began first, the length of thirty paces.  
And then pulling in your Bridle hand, stop him, and stay a pretty while together, causing him to stand still, keeping his head and body right in the furrow; this being performed, then turn him softly on the right hand, and being come round again in to the same path, troth him back again into the place from whence first he came; 
At the first riding of the Ring the horse must be exercised in it eight days together.  then alight off his back, coying and encouraging him; this you must perform eight days together; but after that time is expired, you must increase his Ring turns, by two and by two, until he comes to twenty two (viz.) ten for the left Ring, 
The number of 22. Gryson saith, makes five large turns and a half; four goin● about, makes but one large turn.  and twelve for the right, the proportion of the Ring I have here drawn, whereby any man may perceive, both the Rings together with the furrows, and place of stopping and turning.  
If you find your horse not fitting but untoward and unable to tread out this Ring; then let some other horse that is perfect tread it out before him; and let him follow him; but if you tread it out yourself, do not troth your horse, but tread it out softly, until the way be beaten, that he may the better see how to demean himself, than afterwards to fall on with a gentle trot.  
But if your horse be over mettled, you shall not suffer him to troth the Rings at all, but only to tread them fair and softly, for two or three days together, until be be stayed and acquainted with them.  
If through often treading; 
Note it is dangerous to shift often your Rings, except necessity constrain you.  the Rings grow hard, then tread out new ones.  
When you come to manage your horse, or to pass a career, it is not then best to use one place always, or one length, lest he be to seek, when he change places, thinking he should not do it, in any other place; or that he should not pass his accustomed length, and so stop before you would have him.  
After you have ridden your horse a few weeks, you may increase your Ring turns every day two times, until he come to 46. which makes a leaven large turns and a half, (viz.) 22. for the left Ring, and 24. for the right.  
When soever you gallop your horse in the Ring, remember always to help him with your Voice, Rod, or Spur, according as the quality of the horse shall require, and when he doth well forget not to cherish him.  
When you have trotted or trod your number of Rings, that you shall see meet, then troth your horse right out in the furrow between the two rings, until you come to the place of stop, there staying a good pretty while together, keep his body right in the path: and after he hath made his stop, you must cause him to go back; three or four steps, which will not only stay his mouth, and make him easy rained; but also lift his legs, and be apt to advance, or rise before.  
To teach him to go back, you must so soon as he hath stopped, pull in your bridle hand moderately, according as the horses resistance shall require, so keeping your hand steady, without giving him any liberty, strike him softly upon the bowing of his neck with your riding rod, saying with a soft voice in that instant, back, back I say, thus being obsequious unto him a pretty while together, if he then will not move his legs, 
Note you may have a fellow stand at the place of stop, with a stick to Rap him on the knees, which will make him tread back.  or doth make resistance, then spur him in time, first with one spur, then with the other, but most of that side his hinder part stands out of order, when these things are performed, and your horse well versed in them, then at the stop you shall further teach him to advance or rise, with both his fore feet together three or four times, a foot or half a yard above the ground, this thing is so necessary that the horse cannot manage well, nor turn readily without this performance.  
If he will not advance by striking him at his stop on the right shoulder with your rod, 
How to teach a horse to rise before.  then keep still a steady hand, and correct him twice or thrice together with the even stroke of your spurs, or else with one spur after another, cherishing him with your voice, as saying hup, hup, or hoyce, immediately after troth him out again, the distance of forty or fifty foot, with a swift trot, and at the stop do as you did before, continuing the same course until he be perfect, likewise you may teach him the same devices upon his gallop.  
In the next place we are to take notice of the narrow and straight turns (having sufficiently spoken of the former large turns) of the narrow turns there are three kinds (viz.) half turns, 
Of the narrow turns there are three kinds described.  whole turns, and double turns.  
The half turn is when the Horse turneth on the one side, and setteth his head the way his Tail before stood, the way he goes being but half a Circle, but if he doubles it and goes the whole circumference of the Circle, his head will stand as it did at his first setting out, and this is called a whole turn, and two such whole turns will make a double turn, 
Divers considerations in turns.  in these turns diverse things are to be considered.  
First that the horse brings in the contrary leg upon the other, and that he carries his legs neither too high nor too low, also that he keepeth always one path: and that he neither presseth forwards not reeleth backwards in his turning, also that he keepeth his body at one stay, not any ways awry, neither head, neck, nor any part of his body, but to come in whole and round together, and to close his turns, in so narrow a room as may be.  
When you are come out of your Ring, 
Remember always to begin your Ring on your right hand, and likewise on the same hand to end it.  troth your horse right out in the middle furrow, unto the place of stop, and having stopped; turn your horse fair and softly on the right hand, taking circumference enough: that being done give him the like turn on the left hand, and then return him again; (as before) on the right hand.  
Note when he is to turn on the right hand, he is to bring his left foot over the right foot before, which is performed by helping him with your voice, in saying to him turn here; and by striking him with your rod, moderately upon the left shoulder.  
Likewise when you turn him on the left hand, 
How your horse should order his feet at his first turning to either hand.  help him with your voice as before, and with your rod on the right shoulder, to bring in the right fore foot over the left fore foot.  
If your horse be harder to turn on one side than on the other, you must help him with the contrary leg or spur, or with your rod by beating him on the contrary shoulder.  
And to make him close truly, it shall be needful to help him with your closing stroke of your heel and Spur. Further if your Horse be so stiff necked and wresty that he will turn upon one hand and not upon the other, you shall tread out in new ploughed Land another fashioned Ring, as beneath is figured, which both differs in shape, and in the order of treading from the former.  

Another fashioned Ring to cause a horse to turn perfectly as well upon one hand as upon another.   
For whereas you were wont before in the former figure to go twice about in the right ring, following still the right hand; and then to go twice about the left ring, following then the left hand: Now in this last ring you shall go three times about each of them following still the right hand in both of them, and whereas before four goings about made a large turn, now six goings about, shall do no more than make a large turn, 
In this second figure six goings about makes but a large turn, the reasons of it are described.  the reason is this, if you should go out of the right ring at the second turn, for to enter into the left ring and would follow still the right hand (as you must do) than you shall lack a good deals of closing the second turn, as you may perceive by this last figure in the right ring; where the place is marked (that you should go out of, for to enter into the left wing) with the letter A. and the place of closing your turn with the letter B. betwixt which two letters is contained the portion of a Circle, which will be wanting, wherefore of necessity you must go thrice about, to the intent the second turn may be fully ended, as for any overplusse it makes no matter.  
To this last ring, is also added a middle furrow with two places of stops and turnings, 
The last Ring fully described.  meet to manage a horse, trotting him there in the length of a good Career, and having made him stop and advance, make much of him and stay a good while, and until he hath mended his fault of not turning which way you would have him; you must with your bridle hand, shorten one Rain of that side he desires he should turn upon, 
An observation how to make a horse turn to what hand you please.  then having a foot man standing against him with a stick in his hand, and as you move your fist to turn your horse, on that side he is unwilling to turn upon, at that same instant shall strike him upon the nose, not leaving him until he turns: Likewise making use of his voice to provoke him; then being turned and trotted the uppermost ring round, you must return back in the same furrow again, even hard to the second little ring, and there likewise let a man stand as before is showed, to strike him upon the stop, and cause him to turn upon the right hand, which hand a horse must always first turn upon, but if he be harder to turn on the left hand than on the right, then begin in first with the left Ring observing the order and directions before expressed.  
Likewise with a Cord fastened to the middle eye of the bit, 
How to make a horse turn upon what hand you please.  on the side he will not turn upon, and tie the other end unto the Sursingle, on the same side straining it pretty hard to make him bow his neck: thus chase him round in the Circle, diverse times unloosen the cord and hold it in that hand which is next the side he will not turn upon in stead of a false rain, then troth him forth the length of twenty or thirty paces, and there stop, where one must stand with a rod threatening him; and if need be, beating him upon the contrary side to cause him to turn; and the rider straining the cord a little will make him perform it. 
Forget not to help him with the sound of your tongue.   
Then troth him back, and cause him to perform the like, using the same means a fore prescribed.   

CHAP. CV.  
How to manage a Horse for Service, four kinds of ways.  
IN this next progress we are to observe four kinds of managing a Horse to fit him for service.  
First when you make your Horse double his turns.  
Secondly when you gallop the field, making him wave in and out, as is used in single skirmish.  
Thirdly when you make him leap a loft, fetching diverse saltes or curveates; but this is not so proper to teach to a horse for service.  
Fourthly when you pace, 
Three things observable in the word Manage.  trot, and gallop, him too and fro in one path, the length of twenty or thirty paces, turning him at each end thereof, either with single turn, whole turn, or double turn, (this is termed manage) and in this word there is three things observable, as first the manage with half rest, that is to cause your horse at the end of every managing path, to stop and then to advance twice together, and at the second bound to turn, whereby you rest one bound.  
The manage with the whole r●st, 
A very strong Horse requires the manage with the whole rest, and a horse of indifferent strength the half, and the weak horse the manage without rest.  is when you turn him at the third bound, and so you rest two bounds, the managing without rest, is when you turn him immediately upon the stop, without any tarriance at all, which is most in use with us.  
Note when your Horse turneth upon the right Hand, turn you your left shoulder towards his left ear, keeping your body upright in the Saddle, so that the raynes of your back may directly answer the ridgbone of the horses back, never the less when you feel him to bend his hinder houghs, then lean you somewhat backwards, for that will make him close his turn the more roundly and swiftly, likewise when he turns on the left hand accompany him with your right shoulder towards his right ear, 
A great horse must be rid the shortest Career, and a middling slight horse the longer although not much.  observing as before.  
Your horse being perfect in all points before mentioned you shall ride him into some plain sandy way, void of all occasions of stumbling, and to acquaint him with the way, place him fair and softly the length of a good Career, which must be measured out according to the strength and quality of the horse.  
At the end of the Career path, let your Horse stop and advance, and at the second bound; 
Three things of note in a Career, first that the horse gathers roundly, secondly that he runs swiftly, thirdly that he stops easily.  turn him fair and softly upon the right hand, and so stay a little while then suddenly with a lively voice, crying hay, hay, put him forwards with both Spurs at once, forcing him to run all the path as swift as possibly may be, just up to the end, to the intent he may stop on his buttocks; this being performed turn him upon the left hand, and place him forth fair and softly, unto the other end of the Career path, and there stop him, and turn him again upon the right hand, as you did before and so leave him.  
Note there is no better way to bring a horse to this, than by using him to tread the ring with a very swift trot, which will make him nimble of his legs, and so swift and stayed of head, 
When your Horse can run the Career do not exercise him in it above once in two months at most.  that coming afterwards to be run, it shall be easy to him to perform; this was observed by that famous Rider Cola Pagano, who would never run his horse until he saw him well stayed of head, and well broken, for although a horse may be half a year in breaking, yet in eight days he may be taught to run and stop in a most perfect manner.  
Likewise to teach your horse to go side ways, (it being a thing of much consequence in the wars) you must perform it thus, as namely you desire to have him go side longs towards the left hand, you must bear your bridle even and steady: and clap your right leg close to his belly, and hold it there still, making him feel the spur on the right side; if he moveth his body that way you desire, then suddenly pull away your leg from thence, and make much of him, that being performed make him do as much with your left leg; and leaving to molest him on either side until he understands your meaning, thus with a little exercise, so soon as he shall feel you stay your bridle hand, and touch him with your leg or spurs, on the contrary side he will go side ways, so much, or so little as you will have him.  
Likewise to make him keep his head always towards the Enemy, 
An excellent way to 〈…〉 to fit him for a single fight with the enemy.  being in fight at single duel; you must make him go sidewayes with his hind part only, and his fore part stand party steady, to perform this you must turn your bridle hand somewhat on that side you touch him, likewise you must help him with your rod, by striking him therewith on the contrary flank behind.  
Further take notice the carriage of your Horse's head is a matter of no small consequence; his forehead being the strongest part of his head; his snought or mussel the weakest and tenderest; 
The excellent properties of a horse, well 〈◊〉, described.  the more he thrusteth out his mussel, the more he distendeth his back, and beareth the less force in his actions; and it is impossible he should ever make good Manage, observe time, keep order, or continue in breath, any space of time together; whereas by bringing in his mussel and extending his forehead, he uniteth his force together, and gathereth his strength in his back, whereby he becometh more nimble in his actions.  
Secondly, he shall see his way the better, and be in less danger of falling in running; and if he should chance to fall he is the abler to rise speedily.  
Thirdly, in his performances against an enemy, he shall be able to execute, or suffer more with his forehead, than can be expected from his Mussel, being the tenderest part of him.  
Fourthly he cannot be so apt to be urged right forwards upon a sudden, as otherwise he might do.  
Lastly the Horse that Raynes well, and bringeth in his head shall always be better stayed, both of head and neck, and have a better mouth than otherwise.  
Wherefore if your horse will not bring in his head at any time when you stop him with your bridle hand, 
The means to compel a horse to rain well described.  then holding your hand still at that stay, correct him sometimes with your right Spur, and sometime with your left, and sometimes with both your spurs at once; and at the self same instant thrust him with your right hand upon the neck towards his ears; to force him to bring in his head, but if he will not yield with that, then by pulling your bridle towards you, cause him to go back, some three paces, and then to return fair and softly to his first place; this being put in action diverse times together; and every time he thrusteth out his nose correct him as before is showed.  
Moreover if your horse by wresty, 
A devise to make a wresty Horse go forwards.  so as he cannot be put forwards; then let one take a Cat tied by the tail to a long pole, and when he goes backwards thrust the Cat towards his stones, where she may claw him, and forget not to threaten your horse with a terrible Noise: or otherwise take a Hedgehog and tie him straight by one of his feet to the inside of the horses tail, so that he may squeak and prick him.  
Likewise if your horse be fearful and shy, 
How to make a shy horse gentle.  so that he is afraid of every thing he sees, you must take heed that in no wise you correct him for it, lest he should take the thing he beholdeth and shuneth, to be the cause of his chastisements, and so become more fearful than before, but rather stay a while and do not force him forwards, but by gentle means make him by little and little approach near the thing he fears, which if he performs, cherish him with your speech and hand, and you shall set by standing still sometimes to look on it, and sometimes by going towards the object he fears, he will be so acquainted therewith as he will not fear it, and when he cometh at it, let him gaze and smell on it a good while, to the intent he may be more assured thereof.  
Further to embolden your horse to make him hardy in the wars, you must use to encounter upon a soft pace or troth, 
How to make a horse hardy and bold in the wars.  with another horse man face to face, in one path, but beware they dos●e not one the other, but rather let the adverse horse be compelled back a few steps which will hearty the other, or if you please you may encounter one with the other, riding in two sundry paths, the one coming cheek by cheek within a foot of the other, the paths being both of a just length; each of them containing about ten paces, to the intent in managing your horse too and fro upon a trot, you coming one towards another, from two contrary ends, may both meet right in the midst of your course passing one by another, which you cannot choose but do if you keep true time, as well in their trotting as in their ●urning, also not forgetting, upon what hand soever the one turneth, the other must do the same, 
By trotting the Ring you may embolden your Horse.  and in the self same instant. Moreover when you troth the Ring, you may embolden your horse, by entering both together into the Right Ring, then turning your horse tail to tail, follow you the right hand, and let him follow the left in the same Ring, the ring path being so enlarged, that at your meeting in riding it about you may not touch one the other.  
Having ridden thus about twice, you may enter the left ring, and do as before was showed.   

CHAP. CVI  
How to make a Horse endure Pike, Sword, Gunshot, Drum and the like.  
IN this Chapter we are to deal with the difficultest matter of all; and that is now to make a Horse abide Pike, Gunshot, Sword, Drum, and the clattering of Armour, or to run upon any hazard, to perform this you must acquaint him throughly with the rod or truntion, so as he may not fear it; sometimes coying him therewith upon the Neck, and by holding the point right forth by his eye, or betwixt his ears, so as it may be always in his sight, and being throughly assured of the rod, then appoint a foot man, having a staff in his hand or pike, to stand in your way as you should pass, and as you approach, let the footman by little and little make signs, seeming to strike your horse upon the head, then encourage your horse to go on towards the footman, who at the same instant must retreat back as if he would flee, in doing this you shall much embolden him.  
Likewise to make him abide the sword, a footman must perform it in the same manner as he did with the Pike, but be ware he strikes him not.  
After this, cause half a dozen footmen or more to stand in his way, making a gre●t shouting and noise, threatening him with their loud voices, against whom you must encourage him to go forwards; first with a soft pace, secondly with a trot, thirdly with a gallop; at which time let the footmen retreat, feigning to run away, also let them threaten them with their staves, Pikes or swords.  
To make him dure Gunshot, Drum, or clattering of Armour; or any hideous noise whatsoever; let your horse go hard by another horse, or rather betwixt two other horses, that are accustomed to the like noise, and are not afraid, and as you ride together cause three or four Pistols to be discharged, first a good distance off, then nearer hand, according as your horse beginneth to abide them; during which time forget not to make much of him.  
Likewise every morning before he is dressed discharge a Musket or two, and sound a Trumpet, and beat a charge with your drum, and then when he is patient feed him and cherish him, the Groom may sometime dress him in bright armour, he may be used to eat his Oats from off the Drum head, you may ride him against an armour, placed upon a stake, that he may overthrow it, and trample it under his feet: Every horseman that doth not observe these brief observations, and fit himself and his horse in all respects before he come to be trained, they will prove both unfit for service; neither would I wish any Captain to approve either of man or horse, that in some reasonable manner, hath not attained to this perfection; for an Ox well Managed may in possibility do better service than an ill ridden wresty horse; neither can any security or reputation be expected by any service they shall undertake if the Officers be not diligent to see their Troops well ordered and demeaned.  
Thus premising every Horseman is or will be in this nature qualified, we will proceed to the Exercising of private Troops, and briefly show all their Postures, and how they ought to be imbattelled; but first it is necessary to give a touch about the several kind of arming both of Curassiers, Harquebuzires, Carabines, and Dragoones, as followeth.   

CHAP. CVII.  
How the horse Troops ought to be divided and distinguished by their several arms, apt and fit for diverse services, and what proportion of Cavalry ought to be joined with the Infantry.  
WE are to understand how our Generals of late ages have divided their horse Troops into four several kinds, proper for diverse Services, and accordingly, their armings are suitable to their Offices; as 

The arming of the 

C●irassier.  
Harquebuzier.  
Carbine.  
Dragoone. 

is chiefly 

Defensive.  
Offensive.  
Offensive and Defensive.          
The light armed which are the Harquebuziers, Carabines and Dragoones are employed to begin a charge against the Infantry, 
The Dragoones are the fittest to give the on set because they do their execution at a further distance.  upon flank and rear at once, (the Front is dangerous if the two armies of foot be ready to join) then the heavy armed (viz.) the Cuirassiers shall take the advantage of such disorders as are procured by the light armed; for their complete arming is efficatious to defend their bodies from the push of pikes; the better to thrust in amongst them: The light armed are also more apt and fit to be sent upon services that require expedition, which the heavy armed are unfit to perform; for the Cuirassier is to be completely armed, Capapè, with a good Buff coat, to preserve his body from the pinching of his ponderous armour; his horse is to be fifteen hand high and upwards; he is also to have his Bedee Nag, and a Boy to carry his Arms and Snapsack, and to get him forage for his horses; his Saddle and Bit must be strong and good, whereunto must be fixed upon each side of it a case of good Firelocke Pistols, 
The Firelocke is ●●rest to give fire, and not so apt to be out of 〈◊〉; beside they will endure Sp●nd 24. hours together without hurting them.  the barrel being full eighteen inches long, and the bore of twenty or twenty four bullets in the pound, with his Spanner and flask boxes a good sword and a scarf over his arms to distinguish him from the enemy. His service in the wars is chiefly defensive.  
As for the proportion which the horse should bear to the foot, there are diverse of sundry opinions, but the Prince of Orange used to allow three to ten, or twelve at most (viz.) 3000. horse to 1000 or 12000. foot, and every troop consisting of five score horse, which are ordered twenty in rank, and five deep in file; the which custom they use the rather, because of the scarcity of their horse; and again they are opiniated that in regard each horse man hath two Pistols, they may perfect their fight, as well as a Troop of Musquetiers that are ten deep in ●yle, having but one Musket apiece: but from this hath proceeded many inconveniences, as Captain Beumount hath observed: wherefore his advice was to have the horse Troops consist of six score; so they may be ranked twenty in breast, and six deep in file, they being then more apt, and proper to double their ranks; whereby their front may be extended; or if (being in skirmish with the enemy) any shot should be drawn out to give fire upon them in the rear; then the two hindmost ranks of a horse, may peckiere about and put them to retreat▪ and the four foremost ranks in the front may be the better able to prosecute their fight; wherefore my discourse shall be to show you how the Troops consisting of 120. horse ranked, twenty in breast, and six deep in file shall be exercised and fitted for the wars, and leave it to the judicious Commander to take his choice.   

CHAP. CVIII.  
How the Harquebuziers and the Carbines ought to demean themselves.  
THese kind of horse men are to be armed with an open Cask, Gorget, back and breast more than Pistol proof, with good Buff coat to preserve their bodies from bruising: Their Harquebusses are to be two foot and a half in length, their bores of seventeen bullets to the pound; about their necks a strong leather Belt, with a Swivell to hang the Ring of their pieces upon a Flask and Touch box and Pistols like to the Cuirassiers: Their horses ought not to be under the size of fifteen hands in height; when they pass by the General, or Troop through the streets of a town, they place the but end upon their right thigh, and their right hand grasping the barrel towards the midst of it, the lock towards their bodies; otherwise in their march, if the enemy be not near, they hang down by their sides.  
Likewise the Carbine requires a smaller horse, a fair Buff coat; his Carabine twenty seven inches long, the bore of twenty four bullets to the pound; and he is to demean himself upon all points like the Harquebus having his sword in a strong belt; Flask and touch box.   

CHAP. CIX.  
How the Dragoones ought to arm and demean themselves.  
THe Dragoones are no less than a foot company, consisting of Pikes and Muskets, only for their quicker expedition they are mounted upon horses they are of great use for the guarding of passages and fords, in regard of their swiftness they may prevent the enemy's foot, and gain places of advantage to hinder their passage.  
Their Pikes are to have thongs of leather about the middle of them, for the easier carriage of them.  
The Muskets are to have a broad strong belt fastened to the stock of them, well near from one end to the other, whereby he hangs it upon his back when he rideth, holding his match and bridle in his left hand: any horse if he be swift will perform this service, in regard they alight and do their service a foot; so that when ten men alight, the eleventh holdeth their horses; so that to everytroope of 120. there is 132. men allowed.   

CHAP. CX.  
How a single Troop of horse ought to be drawn into Rank and File.  
NOw it remains we should make entrance into the discourse of Exercising a single Troop; Therefore supposing our Troop to consist of one hundred and twenty horse, we must first order them into Ranks and Files.  
Ranks are a number uncertain, 
Description of a Rank.  and hapens according to the quantity of soldiers, be they more or less.  
A File is a number certain consisting of six persons (viz) a Leader, 
Description of a File.  two Middle men, a Bringer up, a Follower between the Leader, and the Middleman to the Rear; and a Follower between the Middleman to the Front, and the Bringer up, which is the last man in the File called the Rear.  
A File differs from a Rank, because they stand face to back, and never above six deep.  
A Rank differs from a File, in regard they stand even a breast, shoulder to shoulder, and have no certain extent.  
The order of a File you shall see in this description following.  

0 Leader.  
1 Follower.  
0 Middleman to the Rear.  
0 Middleman to the Front.  
1 Follower.  
0 Bringer up.   
The description of a Rank you shall understand by this demonstation following; where you shall suppose twenty in Rank, and six deep in File.  
Six in File. 
Twenty in length.   
Rear.   

CHAP. CXI.  
What Orders and distances a horse Troop should observe in exercise.  
NOw let us take notice what Orders or Distances these Files and Ranks are to observe; in exercising, where note, that in horse Troops, there are but two sorts of distances or orders, either in Rank or File, (viz.) close order, and open order.  
Close Order in Files is knee to knee.  
Open Order in Files is six foot, which is accounted a horses length.  
Likewise close Order in Ranks, is to the Horse's crupper; so that little or no distance remains between the head of the Follower and the crupper of the Leader.  
Likewise open order in Ranks is six foot, above which they must never open.   

CAAP. CXII.  
The motions which the Cavalry are to observe in their exercise.  
THe Motions of the cavalry are of four kinds, as namely, first, Face; secondly, Doubling; thirdly, Countermarches; fourthly, Wheelings.  
The use of Facing is to make the company perfect, to be suddenly prepared for a charge; on either of the Flanks or the Rear.  
Doubling of Ranks; or doubling by half Files, or Bringers up, is used upon occasion of strengthening the Front.  
Doubling of Files, or Doubling by half Ranks, serveth to strengthen the Flanks.  
Countermarches, serve either to reduce the Fileleaders, into the place of the Bringers up; and so to have the best men ready to receive the charge of an Enemy in the Rear; or to bring one Flank into the place of the other: or Front, and Rear, or either Flank into the middle of the body.  
The use of Wheeling, is to bring the Front, (which) is all ways supposed to consist of the ablest men to be ready to receive the charge of the Enemy; on either Flank, or Rear.   

CHAP. CXIII.  
The Manner how a Commander over 120. Horse, besides Officers, should Troop with them into the Field to be exercised.  
NOw we are to suppose this Troop of 120. horsemen are to be ordered in Ranke and File; fit to draw into the Field for exercise; where note they are five in Rank, and six deep in File, and every Officer marching in his due place, as appears by this subsequent demonstration.  

Captain.  
Trumpet. 
That the Troop may move orderly, and keep their distances truly; let the whole Troop move all at an instant, (viz.) when the Front moves, than the Rear to be ready, so shall they be seldom found to err.   
Cornet. 
In Marching or Trooping through a Town, forget not to have your Pieces spanned, and holding them in your hand, with their mouths upwards, and the butt end resting upon your thigh.   
Eld. Corporal.  
Second Corporal.  
Youngest Corporal.  
Lieutenant.  
Trumpet.    

CHAP. CXIV.  
How a Commander should draw this Troop of Horse into a body in manner of Battalia standing at their open Order or Distance of six foot.  
YOur Troop of horse being drawn into the Field, before you can exercise them; you must draw up the dimissions into an even body, in manner of Battallia; (viz.) the first division, led by the Captain, being come to a convenient place of Exercise, is to stand firm.  
Then the Cornet is to lead up the second Division upon the left side of the former, fronting even, and keeping even destances both in Rank and File.  
Thirdly, the Eldest Corporal is to lead up his Division upon the left side of the Cornets, fronting them even with the former.  
Lastly, the second Corporal brings up his last Division upon the left hand of the eldest corporal, observing their due orders and proportions both in Ranks and Files.  
And being thus drawn in Battallia there shall be consequently be in the Front; the Captain whose place is to stand upon the right hand before the Front of the first Division.  
The eldest Trumpet and Cornet before the Front of the second Devisions  
The eldest Corporal before the Front of the third Division.  
The second Corporal before the Front of the fourth Division.  
And in the Rear, the Lieutenant, the youngest Corporal, and youngest Trumpet.  
Trumpet.  
Second Corporal. Eldest Corporal. Cornet. Captain.  
Front. 
The Figure of the four Divisions drawn into Battallia.   
Rear.  
Lieutenant. Trumpet. Corporal.   

CHAP. CXV.  
How Soldiers are to be made to understand their Commander's intention in time of skirmish.  
BEfore we can proceed to the Exercising of this Troop of Horse; we must take notice how and by what means the soldiers should understand their Commander's 〈◊〉, that accordingly they may immediately act and put in execution, such things as are commanded: And this is to be performed by the Commander three several ways.  
First, by the immediate command of the Captain, either so that every soldier hears the word of Command distinctly himself, or by Tradition from inferior Officers, whose office is to echo such commands throughout the Troop, and this is termed vocal.  
Secondly, when the Captain commands the Trumpet to sound such points of war as are generally known to every particular soldier; this is termed Semivocall.  
The first point of war the Trumpet sounds, 
The distinctions of the sounds of Trumpet described.  is (Butt Sella) this is the warning to clap on the Saddles.  
The second is (Mountè Cavallo) that is the warning for the soldiers to mount upon horse back.  
The third is (Tucquet) that is the warning for a March.  
The fourth is (Carga, Carga) that is a command for to charge the Enemy.  
The fifth is (Al● Stand●rdo) that is a command for to retreat to the Colours.  
The sixth and last is (Auquet) that is a command for the soldiers to repair to their Watch or Guards, or for the discharging of the Watch or Guards.  
In the third place when the Commander shall make such perfect signs pregnant to the sight; as by charging with his Trun●ion, or Pistol, or by holding up the colours; whereby the soldiers take notice by the first to charge on; and by the second to make a stand; and this is termed Mute; wherefore you may perceive it is a thing of great consequence to accustom your soldiers to these things, without which a world of inconveniences, and confusion must of necessity betid you in times of skirmishing.  
Further, in regard the exercising a Troop of Horse is tedious and painful for a Captain to perform; it shall prove very convenient to take some extraordinary pains in making every Fileleaders most perfect in their Postures and Motions, and then every particular File-Leader shall teach and instruct the residue of his File in the same manner; from whence will arise such an emulation between each File, who shall be most expert, and make the best performances, that in a short space they will transcend in their Military discipline. These things being thus performed, and the Troop drawn in Battallia, as befor● is deciphered; then the Commander at his ease and pleasure may exercise them in gross, in this Subsequent form.   

CHAP. CXVI.  
The Description of the Postures for the Cavalry, which every Officer is to teach his Soldiers before they can be fit for Service.  
FOrmerly I have showed you how to backe your Horse, to use his Rains, to ride him in the best and aprovedst way for Service, now it remains before you exercise them in their Motions, to show them first their postures: and premising that a Horseman cannot fit himself for exercise; or to execute any Service, unless he be first mounted on horseback, completely armed as formerly is taught, therefore I will omit those things; and begin with the first posture according to the Netherlandish rules, the words of command follow▪ viz. 

1. Vncap your Pistols. 

This posture is performed by turning down the Caps of the Pistol cases with your right hand.    
2. Draw forth your Pistol. 

You are to draw your Pistol out of the case, with your right hand; the left Pistol first, in regard it is most trouble some for the right hand to draw, and at first there is most time to perform it, being drawn, mount the Muzzle of it.    
3. Order your Pistol. 

You are to sink your Pistol into your Bridle hand, and instantly remove your right hand towards the midst of it, and then rest the But end upon the right thigh.    
4. Span your Pistol. 

This is performed by sinking the Pistol into his Bridle hand, and taking the Spanner in his right hand, to put it upon the Axletree, and winding about the wheel till it stick, and then to return the Spanner to his place, which most usually'st hangs about their necks in a silken string, or placed in the case.    
5. Prime your Pan. 

Your Pistol being held in your Bridle hand, not far above the lock, you are to take your priming box in your right hand, (and pressing the spring with your fore finger to open the box) to put powder into the Pan.    
6 Shut your Pan. 

You are to press in your Pan pin, with your right thumb whereby it will easily close.    
7. Cast about your Pistol. 

You are to assume the Pistol in your bridle hand, and casting it about against the left side, erecting the mouth of it.    
8. Gage your Flask. 

You are to take the flask into your right hand, and with your fore finger pull back the Spring, and turning the Mouth of the Flask downward, you are to let go the Spring.    
9 Lad your Pistol. 

Having gauged your Flask (as in the former posture) you are to press down the Spring, which openeth the Flask with your fore finger, then placing the mouth of it in your Pistol, give it a shogge to cause the powder to proceed.    
10. Draw out your Rammer. 

You are to draw out your Gunsticke with your right hand turned, and to shorten the great end of it against your breast, whereby you may the easier put it to the mouth of your piece for to ram it.    
11. Lad with Bullet and Ram home. 

Holding your Rammer head in your right hand (as before) you are to take the Bullet out of your mouth with your Thumb and fore finger; and so put it into the mouth of the Pistol, and immediately ram it home.    
12. Return your Rammer. 

You are to draw forth your Rammer with your right hand turned (and shortening it against your breast as before) return it to its place.    
13. Pull down your Cock. 

You are to bring back the Pistol with your Bridle hand, towards your right side; and placing the Butt end, upon your right thigh you may pull down the Cock.    
14. Recover your Pistol. 

You are to take your Pistol in his due place, with your right hand bearing up the Muzzle.    
15. Present, and give fire. 

Having your Pistol in your right hand, with your finger upon the tricker, you are to incline the Muzzle (with a steady eye) towards the Mark, not suddenly but by degrees, according to the distance you ride, before a necessity of discharging shall be, you are not to give fire directly forwards the horse's head, but in a diameter line, by his right side, turning his right hand so as the lock of the Pistol may be upward, and having a true view of the Mark, draw the tricker and let fly.    
16. Return your Pistol. 

You are to return the Pistol into the Case, and speedily draw out your other Pistol, (if occasion commands) making the same performances as before.    
17. Bend your Cock. 

Now in regard our English Pistols differ from the firelocke Pistol, I will briefly touch two or three postures that are Heterogeneal to the former.  
And as before is taught, the holding of your Pistol in your bridle hand; now to perform this posture you are to place your two fore fingers of your right hand upon the vice pin that sk●ues in the stone, and by it to draw up the Cock.    
18. Guard your Cock. 

With your Right hand you are to pull down the back lock, and then be careful in securing the Cock, from striking down.    
19 Order your Hammer. 

You are gently to draw down your ste●ele upon the Pan with your right hand; provided always there be a good flint, and that it be evenly measured, lest it under or over reacheth, which may hazard the firing.    
20. Free your Cock. 

You are to thrust back your back lock with your thumb and fore finger of your right hand, so as the Cock may be let down without danger of staying it from giving fire.       

CHAP. CXVII.  
Of the exercising of the Harquebuz and Carabine with the Postures to them belonging, and diverse brief rules appertaining to the use of them as also to Cuirassiers.  
HAving discoursed of the managing of the Pistol, in his several postures; it will seem convenient here by the way to observe some brief notes, concerning the use and managing both of Pistols, Harquebusses, and Carabines; and then only name the Postures belonging to the Harquebuz, and Carabine, that go with Snaphanes.  
The quickest and most compendious way of charging either the Pistols belonging to the Cuirassiers; or other Pieces of what kind soever, is by using of Cazrouches, which are made of white paper after this manner following. First you are to have a former of wood of the just wideness of your Pistols bore, about this you are to wind a Paper, 
The proportion of powder usually required for a true charge of any piece, is almost half the weight in powder of the bullet.  which shall contain the true charge of powder and Bullet, the ends must be tied with a thread and in the midst betwixt the powder and the Bullet, when you are to use them, you are to bite of the end of the Paper close to the powder and so put it into the Barrel of your Pistol ramming it down close so as the powder may take at the Touchhole by this means a Soldier shall be far readier in his postures, you are also to observe that the arms of the Cuirassiers are Pistol proof; wherefore that Soldier that encounters against them must be sure not to shot until he be within three or four paces: 
Some will not have a Cuirassiere to give fire until he hath placed his Pistol under his enemy's armour.  the Hollanders use to discharge their Pistols at the enemy's ear, as a place most certain to speed them; others at the lower part of the Belly, or his arm Pits or about the neck or throat; a Cuirassiere usually giveth this charge upon the trot, and very seldom upon the Gallop, if you miss the speeding of the man, than you are to direct your next charge against the Horse, 
You may place the Pommel of your Sword upon your right thigh and directing it with your right hand to the place you intent to hit, viz. the belly or arm pits or his throat.  where you shall be sure to speed him either upon the head or breast; the sword is to be managed after you have done your endeavours with the Pistol; and the principal thing required is to disable your adversary by hacking a two the Raynes of his bridle, or the Buckles of his Pouldrons, whereby he shall be disabled from making any resistance.  
The Cuirassire, in fight is to strive to gain the right side of his Enemy being most proper to discharge his Pistols against him.  
The Harquebuziers and Carabines, must contrarily strive to get the left side of of their Enemies, because that in presenting he is to rest his Carabine upon his Bridle hand, 
They must be taught to be excellent marks-men, for the manner of handling them, the directions of the Pistol may serve for instruction.  placing the Butt end upon the right side of his breast near his shoulder.  
Our Modern Generals think it best to order the Cuirassiers in gross Bodies, by which means they are more powerful and strong, against the shock of the enemy, they are for the most part reserved to second the light armed; so that when they are broken they may have shelter, and time to reunite themselves behind the Cuirassiers.  
Note that in a pitched Battle if the enemy's Ordnance be planted upon some hill so advantageous that they may annoy the Horse troops; then the horse are to be drawn into some place of security, or into the Rear of your Battle of the Infantry; until such time as their Ordnance be intercepted by certain disbanded Troops both of Horse and Foot, sent for that purpose; as for the Postures of the Harquebuz and Carabine, they may receive their instruction from the Cuirassiers; yet in regard most of our pieces go with English locks, which differ from firelocks, you shall find here underneath the order of handling them with the words of Command.  

The Postures belonging to the Snaphane Carabine ut sequit.  
1. Order your Carabine.  
2. Sink your Carabine into your Bridle hand.  
3. Bend your Cock.  
4. Guard your Cock.  
5. Prime.  
6. Shut your Pan.  
7. Cast about your Carabine.  
8. Gage your Flask.  
9 Lad your Carabine.  
10. Draw your Rammer.  
11. Shorten your Rammer.  
12. Lude with Bullet and Ram 〈◊〉▪  
13. Withdraw your Rammer.  
14. Shorten your Rammer.  
15. Return your Rammer.  
16. Recover your Carabine.  
17. Order your Hammer.  
18. Free your Cock.  
19 Present.  
20. Give Fire.    

CHAP. CXVIII.  
Of the Excellent Service which may be performed by the Dragoones here in our Island of England.  
AS for the Dragoones, their Service and use of arms doth so nearly corespond with the Postures of the Infantry, to which postures I altogether refer them.  
They were invented for special services, to assist both the Cavalry and Infantry, for there are many exploits which cannot be effected by the Cavalry alone.  
The Musquetei●es are to exercise themselves to give fire on horseback, in the same fashion as the Harquebuzirs ought to do.  
Being come to Guard a passage or to do any other the like Service; they are to alight and demean themselves as infantry, as in divers places in this book you may read, only here by the way I will show how necessary it were, to breed and train up certain companies of them in this our Kingdom, which being an Island, and the chiefest of our Land forces far remote from the Maritime places, where an enemy may possibly land, which will be troublesome, and require much time to March to our Coast side with our foot troops, and when we are arrived; with the strength of our Land thinking to encounter with them;  
The Enemy may easily delude us by the advantage of a dark night or misty day which may so favour them, that by rebarking themselves, and setting sail, by the next night they may be landed on the other side of the Kingdom, which were a thing impossible to March to them with our Army to oppose them; but these Dragoones may easily cross the Kingdom, and may suddenly arrive in any place thereof to assist such Forces, as that Coast shall be able to raise.  
And although we should admit of that Noble Gentleman's advice, 
Edmund's observation upon C●sars Com.  which was to divide the Forces of certain adjacent Counties, into three divisions; making an entire army of the one half of them: entrenching them near the place suspected for greatest danger for conveniency of landing them; as he exemplifies it by Fulkestone in Kent, where he would have lodged 6000. men, then upon the right wing twelve miles distant from this body, being the point of Nesse, he would have 3000. men lodged, and upon the left wing 12. miles distant, being the Town of Margate, he would have 3000. more lodged; and so accordingly to engirt the whole Island, by this they should mutually give help one to another: so that if the body of this army being 6000. men, should be distressed, than the two wings were speedily to repair to their succour; or if any of the wings then the body of the army were to March speedily to their aid: Questionless this is a singular project, and no reason can contradict it, if we have men sufficient to engirt the Island round; but that cannot be expected, in regard that his Majesty must of necessity have a standing Army in the Heart of the Kingdom, composed of the Principal Gentry and Yeomanry, to be in readiness if the Enemy should give a repulse, and overthrow those Maritime Forces, or if any Domestic enemy should treacherously draw a head to side wit● them; this standing Army will dishearten them, and be a means to corroberate our own men which otherwise would be much dejected, and happily many of them so base (being overwhelmed with the present disasters) that they would turn to the Enemy and compound their own safeties, as was well seen at the Landing of William the Conqueror, after he had discomfited the Army of King Herald, 
In those Kingdoms that are fortified with strong Garrison Towns, there shall need no such arm●, for those towns are ready to perform the same Office that this Army should do.  which was but a handful of the Forces which might have been afterwards raised to have given the enemy a second Battle, or otherwise have defended the Land by delaying the Enemy: but fear had so wonderfully surprised the Natives, that immediately they compounded their own safeties, which had there been a powerful Army in the heart of the Kingdom, to have kept them in obedience, that they might have strengthened their dejected conceits, upon their hope of victory which might possibly have been gained by this Army, the Lords Spiritual and Temporal would never have yielded themselves with the City of London to the mercy of the Conqueror, but this is only by the way.  
Now these Troops of Dragoones being well exercised and practised as they ought, let any sensible man judge if they shall not prove in time of need most useful in regard of their speedy March.   

CHAP. CXIX.  
The Order of Exercising a Horse Troop in their Motions being drawn in Battalia.  
TO pretermit all further circumstances; (presupposing that every Soldier is perfect in his postures) it is now high time to draw out in Battalia; (as before is demonstrated) that they may the better be exercised in Grose, and the more commodiously taught their Motions which every Soldier (using silence) is to perform according as he shall be commanded, as this following figure doth demonstrate; where note there are ●20. horse drawn in Battalia ready to be exercised and standing at their open order of six foot, being the space of ground allowed between horse and horse.  
Front. 
* The form of their standing in Battalia ready for exercise. To cause them to face to the right hand is performed by commanding.   
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h  
Right Flank.  
Rear. 
* To the right hand, This motion is performed by turning (all at once, and the same time) to the right hand. Thus the Front is where the right Flank was. To reduce them to their first form the word of command is   
As you were.▪ 
This is performed by turning to the left hand, from thence to face them to the left you command,   
To the left hand, 
This is performed by turning towards the left, from hence they are to be reduced by commanding;   
As you were. 
Which they do by turning to the right. Now to face them to the Rear, though it be most proper to do it by the right hand, yet for the more ready way you must command.   
Front. H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h  
h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H  
Rear.  
To the left hand about. 
This is performed by turning towards the left hand, until their faces Front to that place which was before the Rear. To reduce them to their first form the word of Command is,   
To the Right hand about as you were.  
h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H  
Ranks to the Right hand double. 
Every other rank passeth into the rank before them upon the right hand of his leader. To reduce them, the word of Command is   
Ranks as you were. 
Which is best done by causing those ranks which doubled to stand, and those which stood to advance.   
HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
Ranks to the left hand double. 
This motion differs nothing from the former only where as before they doubled to the right now they double to the left hand of their Leaders. To reduce them, the word of Command is   
Ranks as you were.  
hHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhH o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
Files to the right hand double. 
To perform this, the second File passeth into the first, every man behind his sideman, this must be done throughout the Company at one instant, the o are the places where the Files that removed did stand. They are reduced by commanding.   
Files to the left hand, as you were.  
29 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h  
Files to the left hand double. 
The difference between this and the former motion is the difference of hands, so that those Files that before moved are now to stand; view the Figure. They are reduced by commanding:   
Files as you were, or Ranks to the right hand double.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 H ● H ● H ● H ● H ● H ● H ● H ● H ● H ● H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh H oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h oh h o  
Half Files to the right hand, double your Front. 
To perform this the middlemen double the first rank on the right hand; the other two Ranks double the two following Ranks, as is manifest in the Figure. To reduce them the word is,   
Half Files as you were, 
But in regard of the combersomnesse of the horse in turning, to cause them that double, to stand, and the first division to advance.   
HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
Half files to the left hand, double your Front. 
This motion only differs from the former in the hand. The reducing of them is showed in the former motion.   
hHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhH hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
Bringers up to the right hand, double your Front. 
In this motion the last Rank passeth into the first, and so successively, as the Figure demonstrates it. They are reduced by saying.   
Bringers up as you were.  
HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
Files to the left hand Countermarch. 
For the convenient turning of the horse, it is best to begin with the left hand. This Figure is after the Corean manner. There are diverse other forms of countermarching which are to be performed as well by Ranks as by Files, as the Lacedaemonian, and Macedonian; but in regard of brevity they are here omitted.   
HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h oh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
Files close to the right and left to your close Order. 
All the Files are to close from the right and left, towards the middle of the body. Note when you intent to wheel, your Files must first be closed and then the Ranks; and when you command them to open again, the Ranks are first, and then the Files.   
oooooHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo  
Ranks close forwards to your close order. 
To perform this all the Ranks move forwards, saving the first, which standeth, the second rank being advanced up to its distance stands, so all the rest. When the horses are to wheel, the Commander must take a reasonable Compass, for they cannot possibly do it in such exact manner as the foot, for they must be allowed a far greater space, in regard of the combersomenes of the horse.   
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h oh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o  
To the left hand wheel. 
To perform this motion, all the body moveth to the left, upon the left file leader as the Centre. The wheeling to the left hand is the readiest way, unless some impediments hinders, wherefore that is first nominated although it be more proper to begin with the right, the wheeling to the right is for brevity omitted. To reduce them wheel to the right hand as you were.   
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h  

There is also wheeling to the right or left about, wheeling wings into the front, they are here omited for brevity. To reduce them into their first order; first the Ranks are to be opened, than the files. In opening the ranks, the best way is to do it by opening forwards.   
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h   

CHAP. CXX.  
The Fashion of Horse Battles discoursed of, and first of the rhomb, the Wedge, and the Square.  
IN regard we shall not have the opportunity to discourse, and demonstrate every kind of Battle, that at this time is in use when we shall come to entreat of the embattelling of the Infantry with the Cavalry; therefore I think it most convenient to discourse of some forms of Embattelling the Cavalry which are of greatest use.  
And the rather because the Cavalry for the most part are employed upon peculiar services in the absence of the Infantry. Those that have formerly written of this subject, have not fully expressed their own conceits. Therefore to make all things clear; I shall endeavour to set down the several figures of each several kind.  
The Thessalians were the first inventors of the rhomb, 
It was attributed to jason.  and conceived it to be an absolute form; in regard they were ready to turn their faces every way with speed, and not easily to be surprised, in Flank or in the Rear; because the best men are placed in the Fanke, and the commanders in the Angleses. (viz.) the Captain in the Front, and in the right, and left Angles of the Flanks the two ablest Corporals, and the Lieutenant in the rear Angle.  
Of these kind of battles called the Rhombes, there are four sorts severally distinguished; 
Four kinds of Rhombes ● described.  the first kind Files and Ranks. The second form, neither File nor rank; the third form Files but rank not; the fourth rank, but file not: The first kind of rhomb that doth both file and rank, is ordered as followeth (viz.) you are to make the greatest rank being the middle most of an uneven number, as of a 11. or 13. or 15. or 17. to which you are to join other ranks before and behind, every one containing two less than the former; as if the greatest rank consisted of 17. the next ranks on either side are to have but 15. the next on either side of those, but 13 and so every one two less, until at last you come to one, as you may perceive by the next Figure following; the longest rank consists of 15. the next of 13, etc. and so the whole rhomb hath 113 horse in Battalia: of these I intent to show you the order of framing them, although not much used in these late wars: afterwards I shall discourse of sundry forms of Embattelling in a discourse by itself.  
The rhomb of Horse.  
The Front. 
Euelide defineth a rhomb to be a square Figure, that hath the sides equal, but the Angles not right, viz. the foure-sides of the square are of one and the same length, but the points which make the Angles, are two of them, stretched out in length and become more sharp; the other two are more blunt than a Tetragonall square.   
Left Flank  
Right Flank  
The Rear.   

CHAP. CXXI.  
The manner and form how the second kind of rhomb is ordered in Battalia.  
THe next kind of rhomb, which neither Files nor Ranks was by the ancient Generals, thought very proper for service, in regard the turnings and other motions, were to be performed very easily, having nothing to hinder them before, behind, or in Flancke.  
For the ordering of this form of Battle, you must first place the Leader, than one a● his right, and an other at his left hand, and in such a distance, that their horses heads reach up to his horses shoulders, as in the formal battle.  
The first row you must also make of an uneven number, as 21. the Leader of the Troop standing in the midst, and 19 other being laid to him backwards on either side; so that this rank containeth two sides of the rhomb, like to this A.  
Then the Rear Commander is placed directly behind the Leader; and to him are other joined forwardly on either side, like to this Figure V. and the number of the following ranks; after the first, there are to be two less than the former, and therefore nine must be added on either side of the Rear Commander; so that the number of the second rank hath ten; this rank makes two sides parralel to the two former sides of the rhomb, as the Figure shows: the third must be 17. and so forwards to one, the whole Battle hath in it 121. horse with the Officers; the Figure followeth.  
Front.  

A rhomb neither filing, nor ranking.   
Rear.   

CHAP. CXXII.  
The Manner and form of imbattelling the third kind of rhomb consisting of Files but not of Ranks.  
THe third kind of rhomb, 
The Thess alonians used this form of imbattelling their Troops.  which Files but Ranks not, you are to order your Troop after this manner following.  
First you must make a File of any Number, the Captain of the Troop being File-leader, and the Rear Commander the last of the File.  
To both the Flanks of this File, you are to lay two other Files either of them one less in number than the first, these you must begin to place even with the midst of the distances of the first file on both sides; as suppose 11. in the first File, the next file on either side must have 10. a piece, and the next after them 9 a piece, and still one the less in all the rest after placed Files, and so it shall prove to file but not rank.  
This form is advantageous and profitable for turning of faces, when need shall require, 
The terms used by Commanders in former ages as P●li. l. 4. 217.  from one point of the rhomb to another: turning to the right hand is called turning to the staff: turning to the le●● is called turning to the Raynes, but in these our modern wars we use to command them to face to the right, or to the left hand, as occasion shall offer, the figure of this discourse followeth the Troop of horse consisting of 121. with the Officers.  
The Front.  
Rear.   

CHAP. CXXIII.  
The manner of imbattelling the fourth kind of rhomb which Ranks and Files not.  
THis last kind of rhomb whose property is to Rank and not to File, is made by a contrary way to the former.  
The precedent rhomb which showed to File but not to Rank, began at the Front point, and Rear point, and proceeded to the Flanks.  
This beginneth at the Flank points and proceedth to the Front and Rear.  
First therefore a Rank is to be laid of what number you please to the distances of this Rank you must lay two Ranks more, one on either side, whose number must be one less a piece, than the former Rank, thus continue laying of Ranks towards the Front, and Rear, and in every pair of Ranks diminish one a piece, until you come to the points, either of which have but one, namely the Captain and Lieutenant; by this means the rhomb will rank but not file, the figure followeth.  
Front.  

A rhomb ranking but not filing.   
Rear.   

CHAP. CXXIIII.  
The manner of Framing the Battle called the Wedge, or half rhomb, used by the Macedonians.  
THe form of this Battle called the Wedge, plainly appears in the rhomb, which both Ranks and Files, for the half of that rhomb is a Wedge.  
Wherefore first you must begin with a Rank of an uneven number as suppose 15. horse before that Rank, you must place another Rank of 13. having two less than the former, and so you are to proceed until you end with one, which is the place of the Captain; this was the Invention of King Philip of Macedon, who placed his best men before, that by them the weaker might be held in and enabled to charge.  
Elian giveth reasons why the Wedge was in those times accounted better than a Square form, which we now have in use, in regard it is apt and proper, artificially to break the Enemies Square battles, for he Compares a Square Battle to an Axe, for although it be sharper than a Wedge, yet having the edge drawn out in length it cannot possibly, by strength be driven far into the Wood, but by redoubling of strokes.  
The Wedge being once entered, insinuateth itself, the point being Narrow, and it holdeth what it getteth, until at last it divides the Square form in Sunder, although never so tough. Polybius reports lib 4. 278. that the Thessalians being Imhatteled in this kind of form, they could not be resisted by the Grecians and Persian Squares.  
Moreover the Wedge is of greater strength than the Rhombes, because it bringeth more hands to fight, for the hinder part of the rhomb is of no use but to avoid surprises, for it availeth nothing in charging, whereas all parts of the Wedge are effectual, viz. the point to enter, and the sides even to the flank corners, where the rear endeth doth dispart and dissever, and utterly disorder the Enemy, whereby victory is gained.  
And questionless this form of a Wedge, were of excellent use in our wars especially when an enemy is charged in Flank and Rear, or Front and Flank, than this Battle in form of a Wedge to come full upon the point of the enemy's Battalia, where they shall find an easy place for entrance, in regard the foot Troops are constrained to make a double resistance, both to Front and Flank, so that there will be a space open for entrance; and then the sides of this Wedge battle will give such a Valley upon the point, that of necessity they cannot be able to withstand it.  
The Cornet (in this Wedge form of imbattelling) is to take his place right before the Lieutenant in the second Rank from the Rear, the figure followeth: this Troop consists of 121. Horse.  
Front.  
The Lieutenant.   

CHAP. CXXV.  
The reason why we retain the custom of Ranking five deep in File.  
WE have learned from Generals in former ages the framing of Square Battles, in regard they were oppinionated that form was the easiest to be framed, and best for Motion, besides the ablest men were placed in Front, and had all the principal Commanders, to lead them on, to give the Enemy a charge, the weapons which the Horsemen used were Spears, 
Leo Chap. 5. Sect. 3. and Cap. 6. Sect. 39  of such a wonderful length to to Match their Enemy's Pikes, which as Leo reports Chap. 25. that they were 16. Cubtis in length, that is 24. foot; and Livy verifies the same that their Pikes were very unwieldy in regard of their bigness and length, and then they for the most part did order their horse Troops eight deep in File, as Polybius speaketh plainly; who was General of the Horse of the Achaeans; besides Leo in his seventh Chapter writeth after this manner▪ 
Leo Cap 7. Sect. 81▪ Cap. 14. Sect. 70.  If there be many horse (saith he) (viz.) above twelve thousand, then let them be ordered ten deep in File; if but few, then let it be no more than five; 
Leo Cap, 14. Sect. 108▪ 109.  further he saith, too much shallowness maketh a Battalia weak, and ready to be broken; by this we may conjecture that the filing of Troops five deep was not a thing enforced of necessity, until such times as they found the inconvenience of their overlong Spears; so that the Macedonians caused their Spears to be but 15. or 16. foot in length, and then five horse in depth was rather at the most, (than otherwise) to make use of those short weapons to offend the Enemy in their charge.  
They further aimed to order their Battles, so that the Battalias might seem square, (viz.) as deep in Flank, as broad in Front, so that thereby, the enemy might be deluded; 
Plutarch in Li●urgo.  and therefore sometimes they would order eight horse in Front, and but 4. in Flank, which seemed as a square, by reason a horse taketh up twice as much space in his length as in breadth; whereupon finding the inconveniences of those kind of squares, they bethought them of a more perfect square, less than which they durst not venture, and more they could not; for want of horse, in regard their policy was to discourage the Enemy by making their Troops show more than indeed they were; wherefore they framed their Troops of 50. horse, and ordered them ten in Rank, and five in File; which form represents a square, in regard the five horse take up as much ground in their length, as the ten do in breadth, and this proportion they held best, for had there been six, seven, or eight horse in a File, 
Leo Cap. 12. Sect. 4●.  they could not have done any good in regard of the shortness of their squares, as Leo after confessed.  
But our manner of charging the Enemy differs from theirs; for we are to give fire upon the Enemy by Ranks, and so fall off into the Rear, so that all the Ranks shall come up and give fire by degrees upon the Enemy, whereas their Troops gave a firm close charge, and wheeled off together; this was the use both of their Archers and Spearemen.  
Now our modern Captains, 
Their horse Troops charged the Enemy in Phalang, and not by ranks as we do, Leo ibidem, read Bingham upon Aliens Tactics, pag. 106.  although they have abandoned the use of their Spears, yet they have detained their form of ordering their Troops, five deep in file; and because each horseman hath two Pistols, therefore they suppose that they may charge and discharge as well as the foot Troops that are ten deep (with one Musket for their arms) but let the ablest horseman of them all say what he please; he shall find it another business, especially if both sides stand to their tackling, until all the Ranks have given fire; for the small distance of time, and the ordering of their unruly horses, will make them fall short of their expectations: but indeed our horse Troops, seldom stand so long in competition for the victory; but that one side either retreats, or do worse; for if they should, it should be easily seen that that Troop whose Files were ordered six in depth, would soon wear through the adverse part, whose extent is but five.  
Wherefore I could wish that all our Troops might be so ordered, in regard it is a number so proper and apt, either to be divided, or to be doubled, or to be drawn into any form of Embattelling, wherefore more than six are unprofitable, and less than six are not so serviceable.  
In former ages they were driven to their inconvenience, in regard they were scanted of horse; and so to make their fronts equal with the Enemies; they in policy framed their Battalias but of five deep; whereas their Enemies were compounded of many more, as 6. 8. or 10. many times; but after they had found out their policy (which) was only to make the fronts of their Battles equal with theirs, being constrained in regard of their thinness to line them with shot, and to have stands of Pikes to rescue them to make them abler to resist their enemies streng Phalange; 
Caesar against Pompey did the like, and E●a●mondas against the Lacedæmonians.  they likewise ordered their Troops after the same manner, whereby they delated their Fronts far witer than before, and so over winged them, whereby many times they gained victory.  
Our Kingdom (blessed be God) shall not need to be driven to that exegint to make such simple shifts, In regard we have or may have more than sufficient to oppose the potentest Enemy that shall dare venture, or indeed possibly can convey so many Troops over, but that we shall be, not only his equal, but exceed him; wherefore I have framed each Troop of 120. horse, and the same to be divided into four Corporallships (viz.) thirty in each; each Corporallship to march six in breast and six in depth, and so I leave it to your best considerations.   

CHAP. CXXVI.  
How the Chavalry are to order and demean themselves in proportionable Battles, fit to be joined with the Infantry with their due order of fight against the Enemy's foot Troops; Likewise how they are to give or receive a charge of the Enemy's Cavalry in gross, as also in single combats and assaults.  
AS in ordering of the Infantry; so in disposing of the Cavalry in Battalia, for the well fight of a pitched battle against the Enemy, these Circumstances are to be considered,  
First, there are to be drawn out of sundry Troops of Carabines, a certain number of horse; which are to be joined with a proportionable number of foot: these are speedily (without keeping any order or distances) to run upon the Enemy's Ordnance; and either to surprise them, or to hold those of the Enemy that guard them in combustion; so that their Ordnance shall be hindered from annoying your Troops of horse, who are far more subject and liable to receive harm from the Ordnance (in regard they are mounted high) than the Infantry can possibly be, wherefore the cavalry many times have been constrained to retire themselves into some place of advantage, as a Valley, or in the Rear of the foot Troops to hide and secure themselves from the great shot, until such time as the Armies were drawn near together; so as they could not discharge for indamaging their own Troops.  
In the next place, there are certain horse to be commanded out of diverse Troops of Carabines to assist and guard the forlorn Hopes of the Infantry; and these are to toll out the Enemy to begin light skirmishes; the better to animate the main Battle against they shall be ready to charge; by seeing their valours; and many times they have been a means of disordering the Enemies grand Battalias.  
The main battle of the Cavalry is divided into there distinct divisions; (viz.) the Vanguard, the Battle, and the Rearegaurd; these three make one entire Front, and are to be ordered at three foot distance, when they are ready to charge: This principle Battle is to stand in an even front with the Infantry (viz) either upon the right or left wing, or upon both when there is no natural strength, as Rivers, Quagmires, Hedges, or the like, to secure one of the wings, you are to place your Cavalry wide off the Empalement of the Flanks of the Battle of the Infantry a hundred paces at the least for fear of annoying your foot Troops: likewise there must be the space of 25▪ paces of ground in distance left between every company, and 50. paces betwixt each Regiment.  
The wings of the horse Battle next adjoining to the Flanks of the foot, are to be of Cuirassiers, in regard they are rather to secure the Flanks of the Infantry by sustaining a charge, then for to advance forwards to give the Enemy a charge; unless upon some great occasion, 
So●e Generals have 〈…〉 range 〈…〉 second 〈…〉 by a large 〈…〉 ●ront 〈…〉, but 〈…〉 Flanks; 〈…〉 battle to 〈…〉 Infantry.  the residue of this main Battle may be compounded Harquebuziers and Carabines as the General shall think best.  
There must likewise be two other grand battles ordered; the first is to be placed a hundred paces before the Front of the main battle, but not so forwards as the forlorn hopes, by little more than half the distance, these are to consist of Harquebuzires and Carabines, and are to be ordered in competent Battalias; which shall be neither too great nor too small, but so as they may charge in sundry bodies, the better to relieve one the other: between each Battallia, there must be certain Files of Musquetiers, drawn up in an even Front with them, who shall give fire upon the enemy's horse to disorder their Ranks, as they shall approach to charge your Troops; these shotiupon occasion may retreat, and fall in betwixt the distances of the main Battle, which are to advance forward to re scue the former Troops being over charged.  
The third battle, which is called the Battle of Sucker, is to be placed a good distance behind the main Battle, and these aught to be all (or the greatest part of them) Cuirassiers, and ordered in great Battalias then the Harquebuziers, they are to be marshaled, and disposed into diverse Compertments or Divisions; so that the Battalias of the main battle may retreat betwixt them, or being routed they may shelter themselves behind them, and reunite themselves again, and join with them in a desperate charge; for this is the last refuge, unless you draw out certain Pikes to relieve them; 
Not to charge the enemy's foot Troops with your horse, until you have put their horse to a retreat or routed them, unless a great advantage be offered.  and unless your strength in horse do much exceed the Enemies, it will be to your disadvantage, to strive to charge the Enemy's foot Troops (unless there should be an unexpected advantage offered) until such time as you have either routed the Enemy's horse, or put them to flight; and than you are to bend your full strength to assault them upon all quarters with your Harquebuziers and Carabines first; and then seconded by your Cuirassires; who are to press in amongst the Enemy, and break their ranks; but in the mean time they must leave a sleeve of horse upon each flank of the wings of the foot Troops to defend them from the Enemy's charge, who will adventure to do it when they see them left naked.  
If your Cavalry are by some accident to fight only against some certain foot Troops of the enemies you must make choice of plain fielding, 
The convenient time of advantage for the Cavalry to charge foot Troops.  as a place most advantageous for that purpose.  
Likewise you must use all celerity and diligence to charge them before they can order themselves, in Battle, and upon these advantages you may venture, although they should be far more potent than yourself.  
But being drawn into battle, 
How to charge the Enemy's foot, being provided for your assault.  expecting your assault, and your forces being equal in power; than you must command out certain Troops of Harquebuziers, or Dragoones, if you have any; and with these you must charge them upon the Front, Flanks and Rears; these are to be seconded by certain small Battalias of Cuirassiers who shall take the opportunity to fall upon such disorders as the Harquebuziers have caused.  
If the Enemy have possessed themselves in some place of advantage; 
Not to charge the enemy upon disadvantages.  then the Cavalry are not to charge them, although your forces were superior in strength to them.  
If it should so happen that one company of Cuirassirs should be to fight against another, 
How to take an advantage of the Enemy in fight several ways.  if the enemy doth charge you in full career, your safest way is to divide your Troop by half ranks, opening a large distance to the right and left hand, so as the Enemy may pass through: then facing your Troop inwards, you are to charge them upon the Flanks; you are to perform the like if you have a Battalia made of two Troops; and being charged by the Enemy, they are to divide themselves as before, but keep each Troop whole and entire; or you may cause three or four files of each of your wings to advance forward on the sudden, and to charge the enemy upon the Flanks; and to equal your Enemy's Front, you may cause the half Files of your Body to double your Front to the right and left hand by divisions.  
Note the Harpuebuziers are to give fire by ranks; 
The manner of the Horse Troops giving fire, and falling off.  the first rank having given fire, is to wheel off to the left hand (unless the ground will not permit it, (but that of necessity you must perform it to the right) making ready and falling into the Rear: the second rank is to give fire upon the wheeling away of the first, and so the rest successively.  
The advantages which the Cavalry may take against the Enemy when he shall think himself secure in his quarters, 
The great advantage a few Troops of horse may have against an Enemy in his quarters upon an onslaught.  in regard of his Potency, and the undervalluing of his adversaries disability may be very great, for many times weak forces have achieved great victories.  
Wherefore there must first be gained true intelligence how the Enemy hath disposed his Troops; and also certain knowledge of the situation of the Country, Place, or Village, they are quartered in; and how, and in what places he hath placed his Guards, and set out his Sentinels. An Enemy's Quarters for the most part are ever strongest and best watch kept upon those passages which leads towards a suspected Enemy.  
In this case you are to make use of the night, fetching a compass about by some byways, so that you may charge them in the Rear or Flanks of their Quarters before they be aware of you, where you shall be most sure to find them most negligent in those parts.  
Every Horsman is to take up behind him a Musquetire, 
〈◊〉 use of Musqueteer amongst Horse 〈…〉 upon an onslaught.  whose service will be excellent either to place behind, upon some passage of advantage, to rescue your Troops if they should be put to a retreat, or to assist the horse in their discharge against the Enemy in his Quarters, as I shall afterwards specify.  
Now let us presuppose that your Troops are arrived near the Enemy's quarters, 
Some have put their shirts over their arms; or handkerchiefs in their head-pieces; or glued white paper upon their breasts and backs.  every man having the Watchword given him, and also some distinction, or mark of white, whereby they my be known from the Enemy in the dark night, and having laid a sufficient guard of Musquetires to make your retreat safe: the next thing to be considered of, is how you may best hinder the Enemy from uniting their Troops into a body, wherefore some few Musquetires or Firelocks are to be sent some by-way, where secretly they must get betwixt the Guard and the Sentinels to cut off their retreat; the residue of the Musquetires are to creep to the Alarm place, and there to place themselves near the passage where the Enemy is to enter with his Troops; and having the advantage of some Hedges, Banks, or pales, for to hide and secure them from the Horse, these shot shall give fire upon the Enemy as they come scattering into the Alarm place.  
In the mean time one of your Troypes of Harquebuziers or Carabines shall advance secretly and without noise towards the Sentinel, and suddenly surprise him by the help of the shot that lies behind him: then speedily they are to fall upon the guard and surprise them, before they shall have time to mount themselves, from thence this Troop is to march forwards into the chief streets of the Village with a certain number of Musquetiers following them close at the heels, and there they are to make their stand: the shot shall then Rank themselves before the Horse; the first rank upon their knees; the second are somewhat to stoop, the third rank is to stand upright, and so to give a whole Volley upon the Enemy at once, and then they are to fall off and march down by the Flanks of the Horse into the Rear of them, and there they are to order themselves as before in a readiness to give fire upon the enemy that shall seek to charge them in the Rear; in the mean time the horse are to advance forwards and charge the enemy.  
The rest of your Troops if there be four or five of them, are to be employed in four or five several places, viz. one Troop is to follow the first Troop to assist them; where if they they find no resistance they shall possess the Alarm place, and assist the Musqueteirs that are laid in ambush, likewise there must be certain Horse appointed to scour the streets continually, whereby the Enemy shall be hindered from gathering together.  
Your third Troop is to come Marching fairly unto the Alarm place.  
The fourth Troop is to follow softly after, and where they hear any broils or stir, they are to repair to that place to assault them; or enter into their houses and cut them off, thus sudden and unexpected aproached, will so pussel the Enemy, that they will seek to save themselves by flight, through bypaths and back sides, wherefore you must cause your first Troop to be drawn about the Quarters; to intercept those that shall seek to save themselves by flight.  
If at any time any of your Horse Troops should meet, the Enemy in their March; if they be equal in strength, you must resolve to fight, if not you must endeavour to save your men by a fair retreat; wherefore to gain true intelligence of their Forces; besides your Scouts you must send out a Corporal with 8. or 10. Soldiers; who must pretend to be of the Enemy's Forces if that place do favour the Enemy, and from them they shall all have true information; and if you be far from your own Quarters, and near to the Enemies when you meet with them, than you must be forced to fight, though your Forces should be inferior to theirs, but if you be near to your own, than you must fairly retreat, leaving a Lieutenant in the Rear; with some of the best mounted Soldiers, your retreat must be by the same way you went in the day time, but in the night you must take some other way, 
You must cause the feeting of ●our Horse to be defaced at the place where you left the wa●, if it be dusty, by drawing of Bowes.  though further about to your Garrison or Quarter.  
If you intent to lay any Ambuscadoes, to defeat the Enemy's Forces first you must be certain of what number the Enemy's Forces are of, if he hath fewer Horse than you, than you may employ all yours, attempting to Toll out all his and rout them, or else you may employ some small number, by which you may at several times make some good Booty, the Enemy not daring to issue out of his Quarters; but if the Enemy exceed you in horse, 
The order of la●ing of ambuscadoes to surprise the Enemy.  it will be dangerous for you to make ambuscadoes, unless it be with some few Horse, for with your small number you may easily retreat, but being a Gross it might be entertained by part of the Enemy's Cavalry presently issuing, and those seconded by more, whereby you should be hardly able to retreat without disorder and loss.  
The Ambuscadoes must not by laid much before break of Day, 
You must search all suspected places near your ambush, lest the Enemy should have laid one before you.  because otherwise you cannot discover the approach of the Enemy, but at hand, and so the ambuscado shall have no time to come forth and put themselves in order, whereby they may be taken in their own ambush: the Troops must be placed a good distance one from another, that they may not hinder one another in time of fight, the Sentinels are to be placed out on every side, and some upon trees, but very closely that they may not be discovered, your ambush must be placed in some covert place upon the side of a Plain or Champion ground.  
In making your Ambuscado with many Troops of horse, some number of Infantry must be laid in ambush, about the mid way to relieve and sustain the Cavalry, 
The Soldiers must not know that any of your Troops are to follow them, lest any of them should be taken prisoner, should reveal the design.  in their retreat, if need should be, or otherwise to assist them upon occasion.  
Now you are to dispose of your Cavalry in this manner following, suppose you have 1200. horse, consisting of 12. Troops, three Troops must be sent before towards the enemy; giving notice to the Commanders of them, where the ambush shall be, of these three Troops three must be 50. Cuirassiers, and 50. Harquebuziers, the Cuirassiers are to be commanded by their Captain and Lieutenant, but the Harquebuziers are to have their Lieutenant only.  
Of these Harquebuziers, 25. shall advance before, with their Corporal attempting to take some Booty or Prisoners; In view of these Harquebuziers at the distance of a Cannon shot, there must be 25. Cuirassiers placed, under the Command of their Lieutenant, to receive those 25. Harquebuziers when they return;  
The Captain with the other 25. Cuirassiers, and 25. Harquebuziers is to stay behind half a league off; the Harqueburies' are to be placed nearest the Enemy, to succour the 50. horse● which are charged by the Enemy's Guards, and then they are all to retreat to the Cuirassiers, these four small Troops must still retreat, keeping a convenient distance one from another▪ and holding the Enemy in fight, unless the Enemy so chargeth them that they are forced to fly in disorder.  
The other 200. horse which are to consist of 150. Cuirassiers, and 50. Harquebuzeirs, shall enter the ambuscado about half an hour riding off from the other 50. horse, which when they shall see return and charged, they shall issue out, the 50. Harquebuziers first giving Charge rank after rank, than the Cuirassiers, leaving 20. horse in the Rear to make their retreat. The 900 horse are to be in Ambush about an hours March behind the said 200. horse, and seeing them to return charged shall suffer them to pass, and the Enemy also, that so they may charge them upon the Rear.  
Likewise a certain number of shot (as suppose 150. Musquetiers and 100 Pikes) must be laid in ambush about a League behind the 900. horse, 
The foot must take heed they be not discovered until the Enemy be come up to them.  on the way by which the 300. horse shall return Charged: and when the Enemy is come up to them, they are to fall out and give them a Valley to disorder them, upon this the 900. shall sally out and Charge the Enemy upon the Rear and Flanks; and then the said 300. horse are to face about and sustain the Charge, which cannot but be to the Enemy's Confusion. In great ambushes you must make your number seem as small as may be, but in small ones you are to make show of a greater number than you have; wherefore your number being small all your horse must not Sally out of the Ambushcado at once, but some 12. or 15. must remain in the wood at the furthest part of it, to favour the retreat of the rest, and by their noise to cause the Enemy to think there are a greater number behind in the Wood  
If the Enemy should retreat for his better safety, 
How to charge an Enemy retreating.  meeting your Troops upon your march in the day time; you must first send a Troop of Harquebuziers to charge him on the Rear, (viz.) the Lieutenant shall first assault them with 25. horse, charging the Enemy upon a full trot or gallop; him shall the Captain follow with the rest of the Troop: these are to be seconded by a Company of Cuirassiers, being most proper to sustain the Enemy if he resist; but if the wa● be narrow, the said Cuirassiers shall follow immediately after the first 25. Harquebuziers; your other Troops shall second these, observing always one hundred paces distance betwixt every Company.  
If a single Troop should meet a Troop of the Enemy of equal number; if the Enemy retreat, send your Lieutenant with 20. horses to charge him in the Rear, 
It is dangerous to engage a whole Troop at once because if they be once disordered there is no help but confusion.  following him with fifty to the same effect, closed as firm as may be, the residue of your Troop must follow at a good distance under a good Corporal, who shall not engage himself to fight (though the Enemy turn head) unless he see his Officers in great danger, but then he must charge them valiantly, so that his Captain may reunite his men again.  
Other circumstances belonging to the Cavalry, you shall find them discoursed of either in the discourse of the Marching of the Infantry, or else in the discourse of encamping an Army, I will here conclude with a demonstrative figure, to show how the Shot should line the horse Troops, and how you should order your Battalias to succour one the other, where note this represents one wing of the Horse, that is to Flanker the Infantry; 
Note the Battalias which are placed be●ind the shot, consist but of 36. horse in each and the shot that line the horse consist of 60. after this proportion a greater number may be ordered.  and you must further observe so soon as the Enemy hath put the shot to retreat, those Horse Battalias behind, are to advance up into their places, the shot are but 36. in a Troop, the Harquebuziers 120. and the Cuirassiers 200. by this proportion you may make as great Battalias as you please, view the figure only of the main battle without the Battle of Succour.  
The Horse Troops being drawn in Battalia, there must be 25. paces distance left between every Company, and 50. at the least between every Regiment.   
The end of the 12. Section.   

A DISCOURSE OF POLITIQUE STRATAGEMS. SECT. XIII.  

CHAP. CXXVII.  
A perfect demonstration of such Politic Stratagems as have been plotted, and practised, both by Ancient and Modern Commanders.  
SEeing that Politic Stratagems have been the immediate means next under the providence of God, to gain victories enervating and weakening an enemy; I have thought it most fit to collect out of the best Authors, the most subtlest and most eminent; as also my own observations which I have gathered in the time I followed the wars, which may prove of much worth to be taken notice of, in two respects; first in seeking to evade them, or prevent them; when an enemy shall make use of them or (finding a conveniency; and fit occasion) to make use of them ourselves by putting them in practice against our Enemies: And although it be not in the power of Man, to read the thoughts and designs of a polictike Enemy; yet when a Commander knows the nature of all Stratagems, he may happily guess by an Enemy's carriage, demeanour, and actions what he intends: And first because no General can ●●rry his designs so in the air, but by some privy intelligence, an Enemy is informed of it, and so being forewarned is fore-armed, it is wisdom for a General privately, to give out some speech of a design in hand, which he intends not to execute, and in the interim to put in action some other project, which may be prevalent in regard it is novelties to the enemy; by this many Countries, Cities, and Garrison Towns have been taken, before the enemy could provide for to defend it, as in the next chapter you shall see.   

CHAP. CXXVIII.  
How the Prince of Orange took in Grolle in Gelderland, by pretending his Army should march before the Town of Gelder's,  
THat wise and Politic General Prince Maurice knowing the strength of Grolle in regard of the Situation of it, especially if it were well manned, and victualled; he having lain with his Army once in former times before i● and was constrained to raise his Siege; wherefore the second time he practised by policy to gain that, which formerly was denied to his strength; wherefore he countenanced his Design, and fitted his Army, giving it out for another Town called Gelder's, not far in distance from the other; The Enemy for the better securing of the Town sent what Forces and Ammunition; they could spare out of other Towns to strengthen it, but most especially from this Town of Grolle, which they thought secure, whereby it was left destitute of any means for a long Siege; this opportunity being suddenly taken by the Prince, he drew his Army before it, and beleaguered it round, so that in a short time it yielded, which without this advantage would have been impregnable.   

CHAP. CXXIX.  
A policy to defer time when a Town is beleaguered, that relief may be gained, or by it to get from an Enemy.  
IN a Town besieged, it is policy for the Governor to parley upon some agreements, in what kind he shall surrender up the same, and so make a Truce for certain days; in this kind of practice may be two advantages gained, as namely, first relief if it be expected, which without this plot happily cannot hold out until it comes; This was practised in Ost-end, the Governor understanding by a Prisoner which was taken, that the Enemy did intend to assault his works generally upon all sides, and in all places the next morn; he thought it wisdom (considering the weakness of the Town) to spend some time in a parley, until his Succours were arrived, or at least to set those men in order, and provide such necessaries for defence as could be got, whereupon Hostages being sent upon either side, and Articles being discussed upon, but none agreed upon; the relief did arrive in the Town, and they were fitted for the assault.  
Moreover, these kind of Parleys makes an Enemy confident, that mere distress drives them unto it; this causeth an enemy to be negligent in all his performances, whereby great advantage may be taken, either in building or repairing works, which otherwise could not be done; by this devise Silla that famous Commander being in a strait took advantage of the Enemy's negligence in time of the Truce, and suddenly beat thorough the Enemy and delivered himself, the like did Asdrubal being beleaguered in his running Camp by Claudius N●ro, escaped him, which otherwise must have yielded upon base terms, or have perished by the Sword.   

CHAP. CXXX.  
How Zophirus by a politic Stratagem delivered a whole Army into his General's hands.  
ZOphirus one of Darius' Captains mangled his body, and disfigured his face, by cutting off his nose and ears, fled to the Babylonians, complaining of the tyranny of his King, they crediting his words, and knowing his prowess, committed the charge of the whole Army unto him, as a man to whom such Barbarous usage had made him irreconciliable, and deeming he would have studied and used all his best endeavours to have been revenged, but he taking his best opportunity, delivered his Army into the hands of his Sovereign with all the Towns, and Forts in his possession.   

CH●P. CXXXI.  
How Philip Macedon, and diverse others by their policy have gained Kingdoms by affording their aids to distressea Princes.  
Foreign aid is a surfeit most uncurable; for there is no Kingdom but by such a politic advantage hath been conquered; as appears by the example of Philip Macedon assisting the Thebans in Greece against the Phocians; by taking his advantage brought the Country under his own Command; also the Romans assisting the Sicilians against the Carthagenians possessed themselves of the Island; likewise the Britons being aided by the Saxons, were by them thrust out of all: The same Cup tasted the Irish, they requesting the aid of the English, were by them dispossessed: wherefore there is no confidence to be put in foreign assistance; for they will not engage themselves, nor venture their lives when danger approacheth, as by the example of Francis Sforza assisting the Milanese, he revolted to the Florentines in expectation of higher preferment: Likewise Gucapo Picinino assisting the King of Naples, left him in his extremity of Battle; the Swissers did the like to the French. It is a thing most easy for a foreign aid (if they be more potent) to keep possession in a Kingdom, and by drawing in more forces to them, to drive out the Natives; or if they be less in power, to side with the Enemy, and so share the Kingdom betwixt them, as the Burgundians did aiding the Romans in Galacia against the Frankes; and joining with them overthrew the Romans: these brittle helps makes the remedy worse than the disease; so that they are least to be trusted, and last to be tried.  
A politic Nation are ready to assist in three causes: as first when some man in high authority upon discontent or desire of revenge openeth a way for them, as Count julian did, drawing the Saracens into Spain to be revenged of Don Roderigo who had ravished his daughter.  
Secondly, when a weaker faction maketh way for them to overthrow, or at least counterpoise a stronger; as the Burgundians oppressed by the faction of the Orleans, made way for Henry the fifth to pass into France: Likewise our English Barons, being likely to have been vanquished by King john, sent for Prince Lewis into England to assist them.  
Thirdly, when a Kingdom is overburdened by a foreign foe, whom he is neither able to repel nor resist; he is constrained to make use of a foreign friend; in this ease as one wisely saith, plus a medico est, quam a morbo mali.   

CHAP. CXXXII.  
A policy to preserve Towns from revolting with a covert-way to banish such men as are held in suspicion.  
IT was Maxim of State amongst the Romans not to suffer great men in authority, whose birth was from great and noble Families, because their revolt might endanger a Country: or if a General were a Conqueror in a strange Land; and yet having some few Towns standing in great suspicion of revolt, and diverse men of note in them not to be trusted, whereby a conquest is unperfect; it is his best policy to command them to beat down the walls of their Towns, and banish some of their Citizens whom most doubt is to be made of; and this must be so carried that no Town so commanded might think that this charge concerns any other than themselves particularly: in practising whereof, the command must be given to all the Towns at one instant, to the intent they might all immediately obey; and have no respite to consult one with the other; and as for those that are held in suspicion for revolting, the fairest way is to give them some commission to negotiate certain affairs afar off in such a place that they can work to means of mischief: this will stand in stead of a covert banishment.   

CHAP. CXXXIII.  
A politic way to prevent an Enemy from stopping the march of part of an Army.  
IF a General should be constrained to send part of his Forces upon some special and speedy Service, he ought not to diminish the Huttes, not lessen the bounds of his Camp; only for his security fortify strongly within the old works, because those forces left are too weak to maintain the old: the same fires are likewise to be kept and the same guards throughout the Camp that was before; by which means an Enemy cannot take notice nor advantage either to prevent the passage of those troops marched away, or to adventure to assault the Camp: Claudius Nero put this in practice. Likewise if new forces should come to assist an Army, the way to prevent an Enemy from knowing it, is, neither to enlarge the guards nor the works about the Camp; this policy is to be performed when it is known the Enemy hath a purpose to assault your trenches because of the weakness of your forces. The keeping of designs secret hath always been most prevalent; this made Metellus say (being with his Army in Hispania) to one which asked him what he would do the next day, made answer, that if his shirt knew thereof he would burn it.   

CHAP. CXXXIV.  
A politic way for an Army that is fallen into danger to escape it, by securing the one half by the hazarding the other.  
IF an Army be in distress; either being beleaguered or cooped up in some place of disadvantage; then the General is of two evils to make choice of the least: wherefore if his troops be far inferior to the Enemies, his best policy is to divide his troops, and with one part of them assault the Enemy, who being busy in making resistance, the other part may escape safe: this is only to be practised when no other Project can help, so that imminent ruin is like to ensue unless such a course be taken; otherwise, it were better to imitate Hannibal, who caused a strange Accident to happen that did dismay and distract his Enemy; he being disclosed by Fabius Maximus, took the opportunity of the night season to tie dry Kisks and Bavins between the horns of many Oxen, which being fired, drove them with such fury that Fabius being astonished at the strangeness of the same sight, suffered him to pass without opposition.   

CHAP. CXXXV.  
A Policy whereby Scanderbag in a Battle against the great Turk overthrew his troops of horses.  
SCanderbeg in a Battle against the great Turk, being over-matched both with Horse and Foot; caused those few troops of Horse which he had, to be lined with certain Foot, who being charged by the Turk, those Foot with a mighty shout broke out upon the Enemy's troops of Horse with such fury, that they not only rescued their own, but also broke and chased the Enemy's cavalry, and contrary to all expectation won the Field.   

CHAP. CXXXVI.  
A Policy which the Duke De Alva used to fortify his Army against the Prince of Orange his Horse.  
THe Duke of Alva, in the late Flemish Wars against the Prince of Orange, most politicly fortified himself, with his Carts, and Carriages chained together, casting up a small Trench of Earth beyond them, did safeguard his Army being all Foot, against the Prince of Orange, who suddenly invaded him with a great power of Horse, whereby he was never able to give him Battle; and in the conclusion, for want of Forage and Victuals he was driven to retire.   

CHAP. CXXXVII.  
A Policy to prevent rebellion of such in high authority as are discontented, or of a proud and haughty Spirit.  
MAny times Treacheries and deceits are practised against Generals; and happily by their own disdainful proud carriages to their inferiors. For prevention thereof, it is best to imitate Lewis the eleventh, King of France; who propounded to himself diverse ways to wind out of such troubles▪ and to gain the love and applause of his people; wherefore he studied to carry himself very loving and affable, ready to hear complaints, and to redress them without delays: If he feared the fidelity of any one, he would insinuate into him with mild and fair speeches, free to them in gifts according to their degrees, always holding them in hopes of preferment and honour, and freely tendering it, as occasion offered: He was loving to men of mean estate, especially where any worth was crescent, if by any mistake he had offered any injury he would in a fair way show himself greeved, and seek to recover the parties love by large benefits.   

CHAP. CXXXVIII.  
How a General ought to demean himself politicly, both in giving of Battle, and in refusing it.  
IF a General understand that his Enemy have new aid and supply of men a coming unto him, than ought he to seek by all means to give him Battle, before both his powers join; or if his Victuals or Pay begin to fail, than a General should never refuse Battle if any opportunity be offered.  
Likewise, on the contrary, if a General expects a supply, or if he understands his Enemy's Victuals, or moneys fail, or that sickness increaseth amongst them, than it behoveth him in policy to stand strongly upon his guard, and by no means join Battle, so long as he can conveniently avoid it; As the French did lately at the Isle of Ree, only dogging our English at the heels, and delaying to fight, until they saw a confusion in the Army by embarking their men. The like also in the Flemish Wars 1578, between the Estates and Do● John de Austria▪ who understanding of the coming of Duke Cassimere, with 5000 Horse and 6000 Foot, offered the Army of the State's Battle at Rymenant where they lay encamped and expected Duke Cassimers' coming; but Count Bossute then General of the State's Army, being of sufficient strength to have fought with him would not, but gave command that none of his Troops should sally forth their Trenches, but only some Squadrons to guard Passages; so that Don John finding himself and his expectations deceived, and that he could not train them forth to Battle, was driven to march away; and this temperance in the Count Bossute, was no less Soldierlike, than the courageous attempt of Don John to seek Battle, both being done with reason.   

CHAP. CXXXIX.  
A Politic observation of a General, how he should entreat about a Peace.  
WHen an Army of one side is driven to a straight, so that conditions of Peace are to be entreated of, a General must be curious, and circumspect in making choice of discreet, wise, able men which understand themselves, and the weighty service they are employed in, lest they should conclude some dishonourable Treaty, or put the General in fear of their truth and fidelity.   

CHAP. CXL.  
A Policy to prevent the Assistance of a Foreign frieud.  
LEwis King of France being distasted against the Duke of Normandy and Britain, draws his Army into the Duke's Territories, the Duke understanding his proceedings, obtains assistance from the Duke of Burgundy; the King presently conceived this policy in his head, to indite a Letter as if it had come from the Duke of Normandy, and sends it by a Herald to the Duke of Burgundy, the Contents thereof were, that whereas the King of France had offered him an Annual sum of money, to the value of 60000 Franks, which he had accepted, and considering diverse circumstances, and desiring not to hazard the event, he had according to the King's propositions surrendered to him the Dukedom of Normandy, and the assessation of Arms was concluded upon; The Duke of Burgundy being sensible of this, and of the danger that might accrue to himself by their falling off, yet he was jealous that those Letters were counterfeited▪ until certain other Letters were likewise invented, as sent from other Friends to certify him the truth, which did confirm the former: by this devise the King caused the Duke's Army to be dissolved; and according to his wished desires obtained a firm League.   

CHAP. CXLI.  
How to gain fortunate success to an Army.  
THe best means a General can use to bring fortunate success to an Army; is to get true and frequent Intelligence from the Enemy; which must be obtained from them, by a trusty and secret Friend there resident, or by some plain wise Country man that vents victuals to an Army, or by the Drums that are sent for Prisoners; or by some Prisoners taken: Likewise, some have used to send Ambassadors; and with them in Servants apparel, most expert men in War; who having taken occasion to view the strength of the Enemy's works; and of his Forces, have by this means taken a sufficient opportunity to overcome them.   

CHAP. CXLII.  
A Policy used by Mar●i●●, to try the fidelity of the French, which inhabited Lombardy.  
Marries in the Wars managed against the Cimbrie, made use of a policy to try the fidelity of the French, which inhabited Lombardy; he sent them certain Letters open, and sealed, and in the open he wrote, that they should not open the Letters sealed until a certain time prefixed; But before that time, he demanded of them to see those Letters again, wherehee found them opened, by this he knew their faith was not to be trusted.   

CHAP. CXLIII.  
A Policy to compel an Enemy out of a Land without hazarding an Army in Battle with them.  
A Kingdom being invaded by an Enemy, if the Towns thereof be of any sufficient strength and ability, to withstand the brunt of War, the best way is not for an Army to go meet them, and give them Battle, but for to enter the Enemy's Dominions, ransacking, pillaging, and spoiling it, whereby he must be constrained to return for to defend the safety of his own Country; this project hath taken many times good effect, for that those Soldier's beginning to fill themselves with bootyes and confidence to overcome, shall soon make the Enemy's Soldiers to be afraid, when they supposing themselves Conquerors shall understand to become losers.   

CHAP. CXLIIII.  
How a General should use policy in letting an Enemy to pass without fight.  
IT is a thing most dangerous to stay an Enemy, if be have an intent to flee, either by cutting off his passages, or by cooping him up, for every Coward will fight, when they are bereft of all hopes of safety; as by the example of our Black Prince in France, who with a handful of Men overthrew a mighty Army; But a wise General should rather make the Enemy a Bridge of gold to pass over, then to endeavour to stay him; Themistocles would not suffer the Grecians to break down the Bridge made over the Hellespont by Xerxes lest the Persians should have been compelled to fight; Charles the sixth of France lost his Army by intercepting Henry the fifth of England in his March to Calais.   

CHAP. CXLV.  
A Policy to make Soldiers fight in a pitchy Battle, and to prevent their running away.  
Charles' Martill in a wonderful fight with the Sara●e●s, placed in the Rear of his Army certain troops of his Horse, commanding to kill all such as offered to fly, hereby to inform his Soldiers that there was no safety, but what they purchased by valour; Likewise William Duke of Normandy, after the landing of his men upon our English Confines, caused all his Vessels to be burned, that no relief might be expected, which bred a resolution in his Soldiers to gain a Conquest; Aso Caesar did the like at his first approach against England, that his Soldiers should not expect any safety by flight, but to purchase their freedoms by the dint of the Sword.   

CHAP. CXLVI.  
A Policy of a Genoys, used to the Negotiator, of Lodowick Sforza to cause him to know the nature of oppression.  
LOdwick Sforza having trenched too far upon the patience of the people of Genoa; His Negotiator that collected his Masses of money was by a Genoys invited to dinner, and walking in his Garden, he showed the Ambassador the herb Basill, he gently stroking it smelled it very sweet, but squizing it hard as unsavoury a smell; whereon this Genoys inferred; if our Lord duke Lodowick will gently struck the hand of his puissance over this City, it will afford him a sweet savour of obedience, but if he oppress it, it may chance to prove as unsavoury by rebellion.   

CHAP. CXLVII.  
A Policy to be used by a General to encourage Soldiers to work in time of necessity.  
WHen the Capitol of Rome was last built, the Emperor Vespasian carried the first Basket of earth to the making of the Walls; after him his Nobility did the like; this did wonderfully encourage the people to be more forward in that service, and that made them undergo the task without grumbling.   

CHAP. CXLVIII.  
A Politic way for a General to gain a difficult passage with his Army.  
FErand King of Naples understanding that Charles King of France approached near his Territories; he to prevent his approaches; and to make his safest and strongest resistance, drew his Army to a certain strait, not far from Naples, having Hills, and unpassable places on each side; the French perceiving their defence was not to be repelled, divided his Army by night, and sent half of them far about to come by stealth upon the Rear of the Neapolitans, they holding themselves secure in regard the French had entrenched themselves before their Camp; and thus holding them in suspense until the other part of their Army were arrived at the place he desired; they suddenly (taking the opportunity to assault on both sides) routed the Neapolitans, and in defeating their Army took their whole Country.   

CHAP. CXLIX.  
A policy to be used by a General, to further the assault made against a Town.  
THe Prince of Orange drawing his Army before Gertrudenberge, they lay entrenched upon land, and strong by Shipping upon the water; by chance taking of a Prisoner belonging to the Enemy, they understood by him that the States and Governor of the Town once aday went privately up the Steeple to view the Hollanders Trenches, if that any advantage might be gained by Sallies or otherwise; The Prince immediately contriurs with a Gentleman to run to the Enemy, under a pretence he had killed a man, and that he fled for the safety of his life, who by a private sign, playing upon a Pipe, discovered their being upon the Steeple; The Hollanders Ordnance being ready planted upon a Battery, they made a shot at the Steeple, and beat it quite down, killing the Governor with the rest, then presently assaulting the Town, took it.   

CHAP. CL.  
A politic Stratagem used by the Hollanders to take in the Town of Breda, by cutting off their Guards,  
BReda a strong town in Brabant, was once by the Hollander surprised, by a Stratagem of a Boat laden with Turf, in whose Keel was embarked very closely diverse valiant Gentlemen; the Boat being brought before the Town according to its usual wont, and the Boatesman well known of the Soldiers, was suffered to come upon the Guard, where he usually made them sport and bestowed drink upon them, until he had made drunk both Corporal and Sentinel, and the rest of the Guard; then seeing his fit time, he conveys these Gentlemen into the Town, who killed the Sentinels, and cut off the Guards; and having first obtained the Watchword, they gave a privy sign by casting up a ball of Wildfire, whereby certain forres of the Estates lying in Ambush not far off, made their speedy approaches, and blowing open the Ports entered the Town, and took possession of the Ordnance, before any alarm was given; Likewise by Carts jaded with Corn, and Hay, having Soldiers laid in a hollow place the like projects have been done; For prevention of these things they are gauged with Iron spits made for that purpose, before they are suffered to enter the Ports, fearing lest treachery should be in them.   

CHAP. CLI.  
A Policy which the City of Cassiline used, to make Hannibal raise his Siege.  
THe City of Cassiline being besieged by Hamball, after they endured a long Siege and hard brunt; they took occasion to plow up all their waste grounds within the walls, and to dig for Corn and roots; Hannibal perceiving they were sowing their seeds, was verily persuaded, they had sustenance sufficient to last them until their seeds came to maturity, which made him presently raise his Siege, when indeed they could not have held the Town one week longer for famishing.   

CHAP. CLII  
Caesar's Policy in letting the Dutch men flee that he might vanquish them.  
CAEsar having cooped up the Dutchmen, that they could not flee, he thought better to open them a way to run, than to hazard the fight; by which he overthrew them in their disorderly flight.   

CHAP. CLIII.  
How by a Stratagem the Guard of the Sconce at Zutphen was cut off; and the Sconce taken, and immediately after the Town.  
AT Zutphen in Gelderland, the Enemy had raised a strong Sconce by the River Issell, which they potently managed, in regard it did command the Town; whereby the States of Holland were not able to besiege the Town, without that Sconce was first taken: wherefore they procured a dozen English and Flemish young Feminine faced Gentlemen; who were apparelled in Country Maids clothing, some having Butter, others Poultry, and the rest Eggs, which they brought by the Sconce feigning to sell it; the soldiers begun to cheapen their commodities, at length grew to toy with them, and finding them somewhat tractable, they pulled them into the Fort; every Soldier being busy in drinking, and some courting of these supposed Maids, they took opportunity with a short skein which hung by the inside of their Coats, every maid to stab the Soldier that was next her, whereby they cut off the whole guard, then by a private sign certain troops of the Estates (which lay close by in ambush to attend the design) came and maintained the work; by which means in few days they got the Town of Zupthen also.   

CHAP. CLIU  
A Policy used by the Romans to relieve such Towns as had rivers running by or thorough them.  
THe Romans used to relieve their besieged Towns when any River came thorough it, or near unto it, by putting Corn and Munition in small Barrels, which were so evenly balanced that they might only swim, and be kept from sinking; these were conveyed down the stream in a dark night, so as the Enemy could not discover them; also dried Nuts they threw down the stream which the Soldiers (knowing the time of their coming down) fished out of the water, and relieved their necessities; when the Enemy hath admired how the Garrison should possibly have been relieved.   

CHAP. CLV.  
How the Governor of Bergen-up-zone had like to have routed Spinola's Army at his first besieging it.  
WHen marquis Spinola drew his Army before Bergen-up-zone, the Governor invented a Politic Stratagem to have discomfited his Army as they stood in Battalia, before they had entrenched themselves; first, he caused all his best Troops to be in a readiness to sally out, likewise all his Horse-troopes were to assist them. He also provided all the Bedees' and jades, and all kind of Horses of no Service, that he could possibly get, and having furnished them with old Furniture and Pistols and Carbines fashioned of Wood; these were to come softly on the Rear of the Enemy, and the Foot and the other Horse were to charge them in the Front, to the intent the Enemy seeing such a great and unexpected strength of Horse, might be dismayed; which thing indeed had taken effect, had those supposed Harquebusiers come up as they were commanded, but they fetched so great a compass about, that they came too late, for the Enemy had beaten back the other Troops to the Ports (before they came in view) and had spent all their Ammnnition; for no sooner did the Enemy perceive those false Troops, but they disorderly retreated into those Trenches they had then made, and had the States soldiers than had powder and shot to have pursued a Charge in their disorder, they had questionless routed them.   

CHAP. CLVI.  
A Policy used by Mennon of Rhodes, to draw his Enemy out of his Trenches to give him Battle.  
MEnnon of Rhodes finding no possible means to draw his Enemy out of his Trenches (wherein he lay strongly encamped) to give him Battle on the Plains; sent unto his Enemy's Camp one of his Household servants, under the Colour of a Fugitive, who gave them to understand, that the Soldiers of the said Mennon were in a mutiny, and together by the ears, and for that cause the greatest part of the Army went away at that instant; and to the intent the greater credit might be given to his words, there were sent away certain Bands whom they saw to depart from the Camp, and so understood there was a great tumult, and being further opportuned by the said Fugitive to take this advantage, they might easily in the time of this disorder ruin Mennons Camp; to this the Enemy condescended, and straightways fallyed out of their strong Trenches, to assail those, who (by this Project) overthrew them for their too much credulity.   

CHAP. CLVII.  
How Marcellus by a Politic Stratagem, cut off Hanibals Forces, which came to assault the Town of Nola.  
ONe Bantius a Commander in the Siege of Cane, being fore wounded by Hannibal, and by him also taken Prisoner, he used him very nobly with gifts and fair promises, suffering him to pass quietly to the besieged Town of Nola, thinking to have made use of him in betraying the Town to Hannibal; but Marcellus being General of the Forces in the Town, perceived by the strange carriage of Bantius, that Hannibal had infected him, whereupon Marcellus closed with him by fair speeches, with great gifts, and mighty protestations of preferments and honours, whereby he won his love, and discovered unto him, that Hannibal intended to scale the Walls at such a time, which accordingly he did; but Marcellus having made ready for resistance, had prepared certain Troops in a readiness to sally out of the Town to take the advantage of the Enemy's disorders, who falling upon them in several places unexpectedly, vanquished them: Thus by making use of a Traitor, a Victory was obtained.   

CHAP. CLVIII.  
A Policy which Scipio used, to weaken and dishearten the Army of Asdrubal, before he would give him Battle, whereby he gained the Victory.  
SCipio being Encamped in a Plain against Asdrubal, daily they drew themselves into Battle, yet not attempting to charge either the other, whereupon they firmly concluded, that at what time soever they should fight, their Battles should be drawn in the same figure, as they before had practised; but Scipio being politic, victualled both his Horse and Men in the Night, and drawing out certain of his men by peep of day, to give an Alarm to Hasdrubals Camp, to cause him to draw his Army out of the Trenches, and to expect a present fight; Scipio now presently altered his form of imbattelling, and being drawn out of his Trenches earlier than formerly he was wont, yet he protracted the execution of Battle, only using light skirmishes, to keep them from feeding either man or beast, until at length he thought they would be ready to faint for lack of rest and food; about noon he advanced his Wings forward a good pace, leaving his main Battle a good space behind, marching leisurely after, also he drew out a Division, which wheeled about and charged Hasdrubals Wings in the Flank, and his own Wings being in the Front, whereby the Enemy was overcharged; yet Hasdrubals Battle durst not stir to assist, fearing Scipio's Battle, and had they marched forwards to have charged Scipio's Battle, they had been enclosed, and so charged on every side: By this Stratagem Scipio got the victory.   

CHAP. CLIX  
A Politic Stratagem which Titus Didus made use of, to prevent his Enemy from Encountering with his fresh Supplies, that were coming to assist him.  
Titus' Didus having diverse Forces marching towards his Camp to strengthen his Army, whereof his Enemy being informed, prepared to encounter them upon the way, and to cut them off; whereupon Titus Didus having certain Prisoners of the Enemy, he gave out in their presence, that every man should be in a readiness to give Battle the next morning to the Enemy; and withal, took an occasion to let the Prisoners go to their quarters, who declared that Didus had given order for a Battle the next morn, whereupon the Enemy was afraid to diminish their forces, and durst not go to encounter the Soldiers of Titus; by this policy they arrived at his Camp in safety, which otherwise could not possibly have been without the loss of most of them.   

CHAP. CLX.  
A policy of Hannibal, to bring the Romans into jealousy of their General Fabius Maximus, that thereby he might work his own ends.  
HAniball having Pillaged and burned all the Fields about Rome, he only caused to be reserved safe the fields and goods of Fabius Maximus, to cause a jealousy to arise, that there was some friendship betwixt the Enemy and him, by this means Fabius was not be trusted. Also, Metellus to having an Army against jugurth, all the Ambassadors that jugurth sent him, were required by Metellus give unto him their General prisoner, and after to the very same men he wrote Letters to the same effect, which wrought them such discredit, that in short time jugurth had all his Counsellors in suspicion, and put them to death. The like was practised by the Romans upon Hannibal when he fled to Antiochus, their Orators wrote to him so frequently and familiarly, that Antiochus suspected him, and would not put confidence in his Counsels.   

CHAP. CLXI.  
A Politic Stratagem whereby an Army hath been disheartened in time of Battle, which hath caused their overthrow.  
AT Muscleborough-field there was a policy used, to cause a rumour to be spread in the Enemies Battle, that their General was slain, and some part of the Troops defeated and put to flight; at this the Enemy was so amazed in the midst of their fight, that they gave way, and broke their Ranks. Titus Quintus did practise the like, but this must be acted in that part of the Army where the General is not to be seen.   

CHAP. CLXII.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Labienus in France, whereby he vanquished his Enemy's Army marching over a River.  
LAbienus in France, seeing his Enemy desirous to pass a River to present him Battle, he counterfeited that he feared their pote●●cy, and feigned to March away, yet leaving secret Ambushes, which gave Labienus intelligence, that a good part of the Enemy's Army was passed over the River; he suddenly returned, and defeated them before the residue could get over to their rescue.   

CHAP. CLXIII.  
A Policy whereby an Army may pass over a River in safety, when the Enemy attends the advantage to ruin them.  
QVintus Lutatius in his Wars against Cimbry, was close pursued, even to the side of a River, where either he must pass, or receive Battle, wherefore he settled his Army down by the River's side and entrenched himself, setting up some Tents, and sending abroad for fortage, as though he meant indeed to stay by it; The Enemy believing the same, did in like manner encamp his Army, and sent out his Soldiers likewise for Provision; Lutatius making use of the Cimbryes' negligence, the night ensuing, suddenly passed the River with his Army before the Enemy could dislodge, and drew his men in order to give them Battle.   

CHAP. CLXIIII.  
An excellent Policy for a General to put off a people that he is in league withal, and desires his assistance.  
THe Athenians and Lacedæmonians desired assistance of Gelon the Son of Dinomenes, he being General over the Siracusians against Xerxes, who had past the Hellespont with his mighty Army; unto which Gelon consented, and under a colour of his willingness levied thirty thousand Soldiers, and two hundred Ships to do them service, conditionally that they should make him General of one of their Armies, either by Sea or Land, which they refused to do; But afterwards upon better consideration they yielded to his proposition, and to that purpose sent their Ambassadors, to whom he returned this answer, That May was past, and the Spring withered.   

CHAP. CLXV.  
The policy of Vigetius to convey Foot-troopes over a River that is passable, so that the stream shall not offend them.  
VIgetius hath a rule in passing a River that is wadeable, if the stream be violent and swift, to cause certain Horsemen to cross the River in two places, leaving a Lane between them for the Soldiers to pass; the one rank of Horse are to break the strength of the water, and the other Rank below are to sustain the Soldiers.   

CHAP. CLXVI.  
How by a Politic device, the Hollanders obtained a convenient piece of ground from their Enemy, upon which they built the Sconce called Skinkes, which could not be gained by force of Arms.  
TH● Hollanders having sound a certain piece of ground very convenient, to raise a Fort in it, which might be made impregnable: it being a point of ground lying between two mighty Rivers, the Wale and the Leck; they knowing not how to obtain it, in regard diverse of the Enemies strong holds bordered upon it, which would have beaten them off, had they presumed to have entered it; and beside, they were loath the Enemy should take notice that the place was so convenient for that purpose, as they knew it to be, for it cut off all relief by water, that all the adjacent Towns were accommodated with, wherefore they plotted with a Country fellow named Skincke, to hire that piece of land to feed Colts in it▪ and for to keep them from straying out he was to raise a Wall with a great Ditch from one River to another, which was about 400 Rod▪ this being finished, the Hollanders came sailing up the River by night with certain Troops, which they landed there, and by the strength of that Ditch and Rampart, they beat off the Enemy; (for they had no other passage but thereby) until they had built the Sconce, which is now called by the name Skinkes Sconce, so famous for the late Siege.   

CHAP. CLXVII.  
Hanibals politic Observations, in placing his Battles upon advantages.  
HAniball against the Romans in the battle of Cannae had gotten the advantage from the Enemy both of Sun and wind, and had imbattelled his Army upon the higher ground: these three things are to be principally considered as coadjutors in a victorious Skirmish: the like did M●●rius against the Cimbrians; by which he obtained an honourable Conquest.   

CHAP. CLXVIII.  
A Policy used by Pyrrhus, whereby he deluded the Lacedæmonians, that his design for the conquest of the Town of Sparta might take effect.  
THe mighty general Pyrrhus having secretly levied an Army, and had given out that his design was against Antigonus; he having conquered almost all the Country of Macedon by a fortunate Battle not long before; whereupon they began to suspect their Town of Sparta: But Pyrrhus in policy caused them to understand, that he honoured the Town so much for the noble discipline and good learning, that he intended to send his two Sons thither to be educated, thus deluding them by this colourable way, he suddenly took his opportunity to enter with his Army upon Laconia; where he presently demeaned himself an open Enemy, conquering at his pleasure.   

CHAP. CLXIX.  
How Demetrius by a politic Stratagem, overthrew the Army of Ptolemy; which not long before had vanquished him.  
CIlles, Lieutenant General to King Ptolemy, was sent with an Army against Demetrius Son to Antigonus, who not long before was overthrown in Battle by Ptolemy: Cilles rather thinking to find Demetrius fleeing, then to hazard another Battle, marched very indiscreetly and without all order, as not fearing any to oppose him: Demetrius understanding the order of his Troops, drew out certain of his light armed men, and marchd a whole night to meet him in his Camp, where he found his Troops lying confusedly and scattering; not having any Guards or resistance placed to secure the Army▪ whereupon he took his opportunity to fall into his Camp, where he routed and put to flight Cilles Soldiers; and took him likewise prisoner, and overthrew his whole Army.   

CHAP. CLXX.  
A politic way to weaken an Enemy's Army.  
THe ancient Worthies in Policy would oftentimes suffer an Enemy to take certain of their meanest Towns: to the intent that the Enemy should (by degrees) more and more weaken his Army, by putting into them strong Garrisons: when afterwards (assaulting the much impaired residue of the Army) have by this politic way at the length, made means to overcome the adverse Party.   

CHAP. CLXXI  
A politic Stratagem used by Fulvius, whereby he cut off the sallies of the Cimbrians.  
FVlvius used this Policy against the Cimbrians, caused his Horsemen to assault their Camp diverse times: the Cimbrians sallying out, repelled them; wherefore he set an ambush behind the Camp of the Cimbrians, and causing their Camp to be again assaulted by his Horse, they issuing out of their Camp, as formerly they had done to close them; Fulvius his Soldiers lying in ambush got between them and home, whereby they entered the Fort and saked it.   

CHAP. CLXXII.  
A Policy whereby Alexander deceived the Illyrians, by counterfeiting the Enemy's Colours, did overthrow them.  
IF an Army lies near encamped to the Enemies; it is great policy for the General to send part of his men with the Enemy's Colours a pillaging, and to burn the Country; whereby the Enemy may think they are men come to aid them, as Alexander did against the Illyrians; and Le●tenus against the Carthagenians; Alexander's Soldiers having counterfeited the Illyrians Colours, and burning his own Country, made them faithfully believe that they were certain of their own Forces, sent to assist them: whereupon diverse of the Enemy's Soldiers did run to meet them disorderly: Alexander's men taking this opportunity, fell upon the disordered troops, and overthrew them.   

CHAP. CLXXIII.  
A Policy used by Tamirus and Tiberius Gracchus, whereby they overthrew their Enemies whole Army at once, without loss or hazard to themselves.  
TAmirus in his wars against Cyrus and Tiberius Gracchus against the Spaniards, feigning themselves to be afeard of the Enemy, having suddenly abandoned their Camps, and left them furnished with store of Wines and good cheer; to the intent their Enemies might take their fills and wallow in their pleasures: then suddenly they have returned with their Armies, and assaulting them have found them like sots not fit to make a resistance, whereby they have been all destroyed: Some have practised to poison their wines and Beer, with their victuals, by which their Enemies have died like Rats.   

CHAP. CLXXIV.  
A politic Stratagem used by Eumenes, to cause his Soldiers to follow him upon a dangerous attempt; and how he stopped Antigonus proceedings, and overcame him.  
Eumenes, perceiving that his Soldiers were much daunted at the sudden news of Antigonus his approach to assault his Camp; and fearing the fidelity of his Soldiers, he being but newly chosen their Vindex, thought it more safe to make use of some politic way to prevent Antigonus his coming; wherefore he used good and beseeming speeches to his Soldiers, desiring them to prepare immediately to follow him; for his own part be would undertake to stay Antigonus in his march: whereupon he hasted with certain of his Friends to the top of diverse hills making sundry great fires, that were seen into Antigonus his Camp; who thinking that a very great Army was there in a readiness, and fearing his design was discovered, caused him to make a pause, and to bethink himself of his own safety. Eumenes' Soldiers seeing this take good effect, came all flocking unto him, and there strongly fortified themselves; so that Antigonus could not force him from his works: But Eumenes having laid an ambush of Horse at the foot of the hill, charged Antigonus his Forces in the Rear as they came to assault the Camp, and overthrew them.   

CHAP. CLXXV.  
A Policy to gain a Town whose fidelity is doubtful.  
POmpey perceiving the Cattenensians were falling off from him, and tha● if he should offer to stir, they would stand upon their own defence; he in policy sent unto them to desire them they would be content to receive certain sick men of his, to which they condescended; but Pompey under the habit of sick persons, sent most able valiant men, who taking a fit opportunity, let Pompey's Army into the Town.   

CHAP. CLXXVI.  
A Policy used by Alexander Magnus to secure Thracia, (which he had newly conquered) from Rebellion.  
ALexander Magnus, desiring to assure himself of the Country of Thracia, in regard he was to make wars in Asia, he thought it best to take with him all the principal men of Thrace, and he set over the common people men of mean birth, and low degree, to govern them until his return; so giving those Princes (he took with him) places of great command in his Army, with extraordinary pay, he held them secure and quiet; which had they been left behind, they would soon have rebelled: The like course did Philip King of Spain use to be secured of England when he went to Saint Quinti●s.   

CHAP. CLXXVII.  
A Policy to beguile an Enemy from opposing an Army that would march over a River.  
IF an Army be opposed by the Enemy, from passing over a River (without great disadvantage unto him) after a few days march by the River's side, if the Enemy follows on the other side to hinder them, than the best way is to draw out of every Company certain Soldiers, who must secretly be conveyed unto the next Wood, directing them, that the next day after the Army is departed, they should come to the River and lay over their Bridges and strongly fortify it; the Enemy seeing the full number of Troops and Colours will not mistrust any thing, but will march on to prevent their going over as before they were accustomed, those in ambush seeing the Coast clear, having finished their works, the Army hath stolen back again, and marched over without danger or resistance.   

CHAP. CLXXVIII.  
A Politic Stratagem used by the Duke Bernhard of Saxon-Weymar, whereby he surprised the strong Town of Manheim in the Pallatinate.  
Duke Bernhard of Saxon-Weymar by a Stratagem surprised the Town of Manheim, being the strongest in all the Pallatinate seated upon the River Rhine, where the River Nekar flows into it, he marches towards the Town with five hundred men, ordering his men so, that he might reach the Town the next Morn an hour or two before day; so soon as he approached, sent word to the Governor, that he was a Commander of a Town of their side, and named his name accordingly; and that having been out upon a Partee that night, was by the Enemy beaten in thither for his refuge, and that the Swedes were ready to fall upon the Rear of his Troops; he earnestly desired to be let in with all expedition: The Governor giving credence to his feigned tale, opened the Ports, and gave him free passage into the Town, whereby he took occasion to cut off the Guards, and slew three hundred of the Garrison, and took Maravelli the Governor, and his Lieutenant Prisoners, and enjoyed the Town; which by force could not have been taken without a long Siege.   

CHAP. CLXXIX.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Alexander, whereby he forced his Enemy from a Passage, which by strength he could not have ganed.  
ALexander in the Wars against Darius was prevented by Bessius, who had gotten the advantage of a straight Passage over a high Rock, which constrained Alexander to make use of a Stratagem; he having the opportunity of a mighty windy day, stackt upon a heap a huge pile or Wood and brush Faggots, and setting it on fire, the Wind carried the Coals, Flame, and Smoke, so strongly in the face of the Enemy, that they were glad to quit the place; which otherwise would have been impossible for his Army to have done, in regard of the disadvantage of the place.   

CHAP. CLXXX.  
How Scipio by his Justice and chaste carriage towards a fair Lady which he had taken Prisoner, won the hearts of his Enemies.  
Justice and Chastity wins the heart of an Enemy, more than any policy else that may be devised, as by the example of Scipio in Spain; where he rendered a young Lady very beautiful to her Father and Husband, without offering her any discourtesy; which made him win more Cities and Towns in Spain, than formerly he could do with his potent Army. Likewise, Caesar in his Wars in France, caused the Timber and such necessaries to be paid for, which he used to make the Lists about his Army, whereby he got such a name of justice, that the Conquest of that Province was obtained with ease.   

CHAP. CLXXXI.  
A Politic answer of Alexander the Great unto certain malicious Enemies, and his wise devise to gain their love.  
ALexander the Great was solicited to take a strict revenge of Arcadian and Nicanor, who had used evil speeches of Philip of Macedon, father in Law to Alexander, and that they conceived them for those affronts, to be highly worthy of death; to whom Alexander most politicly and wisely answered, that first it was to be considered, whether the fault lay in them that used the abusive language, or in King Philip; Secondly, that it lies in the power of every man to be well spoken of, if he will endeavour it: which indeed proved so, for after King Philip relieved their necessities, there were none in the Kingdom did him more honour and truer service than they did, in all the time of his Wars.   

CHAP. CLXXXII.  
A politic course used by Tamburlaine in his wars, whereby he gained speedy Conquests.  
TAmberlaine the Great, in all his Wars, used his Enemies to three Banners; the first day he set up a white Flag, signifying favour and mercy, if they yielded immediately; The second day a Red Banner, betokening blood and loss of lives; The third day a black Banner, in token of the utter subversion of Cities or Towns, burning them to as●es; by this Policy he made the world tremble, to withstand his first Summons, for he never granted pardon after the first refusal, whereby he conquered with small pains, or effusion of blood.   

CHAP. CLXXXIII.  
A Policy used by King Edward the Fourth to suppress his Rebels, which otherwise had hazarded the ruin of his Kingdom.  
THe Earl of Warwick by the instigations of the Duke of Clarence, (who was Brother to King Edward the Fourth of England) plotted a Rebellion in the North. The King perceiving the eminent danger that he was like to hazard, thought it great wisdom to grant his gracious Pardon to be proclaimed unto all such as would lay down their Arms and come in, whereupon the Rebels considering the present danger they were in, made the greatest part of them bethink themselves, that the safest course was, to accept of this gracious offer, and not to run a double hazard, whereupon they came in, and acknowledged their heinous offences, desiring to have his Majesty's favour renewed.   

CHAP. CLXXXIIII.  
A Politic devise used by William Rufus to get Monies.  
KIng Williaw Rufus had long wars in France, which had much impoverished him, and being brought into a great straight for lack of Moneys, he devised a Politic way to help himself by levying twenty thousand Soldiers (being men of good rank and fashion) to be conducted into Normandy to aid him against France, who being in their March towards the Coasts side, and ready to be embarked, it was signified unto them from the King, that as well for their particular safeties, as also for not disfurnishing the Realm of strength, whosoever would pay ten shillings, towards the levying of Soldiers in Normandy, he might be excused, and stay at home; the which favour they generally embraced, and willingly paid every man his stipend, by this devise he gained 10000 pounds.   

CHAP. CLXXXV.  
A Politic course to keep a new Conquered people from Innovations and Rebellions.  
_●Here a Conquest hath newly been either in a Kingdom, City, or Town, the best way to prevent the people from inventing Rebellions and Innovations, is to impoverish them, so as they shall have no leisure no● means, to put any mischief in practice, for busying themselves in getting their livelihood.   

CHAP. CLXXXVI.  
A politic way to stay Mutines in an Army, and to cut off the chief Author without running a hazard.  
WHen Mutines are a broaching, a General must be wise, and circumspect in applying himself to appeal them, and first to sever the Confederates, in dividing them, and breaking their Faction whereby to defeat it; for if the Authors of it be of any great command, or men of quality; and that the original proceeds from discontents, and that they have drawn a strong party to side with them, whereby the Laws of the Field cannot take place without running a hazard to the whole Army; then the best way is to deal mildly with them, using fair terms and promises, willingly condescending to such requests as shall be by them desired, dealing privately with some particular men▪ and sometimes with many together; and eftsoon filling them with promises and hopes, using pensive, yet vehement words, which may induce them to believe, that they proceed not from any dissembling intents; and so by degrees prevail to cut off the principal heads, and then the rest of the body will soon fall off of itself.   

CHAP. CLXXXVII.  
A Policy used by King William, to Malcolm King of Scotland, who had invaded this Land, thinking to gain his peace, he would have yielded to any Conditions.  
KIng William the Second, having weakened his Army, by his great Wars in France, Malcolm King of Scotland perceiving what broils and Contentions this poor King was hemmed in withal, took his opportunity to make use of it, and with his Army invades England, (considering the Premises) he thought to bring King William to what terms of Peace he should desire, and that in regard of his great losses, he would be very moderate in demanding any Articles from the King of Scotland; this Project being brought to the upshot, King William showed himself more resolute than ever ●efore in his prosperity, affirming in high terms, that he scorned to yield to any difficulties; Whereupon Malcolm conjecturing that such a high confidence could not be without good grounds; he consented to any Condition that King William did desire.   

CHAP. CLXXXVIII.  
Politic Observations in a Confederate War.  
THat Army which intends to invade an Enemy, the strength whereof consists of diverse Confederates▪ the Service which is to be expected, must be speedily done, for in a short time such an Army will fall into diverse inconveniences; as either a dissipation and dissolvement, or else fall into a confusion, in regard of great difficulties that will arise, and straits that they must be exposed unto, especially being far remote from succour and relief, or hardly to be relieved; whereas the Enemy being in his own Land, at hand may have speedy supplies, both of Men and Ammunition; as by the example of Robert Duke of Normandy, eldest Brother to King William, who with diverse other Princes of Europe had surprised jerusalem, and diverse other Cities, yet soon ●ell at odds, and were dissipated.   

CHAP. CLXXXIX.  
A policy used by the Governor of Croizon to make his cowardly Soldiers fight.  
CRoyzon being besieged by General Norrice; the Governor of the Fort seeing his Soldiers faint in the defence thereof: wherefore (to prevent it) all that did play the Cowards, or that did speak of yielding; he caused to be chained to a post set in some breach, with his weapons in his hand to defend himself and it. By this device the rest of their fellow Soldiers would rather venture their persons honourably, then to be compelled with a greater danger dishonourably.   

CHAP. CXC.  
A Policy used by Generals to beguile hunger in a strait besieged Town.  
THe People of Lydia were the first that invented Games, as Dice, Cards, Chess, and the like, necessity and hunger forcing them unto it; according to that of Persius, Artis Magister ingenijque Largitor venture. For being sorely vexed with famine in the time of Atis one of the Progenitors of Omphale, they used every second day (by playing at these Games) to beguile their hungry bellies: thus for 22 years, they continued playing and eating by turns.   

CHAP. CXC.  
A politic Stratagem practised by the Governor of Berghen, against the Prince of Parma's Forces, by which he destroyed diverse of them, and preserved the Town from surprising.  
THe Prince of Parma bringing a mighty Army before Berghen-opzome; the Governor made choice of two English men, (who in former time had been the Duke's prisoners) to steal to the Duke's Camp, to let him understand that the strength of the Town was most English, and that for diverse discontents they were ready to mutiny; and that (if it pleased him) he could infect some chief Captains that should command the principal Guards to give way for his entrance into the Town; and (that the Governor should not mistrust any treachery) they would only shoot powder at them in their Ordnance and Muskets without Bullets; and that at such a night he should not fail of his enterprise; and for the better assurance, one of those Englishmen was to be left in hostage to be slain if they did not really effect it: whereupon the Prince gave them large gifts, with great promises of future preferment. The sign being given that the Duke should come with his Army, the English Hostage was bound hand and foot, and (for their better security) was carried in the Front of the Army; that if any treason should be, he might be the first should suffer: so (finding the Ports open, and the Pieces discharged only with powder) made them come flocking upon the Bridge; but so soon as the foremost was entered with the English Gentleman that was their Hostage; the Lord Willoughby let down the Port-cullisses; and (being ready with the whole strength of the Town) gave them such a Volley both of great and small Shot, that they slew and drowned many hundreds. This Project caused Parma to raise his Siege from before Berghen.   

CHAP. CXCII.  
A Politic Observation for a General, if he fears the strength of his Enemy's Battle, to march from him by night.  
Our famous Generals used this Observation in their Wars: Si pauci necessario cum multitudine pugnare cogantur, consilium est noctis tempore Bellifort●●●●tentare.   

CHAP. CXCIII.  
A Politic Stratagem whereby the King of Naples regained the possession of a City and Castle formerly lost to the King of France.  
FErand King of Naples, having lost his Kingdom to the King of France, he understood the King of France had fought a great Battle with the Venetians and Milla●●ys at Fernon; conjectured with himself how by a wile to repossess himself of the Castle in the City of Naples, to which end (having got some few Troops in arms) marched towards the City, and sent a Nuntio to the Governor, to let him understand, that their King was slain, and the Army discomfited, and if they would yield up the possession of the Castle, they should have good quarter, but if they did withstand this fair pro●●er, they should expect nothing but utter confusion; whereupon they being at a stand, and hearing of a truth that such a Battle was fought but no certain news of the event, made them give credit to the King of Naples his report, and fearing the worst, yielded the City and Castle, which occasioned the loss of the Realm.   

CHAP. CXCIV.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Nauplius the Father of Palamedes, whereby he destroyed 200 of the Grecians ships, as they came for the Island of Euboea.  
IN the Island of Euboea, Nauplius the Father of Palamedes understanding that his son was slain by the hands of Paris, wherefore he conceived such displeasure against the whole Host of the Grecians, that he intended their general destruction; to this end he caused fires to be made upon the top of the most dangerous and unaccessible Rocks in this whole Island, and had removed all the Booyes and Sea-marks into dangerous shelves, the greeks taking this (according to the custom of the times) to have been the marks of some safe Haven made thitherwards, where they were miserably cast away, there perishing 200 ships, and many thousand men.   

CHAP. CXCU.  
An excellent policy used by Mahomet Bassa to conceal the death of Soliman one of the Ottoman Emperors from his Soldiers at the Siege of Sigeth in Hungary fearing lest they should mutiny.  
SOlimon one of the Ottoman Emperors, dying at the Siege of Sigeth in Hungary, which was cunningly concealed by Mahomet Bassa, the space of twenty days, before the janissaries knew of it; who when any did inquire for him, he would show them diverse times the Emperor ●itting in his Horselitter, as being troubled with the Gout, causing his Physicians to go too and fro with their Physic as if they had him in cure; but after the Soldiers suspected ill dealing, they began to be mutinous, whereupon he promised they should see him the next day; wherefore they apparelled the Corpses in royal large Robes, and placed it in a Chair at the end of a long Gallery, and a little Boy cunningly placed behind him, to move the King's hand to his head, as if he should stroke his Beard, (as his manner it seems was) which sign of life and strength, the soldiers seeing were contented; and so was his death concealed forty one days more, until the Siege was ended and a new Emperor established.   

CHAP. CXCVI  
A Politic Stratagem used by Simon Son of Miltiades being Captain of the Athenians, whereby he overthrew the Sea and Land-forces of the Persians in one day.  
SImon the Son of Miltiades Captain General of the Athenians, overthrew the Sea and Land-forces of the Persians in one day, he took and sunk no fewer than forty ships, and three hundred Galleys, in the Sea fight; which ended, he furnished and manned the Persian ships with his own best soldiers attired in the Persians habiliments, and waving the colours of the Persians; upon their approach the Camp was opened, where every man prepared to welcome their victorious Countrymen (as they thought.) But the Greeks no sooner entered, but suddenly put them all to the sword, and took twenty thousand of them Prisoners.   

CHAP. CXCVII.  
A Policy of the Duke of Bourbon to cause his fleeing Soldiers to stand a charge.  
AT the Battle of Agincourt, Lewis of Bourbon having suffered a defeat in his left wing, weighing the dishonour, gathered some scattered troops of Horse that stood doubtful of the event; proclaiming the English had the worst, and if they would show their valours, he warranted them the victory; the French being then all ready to flee, he procures a Soldier to run through the Army to crave supply, protesting the English were yielding, for that King Henry the fifth had offered to yield his troops, and to flee for refuge. This device did wonderfully hearten the French to abide the other charge, who would otherwise before have fled.   

CHAP. CXCVIII  
A Policy used by King Henry the fifth, being overcharged with Prisoners, if fresh Supplies should have assailed him.  
AT the same Battle of Agincourt, after the French were fled, a world of Prisoners being taken in the pursuit; in the interim, certain French fugitives seized upon the King's Te●ts, an Alarm being made by the Sutler's and those that guarded the Baggage; the King fearing fresh supplies presently commands every Soldier to kill his Prisoner, that they might make the safer resistance, and not be hindered by them, which in Skirmish might have done them treble damage.   

CHAP. CXCIX.  
A Stratagem whereby the Town of Fastcastle in Scotland was taken from the English.  
IN Edward the sixths' days, our English General having taken in diverse Town in Scotland, this Town of Fastcastle being one, the Governor thereof commands the neighbouring Hines to bring in their Contribution corn; the Enemy making use of this opportunity, sends diverse soldiers habited like the Scottish Peasants, with private Arms about them upon the day appointed, with sacks of Corn upon horseback; they being arrived at the Ports alighted, and every man brought his sack in upon his shoulder; no sooner were they entered, but they fell upon the Guard and cut them off, making them masters of the Ports, until diverse Troops that waited the opportunity, came and succoured them, and gained the Town.   

CHAP. CC.  
Anotable Stratagem whereby the Island of Sarke was taken from the French, it being a place of itself impregnable.  
SIR Walter Raleigh in his History of the World, relateth an excellent Stratagem, which a Gentleman of the Netherlands made use of for the regaining of the Island of Sarke which joins to Gernesey, from the French, it being a place of itself impregnable, having sufficient to sustain themselves there growing, and being every way inaccessible; This Gentleman anchored in the Road with one ship of small burden, pretending the death of his Merchant, he besought the French to bury him in hallowed ground, offering them for a gratuity such things as they had aboard; the French condescended to their requests, upon condition they should come all disarmed; whereupon they brought their Coffin upon land, filled with all kind of weapons and Ammunition; in the mean time, part of the French went to the ship to view their pennyworths, where they were detained; the Coffin being brought into the Church, and the doors shut close, they armed themselves, and fell upon the Guard and slew them; By this device they obtained the Island, which otherwise had been impossible to have been entered.   

CHAP. CCI  
A Politic device used by jugurth, to help his Army in case it were overthrown.  
IVgurth being invaded by the Romans, deferred the fight in the day of Battle, until a good part of the day was spent, knowing that if the Enemy did prevail, yet the night coming on them, they should not be so able to pursue the victory, and that they being in their own Country, and acquainted with all passages and places of strength, being protected by the darkness of the night might the better escape, and make head again upon the Romans; and chose, if the invaders should be broken, the night would be a means to cause their utter confusion, they not knowing how to find any place of refuge, but must fall into the hands of the Natives. This device stood Jugurth in great stead.   

CHAP. CCII  
A Politic Stratagem used by Count Pietro Navarese to beat his Enemies from a Breach, whereby he routed their Campe.  
COunt Pietro Navarese being besieged in a Town where the Enemy had made a Breach in the Walls, for his safety to repel them he caused certain Counter-trenches, and secret Mines to be made, wherein he laid diverse Firkings of Powder, and other murdering fire-balles; he upon the assault given retired himself, suffering the Enemy in great number to enter, only maintaining the inward works; seeing his opportunity, he gave fire to the Mines, and made a mighty slaughter of the Enemy, sallying out upon them in their disordered routs, put them to flight, and rai●ed their Siege. This was practised also at Mastriche the last Siege but one.   

CHAP. CCIII.  
A Policy used by the Prince of Orange to drown the Enemy out of his Trenches, and then to relieve the Town by Boates.  
THe Prince of Orange hath taken the opportunity to cut thorough certain Banks, letting in the Sea, which hath forced the Enemy to break up his Siege, and for his safety retire to such Hills as were near; and in the mean time he hath relieved the Town by Boats, with Men and Munition, which otherwise must have yielded to the Enemy's mercy.   

CHAP. CCIIII.  
A Policy used by the Spaniards against the French, to prevent the power of their Horses against their Foot.  
THe Spaniards in a Battle against the French at Lyrignola, finding themselves too weak in Horsemen, thought it wisdom for them to retire themselves for their better safety among the Vines, Groves, and such like uneven ground, whereby they prevented the execution of the Horse, which otherwise would have freedom; by this for the Foot in plain grounds, where they might have used their been too hard devise they got the better of the French; Some have made secret Trenches covering them with Hurdles and green swardy Turf.   

CHAP. CCV.  
A Politic Stratagem whereby the Lord Poynings gained a Castle at Samerduboys in France, there being no access to it with Ordaance.  
THe Lord Poynings at Samerduboys in France, having summoned a Castle strongly Situated upon a Hill environed with marish ground in such sort, that it was thought impossible for to bring the Cannon to batter it, and therefore the Captain of the Castle refused to yield until he saw the Cannon, wherefore the Lord Poynings caused secretly a Cannon to be made of wood artificially and coloured over, placing hurdles on the Marish with diverse Horses to draw the Carriages, as though with great difficulty they had drawn a Camnon indeed, then threatening that if he caused him to shoot (according to the Law of Arms) they should all be put to the Sword; whereupon the Captain abused by this policy, delivered up the Castle by Composition, which otherwise could not have been gained; ever since no Fort is to yield upon Composition, unless the Cannon discharges twice or thrice.   

CHAP. CCVI  
A Policy used by Monsieur Lautreck in the Wars at Naples, to make his Foreign assistance to fight.  
MOnsieur Lautreck in the Wars at Naples, having his Army composed of sundry Nations, thought it wisdom to order every Nation separately into sundry Battalions, placing in the Front of the Battle those Foreign aids, and in the time of fight he caused it to be given out, that such a Nation had the Victory, whereby the rest inflamed did most valiantly fight, and by this devise was victorious, which otherwise happily would have left him in the suddes.   

CHAP. CCVII  
How Scipio by his policy defeated the Carthaginians of their Design.  
SCipio drew his Army to Tunis, being within the prospect of Carthage, the Carthaginians made out a great Fleet to encounter with Scipio in the Haven; Scipio took his Ships and Hulks, and fastened them together with the tackling belonging to them, causing the Maste● to serve for Rafters to fasten them together; whereupon he placed his Soldiers to maintain the Bridge: He left certain places open▪ where small 〈◊〉 might swiftly sail out and in, to fight at pleasure, by this device their enterprise was impeached.   

CHAP. CCVIII.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Philopoemen against Nabis, whereby he cut off diverse of his Soldiers, and after took his Camp, and by a second Stratagem destroyed all his men.  
PHilopoemen General of the Athenian Army, being encountered with a mighty Army, under the conduct of Nabis, and fearing his own strength, took the advantage of a Ford, where Nabis Forces were to March over, to make their approaches against his Camp; Philopoemen laid privily an Ambush near the water; who taking the advantage of their disordered passage, s●ue many of the Assailants, and losing no opportunity, he presently caused one of his Soldiers to run to Nabis Camp (who lay strongly entrenched) as a Fugitive, and told him that the Athenians had a purpose to get between him and Lacedaemon, whereby they would hinder his Retreat into the City, and also that he had a sure plot to stir up the Citizens to rebel, whereby they might regain their freedom. Nabis believing this marched secretly away in the dark, only leaving a few Companies behind to show themselves upon the Ramparts, making great lights in their quarters, the better to conceal his March; But Philopoemen assaulted the Camp, and chased Nabis into the Woods, where he expected the favour of the night; Philopoemen dreaming they would steal into Lacedaemon in the dark, drew certain of his fresh Soldiers, laying them in Ambuscado upon two of the principal passages that conducted to the City, and causing in his own Camp store of great lights to be made, whereby they thought all at rest they ventured to creep home by small Troops, where most of them were slain by philopoemen's Soldiers.   

CHAP. CCIX  
A politic Stratagem to prevent an Enemy from entering, the Ports being blown open.  
THe Duke of Burgundy coming before Bevis in France, had blown open the Ports; Yet being discovered, the Soldiers of the Town made a valiant resistance, the whilst others above upon the Wall, threw down many fiery Faggots that burned down the Bridge, whereupon he speedily retreated.   

CHAP. CCX.  
A politic Stratagem used by Maximilian King of the Romans, whereby he took in the Town of Arras.  
MAximilian King of the Romans, having promised Henry King of England to assist him in the Wars of France, meeting at Boulogne, a Peace was concluded with the French by King Henry, whereby Maximilian lost his journey, yet thinking to get something for his penny, he came to the speech of a Smith, that had a poor house built upon the Wall of the Town called Arras, and by gifts and large promises, made him agree to liquor the Soldiers upon the Guard; and as for the Governor, he was no afternoone-man, this project was cleanly performed, and in their drunken security the Town was surprised.   

CHAP. CCXI  
A Policy to prevent mischief when two great Princes 〈◊〉 to discourse.  
IF great Princes should capitulate upon any Articles of peace, it might prove very dangerous to hazard their Persons, unless in wisdom they make choice of some River between them and their two Armies, where a Bridge is to be made over with a grated Gate on the midst to keep them a sunder, and yet may discourse thorough it: also on either side a certain Company of men to view the Carriages, that no treason be put in action: as the like was performed between the King of England and the King of France; the King of England's men went through the wicket of the grate to guard the King of France, and the King of Frances men came to guard the King of England, on either side there were locks and bolts, and but 20. men a piece to guard them. By this means it could not possible be that any mischief could ensue.   

CHAP. CCXII  
A Policy to conduct troops of Horse over Bogges, Mores or deep snows.  
XEnophon in his Ascent of Cyrus, being troubled in his march with wonderful deep Snows, Mores and Bogges; he was taught by the Comarch or guide to bind bags of Straw about their Horse's footlocks, which would preserve them from danger of sinking: without which necessary and experienced practice, diverse of them have been proved (with far greater prejudice) to sink even up to the bellies.   

CHAP. CCXIII  
A Policy used by the Citizens of Priennia, by which means they deluded their Enemy by a colour of plenty, which caused him to leave his Siege.  
THe City of Priennia (being besieged by Aliattes) made use of this Stratagem: when their Town could not hold out any longer; their victuals being spent they turned out of their City diverse fat cattle, as Horses and Mules into the Enemy's Camp: the Enemy (perceiving this) sends 〈◊〉 a Spy into the Town to see whether they were so well provided as they made ●hew of: Bias the Governor (having intelligence of this Spy) caused diverse heaps of sand to be piled up together in the Streets and Marketplace; and to be strewed over with Corn; as Wheat, Rye, Pease and other Grain, which made a wonderful show of plenty; this Messenger being suffered to have recourse about the City, did take a particular view of all things, and returned into the Camp with this answer, that he saw infinite plenty both of Corn and Victuals which made Aliates presently removed his Siege. Had not this Policy taken effect, the City could not have subsisted a week longer.  
The like Policy Gracchus caused the Citizens of Cassilinum to use, whereby Hannibal was deluded; the Citizens sowing Parsnip-seeds in the fields about the Town, and defending it from the Enemies spoiling it; made Hannibal think that there was store of plenty; and that it was no policy for him to stay his Siege until those Roots were grown; wherefore he presently removed.   

CHAP. CCXIU  
A politic Stratagem, whereby young Scipio brought Hannibal into a mighty suspicion with Antiochus.  
YOung Scipio being sent by the Roman Senate to Antiochus, who had (by the instigation of Hannibal,) prepared an Army against the Romans; which should have been conducted by that crafty Enemy Hannibal; for prevention he thus practised: he would often frequent the Company of Hannibal, falling into friendly conference, about the Battles betwixt them fought before in Italy and Africa, feeding and pleasing the humour of Hannibal, lest he should lose his company and so fail of his intended purposes, which was to bring Antiochus into a mistrust and jealousy of the fidelity of Hannibal; so that the conduction of the moiety of this Army might not be granted him; which took effect, for his secret coming to Scipio● lodging; yet so, that some of Antiochus friends might take notice of it: also in the day (having conference together) if any approached near, Scipio would suddenly be silent, and wind away from his company, which actions of his wrought his desires: for Antiochus durst not trust him, fearing there was some plotted treachery betwixt them.   

CHAP. CCXV.  
Politic devices used by Archelaus Mithridates to cause his Soldiers to fight when they were both unwilling and fearful.  
ARchelaus Mithridates Lieutenant at Pir●a, perceiving his Soldiers had small courage to fight, he so wearied them with continual labour, that they were glad to desire him to fight that the wars might be ended: the same did Cyrus' King of Persia in the wars against Astyages King the Medes, minding to stir up the valour of his dejected Soldiers fiercely to give Battle to their Enemy, he wearied them all one day with hewing down of wood, and on the morrow after he made a plenteous feast for them, demanding in the feast time which day liked them best; they allowing of the pastime of that day present: to whom he replied, this pleasure must be obtained by the other days pains; for except ye first overcome the Medes, ye can never live at freedom or in pleasure; by this they took great courage to fight.  
After the same manner Epaminondas being ready to give battle to the Lacedæmonians; he (perceiving his Soldier's hearts to faint) frames a short Oration to instigate them to fight, telling them how that the Lacedæmonians had determined if they got the victory to slay all their men, to make all their wives and children bondslaves for ever; and to beat down the City of Thebes flat to the ground, with these words the Thebans were so grieved and moved, that at the first brunt they overcame their Enemies.  
Agesilaus had pitched not far from Orchomeno, a City that was in league with him; he (perceiving that the chiefest part of his Army had their treasure in the Camp) commanded the Townsmen to receive nothing into the Town belonging to the Army; to the intent his Soldiers might fight the more furiously, knowing they should fight both for their lives and goods.  
Also Gelon King of Syracuse, entering war against the Persians, to make his Soldier's disdain and undervalue the Enemy, causeth diverse of the poorest and most uncomliest weak persons of the Enemy to be stripped stark naked, and led them before all the divisions of the Army, to persuade them that the Enemy was but silly poor wretches, and scarce worth the fight withal. All these Projects have taken good effect in the ancient wars.   

CHAP. CCXIU  
A Politic Stratagem used by Flavius to bring Gracchus into an ambush, whereby he and his Romans were s●aine.  
Titus' Gracchus being in the Country of the Lucan's, who were then divided, diverse Towns being rendered up to Hannibal, and certain abode under the Romans jurisdiction, of the which sort the chief Ruler that year was one Flavius a Lucan, this Flavius on a sudden turned to Hannibal, and sending to Mago to speak with him, he conspired to deliver Gracchus the Roman General unto him, so as the Lucan's might be received into amity; which being condescended unto, he brought Mago to a great covert of Wood, willing him to hide himself with a great company of men of Arms, appointing him the time when he would bring the Roman Captain into his hands: Returning to Gracchus, he gave him to understand, that he had begun a great enterprise, and that he must be the instrument to effect it; which was, that he had moved and persuaded all the Princes of the Lucan's that were gone to the amity of Hannibal, to return again to the obedience of Rome; I did further declare to them (says he) the potency of the Roman power, how it daily increased, with the imbecility of the Carthagenians, further not to mistrust the Roman gentleness, whose nature was ever meek to those that submitted unto them; with these persuasions I found them all contented to be reconciled, so they may hear you speak and confirm my words, touching their hands in pledge of your faith, and indeed I have undertaken you shall do it, and I have appointed them a secret place well out of the way from our Camp, for fear of espies, yet not far from your own Camp; few words will dispatch this business, and by this means all the Lucan's will come wholly under your jurisdiction. Gracchus nothing mistrusting deceit and treason to lie under those sugared words, took a Guard with him (all unarmed) and road to the place appointed, Flavius was his guide; being arrived, Mago with his armed men invaded them suddenly, Flavius the Traitor turns to the Carthagenians, who furiously darted their weapons at Gracchus, and slew him and his Romans, not being able to make resistance. This should teach Generals not to be over-credulous, but to walk upon sure grounds, for had Gracchus sent Spies to view the Lucan's, in what conditions they presented thewselves in, or had he taken a sufficient guard with him, he might have eschewed this hellish treachery. Latet sub melle venena.   

CHAP. CCXVII.  
A Policy whereby Hannibal had like to have caused the Romans to have fled.  
HAniball coming to the succour of Capua which was beleaguered by two Roman Consuls, and being not able to relieve the City, he craftily sent diverse of his men forth, that could speak the Latin tongue, into diverse parts of the Host of the Romans, which should in the Consul's behalf declare, that the Roman Camps were taken and spoilt; wherefore he willed every man to save himself by flight to the next Mountains: Since by longer tarrying the greater would be their loss, this crafty deceit amazed diverse of them, and had like to have taken effect, which might have been the ruin of the Roman Army: Let this teach Soldiers to give no credit to any report in time of Battle; lest they be ruined by it.   

CHAP. CCXVIII.  
A Politic Stratagem used by Marcius General of the Romans, to make use of the Carthagenians security, whereby he overcame two Camps, and put them to the Sword.  
MArcius being made General of the Romans, was sensible of the Potency of the three Carthaginian Armies, two of them lying near Encamped one to the other, and thinking themselves secure in regard of the precedent overthrow they had given to the two Scipio's; Marcius makes a politic use of this, and by a well-delivered Oration, persuades his men to take the opportunity of that night to invade the Enemy's Camps, his reason telling him, it could not but take good effect; wherefore all things being fitted and prepared, about three a clock in the morn they set forwards to Hasdrubals Camp, the other Camp of the Carthagenians was seven miles beyond, between which was a hollow-Valley, and by it a Wood, in this Wood Marcius had placed an ambush of Roman Horses, to cut off such as fled from the first Camp to escape to the other; in the interim, he with his Troops went to the first Camp, where finding little or no Watch or resistance, they entered their Quarters, where suddenly sounding their Trumpets, and beating their Drums, and making an infinite shout, some firing the Tents, others slaying all that stood in opposition, others lying in ambush at the Ports of the Camp, to murder those that fled out; thus with sudden noise, fire, and slaughter, the other were so amazed, that they fled to the Ports and were slain; others got over the Works to the second Camp, and were taken by the Roman ambushment, so that none could possibly escape to carry news to the next Campe. This being finished, the Romans made all possible haste to the second Camp, where they arrived by break of day, finding that more easy to enter than the first; for some were fetching Wood, others Forage, some walking, others at victuals, and none ready to make a defence, these they cut off; others arming in the mean time made resistance, but when they saw the fresh blood besmeared upon their swords and shields; their hearts fainted, they then knowing the other Camp was taken, and their Friends slain. Thus in one night, were two Armies overthrown, 37000 slain, and 1800 Prisoners taken.   

CHAP. CCXIX  
A Politic Stratagem whereby Asdrubal in the Wars of Spain delivered his Army out of a great Strait from Nero, who was ready to have routed them.  
ASdruball in the Wars of Spain, being in a great Strait so as he could not stir his Army, but Nero would have taken the advantage to have routed him; wherefore he thought it policy to delude Nero by fair promises: Which was, that if Nero would suffer him and his Army to march forth the straits, without Battle, he would leave Spain without delay, and leave it wholly unto the Romans, this offer was acceptable unto Nero; the next day following was appointed for conference, about the conditions of redelivering the Castles and Fortresses in their possessions, and what day should be appointed for the Carthaginian Garrisons to depart with their Baggage. Nero thinking himself secure, was remiss in guarding the straits so strictly as before; Asdrubal taking the advantage, all the night sent away many of his Host with all his gross and heavy carriage through the straits, ever foreseeing that not overmany departed at once, to the intent that the smallness of the number, by making small noise, might with silence deceive their Enemies; The next day they held their Communications, and Writings were drawn (trivial things) until night approached, agreeing to meet the next morn to finish all matters; the same night he conveyed away more of his Baggage; the next meeting was also in vain, the time being spent in devices of communication; in the night he sent his Footmen and stuff out of danger (diverse days being employed in debating) so that most of his stuff was conveyed away; Asdrubal began to be more ridged and stiff in the agreement, insomuch that he dissented from diverse Articles, he de●ming himself partly secured. The morrow following there arose a wonderful mist, so that both Hills and Valleys were obfuscated, which joyed Asdrubal being for his purpose; he sent to Nero, letting him understand that it was a high holiday, which he always kept holy, and all the people of the Carthaginians, so that he durst not negotiate any business on it, desiring him to defer the further Communication until the morrow. Nero all this time dreaming of no fraud in this Message condescended unto it; In the mean time Asdrubal issued out of the straits with the residue of his Army very silently, and was past danger before the day was clear; then too late they espied the Camp void, and that they were grossly deluded; by this policy he saved his Army and his honour. What vigilancy and circumspection should this teach a General to eschew the like deceit, for although an Enemy's countenance be never so fair, yet his heart is treacherous: Contrarily, how should it animate a Commander to set his wits abroach, when he is in straits to wind out of them with safety and honour.   

CHAP. CCXX.  
How Hannibal by using of a Politic Stratagem in parting of his Horse-troopes, the one part falling upon the Rear of the Romans, the other into their Camp, gained a victory from Fulvius.  
IN the Wars of Spain, betwixt Hannibal and Cn. Fulvius the Proconsul, whose Army lay before Herdonia; Hannibal having intelligence useth scelerity, and with his Horsemen, and Light-footmen, had made his approaches near the Town, before the fame of his coming was known; and to put the Romans in more fear, he appeared in good array of Battle, most suddenly with his Colours displayed; Fulvius prepares to oppose him in like manner, and joined Battle with him; Hannibal setting his policies abroach, commanded his Horsemen that after a sign or token to them made, whilst the Romans were busy in Battle against the Footmen of Hannibal, and every man's eye was occupied busily, that that they should secretly coast the Field, and a part of them set upon the back of his Enemies, the other part of them to invade the Enemy's Camp and Tents, with a great noise and slaughter, proclaiming that they did not question to vanquish this Fulvius, as they had done one of his name not long before: so soon as the Horsemen assailed the Rear of the Romans (which caused a great fear and slaughter) Immediately from the Camp was heard a mighty cry and uproar, which so terrified the Romans, that some fled, and many more were slain; among which the said Fulvius and twelve Tribunes with 13000 Romans, and their Camp and stuff taken. This teacheth Generals to make use of sceleritie the wings of Conquests, and likewise it teacheth Soldier not to be daunted by any Stratagem, nor to take notice of uproars, which will betray their valours, but rather to stand firm to their tackling, and fight manfully for their freedom; for so long as a flock of sheep keep entire, the Wolf fears to seize on them, but once severed by flight, every bawling cur will destroy them.   

CHAP. CCXXI.  
How by the wisdom of Crispinus the Politic Stratagem of Hannibal, was prevented, and a like Stratagem returned upon him, by which the Town of Salopia was freed, and his own men slain.  
MArcellus with diverse of his Soldiers being slain by Hanibals Ambushes, he finds Marcellus Ring with his Signet; by this he thought to put some exploit in action; whereupon he causeth diverse Letters to be counterfeited in Marcellus name, and sealed with his Signet; the Contents were, that the night following Marcellus would privily come to the City of Salopia, wherefore he commanded the Captains and Soldiers to be in a readiness against his coming, to know his further pleasure what was to be done; this Letter posted speedily to the Governor of Salopia. But in the mean time Crispinns mistrusting this deceit, sent post to all the Towns adjoining, that Marcellus was slain, and Hannibal had his Signet, for otherwise this project had taken effect; Whereupon those of Salopia made use of the intelligence, returning the Messenger with a gentle answer; but in the mean time the Salopians provided for his coming upon the night prefixed, keeping an extraordinary strong Watch, they made no question but to pay Hannibal with his own coin; Not long before break of day comes Hannibal with his Troops close to the Ports, he having appointed six hundred Romen which were fled to him, and could speak the Language well, to call to the Porter, and to enter the Gates first. The Watch opening the Ports, and drawing up the Portcullis, the said Romans entered as fast as they might, but being entered, the Guard let fall the Portcullis with a great noise; The Salopians●●ue ●●ue them that were entered with small difficulty; for they entered without fear, bore their Arms hanging upon their shoulders, dreaming of no such Banquet; those without the Ports were likewise chased away; Thus was Hannibal taken in his own Trap. This may inform Commanders in the first place, when they have a fit opportunity to set a project afoot, to make use of scelerity; for had Hannibal put this immediately in execution before Crispinus had given them intelligence it had taken effect. Secondly, they must use all endeavours to prevent intelligence, for had Hannibal belayed the passages, he could not have missed of this Nuntio whereby he might have been the more confident, that his Design would have taken effect. In the next place, a Commander must make use of intelligence, and accordingly to regulate his actions, so that an Enemy may be wounded with his own weapons. This may be termed a golden Stratagem, to extract from an Enemy's policy his utter confusion.   

CHAP. CCXXII.  
A Policy whereby Scipio had 300 Romans armed and instructed, without the charge of the General.  
SCipio having obtained an Army to make wars in Africa, many of the young men of Arms of Sicilia grudged to undertake this journey with him, wherefore to secure himself he spoke thus; If there be any man here unwilling to venture his person in these honourable wars, let him now speak, and I will gladly hear, for I had rather you should now confess your unwillingness, than you should be drawn forth against your wills, and become unprofitable Soldiers unto me, and to the Commonwealth; Whereunto answer was made by some particular Soldiers, that if it might be in their choice, they would not venture themselves in those Wars; Scipio replied, Since you have plainly without dissimulation declared your minds, I will appoint others in your places, to whom you shall deliver your Horses; Harness, and other necessary instruments of war; whom you shall take home with you to your houses, and there instruct, teach, and exercise them in the feats of war until I send for them; the young Gallants, were glad and joyful delivering them their Arms. By this device he trained up 300. willing Soldiers without his charge.   

CHAP. CCXXIII  
A politic Stratagem used by the French, whereby they vanquished Lucius Posthumus and all his Army as they marched through a Wood  
LVcius Post-humus having wars with the French, and they being to march through the passage of a wide wood called Littana; the French provided against their coming, cutting all their Timber-trees on both sides of the way; so that being not moved, they would stand firm, but being moved, they would presently fall all together. Post-humus had 25000. in his Troops; the Frenchmen had bestowed their Troops round about the circumference of the wood: and when the Army of the Romans was well entered the wood, they cast down the furthest part of the trees growing on the borders of the wood, which being once moved fell one upon another through the wood, having no stay, throwing down and s●aying the Romans both Foot and Horses as they passed, so that scarcely ten men escaped; for those the trees spared were so amazed at the sudden accident that the French vanquished them immediately, and slew their General Post-humus.   

CHAP. CCXXIU  
The Policy of Cyrus how to gain valiant and loyal Commanders in his service.  
IT is reported of Cyrus by Xenophon how infinitely he would publicly confess he loved and honoured meritorious Soldiers; 
Lib. 1. Pag. ●0.  and when he saw men willingly offer themselves to danger, he preferred them to places of command and dignity, and honoured them beside with other gifts, whereby it appeared that valiant men were happiest, and cowards accounted as their slaves. By this devise many thrust themselves into eminent dangers; especially if they thought or imagined that Cyrus should have notice thereof: by this means he purchased both loyal and valiant commanders daring to present their bodies against most eminent perils and most difficult attempts.   

CHAP. CCXXU.  
A Policy to stir up emulation amongst Soldiers, to make them enter the greatest difficulties, and gain impregnable things.  
VBius, a Captain of the Company of the Pelignes; being commanded upon a difficult piece of Service by Flavius Flaccus the Roman Consul; his men being beaten from the Carthaginian trenches by Hanno; he strait took his Banner in his hand, and with force threw it over the ditch into the Camp of the Carthaginians, speaking with a loud voice, Evil might I fare and my Company if my Enemies shall enjoy my Banner: then by great force he lightly went over the ditch and scaled the walls of the Camp of his Enemy, whom his Company boldly followed, they being in fight with the Carthagenians; another part cried, Valerius Flaccus what sluggish cowards are we now grown? shall the Pelignes win the honour of taking the Camp of our Enemies before us Romans? Whereupon Titus Pedamius took his Colours from his Ensign, saying, This will I bear into the Field of my Enemies: follow me brave Soldiers as many as would be loath of the loss thereof: they presently being stirred with a valiant emulation, obtained the Camp, slaying six thousand, and taking as many Prisoners: this Policy to stir up emulation was the only means to obtain this impregnable Camp, from whence they had been formerly repulsed diverse times.   

CHAP. CCXXVI.  
A policy to be used at the entering of an Enemy's Town to free the Soldiers from being annoyed with stones, or Pieces, from the Battlements of houses, as also to prevent an Enemy's fury in pursuing, or retreat in a Fort or Town.  
XEnophon in his first book of the ascent of Cyrus, relates how the Droylans having betaken themselves to their chief Fort, 
Lib. 5. pag. 83. & 85.  to defend themselves against his Potent Army, at last through much difficulty having scaled the Walls, his men were forely wounded from the battlements of the houses; and likewise there being a Citadel strongly made within the Fort, they made a fierce sally out upon him that was irresistible; by accident a house falling on fire upon one side of the way, caused those that threw down stones, and weapons, from the battlements to vanish away. Xenophon perceiving this, caused the house upon the other side to be fired, which wrought his Soldiers much safety. Those from the Citadel charged his men so furiously, that there was no retreating without a manifest loss and confusion; wherefore he commanded every Soldier as he was to come up, to present his weapons and shot against the Enemy, to bring with him a quantity of Seare-wood, and to place it between the Enemy and themselves, and then to set fire on it: by this policy he stayed the Enemy's pursuit in their Retreat, and busied them in quenching their fires.   

CHAP. CCXXVII.  
A politic Stratagem, whereby Fabius the Consul took the Town of Arpos, by the help of a violent storm of Thunder, wind, and rain.  
CLassius Aitinius repairing to young Fabius, about the betraying of Arpos, Fabius being arrived within a mile of the Town about three a clock in the morn, he appointed six hundred active Soldiers to bear Scaling-Ladders, and so first to assay the scaling of the Walls; Which done, then on the inner part to break open the Gates, and (being Masters of part of the Town) by the sound of a Horn to give him knowledge; whereby he, with the rest of the Troops, might approach to their succours; as this was discussing there happened a wonderful storm, of wind, rain, and thunder, whose vehemency drove the Sentinels and Watchmen from the Walls into their Guards, where abiding a good season, not dreaming the Enemy would make his approaches in such a stormy season, they fell asleep; in the mean time the Romans making use of these storms, had quietly scalled the Walls, and were quietly passing the streets to the Ports, where they broke them open, whose noise was not heard by the Watch, so violent was the storm; then blowing their Horns, the Consul made his approaches about break of day, and entered the Town.   

CHAP. CCXXVI.  
A politic Stratagem of Scipio, in counterfeiting an entrenchment, which amazed the Carthaginians, and puzzled them to scale them.  
SCipio in the Wars of Spain, being set upon with three Armies, as he lay upon a great Hill, devised how to make some entrenchment to defend his Camp, which could not be performed, in regard the ground was so stony; neither could he get Bushes nor wood to make a defence about it, wherefore he made a show of a defence, laying his packs and packsaddles, and other gross carriages one upon another round the Camp, whereby he raised the Walls of his Camp of a good height; the Carthaginians being come, they were astonished at this, and found it very difficult to enter, only their infinite number gained the conquest from Scipio: This should put all Commanders in mind, of impaling their Army, although it be but with a Hedge, or Hurdles, for it is a great safety; as may be instanced by Captain Swa●●e, who after St●●ley, and York, had treacherously given up Deventer to the Enemy, his Company having got forth the Town, was to march over Amers-forth Heath to a Garrison there, and being set upon by a Troop of Horse of the Enemies, with certain Foot with them, he betook his Company to a sheep-fold made of Hurdles, whereby he protected his Company, and beat the Horse with their Footmen, causing them to retreit.   

CHAP. CCXXIX.  
A strange Politic Stratagem, whereby Hannibal gained a Town of great consequence, by the help of Nico and Philomenes, under the pretence of bringing in a wild Boar.  
NIco and Philomenes being great Hunters, and used to go out the City of Tarrent by night a hunting, they went towards the Army of Hannibal, to declare to him their intents, and being brought before him by the Watch, Hannibal being sensible of the plot, wished them to drive back diverse cattle, as if they had gotten them as a prey from the Enemies; this course they often used, so that it was thought marvel that they so often enterprised such feats, and ever escaped unslain; the Porter and Mayor of the City they used very kindly, giving unto them part of their prey for their courtesy and pains, being so forward and vigilant to open the Ports for their going out and in; the residue, they bestowed upon the Governor for his love and leave; the Porter was so accustomed, that at their first whistle at all times of the night, the Gates were opened unto them, all things being brought to a good pass for the accomplishing of their project. Hanibals Army lying within four days journey from the Town, he feigned himself very sick, and that it was the only reason he stayed there so long, this was bruited abroad, the night being appointed Hannibal made choice of ten thousand Horse and Foot, of the lightest armed, and removed from his Camp in the night, making speed until he came within fifteen miles of the City of Tarrent, where he secretly abode, charging his men in no wise to break their array and order, but to be ready to perform what was commanded; wherefore he first set forth to palliate his removing, and to the intent that none of the Country should descry his Army, he sent fourscore Numidian horsemen to go before him, commanding them to overrun the Country, by which his Army should pass, and those they overtook to bring back, and if they met with any they should kill them; to the intent they should be taken by the Inhabitants, for Robbers and Thiefs, and not men of War; the fame of these Robbers, came to the ears of the Governor of Tarrent, who smally regarded it, because he thought Hannibal was sick, and his Army so far a distance from the Town. He intended the next morn to send forth some men of Arms to drive back those Robbers; the same night removed Hannibal his Army to Tarrent, having Philomenes with him for his guide, being arrived near the Town it was appointed that Philomenes according to his custom should enter the Town with a number of armed men; he having awaked the Porter, telling him he had brought a mighty Boar which he had slain; at the first call he opened the Gates, and two young men of his companions first went in, then entered he and other his servants, plucking in the great Boar; the Porter being glaring at his greatness, Philomenes slew him with his Boar-spear, and incontinent let in thirty other Soldiers armed, who slew the other Watchmen at the same Port, and without noise let in the rest of the Army, and secretly brought them into the Marketplace, where they abode without noise; in the mean time Hannibal with a sufficient strength arrived at another Port; and first having made a great fire afar off, which was the sign betwixt him and Nico, who abode with other his accomplices ready within the Town looking for his coming; which so soon as Nico perceived, he answered him with another fire; notice being taken on both sides, the fire was put out, and Hannibal approached to the Gates; Nico also within the City came to the Ports guard, and slew all the Watch, and opened the Ports, so as Hannibal with his Army entered, his Horse were commanded to remain in Battalions without; he being arrived in the Marketplace with Philomenes, and his other company; then had he two thousand Frenchmen, which he divided into three parts, and sent them to diverse parts of the City; the residue he commanded to keep the most accustomed streets of the Town, and to slay the Roman Soldiers; the Alarm being given, they saw there was no way but death or yielding; wherefore the greatest number fled to a Castle in the Town, which was of great strength, and upon all advantages they might, Sallied out into the Town; Wherefore Hannibal had another Project at his finger's ends, he caused his Men to raise a Wall to hem them in, and dreaming they would issue out of the Castle to hinder the work, he placed an ambush in a secret and convenient place, which should cut them off, and disable them from annoying the Town; And accordingly it happened, for the workefolkes gave suddenly back at their approach, which heartened them to go on the further, so as the Ambushment surprised the greatest part of them: but suddenly there came Ships of War from Metapontus, and entered the Haven, and relieved the Castle; and kept all provision from the Town, so as the Town was like to endure want before their Enemies, he presently summoned a Council, it was found there was no way to hinder those Ships, but by a greater force of Shipping, and that no shipping could enter the mouth of the Haven, because they had fortified against them; whereupon he devised to hale their Ships out of a creek, and by Engines and Wheels to draw them thorough the spacious streets, and so convey them into the Haven; which he performed, and made gimselfes Master both of Town and Castle; I have been the more tedious in relating this Project, because in it there is nothing but is of great consequence to be observed by a Soldier.   

CHAP. CCXXX.  
The Policy of Xenophon in electing of Hostages.  
SEuthes having taken diverse Hostages of the Thynes which were old, and unserviceable men, not respected of them; which caused the Thynes not to regard their promise nor Hostages, but laid a Camizado to take Seuthes and Xenophon, and to destroy the Army; the Thynes d●●ming those Hostages would have made Seuthes Army secure; Wherefore they took opportunity of the night to fall upon their Guards, and to fire their quarters; but being manfully repulsed, they besought afterwards to be taken into favour again; Says Xenophon, I would counsel the Seuthes hereafter in taking Hostages, to take of the principallest, and those that were ablest, to do you most harm, and to leave the old men at home, lest you be gulled in the like kind.   

CHAP. CCXXXI.  
A Policy used by Xenophon, whereby he deluded his Enemy with his small Army, causing them to think his Army to be of a mighty strength, which made them to leave their Siege, and steal away by night.  
THe Arcadians being besieged by the Thracians, Xenophon intending to relieve them; His Army being very weak, he commanded his Horsemen to disperse themselves, and to set fire upon all things that were combustible as they went forwards; that by the multiplying of flames, the Enemy might think their Army was of great strength. The Foot performed the like upon every Hill that might be descried to the Enemy's quarters, so that the whole Country seemed on a light fire, and the Army to be of a wonderful extent and Potency; these fires were in the Evening commanded to be put out, this did so amaze the Thracians, that they verily thought, the lights being out, that Xenophon and his Army, did march towards them, and would suddenly fall upon their quarters; this fear made them leave their Siege, and abandon the place, so they stole away in the night out of their quarters, without the loss of any man to the Grecians.   

CHAP. CCXXXII.  
A Policy used by the Prince of Orange to delude an Enemy from succouring a Town.  
THe Prince of Orange, when he intended to invade any Province, or to beleaguer any town, he would plot his Design so, as the Enemy should take it in a contrary sense, as once he intended to take in Zutphen in Gelderland, he drew his men quite contrary before Gertrudenberge, who so soon as the Enemy was stirring to relieve it, he reimbarqued his men, and suddenly entrenched himself before Zutphen, where he found them secure, and unprovided for such an assault, whereby he gained the Town; and indeed such Stratagems may easily be effected, where an Army may be transported by water; for an Enemy may expect them in one place over night, and happily he may be forty miles another way by next morn, at the place which the Enemy never dreamt of.   

CHAP. CCXXXIII.  
An Imposture used by Sertorius, whereby he confirmed his Soldier's valour.  
SErtorius the Roman Chieftain used an Imposture to help himself, by means of a white Hind to stay his Soldiers from revolting; this Hind being made tame, and used to be fed by Sertorius in a private place; His Soldiers being weary of the Wars, and ready to compose their peace with their Enemy; He wished them to be content, until he had drawn the Army in to Battalia, and every man should pray to their Gods, that they would be propitious to them, and miraculously send them his pleasure, how they should demean themselves: Sertorius having written in golden Letters, how the Army should be disposed, hung it about the Hind's neck, which was secretly conveyed into his Tent, and being put out she came with the Revelation to Sertorius, which being read, that they should be Conquerors, etc. confirmed the Soldier's valours, and caused them to be victorious.   

CHAP. CCXXXIV.  
How a Scottish King by an Imposture caused his Soldiers to be valiant, whereby he obtained a victory.  
HEctor Boetius in his Annals of Scotland, makes mention of a certain Scottish King, having lost a Battle against the picts, found his people so discouraged, that they were all out of love with the Wars; the King being much grieved therewith, did suborn certain persons, who being apparelled with bright shining Scales and Seals skins, and having in their hands Truncheons of rotten shining wood, which is commonly found in the body of old Ashes, which will shine very gloriously in the dark, these did appear unto the Princes, and chief Officers of the Army (being in their dead sleep) and awaking them, did admonish them to fight afresh against the picts, and that they should not fear to assail them, for they were sent from God to tell them that they should undoubtedly obtain the Victory. This did so confirm the opinions of the Chieftains, they having seen an Angel from heaven, that God himself would fight for them, and in this imagination they charged the picts with such magnanimity, as they vanquished them, and drove them forth of their Country.   

CHAP. CCXXXV.  
A Politic Imposture used by Boniface, whereby he disposest the Pope; and gained the Papacy himself.  
IT is reported that Boniface the Eight did climb up unto the Papacy by an Imposture, he having intonniled his voice in a long Cane or Trunk in a dark night, putting it thorough a hole of the Wall, into the Chamber of Celestine, a simple holy man that was invested in the Sea; Boniface feigned himself that he was an Angel sent from above, to let him know the pleasure of the Almighty, which was, that the great God of Heaven had things of Importance to execute upon Earth, whereof he had made choice of Boniface to be Pope, to put them in execution; and that Celestine should either presently resign, or else he was to fetch his soul ere long; this politic Imposture prevailed.  
This Imposture hath been used in diverse Countries by the Enemy's Complices, to turn the mind of a General from his intended purpose: as also to breed fear amongst chief Officers, foretelling some sad events should ensue to dishearten an Army, or to make them disloyal.   

CHAP. CCXXXVI.  
A Politic Imposture whereby wonderful things have been atcheived.  
HOmer makes mention in his Hymno Mercurii, that by the crawling of a Tortoice, with a candles end fixed with Wax unto his back, divers have been deluded, thinking it to be the Spirit of some Persons lately buried; this thing having walked diverse times in the Churchyard, so that many have taken notice of it; then they were next to agree with a subtle fellow to lie in a Coffin, that should secretly be placed in a Grave, and having a Pipe from it, reaching to the top of the earth, so that he might draw breath, and be heard speak thorough it: these things being thus performed (If a General have any business of consequence, to settle upon his Army, or to resolve it of any doubts, or to establish any laws) then were the chief Officers brought to this place in the dark with common Soldiers, where the Spirit hath spoken to them.   

CHAP. CCXXXVII.  
A Politic Imposture used by King Minos the Lawmaker of Candy, to bring in and establish his Laws.  
KIng Minos the Lawmaker of Candy, at such times as he had a purpose to bring in and establish Laws in his Realm, feigned that jupiter did daily speak unto him face to face, and that he was (as Homer saith) his 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is his Familiar, and one with whom he had private special conference; this gained him such special favour with the people, that his name growing thereupon to be famous; he gave such a countenance to his Laws with so high authority, that they were kept and observed longer than were any other amongst the greeks. Aristotle writeth the same of Lycurgus, that he did help himself by this device, for the establishing of those Laws which he made in his Commonwealth; Numa Pompilius King of the Romans did likewise fain, that the Nymph Egeria had familiarity and acquaitance with him, and did inform him of those Laws, which he prescribed unto the people of Rome, a Nation at that time very unapt to be instructed, and could very hardly by reason of their fierceness, and Martial courage be tamed and brought to civility, hadit not been by the only means and colour of Religion.   

CHAP. CCXL.  
A Politic Imposture used at the interments of Emperors, to make the people believe they were highly honoured of God; so that their laws might be the better observed after their deaths.  
AT the interment of the Roman Emperors, they used this Imposture; the Corpses of the said Emperors being laid in a Tabernacle framed of wood wherein were three partitions one above the other, in the lower was the wood laid, in the next above the Corpse sumptuously apparelled; and in the uppermost was a live Eagle placed, the fire being burning, 
Lib. 4. Histor. Caesarum.  a window was secretly opened out of which this Eagle soared away in the air; this they reported to be the Soul of the deceased Emperor fled to Heaven (as Herodian witnesseth) And justin Martyr affirmeth that there was always one deputed and ordained by the Successor of the dead Emperor, who should upon his oath aver, that he had seen the Soul of the Emperor; (which was said to be deified) to issue out from the pile of fire; and to flee directly up into heaven: 
Invita August. sub finem.  the same doth Dion write, who saith, that Livia the wife of Augustus did give ten thousand crowns unto Numerus Atticus Praetor, to have an Affidavid made, that he saw Caesar Augustus mount up into Heaven.   

CHAP. CCXLI  
A Politic Imposture able to seduce multitudes by walking upon the water.  
CArdan in lib. de varietate rerum, reports how that by subtlety and artificial skill men have walked upon the top of waters without sinking, by means of Cork and bladders tied to the soles of their feet: 
Lib. 2. ver●r narrat. ubi nihil veri contin.  Likewise Lucian writeth what strange Terror he was put in by the sight of those Phillopodes, or corke-footed persons, that walked upon the waves of the Sea: what could not such an Imposture persuade men unto; or dissuade them from; the strangeness of the thing would make men believe they were divine.   

CHAP. CCXLII  
Illusions, whereby diverse learned judicious men have been deceived, through the feigned voices of men expert in that quality.  
THere have been some men naturally disposed so subtle and ingenious; that they were able to delude and deceive even the best advised; their voice hath been so subtle and so diverse, that they would imitate the voice of all living creatures; likewise the organs of their voice and their throats were so fine and small, that being very near to a man they will call him by his name, or use other discourse; yet it will seem to the party called to be some strange Angelical voice; and that it is far remote from him: in the French History of Peter de Loir, he relates a story of a Merchant of Lions, who was exceeding rich both in Banque, and in other goods and Possessions; and being noted for a notable Usurer, he went one day walking into the Country; only accompanied with his servant; and as they were entered into a great Champion Field, the Servant began his illusions, speaking unto him, and telling him that he was an Angel which came unto him purposely from God, to tell him, that he should give and distribute part of his goods ill gotten unto the poor; and that he should liberally recompense his Servant that had of a long time served him without any reward or preferment at all received from him: the Merchant being astonished and abused at the voice, demanded of his Servant if he heard nothing, repeating unto him the strange voice himself had heard; the servant (counterfeiting a kind of wonder and astonishment) denied that he heard any thing; and immediately (with a voice far more stronger and subtle than the former) he repeated the same words again, and that with such admiration of the Merchant, that he was brought into a full belief that it was an Angel from Heaven that spoke unto him; insomuch, that being arrived in his lodging, he gave unto his Servant a good and large recompense▪ after the death of the Merchant, this Servant discovered the Imposture.  
Likewise Monsieur de la Cazedin having invited diverse learned men, (the most excellent spirits then in Paris) to a Banquet in the mean time a merry fellow that was his crafts-Master in these kind of Illusions, was caused to be there present by the said Monsieur for to provoke mirth at this feast in imitation of that of Xenophon; 
In Sim● o●io.  or of the Emperor julian, 
In Conviv. C●s.  wherein there was a Silenus that kept company with the Gods, etc. This fellow called one of the company by name; a man well known for doctrine and eloquence: this party hearing his name called arose immediately from the Table, supposing some one without the doors had called him; albeit it was no other but that same pleasant companion that was set at Table by him. By these few instances we may learn what good or hurt may be done to an Army, they (being deluded with these or the like Impostures) may either be animated to observe any Laws; or undertake any difficult achievements; or by the help of some trusty Complices in an Enemy's Army that are their craftsmasters in this Art, how they may dishearten the Army, or divert the General from some intended design, which may be the occasion of their overthrow.   

CHAP. CCXLIII.  
How marquis Spinola at the Siege of Breda (by the help of a witty Peasant) gained intilligence of all the proceedings both in the Prince of Orange's Camp, and in the Town of Breda, by the discovering of their own Letters.  
Marquess Spinola made use of a Country Peasant who was expert of all Places and passages there about: and being forward to accomplish any thing he was commanded, for a reward did undertake to carry Butter, Tobacco, and Cheese to the besieged Town, making show of having narrowly, and with great danger escaped the Enemy's Sentinels and Guards: and being arrived he was to offer his service to the Governor to carry Letters from him to the Prince of Orange, he being there arrived was much welcomed to the hungry Soldiers, in regard of the provision he brought, and the Governor desirous to know particulars, examined him about Spinola's Camp, about the passage he found into the Town, and what was the received opinion abroad of the state of their affairs: the fellow (being subtle) related many true things, and feigned as many of his own head, which begat a great belief in them of his honesty and trust; at last being demanded whether he durst carry any Letters by that passage by which he escaped into the Town; he showed himself at first fearful and doubtful what to answer; suffered them by promises to work him to that, to which of all things (under pretence of backwardness) he desired to be persuaded. The Governor therefore trusted him with his Letters to the Prince of Orange, promising him great rewards, if he brought him an answer: He promised to do his best; but in his return he brought the Letter to Spinola to peruse; Spinola (having perused the Letters) sealed them up again fairly, and dispatched this subtle fellow away with them to the Prince of Orange, promising him a double reward if he could bring an answer from the Prince: The Prince of Orange (believing that he might confidently repose his trust in this fellow, who had been so careful to bring him the Letters) returned his answer by this Peasant, giving him a large reward: this crafty fellow brought the Letters to Spinola, and was liberally rewarded by him also for his pains; afterwards the Prince of Orange dying, and his brother Count Henrick being in his place, Spinola could gain no news of his proceedings; wherefore he bethought him of his nimble-witted Peasant, but he being not so well known to this Prince as he was to his Brother, he contrived his acquaintance by this device; he having lain secret in Spinola's Camp many days together, he persuaded his Wife to go to the Prince of Orange, and complain of a sickness her husband had caught in carrying his Brother's Letters to Breda, through the waters in the Winter season, and she earnestly besought him to pay the remainder of the reward promised her husband; the Prince taking hold of this occasion, being overjoyed in finding out this trusty Messenger, did undertake to pay him what was owing him, with much more, if he would now once again adventure to carry one of his Letters to the Town, as he had conveyed many of his Brothers heretofore; the woman knowing her lesson, objected the danger of the passage, and the disease of her husband, but in conclusion, she suffered herself to be won to it, and with a feigned unwillingness undertook to persuade her husband, whereupon she departed to fetch her husband to the Prince, who returned with her counterfeiting a lameness, as if his feet had been frozen by the frost in the Winter, the Prince agreed a price with him, and rewarded him; delivering his Letters of secret importance to him, to be conveyed to the Governor of Breda; the fellow came directly to Spinola with it, whereby he understood all their designs: for this Spinola gave him a yearly pension for ever.   

CHAP. CCXXXIV.  
A Stratagem whereby the Prince of Orange had like to have gained Antwerp Castle.  
THe Prince of Orange lying near Breda, which Spinola had besieged, had a design to take in Antwerp Castle, upon an onslaught, to which purpose he kept the passages of his Camp very close, and also the Garrisons out of which he was to draw his Soldiers out, that no intelligence might be given to the Enemy, to frustrate his design; the charge of his Expedition, was given to Brochem Drossard of Bergen-up-zome, who had 1000 foot, and 200 horse, the Soldiers themselves knew nothing whether they were to march, but to contrary places: Command was given that they should take off their Orange-tawny Scarves, and put on red, which was the King of Spain's colours, and they were to give out that they were the King of Spain's men, and that they marched to Antwerp for provision of Victuals: (for indeed it was reported Spinola's men were at that time to go to Antwerp for the same purpose) their Wagons were also covered with Canvasse; and marked with the Burgundian Cross as Spinolaes' were, these things furthered their project▪ and confirmed the Peasants in their belief, that they were their own men; so that they arrived under the Walls of Antwerp Castle, being protected by the extremity of a dark night, they had made themselves a passage to the Bridge, and were ready to beat open the Ports; but by the vigilancy of one Andreas Cea, an old Soldier that stood Sentinel; they were discovered and put to retreit.    

A DESCRIPTION OF ENGINES, AND WARLIKE INSTRUMENTS. SECT. XIIII.  

CHAP. CCXLIII.  
The description of such Engines, and Warlike Instruments, as are prevalent in the Wars; with the manner of using them, and how to make them.  
IN regard the managing of Warlike affairs cannot be well performed without the knowledge, and true use of all kind of Instruments that are, or may be invented, it is therefore very necessary to describe the fashion, and operation of such as have been formerly, and now are at this present day invented, and also invent some that have not formerly been known; by these a Commander in chief may defend his Army, and offend his Enemy; for by the use of such Stratagemicall Instruments, many times a Victory or Conquest hath been easily obtained: and upon more certainer terms, then to trust only to the Valour and Potency of an Army. For the Nature of Policy, and Politic Instruments, are to accomplish such things, that strength cannot perform; their operation being in a double respect, as the Commander that makes use of them shall order and dispose; so accordingly is their operation (viz.) making all difficulties Easy; and again contrarily making all things easy difficult: And by this twofold Virtue, the wisdom and Ingenuity of an Enemy is often foiled. I have formerly spoken of the use of all kind of Artillery, as being the principal Engine. Here I will only speak of the Nature and Condition of the Petard, 
The Petard to blow open Ports and Portculliss.  by the force of which, all substantial massy bodies are dissolved and fittered in pieces; this Engine is of the fashion of a Leathern Bucket, usually made of Brass, the Verges even, that it may lie patte upon the Port you intent to blow-open. If the Port be accessible, than it is to be hung up by a Ring upon a piece of Iron skrewed into the Port with a Fork, to stay it close, and to keep it from reversing; the manner of charging it, and the use of it, is more largely discoursed of in the Treatise of Artillery, Page 113. 114. But if the Port be inaccessible, than it must be placed upon an Engine which will conduct it to the Port, as by the next Figure following you may see at C, the fashion of the Petard at the Letter A. the Fork at the Letter B.  


Note the end of the Carriage of the Petard, is to have a Balance, that it may lie even upon the wheels, and being put home to the Port, the hindmost end is to be strongly barricadoed, that it may not reverse.     

CHAP. CCXLIIII.  
The use of the Granades how they are made, and charged with powder, and how they are to be discharged out of a Mortar, or thrown by the hand.  
AGrando is one of the necessariest Engines belonging to the Wars, in regard it annoys and spoils the Enemy, when no other Weapon nor Engine can; there are two sorts of them, one to shoot in a Morterpeece; the other sort is to be cast by the hand amongst the Enemies over their Walls and works. Those that are to be shot out of Mortar-pieces are to be cast in Brass for the principal Service, or made of Glass or Earth; and these are to batter down Walls and Roofs of houses, and to break amongst the Enemy's Horse or Foot-Troopes; there is another sort made of Canvas, and that is used properly to set fire upon Houses and Towns; of these I will discourse in particular, and demonstrate them by Figure.  
Those of Brass ought to be of a foote-Diameter made somewhat long-ways; 
The knob or Snoute is in stead of a handle, to put the Granado in the Mortar, the screw-hole is to go next the Powder for the better firing it.  in thickness an inch, one end thereof is to have a Snowt like a Bottle; and at the other end a Hole, at the which it is to be charged, and the said hole is to be skrewed; then there is a strong Skrew-Tappe to be made, to fill the skrew-hole, and that is hollow, wherein is put slow-burning-Powder, made of Cannon-Powder beaten fine, and moistened with the oil of Peter mingled with some Charcoal; than it is corded over with Cord half an inch in distance one from th'other every way across to keep it from splitting or breaking in the discharging it; the manner how to charge them is showed in the Discourse of the use of Artillery; This Figure following in the mean time will give you some light for your better understanding.  

Note some Granades are made of Canvasse with diverse Pistoll-barrels charged with powder and bullets, and covered over.   
In this Precedent Figure, you see the parts of the Granado, and how it is to be charged at A. the Skrew-faucet which is to be filled with a Composition of slack-burning-Powder is at B. the manner of twilting the Granado is at C. You must likewise be very circumspect, whether the Priming-powder burns quick or slow, lest it should fire before it comes at the place assigned; those Granades that are made of Glass or Earth, are to be used after the same manner as the former is, not forgetting to anoint them all over with Tallow for fear of flaws and cracks.  
Now for those Granades which are to be thrown by the hand, 
There are of these kinds made of Earth and Glass.  the substance they are made of is Brass three parts, and Tin one; which being cast in a Mould are made hollow, and about half an Inch thick; the Brass must be melted before the Tin be put in; the fashion is of a Pomegranate: the concavity is to be filled half full of fine cornepowder, and the other half next the vent, is to be filled with Serpentine-Powder, mingled with Rosin beaten to powder, so that for three parts of Serpentine-powder, you take one of Rosin; then putting into the Snowt or hole of it a little fine Powder, which makes it fire the sooner: being held in the Right-hand ready to cast from you (at the same instant fire being given to it with a Match) it is tossed over into the Enemy's Works, where it breaks in diverse pieces, destroying all near it; the fashion of them you may behold in the next Figure following. There is no way to prevent the force of these, but by extinguishing them with raw Hides, or tumbling them into water to choke the Powder before the Priming-powder be burnt to the Cornepowder; wherefore diverse Soldiers are to be appointed with Skoopes, and others with Hides to quench them in the water, or to choke them for want of vent.  
There are some Granades made without a snout very round, only a vent-hole whereby it is filled with Powder, as you see at the Figure B, this being filled with fine powder, is to be put into an Earthen-pot; so far bigger, that it may hold it, and a quantity of Powder beside; then diverse threads of Cotton being folded together, and boiled in Salt-Peeter and Brimstone to make it apt to hold fire, the said Pot being covered at the mouth with a skin close tied, then crossing the Pot with a piece of Wyer, as you perceive at the figure D, diverse pieces of this Match is tied about it being well lighted; so that when the Pot is thrown and breaks with the fall, the Match fires the Powder, whereby the Granado is also fired; And this is the securest way to throw them: Note if the Granado be of Glass, than the skrew-tappe that is to go into the vent-hole to carry the Priming-powder must be of Wood, for the Glass will break so soon as the fire toucheth it; View the Figure.   

CHAP. CCXLV.  
The use of the Fireball, to fire Houses, Bridges or Ports, with the manner of framing them.  
THe use of the wildfire Ball; is to be shot out of a Morter-piece or Canon, to fire Houses, Ports or Bridges; they are framed after this manner. First, there must be had three or four pieces of Iron of equal length, sharppointed like an Adder's tongue; they are to be riveted one into the other just in the midst, so as the one may cross the other justly; then take Goose-grease or Swines-grease one part, of Tar half a quarter as much, of Pitch two parts, of Aquavitae half a quarter part, of Linseede Oil one part, of Verdigrease a quarter part, of wax half a quarter part, of Groom a quarter part, of Saltpetre meal one part; these being mixed together over a slow fire; and in the liquid mixture dip a good quantity of Tow and linen rags; then rub the same well in bruised Powder, the which being rolled hard about the aforesaid Irons, and bound about very strait with wire or packthread, not forgetting to boar two holes quite across the said Composition, which must be filled with good bruised Powder; they are to be put down into the piece next the Powder, that the priming holes may take fire; and being shot out, wheresoever they stick they will fire it suddenly: the like balls may be made without Iron to throw with the hand against the Enemy; view the Figures following.   

CHAP. CCXLVI.  
The use of Lanterns and hollow Plates filled with pebble Stones and Musket Bullets for the defending of Breaches.  
FOr the defending of a Breach and disabling the Enemy from making his forcible entry, it is necessary to have in store and readiness diverse hollow round plates, like half Bullets, the one is to shut over the other, like a Box lid, this is to be filled with pebble Stones or Musket Bullets, or square pieces of iron, called Dice-shot; this being discharged out of a Murdering piece, will do much hurt: also, your Lanterns are made of soft Wood, after the fashion of our ordinary Lanterns, these being filled with stones, and shot out of a Piece, will break in pieces, and the stones will do wonderful execution against those that shall enter a Breach, a Bridge, or Port; View the Figures following.  
  

CHAP. CCXLVII  
How to make a certain Stone to burn in the Water, or to kindle fire in the greatest storm of Rain, being very useful in the Wars.  
THere is a certain Stone to be made, which will kindle either by laying water on it, or by spitting upon it; it is very useful in the Wars, in time of tempestuous rain, when Soldiers matches are out, or for the firing of any Houses or Bridges, when other kind of fires will not burn, the Composition is this. Take unslaked Lime one part, Tutia Alexandrina unprepared one part, Saltpetre well refined one part, all these must be well beaten and fifted, and bound hard together with a piece of new Linen cloth, than put it into a couple of earthen Cups, such as Goldsmiths use to melt their metals in; the mouths of the which must be joined together, and fast bound with iron wire, and daubed over with Siment that it breathes not out, then dried a while in the Stone, it must be put into a Furnace where Brick is burning, or other earthen Vessels, there to remain until they be burnt, then taking it out, it will seem like to a Brick stone, and when any water toucheth it, it will burn immediately.  
Otherwise, if you please to make a fireball to burn in the water, you must take powder bruised ten parts, Peter in meal two parts, Peter Roch one part, Sulphur meal three parts, Turpentine one part, Linseed oil one part, Camphire a quarter part, Arsenic a quarter part, Verdigrease a quarter part, Bowl Armoniacke a quarter part, Corns of Bay salt 1/●● part, filings of iron ⅕ part, Quick silver 1/●● part, these things being well blended and mingled together with the hand, in some wooden Vessel. Then taking a piece of Canvasse, and cut out a round piece as big as you please, which being sowed together and filled with this Receipt, then strongly bound with pack-thread, and quoted with molten pitch, making therein but one vent of an inch deep; wherein must be put fine powder (to prime it) bruised very small, this being fired with a match, after it hath burnt awhile ding it into any water, it will rise and burn furiously upon the top; this is very proper to set fire upon the Enemy's floats or Galleries that are built upon the water, there shall need no Figure to demonstrate this.   

CHAP. CCXLVIII.  
Of certain earthen Bottles filled with a kind of mixture to be fired, which are thrown amongst the Enemy.  
THere are certain Earthen Bottles to be made of a round fashion, being not half burnt are best for this use; they are invented to disorder the Enemy's Ranks, or to astonish them, being whirled out of the Soldier's hands amongst the Enemies will soon make them give ground, the device is this; having got as many of these Bottles as shall be thought requisite, these must be filled half full of Serpentine powder, or somewhat more, there is to be mixed with it a quantity of Hogs grease, Oil of Stone, Brimstone, Saltpetre twice refined, Aqua vitae, Pitch, these being stirred together over a soft fire in some earthen vessel; this composition being put into the Bottle, with fine powder bruised to cause it to fire, suddenly the Bottle is to have a Cord to throw it by; this hath wrought strange effects.  
Also there is a kind of Composition which is besmeared about Ropes ends and Hoops, which are to be thrown from a Wall upon the Enemy, which will burn and disorder them wonderfully, especially at the scaling of a Wall. The Composition is this; take Sulphur in meal six parts, of Rozin in meal three parts; these being melted in a Pan, over a slow fire, then taking Stone-pitch one part, hard wax one part, 
Note, that▪ Flax or Tow Hurds is best to dip into the Composition, and to wind about the Hoop or Rope ends.  of Tow half a quarter part, of Aqua vitae half a quarter part, of Camphire ⅛ parts, these being also melted together, there must be stirred into it Saltpeeter-meale two parts, and when it is taken off the fire, there must be four parts of bruised powder mixed with it; these being ointed upon Hoops and Ropes and set on fire, wheresoever they light they cannot be quenched, but will burn the Enemy to death. View the Figures following.   

CHAP. CCXLIX.  
How a frame of Muskets are to be made and ord●red for the defence of a Breach, or for the flanking of a Battalia of Pikes.  
THe use of this frame of Muskets is very excellent both in the defence of Breaches, Bridges, Ports, or to be placed before the Divisions of Pikes, or flanking the Pikes in Battle, whereby the Enemy will be wonderfully shaken, and by the help of a few men which are to remove them too and fro, and to give fire to the trains, strange exploits may be performed: The manner of it is thus; A Frame is made of Boards or Plank three Stories high, one story half a foot above the other, and a foot or more behind one the other, the lowermost tire is to lie about three foot from the ground, the next half a foot above that, and so the third: there are certain quills or small spouts of Brass to go from one touchhole to the other, so that the train being fired, they shall one discharge after another, beginning first with the uppermost tire, as the Enemy enters the Breach, than the second, and the lowermost last; there is also a broad plate which shall be placed over the Breeches of the Muskets, that no sparkles may fall down into the Pans of the second, nor the lowermost tire, each tire is to hold twelve Muskets a breast, one being placed a foot distance from the other; there are certain Ringles on each side to remove it by: There is one in Germany that hath only twelve Muskets, which may be discharged eight and forty times, according to the French new invention for Pistols: This was practised at Ostend when Duke Albert made his potent assault, by which he was wonderfully repulsed. View the Figure.  


This Frame may be made only with the Barrels of Muskets, without stocks to them the manner how to order them any ingenuous wit will conceive of.     

CHAP. CCL.  
An Instrument called a Flail, used in the defending of a Breach, or scaling of a Wall, or when the Enemy is at handy blows.  
THis instrument is used in the Wars to defend breaches, or when the Enemy is entered the streets of a Town and are at close fight, than these are the only weapons for dispatch, there being no defence for it; it is made much after the fashion of a Flail, only the Swingill is short and very thick, having diverse Iron Pikes in it upon all parts of it, that which way soever it falls it destroys; diverse soldiers are appointed to attend the Enemies assaulting the Breach, some standing at one end of the Breach, the residue at the other, and when the Enemy is come up at push of Pike, so close that the Pikemen can make no use of their Pikes, than these Flails makes way through their Head-pieces and Armour. View the Figure.  
  

CHAP. CCLI.  
The use of the Turnpike, and how it is framed, and of the excellent defence it makes, both against Horse and Foot upon all straits and passages.  
THis Instrument is of great use to be cast into straits, 
The hole must be of a Mortice wimbles Bo●e.  breaches, passages, or highways; for which way soever it is rolled, there be sharp pikes towards the Enemy to hinder his approaches; the manner of framing of it is after this manner; First there is a round Beam of light wood, as Fir or Sallow about twelve Inches in circumference, and ten or twelve foot long; at every halfe-footes length, or under, there must be holes bored thorough every way across; then there must be Staves fitted for those holes of good seasoned Ash, about a yard and a half long, somewhat tapering towards each end; the ends of these Staves must be armed with Iron Pikes cheeked down a good way, that they may not be hacked off with their Swords, then being droven into the foresaid holes just half way of the Staff, it will be defensive which way soever it be turned; the beam is to be so made, that one may be fastened to the other by hooks at each end, so that if need be half a score of them may be coupled together, or otherwise as the breach or passage is in breadth; the Musque●iers may shoot over them, and the Pikes may defend them so, that the Enemy shall not have the advantage to pull them asunder; and so long as they lie, neither Horse nor Foot can pass for them; when they are to be transported by waggon, than the Staves are to be knocked out, that they may lie in closer room; View the Figure following.  
  

CHAP. CCLII.  
The use of the Pallizadoes to prevent both Horse and Foot, from any sudden assault, and how they are framed.  
HIs Excellency the Prince of Orange had always these Instruments carried in his Army, either by Water, or by Land, for wheresoever he did encamp his Army for any time, especially if the Enemy were quartered near, he always gave directions to have these Pallizadoes pitched into the ground round the quarters; and upon all Passages and Bridges the Turnepikes were placed with a sufficient Guard to defend them; The manner of framing them is after this fashion, they take Furre-poles about twelve Inches in Circumference, and four foot and and a half, and some five foot long▪ and upwards, these are sharp at the neither end with a piece of Iron, that they may enter the Gravel or Stones, and some are not; within a handful of the upper end there is two Iron Pikes of five or six inches long driven in sideways one crossing the other, then in the midst betwixt both is the third Pike placed right-forwards, 
Some Pallizadoes have two Pikes right forwards, and two slenting forward on each side.  these being driven into the earth about a foot and a half, and in distance a foot, or thereabouts asunder, the Pikes will so answer one to the other, that nothing can pass but must receive hurt, when they intent to raise a Parapet of earth, then as they finish the work, they pull up the Pallizadoes; There is another kind of Palizado made of pieces of Oake-heart sharped at one end, the other end is laid into the earth three quarters of a yard deep near the top of a Breast-worke, either of Sconce or Redout; View the Figure of the former Palizado.  
  

CHAP. CCLIII.  
The use of the Calthrop, and of the Spiked Plank to annoy both Horse and Foot.  
THe Calthrop is an Instrument very offensive to the Enemy's Horse, and by the use of them a few Soldiers may make an able resistance, either in the streets of a Town, or upon any passage, or in a Pitched Battle; the lightness of it being such, that every Soldier may carry two or three of them at his Girdle, and as they advance towards the Enemy, throwing them down, they will endanger any thing that shall tread upon them; They are framed in this wise; first they take a tough piece of Sallow, and making it round about the bigness of an Apple, there is Iron pikes driven thorough, which points every way, so that which way soever it falls a pike will be upwards to run into the feet, either of Horse or Man; there is another fashion made of a piece of Board as broad as a Trencher, which is driven full of nails, and lined with another thin Board, to keep the Nails from slipping back; these are very good to be thrown upon passages in the nighttime, when a fear of the Enemy's approach is at hand.  
Also at the Siege of Ost-End the Archduke invented a device to defend himself against sudden Sallies out of the Town, wherefore he cansed to be laid at the nearest Retrenchments long Planks driven full of long sharp spikes, the sharp points lying upwards to run into their feet that should assail him; this is good to lay cross streets in a Town in the nighttime, when an Enemy hath entered the Ports; View the Figures following.   

CHAP. CCLIV.  
The use of the Bome or Baricado to cross a passage or highway to prevent the Enemy's Horse in their speedy approaches.  
THis kind of Instrument is used very frequently about all the frontier Towns in the Netherlands; it is to be placed upon some strait passage in the Road or highway, a flightshot from each Port or nearer, to prevent the Enemies sudden assault with his Horse-troopes: the form and fashion is after this manner. The Beam which crosseth the way is of Oake-hart, and a foot square of Timber at the least; then upon one side of the way is pitched down a strong able Post, the top of it being fitted to enter into a hole of the Beam about the third part of it, from the fore end, than there comes diverse Braces down from the Beam which are morticed into a circular piece of Timber, framed purposely to wind about the midst of the standing Post, the Post being there made with a Regal; these Braces stays up the Beam from sinking down at the fore end; and it also hinders the raising of it up from the standing Post: upon the other side of the way is another able Post for the end of the Beam to shut against; the said end of the Beam hath a very strong Spring-locke, which at the first pulling too locks into the Post: there is always a Sentinel to guard at this Bome, to open and shut it to Passengers; if there be any void place betwixt the Posts and the hedges, it must be strongly railed: the Figure follows, which happily may better inform you.  
  

CHAP. CCLU.  
Of a second kind of Bome or Baricado to lay over Rivers to prevent the coming up of Boats, whereby the Enemy may surprise a Town.  
THis second kind of Bome was invented by the Netherlanders to prevent the Enemy's designs, who had many times deceived them by rowing up their boats the Rivers, and unexpectedly have entered their Towns: the manner of framing it is after this fashion. In the narrowest place of the River or Haven they spile both the sides next the banks with long able spiles, mortissing the top of them into an overway or beam of sound Timber, only in the midst of the stream they leave a passage for such vessels or boats to pass, as are requisite: then they take a piece of Timber, or some Mast of a Ship, which being fitted in due length for the place, the one end of this Bome hath a Staple of strong Iron which is joined by a Ringle to a second Staple that is droven into the inmost Spile; likewise upon the Spile of the other side is a strong Staple, whereunto the forend of the Bome is to be fastened either by a Mortice plated with Iron, or some Chain fastened unto it, and this is strongly locked: upon the top of this Bome, goes a thick bar of Iron from end to end, which hath large strong pikes riveted into it three or four inches one from the other.  
Lastly, the iron plate or Bar is riveted to the Bome, so that it cannot possibly be cut in sunder, neither can they have their Boats over it by reason of the Pikes; this they may open and shut at pleasure; Many times they use iron chains, but they are more chargeable and not so good, in regard a Boat will run over it. View the Figure.   

CHAP. CCLVI  
Duke Albert's Invention for the staying of the Hollanders Ships at Ostend, that his Batteries might the easier discharge upon them.  
IN the Siege of Ostend, Duke Albertus had planted diverse Blockhouses with Ordnance to impeach the Hollanders shipping which relieved the Town: yet with a quick tide and fair Wind, they entered in despite of his Ordnance without any damage; wherefore he bethought him to draw a mighty Cable over the Channel where the Ships did usually pass safely by the favour of the dark night: to diverse parts of this Cable, he fastened diverse empty Cask, as Pipes and Hogsheads to bear it up straight and even; also, there were certain Anchors to stay the Pipes and Cable from floating away; he having prepared his Batteries in readiness for the same purpose on either side of the shore, no sooner were the Ships stayed, but the Ordnance played upon them to their great detriment, many of them being sunk, and the rest battered.  
Some have caused a Massy chain to be conveyed over a Heaven, or Channel, also long pieces of Timber linked together, hath been a means to hinder shipping, for otherwise it is a difficult thing to offend the passage of shipping, or boats, especially by night, as was probable at the same Siege; there being as Grimstone recordeth, 70 shot made at one Fleet in that Channel, yet not one of them sunk, nor damnified. View the Figure.   

CHAP. CCLVII.  
The manner of making a Battery to float upon the water, that the Ordnance may shoot the leveller, invented at Ostend by Duke Albertus.  
THis Float was invented at Ostend, to plant their Ordnance on it, that they might strike the Vessels between Wind and water, as they came into the Heaven; the manner of framing it, was on this wise: First, there were diverse strong large Pipes or Hogsheads made purposely, upon the which diverse Beams or Rafters were strongly fastened, crossing every way to hold the Pipes together; then there were diverse Planks fastened upon the top of the Rafters, after the fashion of a floor of a house, round the sides were wooll-packes, fixed to shelter the Enemy's shot; this Float lying thus level with the water, gave the Ordnance fit opportunity to shoot at a better certainty; upon either side of the Heaven was one of these Floats planted, not one right against the other, but a certain distance wide, so that if one missed his shoot, the other should endeavour to hit. The figure of it follows.  
  

CHAP. CCLVIII  
The manner of framing the Engine called the Saulciffe, which is to be used against a beleaguered Town to shelter both Horse and Foot.  
THis Instrument was invented at Ost-end, for the safeguard both of Horse and Foot; the manner of framing of it was after this manner; They took diverse Boards or Planks of Deale-wood, and framed them in manner of a Hogshead or Pipe, but so great that a Horseman might ride behind it, and not be discovered; the concavity of it was filled with Dung and sand, it was hooped with broad Iron hoops, it was twenty foot long; there were fifty or sixty men to rowel it: this did the Archduke wonderful service in preserving his Soldiers, both from the Cannon and Musket, it being always rolled before those that went to Entrench themselves, or to relieve such Guards as were dangerous, and within shot of the Walls of the Town; by this devise they could go as near to the Enemy's works as they listed: the Figure follow●●.  
  

CHAP. CCLIX.  
How to stop up the passage of Vessels, and Boats in a Channel, or to mend a breach in an arm of the Sea.  
THe best and presentest way to stop, and damn up a Channel, or a breach, is to fill the Hulk of old cast Ships, Hoighes, and Boats with earth, and so conveying them to the fittest place where the water is narrowest and shallowest, and there to sink them; Likewise by filling old sacks full of Earth or Sand, and casting them into the water, will dam up a small Haven, and will hinder the passage of all kind of Vessels from relieving a besieged Town; and by this the breach of an arm of the Sea may be stopped, but first it must be well pyled to stay the Vessels and Earth from being washed away; wherefore they must take the opportunity of a low-water to work in, and have sufficient help to lay the foundation sure, for fear of blowing up; Moreover, if you fear the water will decay some weak place of the bank, than there must be a stancke made to shelve off the force of the water; also if there be any Skonees or other Works that the water beats against the Wall, and decays it by dashing against it; then for the preventing of it, there must be Mats made of Sedge and Bulrushes, which must be staked down before the Earth, and Hurdles made with Oysiers.  
Also for the Landing up of some shallow place, where the water runneth but in Winter time, or in great Storms, the best way is to set it thick of Oysiers, which will speedily grow, and keep up the Sand and Rubbish from washing away, so that in a short time it will be landed up; View the Figure following.   

CHAP. CCLX.  
The manner how to make a Bridge with Cord to convey Soldiers over a Moat or River, by means whereof they may speedily Scale the Walls of a Town.  
THis kind of Bridge is used upon all surprises of Towns and Forts, which are to be taken in upon the sudden, it being so light, that two or three men may bring it twelve or fiveteene miles in an evening, and place it over any narrow water, so that their Soldiers may march over abreast: the manner of framing it, is after this fashion; First, there are two wooden Rolls, made of strong light wood, either of them being twelve foot long; one of these Rolls have at each end a Winch, which may be taken off and on like to a Grindstones; this is to wind and straighten the Ropes that they may lie tyte, at each end, and in the midst of the Rolls are to be holes bored thorough, wherein must be fastened four strong Ropes, but if there be more Ropes it will be the stronger, at every feet end there may be one, if the Bridge be twelve or ten foot broad, than it is but boring so many holes, and drawing so many Ropes thorough: than you are to take Cord, and knit it with Mashes, like the Mashes of a Slew, so that a man's foot cannot slip thorough; this Cord being knit all the way fast to the Cordes, one end of this Bridge is to be transported, either by one or two that can swim, or in a Leathern Boat made for that purpose; the ends of the Rolls are to be staked down strongly, either with Iron stakes made for that purpose, or with wooden; Next it is to be straitened out straight with Winches, and made fast, you are to note that over these Ropes and Mashes, there is Canvasse stitched down to make the Bridge firm, that they may not falter with their feet in passing over; View the Figure following.  
  

CHAP. CCLXI.  
How to make a firm Bridge both for Horse and Men to march over and to transport their Ordnance, over any River, although as broad as the Thames.  
Earl Charolois in the wars of France, termed the Holy League, being to pass over the great River of Seine, he caused diverse Casks to be made of very strong board or Clampall strongly hooped, and of a great bigness, upon which he fastened Rafters, and Plancherd it over, placing divers strong Anchors to stay the Bridge from the force of the stream: over this Bridge (as Commines reports) marched a hundred thousand men, with all their provision and Ordnance: The States of the Netherlands have a kind of an open flat Boat which they term Punts; these they convey by water to any place they intent to march over; but if they march to some remote place, so that they cannot pass by water, than they are transported upon Carriages, and drawn by Horses, which doth them great service to stow in them Powder, Match, Ammunition, Bread and such like; they are made like to Horse-boatee flat-bottomed the ends open and rising, so that when they are joined together, the rising ends meeting it is like an Arch, thorough which the water hath passage, four men may march a breast over them; and they are twenty or thirty foot long a piece; they are fastened together with iron hooks; and their Masts and Tacklings are fixed to the sides of them, to strengthen them; the rising ends of these Punts have ledges nailed half a foot distance one from the other, to prevent the feet both of Men and Horse from sliding; they are stayed with Cables and Anchors from falling down with the stream. These are the surest and best Bridges that ever yet were invented; and very easy to be conveyed either by land or by water; besides many things belonging to the Wars may be carried in them.  
The Prince of Orange many times made Bridges with small Vessels, as Hoys or the like; they were stayed by Anchors; their beak heads pointing against the stream, there were Rafters placed from one Vessel to another and planchered over. The Figures of these several Bridgesfollow.  
A Bridge laid upon Cask.  
The Trestles which the King of Sweden made his Bridge upon to pass over the Lech into Bavaria, the feet of the Trestles had weights upon their Ledges to hold them down in the water.  
There was likewise another Bridge framed at the Siege of Ostend called Pompey's Chariot, it was framed of four wheels, and a piece of Timber of a hundred and fifty foot long lay upon the Wheels, upon which was framed a slight Bridge, this was to be drawn in a dark night to the Motes side, and so thrust over by the force of men; the manner of framing of it, you may more plainly see by the Figure following, only observe the Wheels were fifteen foot in height.   

CHAP. CCLXII.  
The use of the Leathrens Boat, and how to make it.  
THis kind of Boat was invented for the lightness of it, and to be used to convey Soldiers over Motes and Rivers, whereby some sudden and unexpected exploit may be done before the Enemy is aware of it: for a Soldier may carry one of these under his Arm twenty miles, without any great trouble: the manner of framing them, is after this manner; there must be the two sides or Bellies of an Ox hide well tanned, beaten out and made concave; this being cut fashionable to the keel of a Boat, the two sides are to be sown strongly together, so that no water may soak through, then taking a couple of strong staves to penned the sides and the ends of the Leather from bending in, when the Soldiers are in it. The Hollanders carry their Skutes and Boats upon carriages, and in them they put their Ammunition and other necessaries, being well covered over with Tilts, or sometimes one Boat covers the other; these Boats they can speedily take off from the carriages, and upon all occasions suddenly make use of them. View the Figures of them.  
  

CHAP. CCLXIII.  
An easy and quick way to cast water with great Scoops.  
MAny times when Fortifications are a raising, springs will arise and hinder the Workmen from digging; so that men must continually cast it out, or else their Works are presently drowned. For the better and easier effecting of it, the Hollanders have invented a speedy way, the manner of doing it is thus; they pitch certain Poles a cross; the crosses are to stand in distance asunder, according to the quantity of persons that are to work between them; upon the top of these crosses, lies another Pole overthwart, unto this Pole are diverse Cordes fastened, and to the lower end of the Cord, is the handle of the Scoops tied within a foot of the Scoop, this Cord bears the weight both of the Scoop and of the water, the man is only to guide the Scoop out, pulling it too and fro, these Scoops may be very great ones; many times they nail on Steals unto great Treys, having a piece of Leather fastened over the end of the Trey by the Steal, to keep the water from flying backwards; by this devise a man may cast more water at ease in one hour, than otherwise they can do in three; beside, they wet not themselves half so much. View the Figure following.  
  

CHAP. CCLXIV.  
How to make a Skrew to wind up water, with the use of it.  
THis Engine called the Skrew, was invented by the Hollanders to empty Ponds and Motes, it being a thing very useful in the Wars, it is framed after this manner; First, there is a Rafter some twenty foot long, and sixteen inches about, this is hewn round, only a foot and half at the upper end it is four square, whereon a Trundle wheel is to be fixed, and to be turned about by a Cog wheel, at each end of this Rafter of Wheele-tree is a gudgeon of iron as the Wheele-tree of a Mill hath, for the Engine to turn upon; then within three quarters of a foot of the lower end, there is a Regal to be made in this Wheele-tree, which must be made half an inch deep, and so carried in manner of a Skrew, within the foot of a Trundle wheel, at the upper end; next you must take Deal Boards of eighteen inches long, the one end of them is to be fitted cleverly into the Regal, and joined so close that no water may get out, it will seem to be after the fashion of a winding Stare-case, this is to be covered over with Deale Boards, and likewise to be reagold into them, that the ends of the short Boards may be fastened into them, and hooped over with flat iron Hoops, so that it will seen round like a Pipe, or a great long Barrel. Next there is a Cogge-wheele to be made to turn this Engine round; it is form like a Cogge-wheele of a Horse-mill, only the Cogs are to stand downwards, and it is drawn about with two or three Horses, Planks being placed for them to go on; this Engine being placed in the water: the neither Gudgeon running in a piece of Timber placed for that purpose in the water, the Engine lying sideways; the upper Gudgeon is likewise placed in another piece of Timber very tryly, so that the Cogge-wheele may turn about the Engine; at the upper end of the Barrel of this Engine must be placed a Troffe to receive the water, and convey it away into some ditch; this Engine will screw up water as fast as it runs out of an Overshot-mill, whereby in a short time an infinite deal of water may be drawn. View the Figure.  
  

CHAP. CCLXU.  
The Description of an Engine whereby water may be drawn out of any place or depth, or mount any River: water to be conveyed to any place within three or four miles' distance.  
SVppose A. B. C D. to be a deep Moat, River, Well, or Pond, and OF to be a strong piece of Timber fastened overthwart the same a good distance in the water, in this Plank let there be fastened a piece of Timber, with a strong Wheel in it as G and H. having strong Iron spikes drove athwart the Wheel within the crevice, and strongly riveted on each side, let them be three or four inches distance from each other: Let there be likewise made in the said Plank two holes, in which set two hollow Posts that may reach the top of the Wheel, or so much higher, as you desire to mount the water; Let them be made fast that they stir not; in the bottom of one of these Posts there must be fastened a barrel● of Brass, as g. h made very smooth within, and betwixt these two Posts at the top, let there be fastened unto them both another piece of strong Timber to hold them fast, lest they start asunder, and in the midst of that make a Mortice, and in it fasten a strong piece of Timber, with a wheel like to the former; the pin thereof aught to be made fast to the Wheel, and have a crooked handle to turn about, that by turning it, you turn the Wheel also; then provide a strong Iron chain of length sufficient, having on every third or fourth Link, a piece of horn that will easily pass thorough the brass barrel, and a Leather on each side of it, but somewhat broader than the horn; put this chain under the lower Wheel in the Well upon both the lower Posts, draw it over the upper Wheel, and link it fast and straight, then by turning the handle round, the Chain will also turn, whose Leathers coming up the Brass Barrels will force up the Waters before them. Or after the same manner you may take two Planks eighteen or twenty inches broad apiece, and twenty or thirty foot long, or more; at the lower edges of these Planks there is a bottom Plank of the same length and thickness closely joined and fastened; also down the midst is another joined and fixed, these are to be nine inches broad, and being thus framed, it makes a square Box, as is usually for Clocke-leads to go down in, the upper side is open like a Troffe; then there are diverse square pieces of Boards fitted justly to go up and down the said Concavities; these Boards have four flat Irons goes thorough them, to each corner goes one, these are keyed together, so as they may play to and fro; these square pieces being thus chained together, drives up the water thorough the hollow of the said Planks; at the two ends of this Engine is a Wheel as the former hath, only they differ in fashion, for they are made like a Miller's Trundles, the uppermost hath a double Sweake, so that eight or ten men may turn at it; the neither end of this Engine is placed in the water, the upper end is stayed with Crutchets or other provision; the open side lies upwards, and in turning the Wheel, those square boards comes down the open side, and runs up the Box, and forceth the water out.  
  

CHAP. CCLXVI  
The description of an Engine to force water up to a high place very useful to quench fire amongst buildings in Towns and Garrisons, or Huttes in Camps or Leaguers.  
THis Engine hath a brass barrel marked a. having two suckers in the bottom of it marked b. also a large Pipe going upon one side of it marked c. with a Sucker nigh unto the top of it; and above all a hollow round Ball d. with a Pipe at the top of it made to screw another Pipe upon it to direct the water to any place: then fit a Forcer unto the Barrel with a handle fastened unto the top, at the upper end of this Forcer drive a stung screw; and at the lower end a Skrew-nut; at the bottom of the Barrel fasten a Screw, and at the Bar that goeth cross the top barrel let there be another skrew-nut: put them all in order, and fasten the whole to a good strong frame marked f. that it may stand steady: when you use it; either you must place it in the water, or in the Channel of the street; and drive the water up to it with brooms; and by moving the handle too, and fro, it will cast the water up with mighty force to any place you shall direct it: Note, there is no Engine for Water-works of what sort soever (whether for service or pleasure) can be made without the help of Suckers, Forcers or Clacks: a Sucker is a Box made of Brass having no bottom; in the midst of which there is a small bar goeth cross the same, having a hole in the midst of it; this Box hath a lid so exactly fitted unto it, that being put unto it, no Air nor Water can pass between the Crevisses; this Cover hath a little Button on the top, and a seam that goeth into the Box, and so thorough the hole of the aforesaid cross Bar; and afterwards it hath a little Button riveted on it, so that it may with ease clap up and down, but not be taken, or slip quite out, as this figure in the Margin demonstrates.  
A Forcer is a plug of wood exactly turned and leathered about the end that goeth into the Barrel, is Semi-circularly concave, as this second Figure opposite showeth.  
A Clack, is a piece of Leather nailed over any hole of a Pump, etc. having a piece of Lead to make it lie close, so that no Air nor Water may pass thereby, as the third Figure showeth.   

CHAP. CCLXVII.  
The description of another kind of Engine to cast up water with violence.  
 
THere must be prepared a strong Table of Plank three or four inches thick; with an Iron Sweep fastened at the one end thereof to lift up and down; unto the end of the Sweep let there be linked a piece of Iron having two Rods of length sufficient; let there be made a hole quite through the midst of this Table, whose diameter let be above five or six inches; then provide two pieces of Brass in form of Hats; but let the brim of the uppermost be but one inch broad; and have diverse little holes through it round about: also in the crown of this must be placed a large Sucker, and over it a half Globe; from top of which must proceed a hollow Trunk, about a yard long, and of a good and wide Boar: then take good liquored Leather two or three times double, and put between the boards and the brims of this, and with diverse little Skrewes (put through the holes of the brim) screw it fast unto the top of the Table. Note, the Table must be leathered also underneath the compass of the brim of the lower brass; also the lower brass must be of equal diameter in hollowness unto the other; but it must be more spiral towards the end or bottom; and must have either a large Clock or Sucker fastened in it: also the brim of this must be larger than that of the uppermost, and have two holes made about the midst on each side one; bore then two holes in the Table on each side of the brass, one answerable unto the holes of the brim of the lower brass; through which holes put the two Rods of the Iron hanged to the Sweep, and rivet them strongly into the holes of the lower brass: place this Engine in water, and by moving the Sweep up and down, it will with great vigour cast the water on high.   

CHAP. CCLXVIII.  
How to make water at the foot of a Mountain, to ascend to the top of it, and so to descend on the other side, for the furnishing of Garrisons.  
TO this there must be a Pipe of Lead, which may come from the Fountain A, to the top of the Mountain B, and so to descend on the other side a little lower than the fountain as at C, then make a hole in the Pipe at the top of the Mountain B, and stop the end of the Pipe at A, and C, and fill this Pipe at B with water, and close it very carefully at B, that no air get in at the hole B, then unstop the end at A, and at C, then will the water run perpetually up the Hill, and descend on the otherside; this is of great consequence to furnish Villages.  
  

CHAP. CCLXIX.  
How to make a Scaling Ladder of Cords, which may be carried in a Soldier's Pocket, by which a Wall, Castle, or Town may be scaled.  
THis Engine is of excellent use in the Wars, for the speedy surprising of Towns; you must first take two pulleys A and D, unto that of A there must be fastened a strong Hook or Cramp of iron as B, and at D let there be fastened a Staff of a foot and a half long as F, then at the pulley A, place a hand of Iron as E, to which tie a Cord of half an inch thick (either of silk or pure hemp) then strive to make fast the pulley A, by the help of the Crampe-iron B, to the place that you intent to scale, and the staff F being fastened at the pulley D, put it between your legs as if you would sit upon it, then holding the Cord G in your hand, you may guide yourself to the place required.  
  

CHAP. CCLXX.  
Of Scaling-Ladders framed of Wood, and how they are to be used in the Wars.  
THis Instrument for the scaling of a Wall, is to be made of light Wood, and about nine or ten foot long, scaled like a Ladder, the upper end of the sides, have Hooks fastened unto them, to hang somewhat shelving, that the Soldiers may the easier ascend, if the Wall be higher, than there may be two of these Ladders hooked together, some are made with joints to open longer or shorter, as occasion shall be; but for the most part, the Scaling-Ladders are made according to the height of the Walls that are to be scaled; these are carried by Wagon or by Water, and are to be hung upon the Walls or Ports very secretly, for fear of discovery. View the figure.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXI  
The use of Gabions and Baskets, for the defence of the Cannoneers and Musquetiers.  
THese kind of Instruments were invented for the security both of the Cannoneers, 
Many times some of these Gabions are six foot Diameter.  and also of the Musquetiers, the manner of framing them is common to all Basket-makers; the Gabion or great Basket is some four foot Diameter, and made of course ro●●es of Osiers or water Sallowes, and four or five foot high: They are to be first placed where they should be used as a Barricado against the great Shot, and then they must be filled with good earth well rammed; there is many times three or four set one before the other to bury the shot of the Cannon; and likewise one a●●op of another to shelter, both the Men and Artillery. The same small Baskets are likewise made of rods, 
These small Baskets are used to carry up earth to the top of a work upon Soldier's shoulders.  and two foot, or two foot and a half Diameter, and about the same height; these are to be filled with good earth, and to be placed upon the Partapets and ●rest works one close by another for the Musquetiers to discharge between them, and to shelter them from the Enemy's Bullets, these are likewise many times set double; there must be a care no stones be amongst the earth; if Baskets should be wanting, then there must be Sacks filled, as before is showed. View the Figures.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXII.  
The use of Cru-wagons and small Carts, with the fashion of them.  
THese Instruments were invented to convey Earth out of Moats, and to carry it upon works; those Wheelbarrows that are to be driven up by the strength of one man, are made very small and light; they are used chiefly in the foundation of a work, before it grows too steep for the Horse to climb up: there are shelving places left for the Wagons to be driwen up, and Boards laid to keep the wheels from sinking into the each. The Figure follows.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXIII.  
The use of the Powder-pots in a pitched Battle, to mischief and break the Enemy's Ranks, with the Description of the form of them.  
THese Engines are of use to discomfit an Enemy in a pitched Battle, the manner of framing them, is according to this following Description: there must be 〈…〉 prepared, either of Earth, or of timed Latin, the Mouths of them are to be four inches Diameter, and the height of them six, on either side of these is a hollow quill form of Earth or soldered of Latin, about the bigness of a Tobacco-pipe; these are to go from the top of these Pots just to the bottom to convey the the train of Powder to the Touchhole at the bottom; Upon the top of this Quill is a round knob to be placed hollow, about the bigness of the half shell of a Walnut; this is to put the end of a Reed, or pipe made of Tin, to convey the trains of Powder from one Pot to the other. Further, a certain number of these Pots, are to have upon all four sides, Pipes, as before is showed; these are to be placed both at each end of the Stratagem, and in two or three places in the midst, from these the fire is immediately to be given, that the fire may more speedily be spread to every rank of these Pots; and indeed if they were all made after this manner to convey fire from all four parts, it would be more speedier and better, only the trains would be a little the more trouble to lay from one to the other. These Pots are to be set six foot asunder every way square, or further as occasion shall offer. These Pots being filled half full of Powder, there is a piece of thin Board to be fitted to the diameter of the Pot, and put down close to the Powder; upon this Board are Pible-stones to be placed, to fill up the rest of the Pot, and then to be covered to keep them in. In the next place there are diverse Wimbles to be made of a just bigness to the Pots, these are to boar the holes in the earth to place the Pots in; note the holes are to be bored somewhat aslent, that the stones may fly sideways to disorder the Ranks; if it be swardy ground, then only the top of the sward is to be laid to cover the Pots, and the residue of the earth is to be cast quite away towards your own Troops to avoid suspicion; then there are Regals cut from pot to pot, to lay the Pipes which are to convey the trains of Powder; these are also to be covered as the former: there may be also long trains made, both from the two ends, and also from some other places about the midst, these trains are to be likewise conveyed in Pipes ten or twenty rod towards your own Bataliaes, and when the Enemy is marched full upon them, than those appointed to attend these trains are to give fire unto them; Note if the earth should be wet, than the Pots and Pipes that convey the Trains, must be closed with Pitch or Yellow to prevent the moistening of the Powder. View the Figure following of all the parts of the Stratagem, which happily may cause you better to understand it.  
  

CCLXXIV.  
How to make Torches and Candles to burn in any weather: being a thing most necessary in the wars.  
THese kind of Torches are invented to keep fire either in windy or rainy weather; they are made of this composition following: Sulphur, Saltpetre, Rosin, Calxvine, quick Peal, Lin-seed Oil, and common Lamp-oil: Pitch, Tar, Camfire, Wax, Tutia, Arsenic, Quicksilver and Aquavitae: of this composition, may be Torches, Candles, or Balls of Wildfire made that will burn in the water without extinguishing.   

CHAP. CCLXXV.  
How to arm Pikes with Wildfire and Pistols for to withstand a Breach, and defend it against the Enemy.  
THis kind of arming of Pikes at the Spears end with Wildfire was invented for the defence of a Breach, Port or Bridge; and it hath been approved that an Enemy hath been more feared with it then with any other kind of weapon: the manner of framing these Weapons is after this fashion. First, there must be Powder bruised, eight parts; Peter in Roch, one part; Peter in Meal, one part; Sulphur in Meal, two parts; Rosin-Roch, three parts; Turpentine, one part; Lin-seed Oil, one part; Verdigrease, half a part; Bole-Armoniack 1/3 part: these ingredients must be put in a Bag made of strong Canvas, which first must be put upon the Pikes end, and the lower end of it being tied fast to the Pike, and the Bag filled up with this Composition, the other end thereof must also be fast tied to the end of the Spear; the whole Bag must be sound woulded with a small Cord: this being done, than there must be 〈◊〉 in a Pan, Pitch, four parts; Lin-seed Oil, one part; Turpentine, one part; Tar, 1/3 part; Tallow, one part: these being mixed together must be daubed all over the Canvas a good thickness: then being cold, two holes must be bored into the Bag two inches deep with a sharp square Iron, filling the same with fine bruised Powder; to this may be made fast diverse Pistoll-Barrels charged with Bullets: this instrument will perform excellent service in a throng of people. View the figure.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXVI.  
A Device to make a Musket shoot with the same quantity of Powder half as far again, as her usual Shot is.  
THis Invention the King of Sweden did make trial of, and it is a thing highly to be prized in the Wars: for many times it happens, that the wings of Shot in a pitched Battle are drawn out to skirmish with an Enemy before they be within the true distance of the Muskets commanding Shot; or being discharged by the Enemy out of some Fort many times when they are out of distance, whereby much Powder and shot is spent to no purpose; now to remedy this there is an approved device which will cause a Musket or Canon to shoot half as far again with the same quantity of Powder: and this is effected by taking of white Case-pepper of the soundest Corns, and steep them 24 hours in the strongest Aquavitae; then being taken out and dried in the Sun, so that they may not dank the Powder; then charging the Piece with the usual charge of Powder; you must take so many of these pepper Corns as will cover the circumference of the Boar, and being put down close with the stick to the Powder; then putting next to the Pepper the Bullet; this being tried at any mark, it shall be sensibly found to convey the Bullet with such a violence far beyond the accustomed shooting, and being charged without this ingredient, the Bullet shall not come little more than half the way.   

CHAP. CCLXXVII.  
Of the Bow-Pike, and how it is best to be used in the Wars.  
THis Invention of joining a Bow to the Pike, may be of excellent use in the Wars, to impale the Flanks of an Army, for when the Horse shall charge either in Flank or Rear those Arrows will gall them: they are very good to be drawn out to safeguard some small troops of shot, that shall be sent out to discharge upon the Horse; but for the placing of these in the Front of the main Battalia's, I hold it not so good, unless it be only the two first ranks; for it will be very troublesome when the Troops snall join at push of Pike; beside, the Pikes heads will soon out their Bowstrings in sunder, and make them of no validity: and questionless in the time of stormy wet weather, these Bows would do great service, when the Musket cannot be discharged for wet; but were it so, that a Pike were made of such an indifferent bigness towards the But end, that there might be disposed in it three Petronel Barrels, made of a very light substance, as there is a new Invention found out in that kind; there is a light lock to be placed a yard from the But end, this shall at once pulling up, strike fire twice, having a double pan, and that part of the Pike the Petronel is placed in, is to be turned round, so that the Touch-holes of these Barrels may turn to the lock one after another, without removing either of hand or foot; this would work some effect against the Enemy's Pikes, it going with that force, that it would enter their Corslets; which the force of an Arrow could not perform. View the Figures.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXVIII.  
The Description of an Engine, whereby the diversity of the strength of powder may be truly known.  
TO know which are the strongest sorts of Gunpowder; according as this Figure demonstrates, you must prepare a Box as A B, being four inches high, and two inches wide, having a Lid joined unto it; the Box ought to be made of Iron, Brass, or Copper, and to be fastened to a good thick Plank, and to have a Touchhole at the Bottom as O, and that end of the Box where the hinge of the Lid is, there must stand up from the Box, a piece of Iron or Brass, in length answerable unto the Lid of the Box, this piece of Iron must have a hole quite through it towards the top, and a Spring as AGNOSTUS, must be skrewed or riveted, so that the one end may cover the said hole; on the top of all this Iron or Brass that stands up from the Box, there must be jointed a piece of Iron (made as you see in the Figure) the hinderpart of which, is bend downward and entereth the hole that the Spring covereth; the other part resteth upon the Lid of the Box, open this Box Lid, and put in a quantity of Powder, than shut the Lid down, and put fire to the Touchhole at the Bottom, the Powder being fired, will blow the Bo●e Lid up the notches, more or less, according to the strength of the Powder; thus by firing the same quantity of diverse kinds, at several times, you may know which is strongest.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXIX.  
Of a Bridge made without Boats or Barrels, Cordage or Timberwork which transported 4000 men at once, over a great River.  
IN the Ascent of Cyrus, the third Book, pag the 57 the Army being in great distress environed on one fide with high Mountains, and deep broad Rivers on the otherside, a Rhodian presented himself to the General, and did undertake to transport 4000 at once, over those Rivers, without Boats or Barrels (whereof indeed they were defective) wherefore he provided all the raw Hides that he could possibly get, and sowing them up very close, blew them full of Wind, than he made use of such Cords and Ropes as the Army could afford, and tied them together, having stones upon them which went down like Anchors, these being placed upon the waters, he threw Rice upon them, and then earth, which kept them from tottering, making them lie stable, every Bouget was able to convey two men; by this means the Army was conveyed well.   

CHAP. CLXXX.  
How Caesar made a Bridge upon the River Rhine and carried his Army over into Germany.  
CAesar holding scorn to transport his Army over the River Rhine by Boats into Germany, he bethought himself to try what he could do to make an artificial Bridge, which should stand more for his honour, and the terror of his Enemies; they conceiving it impossible to frame a Bridge over a water so deep, broad, and swift, wherefore he caused great store of Timber to be brought, and at two foot distance, he placed two Trees of a foot and half square, sharpened at the lower end, and cut answerable to the depth of the River; these he let down into the water with Engines, and drove them in with Commanders; not perpendicularly, after the fashion of a Pile, but G●blewise and bending with the force of the water; opposite unto these, he placed two other Trees, joined together after the same fashion, being 40 foot distant from the former by the dimension between their lower parts in the bottom of the water, and reclining against the recourse of the River; these two pair of Couples thus placed, he joined together with a Beam of two footsquare, equal to the distance between the said Couples, and fastened them at each end on either side of the Couples, with Braces and Pins, whereby the strength of the work and the nature of the Frame was such, that the greater the violence of the stream was, and the faster it fell upon the Timber, work, the stronger the Bridge was united together in the couple and joints; In like manner he proceeded with Couples and Beams, until the Work was brought unto the other side of the River, than he laid strait planks from Beam to Beam, and covered them with hurdles, and so he made a floor to the Bridge Moreover, on the Lower side of the Bridge, he drove Supporters, which being fastened to the Timberwork, did strengthen the Bridge against the force of the water, and at the upper side of the Bridge at a reasonable distance, he placed Piles to hinder the force of Trees or Boats, or what else the Enemy might cast down to dam up the water, whereby the Bridge might have been borne down by the violence of the stream; this work was begun and finished in ten days.   

CHAP. CCLXXXI.  
The Description of an Instrument, invented by King Henry the fifth, at the Battle of Agincourt, and since used by the King of Sweden, and by him called a Swines-Pike.  
THis Instrument was first invented by King Henry the fifth, at the Battle of Agincourt, and did infinite service there; and now of late days was used by that famous General, the King of Sweden: the manner of it is thus; First, the Instrument is made of a strong piece of Ash, about four foot in length; biggest in the midst, and shaved Taper-wise towards each end; upon each end is fastened on an Iron Pike of an indifferent length, with cheeks down a pretty way the staff to strengthen it; this instrument every Masquetier carried one of them at his girdle, & when they were upon service, as they advanced to give fire upon the Enemy, they stuck down one of these somewhat sloping, to the intent if the Enemy's horse should charge them, these Instruments would prevent them; for they could not possibly shift them, but they would pierce their Horse's Breasts: by this they were able to maintain a skirmish, against the potency of the Horse. View the Figures of it.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXXIII.  
How a Case of Tin is to be made, to carry light Matches in, that the Enemy may not discover them.  
THe Prince of Orange when he intended to assault a Town by night, upon an Onslaught, he invented an Instrument to carry the light matches in, so that the sparks of them might not be discovered from the walls by the Enemy's Sentinels, the manner of forming them wa● thus; the●● was a piece of Tin or Latin, made like an elder pipe about a foot long, the hollowness of it was of sufficient bigness to hold the match within it; it had also diverse holes on either side, like the holes of a Flute, to let in the air to keep the match from extinguishing; the match being drawn in a good way into the Pipe, it cannot be discovered, for the wind can have no power to make the sparkles fly. View the figure.  
  

CHAP. CCLXXXIII.  
How the Venetians did order their Powder, after their Arsnall was burnt.  
THe Venetians had their Magazine blown up with Gunpowder, two or three several times, and for a future prevention they sat in counsel a long time, how they might prevent this danger, which might come either by accident or treachery, but they could in no wise contrive a way to their liking; a poor man in Venice hearing of it, had presently a device in his brains how to order the matter, so that no damage might ensue either by fire to consume it, or by any other means to decay the strength of the powder; whereupon being brought before the Estates, he wished them not to compound the three ingredients (that powder is made of) together, but to lay in one room the Saltpetre, in another room the Brimstone, and in the third the Charcoal, and so to compound it, as they used it, for none of these three being several, could easily be fired, and if they were, it could do no great harm before it should be discovered; neither would it waste nor consume in the strength of it; but being made into powder, it would blow all up of a sudden; he being rewarded for his advice, they made use of his counsel and do observe it to this present day.    
FINIS.   

ANIMA'DVERSIONS OF WAR. THE SECOND BOOK.  
By ROBERT WARD Gentleman, and Commander.  
I D  
PRINCEPS SVBDITORVM INCOLUMITATEM PROCURANS.  
LONDON, Printed by john Dawson. 1639.   

THE OFFICE OF A GENERAL, With his ACCOMPLISHMENTS.  

L IB. II. SECT. XV.  

CHAP. I.  
The Character of a General, with such excellent properties, both of body and mind, which he ought to be endued withal, declared; and also the chiefest circumstances belonging to his high and weighty Office.  
A General over an Army, must be ever trusty, faithful, and dutiful to his Prince; endued with excellent judgement, reason, and resolution; well studied in the liberal Arts; of a fierce disposition, yet qualified with justice, and clemency; not rash in undertaking, yet as free from cowardice, as cruelty; talk little, and brag less, in speech ready, and eloquent, faithful of his word, constant and strong in the prosecution of his purposes, bountiful and honouring due deserts; of a good ability of body; in his countenance a stately terror, yet in private affable and pleasant; naturally disposed to abhor vice; of a natural strength and hardiness to undergo all extremities, either in travel, or want; in arms expert and adventurous; his invention subtle, full of inward bravery and fierceness, in his execution resolute; always forward, but never dismayed; in counsel sudden and wise, of a piercing insight to foresee dangers, ingenious, decent, and in performance a man; or as Sr. R. Dallington specifies in his Aphorisms, to be five things required in a General; 
Bona Ducis 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quinque, s●●entia, virtus, providentia, authoritas, fortuna. Lip. solemnising. l. 5.  knowledge, valour, foresight, authority, and fortune; he that is not renowned for all or most of these virtues, is not to be reputed fit for this charge; nor can this glory be purchased, but only by practice and proof; for the greatest Fencer, is not always the best Fighter, nor the fairest Tilter, 
Tiberius' hortabatur Senatum, ut eligeret Proconsulem in Bello contra Tacfarinatem, gnarum militiae, corpore validum, & Bello suffecturum. Tac. hist. l. 3.  the ablest Soldier, nor the greatest Favourite in Court, the fittest Commander in a Camp: that Prince therefore is ill advised that confers this charge upon his Minion, either for his Courtship, or what other respects, neglecting those more requisite and more noble parts.  
Wherefore a General ought to be excellently qualified in the real knowledge of his Office, and every circumstance belonging unto it, before he shall adventure to take so weighty a charge upon him; 
Non erunt honores unquam ●ortuiti muneris. Aus. fol. 92.  and far be it from any man to undertake this honourable burden, having the speculative and practic part of his Office to learn, when occasion calls for performance; for many Armies hath been subdued by this onething; for he that will be fortunate and desires to achieve to honour, must consider it hath a dangerous birth, and that in like manner it must be nourished and fed with great circumspection and care; he must be infinitely chary, lest he be seduced by the trains of time; and the preservation of his honour must be his chiefest aim, next the love and fear he owes to God, having an especial care that the Christian Religion be had in due reverence in his Army, causing such Ministers of God's word, as shall follow to instruct the Army, to retain their dignities, and to be reverenced of his soldiers; by this means an Army shall be kept in marvellous obedience and order, and the Almighty Lord of Hosts will be ever assisting to work him honourable victories, causing his divine providence to attend him, as he did to Gideon, 
judges 6. 36.  who had a miraculous sign of a Conquest by the strange effects of the Fleece.  
Hezechiah had the like by the Sun's retrograding ten degrees. 
2 Kings 20. 8.   
Also in History we read of Alexander, how he dreamt that he sported with Satyrs, as he marched to the siege of Troy; whereupon his diviners perceived some divine revelation in it, and found the Anagram of it to be Tua Tyrus, and so it happened.  
Likewise Constantine marching towards Maxentius and Licinius, to give them Battle, being sad and pensive casting up his eyes, perceived a lightsome pillar in form of a Cross, 
Socrates' Scholast.  wherein he read engraven these words, In hoc vince; the night following our Saviour appeared in a vision unto him, commanding him to wear that Emblem in his Banner, and he should be victorious; this command he observed, and was victorious, and turned a faithful Christian; so that questionless, where God loves and favours, before he will see destruction to encompass his chosen Army, his destroying Angel shall devour the enemy: 
Samuel 10. vers. 9  and never was General yet chosen to govern an Army, which God did so favour, but he gave him another heart, as he did to Saul, and fitted him with virtues fit to execute the place.   

CHAP. II.  
The things which a General is to give order for, unto his Sub-officers, to be in a readiness against he Marcheth; with all manner of circumstances belonging to this Office; as namely rules and precepts, whereby the ablest Generals in former ages have steered their warlike course.  
THE things necessary to be thought upon by a General after his Army is levied, is provision necessary for the same; as (formerly hath been showed) namely Victuals, moneys, Powder, Shot, Artillery, Engines, Arms, Spades, Mattocks, etc. with the safest transporting of these either by land or water, and how in time of want to be speedily relieved with these materials, which war consists of; the Army being composed of a competency both of horse and foot, as the consequence of the design shall be thought to require, for the managing of this war, there must be a convenient Navy if the service requires, either to conduct or assist, or both. His care is to provide, and declare, good and wholesome laws, that soldiers may be governed by, endeavouring to win favour, using justice with clemency, and courtesy towards all; taking away all occasions, that may provoke his Officers, or soldiers to transgress before punishment be inflicted; he must be very vigilant and careful, how and where he land's his men, strongly fortifying near the shore, that recourse may be had too and fro from their ships: he is seldom or never to re-imbarke his Army in the same place he landed them, especial if the enemy be at hand, where he will have infinite advantage upon the disorderly re-imbarking, if some fortification be not raised to defend them from the enemy's assault.  
He must be frugal of the blood and slaughter of his soldiers; only in dangers not to be eschewed, or upon absolute advantages, in such a case he is both to adventure his honour and his soldier's lives, to the hazard of the merciless sword; always remembering that upon unadvisedness, and yielding unto dishonourable terms, though at first 〈◊〉 fares like a green sore, yet afterwards he shall find pain enough; for dishonour frecs to the bone.  
Also there is great knowledge, by reading, and practice, required in him, whereby he may give advice for the sundry sorts of Imbattelling, Encamping, Fortifying, and to use or prevent all kind of stratagems; for by the reading of History a man may learn, and conceive more in a year than he possibly can see practised in his life time; by reason whereof the worthies of ancient times, were portraited with a Book in one hand, and a Sword in the other.  
And because there is no General, but is limited by his Prince in his Commission, he is therefore to observe literally every tittle of it, & not to exceed the limits of it, although a victory might be attained; in the like kind, all inferior Officers are bound to obey their General in all things he shall please to command; which obedience and observance made King Philip of Spain protest, that the true observing of his Commission by his General the Count de Medina in 88 was far more pleasing to him, than the loss of his Invincible Navy caused grief.  
General's must be very circumspect in making choice of their Officers, not electing them for their outward show, but for their virtuous conditions and approved experience; for favour may be prejudicial in these affairs, and greatness of birth is not to be expected as the sole thing to qualify a man, and to beget in him the habit of a soldier.  
Also a General is not to be unmindful to honour and reward the virtuous and valiant, as well as to be severe in punishing the vicious and imbellick persons; for he that correcteth the offender, and rewardeth not the well deserver, will soon be disesteemed of. Hythlodaeus in his Utopia bitterly invayeth against such kind of proceedings; he holdeth it very unfitting for Commanders to make the sentence of death the guerdon for theft and mischief, and doth not rather first carefully provide to prevent the occasions; Cum multò potius providendum fuerit, uti aliquis esset proventus vitae; ne cuipiam sit tamen dira fur andi primùm, deinde pereundi necessitas. Also deserts of right aught to be gratified with gifts and advancements; for it is the surest tie to knit a man to his superior, which being not performed, breeds impatience, discontents, and heartburning, and for the most part apt to break forth into dangerous attempts, Milites ditate, reliquos omnes spernite.  
A General ought to be very circumspect in Marching his Army in difficult ways, especially if the enemy be at hand; for an enemy will wait his occasion, and take the best opportunity to fall on; for prevention whereof the horse-troopes are to March before; which will discover the enemy and hold them play, until all the foot divisions are drawn into Battalia; also in Marching over Plains or Heathes, at every stand the Companies must draw up into several divisions, which are as so many limbs ready to frame the body of the Army upon a sudden.  
The danger of being pestered and troubled with carriages and luggage, is very great, and to be avoided; for it hath been the confusion of dive●s Armies; as first of Malchome King of Scots; likewise Sebastian King of Portugal in his wars against Abde●●elec King of Morocco.  
Likewise a General is upon all occasions, to call to counsel his chief Officers to debate of all affairs and designs, taking every man's opinion at large, only reserving his resolution to himself in all secrecy, that none or very few should be made partakers before the execution.  
A General ought to know the situation of every country by his insight in the use of Maps, and take a true survey of all such parts as his Army is to march thorough, whether they be plains or champions, or woody and full of waters; whether or not furnished with strong Towns and Forts; so that accordingly he may proportion his Horse and Foot; for in Champion Country's Horses are of greatest use; if situated upon straits and strong Forts, the Army must consist most of Footmen.  
He is also to gain perfect intelligence, how his enemy is appointed; how, and in what kind his Army is demeaned; for it is no policy to follow a lightfooted enemy with an heavy Army.  
Also a General must take notice if any matter of fear or muttering be in the Army, upon the rumour of giving Battle: Exercitum terrore plenum Dux ad pugnam non ducat; also a further principle in war must be observed. Si Deuces necessary cum multitudine pugnare cogantur, Consilium ect noctis tempore Belli fortunam tentare.  
A General ought also, not only to have expert Engineers and men of exquisite knowledge in the art of fortification, both of Forts, Camps, conducting of Ours, planting of Batteries, and disposing of all kind of Trenches; but also to have therein himself absolute judgement and knowledge; otherwise he may be wondrous misled, frustrating his designs, which will redound to his great dishonour.  
He is also to have a special consideration of the place he meaneth to encamp and continue his Army in; first respecting the healthfulness of the air, than the dryness of the ground, the conveniency of wood and water; and that the enemy may have no advantage to intercept the relief and provision that is to be conveyed to the Camp, either by water or land; that no hills be near to annoy the Camp, and that no waters be cut out to drown it.  
A General must cause his soldiers to take good rest and competent food, before he presumes to give Battle; for it is a principle in war, In pugna milites validius resistunt, si cibo potuque referti fuerint; Nam fames intrinsecus mag●● pugnat qu●● ferrum exteri●●: Soldiers do better stand to it in fight, if they have their bellyes full of meat and drink; for hunger within fights more eagerly, than steel without. Also he is to stir up their drooping spirits with some brave Heroic Oration, that shall inflame their spirits, that like lightning they may consume where they go.  
A General is to command his Officers daily to exercise their Companies, which will enable their bodies, and preserve their healths; and although the enemy should be far remote, yet duly to observe watches, guards, and setting forth their Sentinels as carefully, as if the enemy were near at hand; this will breed an habit and custom to their bodies, so that it will not seem grievous to them, when as they shall perform those duties in earnest.  
A General must be very circumspect in giving an express command to his Officers, that no abusive drinking be used amongst his Officers, nor Soldiers; par vinonolentiam crudelitas sequitur; for it is commonly seen that quarrels, mutines, and horrible abuses arise by drunkenness, besides the neglect of their duties, whereby an enemy takes his advantage to destroy a whole Campe.  
A General is to have special care, that there be no quarrels or heartburning between his Officers, but speedily to reconcile them, before they go upon any service, lest a greater mischief ensue, as did upon the like difference betwixt Hanno and Bomilcar, two famous Captains of Carthage, who being in fight against Agathocles, and furiously charged by his troops, Bomilcar withdrew his divisions, suffering Haenno and his soldiers to be hewn to pieces.  
If a Captain or soldier transgresseth twice by his cowardliness, or through negligence, 
Not that famous Hannibal that poisoned himself.  a General ought not to forgive; as Hannibal a Commander in the first Punick wars lost his head, for being through his cowardice vanquished twice; Non est bis in Bello peccare.  
A General must avoid mutinies, disorders, and abuses in his Army, by commanding every Regiment to be drawn in parrado, and before the head of the troops; some Officer to read such laws and edicts as are provided for the Army to be governed by, whereby may not plead ignorance, and if any dares offend wilfully against any of the Articles, immediately to have the punishment inflicted without respect of persons.  
He is to command diverse false alarms to be made, whereby he shall see in what a readiness his Army will be in if necessity required, and if any base cowardliness should be found in any soldier, that should not dare to answer the alarm with speed, he should be brought before the head of the troops, and his arms broken, and banished the Army.  
If a General perceives that the enemy stops his relief of Victuals and Ammunition, that without hazard they cannot arrive; then he must take notice what Towns, or Forts intercept the passage of relief, and give order for the taking of them in, or strong Convoys prepared to conduct the carriages; for it is very dangerous to have an enemy in the Rear of an Army to hold any strong Towns or Forts; for thereby they have advantage to stay and surprise all relief, that should sustain the Campe.  
He must be truly informed by Intelligencers, and Guides (whose informations he must compare with the Map of that Country, to see that no false wood be used) how far the enemy's Towns lie from his Army; he must not be ignorant of the Hills, Valleys, Ways, straits, Passages, Lakes, Rivers, and Bridges; their number; quality, distance, with every particular circumstance; whereby he may know how the enemy may annoy him, and the better he may know how to place his Fortifications, and Guards, for to prevent him. The Prince of Orange was well seen in these affairs; he knowing the situation of the seventeen Provinces in the Netherlands so exactly, that he was able at one time to give directions, how sundry parts and passages, should be guarded, what straits fortified, what levels drowned, either by sea or fresh water, whereby he avoided present and eminent dangers.  
Before a General intends to march with his Army, the ways are to be scoured by certain horsemen, for fear the enemy should lay any Ambuskadoes; and also to give notice of the conveniency of the ways for the Soldiers and Artillery to pass; and also he is to have provided able sufficient Guides to conduct them, the best and safest way.  
A General is to see every Regiment as they march, take their places according to their antiquities in the Field; but when Companies are in Garrison, that Company which first enters the Town hath the priority during the time they stay; also in a March the eldest Regiment is not continually to have the Vanguard, but the Regiment that marched the first day in the Van, the next day must march in the Rear; and so proportionably every Regiment must take his turn if the march continues; and in the morning before they dislodge, a piece of Ordnance is to be discharged first, whereby the Army takes notice they are to march; at the second report of the Ordnance, every Company is in arms ready to march; and at the third report of the Cannon, the first Regiment marcheth.  
If diverse Nations should be in an Army, every particular Nation is to be quartered in a division by themselves, and not to mix Companies to avoid quarrels: moreover if the number be great of the Mercenary Nations, it is best to divide them, both in marching and imbattelling, lest they should be treacherous, or cowardly; for there is no confidence nor trust can be reposed in them, unless they be conveniently placed in the Battle, so as they may be yoked in and tied to perform their best endeavours. If an enemy should keep a Strait to hinder the marching of the Army; a General must draw out both Horse and Foot to charge them in either Flank, and then the residue to fight out their way in the Front of them.  
Also a General must be very expert in distinguishing the several seats of the Drum, which is his voice in the time of war; the soldiers are also to be taught the understanding of the same, that they may accordingly demean themselves as the beat of the Drum commands.  
A General is to give to the sergeant-major-general of the Army the watchword, which is privately to be kept and returned to all inferior Officers; by which word, they may pass the whole Army through; this watchword is to be altered every night.  
A General is to cause lots or billets to be made, with the names of every particular guard written in them, those are to be rolled up, and put into a hat by the Major, and so every inferior officer draws his guard; by this means disputes are prevented, and the enemy cannot corrupt an officer to give over a guard, because it is uncertain who shall have that watch; also to give order to the inferior Officers, for the due and orderly relieving of the watch, morning and evening.  
A General is to draw his whole Army into Battallia and to see them exercised in gross, changing them into diverse forms of Battle; the footmen are to be ordered in diverse small battalions, whereof are framed the right Wing, the Battle, and the left Wing; the Battle is to consist of as many more men as either of the Wings doth; the Horsemen are to be divided into diverse Battallia's, so as they may one relieve the other; the one half of the horse, are to be placed on the right Wing of the Army, the other on the left, unless one of the Wings, and the rear of the battle may be secured by Rivers, Bogges, or Rocky ground, so that the enemy may not take advantage with his horse; then they are to be ranged only upon one Wing, they are to be placed a sufficient distance from the foot, lest by their disorderly retreat they annoy their own foot-troopes; diverse foot and horse are to be ranged a good distance before the Army, which are termed the forlorn hopes, in regard they are first to charge the enemy; these troops being thus ordered are to be taught how to advance and retreat, performing all actions, as ample as if the enemy were encountering with them. This kind of exercise will make them ready, and orderly in their performances, otherwise it may prove dangerous to bring them to the encounter.  
A General is to animate his soldiers in time of need to take pains; as the valiant Emperor Vespasian who was the first man that carried a Basket of earth to the Fortification, that his soldiers might not think scorn to imitate him; it is the sober obedient mind, and the hard painful body, that makes the noble soldier.  
A General must take away all hope of refuge from his soldiers in time of Battle, as William the Conqueror and Julius Caesar did send away their shipping that there soldiers should hope for nothing but either victory, or a grave; and in many Battles troops of horses have been placed in the rear of the Army, to put to the sword all such as turn head to look for refuge.  
It is not sufficient for a General to get a victory, but also to know how to use it, for many times security and negligence, after a conquest hath bred utter ruin, as appeared by the history of Bayan Chinsan, who was General to the Tartarian Emperor, after he had vanquished his enemy at Cinguinguy, by their carelessness, disorders, and drunkenness, were set upon in the night by the remnant remaining, who put them all to the sword.  
It is very dangerous for a General to present battle to an enemy in such a difficult place, 
Sc●●●erberg practised this against the Turk and overcame him.  that he is devoid of all refuge, or possibility to escape, whereby urgent necessity may make an enemy desperate. If a General sees his horse-troopes too weak to encounter with the Enemies, than he must give order for diverse shot to march up in file with the horse; then seeing their advantage, to break out from them, and gall the enemy; these shot would be often exercised with the horse to make them apt to give an assault, and also upon occasion to reunite themselves into a body to make a defence.  
If a General draws out any Wings of shot, (to charge and skirmish with the enemy) any far distance before the body of the Army; then they ought to be backed with a guard of Pikes, which are to rescue them from the charge of horse, as also to aid them if they should join pell mel with the enemies forlorn hope; but this is to be performed long before the bodies of either Armies can meet, which kind of skirmishes are for diverse good ends; as first, to discover, and win some ground of advantage, or to give the soldier's courage, by seeing how those loose bands do valiantly foil those of the enemy, in which skirmishes some politic stratagem is to be used, to scare and affright the enemy; for any unexpected accident, will seem strange to an Army, although it be never so small, and will be ready to disorder them; he that commands these troops must be very wise and circumspect, left he falls into the enemy's stratagems, which may discourage the Army.  
Also a General is not to trust to a seeming victory; for many times good success at the first, in a battle, occasioneth the overthrow of many great actions, as we have the example of Theoderick, General of the Germans; his army being very potent, had gotten the best of William Earl of Flanders at the first encounter, which made the Germans confident, and the rather secure, in regard their strength exceeded the Flemings; but the Flemings being rather desperate than resolute; and by the valour of the Earl they had so reunited their broken troops, and with a furious charge did so shake and disorder the Germans, that many of them were slain, and the rest put to flight.  
If a General or some other great Commander, or if any part of the Army should be cut off by the enemy, it is best to keep it from the knowledge of the rest of the Army, lest it dishearten them.  
If an Army be to march in the dark; to avoid confusion, command must be given that every soldier shall carry the end of his Leaders pike or weapons from making any noise: and by that means they shall keep right in their ranks.  
A General in time of battle must be very wise and discreet, to give order when the skirmishers of the loose-banded Maniples shall make their recreate, and to what place; also when the Horse shall charge, and what part of the enemy's divisions they shall assault; and to give order what footmen shall be drawn out to succour them if occasion be; also what Battalia's shall advance forwards, and when to retreat; likewise when the whole body of the Army shall charge, and what divisions shall pursue the victory; always remembering to keep the main Battle steadfast, and not to move in pursuit after the vanquished enemy; also to have Officers in the time of fight, to gather together such straggling soldiers as shall be disranked and in disorder, and so make a body of them in the rear of the Army.  
There are sundry opinions about the place of a General in the time of giving battle: but questionless, the best and securest place is before the battle of succour; but at the first he may stand in the front of the main battle, until such time as the forlorn hopes are beaten in: he is to ride upon a small Palfrey, having a guard of able gentlemen in like sort attending him, the which he may send to and fro upon all occasions to give Officers intelligence of his pleasure.  
If a General shall perceive fresh aids are approaching, then let him use his best endeavours to give the enemy battle before they arrive; and also to draw out a convenient force to meet those aids, and give them battle in some place of greatest advantage.  
If a General's victuals, ammunition or pay begins to fail, then let him endeavour to give his enemy battle, if he suspect Supplies: but if he knows his enemy is in want either of victuals, ammunition, etc. or that sickness, mutinies or the like are in his Army, so that any hope be that his Army may of itself dissolve, than a General must stand strongly upon his guard, and by all means avoid joining battle, as was practised by the Prince of Orange about fourteen years since, when Grave Hendrick Vandenberg marched over the river ysel in a great frost, by the Town of Duesburgh into the Vello, with ten thousand men; where his Excellency and the States of Holland might have given him battle with a great deal of conveniency, but he rather suffered him to pillage the Dorpes and burn where he pleased, because he knew he could not stay long, nor march far from the river, lest the frost should have broke, and he disappointed of his return.  
If a General hath had victory triumphed on his side, a little persuasion will serve to cause the Soldiers to encounter a second time; for as the proverb saith, victoria victoriam parat, animumque victoribus anget, & adversariis anfert: for questionless one victory begets another, and puts great courage into those that have already had the better; and it beats the edge of courage and spirit from those that have been beaten: wherefore a General must be very wise and careful how he brings on his men to fight after an overthrow once received, unless it be upon great advantages and firm hopes of a Conquest.  
When a General intends to make a retreat from his enemy, he must be very circumspect & careful in his carriage, and demeaning of his actions for his better safety and strengthening, for fear his soldiers perceive any cause of fear should constrain him, in regard of the nearness or potency of the enemy's army; but he is to let his soldiers understand that his retreat is to draw the enemy after him to be surprised in some ambushkado; or rather, if it may be with conveniency, for his better advantage to give the enemy battle: for there are diverse inconveniences attend a retreat, if the enemy be in view: for although a General may aim at some place of better advantage, yet unhappily there may be diverse ill passages and straits to hinder their quick passage: beside, these kind of retraits breed a jealousy both in soldiers and their Officers; for they know that he that forsakes the field fears some danger: so that the safest way is either to recreate before an enemy be at hand, or being near at hand, secretly in the night; for it is a Maxim to be observed, Rather to retreat in the dark than be beaten in the light: Si certamen quandoque dubium videatur, tacitam miles arripiat fugam; fuga enim aliquando lauda●da (saith a learned General). But indeed of all motions in the war, a safe retreat is the most difficult, but that danger will ever attend, as Monluc high Marshal of France once said, Je ne trove point nul fait des armes choses si difficille cue ●ne retreat: A General must have a jealous eye over an enemy that is revolted from his King, and beware what confidence he reposeth in him; for diverse respects; as namely, first, they are not to be used in any great erterprises, neither are they to be trusted in any frontier Town or Fort of any consequence; for they may redeem their reputations, liberties and estates lost, by surrendering up those Forts: The French had experience of this when Don Pedro de Navarro (being banished Spain) was trusted with Fonterable, and to gain his former freedom, he surrendered up this Town, anno 1523. A General may make use of a Treason, but let him never trust the Traitor.  
A General must take this for a Maxim; If a Commander of any high authority hath wilfully transgressed, 
Machiavelli taxeth this for a great Solecism in S●ate  either not to strike at all, or else to strike home; for he shall be sure afterwards to be rewarded to purpose. A delinquent regaining liberty, may endanger the estate of an army and the life of a General: for high spirits will seek revenge, as by our late woeful experience of that treacherous Felton, who spitefully murdered our noble General, the Duke of Buckingham: therefore there is but three ways for a General to deal with such wilful transgressors, whose spirits cannot be subjected: namely, first to put them to present execution; although it be a solemn thing, yet it must be allowed where it cannot be helped; but where with safety it may be helped it is to be disallowed. The second is to keep a delinquent close prisoner, or confine him to the custody of some man in trust, and in this there is a great caution to be used; for our Histories report of Morton Bishop of Ely, who was committed to the custody of Buckingham by King Richard the third; he by his policy not only gained his own freedom, but wrought the Duke to his own faction. The third and last is the more noble and gentile, and in most cases surest; and that is a free and gracious pardon both of life and for liberty; which, although of itself, it may seem partly unsafe, yet if the delinquent be of a noble disposition, and have any spark of worth in him, there is no better way to endear him to his Superior, than by promising him promotions and honours, or advancing him to some place of gain or trust: This was practised by Oth●, who not only pardoned Marius Celsus, the chief man of Galba's faction, but put him in a place of great command and honour in the Wars against Vtelius: He yielding this reason for it, Ne hostis metum reconciliationis adhiberet: a pardoned enemy is jealous of the breach making up.  
The chiefest means whereby a soldier will be drawn to love and honour his General, is by receiving courteous carriage, and careful provision for those that are wounded and maimed in the Wars, and by a strict command that the Officers do not wrongfully abuse them: if any soldier should be taken prisoner, order is presently to be taken for his ransom. This will encourage soldiers to venture themselves upon all perilous dangers.  
A General ought to be very careful to prevent discontents, and to appease mutinies, which for the most part grow from the neglect of the due and well paying of the soldiers their weekly pay, which draws infinite dangers after it: for usually they take the advantage to rebel, when the most present and urgent occasion of service is to be performed; as appeared at the siege of Ostend, where Duke Albertus his forces would not be entreated to go upon the service intended, without they had first their present pay, which he, not being able to perform, nor having the art to insinuate into their affection to gain their patience and loves, but rather trusting to his power to reduce them to his service by force of arms, caused two thousand of his army to revolt to the enemy, which might have been the ruin of his design. In such a desperate case, there is no better way to prevent them, than by making loving protestations and large promises, and to satisfy so far as ability will extend. They that are the chiefest in the faction, in a fit time and season are to be privately apprehended and punished, whereby the whole faction will be enervated and weakened by degrees, and the inferiors seeing the chiefest in the rebellion to be surprised, will yield quietly of themselves, so that they shall be brought under obedience without any hazarding of the General's person.  
A General must conceive, that advice may be given and taken to a man's own destruction: for it may as well be the wise man's fall, as the fool's advancement; and is oftenest most dangerous in wounding, when it strokes with a silken hand: for a base Politician is indeed a devouring fury in the shape of friendship, to advantage his deceit the more.  
That General that is not truly wise and valiant, soon loseth his Command, and grows contemptible, and by his own folly or fears, infects his troops with cowardice. It is reported of Caesar, (by Cicero) That in all his command in War, there was not found an It●, but a Veni; taking it as a great dishonour to himself to be any thing but the forwardest Leader in all his designs.  
If any discontents and quarrels should arise in a General's Camp, between Officers of great Authority and Command, it is not safe for a General to take part of any side, but rather to mediate peace between them; for the contrary side that sees he is despised or neglected, will study a revenge; as by the example of the Earl of Warwick and the Duke of Somerset, who falling out in Henry the fourth his Court, Somersets' part was chiefly taken; whereupon Warwick rebelled, and deadly Wars continued twenty nine years, until there was a general confusion of both Houses: so that the safest way, if peace cannot be mediated, is to confine them both, until they be glad to desire friendship of themselves.  
A General ought in some kinds to participate in the wants and distresses of his Soldiers, which makes them the more willing to undergo it; as Alexander did, who marching with his Army through a dry barren Country, where the Army was almost famished, a Soldier brought him an helmet of water, who courteously rewarded him, and told him he durst not drink it unless there were sufficient for all his Soldiers, and so cast it upon the ground; testifying, that he desired to fate no better than his Soldiers.  
Also a General ought to take notice, that his Honour and all his Actions are much subject to be dimmed and disgraced; especially, if he seeks not to be beloved and honoured of his Army: beside, it is the policy of a subtle enemy to study and labour how to undervalue and disgrace Commanders, so, that their Soldiers may have a base and poor opinion of their worths, whereby all erterprises or designs, taking no effect, shall be censured and ambiguously construed. Nihil est quod malè narrando non possit depravari.  
A General is to consider, that in all treaties of peace and friendship, these circumstances are first to be cosidered,: In the first place, either between the victor and the vanquished: secondly, between those, that having warred together, are upon equal terms of advantage: thirdly, between those that have lived always in good agreement without any quarrel. Unto the Victor the vanquished must yield, and patiently endure the imposition of some strict Covenants, which otherwise might seem unreasonable. Where War is made, and no advantage gotten, there it is usual to demand and make restitution of things and places claimed, gotten or lost, according as both parties can best agree: But between such Nations as never fell out, there ought no conditions of establishing friendship to be propounded, since it seems reasonable, that each party should hold their own, and neither carry themselves as Superiors unto other in prescribing aught that may be troublesome.  
Thus do I conclude this discourse with diverse Aphorisms (very proper and fit to be annexed to this subject) which I have collected out of S. R. Dallington, and fitted them for this purpose: and moreover I would not that any man should think that I go about to teach any Officer his duty, much less this high Officer, whose perfections ought to be beyond my capacity to conceive of; but these collections I have taken pains to gather from the best Authors, as things of consequence to be taken notice of by a General.  

Aphorism I.  
EXample is of greater validity than precept; 
Princeps optimus saciendo docet, cumque, sit imperio maximus, exemp●o major est. Valet. l. 2.  therefore a General must principally be an absolute Soldier, and likewise a good Director; that by his presence and personal performance his Soldiers may strive to imitate, 
I●lus in Deuce repones quam in Exercitu. Prob. d●●●per.  and be encouraged to undergo any pains, or meet with any danger: for upon his noble performance depends the success of the Service; 
Vnus hom● pluris quam ●niversa Civitas. Tac. de Mor. Ge●.  according to the Greek Proverb, That an Army of Sheep led by a Lion was better than an Army of Lions led by a Sheep.   

Aphorism II.  
THe keenest Razor will turn edge at a more solid substance, 
Fortuna vitrca est, cum splendet f●angitur.  but the tough and dull Axe is able to encounter the hard and sturdy Oak, and overpower him: So experience teacheth, that hot and fiery spirits are apt to get a purchase, 
Vincere scis, Hannibal, uti victoriâ nescis. Prob. de Han.  than to keep it. He therefore that hath the fortune to get the victory, but not the judgement to make use thereof, stands upon slippery ye, and is subject to fall on either band.   

Aphorism III.  
A General is to command and advise, 
In Milite uniu● sors est, in Imperatore universorum periculum. Egesip.  but Soldiers are to execute with their swords what is commanded; in this, but one man's life is in danger; 
Dubus praeliorum exemp●us, summam rerum & imperu scipsum reservat. Tac●. lib. 11.  but in that, the hazard of all. Wherefore a Commander in chief aught to be covered with the sevenfold shield of Ajax, and never expose his person to apparent peril, 
S●etit sub Ajacis clipco septemplice t●ctus. Hom. Odies. 9  but in case of a general overthrow and manifest defeat.   

Aphorism IU.  
Virtue is a Gem of such excellency, 
Exomni vita simulatio dissimulatioque, tollenda. Cic. l. 2.  that even her shadow, if it be in a great Commander, 
Sanctitas, sictas, sides, privata bona sunt. Sen. Thyest.  doth much good to particular Officers by imitation, 
Nescit imperare qui nescit dissimulare. Sigism. Imper.  and to the public Army by participation. Wherefore, though simulation of what is good, and dissimulation of what is evil, 
Malum sub lingua, non in lingua habens. Greg.  are accounted vices in a private man; yet in a public person, they are necessary evils; 
Simplicitas ac liberalitas, ni adsit mod●s. in exitum ver●untur. tacit. Hist. 3.  for if he be overt in expressing his nature, or prodigal in venting his purposes, it breeds dangerous consequences; for it harms himself, and arms his enemy with prevention.   

Aphorism V.  
Hid not from those of thy best and most private Council the true state of thy cause, 
Medicus in desperatione, ●ubern●●●● in tempestate cognoscitur; Horum omnium famam praecedentia pericula extollunt. Sid. App. 8.  and discover not to thy Army or Enemy thy wants or fears: for it encourageth the one, and quite dismayeth the other: 
Fair bonne mine, en mavai● jeu. Pro. Gal.  But if confusion were at hand so eminent, as if heaven and earth had conspired thy overthrow, yet comfort thyself and Soldiers with hopeful words of assurance of some plots and advantages thou hast against them (though thy heart apprehends truly the danger as it is) whereby thou mayst make thy resistance the stronger, 
Q●ò timoris minùs est, eò minùs fermè periculiest. Liv. l. 2●.  or procure thy peace upon better terms. 
●onus animus in re mala dimidium est ma●●. Plaut. Pseud.    

Aphorism VI.  
A Will to do hurt is more dangerous in the close, 
Flexu●sum & occultum hominis ingenium▪ cujus vis propriè in arte solertiaque, est posita, aptior tamen ad cavendos quam metuendos ●ostes. Eront▪ praef.  than a processed enemy, because he that suspecteth least, is soon and easiest overthrown: like the unskilful Fencer, who, while he wardeth the head, is hit at the heart, 
Nemo celerius opprimitur, quam qui nihil timet. Vel. l. 2.  which lay out of guard.   

Aphorism VII.  
IN the School of Art, 
Is qui nil dubitat, nil capit inde boni. Gram. vulg.  doubt begetteth knowledge; so in the School of Policy, 
Si nihil velis timere, metu●s omnia. Senec. Sent.  she is the mother of good success: for he that feareth the worst, 
Quod nimis miseri volunt, hoc faci'è credunt. Seneca.  preventeth it soon. Man naturally interprets things according as he would have them, 
Omnia audens contemnit●r, nil temerè agens metuitur. Liv. lib. 24.  and so doubts less than he should; but he that doubts most treads the safest path.   

Aphorism VIII.  
A Business well begun is half ended: 
Dimidium facti qui bene coepit habet. Hor. lib. 1. ep. 2.  wherefore it much imports to the happy or disastrous issue of any affairs, 
Bonum principium dimidium totius Pro. lat.  what manner of entrance and beginning he makes, especially in that of War; for good success in the first encounter greatly advances the main of his business, 
Fama in novis coeptis validissima est. Tac. An. 13.  & takes away both courage and reputation, 
Primis eventibus, metus aut fiducia gig●itur. Idem An. 12.  yea, and resolution from the losing side: herein therefore consists the main care of a General.   

Aphorism IX.  
WOrth is valued by the quality, 
Nun quam bonos fortesque mis●tes habebis, nisi haec duo ve●●t instrumenta ad●ibeas, delectum & disciplinam Lip. Pol. l. 5.  not the greatness of a thing; as the goodness of a Fortress consisteth rather in the conformity of the parts, and the answerable distances, than in the unproportionable greatness: 
Multitud●●● vi●es habet, sed pondus. Sen● c.  so the strength of an Army stands more in the valour and good order of the Combatants, than in the number; against which number, are these two principal advantages, great Ordnance, and good Ordnance.   

Aphorism X.  
It is unwarrantable to run an extreme hazard, 
De vita & regno velut ad casum alcae pericl●tari, stu●titi● est & vanitas. Stobaeus.  saveonely when extreme necessity commands: therefore a wise General ought never to venture his fortunes upon one day's trial, 
Fortunam inter dubia, virtutem inter certa numerare. Tac. de Ger.  or doubtful chance of Battle, when he foresees by military inductions that he may obtain his purposes without blows.   

Aphorism XI.  
WHo undertakes a long Voyage by Sea, 
Verum si incipias, neque terficias gnaviter, nihilo plus agas, quam si des operam, ut cum ratione insania● (quod ille de amoreidem de bello). Terent. Eun.  and at a great charge, must resolve to hold on his course against all accidents that may offer to oppose him: So a General being engaged in a great Action, must wrestle with all difficulties rather than quit the Enterprise; 
Mars communis, & victum saepe erigit, & affligit victorem. Liv. Lib. 28.  better it were to foresee the dangers at first and prevent them, or desist: but if once set forwards, he must take up this resolution, To go on with the Sword, or fall on the Sword: for in this he puts his fortunes upon trial, 
Et fractis rebus, violentior ultima virtus. Sil. Lib. 1.  but in retrograding he purchaseth shame and loss.   

Aphorism XII.  
AS the Orator placeth his strongest arguments in the entrance of his plea, 
Instandum famae, nam prout prima cesserint, succedunt universa. Tacit. lib. 12.  to persuade and confirm the Auditory: So should a General bend all his best forces upon the first piece he attempteth, to animate and encourage his Soldiers, 
Non mim●s famâ quam vi, stant res principum. Tac. An. 3.  and to give reputation to the action he intendeth; for first actions make deepest impressions either of fear or courage. 
La bonne reputation d'un Chief, est caused un grand bien pur son Armec. Plut. Phoc.  He is therefore so much to tender his reputation at the first onset, as to leave nothing behind him unbroken but that which bendeth.   

Aphorism XIII.  
Mischief enters at the open gate of security. 
Inter scopulos quibus illidi ac frangi Reipub. Navis solet. prima 〈◊〉 fiducial occurri●. Lip. Pol. lib. 3.  As the Indian Rat shuts himself into the belly of the Crocodile that sleeps gaping, and gnaws his guts asunder: So self-conceited confidence in our own strength, 
Credulitas pariter ac diffidentia perdiderunt homines. Hesiod. Lib 1.  and overweening credulity of an enemy's insufficiency, begets this supine negligence; but a watchful Providence prevents an eminent danger.   

Aphorism XIV.  
WE perceive it easier to oppose (in the Schools of Art) than answer; 
Tutissimum est inserre cum timeas gradum.  So by proof we find the same in the art of War: 
Quand on void venir le danger, ●●faut gaignerle devant; & ne 〈…〉 mal sei f●it, poory donner order. A●. P●ud.  For it is safer to obviate and meet danger in the way, than to tarry till it comes home to our doors. 
Provocando, tuis auges confidentiam, & adversariis min●●●; quia fortiores videntur qui provoc●re non dubitant. Liv.  For there is ever more courage in the assailer, and commonly better success.   

Aphorism XV.  
IN the active part of military service, 
Ars vi●cendi & bellandi est prudentia, ut medicina valetudinis, Ci●de fin.  the General's greatest virtue is to apprehend a present occasion of advantage, 
Mens u●a sapiens plurium vincit manus: qui fallere non v●●●, falls non potest. Lip. Pol. l. 3.  and to take it. So on the passive side, 
Mache giona (〈◊〉) c●e del perig●o 〈◊〉, omai fossae presago il c●ore, ●●irresolute in ritron●r rimedio: Lamia tenera età rendesse ●'timore.  the evasion from a sudden and imminent danger is much more noble than a forethought of prevention: for in this is only matter of judgement, but in that is the life of action and execution.   

Aphorism XVI.  
TO speak that which a man thinks not, 
Nulla sunt ●●liora consil●a quam quae ignocaverit ●osta antequàm fiunt. Veg. lib. 3.  is reprovable, being taken in strict moral sense; but necessity gives a larger latitude to the managing of greater affairs. For nothing is more expedient to a General, than that the enemy knows nothing of his deliberations till they be put in action, 
Nec ostenderunt Bellum prius quam i●t●lerunt. Liv. de Sab.  nor of his preparations till they be on foot. It is therefore an useful policy to pretend one Service, and intent another.   

Aphorism XVII.  
PLinie reports of a Getulian Captive that escaped the danger of devouring by many Lions through her humble gesture and fair language; 
Captivam Getuliae reducem a●divi, multorum Leonum impetum à se mitigatum; alioqui ausam se dicere faemina prosugan, infirmam, supplice animalis omnia dignissimi, caterisque imperantis, indignan ejus glori● pradam. Pl. nat. hist.  he being the noblest beast of the forest never commits violence but where he finds resistance: 
Debellare hosts fortune est, refocillare victos verè regium. Pan. lua a quo clementia abest, crudele est. Pom. Lec. 1.  So is the true Soldier the most honourable of all professions, who holds it as great glory to relieve the oppressed captive, as to conquer the enemy.   

Aphorism XVIII.  
IN the honour of great achievements, 
Fortunam cìtiùs reperias quam retine●●. Publi.  inferior Officers and Soldiers partake with the General, according to the measure of their place and merit: 
Non minor est virtus, quam quaerere, parta tutri. Ovid.  but the well or ill ordering of things achieved, redounds wholly to his own proper glory, or shame: it behoves him therefore to have a special care to the safety of his Army, 
Ilest be●●coup plus fait de garder un estat de ne tomber en ruin, que del' agrandir, & enrich●● Am. in Piut.  that every thing may be regulated according to rule and order; for it is greater honour to come off with judgement, than to go on with courage; to use victory wisely, than to get it happily; and more glory to retain that which is won victoriously, than to obtain it.   

Aphorism XIX.  
NOthing is more necessary in a General than the perfect exploration of the courses his enemy takes, 
Ille diffici●● vincitur qui de suis & adversarii copiis verè potest judicare. Veget. lib. 3.  and a true estimate of the forces he ring; for by the ignorance of the first, and the misprision of this other, 
Tuum est, hostium exe citum, locorum situm, naturam regionis 〈◊〉 Liv. lib. 22.  he makes his preparations, and builds his actions upon supposals and slippery grounds, bereaving himself of many fair advantages.   

Aphorism XX.  
Despair taketh Arms when all hope of escape is absent, 
Necessitas etiam timidos sorts tacit. Iu●●. lib. 3.  for necessity makes the most imbellick cowards valiant; wherefore it is wisdom to leave thy enemy a port open to fly, 
Hosts s●gientes nolite trucida▪ re, ne potius ducant manner quam fugere. Lycurg. in Pol.  and rather build him a bridge of gold to pass over, than coup him in a place, that either he must fight, or perish.   

Aphorism XXI.  
NO Actions of men are more subject to sudden and unexpected events than those of War; 
Exercitus praed●tor, & ipse praeda hostium. Sallust. l●g.  and in War, nothing so soon snatcheth victory out of our hands, 
Fventus prae●iorum inter initia ●●●raillos fuit, quibus victo●ia debebatur. V●get. lib. 3.  as untimely falling to the spoil: upon such disorder Fortune always turneth her wheel, and maketh victors of them which before were vanquished.   

Aphorism XXII.  
AS in nature, 
〈◊〉 caused, tollitur effectus. Arist●t.  so in War; where the cause faileth, there the effect also dyeth; for where men are courageous, not out of a true resolution, 
Teme▪ itas, ubi primum impetum effudit, sicut quaedam anima●●, amissoa●ule●, ●orpet. Curt. lib 4.  but out of some conceit of the enemy's weakness or wants; when they find things contrary to those former impressions, than they lose their spirits and animosity.   

Aphorism XXIII.  
THere is nothing so glorious or sweet in the fruition, 
Quiè nuce nucleum esse vult, frangat nucem. Plut.  that is not difficult and painful in the acquisition; nor can we taste the kernel of pleasure, 
Q●●squis enim duros ca●sus virtutis amore  unless we crack the hard shell of danger: such are the craggy and untrodden paths to honour, 
Vi●erit, ille sibilaude●que, decusque pa●bit. Vir. Opus●.  where though the first entrance be hard and many times disastrous, yet overcome by true resolution and perseverance, it after turns to a man's great glory.   

Aphorism XXIV.  
FRom the collection of circumstances every action takes his warrant, 
Magna sant momenta t●mpo●●● & mul●um interest, idem 〈◊〉 utr mante, an post decernat●r, 〈◊〉 scipiatur, agatur. Caelar. Com. lib. 5.  and amongst these, that of time is of greatest moment. For a Soldier not to adventure when he should, is cowardice, not prudence; and to dare when he should not, is rashness, not valour. A wise General therefore must form his counsels, 
Temporiapta●i decet. Sene●. Med.  and frame his actions upon the mould of necessary circumstances.   

Aphorism XXV.  
ABove all other actions, 
Multum cum in omnibus rebus, tum in re militari potest fortuna. Caesar's Com. lib. 6.  fortune is said to have the greatest stroke in War; yet the fault cannot be so transferred upon her, but the greatest blame will rest upon the General; for her two only advocates (Blindness and Ignorance) which plead her innocence, 
Qui qu● necessaria sunt non providet, non prorsus videt: 〈◊〉 non sa●ere, est p●ane desipere. Lip. Pol. lib. 3.  will be your chiefest accusers, and prove you guilty of your own ruin. It behoves therefore every Commander to open the one eye of his providence upon the danger, and fix the other of his knowledge upon the remedy.   

Aphorism XXVI.  
THe law of Arms tolerates a professed enemy to attempt that by stratagem, 
Cum istud Bellum suscipitur, ut aperte pugnet quis, autex insidiis, nihil ad justiciam attine●▪ August.  fraud or suborned treachery, which cannot be achieved by force, without long endeavouring, uttermost danger and excessive charge. 
qui adiouste ●oy audire d'un mcschant, ●●en repent & ●●en voit l'onstrage puis apres. Ami. Plut.  But it is dangerous for a General to treat in such a practice, and be of the party, if he be to engage his person and trust his life in the hands of the suborned traitors; lest whilst he seeks to buy other men's lives for money, he sells his own for nought.   

Aphorism XXVII.  
THese which by our means, 
Nemo fere credit nisi ei quem fidelem putat; perd●●●ssimi est igitur hominis fallere eum qui lesus non esset nisi credidisset. Cic. pro Ros.  and for our cause are brought in case not to help themselves, by us ought carefully to be tendered. It is therefore a shameful thing in a General to give Hostages for keeping of Articles capitulated, and after by wilful breaking of them, to leave the lives of those pledges at the enemy's mercy. 
— Rebus succurrite laesis, Et date nau●●agio littora tuta meo. Ovid. Inst.    

Aphorism XXVIII.  
Blood flesh and bones are the least strengthening to the arm, 
Quemadmodum homines sine nervis ambulare nequeunt; ita nec Bellum usquam progredi sine pecunia. Lip Pol. lib. 5.  unless there be sinews to stretch out and pull in for the defence of the body: So an Army consisting of many valiant men, and furnished with all other warlike habilements, 
Antequam inchoetur Bellum, de copiis expensisque sollicitus debet esse tractatus. Veg. l. 3.  is but lame and useless, and unable to move itself without money the sinews of War.   

Aphorism XXIX.  
IN unresistable tempests, 
Gubernator, ubi naufragium timet, jacturâ quicquid sanari potest, redimit. Lamp. Alex.  where shipwreck is threatened, they disburden the Ship, lest themselves and all should perish: so it must far with a wise General in the tempestuous storms of War; he must adapt his consultations and actions to the necessity of the times, and not expose the main to a manifest loss, 
Parva sunt ●oris arma, nisi sit consilium domi. Cicero.  by seeking to save the buy: Wisdom therefore is more requisite in a Chief than Valour.   

Aphorism XXX.  
IN humane actions, 
Bellum ex momentis parvarum saepe rerum dependet, Liv. lib. 32.  small actions work great effects, 
Vn petit accident est ●●●●tessois, le commencement des grands maux. Am. Plut.  and especially in those of War; for one word of command misunderstood, many times overthrows both the action and the Actors. 
Noctur●i terrores Cl●●rchi exercitum i●vaserunt; at ille praecepit, si noctu tumultus oriretur, nemo rectus consurgeret: hoc pr●●ceptum do●●t mutes contemnere nocturnum terr●rem. Pol. Strat. lib. 2.  Wherefore a wise General should accustom his soldiers to the perfection of discipline, never to take all arm, or apprehension of sudden danger from what others do, or say; but from his own immediate Officers, or them in place about him.   

Aphorism XXXI  
THe greatest glory of a Commander is to drive out the nail of his enemy's practice with a stronger of his own, 
Illa belli furta pulcherrimam laudem habent, per quae hostes ma●imè decipiuntur, & amici plurimùm juvantur. Thuc. l. 5.  and to blow him up in his own mine. Policy against force deserveth much, and prevaileth often: but by stratagem to prevail against policy is most excellent.   

Aphorism XXXII.  
THe chiefest weapon to gain victory, 
Miles haec tria curare debet, corpus ut quam validissimum & pernicissimum habeat, arma apta, animumque, paratum ad subita imperia: ●aeteradiis immortalibus & Imperatori commendet. Liv. lib. 4.  is good discipline; for if Soldiers have not this true temper, they lose their edge in their trial, and turn the point into their own bowels that use them. Wherefore nothing is more necessary in a Martial government than obedience, both for the general good of their affairs, and safety of the Soldiers.   

Aphorism XXXIII.  
IN the government of a prudent Commander rests the safety of the Army; 
Nullum numen abest si sit prudentia. luven. Sat. 10.  and the greatest weakening thereof is by disorder and want of discipline. 
Perdifficile est ad carentem auribus ventrem verba facere; ven●er quip cibi avidus, praecepta non audit. Plut. in Cat●.  From want of pay springs up disorder: money comforts more than aqua vitae; but want is such an aqua fortis as will eat up the steel coat of discipline: for hunger and penury will rout a well composed Army sooner than an over-potent enemy.   

Aphorism XXXIV.  
TWo things are most requisite for a General to possess, 
Du● sunt quae principatus comparent, augeant, servant, milites & pecunia. Dion. l. 42.  and that is a sufficient treasure to discharge his Troops, and an high reputation, which begets a majesty in him, and an awful obedience in his Soldiers towards him: 
Vebementer pertinet ad Bella administranda, quid hosts, magis verò quid subditi de suis Imperatoribus existiment. Cic.  by these he shall preserve in health and safety the body of his Army. If reputation be lost, neither his maturity of judgement to undertake, nor his alacrity of spirit to execute, will avail in the perfecting of his intended enterprise: for where there is no powerful majesty to command, there is no awful readiness in Officers nor Soldiers to act what is commanded.   

Aphorism XXXV.  
THe two famous Soldiers of Rome and Greece which shot like two thunderbolts into the West and East, 
Tam celer in agendo & cons●●tus in exequendo, ut 〈…〉. Suet. de Caes.  filling the whole world with the fame of their victories, were renouwned for nothing more than their celerity in doing, 
Veni, vidi, vici. Caes. apud Plut.  and preventing the very report of their coming. For there is nothing so excellent in a Chief as prevention; it blesseth the action with success, 
Saepenumero in Bello ca quae geridebent, 〈…〉 quam ut 〈◊〉. Xenoph. lib. 6.  and crowneth the Actor with glory. He therefore that will arrive at the ports of Victory, and by her gates enter the town of Fame, must steer his course this way.   

Aphorism XXXVI.  
IT is hard for a General so warily to walk in any condition of charge or service as that he dash not his foot against the stone of offence: 
Dissicile est in omni vitae 〈◊〉 sic te gerere ut non 〈◊〉. Lip. an. lib. 3.  he being chief in command, must use his authority sparingly, 
Potentiacautis quam acri●ribus consi●●is 〈…〉. 〈◊〉. an. 11.  if he intends to keep it long. Wherefore that General which binds not himself within the limits of his Commission, nor useth the advice of his Council of War, shall never want secret enemies amongst those bee hath neglected, to urge his transgression, and work his confusion.   

Aphorism XXXVII.  
SHafts being bound together are not easily bowed, 
Ibi semper est victoria ubi concordia. Senec. Sent.  but taken one by one, may easily be broken; so fareth it with the forces of an Army, whose safety chiefly depends upon the unity and mutual conjunction of the inferiors with the superiors, 
Nobilium factiones tra●unt ad se, & in parts, universum populum. Arist. Pol. l. 5.  and of these one with another. Wherefore nothing is more dangerous in the service of War than discord and faction amongst the chief Officers of the Army.   

Aphorism XXXVIII.  
AS Seconds in single fight be very circumspect that there be no odds in the Combatants weapons, 
Ad victoriam plurimum resert ut lectissimos de peditibus & equitibus, bene armato●, & post aciem in subsid●um praepa atos habeas. Veg. lib. 3.  but see them meet upon indifferent terms; the like care should every General all have that the Arms and Armour of his Soldiers should be every way sufficient: for many times this prevails both against number and valour of the enemy: 
Ensis habet vires, & gens quae. cunque virorum est,  for in a Battle where the fight is in a firm station, 
Bella gerit gladiis, sed Medos praelia prima  and a greater desire is had of offending and killing others then of defending and saving themselves, 
Exarmant, vacuaeque jubentr●meare pharetrae. Luc●●. l. 8.  odds of the weapon is most advantageous.   

Aphorism XXXIX.  
IN the prosecution of War, 
Summum jus, summa injuria. Ad●g. Poly.  there are often advantages met withal by accident, which reason and judgement could not possibly forethink of, 
Resdant consilia hominibus, 〈◊〉 homines rebus: itaque aptare te iis rebus debes, praese, tim in Bello. Lip. Pol. l. 5.  much less direct; for things give better counsel to men, than men to the things: therefore the rigour of punishment due for transgressing a Commandment in War is not so strictly to be forced, if good success approves it. 
Turpissima est jacturaquae fit ●er negligentiam. Senec. Epist.  But he that hath once transgressed the limits of his Commission, and thereby hath fair occasion offered to make an honourable amends, and in ample sort to justify his first transgression, and wipe out the forfeit, that man makes a double fault not to take it.   

Aphorism XL.  
THe Crocodile is slain by the Dolphin's policy striking him in his soft and tender belly being unarmed with scales. 
In ventre mollis tenuisque cutis Crocodili, ideo se ut territimergunt Delphini subcuntesque alvum illam secant spina, Plin. nat. lib. 8 cap. 25.  Experience should teach men more than nature can the creature; 
Laprudence doit conduire & manner la force. Am. Plu. Parendo potius quam imperia ducum sciscitando, res militaris continetur. Tac. an. lib. 1. Divisa inter Duces Militesque munia, his arma & manus sint, illis consilium & virtutis suae specimen relinquant. Tac. an. l. 1.  for a General must strike the enemy where he may be most hurt; and such things as reason deems impossible are not to be attempted, for prudence is of force where force cannot prevail. Therefore direction is left to the Commander, execution to the Soldier, who is not to question why, but to perform what is given him in charge.   

Aphorism XLI.  
IN morality it is a greater vice to commit a wickedness, 
Custodiendi milites intra limits, aliter solvitur militia tua, immo perit.  than to omit the doing of a virtuous act: so in Martial government it is worse for the Soldier to do what he is forbidden in his own Camp, than not to do what he is commanded upon the enemy; for this only bereaves him of some fair advantage, 
Periculum subire instructo ordine. Xeno. inst.  but that lays himself open to all ambush and defeit.   

Aphorism XLII.  
THose dangers are least avoided which are unknown or unexpected, 
Citius venit periculum cum contemnitur; nopinata magis premunt mala. Senec.  and those counsels are best carried which the enemies sees in execution before he hears them by relation. 
Metellus aliquid militiae interrogatus, Si inquit tunicam meam arcani mihi consciam scirem, exutam in ignem abjicerem. Plu. de Grac.  None in the Army must know to what Service Scipio leads his Troops, but only C. Laelius; nor is it fit things determined in Council should be communicated but to those without whom they cannot be effected: for as expedition is the life of action; so is secrecy of deliberation.   

Aphorism XLIII.  
THe furious Cursour breaketh his wind in the midst of his carrer, 
Dum festino omnia teleriter percurrere, tardeor sum. Plat. Rep. 7.  whereas the Snail comes to the top of the hill in her due time as well as the Eagle; 
Scito militibus cupidinem pugnandi convenire; duces prudendentia, consulta●do, c●nctatione saejius quam temeritate prod●sse. Tac. hist. lib. 3.  Wherefore he that will do a thing well, must have patience to tarry till it may be well done: for it hurteth as much to anticipate the occasion as to foreslow it being offered. Men of hot spirits err in the first, for scarce do they perceive the shadow of her, but they run to catch at it, and thinking to take hold on the solid substance, embrace nothing but the empty air; 
Fabius novam de Hannibal▪ victoriam, commentus est, non pugnare; ut qui frangi virtute non poterat, morâ comminueretur; hinc illi cognomen novum & reip. salutare (cunctator.) Florus lib. 2.  whereas the wary and well advised Commander, holds it safer to weary and wear out the enemy by cunctation and delay, than to put all to hazard by haste; in this is danger, in that is a Fabian virtue.   

Aphorism XLIV.  
A General is not to stay his provision for war, 
Ostendite modo Bellum, pacem habebitis▪ videant vos paratos, ad vim jus ipsi remittent. Man. apud Plut.  although he be constrained to seek for peace; because otherwise he seeks to beg or buy his peace, and cannot purchase it but at a dear rate; wherefore peace is never to be treated with our enemy, 
Pacem optatis magis quam defenditis, pacem sub clipeo paerare. Sallust. hist. 1.  our Armour being of, or Sword sheathed; neither can it be easily concluded but under a Buckler.   

Aphorism XLV.  
OF all bad ingredients into the heart of man, 
Veterae odére, nova expetunt, odio suarum rerum mutari omnia student. Sallust.  there is none poisons it so much with the venom of treasonable thoughts as that of disdain. 
Digitum praescindi oportet, ne ob eam rem gangrena ad brachium perveniat. Varro. Frag.  That General that sees this mischievous seed planted and grown amongst his Captains in time of their employments, and seeks not to root it up with a quick and sharp hand, is in the high road to his own ruin.   

Aphorism XLVI.  
IT is a hindrance to the General's service, 
Providendum, ne cui, qui insigni aliqua injuria affectus est, demandetur provincia administrandi rem aliquam magni momenti. Mac. dia. lib. 2.  and a furtherance to the General's destruction, to give any of his chief Officers any manifest cause of discontent, and yet after employ him in any place of great charge; for neither can he be assured of his fidelity when he is used, 
Tam est periculosum, malitiosa p●tentiam, quam furioso gladium dare. Aeschin.  nor he of his General's favour being accused.   

Aphorism XLVII.  
Upon certain notice of some treasonable plot or practise in an Army, 
Securitati consulas ante quam vindictae. Tacit. an. lib. 11.  the General must first assure the place, and then more fully search into the treason, and punish the traitors, either all for the offence, or the ringleaders for example. 
Principibus seditionis securi percussis. Mac. lib. 3. ca 26.  Severity in this case is but justice, lenity puts all in hazard; wherefore against such intestine ambush, we must first take up the Buckler of safety, and then produce the Sword of justice.   

Aphorism XLVIII.  
IF a General be forced to abandon any hold or place of strength; 
Arces extruuntur duplici de causa, ad hostes arcendos, ad subditos compescendos, & in officio continendos; ad priorem usum non necessariae, ad posteriorem inutiles & noxiae. Mac. lib. 2. dis. 24.  if he ever hopes to return when times are more propitious, let him raze all such Works and Forts before his departure as may hinder his reaching, whereby he shall find his return and restitution more easy.   

Aphorism XLIX.  
SOme advantages in Battle are personal, 
In omni prae●io non tam muttitudo & virtus indocta, quam ars & exercitium soleut praestare victoriam. Veg. lib. 1.  as better men, and horse, or more number of both; some are real, as more money, or better arms; some are formal, as better discipline in governing, and better order in fight; and some are accidental, as the Sun, the Wind, and the place. 
Amplius potest locus saepe quam virtus. Veg. Lib. 3.  Now amongst all these the two last (of better order in fight, and better ground to fight on) are not the least means of obtaining the victory. 
Vi Militum inferior, locorum fraude prior. Tac. an. 12. Erectum & fidentem animi te ipsum ostend. Tac. an. lib. 4.    

Aphorism. L.  
Adversity may bend, but never break a noble and undaunted courage: 
Al faut pl●yer plus tost que rompre: & see reserver à meilleur temps. Am. plu. Cic.  he abandons not himself though all his forces seems to forsake him, but hopes when fortune is come to the height or Brumal Solstice of her frowning, 
Majestas non fracta malis. Lucan. 4.  she will be retrograde and shine again upon him with the beams of better success: a General therefore plunged into the lowest deep of disasters, 
Decet virum verè generosum; far tum bona, tum mala, si lapsus fuerit. Menand.  must beware he sink not to the nethermost hell of despair, from whence is no redemption; but let him reserve himself for better fortunes.  
Thus have I collected and joined together the principal and worthiest observations, which the best and famousest Generals both ancient and modern have left behind them for, the guides to posterity; whereby they may learn how to steer their course in a short time by the help of speculative knowledge, which hath confirmed many thousand years, and destroyed millions of people to purchase the experience, which here is offered to your view; and I question not the grateful acceptance, unless it be some vain glorious fellow, whose feather is greater than his wit: or experience may cast some silly aspersion upon this discourse; but let such an imbellick fellow know, that his depraving it doth not touch me or my reputation; but it must be transferred upon those noble Commanders, whose experience purchased these observations. In the next place I am to discourse about the marching of an Army, and quartering it for one night, wherein I shall be as brief as may be.     

RULES' TO BE OBSERVED BY A GENERAL IN MARCHING HIS ARMY. SECT. XVI.  

CHAP. III.  
Divers Rules and observations to be used both in marching and retreating from the enenemy, whereby confusion may be avoided.  
BEfore we can come to treat of the nature of Battles, we must first call into our best considerations the absolutest form and surest way which possibly may be devised for an Army to march in. For without due observations, and judicious care, an Army may be overthrown before they can come to order themselves in Battalia: for prevention thereof, I have collected diverse Rules out of sundry of our best Authors, worthy the taking notice of.  
Wherefore in the first place, before we adventure to march, we must be given to understand, whether the way we intent to pass, be narrow and strait lanes, or broad plain heaths or commons.  
Secondly, whether the enemy be quartered near or afar off, and accordingly we are to order our Troops.  
In a March, if the enemy's quarters are before us, than the Troops of Horse are to march before the Foot, 
A party of Musketires or Fire locks are best to discover wades, rocks, hills and the like, in regard the heavy armed cannot possibly effect it.  and before them certain Spies to discover, for fear of the enemy's Ambushes.  
If marching from an enemy, the Horse-Troops are to follow in the Rear of the Army, to charge the enemy if he offers to pursue.  
An Army marching through strait lanes, must order their men into so many Files as may well march a Breast.  
An Army being to march over Heaths or Plains, than they must march by divisions, as namely, three or four Companies a Breast, that they may the readier and more suddenly be drawn into Battalia.  
An Army is commonly divided into three divisions, viz. the Vanguard, Battle, and Rearguard; every Colonel ought to march according to his antiquity, one before another; after like manner, every Captain of every Colonel's Regiment is to do the same.  
That Regiment which marcheth in the Vanguard the first day, 
Note, these divisions of the Army are not to be quartered too far asunder for fear of danger.  aught to come to their quarters very timely, than the Battle must march forwards, and be quartered beyond them; then the Rear-ward is to march up beyond the Battle, and there to be quartered: so that the next morn it may be ready at the discharging of the warning piece to march. Note, that Regiment which marcheth the first day in the Van, the day following is to march in the Rear; and they are daily thus to take their turns, if the March continues long.  
We are further to observe, whether we are to march in the day time or in the night, and accordingly we are to demean ourselves.  
If by day, The manner now in use is to send out before the Army (by a sufficient trusty Guide, which knows well the passages of the Country) certain Firelocks, Dragon's and Musketires to discover the enemy; and the Horse are to repress the enemy's incursions: these are likewise to surprise strait ways, Bridges and Fords▪  
Next after these are the pioneers to march, with a good guard to mend the ways, and to cut through passages, so as the Ordnance may be drawn safe, and the Army march the best and nearest way.  
The Foot of the Vanguard or right Wing, is in the next place to follow, every Battalia thereof in their due order; the one half of the Horse of the Army before them, and all their baggage or carriage behind them in the Rear.  
The Battalions of the Battle are in the next place to follow in the same equipage the former did; viz. with all their baggage and carriage in the Rear.  
Lastly, the Battalions of the Rearward, or left Wing are to follow in March, with all their baggage and carriage behind them also; and every one of these Battalions are to have their shot before and behind, and the residue of the Horse are to bring up the Rear.  
The Ordnance are to be distributed as the Carriage is, viz. both behind the Vanguard, the Battle, and the Rear-ward, the better to secure against all attempts. But this kind of ordering the Horse, the Ordnance, and the Baggage, is most commonly used when the enemy is not at hand.  
As for the marching of an Army by night, all the baggage and carriages are to be sent before the Army with a sufficient guard; next after them your Pike-men, than the Musketires, and all the Horse in the Rear: so that by break of day they may come all together to their Rendevou. This way an Army in the night is best and easilyest kept together, and is soon espied if it falters: but this is also to be used when the enemy is not near.  
We are to observe, that in a March, both Colonels, Captains and other inferior Officers are called from the leading of their own Regiments and Companies to command in another Regiment or Company., which many times happens in regard the General will have the eldest Colonels by him, to discourse and advise of things Material about the Wars. So that a Lieutenant Colonel commands a Regiment, and the eldest Captain the Colonel's Company; also a Lieutenant to command a private Company: and these are thus ordered and disposed as it shall please the Serjeant-Major to give commandment.  
An Army being thus orderly marched to the place of their inquartering, the General his field-Martiall and Serjeant-Major general are to be very wise and circumspect in placing the Horse-guards outermost of all, upon special passages where they must set out their Horse-sentinels a good distance from the guard, that they may the better discover and give warning of the enemy's approaches, by making an Alarm by the discharge of their Pistols, so that the whole Army may presently be in arms. The Foot-sentinels are to stand upon some passages nearer to the Quarters than the Horse are.  
Upon Alarm given, 
The Serjeant-Major is to acquaint every Officer where the place of imbattelling is, and the ways made plain and ready for every Company to troop to it.  all the Companies of the Army are speedily to march into some convenient place appointed by the General over night, where every Company is to be drawn into Battalia fit to charge the enemy.  
And as before I have said how the Foot should march in divisions over a Heath or Plain; after the same proportion the Horse-troops also are to march in divisions, viz. two, four or six Cornets in a division; neither divisions of Horse nor Foot are to march in far distance one from the other, but so as the whole Army suddenly may join in Battle, if the enemy should approach.  
At every stand the Army makes upon a Heath or Plain, every single division is to march up and front with the next division before it, upon the left hand of the same; and if the stay be long, and the place dangerous, then successively all the divisions are to be drawn into a complete Battle.  
After this very manner the Army must be demeaned in marching off from a Heath or Plaine; if the enemy chaseth them in the Rear, thinking to take an advantage when the Army shall be drawn out by Companies to march through some narrow passages, lanes, or highways; the Horse are to be drawn in Battalia in the Rear of these Troops, to receive the charge of the enemy, until such time as all the Foot Troops are marched through those straits; where having convenient ground, they are to re-imbattell themselves, to entertain the enemy's charge, if he dares adventure to follow.  
But the safest way is (if an Army cannot eschew, 
This caution would have a●ed a great deal of blood at the 〈◊〉 or Rec.  but must break his array) to march from an enemy through a strait, he being ready to take his advantage to charge them; then to give them Battle, if your Army be equivalent in strength, is the safest way; if not, then to entrench the Army securely, waiting an opportunity, and making use of some policy to get safely from them.  
If an Army be weaker in Horse than the enemy's Army is, it is very dangerous to march over the Plains, but rather take some hilly rocky way whereby the enemy's horse shall be unprofitable.  
The enemy being near at hand, the best way is to have the Artillery and Baggage to march on the contrary side from the enemy in all straits, and in Champions to be placed in the midst of the Army.  
In extremity of hot weather, the Sutler's belonging to every Company may march with their Wagons between the Companies, whereby they may the sooner be relieved with meat and drink, which otherwise they cannot come unto but once a day: but this must be when there is no fear of the enemy.  
It is requisite to have good Guides for direction of the best and safest way: Likewise those Horsemen that are commanded to be Vant-currers for the discovering of the enemy, their duty is also to view the passages, and to take notice of the breadth of every strait way; the Quarter-Masters are to do the same, and to give intelligence, that the Army may march accordingly. As for example, suppose the way be eighteen foot broad; the Army must be commanded to march six men in Rank or Breast; because every Footman will have three foot in breadth between File and File, and six foot at the least between Rank and Rank: so that twenty four foot in breadth, and four Miles in length, will but contain an Army marching of three or four and twenty thousand.  
When an Army is constrained to march thus in length, the strait passages hindering from marching in divisions may prove very dangerous, if extraordinary intelligence be not hourly had of the enemies proceedings; for should an enemy watch his opportunity to fall on the Front, Flank, or Rear of the Army, there could be very little help expected; for the Front were not able to succour the Rear, no more than the Rear could the Front; and being charged upon the Flank, there could be but a poor resistance made. But the best and safest way in such an unexpected danger, is either to draw as many Companies as may possibly be gotten, into such closes of ground as shall be strongly fenced, and there order them in Battalia; where they shall be able to make a good resistance until the residue of the Army provides for its safety.  
Or otherwise, if the enemy chargeth upon any of the sides, than it is best to file all the Musketires upon that Flank the enemy strives to charge; so that every Soldier shall give fire over the hedge as he marches, and so pass along.  
But if an enemy should chance to break into the highway with their Horses, be it in the Front or Rear of the Army, there is no way but to barricado up the way with Wagons, or fell trees cross the way, or by fyring a great quantity of feare-wood to hinder the enemy's execution until the Army be drawn out of the way into the fields, where they may so order themselves that the enemy cannot possibly rout them: if a few Troops should be assaulted by the enemy's Horse in their March, the diamond Battle or the cross Battle is of greatest strength: otherwise, if an Army opposeth another Army upon the plains, than a Battle so framed that most hands may be brought to fight, and succours to relieve them, is best, always having the advantage of Wind and Sun, with Woods, Rocks, Rivers, Ponds or great Ditches, either on Flank, or Rear, or both.  
It is a thing unsufferable for soldiers to ramble from their Colours, to laze or pillage, but to march orderly in their ranks; for the provost-marshal by his Commission and authority ought to hang up such fellows the next bough they come at, for the whole Army to see, and be warned by as they shall pass by them in their March; for the inconveniences are many and dangerous to an Army. The enemy by taking them gaineth intelligence of the state of the Army, besides the mischief which such fellows do commit in robbing, and pilfering, whereby a friend-people will be incensed, and ready to be treache rous to an Army, seeing themselves abused and bereft of their goods.  
It is policy, if an Army marches in an enemy's country, to ruin, destroy, and burn whatsoever may be advantageous to the enemy's livelihood; providing always sufficiently for your own Army.  
If there should be any suspicion that the enemy strives to gain some places of advantage to hinder the march, it is convenientest to send speedily certain Horse-Troopes; likewise Shot and Pikes upon Bedees' in manner of Dragons, or ten or twelve men in a waggon; hurry them speedily to prevent the enemy from fortifying themselves in such places of advantage.  
The Lord Montpezat in his march from Fossar was put to a dangerous plunge, he being constrained to take his way through the Valley Pratgella, the entrance into which was most difficult, in regard the Hills and Mountains were held and possessed with the enemy, whereby he lost diverse of his men; wherefore he sent certain Forces under the conduct of Monsieur Dambres, to get the higher ground, and force his enemy to a retreat, which they did excellently perform; by which policy he marched safe without the loss of a man.  
The wedge-Battell is the absolutest form to enter a strait, for the Shot comes so fluent and piercing, that the enemy cannot possibly resist unless the passage be Barricadoed up.  
If any Enemy be far stronger both in Foot and Horse then thy Army is; provide that he assaults thee not on every side, but be sure of some place of safeguard, as Woods, Bogges, or Rivers; for if the enemy be not three times as strong as thy Army is, he shall show himself of very poor judgement to divide his Army, and weaken it, for to assault thee in diverse places; which may purchase his own overthrow.  
Machiavelli in his Art of War, adviseth Generals to accustom their soldiers to march, and in marching to join in Battalia ready for fight, and so draw out into a march again; then to face about into the Rear, and draw up into Battalia again, the like also to perform on either Flank; so that upon all occasions suddenly they might understand to order themselves, and range themselves into any form of Battle; but where there is no place of safeguard or advantage, the quadrate form of imbatttelling is safest; for he durst not divide his forces to charge that kind of form upon all sides.  
It were very commendable, and very advantageous to the strengthening of our kingdom, if every Lord Lieutenant might draw all the forces of the shire together, unto some convenient place in the midst of it; taking a convenient time of the year, that neither Hay-time nor Harvest may hinder, wheresuch troops may be drawn into all forms of Battle, and learn to understand all advantages in march.  
If an Army marches through the enemy's land, or far from the water, so that provision may not be conveyed by shipping; the best way is to drive after the Army herds of Beefs and Sheep, which being alive cannot much cumber the Army; all other provision is to be conveyed by Wagon.  
A General must be very vigilant and circumspect in his march to discover all Ambushes, by which he may two ways incur danger, (viz.) either by marching into them, or through the enemy's policy trained into them unawares.  
For the avoiding of the first peril, as before is said, it is necessary to send before the Army certain Troops to discover, which may be of strength to resist if occasion be; and in this they must be very inquisitive of the country people; whether they have seen any of the enemy's troops lately, and how and which way they ordered their march: Likewise the more woody and hilly the country is, the willinger the enemy will lay his ambushes, which being discovered, they cannot be hurtful; but if not foreseen, whereby the Army falls suddenly amongst them, ten to one but they ruin them.  
It is easy to perceive where an enemy marcheth by the dust they raise, and by the wondering of fowls and birds which will fly about and not light, which is a great sign that an ambush lies there.  
Concerning the second case of the enemy's training an Army into danger, there must be great wisdom, not suddenly to believe such things as in man's sense seem not reasonable to be indeed as they show for; for under the bait lies the hook; as for example, if many of the enemy's troops be put to flight by a few of thy own men, or if a few of the enemy's troops assail a number of thine, or by making a sudden flight without a charge; in these cases there can nothing but deceit be expected; for we are to note, that to march through an enemy's country is more dangerous then to fight a pitched Battle; wherefore in these cases a General must have a secret inward cautelousness and fear of surprising; which his soldiers must not take notice of, lest they should be discouraged. Likewise in the same predicament a General must use lofty scornful words, in way of undervaluing his enemy, which will animate his Soldiers to fall on; therefore for the better and safer conduct of an Army, it is most necessary to have an exact Map of the country you intent to march through, in which may be discovered all places of difficulty and danger, that so they may be the easilyer prevented; also those Guides which are chosen for the conducting of the Army, ought severally to be questioned withal, whether there knowledge be good; and compare their relation with the Maps, whereby the errors may be discovered; and above all things secrecy is to be commended.  
If in your march you light upon deep and unpassible rivers, and having no means to make Bridges to waft over the Army, you are to march further to the heads of the rivers, where you may pass at ease; if the current be over big so that the Army cannot wade over, you must cut out the same river in diverse places, and turn it into the land, whereby you may the easier pass over.  
Every Officer must cause his soldiers to march according to the beat of the drum; for if one part of the Army should march too fast, and the other part too slow, it may breed confusion.  
We are further to observe, 
Observations about retreating from the enemy in a March.  if it should happen in a march that the enemy opposeth, and seek to give you Battle, and you finding yourself too weak for to join in Battle; a principle point than is, how to get safely off from the enemy without blows; of all the points of war this is most dangerous to be practised, by reason it hath a show of undervaluing your own potency; and your enemy is puffed up with a self conceit of transcendent worth, and thereby is animated to stretch his valour to the uttermost period; whereas the courages of your own men fall away being surprised with fear, which will make them tumble into confusion. Therefore as formerly hath been said, a General must set a fair gloss, causing his soldiers to believe that such retreats are for other advantages, and to accomplish some other design of further consequence, and not that you retreat to avoid the combat; wherefore some reasons that favour of likelihood must be used to the Soldiers. Sir Walter Rawlyes advice was to dislodge in the dead of the night, in such a quiet still manner that the enemy should not perceive it. marquis Spinola made use of this when he broke up his Leaguer before Bergen-up-zone, when his Excellency's Army lay at Rossandell ready to have assaulted his trenches.  
But the safest way of all is to retreat before the enemy be too near; for if the enemy be in view, although you should march forwards to gain some place of more security, yet unhappily there may be some ill passages and straits to hinder your quick passage whereby the enemy may take his advantage to rout you; for it is far greater honour to retreat in the dark than to be beaten in the light. 
A far greater honour to retreat in the dark then to be beaten in the light.  And as Monsieur Bellay adviseth such as retreat by day, must place there horsemen upon two sides like unto hedges leaving a way betwixt them, through the which the footmen are to retreat, by which means the enemy shall not perceive them, they being shadowed by the Horse; and as every particular Battalia is passed the principal place of danger, than they are immediately to entrench themselves, or otherwise one Battalia is to stay for another, they being past danger and the enemy's sight, until they are all stolen away in safety; but this must be understood that it must be performed in some plains or covert places, where the enemy hath not the advantage of a Hill to discover them: but those that intent to retreat in the night, first send strong Guards to defend the passages, fearing the enemy should prevent them, and then leaving sufficient fires in the quarters, hanging out light matches, and stuffing old clothes with straw, and setting them in the place of the Sentinels, leaving Dogs howling, Beasts lowing, Horses neighing, Cocks crowing in the Quarters, so that the enemy may not suspect your departure; if your Ordnance cannot conveniently be drawn away, it is best to dismount it from the Carriages, and bury them secretly in the earth; further (saith he) when an Army is reduced to this exigent of extremity, it is much better for to be careful in saving the men (albeit that the Ordnance, Baggage, and other moveables should be lost) than to hazard men for a thing that may so easily afterwards be regained.  
If an Army be politicly stolen out from their Quarters, 
This is to be done, when the enemy knows not of their departure.  they are to make no stay, but to continue the march, resting as little as may be; but if it be so that of necessity they are constrained to stay upon the way, then let them make choice of some place that is naturally fortified, always remembering to have certain fleet horses to stay behind the Army to discover a far of from some Hills whether the enemy pursues; which if he doth, the surest way for prevention is to barricado up the passages with trees.  
It is likewise safe to quarter your Army in some wood, felling the trees one over another round about it, which will be an excellent safeguard both from the enemy's horse and foot.  
Likewise a General may lay ambushes upon places convenient, which must be such soldiers as are best horsed, or those that are nimblest of foot, so that they may the safer retire upon all occasions; moreover they must not stay over long behind the Army, but so as they may soon recover it; for otherwise they will be cut off by the enemy.  
If a retreat be wisely carried, 
An enemy may receive more damage, than they that retreat.  the enemy that shall follow may receive more damage than they that retreat.  
But on the contrary side if you perceive the enemy doth provide to steal from you, it is wisdom to anticipate such passages as they must pass thorough, sending secretly certain troops to fortify at the entrance of them; 
What is to be done, if you fear the enemy will steal from you.  likewise to barricado up the way with trees, and to have your Army always in a readiness to set out after them, following them at the heels; but in this case the Army must keep a very strict order in their Battallia's, and march up close together, commanding your horse to charge the enemy in the Rear, which will be a means to stay the hindermost part of the Army; and then the Vanguard of your enemy's Army being come to the passages that are blocked up, it will so discourage the enemy, that your Army marching up to them in Battle array, they will be easily overthrown, as there hath been diverse examples to verify this. The lightest Ordnance are the best to pursue the enemy withal; for which purpose Grave Maurice the Prince Van Nasaw had fifty or sixty small field pieces cast, which he used to place between his battalions, which were of great service in the time of fight; for two or three men could wield one of them as they pleased, both in advancing it forwards and drawing back as occasion served; and it were very fit and of excellent use to have such small pieces cast here in England for his Majesty's service, which may be employed many ways; I have observed the Hollanders how they made use of these small Ordnances, to place them in little vessels which they provided to safeguard their great rivers, as the river Issel, and the Rhine; one of these had thirty or forty soldiers to man her, and eight or ten of these pieces, whereby they prevented the enemy from marching over the said rivers; likewise they were safeguards to the Army, when they were conveyed by Boats up those rivers, or when they lay entrenched near any great river, they safeguarded the Rear of the qnarters from treachery; also they safe conducted such Boats as brought Victuals and Ammunition to the Army. 
The use of small vessels.  If occasion should be in our land (which God forbid it should be) they could not do us less service than by experience they have done them; besides such small vessels being made for service, were of more worth to offend an enemy that should dare sail up in any of our great rivers, than the greatest Ship of burden; for it were impossible for our great Ships to make a fight in the river Thames, but they will be more ready to hurt themselves than the enemy, whereas these small vessels will lie under the shot, and glide up and down by the great vessels sides and gall them.  
In the next place it remains how an Army should March near an enemy's Battery to secure themselves from the shot; in this you must observe the situation of their Batteries, how they are flanked, by which you may come to perceive in what direct li●e e●ch piece of Ordnance shall make her true shot; and so accordingly either to open the files and ranks for the passage of the shot, or else to fetch a circumference in your March, so as the shot shall not touch the files, but only a rank; but the securest way is to March secretly by the most obscurest places, so as the Ordnance may not discover you. Lastly for conclusion, if the enemy should assault your troops in in some narrow passages or high ways, you are to demean yourself as followeth: First, you are to fill the passage or high way with your pikes; if the breadth of your troops be not sufficient to perform it, then double your ranks, whereby the Wings will extend themselves to the filling up of the passage; these then charging your enemy's hand or foot, your Musketeers being in the Rear; the Battle being thus ordered, let the first rank of Musketeers (which are those next the pikes face to the right hand and march forth file-wise) close up by the right flank of the pikes, until he that is leader of the said file be even with the Front of the Pikes; then he is to face to the right hand and lead them quite cross the Front of the Pikes, until he hath attained the further part of the Front to the left hand; which being performed, they are to make a stand, and couch under the Pikes, and give fire upon their knees so as the Pikes may not be hindered to charge; then are they to march down by the left flank, and place themselves in the Rear of the shot; and the next files in order are to advance into the Front after the same manner, and perform the same service; by this means continual fire shall be given upon the enemy whilst this skirmish is in action. Let there be drawn out certain Pikes and Musketeers, into the best enclosed fields either on one or both sides of the way, where they may secure themselves from the enemy's horse, and there charge the enemy on the flanks, or at least keep them from charging your own troops that are in skirmish to maintain the passage; view the figure following in the next page.  
The figure of the Battle.  
Front  
Left flank  
Right flank  
Rear  
In this figure the Character p shows how the Pikes are placed, 
Note the Rank of the cyphers, o demonstrats the place where the Rank of shot stood, that is advanced forward.  their Fronts being doubled; the other represents the Musketeers, as you may perceive them marching up the right flank, and so placed under the Pikes in the Front ready to give fire upon the enemy; you may likewise perceive certain shot drawn out into two closes upon each side of the high way, whose duty is to give fire upon the enemy's flanks as they are charching the Front of the Battle; or if the enemy should draw out any forces to charge your Flanks; 
Note after the shot have given fire, they are to match down the left flank, and place themselves in the Rear of the shot, and the next rank is to supply their places; by which means they may continually give fire.  then these shot having Pikes to join with them, shall be able to encounter with them and prevent them. Thus I hope, I have collected sufficient instructions which may give any reasonable man satisfaction concerning the ordering of their March; only if you please I will refer you to diverse Moderns  
Authors which have write of this subject; viz. jerosme Cattamo pag. 133. Machiavelli pag. 67. Bellay pag. 151. Barrit pag. 132. edmond's pag. 39 Garrits Art of War. pag. 245. In the next place we are to discourse of the encamping of an Army, and how to order the Guards and the Intrenchments. Thus ends the sixteenth Section.    

RULES' TO BE OBSERVED IN QVARTERING OR ENCAMPING AN ARMY. SECT. XVII.  

CHAP. FOUR  
How a General is to quarter his Army, with the election of places of greatest security; what Redoubts are to be raised upon the passages, and how the outguardes are to be placed, with diverse other observations thereunto belonging.  
HAving formerly discoursed of such rules, and observations, as are most requisite, and pertinent, for the Marching of an Army; In this Chapter I find it convenient that we should show such rules, and observations as are most useful for the secure encamping of an Army, wherein there is great wisdom and circumspection to be used, in the well managing of the same; wherefore first there are two things offered to our consideration, (viz.) whether an Army is to be quartered but for a night; or for to be encamped for a long season? and from these two questions there is a third produced, (viz.) whether the Army of your enemy be at hand, or far remote? now in regard in the former discourse of marching; I have touched briefly the manner of quartering an Army, for a night or two upon a March; where most usually no enemy is near, it being then a matter of no such consequence, as it is when an Army must pitch down his quarters or entrenchments for a long season, and perchance in the face of the enemy; therefore I will be sparing in the first, and also be as brief as the subject will permit in the second; (viz.) the encamping an Army for some long time, wherein also, there are two things considerable; (viz.) the strength of the enemy's Forces, and the nearness of his Camp; for we must observe that slight intrenchments, are of sufficiency to safeguard an Army, where the enemy is weak, and his Camp far remote.  
In the next place we are to have a due respect to the situation, and commodiousness of water, wood, forage for the horses, and a safe and convenient recourse for to convey victuals and necessaries to the Camp, which must be either by land, or water: these things being duly considered, the Army being drawn to the place of incampment, standing in Battalia; the Quartermaster General being directed by the Lord General of the Army, is to lot out the Stations of ground for every regiment to be quartered in; then the Quartermaster of each particular Regiment, is to line out every particular Companies Station in the Regiment, beginning with the eldest Regiments, and in every Regiment the eldest Company, which are to be placed at the right hand, and so successively, every Company according to his antiquity, and every Regiment according to theirs.  
In the mean time the Earl Martial, the Sergeant Majors, Scout-Masters are to take notice what passages and places of access are, whereby the enemy may approach to this Camp, and in the convenientest places of them they are to command double guards, both of horse and foot, to be placed for the securing of the Army whilst the intrenchments are making. Before the principal works of the Camp are to be raised, there must be Redouts speedily made upon all such passages, to lodge those outguards in, and for the same purpose the pioneers and Soldiers are to make what speed possibly may be: These Redouts are to be made in greatness, as the place requires number of Soldiers to defend it: viz. upon a small passage, where the enemy is not to be expected, there a triangular Redout, sufficient to contain thirty or forty men, is requisite; if the passage be more dangerous, than a fouresquare Redout, which may hold eighty or an hundred men; but upon the chiefest passage of all, either a Sconce is to be built, or otherwise two Redouts, which may be either fouresquare or triangular, one being raised upon one side of the way, the other somewhat wide upon the other side of the way, with the point or corner of the work towards the enemy's approaches, by reason more hands may be brought to give fire upon them, from the two sides which make the angle or point. In the mean time, whilst this is in agitation, the front of the Army is to be pallizadoed with such stakes as is described in the discourse of warlike instruments, which are to be driven one within a foot of another; these shall keep off both the horse and the foot, if they should break through the guards: Then as soon as conveniently may be, the works are to be raised of the Quarters, and as they finish, the pallizadoes are to be pulled up again, as hereafter in this discourse we shall speak more plainly of. The Prince of Orange used also many times to place Redouts more inward within Musket-shot one of another, to secure the Camp: the horse guards are within the outmost Redouts, but their horse-Sentinels are set out perdue beyond the furthest works, and also beyond the foot-Sentinels, which are always placed a good distance from the works upon the passages, that they may give the alarm upon all occasions, and so to retreat into the work.  
No Soldier, during the time of his watch, in any of these Redouts, is to have his Bandilires off from about him, nor any Pikeman his Gorget from about his neck; their Pieces must be likewise loaded with powder and shot in a continual readiness, and a Sentinel standing duly upon the brest-worke to discover the enemy's approaches; at which time, the Officer which commands the work is to place betwixt each two Musketires a Pikeman to make the better defence.  
Those Officers that guard in such Redouts, seldom or never carry their Colours with them, but leave them in their Quarters with a guard passing upon them. Both the Captain and the Ensign are to march with their Company with each of them a Pike.  
These Redouts are to be relieved every night before Sunset with fresh Companies from the main Camp; where no Soldier is to pull off his Armour, or set down his Pike or Musket until they be all entered the work, and the Sentinels set out in their due places.  
Every several Redout hath a particular name to distinguish one from the other, 
How the Redouts may be pallizadoed.  and the Officers must draw Billets who shall have the guard in them, so that no Officer shall aforehand know his guard, to avoid treachery. These Redouts may be pallizadoed to make the defence more strong against the enemy, which is performed after this manner: when the work is raised near the top, then lay in some sharp stakes of hard wood a yard into the ground, and as much out of the ground, three quarters of a foot asunder; but these kind of works are seldom pallizadoed, unless they be very great, and set in dangerous places for assaulting.  
Now we are to show how the main Quarters are to be fortified, 
How the main Quarters are to be situated and entrenched.  wherein we are to dispose the form of it according as the situation shall direct us: but by the way, we must make sure, that no hilly ground be near the Quarters, fearing left the enemy take it for his advantage, and so annoy the Camp with his Ordnance; if such a place should be, either it must be leveled, or else a work raised upon it to defend it.  
If an Army may have such an advantage to be quartered near some great River, that may be of defence sufficient to protect the Rear of the said Quarters, than the entrenchment will be soon finished, and much the stronger, in regard the whole power of the Army is but to make resistance one way. But if an Army should happen to be encamped upon a Plain, so as the enemy may approach upon any side of it, the form of it must be far otherwise, and the strength of it the greater.  
When an enemy can gain no advantage, but to come upon the face of the Quarters only, than a small ditch of eight or nine foot broad, and six or seven foot deep, the Rampire or Breast-worke accordingly, will serve; for there shall need no better defence but to keep off their Horse and to damp their Bullets: your forces being more than sufficient to defend the works from scaling, the highest part of ground in the Camp is most fit to plant the Ordnance upon, to scour the Plains before the Trenches. Divers have fortified their Camp by lodging their Army in a Wood near some great River, and in stead of entrenching of it, they have cut down the timber trees, and made a Barricado both against Horse and Foot, being a very speedy and cheap way, and wonderful secure.  
But in regard all places cannot possibly be found to have such advantages of natural strength, we must learn to secure our Quarters by art, as the ancient Romans used: for they regarded not so much the strength of the place by nature, so as they could conveniently fortify it by art; and for the most part they used one kind of entrenchment: but in these modern times we use any form, as the situation of the place will permit; viz, sometimes crooked, as his Excellency did betwixt Cleave and Skinken-Sco●ce; other times triangular, as he did by Rays; sometimes round, and sometimes square: but these kind of intrenchments are not so good, especially, when we are constrained to regulate ourselves according to the situation or extent of the place; for we shall fail in the uniformity that is requisite to be observed in the Quarters, whereby the Camp will be ordered so absurdly and grossly, that almost nothing will have his due proportion: for as a Fortress serves to defend men against the assaults of their enemies; so the well-ordering of a Camp within, serves to distribute and place them, so that every particular Company may know what place is proper and particular for them to defend, without which order there had need be Bulwarks and large intrenchments about a Camp: for indeed, it were better to want this fortification than the proper defence that the soldiers may make within it, who being duly ordered as they ought to be, may for a need secure themselves with little or no defence, their Quarters being always so situated, and placed in such an orderly ready way to resist all assaults.  
But this is not the only care that is to be taken about the well disposing of a Camp; but it is very requisite we should proceed further, taking a survey how we may have supplies of ammunition, victuals, soldiers, and the like, to have a safe recourse to this Camp, that they may not be hindered or damnified by the enemy; and (as in the beginning of this discourse) it must be either by water or land, and so, as the enemy may not possibly cut off the passage, either for provision coming, or the Army retraiting: for if such an oversight should happen, an Army should be just brought into a trap or stratagem for its own confusion. Wherefore the enemy must not be suffered to have any Forts or Garrisons behind you, to hinder you by land, nor any Castle or Blockhouses, to spoil you by water, but of necessity they must be taken in first; and although the place should be never so commodious to transport (either by water or land) necessaries to the Camp, yet if the place you intent to encamp in be not very fruitful, 
The Christians being encamped about the River Nile, Ann● 1221. were drowned out of their Trenches.  to accommodate you with wood, victuals, forage for the present necessity both of man and beast, or if the air be not healthful, or if the situation of your Camp be so low that it be subject to drowning (if the enemy should cut out any waters) you would find yourself but in an ill taking; for you shall be sure to suffer before you can redress these things.  
Further, a special care is to be had how to preserve the Soldiers in health, which we may learn from that famous soldier Mounsieur Bellay, who saith that sickness may be avoided by taking good heed unto the excess the Soldier's use; and for their better healths, there must be provision made that they may have warm and dry Hutes, well thatched with straw, reed, or sedge; shady trees to defend the heat of Summer, or storms in Winter, their victuals sweet and good, well boiled and salted.  
Further, if in the heat of Summer any of the Troops belonging to the Army should be forced to travel, they must take the early and cool morn, so as they may be returned to their Quarters by the chief heat of the day.  
Likewise in Winter the Soldiers ought not to march through waters, or over ice and snow, unless the place they go unto will afford store of firing to relieve and dry them. Neither must they be suffered to drink ill waters, or to be ill clad, for these are the originals of great sicknesses; this care being had, ties and unites the hearts of poor Soldiers to their superior Officers more than any other way: for should not this care be had, a double loss of men would ensue; as namely, to be vanquished by sickness, and slain by the enemy: now since exercise is a principal thing to keep the Army in health, therefore duly thrice a week they ought to be exercised in their complete Arms; this will be a means to keep them from vicious courses, as gaming, drinking, and the like, which of itself is able to surfeit and destroy an Army.  
The General is always to have one months provision in his Camp, 
A General may tax the Towns about his Camp to bring in a certain quantity of corn & victuals, and he is to set the rates according to his pleasure.  especially of Bread, Cheese, Bacon, Fish, etc. with all kind of Provender for the Horse. Also there must be good and wholesome Laws established and proclaimed, and seen to be put in execution; for if Justice do not govern in an Army, all things go to ruin in the Camp.  
For in the first place, the unruliness of the Soldiers will cause Victuallers, and the country people to refrain the Camp, whereby a famine will soon ensue. Secondly, if the Soldiers be suffered to pilfer and pillage the people abroad in the Country near adjoining, those people will plot a revenge with the enemy, and seek to betray you: besides the quarrels that will arise amongst themselves, whereby a confusion amongst themselves will be wrought, if Justice should not prevent.  
But now I shall come to that which all this while you have expected, and that is to show the best manner of encamping, the which I shall endeavour to do by two several demonstrations: The first shall be (as before is spoken of) when the Rear of the Camp is secured by some great River or Arm of the Sea. The second a square incampment upon the Champion, where no natural strength can afford us help.  
For the first of these two; when the place affords such natural strength, that the Rear of the Army may be secured by some River or Arm of the Sea, (provided always that the enemy cannot come with shipping to annoy you) the Front of this Camp must be towards the enemy, where a certain Brest-work must be raised four or five foot high, upon the most eminent ground, and about the same breadth; the ditch about six foot broad, and four foot deep; this must run, if the ground will give leave, with some nooks and angles, the better to flanker some part of this entrenchment, as by the following figure you may perceive, marked A.  
From this Brest-work inwards into the Camp must be a space left sixty or eighty Paces broad, if the conveniency of the ground will give way, for the Soldiers to draw into Battalia, or to Parado in, marked O.  
In the next place, marked B. every Captain and Colonel are to have their Hutes, or Tents stand in an even Line; viz. every Colonel before the head of his own Company being quartered upon the right hand of his Regiment, and each Captain successively, according to their antiquities.  
In the next place there is a space eight paces broad, marked with the letter C. this is for the chief street, and runs in an even line, from one side of the Quarter to the other.  
From this chief street downwards towards the Rear of the Quarters, are the inferior Officers and Soldiers to be quartered, as at the letter D. and in this are diverse things to be considered; as first, the street which goes down between the Hutes, aught to be ten foot broad, and four hundred foot deep, in regard each Hute is to be eight foot square, 
The Lieutenant's Cabin is to be 12. foot long, and 8. foot broad.  and in every Hute two Soldiers are to be lodged: so that upon each side of the way there is to be fifty Hutes built, which are to hold an hundred Soldiers upon a side. At the top of the street upon the right hand, is the Lieutenant's cabin, who is to be allowed twelve foot; and upon the left hand is the Ensigns cabin, 
The Sergeants are there placed to keep the Company in good order.  of the same bigness, the Sergeants are to have upon each side their Cabins in the Rear of the Quarters: thus a Company of two hundred are conveniently quartered.  
In the Rear of these Hutes is another street or space of ground, which runneth from one side of the Quarters to the other, marked E. being six paces wide, upon the foremost side of which are the Sutler's, Butchers and Shopkeepers; behind these is a waste place next the water, for the off all, filth and draff to be conveyed away, as you may perceive at G.  
The space or distance of ground which is betwixt Regiment and Regiment, aught to be twenty or thirty foot broad, as you may see at H.  
The General ought to have his Tents in the midst of all the Quarters, and the Colonels, according to their dignity, upon each hand of his Pavilions.  
The Passages into the Campare to be placed in the most convenient places; and strong Ports made to open and shut at pleasure, as you may perceive at I. Also if need requires, there may be postern passages made in diverse places of the Brest-work, for single persons to go in and out, with a turnpike to secure it as at K.  
The Ordnance is to be placed in a half Moon made next the waterside, in the most convenient place of the Camp; the residue may be placed either upon the Brest-work, or else before the halfmoon, as at L. View the figure following: and at M. is the Bridge for the Army to pass over the River.  
The other manner of fortifying a Camp is now to be discoursed of. 
A second way of fortifying a Camp described.  The Lord high Marshal having made choice of a place convenient, being attended by the Quartermaster General, and the inferior Quarter-Masters: about the midst of the ground where you intent to incamp, set up the General's Standard, and about the same stake out a square place of ground for the General's Pavilion, forty paces square▪ directly from this towards the North, runneth one main street forty paces broad, which divides the Horse-Camp from the Foot-Camp; and on either side of the General's Tents, runneth two other cross ways, thirty paces in breadth, which divide the armed Soldiers from the pioneers and Wagons: these two ways embrace two long squares of ground forty paces broad, and five hundred and fifty paces long apiece; these may either of them be divided into five Lodgings, of an hundred paces in length, and forty in breadth, leaving between them certain passages of ten paces in breadth, so that the Soldiers upon every sudden alarm, may the more readily repair to the place of Assembly. One of the Lodgings next the General's Tent, is appointed for the high Marshal and his retinue, and the other on the other side, for the Treasurer; the rest may be assigned at the Marshal's discretion, to the other Officers of the field, and for such Noblemen and Gentlemen Voluntires as follow the Wars at their own charge.  
In the North-east Quarter of the Camp are the Horsemen lodged, in the Northwest the Footmen: either of these Camps are divided into three parts, by streets running East and West; these streets are twenty paces in breadth, and five hundred and eighty paces long: in every of these three spaces of the Foot-Camp are lodged a Regiment of 10000 men; and in the Hors-Camp, the middlemost of them shall serve for 1500. Lances, or Curassiers with their Beedets, the North space for the Harquebuziers; on the other side of this street are the Lodgings assigned for the Colonels of every Regiment and their Officers; every space being thirty paces broad, and one hundred and seaventy long. By these Characters following you may understand the description of this Camp the better, as in the figure following: A. stands for the Captains of the Harquebuziers, B. for the Captain of the Lances or Curassiers, and C. for the residue of the Carbines and Dragon's: Likewise, D E F. is the place for the Leaders of three principal Regiments of Footmen, the which are to be distingunished by their antiquities, or by the usual name of Vanguard, Battle and Rear-ward; the Vanguard lies next to the General's Tent, and answers to the Harquebuziers, the Battle answers to the Curassiers, and the Rear-ward to the residue of the Carbines and Dragon's. Every of these principal Regiments, you may (if you please) divide again into five smaller Regiments, by streets of ten paces broad, running North and South: So have you fifteen less Regiments in the Foot-Camp, and five apiece in every of the Horse-Camps, and every of these Regiments are one hundred paces broad, and one hundred and seventy paces in length; and shall contain every of them in Footmen 2000 of Curassiers 300. of Harquebuziers 400. the residue of the Carbines and Dragon's 500 with their Colonels and their Officers.  
The Colonels and Captains of the Cavalliary may be quartered at the head of their Regiments, as you may behold in the figure of the Camp. Those marked G. are for the Colonels of the Foot; H. for the Captains of the light-Horse-men or Harquebuziers; I. for the Captain of the Curassiers or Lances; K. for the Captain of the residue of the Carbines and Dragon's: So there remains Regiments of an hundred paces broad, and one hundred and fifty paces long for the Soldiers to be quartered in; which may, by small streets of five paces broad, be divided into as many spaces as there are several Bonds in every Regiment.  
These last divisions of Bonds are omitted in the figure, because in so small a plot it would breed confusion. This must be observed, that the shot be lodged towards the outside of the Camp, that they may be in readiness to answer the alarm; the which may be done, by dividing the utmost seven Regiments into half, as you may see in the figure by the pricked lines, leaving the seven spaces marked with L. for 7000. Shot, and the other with M. for 7000. Pikes: all the other Regiments marked with N. are likewise for Pikes and Muskets, to the number of 16000 Thus you see in the North moiety of this Camp, is quartered all the Foot and Horse; the other half of this Camp must serve for the quartering of the unarmed, as pioneers, Carters, Carpenters, smith's, Sutler's, Butchers, and all sorts of Mechanical Artificers, together with a large place of assembly for the Soldiers to retire unto, to put themselves in order upon any alarm; as also to exercise themselves in sundry sorts of activity. You shall therefore from the South side of the General Pavilion, six hundred paces Southward, extend out your first main street of forty paces broad, and cross it again with another street, running East and West, three hundred and sixty paces distant from the South side of the General's Pavilion; this street needs be but thirty paces in breadth.  
Again, extend the second narrow street that runs parallel to the first main street until you come to this cross street last made; so have you O. your place of Assembly three hundred and thirty paces broad, and five hundred and forty paces long. P. shall be appointed for the Munition and Officers attending upon the Artillery. Q. is the Marke-place, and round about this Marketplace may be lodged the Butchers, Bakers, Cooks and Victuallers of all sorts.  
About the place of the Assembly may be the Tents of all such as furnish the Camp with things needful for the Soldiers, as Armourers, Tailors, Shoemakers and the like.  
There still remains two long squares of earth, either of them 540. paces long, and 190. paces broad: here the Carts and Wagons, with the horse and oxen; for the Carriages themselves must always impale that part of the Camp that is not fortified either by nature or art: the pioneers likewise may be quartered in this Camp.  
Lastly, you shall line out 60. paces distant from all these Regiments and Quarters already set down, and there raise the circumference of the entrenchment of the Camp, making a good Trench eight or ten foot wide, and raise a good Parapet or Brest-work of five or six foot thick, and as high, with a foot-bank to make the Soldiers of height sufficient to give fire over it: your Ordnance is to be placed on the same.  
But if the enemy be near, and of greater force than yourself, than you must make your Trenches very large and deep, with a Rampart and Brest-work of a great height and thickness, with a Bulwark at each corner, and in the midst of the Curtain. View the figure following; where the line the Ordnance is planted upon, demonstrates the sleight Trench and Brest-work which is to be made, the enemy being a far distance from you. The outmost line with the Bulwarks, is the figure of the strongest Entrenchment for security when the enemy is at hand. For the Guards and manner of watching, I have discoursed of in the beginning of this Discourse, and more fully in the latter end of the Discourse of Fortification. I intent in the next Chapter to show you the manner of the Swedes Encamp, which I rather affect than this.   

CHAP. V.  
How the King of Sweden, in the late Imperial Wars, used to incamp his Army, with Figures to explain the same.  
THe Swedes in their late Germane Wars have been very curious in their Encamp, in regard of the potency of their enemies, and the multiplicity of their Armies; and were able by their excellent order, and good discipline, to perform as great achievements with their Army of 16000 Soldiers, as their enemy could with 20000. For that famous General never filled his men above six deep, and never above 126. in a Company (besides the Officers), and in a Regiment but eight Companies; which he might the better do, in regard his Soldiers were no novices, but admirable apt and pregnant in their exercisings and performances: this was one reason of this his only and peculiar way of imbattelling and encamping.  
Likewise, the fewness of men in his Companies made the more Divisions and Cohorts; and the more Officers, which he found by experience, stood him in great stead, and less charge to maintain them.  
His incampments were different both from the ancient Romans, and our modern Hollanders, as you may see by this description following, how he used to enquarter his Regiments of Foot; as by the sequent figure you may perceive in the head of the Quarters nine large Square at the upper end of the figure marked with the letter A. all which are the due places for the Colonel and Captains to pitch their Tents upon, where you see the word Colonel written, and the Captains according to their degrees in seniority and dignity of Office, as you may perceive by their Hutes or Tents marked each on the head of his own Company. The number over the Colonels Hutes or Tents show it to be 48. foot broad, viz. twice as broad as any of the Captain's Cabins, which are marked with 24. at each end of these rows of Squares you see the number 30. marked, which shows how many foot long each of these great Hutes are.  
Now, whereas the King of Swedens' discipline was usually to have but eight Companies to a Regiment, so many Hutes you see on the top of the Quarter, four on each side the Colonels.  
And the reason why this famous Warrior had so few in a Regiment as 1008. and consequently so few in a private Company as 126. those 1008. being divided amongst eight Captains, was that he might have the more places of preferment, and the more Officers to command these few men. This is a greater advantage than our Ancestors were aware of: and it were happy if our English Companies were reduced into 126. men in a Company, and not to be suffered some to be 200. and some 300. and some 150. which if it must needs be so, and may not be altered, than I could wish all Companies to be only of the extent of 200. and 80. of them to be Pikemen, and 120. Musketires.  
The rows of less squares marked on each side of the figure with the letter B. are the Hutes for the Soldiers to lie in, between the Front of which and the Colonel's ground, you see a large void space or distance, which is twenty foot wide marked at each end; the use of it is for the drawing up of the Companies or for the Officers to walk in, and for the Soldiers to speak with them there: this space is marked in the figure with C.  
Right under the Colonel's Hute, you see another void space as wide as the Colonel's Hute is, and as long as all the Quarter of the common Soldiers, marked with D. the use of it is for the Officers of the Regiment, commonly called the Officers of the Staff, as the provost-marshal, the Quarter-Masters of the Regiment, and the like.  
Of the Quarters of the common Soldiers on either side of this long void space, these be the proportions. All the little squares be Hutes or Cabins in the longer rows marked with the letter M. on the first Hutes are the Musketires lodged; and in the other rows marked with P. are the Pikemen lodged: one row of Musketires and one row of Pikes makes up one complete Bond or Company of 126. men.  
In the Musketires row are twenty four Hutes, and in the Pikemens' but eighteen; the reason is, because the King by his orders commands that every complete Company should have three Corporalships of Musketires; four Files or Rots (as the Swedes term them) make a Corporalship of Musketires; but of Pikemen three Files or Rots make a Corporalship: so that twelve Files of Musketires, and nine Files of Pikes, viz. twenty one Files, firemen in depth in each File, is a complete Band of 126. men, besides the Officers and Sergeants.  
When his Companies were weak, than he would have but two Corporalships of Musketires, and the remainder to be Pikes.  
Each of these Hutes are nine foorsquare, viz. three yards every way; and whereas one row of Musketires and one row of Pikes belongs to one Company; these therefore nearer set together than the row of Pikes belonging to several Companies are for the Pikes and Musketires of the same Company, are parted with a street but six foot wide, whereas betwixt the Pikes of several Companies is a street of eighteen foot wide, and betwixt the Musketires of several Companies, a street of twelve foot wide, and so you see the several proportions marked.  
The length of the row of Pikes is but 162. foot, as you see it marked betwixt the two first rows of their Hutes. The length of the Musketires row is 216. foot, as is marked in the margin: the distance of breadth being observed, they amount to 360. foot, or 72. paces; so broad is the whole Quarter for one entire Regiment.  
Below all this, in the Rear or lower end of the Quarter, you have a void space, 14. foot of ground running all the breadth of the Quarter, serving for the freedom of Air; this is marked with E.  
Last of all, you may behold another lowance of ground marked with the letter F. which is for the Sutler's, Chapmen, Butchers, etc. of the Regiment. Add now the distances of length together, and they come to 300. foot, which is the length of the whole Quarter for one entire Regiment.  
Now rests the chief point of discipline in the number and order of the placing of the Hutes, and the men in them. Concerning the number, there be three men to be lodged in one Hute, as well Pikes as Musketires; so that in 24. Hutes of Musketires of one Company there be 72. men; and in the 18. Hutes of Pike-men of one Company there be but 54. men, which number added together, amounteth to 126. which is a complete Band. These 72. Musketires are again divided into three Corporalships, and the 54. Pike-men also into three Corporalships. Four Files or Rots of Musketires go to one Corporalship, and of Pike-men but three Files or Rots to a Corporalship. So that 24. Musketires go to one Corporalship, and of Pikes 18. according to the number of either of their Cabins.  
Furthermore, their order being to march six deep in File, therefore in every two Hutes there is one Rot or File lodged, which presently know how to put themselves in order.  
Thus hath every Corporal of Musketires eight Hutes to look unto, and every Corporal of Pikes six Hutes under him. This certainty and disposing of the numbers serveth much for private government: this order of quartering, they are opinionated, is prevalent for the ready resisting of the enemy.  
Whereas you see two rows of Pikes, and two rows of Musketires still together, with their cabin doors inward one to another; this is the use of it. Suppose the enemy in the night falleth upon the Quarters, the Alarm being taken and given by those of the outmost Guards, out slips the two rows of Pikes into the street or alley betwixt them, and presently marching out betwixt the Captains Hutes, they are instantly in a fair order of Battle.  
The Pikes being gone, than the two next rows of Musketires joining together, march also out upon both sides of the Pikes, where they are ready instantly to flank them. Thus one Squadron or halfe-Regiment issuing out upon one side of their Colonel's Tent, and the other half on the other, presently they draw themselves in complete Battalia, and find their Colonels and Captains in the head of the Quarter, ready to conduct them to the Brest-work; thus so soon as the Alarm is given in from the outer Guards, the Soldiers will be ready to entertain their assault, every man before his own Quarter, upon which the enemy falleth before he can possibly (march he never so fast) come near to do any execution.  
If you desire to hear how in that huddle of darkness they can possibly find their weapons, know that by the order of their standing, every man can at first coming most readily clap his hands upon his own. To instance in the Pikes for example; The place where they all stand together is upon a thing made after the fashion of a pair of Gallows at the head of the Quarter; the upper overthwart beam is for the Pikes to stay against; then there is another beam lower, for to hang the Corslets upon, and to lean the Muskets against; this is to have a defence over it to defend the wet. Now when any service or exercise is done abroad, he that lieth in the Rear of the Quarter, by coming in first, setteth down his Arms inmost, and he that cometh in last leaveth his outmost, which when he again goeth first out, he findeth his foremost, and when the last man cometh, he findeth his own left, every man keeping still the same order that was at first appointed; so that the foreman, the right-hand man, or the bringer up is the fame ever, and his weapons ever in the same place. Thus they lie in Battalia being at bed; in Battle array when they rise up, their Arms are as ready as themselves: so that upon all Alarms, they are ready in a moment to entertain their enemy to their costs. The figure of this discourse you shall find in the next page: then afterwards we shall describe the figure of the whole Camp, with all the Fortifications thereunto belonging.  
A figure showing how the Swedes inquarter a Regiment of Foot.  
A figure of perfect strong Encampment of a whole Army, used by the King of Sweden in his late Wars.  
Let me request you to observe, how the former figure of inquartering a particular Regiment is explained; that you may the better understand this figure, which hath the same ground and order as formerly is described, what the Spaces, and the Fortification about the whole Camp means, I shall now explain unto you by the letters following. A. Signifies the Parradoing place, where the Soldiers are daily exercised in the use of their Arms. B. The chief Quarter for the General. C. The place of the Artillery, and the General of it. D. The common Marketplace for the whole Army. E. The high Marshal's Quarter. G. The place by him for his guards and servants. H. The Major General of the Army his Quarter. K. The place for his men and guards. L. The several Regiments to be divided, as in the former figure. M. Half Regiments. N. The Streets betwixt the several Quarters, each fifty foot wide. O. The space between the Front of the Quarters and the Trench of the Camp, being forty paces wide, serving for the drawing up of the Soldiers, and for the Alarm place. P. The space between the two innermost lines of the Fortification, decyphereth the Parapet or Breast-work five or six foot high, and six paces thick or broad. Q. The wet Mote or Graft beyond the Parapet, as you may perceive by the pricks. R. The half Moons or half Redouts. S. The cuttains. T. The passages into the Redouts or halfmoons. V. The Ravelins, with their grasses about them: they are placed betwixt the halfmoons, somewhat further out: each of these are to be sixty paces one from another, and the extent of the side of these is fifty paces long, and is so situated, that a right line on either side or face, be drawn to fall upon the point where the half Redouts and Curtains meet, as you may perceive by the lines pricked from the extreme of the Curtain to the end of the Ravelin. The use of these is to guard the passages out of the Camp: the passages are marked with W. Also as before is showed, there are outguards upon all fords and passages according to the nature of the place, round about this Camp. If there should be any Convoys sent out, or any design to be performed against the enemy, the passages of the Camp must be safely guarded, so that no man may pass out to inform the enemy until such time as the danger be past. And this shall suffice for the describing how an Army should be encamped.   

CHAP. VI  
The Oath of all under-Officers both of Horse and Foot, to be given at the proclaiming of these Articles following.  
I R. W. do here promise and swear, that unto the high and mighty King C. etc. as also to the Crown of England, I will be a true and faithful servant and Soldier, every manner of way performing my best endeavours for his Majesty's service, and the profit of his Kingdom. To my power also shall I hinder all actions prejudicial unto his Crown: and if I have tidings of any thing likely to be prejudicial, I shall give his Majesty or his General present notice thereof, or some one or other of his Council. Moreover, I will do my best endeavour to obseve all these his Majesty's Articles of War. Also I shall behave myself manfully in Battle, Skirmishes, and entries of Breaches, as well by water as by land, in all times and places, when and where I shall be commanded. I shall also keep watch and ward, and do all other duties willingly, unto the best profit of his Majesty and his Kingdom, wheresoever I shall be commanded by sea or land. Also I shall bear myself obediently towards my superior Officers in all that they command me for his Majesty's Service. In like manner, as I shall answer it before God and every honest man, I shall not fly from my Colours that I am commanded to follow, so long as I am able to go after them: and I shall be willing to do this at all times, and by no means absent myself from them at any time. I shall lay down my life and goods for the advancing of his Majesty's service; and endure all miseries that can possibly fall out in the Wars, fight manfully to the very last, so far forth as I am able, or that any valiant true Soldier ought to do. Furthermore, if hereafter I be put into any place of charge by his Majesty or his General, I shall do my best endeavour fairly to discharge my duty therein, so as I ought to do according to my place. This Oath shall I well and truly keep as the Lord of Hosts shall help my soul at the last judgement.    

ARTICLES AND MILITARY LAW TO BE OBSERVED IN THE WARS. SECT. XVIII.  

CHAP. VII.  
Divers Articles and Martial Laws, whereby an Army is to be regulated and governed, both in Camp and Garrison.  
INprimis, 
By these Laws the King of Sweden governed his Army.  No Commander, nor private Soldier whatsoever, shall use any kind of Idolatry, Witchcraft, or Enchanting of Arms, whereby God is dishonoured, upon pain of death.  
2. If any shall blaspheme the name of God, either drunk or sober, the thing being proved by two or three witnesses, he shall suffer death without mercy.  
3. If any shall seem to deride or scorn God's Word or Sacraments, and be taken in the fact, he shall forthwith be convented before the Commissioners Ecclesiastical, to be examined, and being found guilty, he shall be condemned by the Court of War to lose his head: but if they were spoken through haste or unadvisedly, for the first offence he shall be in irons fourteen days, and for the second, be shot to death.  
4. If any shall swear in his anger by the name of God, being convicted, shall pay half a months pay unto the poor: Or if any be found drinking, or at any other evil exercise, he shall forfeit half a months pay, and at the next assembly of prayer or preaching, he shall be brought upon his knees before the whole assembly, and there crave pardon of Almighty God.  
5. To the end that God's Word be by no means neglected, Our will is, that public prayers be said every morning and evening throughout the whole Camp, at one time, in every several Regiment, they being called thereunto by the sound of the Generals or Marshals Trumpets, and the Drums of every private Company and Regiment.  
6. Whatsoever Minister shall neglect his time of prayer, except a lawful occasion hinders him, he shall for every time being absent, pay half a months pay.  
7. Whatsoever Soldier shall neglect the time of prayer, and is thereof advised by his Captain, he shall lie in prison 24. hours, except a lawful occasion hindered.  
8. If any Minister be found drunk or drinking at such time as he should preach, or read prayer, for the first offence he shall be gravely admonished by the Commissioners Ecclesiastical, and for the second fault be banished the Leaguer.  
9 Every Holiday and every Sabbath-day at least, shall be kept solemn with preaching, in a place convenient, before and after noon; this also to be done twice every week, if the time will permit: if there be any holidays to come in the following week, the Minister shall after such Sermons or Prayers publicly bid them: who so shall neglect the time appointed (unless he have some lawful let or occasion) shall be punished as aforesaid.  
10. All Merchants and sellers of commodities whatsoever, so soon as they hear the Token or call to be given, shall immediately shut up their doors, and so keep them during the said time of Prayer and Sermon; they that presume in that season to sell any thing, shall make forfeit of all things so sold, whereof the one half to go to the General, and the other half to the next Hospital; over and above which, the offender shall for one whole day be put in prison.  
11. All drink and feastings shall in the time of Prayer be given over, upon pain of punishment, as is before mentioned in the seventh Article; if any Soldier herein offends, he shall forfeit half his weeks pay to the poor; and if he be an Officer, he shall forfeit what shall be awarded.  
12. For the explaining of this Article formerly expressed: If there be none to complain of these abuses, then shall the Minister himself give notice thereof unto the Colonel or Captain, and if he shall suffer such abuses to go unpunished, then shall he give the General notice thereof, who shall do him right.  
13. All Priests and Ministers that are to be in our Camp or Leaguer, shall be appointed by the Bishop of the same Diocese or Land from whence the Soldiers come whom he is to be among: no Colonel nor Captain shall take what Minister he shall think good, but shall be content with whom the Bishop shall appoint him.  
14. To the intent that all Church business, as well in the field as otherwhere, may have an orderly proceeding; We ordain, That there be one Ecclesiastical Consistory or Commission in our Leaguer, the Precedent or chief person whereof shall be Our own Minister, when We ourselves are personally present in the field. In Our absence shall the chief Minister to the General be the man; his fellow-Commissioners or ordinary Assessors shall be the chief Ministers to every Regiment of Horse and Foot; unto whom We give full power and authority to be Judges in all Church affairs, according to the Law of God and holy Church; what shall be by them decreed, shall be of as great force and strength, as if it were determined in any other Consistory whatsoever.  
15. No Captain shall have liberty to take any Minister without the consent of his Colonel, and of the Consistory. Neither again shall he discharge any, but by permission of the Consistory, he having there first showed, that Minister not to be worthy of his Charge.  
16. If any Minister be found ill inclined to drunkenness or otherwise; then may his Colonel or Captain of Horse or Foot complain of him in the Consistory; and if his fellow-Ministers find him guilty, then may they discharge him of his place. In such complaints, shall the whole Consistory and the Precedent, severely also reprehend him, that others of the same calling may take example thereby, and be warned of such gross errors, and give good example unto others.  
17. For that no government can stand firmly, unless it be first rightly grounded; and that the Laws be rightly observed: We the King of, etc. do hereby make known unto all our Soldiers and Subjects, as well Nobles as others; that in our presence they presume not to do any unseemly thing: but that every one give us our due honour, as we ought to receive; who presumes to do the contrary, shall be punished at our pleasure.  
18. Next shall our Officers and Soldiers be obedient unto our General and Field-Marshal, with other our Officers ne●t under them; in whatsoever they shall command belonging unto our service, upon pain of punishment as followeth.  
19 Whosoever behaves not himself obediently unto our great General, or our Ambassador coming in our absence, as well as if we ourselves were there in person present, shall be kept in irons or in prison, until such time as he shall be brought to his answer, before a Council of War; where being found guilty, whether it were wilfully done or not, he shall stand to the order of the Court, to lay what punishment upon him they shall think convenient, according as the person and fact is.  
20. And if any shall offer to discredit these great Officers by word of mouth or otherwise, and not be able by proof to make it good, he shall be put to death without mercy.  
21. Whosoever offers to lift up any manner of Arms against them, whether he doth them hurt or not, shall be punished by death.  
22. If any offers to strike them with his hand, whether he hit or miss, he shall lose his right hand.  
23. If it falls out that our great General in any feast, drinking, or otherwise, doth offer injury to any Knight, Gentleman or other, which stands not with their honour to put up; then may they complain to the Commissioners for the Council of War, where he shall answer them, and be censured by them according to the quality and importance of the fact.  
24. As it is here spoken of our General; so also it is of all other our great Officers, as Field-Martiall, General of the Ordnance, General of the Horse, Serjeant-Major General, Quartermaster General, and Muster-Master; all which, if they commit any such offence through envy or other by-respect, they shall answer it before the Court of War, as is before mentioned.  
25. As every Officer and soldier ought to be obedient unto our General and other great Officers; so shall they in the under Regiments, be unto their Colonel, Lieftenant-Colonell, Serjeant-Major, and Quartermaster, upon pain of the same punishment before mentioned.  
26. If any Soldier or Officer serving either on horseback or foot, shall offer any wrong or abuse unto his superior Officer either by word or deed, or shall refuse any duty commanded him, tending unto our service, he shall be punished according to the importance of the fact.  
27. If any Colonel, Lieftenant-Colonell, Serjeant-Major, or Quartermaster, shall command any thing not belonging unto our service, he shall answer to the complaint before the Court.  
28. In like manner if any inferior Officer, either of horse or foot does challenge any common soldier to be guilty of any dishonest action; the soldier finding himself guiltless, may lawfully call the said Officer to make proof of his words before the Court as his equal.  
29. If any soldier either of horse or foot shall offer to strike his officer that shall command him any duty for our service, he shall first lose his hand, and be then turned out of the Quarter. And if it be done in any Fort or place beleaguered after the watch is set, he shall lose his life for it.  
30. And if he doth hurt to any of them, whether it be in the field or not, he shall be shot to death.  
31. If any such thing falls out within the compass of the Leaguer or the place of Garrison, in any of the soldier's lodgings where many of them meet together, the matter shall be inquired into, by the Officers of the Regiment, that the beginner of the fray may be punished according to desert.  
32. He who in the presence of our General shall draw his sword, with purpose to do mischief with it, shall lose his hand for it.  
33. He who shall in anger draw his sword while his Colours are flying, either in Battle or upon the March, shall be shot to death; if it be done in any strength or fortified place, he shall lose his hand, and be turned out of the Quarter.  
34. He who shall presume to draw his sword upon the place where any Court of justice is holden, while it is holden, shall lose his life for it.  
35. He that draws his sword in any strength or Fort to do mischief therewith, after the watch is set, shall lose his life for it.  
36. No man shall hinder the Provost Martial General, his Lieutenant or servants, when they are to execute any thing that is for our service; who does the contrary, shall lose his life.  
37. Leave is given unto the Provost Martial General to apprehend all whatsoever that offends against these our Articles of War. All other offenders he may likewise apprehend by his own authority.  
38. If the Provost Martial General shall apprehend any man by his own authority; he may keep him either in prison or in irons, but by no means do execution upon him after the Court of War is ended, without first giving the General notice thereof.  
39 The Provost Marshals of every Regiment, have also the same privilege under their own Regiment and Company, that the Provost Martial General hath in the Leaguer.  
40. Every Sergeant Major commanding in the whole Leaguer what appertains to his Office, shall be obeyed by every man with his best endeavour.  
41. Whatsoever is to be published or generally made known shall be proclaimed by sound of Drum and Trumpet, that no man may pretend ignorance in it; they who after that shall be found disobedient, shall be punished according to the quality of the fact.  
42. No soldier shall think himself to good to work upon any piece of Fortification, or other place, where they shall be commanded for our service, upon pain of punishment.  
43. Whosoever shall do his Majesty's business slightly or lazily, shall first ride the wooden horse, and lie in prison after that with bread and water, according as the fact shall be adjudged more or less heinous.  
44. All Officers shall diligently see that the soldiers ply their work, when they are commanded so to do; he that neglects his duty therein, shall be punished according to the discretion of the Court.  
45. All soldiers ought diligently to honour and obey their Officers, and especially being by them commanded upon service; but if at any time they can on the contrary discover, that they are commanded upon a service which is to our prejudice any manner of way; then shall that soldier not obey him what charge soever he receives from him, but is presently to give notice of it.  
46. No Colonel nor Captain shall command his soldiers to do any unlawful thing; which who so does, shall be punished according to the discretion of the Judges. Also if any Colonel or Captain or other Officer whatsoever, shall by rigour take any thing away from any common soldier, he shall answer for it before the Court.  
47. No man shall go any other way in any Leaguer wheresoever, but the same common way laid out for every man, upon pain of punishment.  
48. No man shall presume to make any Alarm in the quarter, or to shoot of his Musket in the night time, upon pain of death.  
49. He that when warning is given for the setting of the watch by sound of Drum, Fife, or Trumpet, shall wilfully absent himself without some lawful excuse; shall be punished with the wooden horse, and be put to bread and water, or other penance, as the matter is of importance.  
50. He that is taken a sleep upon the watch, either in any strength, trench, or the like, shall be shot to death.  
51. He that comes of his watch where he is commanded to keep his Guard, or drinks himself drunk upon his watch or place of Sentinel, shall be shot to death.  
52. He that at the sound of Drum or Trumpet repairs not to his Colours, shall be clapped in irons.  
53. When any march is to be made, every man that is sworn shall follow his Colours; who ever presumes without leave to stay behind shall be punished.  
54. And if it be upon mutiny that they do it, be they many or be they few, they shall die for it.  
55. Who ever runs from his Colours, be he Native or Foreigner, and does not defend them to the uttermost of his power so long as they be in danger, shall suffer death for it.  
56. He that runs from his Colours in the field shall dye for it; and if any of his Comrades kill him in the mean time he shall be free.  
57 Every man is to keep his own rank and file upon the march, and not to put others from their orders; nor shall any man cast himself behind, or set himself upon any waggon, or horseback; the offenders to be punished according to the time and place.  
58. Whatever Regiment shall first charge the enemy and retire afterwards from them before they come to dint of sword with them, shall answer it before our highest Marshals Court.  
59 And if the thing be occasioned by any Officer, he shall be publicly disgraced for it, and then turned out of the Leaguer.  
60. But if both Officers and Soldiers be found faulty alike, then shall the Officers be punished as aforesaid. If it be in the Soldiers alone, then shall every tenth man be hanged; the rest shall be condemned to carry all the filth out of the Leaguer, until such time as they perform some exploit that is worthy to procure their pardon, after which time they shall be clear of their former disgrace. But if at the first any man can by the testimony of ten men prove himself not guilty of the cowardice, he shall go free.  
61. When any occasion of service is, he that first runs away, if any man kill him, he shall be free; and if at that time he escape, and be apprehended afterwards, he shall be proclaimed Traitor, and then put out of the Quarter; after which, whosoever killeth him, shall never be called to account for it.  
62. If any occasion be to enter any Castle, Town or Sconce by assault or breach, he who retires from the place before he hath been at handy blows with the enemy, and hath used his sword, so far as it is possible for him to do service with it, and before he be by main strength beaten from it by the enemy, shall be so punished as the Court shall censure him.  
63. Whatsoever Ensign-bearer shall fly out of any place of Battery, Sconce or Redout, before he hath endured three assaults, and receive no relief, shall be punished as before.  
64. Whatsoever Regiment, Troop or Company refuseth to advance forwards to charge the enemy, but out of fear and cowardice stays behind their fellows, shall be punished as before.  
65. Whatsoever Regiment, Troop or Company is the beginner of any mutiny, shall be punished as is before mentioned; the first author to die for it, and the next consenter to be punished according to the discretion of the Court.  
66. If any Regiment, Troop or Company shall fly out of the Field or Battle, then shall they three several times (six weeks being betwixt every time) answer for it before the Court, and if there it can be proved that they have done ill, and have broken their Oath, they shall be proclaimed Traitors, and all their goods shall be confiscated, whether they be present to answer it before the Court or not: if they be absent, they shall be allotted so many days as we shall appoint them for liberty to come in to answer it before the Court, where if they clear themselves, well and good; if not, they shall have so many days to retire themselves, after which if they be apprehended, then shall they be punished according as the Court shall doom them.  
67. Whatsoever Regiment, Troop or Company shall treat with the enemy, or enter into any conditions with them whatsoever (without our leave, or our Generals, or chief Commander in his absence) whatsoever Officer shall do the same, shall be put to death for it, and all his goods shall be confiscated; of the soldiers every tenth man shall be hanged, and the rest punished, as aforesaid.  
68 Whosoever presuming to do the same, and shall be taken therewith, shall be proceeded withal like those that fly out of the field; their goods also shall be confiscate.  
69. If any that then were in company with such, can free themselves from being partakers in the crime, and can prove that they did their best to resist it, then shall they be rewarded by us according as the matter is of importance.  
70. Whoever upon any strength holds discourse with the enemy, more or less, without our leave, our Generals, or the Governor of the place; shall die for it.  
71. If it be proved that they have given the enemy any private intelligence by letter or otherwise, without our leave as aforesaid; shall die for it.  
72. They that give over any strength unto the enemy, unless it be for extremity of hunger or want of Ammunition; the Governor, with all the Officers shall die for it; all the soldiers shall be lodged without the quarters without any Colours, they shall be made to carry out all the filth of the Leaguer; thus to continue until some noble exploit of them be performed, which shall promerit pardon for their former cowardice.  
73. Whatsoever soldiers shall compel any Governor to give up any Strength, shall lose their life for it: those, either Officers or Soldiers, that consent unto it, to be thus punished; the Officers to die all, and the Soldiers every tenth man to be hanged: but herein their estate shall be considered, if they already have suffered famine and want of necessaries for their life, and be withal out of hope to be relieved, and are so pressed by the enemy, that of necessity they must within a short time give up the Piece, endangering their lives thereby, without all hope of relief: herein shall our General with his Council of War either clear them, or condemn them according to their merit.  
74. If any number of Soldiers shall without leave of their Captain assemble together for the making of any convention, or taking of any council amongst themselves; so many inferior Officers as be in company with them shall suffer death for it; and the soldiers be so punished as they that give up any Strength. Also at no time shall they have liberty to hold any meeting amongst themselves, neither shall any Captain permit it unto them; he that presumeth to suffer them shall answer it before our highest Court.  
75. If any being brought in question amongst others, shall call for help of his own Nation or of others, with intention rather to be revenged than to defend himself; he shall suffer death for it, and they that come in to help him shall be punished like Mutineers.  
76. Whosoever giveth advice unto the enemy any manner of way, shall die for it.  
77. And so shall they that give any token sign or Item unto the enemy.  
78. Every man shall be contented with that Quarter that shall be given him either in the Town or Leaguer; the contrary doer to be accounted a Mutineer.  
79. Whoever flings away his Arms, either in field or otherwhere, shall be scourged through the Quarter, and then be lodged without it, be enforced to make the streets clean until they redeem themselves by some worthy exploit doing.  
80. He that felleth or pawneth his Arms or any kind of Ammunition whatsoever, or any Hatchets, Spades, Shovels, Pickaxes, or other the like necessary instruments used in the field, shall be for the first and second time beaten through the Quarters, and for the third time punished as for other theft: he also that buyeth or taketh them upon pawn, be he soldier or be he victualler, he shall first lose his money, and then be punished like him that sold them.  
81. He that wilfully breaketh any of his Arms or Implements aforesaid, shall again pay for the mending of them, and after that be punished with bread and water, or otherwise according to the discretion of the Court.  
82. He that after warning to the contrary, shall either buy or sell, shall first lose all the things so sold or bought, and then be punished for his disobedience, as is aforesaid.  
83. No man that once hath been proclaimed Traitor either at home or in the field, or that hath been under the hangman's hands, shall ever be endured again in any Company.  
84. No Duel or Combat shall be permitted to be fought either in the Leaguer or place of Strength: if any offereth to wrong others, it shall be decided by the Officers of the Regiment; he that challengeth the field of another shall answer it before the Marshals Court. If any Captain, Lieutenant, Ancient, or other inferior Officer shall either give leave or permission unto any under their command, to enter combat, and doth not rather hinder them, shall be presently cashiered from their charges, and serve afterwards as a Reformado or common soldier; but if any harm be done, he shall answer it as deeply as he that did it.  
85. He that forceth any woman to abuse her, and the matter be proved, he shall die for it.  
86. No Whore shall be suffered in the Leaguer; but if any will have his own wife with him, he may; if any unmarried woman be found, he that keeps her may have leave lawfully to marry her, or else be forced to put her away.  
87. No man shall presume to set fire on any Town or Village in our Land: if any do, he shall be punished according to the importance of the matter, so as the Judges shall sentence him.  
88 No Soldier shall set fire upon any Town or Village in the enemy's Land, without he be commanded by his Captain: neither shall any Captain give any such command, unless he hath first received it from us or our General: who so doth the contrary, he shall answer it in the General's Council of War according to the importance of the matter; and if it be proved to be prejudicial unto us, and advantageous for the enemy, he shall suffer death for it.  
89. No Soldier shall pillage any thing from our subjects upon any March, Strength, Leaguer or otherwise howsoever, upon pain of death.  
90. He that beats his Host or his household servants, the first and second time he shall be put in irons, and made to fast with bread and water, according as the wrong is that he hath done, if the harm be great, he shall be punished thereafter, according to the discretion of the Court.  
91. None shall presume to do wrong to any that brings necessaries to our Leaguer, Castle or Strength whatsoever, or to cast their goods down off their Horses, and take away their Horses perforce: which whoso doth shall die for it.  
92. They that pillage or steal either in our Land or in the enemies, or from any of them that come to furnish our Leaguer or Strength, without leave, shall be punished as for other theft.  
93. If it so please God that we beat the enemy, either in the field or in his Leaguer, then shall every man that is appointed follow the chase of the enemy, and no man give himself to fall upon pillage, so long as it is possible to follow the enemy, and until such time as he be assuredly beaten; which done, then may their quarters be fallen upon, every man taking what he findeth in his own quarters; neither shall any man fall to plunder one in another's quarters, but rest himself contented with that which is assigned him.  
94. If any man give himself to fall upon the pillage before leave be given him so to do, then may any of his Officers kill him. Moreover, if any misfortune ensue upon their greediness after the spoil, then shall all of them suffer death for it; and notwithstanding there comes no damage thereupon, yet shall they lie in Irons for one month, living all that while upon bread and water, giving all the pillage so gotten unto the next Hospital. He that plunders another quarter, shall also have the same punishment.  
95. When any Fort or place of Strength is taken in, no man shall fall upon the spoil, before that all the places in which the enemy is lodged be also taken in, and that the Soldiers and Burghers have laid down their Arms, and that the quarters be dealt out and assigned to every body; who so does the contrary shall be punished as before.  
96. No man shall presume to ●illage any Church or Hospital, although the Strength be taken by assault; except he be first commanded, or that the Soldiers and Burghers be fled thereinto and do harm from thence; who dares the contrary shall be punished as aforesaid.  
97. No man shall set fire upon any Hospital, Church, School, or Mill, or spoil them any way, except he be commanded; neither shall any tyrannize over any Churchman, or aged people, men or women, maids or children, unless they first take arms against them, under pain of punishment at the discretion of the Judges.  
98. No soldiers shall abuse any Churches, Colleges, Schools, or Hospitals; or offer any kind of violence to Ecclesiastical persons, nor any way be troublesome with pitching or inquartering upon them, or with exacting of contribution from them: no soldier shall give disturbance or offence to any person, exercising his sacred function or Ministry upon pain of death.  
99 Let the billet and lodgings in every City be assigned to the Soldiers, by the Burgemasters or chief Head-borroughes; and let no Commander presume to meddle with that office; no Commander or common soldier, shall either exact or receive of the Townsmen or Citizens any thing, besides what the King or his General in his absence hath appointed to be received.  
100 No Citizen nor Country man shall be bound to allow unto either Soldier or Officer, any thing but what is contained in the King's Orders, for contributions and enquartering; (viz.) nothing besides houseroom, firewood, candle, vinegar, and salt, which is yet to be understood that the inferior Officers, as Sergeants and Corparalls and those under them, as also all common Soldiers shall make shift with the common fire & candle of the house where they lie, and do their business by them.  
101. If so be that Colonels and other Commanders have any servants or attendants, they shall not be maintained by the Citizens or Yeomanry, but by their own Masters.  
102 No Commander shall take any house or lodging in his protection, or at his own pleasure give a ticket of freedom, when such tickets are not expressly desired of him, nor shall he receive any bride or present to mend his own commons withal under any colour or pretext whatsoever. If any man desire a personal safeguard, let him be contented with that which is appointed in the King's Orders.  
103. To Commanders and Soldiers present, let the usual allowance be offered by the Citizens, but let no care be taken for such as are away.  
104. New-levied Soldiers are to have no allowance before they be entertained at the Muster.  
105. Nothing is to be allowed the Soldiers in any house but in the same where he is billeted; if they take any thing otherwhere by force, they are to make it good.  
106. If either Officer, Soldier, or Sutler be to travel through any Country, the people are not to furnish them with Wagons, Post-horse, or victuals but for their ready money, unless they bring a Warrant either from the King or the General.  
107. No Soldier is to forsake his Colours, and to put himself under the entertainment of any other Colonel or Garrison, or to ramble about the Country without he hath his Colonels Pass, or his that is in his stead: who so doth, it shall be lawful for any man to apprehend him, and to send him prisoner to the next Carrison of the Kings, where he shall be examined, and punished accordingly.  
108. Whosoever have any lawful Passes, aught by no means to abuse the benefit of them, or practise any cheats under the pretence of them. If any be found with any pilfery, or to have taken any man's cattle or goods; it shall be lawful for the Countrypeople to lay hands upon them, and to bring them to the next Garrison; special care being had, that if the prisoner hath any letters of moment about him, they be speedily and safely delivered.  
109. Our Carriers or Posts, though they have lawful Passes to travel withal, yet shall they not ride their Post-horses which they hire, beyond the next Stage. And if they shall take away any horse from one or other, to tyre out with hard riding, and beyond reason; they shall be bound to return the horse again, or to make satisfaction for him. The same order shall take place too, when any Regiment or Troops of ours shall remove from one Quarter to another; namely, when they shall hire postilions or baggage-Waggons for the carriage of their Valises, Arms or Ammunition.  
110. The houses of the Princes or Nobility which have no need to borrow our Guard to defend them from our enemy, shall not be pressed with soldiers.  
111. Moreover, under a great penalty, it is provided, that neither Officers nor Soldiers shall make stay of, or arrest the Prince's Commissaries or Officers, or any Gentlemen, Councillors of State, Senators or Burghers of any Cities, or other countrypeople; nor by any fact of violence shall offend them.  
112. Travellers, or other passengers going about their business into any Garrisons or places of Muster, shall by no means be stayed, injured, or have contribution laid upon them.  
113. Our Commanders shall defend the countrypeople and Ploughmen that follow their husbandry, and shall suffer none to hinder them in it.  
114. No Commander or common soldier whatsoever, either in Town of Garrison, or place of Muster, shall exact any thing upon Passengers, nor shall lay any Custom or Toll upon any Merchandise imported or exported; nor shall any be a hindrance to the Lord of the place, in receiving his due Customs or Toll-gathering; but to further them.  
115. If any of our Officers having power of Command, shall give the Word for any Remove or March to some other Quarter; those soldiers either of Horse or Foot that privily lurk behind their fellows, shall have no power to exact part of the contributions formerly allotted for their maintenance in that place; but shall severally be punished rather for their lingering behind the Army.  
116. Whatsoever is not contained in these Articles, and is repugnant to Military Discipline, or whereby the miserable and innocent country may against all right and reason be burdened withal, whatsoever offence finally shall be committed against these Orders, that shall the several Commanders make good, or see severally punished, unless themselves will stand bound to give further satisfaction for it.  
117. According to these Articles, let every man govern his business and actions, and learn by them to take heed in coming into lurch or danger.  
118. If any Soldier happens to get free-booty in any Castle, City, Town, Fort, Strength, or Leaguer; and moreover, whatsoever Ordnance, Munition for War, and victuals is found there, shall be left for our use, the rest shall be the Soldiers, only the tenth part thereof shall they give to the sick and maimed Soldiers in the Hospitals. All prisoners shall first be presented to us, amongst which if there be any man of note, whom we desire to have unto ourselves, we promise in lieu thereof honestly to recompense the taker of him, according to the quality of the person; other prisoners of inferior rank may the takers keep unto themselves, whom by our leave or our Generals they may put to their ransom and take it to themselves, but without leave they may not ransom them upon pain of death.  
119. If any be found drunken in the enemy's Leaguer, Castle, or Town, before the enemy hath yielded himself wholly up to our mercy, and laid down his Arms; whosoever shall kill the said drunken Soldier, shall be free for it; always provided that good proof be brought that he was drunken; and if that Soldier escape for that time with his life, and that it can appear that some damage or hindrance hath come unto our service by his drunkenness, then wheresoever he be apprehended, he shall die for it; but if no hurt ensued thereof, yet shall he be put in irons for the space of one month, living upon his pittance of Bread and Water.  
120. All our Soldiers shall duly repair unto the general musters upon the day and hour appointed; nor shall any Colonel or Captain either of Horse or Foot, keep back his Soldiers from being mustered at the time when our Muster-masters shall desire to view them; if any refuse, he shall be taken for a Mutineer.  
121. No Colonel nor Captain shall lend any of their Soldiers one to another upon the Muster-dayes for the making up of their numbers complete; he that thus makes a false Muster, shall answer it at the Marshals Court, where being found guilty, he shall be proclaimed Traitor; after which being put out of the Quarter, his Colours shall fly no more.  
122. If any Soldier hires out himself for money to run the 
* Running the Gatelope or Purgatory, is, when he that hath done the fault, is to run between the Regiment, standing half on one side, and half on the other, with whips or bastinadoes in their hands, to lash and cudgel the offender, which punishment many a shameless soldier will be hired to undergo for drink or money.  Gatelope three several times, he shall be beheaded; and if any Captain shall so permit or counsel his Soldier to do the same, he shall be actually cashiered.  
123. If any Horseman borrows either Horse, Armour, Pistols, Saddle, Sword, or Harness to pass Muster withal; so much as is borrowed shall be escheated, and himself after that turned out of the Leaguer, as likewise he shall that lent it him; the one half of the Arms forfeited shall go to the Captain, and the other half unto the Parforce.  
124. If it can be proved that any Horseman hath wilfully spoilt his Horse; he shall be made Traitor, lose his Horse, and be turned out of the Quarter.  
125. All Soldiers both of Horse and Foot, shall be taken on at a free Muster, but not by any private Captain; neither shall their pay go on before they be mustered by our Muster-masters.  
126. No Soldier either of Horse or Foot, shall be cashiered by his Colonel, Captain, or other inferior Officer; nor shall they who being taken on at a free Muster, have their men sworn to serve (if it please God) until the next Muster, except it be upon a free Muster, at which time the Muster-masters, and his Colonel may freely give him his Pass.  
127. If any foreign Soldier shall desire his pass in any Town of Garrison after the enemy be retired, he may have it; but by no means whilst there is any service to be done against the enemy.  
128. If any Soldier or Native subject, desires to be discharged from the wars, he shall give notice thereof unto the Muster-masters; who if they find him to be sick, or maimed, or that he served twenty years in our wars, or hath been ten several times before the enemy, and can bring good witness thereof, he shall be discharged.  
129. If any Colonel or Captain either of Horse or Foot does give any Pass, otherwise than is before mentioned, he shall be punished as for other Felonies; and he who hath obtained the same Pass, shall lose three months pay, and be put in prison for one month, upon bread and water.  
130. No Colonel or Captain either of Horse or Foot shall give leave to his Soldiers to go home out of the Field, without leave of our General, or chief Commander; whosoever does the contrary, shall lose three months pay, and be put in prison for one month, upon Bread and Water.  
131. No Captain either of Horse or Foot shall presume to go out of any Leaguer or place of Strength to demand his pay, without leave of the General or Governor; who so doth▪ shall be cashired from his place, and put out of the quarters.  
132. No Captain either of Horse or Foot shall hold back any of his soldier's means from him; of which if any complain, the Captain shall answer it before the Court, where being found guilty, he shall be punished as for other Felony; also if any mischance ensue thereupon, as that the Soldiers mutiny, be sick, or endure hunger, or give up any Strength; then shall he answer for all those inconveniences, that hereupon can or may ensue.  
133. If any Captain lends money unto his soldiers, which he desires should be paid again; that must be done in the presence of the Muster-masters, that our service be no way hindered or neglected.  
134. If upon necessity the case sometimes so falls out in the Leaguer, that pay be not always made at the due time, mentioned in the Commissions, yet shall every man in the mean time, be willing to further our service, seeing they have victuals sufficient for the present, and that they shall so soon as may be receive the rest of their means, as is mentioned in their Commission.  
135. Very requisite it is, that good justice be holden amongst our Soldiers, as well as amongst other our Subjects.  
136. For the same reason was a King ordained by God to be the Sovereign Judge in the field as well as at home.  
137. Now therefore in respect of many occasions which may fall out, his single judgement alone may be too weak to discern every particular circumstance; therefore it is requisite that in the Leaguer, as well as otherwhere, there be some Court of Justice erected for the deciding of all controversies; and to be careful in like manner, that our Articles of war be of all persons observed and obeyed so far forth as is possible.  
138. We ordain therefore that there be two Courts in our Leaguer; a high Court, and a lower Court.  
139. The lower Court shall be amongst the Regiments both of Horse and Foot, whereof every Regiment shall have one among themselves.  
140. In the Horse-Regiments the Colonel shall be Precedent, and in his absence the Captain of our own Life-guards; with them are three Captains to be joined, three Lieutenants, three Cornets, and three Quarter-masters, that so together with the Precedent they may be to the number of thirteen at the least.  
141. In a Regiment of Foot the Colonel also shall be Precedent, and his Lieutenant Colonel in his absence; with them are two Captains to be joined, two Lieutenants, two Ensigns, four Sergeants, and two Quarter-masters; that together with the Precedent they may be thirteen in number also.  
142. In our highest Marshal Court, shall our General be Precedent; in his absence our Field-marshal, when our General is present, his asseciats shall be our Field-marshal first, next him our General of the Ordnance, sergeant-major-general, General of the Horse, quarter-master-general; next to them shall sit our Mustermasters and all our Colonels, and in their absence their Lieutenant-Colonells, and these shall sit together when there is any matter of great importance in controversy.  
143. Whensoever this highest Court is to be holden, they shall observe this order; our great General as Precedent, shall sit alone at the head of the Table, on his right hand our Field-marshal, on his left hand the General of the Ordnance, on the right hand next our sergeant-major-general, on the left hand again the General of the Horse, and then the quarter-master-general on one hand, and the Muster-Master-Generall on the other; after them shall every Colonel sit according to his place, as here follows; first, the Colonel of our Life-Regiment, or of the Guards of our own person; then every Colonel according to their places of antiquity. If there happen to be any great men in the Army of our subjects, that be of good understanding, they shall cause them to sit next these Officers; after these shall sit all the Colonels of strange Nations, every one according to his antiquity of service.  
144. All these Judges both of higher and lower Courts, shall under the blue Skies thus swear before Almighty God, that they will inviolably keep this following oath unto us: I. R. W. do here promise before God upon his holy Gospel, that I both will & shall Judge uprightly in all things according to the Laws of God, of our Nation, and these Articles of War, so far forth as it pleaseth Almighty God to give me understanding; neither will I for favour nor for hatred, for good will, fear, ill will, anger, or any gift or bribe whatsoever, judge wrongfully; but judge him free that aught to be free, and doom him guilty, that I find guilty; as the Lord of Heaven and Earth shall help my soul and body at the last day, I shall hold this oath truly.  
145. The Judges of our highest Court shall take this their oath in the first Leaguer, where our Camp shall be pitched; our General, and the rest appointed to set with him shall repair to the place where we shall appoint, before his Tent, or other where; where an Officer appointed by us, shall first take his oath, and then the others oaths also.  
146. When the Precedent of our lower Courts shall hear this foresaid oath read before them, then shall they hold up their hands, and swear to keep it; in like manner, so often as any Court is to be holden in any Regiment, the aforesaid oath shall be read before all them that sit in judgement with him, who shall also hold up their hands and promise to keep the oath aforesaid.  
147. In our highest Court, there shall be one sworn Secretary appointed, who shall make a diligent record of all the proceedings that shall fall out, either in any pitched Battle, Skirmish, Leaguer, or any other piece of service whatsoever; he shall take the note, both of the day, place, and hour, with all other circumstances that shall happen; he shall also set his hand unto all sentences signed by our General; he shall have also two Clerks or Notaries under him, who shall engross all these passages, and keep a true Register of all enterprises, that our General with his Counsel of War shall give order to have done; and likewise of what letters be either written or received.  
148. In our highest Court there shall be one Vicepresident, who shall command the Sergeant at Arms, whose office is to warn in all the Judges of the Court, that they may there appear at the time and place appointed, and also to give the same notice both unto the Plaintiff and Defendant.  
149. In all lower Courts also, there shall be one sworn Clerk or Secretary who shall likewise hold the same order that is mentioned in our highest Court.  
150. Our highest Court shall be careful also to hear and judge all criminal actions, and especially cases of conspiracy or treason practised or plotted against us, or our General either in word or deed; secondly, if any gives out dishonourable speeches against our Majesty; thirdly, or consulteth with the enemy to betray our Leaguer, Castle, Town, Soldiers, or Fleet any way whatsoever; fourthly, if any there be partakers of such treason or treachery, and reveal it not; fifthly, or any that hath held correspondency and intelligence with the enemy; sixthly, if any hath a spite or malice against us or our Country; seventhly, if any speak disgracefully, either of our own or our General's person or endeavours; eightly, or that intendeth treachery against our General or his Under-Officers; or that speaketh disgracefully of them.  
151. All questions in like manner happening betwixt Officers and their Soldiers, if they suspect our lower Court to be partial any way, then may they appeal unto our highest Court, who shall decide the matter.  
152. If a Gentleman or any Officer be summoned to appear before the lower Court, for any matter of importance, that may touch his life, or honour▪ then shall the same be decided by our higher Court.  
153. All civil questions that be in controversy in our lower Court, if the debt or fine extends unto five hundred Dollars, or seventy five pounds or above; if the party complains of injustice, they may thence appeal unto the higher Court, if so be they can first prove the injustice.  
154. All other occasions that may fall out, be they civil, or be they criminal; shall first come before the lower Court where they shall be heard: and what is there by good evidence proved, shall be recorded.  
155. Any criminal action, that is adjudged in our lower Court, we command, that the sentence be presented, unto our General; we will not have it presently put in execution, until he gives command for it in our absence. But ourselves being in person there present, will first take notice of it, and dispose afterwards of it, as we shall think expedient.  
156. In our higher Court, the General Parforce, or his Lieutenant, shall be the Plaintiff, who shall be bound to follow the complaint diligently, to the end he may the better inform our Counsellors who are to do Justice: if it be a matter against ourselves, then shall our own Advocate defend our action, before our Court.  
157. The same power the Parforce of every Regiment shall have in our lower Court, which Parforce shall be bound, also to give notice of every breach of those Articles of war, that the infringer may be punished.  
158. Whatsoever fine is by the aforesaid Judges determined according to our Articles of war, and escheated thereupon, shall be divided into three parts. Our own part of the fine we freely bestow upon the several Captains either of Horse or Foot, which is forfeited by their Officers and Soldiers; & the forfeiture of every Captain, we bestow upon their Colonel; and the forfeiture of every Colonel we give unto our General. The other two parts, belonging either to the party to whom it is adjudged, or to the Court, those leave we undisposed, the point of Treason only excepted: and this gift of ours unto our Officers, is to be understood to endure so long as the Army be in the field, upon any strength or work, and till they come home again, after which time, they shall come under the law of the land like the other inhabitants.  
159. Whensoever our highest Court is to sit, i● shall be two hours before proclaimed through the Leaguer, that there is such an action criminal to be there tried, which is to be decided under the blue skies; but if it be an action civil, then may the Court be holden within some tent, or otherwhere; then shall the soldiers come together, about the place where the Court is to be holden, no man presuming to come too near the table where the Judges are to sit; then shall our General come foremost of all, and the other his associates, two and two together, in which order, they all coming out of the General's tent, shall set themselves down in the Court, in the order before appointed; the Secretary's place shall be at the lower end of the table, where he shall take diligent notice in writing of all things declared before the Court; them shall the General Parforce begin to open his complaint before them, and the contrary party shall have liberty to answer for himself, until the Judges be throughly informed of the truth of all things.  
160. If the Court be to be holden in any house or Tent, they shall observe the same order in following the General in their degrees, where they shall also sit as is afore mentioned.  
161. The matter being throughly opened and considered upon, according to the importance of it, and our whole Court agreeing in one opinion; they shall command their sentence concerning the same action, to be publicly there read in the hearing of all men, always reserving his Majesty's further will and pleasure.  
162. In our lower Court they shall also hold the same order; saving that the particular Court of every Regiment, shall be holden in their own quarters.  
163. In this lower Court, they shall always observe this order; namely, that the Precedent sits at the board's end alone, the Captains, Lieutenants, and Ensigns on either side; so many inferior Officers also upon each side, that so they may the better reason upon the matter amongst themselves; Last of all, shall the Clerk or Secretary sit at the lower end of the Table; the one party standing upon one hand, and the other upon the other.  
164. So soon as the sentence is given, the Precedent shall rise up, and all that sit with him; but doom being given by our General, that one of the parties must lose his head, hand, or the like; then shall they command the Parforce to take him away to Prison, which done, the Parforce shall send unto the Minister, to desire him to visit the Party, and to give him the Communion; but if the doom be passed in any lower Court, it shall be signified up unto the General in our absence, who shall either pardon the fact, or execute the sentence.  
165. No superior Officer, Colonel or Captain, either of Horse or Foot, shall solicit for any man that is lawfully convicted by the Court, either for any crime, or for not observing of these Articles of War; unless it be for his very near kinsman, for whom nature compels him to intercede; otherwise the solliciter shall be held as odious as the delinquent, and cashiered from his charge.  
166. Whosoever is minded to serve us in these Wars, shall be obliged to the keepin of these Articles. If any out of presumption, upon any Strength, in any Leaguer, in the field, or upon any work shall do the contrary, be he Native or be he Stranger, Gentleman or other, Process shall be made out against him for every time, so long as he serves us in these wars in the quality of a Soldier.  
167. These Articles of war we have made and ordained for the welfare of our Native Country, and do command that they be read every month publicly before every Regiment, to the end that no man shall pretend ignorance. We further will and command all, whatsoever Officers higher or lower, and all our common soldiers, and all others that come into our Leaguer amongst the soldiers, that none presume to do the contrary hereof upon pain of rebellion, and the incurring of our highest displeasure; For the firmer confirmation whereof, we have hereunto set our hand and seal.  
Signed in the Leaguer Royal.    

RULES AND OBSERVATIONS TO BE USED BEFORE BATTLE. SECT. XIX.  

CHAP. VIII.  
Divers promotions and observations for a General to take notice of, before the pitching of a Battle.  
IN framing and ordering of Battles, there are diverse circumstances of great importance to be had in consideration, whereby such warlike actions may be crowned with Victory, which being neglected, shall give an advantage to the enemy to rout and ruin your Army; wherefore I will endeavour to draw the particular circumstances to certain heads; and there being diverse things of great moment to be handled, I must crave your patience to be somewhat the larger in it, and the rather because I intent to insert the best instructions that our ablest Generals both ancient and modern have left us examples for future ages.  
Our ancient and best experienced Commanders found by their practical experience, that an Army consisting of fifty thousand men, was of potency sufficient for any enterprise or design, and that thirty thousand men was the least Army they durst adventure to enter the enemy's country withal.  
I shall give you the forms of diverse and several Battles, and of sundry proportions of numbers both of Horse and Foot as hereafter you shall see.  
The things observable before the ranging of a Battle are these; 
A small Army of old soldiers, are able to encounter with a great Army of novices.  first, the strength of your own, and of your enemy's Army, both in Foot and Horse; with the conditions of soldiers, whether they be old and expert, or young novices.  
Secondly, the situation of the ground, the advantages of strength in it, as Hills, Dales, 
For the securing of the Rear or Flank of the Army, and to hide ambitions to discomfit the enemy.  Rivers, Hedges, Woods, Rocks, Moors, or the like.  
Thirdly, the extent of the place, so that there may be convenient distances, and proportionable for the imbattelling of your Army.  
Fourthly, according to the advantages, situation, smallness or vastness of the place; accordingly you are to proportion and order your form of imbattelling.  
Fifthly, according as your enemy's Army shall consist most, either in Horse or Foot; the choice of your ground shall be thereafter taken for advantage; viz. if your own forces consist more of Foot, and less in Horse, and your enemy's strength is chiefly in his Cavallary, and weak in his Foot-forces, than you must make choice of Fields enclosed, or the advantage of hills, ditches, rivers, woods, moorish grounds, and the like, whereby the enemy's Horse will be barred from executing their service: otherwise, if the Army consisteth chiefly in Horse, the plains and large fields are most convenient and proper to further their execution.  
Sixthly, the Sun and Wind are chiefly to be gained of our sides; wherefore the Battalia's must be ranged at some rising with their backs toward it, and give Battle before the Sun declines to be in their faces: or if the enemy should have the advantage of the Sun in the morning, 
This was observed by M●r●us against the fimbres, and King Pl●●●o August●● against the Flemings.  then to defer battle until noon, whereby you gain the advantage of it in the afternoon. But of the two, the Wind is principally to be had on your side; for there is nothing that can trouble the enemy more than the dust and smoke of Ordnance and Muskets, which blinds and chokes them so as they know not what they do, nor can perceive how their adversary orders himself against them: wherefore if you have but a side-wind, be sure you plant most Ordnance upon that side, 
Epaminondas gained a victory by caus●●ng his Horse to stir the the dust into his enemy's face.  and make what smoky fires of Straw and Muck-hill mingled with Brimstone and Pitch as possibly you can, so that the Wind may convey the smoke full into the enemy's teeth. Finally, if it cannot be eschewed, but that the Wind must be against you, then place your own Ordnance wide of the Flanks of your Army, so that the smoke of them may not blind the Front of your Battle.  
Seventhly, get some convenient hills▪ either Natural or Artificial, for the planting of Ordnance, to flanker the Army and annoy the enemy; the which must be strongly guarded, and entrenched if it possibly may be, for it is the first thing the enemy will seek to surprise, if he possibly may.  
Eighthly, the orderly disposing of the Carts, Wagons, and Carriages, and all the impediments of the Army in the Rear, so that the Battle may be strengthened and impaled with them; or if there be any natural strength, as rivers, woods, hedges, ditches, and the like for to defend the Rear, then to order and place those carriages and impediments on the Flanks, whereby they shall be impaled and strengthened: but if no commodious place may be found to safeguard your Army, then raise intrenchments upon the Flanks and Rear, and man them with Piks and Muskets, or at least impale them with Pikes and Muskets.  
Ninthly, by dividing the Army into diverse sundry Battalions or Divisions, and so ordering them, that one Division or Battalia may relieve the other, being overcharged with the enemy; for there is no greater danger can possibly betide an Army than to range it so as one Division cannot retire between the other Divisions for safety and strength. Many have used to frame their Battles but of one entire Front, so that being repulsed, 
The first figure of imbattelling hath three several Battles, viz. the main Battle, the Battle of, succour, and the Rear-Battell.  they have no refuge, but to be routed and vanquished; but this is to be accounted madness: for it is great wisdom and policy to range three several Battles to retreat into, but never to order less than two: for if there be Battles of succour for the main Battle to retreat into, than the Files may be the thinner, as we have formerly instanced the King of Sweden, who used to range his Battalia's but six men in depth; so that with ten thousand well-exercised men he could extend the Front of his Army as broad as the enemy could with fourteen thousand, and make his party good with them in regard of his sundry Retreats, which brings fresh hands to fight and weary out the enemy: as also he would not miss of places of advantage, environed with water or marish grounds, etc. so that his Army should not be assaulted upon all sides. Sebastian King of Portugal, when he aided Mulehamet in the Wars of Barbary against Abdimelec King of Morocco, 
This Battle was fought the 4. of August. 1578  ranged the Rear of his Battle against the River Maraga, which was as a wall to defend them.  
Moreover, a General must take this for a Rule, viz. to enlarge or strengthen the Front of his Battle according to the number of his Soldiers, as also according to the force of his enemy's Troops; if the place where you are to embattle in be narrow, then of necessity you must straighten your Ranks; and if the place be wide and open, you must be very careful not to extend the Front of your Battle too wide, except your Army be of greater potency than the enemies; then by extending out the Wings of your Battle, you may gain advantage by overwinging them, whereby you may charge them both in Flank and Front at once. But he that shall adventure to charge an Army upon all sides, either must have four times more men than the enemy, or else he must be sure to perish for want of discretion.  
Also there is great discretion to be used in ordering of Battles, that they may not be placed in low grounds near any hill or high banks, or upon the side of a hill, because the lower grounds are subject to the enemy's Ordnance: if the enemy should have this advantage, the best way to prevent it, is to march out of distance from such places of advantage, to cause them to come down to you. But some fond have maintained the lower ground to be of greatest advantage, in regard the Muskets will do more service in shooting upwards than downwards. To this I answer, it is but a simple opinion; for it is double advantage to have the higher ground, in regard both Horse and Foot will soon find to their costs that it is a double pains; beside they come upon them with a great deal more power down hill, than they can up hill, and a bullet shot from a side-hill may shoot through two or three Ranks, when as that which is shot upwards, cannot shoot passed through one; as for their bullets rolling out, they are simple men that charge them the mean time. But this by the way.  
Tenthly, your Battle must be so ordered and disposed, that the enemy may be brought into some stratagem, or made to disorder his Troops; which may be done many ways, as by causing your Army orderly to retreat, so that the enemy may disorder his Ranks in the pursuit, and then to take the occasion to fall on again orderly, and rout them. The ancient Generals were very politic in this, for when they knew that their enemies placed their greatest strength in any one Point or Wing of the Army, then contrarily they would frame that Point or Wing weakest which was to encounter with them: their ablest forces they commanded to stand firm, and not seek to repulse the enemy, but to resist them; and the weakest Battalia's they caused to assault the enemy, 
Two great disorders the enemy may be brought into in th● time of Fight.  and then to retreat to their Battalia's behind them; by this means they brought the enemy into two great disorders: the first was, the enemy had his best Soldiers enclosed betwixt their adversaries Battalia's: the second was, when the enemy thought they had gotten the victory: their Bands would disorder themselves by pillaging: as the like happened at the Battle of Dreux in France, where the Lord of Guise stood fast with his Battalia, all the rest being fled from him but the valiant Swissers, who opposed themselves against all the fury of the enemy. In the mean time the Prince of Codee's Troops being confident of the victory, some of them following the slaughter, and others fell to pillaging, 
Lafoy Now pag. 381▪  thus being scattered abroad, the Lord Guise finding his opportunity, with those men he had he marched up to them with a bold countenance, and overthrew them before they could order themselves in any form to receive their charge. Likewise Scipio placed his weakest Forces against Asdrubal's best soldiers which he had placed in the midst of the Battle; and upon each Flank Scipio had placed his ablest men. So soon as Asdrubal charged Scipio's Battle, they retraited, only the two Flanks of his strongest soldiers stood firm: Asdrubal's soldiers pursuing the retreat, before they were aware, were gotten between the two Divisions of the Flanks of Scipio, as if they had been in an halfmoon; they there being charged upon both sides by them, his weakest men being there, were soon vanquished, and the rather, because his chiefest Forces, being placed in the midst of his Battle, could not come to fight.  
Eleventhly, You must know how and when to make use of such instruments as may hinder the enemy's Horse, and disorder and annoy his Foot-troops: and for this purpose the King of Sweden made use of an instrument which he termed a Swine's Spike, formerly used by one of our Kings, whereby he gained a Conquest in France: it was a piece of Ash four foot long, at each end a speared pike of iron; his Musketires stook this at their girdles, and as they advanced forwards to give fire upon their enemy, every man stook down his instrument aslope into the ground; this hindered the Horse from charging them. Also many have made use of the Caltrop, it being a small piece of round wood with pikes sticking up every way; 
The use of these instruments you may read in the discourse of Engines.  each soldier having one or two of these about him, may cast them before the Front and Flanks of the Army: these will much annoy the enemy's Horse.  
Also your Powder-pots being placed in the earth, and fire given unto them just as the enemy shall be approaching over them, these will infinitely disorder and kill them.  
Moreover it behoves a General to be of a very quick apprehension, 
In the discourse of Stratagems you shall find variety for all conditions and places.  and to forecast with himself what stratagems will best suit with the condition of the enemy, and the situation of the place, and how and when to put them in execution, that they may work their best effect.  
In the framing of your Battle you must be mindful to order the Battalia's so as there may be a space left of two paces for the Musketires to march down by the sides of the Pikes after they have given fire upon the enemy; for if the distance should be less, as diverse would have it, the motion of the Battalia's would presently close them up.  
Also the distances between the Battles of the forlorn hopes and the front of the main Battle ought to be sixty paces, or according as the place will admit.  
Likewise, the distances between the main Battle and the Battle of succour ought to be fifteen or twenty paces. The like distance is to be observed between the Battle of succour and the Rear-Battell.  
That part of the Battle that cannot be secured by Rivers, Moors, Woods, or the like, must be impaled either by Intrenchments well maned, or double or treble Pallizadoed, and well maned with Pikes and Muskets; four Ranks of Pikes, and three Ranks of Muskets will be sufficient to make the impalement: one Rank of Musketires may be drawn under the Pikes to give fire upon their knees; the other two Ranks standing behind the Pikes, may give fire over their heads, as they stoop to charge to the Horse. These ought not to give fire at random, but just when the Troops are come almost within push of Pike, and then but every second Musketire is to give fire, so that they may without intermission maintain their volley of Shot. These new invented Bow-Pikes are the properest to impale the Battle withal; and it cannot be amiss to have a Rank or two of them in the Front of the Battalia's, where they may do good service. There must be a convenient space between the Wings of the Battle and the Impalements, if in case the foremost Battalia's should retreat into the Battle of succour, etc.  
There are diverse small field-pieces which are to be placed before the Divisions of the Front, 
〈◊〉 the Att●le●● should be placed in the s●aces●etaeen the Divisions, the spaces must be left very wide, and then very dangerous; if left the usual distance, then in stirring, these spaces will close so soon, that the Ordnance can have no place to play.  which after once or twice discharging are to be drawn within the Divisions of the main Battle, and are to be placed before the Battle of succour: so that if the foremost Battle is driven to retreat into the spaces of the Battle of succour, then are they ready to give fire upon the enemy at his next approaches; these field-pieces being there placed, may be drawn upon the Flanks, ready to give fire upon the enemy when he shall charge the Flanks either with Horse or Foot.  
The forlorn Hopes, when they are wearied and beaten back by the enemy are to retreat through the spaces left betwixt the Battalions, and there they are to order themselves in a readiness to issue out at the Flanks, and assault the enemy when they are at push of Pike, upon one of their Flanks. There would be diverse appointed with Granado's and fire-Pots to cast them amongst the enemy. 
This must be done when the enemy is 100 yards from your Battle.  There may be diverse Mortar-pieces so placed that they may shoot Granado's and fire-Balls from the space between the main Battle and the Battle of succour, and convey them over the heads of your foremost Battle, amongst the enemies that are approaching to charge you.  
In regard nothing can hinder the enemy's Ordnance from annoying your Battalia's, but either they must be out of distance, or a strong wall betwixt you: it being an evil not to be eschewed, you are to make choice of the best and safest means of prevention; the first is by ordering of your Files thin: the second is to send with all speed a certain convenient number of Shot, 
The 〈◊〉 punish with death those that are afraid of the Ordnance, or ●hew any 〈…〉.  accompanied with Horse, to seize upon the Ordnance; with all celerity they are to perform this Service, by which the enemy will be hindered from shooting more than once; for they being in combustion for the gaining and defending their Ordnance, will hinder their execution.  
Those field-pieces, which I have formerly spoken of that they should be placed before the Battalia's, may do as good service being placed behind those Battalia's, if you cause those Troops before them to open a distance for the Shot, and speedily to fall into their order again.  
No Army is to be ordered so that those Battalia's behind, or in the Rear of the Battle cannot succour & assist those that fight before, for then the greatest part of the Army will be unprofitable, and if the enemy be potent, it cannot possibly but suffer an overthrow.  
The Front of the Battle ought to be entire, only those spaces before spoken of, for they are only to withstand the first brunt of the enemies Charge: and there ought in this to be more care taken not to be strucken by the enemy, than it importeth to strike them.  
The second Battle, called the Battle of succour, is to receive the Divisions of the foremost Battle upon occasion, and aught therefore to be ordered with convenient spaces or distances for that purpose, and aught always to be of less Number than the first Battle; for there can be no danger betid them, in regard the enemy cannot come to fight with them, unless the foremost Battle be joined with them, and then the enemy will find the middle Battle far stronger than the foremost.  
The Battle in the Rear ought to have the widest spaces or distances of all, 
There ●r-Battell is to consist or far less men than the Battle of succour.  because if the enemy should be too powerful for the main Battle and the Battle of succour, than these distances receive them, and then with one power they assail the enemy with all the whole strength of the Army; and now they must stand close and strongly to their tackling to gain victory: and take this for an observation, that soldiers will enlarge their Ranks, and Files when fear maketh them think of flight; and close then when valour and resolution maketh them stand firm to resist.  
If the enemy forceth the main Battle to retreat into the Battle of succour, those that impale the Flanks ought to keep their ground, if possibly they may, for thereby they shall have advantage to charge the enemy upon the Flanks as they follow the retreat of your main Battle; but if they be compelled to retreat, they may do it safely, falling back and doubling their own Ranks from the midst downwards to the Rear▪ and indeed it were very fitting an Army should be exercised in order of Battle, to make them perfect. And again no General ought to use one form of imbattelling always, for fear his enemy should prove too subtle for him, and foil him in his own play.  
The best way to save an Army from smal-shot, that will much annoy you, is to come speedily to the encounter. The Officers of every Band being drawn into Battalia, are to appoint trusty careful men to fill the soldier's Bandilires, and to deliver Bullets and March unto them, that there may be no stay nor want, nor any Powder miscarry.  
If your Army be compounded of diverse Nations, 
Hannibal used this policy: he placed his aids next the enemy, and behind them his Carthaginians: so as they could not fly, but either vanquish or weary the Romans.  so that some of them are not to be trusted; those whose loyalties are not to be trusted, must always be placed foremost next the enemy, and the faithfullest ablest men behind them, next unto them; so that having the enemy before, and a strong Battalia behind them, they must of necessity fight or perish. The Romans used to place their assistants or strangers upon the out-Wings of the Battle. But if your Army consists of diverse Nations that you were confident of their valour and fidelity, the best way were to order them all in one Front; so that the jealousy of one another's forwardness and valour might breed such an emulation in them, that they would do their best to exceed one the other in prowess. The King of Sweden made use of this policy many times, and it stood him in gread stead; the same did Monsieur de Lautrec against the Emperor's Army in the Kingdom of Naples, his Army consisting of diverse Nations, as Italians, Swissers, Frenchmen, Gaescoins, Almains; because none of them should be disparaged, he placed them all in on Front; for he knew of their great emulation, that one Nation desired to be thought more valiant than the other.  
Now it remains to speak of the Cavialry, how they ought to be placed; and in this a great care and circumspection is to be had: first in ordering them into convenient Battalia's, 
The Horse are equally to be divided, and placed on each Wing of the Battle, unless one Wing may be secured by 〈…〉 ground or hedges.  or proportionable Divisions, that they be neither too big nor too small; these are to be ranged upon each Wing of the Foot-troops, fifty or sixty paces distant from the Flanks of the Army, lest by their unruliness and disorderly retraiting, they press upon your own Troops, and dis-rank them.  
Many times the Horse-troops are divided into six Battalia's, viz. three placed upon one Wing, and three upon the other; the foremost Battalia's are to consist of as many more as the second, and the third is to be least of all. As, suppose the number of 4000 Horse; the two foremost Battles upon each Wing are to consist of 1100. the two second Battles of 500 apiece, and the two third and last Battles of 400. in each: there ought to be a good distance betwixt each of these Battalia's.  
If your Horse-Troops should be too weak for the enemy, you must line their Files with Shot, and also have in a readiness certain extraordinary Pikes to assist the Horse and Shot, if they should be overcharged. 
This is to be done when the ground is plain, that the Ordnance may not 〈…〉.  The Horse are to shelter themselves in the Rear of the Foot-Battalia's until such time as the enemy's Ordnance are surprised; for the Horse are subject to more danger of the enemy's Ordnance than the Foot possibly can be, in regard they are lower, and a canonshot is subject to mount.  
The Harquebuziers and Carbines many times are employed to assault the enemy not having so much respect in keeping of their Ranks.  
The Curassires are to be ordered next the Flank of the Battle for the most part, and the Harquebuziers and Carbines outmost of all; for the Curassiers ought to stir as little as possibly may be from the Wings of the Foot-Battalia's; for most properly they are to resist and seldom to assail.  
The best and safest way both for Horse and Foot, 
By this means they will be both in better order and breath. Bellary would not have them put forwards until the enemy were within 30. paces.  is to keep their ground until the enemy be drawn very near unto your Battle, and then to receive their charge.  
The Cavalry being ordered (as before) into three several Battles, viz. the main Battle, which is to consist of Carbines; the Battle of succour is to consist of Harquebuziers, and the Rear-Battell of Curassiers; and many times the Troops of the Carbines and Harquebuziers are next in the foremost Battle, & are to do the first execution upon the enemy's troops, & the Curassiers are to finish what they have begun to ruin & disorder.  
The Battle of succour is to be in distance behind the main Battle forty or fifty paces, 
Vide Livia lib. 8. & Lips. de milit. Rome l l4.  and is to have spaces as the Foot hath, for the Divisions to retreat into: the like must the Rear-Battell have; and it is to be ordered in distance twice as far behind the Battle of succour, as the Battle of succour is from the main Battle, viz. 80. or 100 foot, or more or less according to the situation of the ground. If the enemy should charge your Horses in the Rear, in the time of the conflict, than the General must send the Lightarmed Horse to resist them; and there must be always in a readiness certain Maniples both of Pikes and Shot placed in the Rear of the Battle, to draw out to assist either the Horse or Foot upon all occasions.  
Lastly, It remains to speak of the ways and means to encourage the soldiers, and to breed Spirit in them, making them undervalue their enemies, and to charge them with a boldness: and this is to be done by some pithy Oration and persuasive Speech, which ancient Generals have found by experience to be of great efficacy to induce them to wonderful performances. The Speech may be according as the General shall please, or as if he should in the head of his Troops pronounce these words.  
Right valiant Captains and fellow-soldiers, I have here ordered you in form of Battle ready to charge our enemies, and do require of you in the Name of the Lord of Hosts, two things especially; namely, the utmost of your Valours, and the truth of your Loves in obedience. For what man soever doth not use his best endeavours to subdue his enemies, is not only a murderer of himself but of his dear friends; and by disobedience may be the means of the Army's overthrow; for which there can be no plea before God's Tribunal, but his just sentence of condemnation, besides the in supportable shame and intolerable servitude we bring ourselves that shall survive, with our dear friends, into, which though it may seem as a green wound, only to smart at first, yet at last the reproach and disgrace will gnaw and fret to the bone. Wherefore, brave Soldiers, let your golden Spirits shine, and your steely metals hue out a Conquest for the glory of our great God, and the honour of our gracious King and beloved Country. God would have the Israelites fight valiantly as well as Moses to hold up his hands and pray or else no Conquest could be expected: wherefore let us perform both that the great God of Hosts may be propitious unto us, according as he hath promised to them that seek him. Wherefore let us be confident of Victory and not seek our ruins by unbelief. Let us call to mind our Ancestors, what noble achievements their magnanimous Spirits by God's assistance, effected, whereby our Nation hath been not only the Mirror, but the ●errour to the world. How did they in France at the Battle of Poyteirs, with an handful of men confound the mighty Army that would have swallowed them up? The like at Again court, etc. And how gracious was God to us in 88 to dissipate and destroy our invincible enemy, by his prospering our poor endeavours? Wherefore now let us not despair of his help, but with one joint consent let us furiously assault our proud enemies, that we may enjoy their riches, and eternize our memories to Posterity. For my own part, I am confident, that if we resist but three of their charges, that they shall not dare to adventure the fourth, but to their utter ruin. Wherefore if there be any man timorous or faint-hearted, let him depart weth his brand of infamy, to be rewarded by his King and Country according to his demerits. But let all Heroic Spirits ejaculate their petitions to heaven, and say with me, Let God arise, and his enemies shall be scattered.    

RULES AND OBSERVATIONS TO BE USED IN TIME OF FIGHT. SECT. XX.  

CHAP. IX.  
Divers Observations which both General and Officers must make use of in the time of fight or skirmish.  
HAving collected the best Observations that my poor endeavours could attain unto, for the fitting of all thing requisite before the time of fight; now it remains to discourse of such necessary principles as are convenient to be used in the time of fight, so that there may be nothing omitted which may be an inducement or furtherance to a victory. Wherefore, presupposing that the Battle Standards are pitched, and the Army ranged accordingly as before is showed; the first thing that is to be done, is to draw out a certain company of Horse and Foot to surprise the enemy's Ordnance, in which they are not bound to keep any array or order, but to run disbanded, and fall pell mel upon the enemy, whereby his Ordnance will be disabled from shooting above once.  
In the mean time the Forlorn Hopes, and such disbanded Shot are to skirmish with the enemy, partly to see if they can disorder any of their Divisions, or gain some prisoners, whereby the General may learn how they are imbattelled, and what Stratagems they intent to use, with the true number both of their Horse and Foot, so as he may the better fit himself for them; as also by their first onset to breed courage in his own men, and to make them disdain their enemy.  
The Forlorn Hope is duly to be supplied with men and munition, either from the Wings of the main-Battel, or else some Maniples appropriated for that purpose; according as they prevail against the enemy, so they are to be strengthened: if the enemy be too potent for them, than they are to retreat behind the main-Battell, and when the two Battles join, these are to sally out, and charge the enemy's Flanks.  
Some Stratagem or other ought to be put in practice at the first encounter; for a small matter, if it comes unexpectedly, will discourage an enemy.  
If there be any Ambuscado's secretly laid for to charge the enemies in the Flanks or Rear, let them execute their charge when the two Battles join in fight, whereby they may be disheartened.  
If in case the enemy take the charge, and make a retreat, those Officers that lead up the Forlorn Hopes to skirmish, must not pursue the retreat, nor suffer the soldiers to follow the enemy no further, since that this skirmishing is to no other end than to breed a certain impression and good opinion in the minds of your own soldiers.  
The absolutest way to disorder the enemy's Troops, is to charge their Battalia's either with your Horse or Foot, 
Flank and Rear.  both in Flank and Front *; and then having certain Troops of Horse ready form in manner of a wedge-Battell, that shall endeavour to enter the point of the Battle, and so disorder their Ranks.  
The General is to cause it to be given out, in the time of fight, that he hath a new supply of men coming unto him; and may make a show of some matters like a truth that may signify his Succours to be near at hand. This may take effect to discourage them, so that with little difficulty they may be vanquished. Sulpitius put all the servants and labourers belonging to the Army upon beasts unfit for fight, causing them to be ranged in such sort, that they seemed afar off to be a great number of Horsemen, whom he sent up upon a mountain some what near unto his enemy's Army, commanding them to keep themselves close until the Battle was begun, and that then they should show themselves in many Troops like Horsemen feigning to march down to charge the Rear of the enemy's Army: this put the enemy to flight.  
But if the Country be plain, so that no Ambush can be laid, then there must be Trenches digged, and men laid privily in them, and covered over with green boughs. Also such kind of Ditches may be digged, and covered over slightly with boughs, and earth laid slightly over, and certain firm places be left betwixt the Trenches, with good marks for to find them, at which places they may retire that are sent to charge the enemy, feigning to be afraid in their speedy retreat, to cause the enemy to follow them the faster, and so to fall into the snare.  
Note, 
Note.  that upon the disordering of the enemy, the main-Battell is not to follow the pursuit, but certain Troops of each Wings, both of the Horse and Foot are to pursue the victory.  
If any accident should happen unto the General during the Combat, which might dismay his soldiers, it is a point of great wisdom for to cover it, and to make the best of it presently; as Hostilius, who seeing that his assistants, which should have entered Battle with him, went their ways without striking stroke; he knowing their departure would have greatly dismayed his soldiers, caused it to be given out through all the Army, that they went away through his commandment: this did not only appease the people, but did moreover encourage them, that they were victorious. Sylla having part of his Troop slain, fearing lest his Army should be discouraged, he said, he sent them of purpose to be slain, in regard they conspired against him.  
In the Battle of Flanders, when the enemy had cut off the whole Regiment of Scots, that were sent to guard a passage, one only man brings the news of it; his Excellency caused him to be slain, lest he should have frighted the Army by the report of so sudden an accident.  
A General's care must ever be to avoid confusion of fight, which is to begin before your time; which causeth such inconveniences, as are cause oftentimes of loss. Therefore in the beginning of your fight, take great heed you invade not, nor fight confusedly, whereas every part of the Army hath his ordinary time to fight; neither suffer any part of your Army to fight with your enemy in any other fashion than you appointed them.  
At your first onset in charging the enemy, 
〈…〉, in the 〈◊〉 of Cyrus, shows 〈…〉 Grecians 〈…〉 a kind of 〈…〉 which 〈…〉 the Pean.  the Army must give a mighty terrible shout, to dishearten the enemy: and then afterwards keep great silence, that the sounds of the Drums and Trumpets may be heard, and distinguished, as also such commands as Officers shall give.  
If your Horsemen be oppressed with your enemy's Horsemen, send for succour a supply of Musketires, who may scattering and out of order, as occasion shall serve, shoot at the oppressors, and upon occasion retire, and return very often: to these you may send a guard of Pikes for rescue, the better to bring them off safe. But if you invade your enemy with Musketires, with your guard of Pikes send some Horse, so that both may defend them from invasion of the enemy's Horsemen. Likewise, to give the enemy his hands full, follow him with a Battalion resolutely, to put all, or one of his Battalions to rout; and having discomfited any one of his Battles, send only a small or convenient company to pursue the chase, and with the rest invade quickly some part of his Army fight with any one of your Battles; this must of necessity be done; for sundry Victories have been lost upon this occasion, that when one Battle hath overthrown his first encountered enemies Battle, it hath immediately followed the chase, and not holpen his own fellows in danger.  
Likewise, in your first joining of Battle, if your Forward gain the Victory, join other Battles immediately whilst comfort is on your side, and your enemies disheartened. This got Bucoy the victory at Prague.  
If your Footmen be vehemently oppressed with your enemy's Footmen; send your Horsemen to invade the Flanks of your enemies, and with them some Shot to hold them play: but if you can plant a Piece of Ordnance against their Flanks; it will gall them shrewdly.  
If your enemies main Battle do urge very valiantly your Forward, and his other Battles be not ready to help or rescue; cause both your other Battles, one on the one side, and the other on the other side, freshly to invade your enemies main Battle; and herein you shall do wisely, imitating our brave English at Poytirs.  
When the General perceiveth he hath a greater Army than his enemy, minding to compass him about before he be aware, let the Front of the Battle be ranged equal to the Front of the enemies, and so soon as the fight is begun, let him make the Front by little and little to retire, and the Wings to advance a little forwards, and then charge the enemy upon the Flanks. By this many Armies have been vanquished.  
It hath been a thing of great importance, whilst the fight continueth, to give out the word, that the General, or some chief Commander of the enemies is slain, or that one Wing or other of their Army is vanquished. Also the Chivalry of the enemies is to be feared with some strange fights, or by some fireworks, by which they may be made unserviceable.  
Now if the enemy have any Pieces of Ordnance in the Rear of their Army, if their Battalia's suddenly divide themselves, you are to do the like, for be sure, they intent to discharge upon you.  
If the enemy should endanger the taking of your Baggage; by no means suffer any of your Troops, either Horse or Foot, confusedly to run to relieve the same; but advisedly send a sufficient Strength to perform that Service when the enemy shall be most busy in ransacking the Wagons, whereby they may be easily vanquished.  
Where the enemy comes most potently and furiously upon any part of your Army, be sure there to discharge your Ordnance at the thickest of them, and being thereby dispersed, let your Horse charge them, taking the advantage of their disorder.  
If the enemy's Horse charge any of your Battalia's in the midst of it, be ready to give way to them, by making a passage for them; and as they pass through, charge them upon either Flank, by which means they will have the worst of it.  
Lastly, to end with Machiavils Rules of War which he hath set down for Maxims to be observed by all Commanders, as followeth.  
1 The same that helpeth the enemy, hurteth thee; and the same that helpeth thee, hurteth the enemy.  
2 He that shall be in the War most vigilant to observe the devises of the enemy, and shall take most pains to exercise his Army, shall incur least perils, and may hope most of the victory.  
3 Never conduct thy men to fight the field, if first thou hast not confirmed their minds and know'st them to be without fear, and to be in good order; for thou oughtest never to enterprise any thing of danger with thy soldiers, but when thou seest they hope to overcome.  
4 It is better to conquer the enemy with famine than with iron: in the victory of which, fortune may do much more than valour.  
5 No purpose is better than that which is hid from the enemy until thou hast executed it.  
6 To know in the War how to understand occasion, and to take it; helpeth more than any other thing.  
7 Nature breedeth very few strong men; but industry and exercise maketh many.  
8 Discipline may do more in War than fury.  
9 When any depart from the enemy's side for to come to serve thee, when they be faithful they shall be unto thee always great gains, for that the power of the adversaries are more diminished with the loss of them that run away, than of those that are slain, although that the name of a Fugitive be to new friends suspected, and to old odious.  
10 Better it is, in pitching the field, to reserve behind the first Front aid enough, than to make the Front bigger to disperse the Soldiers.  
11 He is difficulty overcome which can know his own power; and the same of the enemy.  
12 The valiantness of the soldiers availeth more than the multitude.  
13 Sometimes the situation helpeth more than the valiantness.  
14 New and sudden things make Armies afraid; slow and accustomed things be little regarded of them. Therefore make thy Army to practise, and to know with small fights a new enemy, before thou come to fight the Field with him.  
15 He that with disorder followeth the enemy after that his Battalia's be broken, will do no other than to become of a Conqueror a Loser.  
16 He that prepareth not necessary victuals to live upon, is overcome without iron.  
17 He that trusteth more in Horsemen than in Footmen, or more in Footmen than in Horsemen, must accommodate himself with the situation.  
18 When thou shalt understand there is a Spy from the enemy come into the Camp, cause every man to go to his lodging.  
19 Change purpose when thou perceivest that the enemy hath fore-seen it.  
20 Consult with many of those things which thou oughtest to do; the same that thou wilt after do, confer with few.  
21 Soldiers, when they abide at home, are maintained with fear and punishment; after, when they are led to the Wars, with hope and reward.  
22 Good Captains come never to fight the Field, except necessity constrains them, and occasion calls them.  
23 Cause, that the enemy know not how thou wilt order thy Army to fight, and in whatsoever manner thou ordainest it, make that the first Battle may be received of the second, and the second of the third.  
24 In the fight, never make use of the Battle to any other thing than to the same for which thou hast appointed it, if thou wilt make no disorder.  
25 The sudden accidents with difficulty are removed, or remedied; those that are thought upon, with facility.  
26 Men, iron, money, and bread be the strength of the War; but of these four, the first two be most necessary: because men and iron find money and bread, but bread and money find not men and iron.  
27 The unarmed rich man is a booty to the poor soldier.  
28 Accustom thy soldiers to despise delicate living, and lascivious apparel.  
Thus much I thought good to collect concerning this subject, which I hope will give any discreet Soldier content.    

RULES AND OBSERVATIONS TO BE USED AFTER FIGHT. SECT. XXI.  

CHAP. X.  
Divers Rules and Observations to be used after a Battle is either won or lost.  
HAving in the precedent Chapter discoursed of such things as are requisite to be done in the time of Skirmish; in this Chapter I shall demonstrate what is to be done after a Conquest either gained or lost. Wherefore the first thing to be considered, is, how a General shall demean himself, so that the Forces which are left may not be quite destroyed, and so the overthrow to redound to his utter confusion. Wherefore a General must order his affairs so, that his enemies should not follow his men to overtake them in their flight from the Battle: and for this purpose he must use some policy to hinder them, as Sertorius practised: Metellus having vanquished his Army, and knowing it was to no purpose for him to fly, commanded his Officers to retire unto diverse places, as scatteringly and dispersed as possibly they could, (knowing that the enemy would not make pursuit after such disbanded persons, 
It is policy for a General not to divide his Army to follow the pursuit, but rather let such small Troops depart quietly. Neither is it good to let the soldiers know the place of meeting beforehand, but only the chief Officers.  but rather such as went by Troops) and having first advertised them where every man should come to his Rendezvous and meet again; this was the means of saving most of his men: but if they should be pursued, than every man must cast such treasure as he hath in the way as they fly, that the enemy may stay to get it up. King Mithridates made use of this policy to escape from Lucullus. Likewise Frotho King of the Danes being landed in England▪ deceived the Natives that pursued him; they being jaded with the Danish goods and jewels, and scattered about here and there to gather them up, were set upon again by the Danes with some of their forces they had rallyed together, and vanquished the English at their pleasure.  
Many that have been overthrown in Battle, by reason of Woods and other secure places, have saved themselves, and being come together, have secretly returned in the night, and charged the enemy who hath thought himself secure, and have taken them so disorderly, that they have routed them.  
If the Conqueror have taken many prisoners, and the vanquished should rally his forces again, thinking to have an advantage to assault the Conqueror; then there is no way, but every soldier must kill his prisoner, lest they should take an opportunity to resist. If a Battle should be fought, and neither side be utterly vanquished, but the darkness of the night cause them to give over, the best way for him that hath lost most men in the fight, to cause some of his Soldiers to steal away the bodies of their own slain men, and privately bury them; so that the enemy shall conceive that he had the worst of the fight, in regard he sees most of his men slain; this will make him loath to encounter again.  
The victor after he hath discomfited his enemy's army, and scattered them about, aught to send a sufficient number of Horse and Foot, to lie upon some passages, secretly in the nighttime, which leads to some Town or Fort of theirs of greatest strength, and nearest at hand, where they shall be sure to entrap all such as shall seek by flight to save themselves.  
Likewise when a General sees there is no way but to be routed, let him send speedily certain Troops of Horse and Foot to the next strait passage, which may so provide for themselves, that they may defend the passage, so as diverse of their own soldiers may safely escape; for an enemy will not divide his Army to weaken it, to follow the chase of the subdued enemy, much less to seek to gain a passage which is fortified, to hinder their escapes: for he that with disorder followeth the enemy after he is broken, will do no other, than to become of a Conqueror a Loser.  
Many things more you may expect should have been here inserted; but I have been plentiful in setting down diverse observations most proper to these Discourses, in the Office of a General, and in the Discourse of Marching and Retraiting from an enemy. In the next place I shall endeavour to portray to your view sundry forms of Imbattellings, which have been, and now are in use, and some newly invented; with a demonstration of the manner of framing them and the true use of them.    

THE MANNER OF FRAMING OF BATTLES. SECT. XXII.  

CHAP. XI.  
An excellent strong form of imbattelling an Army, consisting of twenty six thousand Foot, and four thousand Horse.  
THE following Figure hath before the Front of the Battle four Divisions, marked A. which are termed Forlorn Hopes: viz. one Division before the Front of the right Wing, and the other before the Front of the left Wing of the main Battle. In each of these Divisions of Forlorn Hopes are four hundred and fifty Soldiers, Pikes and Musketires. There are also two other Divisions of Forlorn Hopes placed in the midst before the Front of the main Battle, containing likewise four hundred and fifty in each of them: these Forlorn Hopes are advanced before the main Battle an hundred paces, or as much more as the General pleaseth. These are first to make loose skirmishes with the enemy, to draw them within distance of the Ordnance; they are gently and orderly to retreat: the two Divisions of Forlorn Hopes next each Flank are to fall back and join with the same. The two Forlorn Hopes in the midst are to fall back into the space in the midst of the main Battle.  
But first the Ordnance, after they have performed their duties, are to be drawn back through this broad distance or space, and are to be placed before the Front of the Battle of succour.  
The Forlorn Hopes are to have certain Troops of Carbines to be flankered twenty two paces or more, sideways from them, viz. on either Wing two hundred and fifty, marked B. these are to make light skirmishes with the enemy's Horse, and likewise to view what advantages may be taken by the ill ordering of the enemy's Array.  
Before the Front of the main Battle are planted diverse Field-pieces, marked C. there are two others on each side of the Forlorn Hopes, marked D. these are to scour the distances betwixt the Divisions. A A.  
Likewise, 
These Ordnance are on each Flank to be guarded with 300. Foot and 100 Horse.  wide upon each Flank are planted diverse Ordnance marked E. these are to have a sufficient Guard both of Horse and Foot; and are to command and scour the Plains within distance of their Shot. These are likewise to be drawn back upon the enemies approaching, and to be placed at the point of the Flank of each Wing of the main Battle, ten or twelve paces wide.  
The main Battle consists often Maniples or Battalia's, marked F. viz. five towards the right Flank, and five towards the left.  
In the midst is a broad space or distance of ground containing forty two paces, for the Artillery to be drawn to and fro, as also for the two middle Divisions of the Forlorn Hopes to retreat through for their safety, behind the main Battle.  
Likewise through this distance or space diverse loose Shot may sally out and give fire upon the enemy's Battalia of Pikes. Also diverse Soldiers with fireworks and Granado's, are to go and come, to cast them against the enemy's Troops, which will be a great annoyance unto them.  
Furthermore, under the Front of the Pikes are diverse Firelocks or Musketires to be placed, 
Short Swords and Targets are excellent to line the Front of Pikes, to cut off the enemy's Pikes heads.  that shall play upon the enemy's Pikes, when the enemy shall be approached within twenty of forty paces of your main Battle; viz. five hundred Shot.  
The Ordnance that before were drawn down from before the main Battle, unto the Front of the Battle of succour, are (when the enemy is within twenty paces of your foremost Battles) to be leveled right up this broad space or distance, and having given fire in a right line upon the enemy, those of the Forlorn Hope that retraited into that space, being ordered and ranged 37. in Rank, and ten deep in File, and placed behind the Battalia, upon the right side, marked P. and 38. in Rank placed behind the middle Battalia, on the left side, at Q. viz. three hundred and seventy even behind the Maniple or Battalion of the right side of the said space, and three hundred and eighty soldiers behind the Battalia of the left side: so soon as the Shot is past, the three hundred and seventy soldiers are to face to the left hand, and the three hundred and eighty to the right; and so advancing forwards into the midst of the space or division to their even distance; they are again to face towards the Front of the main Battle, and are speedily to march up and join with them, whereby the whole body will be strong and firm to receive the enemy's charge.  
Likewise the several distances betwixt every Maniple or Battalia of this main Battle, 
Note, each Battalia of this main Battle contains 1000▪ soldier.  is 
* If the partition should be less than 2. paces, they would close up in the motion of the Army.  two paces; and this is for the Shot, after they have given fire, to march down into the Rear.  
Behind this main Battle is the Battle of succour, consisting of six Divisions or Battalia's marked H. these are ranged, in distance from the Rear of the main Battle, twenty or thirty paces.  
The space or distance of these Battalia's betwixt Flank and Flank, from one to the other, is one hundred twenty six paces: and these are thus placed, because if it happens the main Battle to be overcharged, the Battalions thereof may 
* Note, into each space 2. Battalions are to retreat, and on each Flank 1. Battalia; and the middlemost Battalia is to fall into the space in the midst. By this means 6000. men more are brought to fight, and the middle Battle made so much stronger than the first: and again, retraiting into the ●ear. Battle, makes them strongest of all.  retreat between these spaces, and so be reinforced with fresh men. Note, each Battalia contains seven hundred men.  
In the rear-Battell are four several Battalia's, twenty or thirty paces distant. Behind the Battle of succour marked I. the space or distance of ground between these Maniples or Battalia's are three hundred thirty six paces: the reason is, because if the enemy should still over-charge the former principal Battles, than they are to make their last retreat betwixt these divisions or spaces; viz. whereas before there retraited into the Battle of succour four Maniples or Battalia's, and the first Battalia unto the Flank of the right Wing, as also the other four Battalia's retraited into the spaces upon the left side of the Battle of succour, and the fifth Battalia upon the outside of the Flank of the left Wing of the same: so now there must retreat six Battalia's into the spaces between the Battalia's of the rear-Battell, and two Battalia's upon the outside of the Battalia of the right Wing; and also the other six Battalia's retraiteth into the spaces upon the left side, and two Battalia's upon the outside of the Battalia of the left Wing. Likewise the middlemost Battalia is to retreat into the space in the midst, so that by this means there shall be brought two thousand four hundred fresh soldiers more to join with the rest to fight.  
By this means the enemy will be wearied, 
The rear-Battel consists of 2000 soldiers, viz. 500 in each Battalia.  and also over-winged, by reason this Battle at the last retraiting is as broad again as it was at first. Thus it will come to pass that the enemy shallbe charged both in Front and Flank, whereby he shall surely be routed.  
The Flanks of this Battle are to be impaled on either side with four hundred eighty five Pikes, & two hundred ninety one Musketires; because the distance from the Front of the first Battle to the Rear of the last, is fifty eight paces, that is ninety seven soldiers in a Rank, 
Five Ranks of Pikes is the most that can do any service against the enemy at once; if there be mor● Ranks, they are out of distance to annoy the enemy with their Pikes. The Impalement is marked with the letter G.  and five deep in File: the Musketires are but three deep in File, and equal to the Pikes in Rank or Breast; they are to stand behind the Pikes; the Pikes charging at the Horse, the foremost Rank is to give fire over the heads of the Pikes as they stoop, and then falling back, the ne●t Rank is to give fire in their place. These new fashioned Pikes with Bows annexed to them are the best for Impalement: also they may do much good to be placed in the first and second Ranks of the main-Battell, in the Front thereof, to gall the enemy's Horse. This Impalement is to be set a pretty distance from the Flanks, that the Battalia's upon their retreat may have room to fall in betwixt the Flanks and the Impalement. The Impalement in the Rear, is to be made of the Carts and Carriages, or some Intrenchments, if occasion be. The Rear of this Battle extends itself seven hundred paces wide from the Flank of the right Wing to the left, and without Intrenchments, or Carriages, Carts and Wagons fastened with chains together; it would take up a quarter of the Army to impale it so strongly as the Flanks are.  
Wherefore it were very convenient that the pioneers, 
pioneers having ●ow● for their weapons, may do excellent service in wet wether when Pieces will not fire.  being they are troubled with nothing but their Spade and Mattock, and that but seldom, they being most usually carried by Water or by Wagon; these pioneers should have Bows and Arrows for their Arms, which would be but little burden to them, and these would help to defend the Carriages in the Rear, with the help of a small quantity of Pikes and Muskets: so that if there be two Pikes and three Musketires to guard the Rear, 
The whole Impalement, Flanks and Rea●, amounts to 7382. Soldiers.  it being 700. paces broad, they would amount to 5830. Soldiers; so the Flanks and the Rear would take up 7382.  
Note that when the main Battle retreats into the Battle of succour, the impalements of the Flanks are to stand firm if they can possibly, and are to charge the enemy on the Flanks: but if the two first Battles retreat into the Rear Battle, they must of necessity then fall back, and half of them strengthen the Rear, because the Front of the Battle than will extend itself so wide that the impalements of the Flanks must give way to the Battalia's that shall retreat, and so they will be disjoined from the impalement in the Rear, which places bein not fortified by these Soldiers, there will be an advantage for the enemy to break in upon the Rear of the Battle with his Horse.  
The residue of the Horse troops are to be imbattelled in several Battalia's down by the Flanks of the wings of the Army, and wide in distance from them sixty paces or more: the Carbines or Harquebuziers are to maintain skirmish with the enemy's Troops, and if it chance they make any breach into any of the Foot-Battalia's, by charging them in Front and Flank, than the Curassiers are to second them, and to break into their Ranks.  
We are to have certain divisions of Pikes upon either Flank of two hundred and fifty a piece, 
These may be lined with Muskets.  to aid and rescue the Horse upon all occasions; these may be placed in a square form before the points of the Wings of the main Battle, as well to secure them from danger of having their Ranks broken, as also upon occasion to rescue the Horse marked K.  
There is also eight hundred Musketeers to join with the Harquebuziers; 
Viz. 400 upon each Flank; these are to join with 150. Horse.  these are to stand ready by the Flanks to take the opportunity to fall upon the enemy's Ordnance, and are either to gain them or hinder them from discharging; these are marked with W.  
The residue of the Soldiers unplaced are to guard the Carriages from the enemy's assauls, which are placed upon the Rear of the Army, and to agitate such other services as the General shall see fit; also those loose Shot or part of them with the Pikes of the Forlorn Hope, after they are retreated, may fall into the Rear and join with the 3665. Soldiers to guard the Rear, if need be.  
The rest of the Horse are to be ranged upon the Wings of the Army in three several Battalia's some eighty paces wide of the Flanks, for fear they should commit any disorder by their unruly retreating; in the foremost Battalia is to be eight hundred Harquebuziers, and these must stand fifty or sixty paces before the Front of the Battle, but wide as is said before. Next to them is another Battle of four hundred and fifty Carbines, standing even with the Front of the main-Battell, but wide. Next is the third Battle to be placed fifty or sixty paces behind the former, which shall contain three hundred Curassiers, these are marked with the letter L, as you may see them placed upon either side or Wing of the Battle.  
The residue of the Horse are thus to be disposed of, first to guard the Ordnance there is one hundred on either Flank: there is two hundred and fifty Horse to Flank the Forlorn Hopes on either side.  
Lastly, there is a hundred Horse to join with the Shot that is placed on either Wing to intercept the Ordnance from the enemy; the figure of this discourse followeth.   

CHAP. XII.  
This second figure shows a very strong form of Imbattelling, and very apt for the drawing an enemy into a stratagem.  
IN this second figure following you may perceive a very strange form of Imbattelling, very apt for the drawing an enemy into a stratagem, whereby of necessity they must be disordered and routed.  
First, the Forlorn Hopes consisting of 1500. Pikes and Musketeers in either grand division marked A, and are advanced 200. paces before the first Battle, which is placed for their succour; these are first to skirmish with the enemy, and then orderly to retreat even with the said Battle of succour, when the enemies troops are at push of Pike with them, and eagerly pursuing them until they are come within the distance of the first stratagem; then fire is to be given to the trains, and upon the disorder they are to advance forwards, and furiously to charge the enemy in the Front, and the Horse on either Flank.  
But if the enemy's discomfiture be not so great but that they take heart of grace, and stand so firmly to their tackling that they are too prevalent for you, than the Forlorn Hopes and the Battle of succour are to retreat between the divisions of the main Battle, the enemy then pressing forwards within the distance of the second stratagem; then fire being given to the trains, the whole strength of the Army will be in a readiness to take the advantage to charge the enemy in his disorders, as before is specified; and also then the Field-pieces shall have freedom immediately to play upon the enemy's Troops.  
If the main Battle should retreat (except upon a wonderful occasion of necessity) it will be most dangerous; for if any of the divisions of the two Wings or of the Body of the Battle be overcharged, the divisions of the Reare-Battell are to advance forwards and join with the main Battle; and then manfully to encounter with the enemy; or otherwise those Battalia's in the Rear are to be disposed of according as the wise General shall see occasion either of assistance, or to charge the enemy upon any place of advantage.  
But let me request you to observe how either of the Forlorn Hopes consists of a thousand men marked A, the first Battle of succour being four Battallia's marked B, have in each of them 600. men.  
The main Battle marked C consists of eight Battles, and each of them contains 1000 men.  
The Reare-Battell consists of seven Battalia's marked D, and in every one of them there is 500 men.  
The Flanks are impaled with four ranks of Pikes, and three ranks of Muskets, on either side is 490. (viz) on both sides is 980. 〈◊〉 marked E.  
The Impalement of the Rear is with the Carriages, and there is two ranks of Pikes and two ranks of Muskets to defend them will amount to 4620. men, in regard the Rear is 3450. Foot broad, or 690. paces with the distances betwixt the Battallia's.  
There is also placed on either Wing 550 Pikes and Shot to aid the Horse, and to join with them upon all occasions if the enemy should be to strong for them, so that upon both Wings there are 1100. men.  
There are also 600. Shot which are to join with three hundred Carbines; these are to surprise the enemines' Ordnance as you may see marked at F and G, (viz.) 300. Shot on each Wing with 150. Horse; these are to use all celerity and diligence to surprise, or at least to hinder the enemy from shooting with his Ordnance against your Troops.  
There is also 600. men to guard your own Ordnance, lest the enemy surprise them, and two hundred horse to assist them; (viz.) on either wing are 300. Foot and a hundred Horse as you see marked H.  
The powder pots that are to be placed in the earth are marked I  
Thus you see a Battle consisting of 22000. Foot and 3000. Horse ordered ready to encounter the enemy; the figure of this discourse followeth.  
Note the Horses are ordered as followeth; first upon either Wing are a thousand divided into three Battles; in the first Battle there is 500 in the second Battle there is 300. and in the last Battle there are 200. upon both the Flanks are 2000  
There are 200. Horse to guard the Ordnance (viz.) on each Flank 100  
There is also 500 Horse to Flanker the Forlorn Hopes, (viz.) 250 in each.  
There is 300. Horse to surprise the enemy's Ordnance, (viz.) 150. on either Wing before the Forlorn Hopes; thus the 3000. Horse are ordered.   

CHAP. XIIII.  
A very strong form of Imbattelling ten thousand Foot, and two thousand Horse, very proper to be used in the Champion, where there is no refuge either natural or artificial, the enemy exceeding in strength both in Horse and Foot.  
THE figure of the Battle following is invented for the safe retire of the Shot, being over-powred and repulsed by the Horsemen of the enemy; or otherwise, who may at eight several places retire into these Squadrons which stand in the proportion of a Fortress.  
There are thirty seven Maniples of Shot orderly placed, the distance betwixt each are three paces; in every Maniple are contained 130. Shot, which amounts to in gross 4810. the residue being 190. are equally placed to attend the Ordnance being 23. at each Platform; so there is only six remains to be employed upon messages, or to guard the Powder.  
These Maniples or Battalia's of Shot, are Impaled with the Pikes, which are thus ordered; each Flank hath 850. also the Front and Rear takes up 800. each corner takes up 425. these amount to 5000. Pikes, being ordered ten deep in file.  
In either corner of this Battle are two spaces for the Shot to sally out upon the enemy, and to retreat in again for their safety.  
The Ordnance being discharged upon the enemy's Troops are to be drawn in at these spaces, and placed within the Rear of the Pikes; so that when the enemy chargeth, the Pikes may close themselves into one main Square by causing the Flanks to March up to the corners of the Squares, which as occasion shall offer, may disclose again, and let out the Shot to skirmish with the enemy.  
The Squares of Pikes at each corner, doth much strengthen the Battle, especially if the enemy chargeth it on Front and Flank at once; it is all in all to strengthen the corners of any Battle whatsoever, for in the corners lies all the weakness.  
Moreover if the enemy chargeth upon two sides at once, yet those passages furthest from them may have Shot sally out and give fire upon them, and safely retreat in again. There is no wise General will adventure to charge such a Battle as this is upon all four sides at once, except his Army were four times stronger in men and horse.  
If need be, Shot may be drawn continually round under the Pikes, which may give fire upon the enemy and so fall in again, and be continually relieved.   

CHAP. XV.  
A fourth figure of Imbattelling an Army consisting of twenty thousand Foot, and two thousand Horse.  
IN Marshalling this Battle, this course is to be observed; the Pikes consisting of 4000 must be ranged into eight Battalia's; each Battalia hath 460. Pikes, (viz.) 46 in rank, and 10. deep in file, which amounts to in the whole sum 3680. so there remains 320. Pikes of the 4000 which are thus disposed of; upon the right Sleeve in the Front is 120 Pikes, which are either to guard the Ordnance, or to assist the Horse, as occasion shall serve; likewise there is as many on the left Sleeve to be employed as the former; in the Rear are 80. more placed for the guarding of the Ordnance, as you may see at each Platform 40.  
In the next place the four thousand Shot are thus to be Marshaled; each Flank of the Pikes hath six hundred twenty four Shot ranged eight in depth, and seventy eight in Rank or Breast; that is one thousand two hundred forty eight upon both Sleeves; for from the Front of the Pikes to the Rear is fifty two paces, and the spaces or distances betwixt each Battalia is five paces, and the three Battalia's occupieth forty two paces of ground, (viz.) in each Battalia fourteen paces, so that every soldier occupieth seven foot of ground betwixt Rank and Ranke, which makes fifty two paces.  
In the next place there is thirty six Squadrons of Shot, each Squadron containing seventy men; in the Front there are twenty one Squadrons, and in the Rear fifteen; the whole number amounts unto two thousand five hundred and twenty Shot, so their remains still three hundred and twenty Shot, of which are placed on each Sleeve or Wing, above in the Front by the Pikes one hundred and twenty; these are to join with those Squadrons of Pikes that attend the Ordnance, and upon all occasions they may be drawn out to assist the Horse, if the enemy should overpowre them; also in the Rear each Platform of Ordnance hath forty Shot to aid the Pikes for the securing of the same.  
The two hundred Horse are placed upon each Flank in three several Battalia's; the first Battle consists of three hundred, the second being Curassiers hath four hundred, the third being Carbines hath as the first had three hundred, so that in all there is two thousand; the Horse are to charge the enemy's Horse, and being put to retreat by them, those loose Shot and Pikes are to be in a readiness to give fire upon them, which being disordered by them the Horse are immediately to recharge them; if the enemy be still to strong, then let the four hundred Curassiers being fortified on each Flank with the Harquebuziers and Carbines, charge them all on breast, these Horses being sufficiently lined with shot; and in the mean time the Squadrons of Shot must disband themselves and give fire upon the enemy, and if need be, those Squadrons in the Rear may easily relieve them in the Front through those passages of the Pikes.  
If all resistance be to no purpose but the Shot must retreat into those spaces, and so to order themselves in the void space in the midst of the Battalions of the Pikes; then after their retreat the Battalia's must close themselves, making a firm Front every way; and the Impalement or Wings of Shot must be drawn round under the Pikes, which being so drawn will make just four ranks; they must discharge upon their knees and so safeguard themselves.  
The Horse must secure themselves on the Flanks or in the Rear.  
So soon as the enemy is driven to retreat, than the Pikes are to open their divisions and let out the Shot to assail them, in the same manner as before.  
This form of Imbattelling hath been used in former times, and questionless it may be very prevalent in two necessities; as in the night, when a General knows not in what kind or manner the enemy will assail him; or if his Army should be weak in Horse, and his Army should be suddenly set upon by them upon some spacious ground, which should be advantageous for the enemy's Horse to surprise them, than this form of Imbattelling may be very defensive.  
From this form of Imbattelling, as also from all other, if the General sees reason, he may alter it into what order he pleaseth; this very subject deserves a discourse by itself, the which if I should here treat of, it would be too tedious; but any ingenious Soldier at the first view, will conceive how to transmute any Battle deciphered into any other form the condition of the Battle will best admit; and thus much for this.   

CHAP. XVI.  
A fifth way of Imbattelling an Army consisting of twelve thousand Foot, and four thousand Horse, the Ordnance being placed covertly in the midst, and also upon the Wings.  
IN this first figure following you may perceive at the letter A, four hundred Shot upon either Flank before the main Battle; these are to surprise the enemy's Ordnance which is to be supposed are planted upon a Hill; further you may observe sixteen Battalia's, the Ordnance being planted in the main Battle between the divisions thereof, having four hundred Musketeers ordered before them, and by them obscured; and as soon as the enemy is approached within distance, those Musketeers are to divide themselves on either hand, so that the Shot may have free passage to disorder the enemy's Troops, upon which advantage the other Battalia's are to advance forwards, and furiously to charge the enemy in his disorders.  
The Horse are oblique-wise placed upon either Flank. Note before the Horse gives their charge, the Musketeers at A are to sally forth to surprise the Ordnance.  
Likewise the Shot before every Battalia are to make their passage through the intervals down the sides of the Battalia's into the Rear of all, and from thence to charge upon the enemy's Flanks, if occasion offers; otherwise aid their own men in the skirmish; all the Shot before the Battali'as' are in number twelve hundred.  
If according to the King of Swedes Discipline, these Battalia's were ordered but six deep in file, than there would be sufficient men spare to Impale this Battle, whereby it would be of a far greater strength; beside there would be a quantity spare to line the Horse-Troopes, which is a thing of great consequence, and very prevalent, as is formerly showed; and by this following figure you may see.   

CHAP. XVII.  
The sixth way of Imbattelling an Army consisting of twelve thousand Foot, and four thousand Horse, with the Ordnance planted on the Hills before the Battle, as also on the Rear and Flanks, being fit for all attempts.  
IN this subsequent Battle which we are now to describe, you may perceive fifteen Battalions of Foot ordered in Marshal array; in the right Wing or Vanguard are three Battalions containing 500 in each of them Flankt with Musketeers; before every one of which are also ranged ten files of Musketeers, three in the right Angle, three in the left, and four in the midst just before them, every File containing ten men in depth; these Shot are to make their way through the spaces of the Battalions in the Rear of all, and so from thence to charge upon the enemy's Flanks: in the main Battle are three Battalions containing three thousand men, (viz.) in each a thousand, these are Flankt with Musketeers, and have also Musketeers before them in the same form with the rest: in the Rearward or left Wing of the Battle, are likewise three Battalions containing 500 men a piece, Imbattelled as the rest with Musketeers before them; also behind these Battalia's are four other Battalia's placed, and have also in each of them 500 a piece, with Musketeers advanced before them; these are for seconds, as you may perceive them Martialled just against the Intervalles or Spaces of their opposite battalions; these Spaces are 200. foot distance in breadth, so that the said four Battalions may pass through them; these likewise have Shot before them in the same manner the former had.  
These with the rest may March forth to skirmish with the enemy, or stand firm to second them upon their retreat; or remaining in the Rear, they may sally out and charge the enemy upon the Flanks, or if occasion be, they may assist the Horse if they be too weak for the enemy.  
The rest of the Battalions are but twelve foot distance one from the other, and at three foot order.  
The divisions of Musketeers are allowed six foot that they may the better fall through having given fire.  
In the Rear of all are two battalions, of a thousand in either of them, standing just behind the three Battalia's of the main Battle.  
About a Furlong wide of the Flank of these are 800. Horse marked B, (viz.) 400. in each placed oblique-wise, the better to start forth and environ the enemy; in like manner are the Horse Marshaled in the outmost Flanks of therest, but in greater numbers, as by this following figure you may see.  
By the Wings of these two Battalia's are two field-pieces placed, ready turned and bend to the Rear; these are to discharge upon the enemy, if he should with Horse or Foot give upon that part: if not, then may these Pieces with ease b●e brought to some other place which may be more apt to annoy the enemy. The rest of the Ordnance are planted upon two hills opposite against the enemy's Flanks: these are to break their order, and distress them; and for their better security, there are seven hundred Musketires to guard them: and if need be, there must be a greater Force. There should be a slight Trench raised before them, or pallizadoed about, the better to defend them from the enemy's Horse and Foot. These forms of imbattelling I found in the Prospective-glass of War, and have here inserted them for the benefit of the ingenious Soldier.   

CHAP. XVIII.  
A seventh form of Imbattelling an Army consisting of fifteen thousand Foot and five thousand Horse, impaled with Redouts, and a Ditch of combustible stuff to prevent the Horse from assaulting either the Flanks or Rear.  
THis figure following represents to your view an excellent form of imbattelling, very strong and secure: the principal Strength of the Army are brought to fight at the first encounter.  
Wherefore first observe the main-Battell to consist of five Battalia's; in each of them are one thousand six hundred Pikes and Muskets: the Muskets are orderly ranged before the Pikes; each Battalia hath one hundred and sixty Files, and ten deep, which amounts unto, in all the five Battalia's, eight thousand men.  
After the main-Battell is a second Battle placed, which is termed the Battle of succour; and that consists of four lesser Battalia's, and hath in each of them seven hundred Pikes and Shot. Betwixt the said Battalia's there is a convenient space or distance of ninety six paces, for the main Battalia's to retreat into, when they shall be overcharged with the enemy.  
The manner of retraiting is thus; all the first five Battalia's are evenly and easily to retreat, with their face towards the enemy, holding them play with their Shot; upon the right and left Flank of the second Battle, are the two outter most Battalia's of the first Battle to retreat on; also the other three Battalia's are to enter into the spaces betwixt the four Battalia's of the second Battle, and there to stand even with them in Front, whereby there will be nine Battles to re-charge the enemy afresh; for these two thousand eight hundred fresh men will be a great heartening and strengthening of the rest which were wearied and discomfited in the first encounter.  
But if it should so happen that the enemy should over-wing your Battle at the first encounter, than this second Battle of succour must advance up between the distances in the main Battle, whereby the Front of it will be extended so much the wider. But by the way, you must not make your Front wider than the impalement of the Redouts and the Trenches of fire will permit; for those that shall retreat beyond those Redouts and Trenches, are but as lost men, unless if occasion were, they should join with the Horse-Troops, to assist them.  
Note, if the main Battle be advanced towards the enemy beyond the limits of the Redouts, and if the Wings should stretch out wider than the impalement, then if it be driven to retreat, those outparts of the Wings must first fall back, and order themselves in the second Battle, as they were before; or otherwise some of them may be placed to secure the Flanks or the Rear, or otherwise, as the General shall think fit.  
In the next place is the Battle in the Rear to be considered, which consists only of three Battalia's, and in each of them are four hundred men; they have also sufficient large spaces to receive the two former Battles, and this is the last hopes the Army can expect. Wherefore the Redouts must manfully bestir them, to give continual volleys of shot upon the enemy's Flanks, which will lie naked unto them.  
The Ordnance, after they have done their service, must be with-drawn, and placed before the Battalia's of succour, where they may give fire once again upon the enemy after the main Battle shall be retraited into the second Battle; and then they are to be with-drawn again into the Rear, or else to be placed upon the Flanks between the Redouts. In each of the Redouts are two hundred men; they are to secure the Flanks and the Rear of the Battle: beyond these Redouts you may perceive two Ditches made, the earth thrown up in way of a Brest-work towards the Flanks of our own Troops; the breadth of them may be five or six foot: these are to be filled with Searwood, Straw, and other combustible stuff: the outmost next the enemy is first to be set on fire. The next Ditch is to be made more near to the Flanks of the Battle by eight or ten paces; in all things like the first it is to be ordered: this last is to be fired a good while after the first, so that they may endure burning the time of the fight. But a principal respect is to be had to the Wind, lest it should drive the smoke and fire upon your own Troops: in a calm day it can do no hurt to yourselves, but is very prevalent against the enemy's Horse, and will much strengthen the Redouts: beside, it will be as a Pound to keep your own men from running away.  
The Horse are ordered in five Battalia's, upon either Wing along beyond the fiery Trenches, being in each Battle five hundred Horse. The first Battle being Harquebuziers, are to charge the enemy's Horse, and the second are to relieve them or rescue them, and so are the rest; only the last Battle, being Curassiers, are to charge the enemy's Flanks whilst their Horse are in action; or if the enemy's Horse fly, than they are all of them to charge the Foot of the enemy, and also to secure their own Foot-Troops from being charged.  
In the Rear of these Horse-Troops are placed on either Wing five hundred Pikes and Muskets; these are to aid the Horse, and to line them with the Shot, if need be, or to be employed in charging the enemy's Flanks. View the following Figure.  
This kind of impaling with Redouts and fiery Trenches is to be only practised when the enemy is far stronger than yourself; so that your men cannot be spared to impale your Battle, neither is there any place of refuge to secure any part of the Battle; for if there be, then be sure to impale one of your Wings after this manner, so that the Wind may convey the smoke & sparks into the enemy's teeth, to their great annoyance.   

CHAP. XIX.  
The eighth form of imbattelling an Army, the Flanks being impaled with Horse-Pallizado's and the Rear secured by a River: it consists of five thousand Foot and one thousand Horse.  
THis eighth form of imbattelling is fittest and most proper, if the enemy assails in such a place that the distance of ground is scant, and the Rear of the Army fortified with some Moors, Ponds, Rivers, or the like places of natural strength.  
The Flanks are Pallizadoed with Horse-Pallizado's, or fortified with the Carriages, or with some Hedges or Ditches, so that a few men may be able to secure them from the enemy's Horse or Foot from taking any advantage.  
You may perceive the Battell-Flags pitched according as every Battalia is to be ranged.  
The two Forlorn Hopes are either of them consisting of 250 men, and are advanced before the main Battle above an hundred paces; they are flanked with 100 Horse.  
Likewise the main Battle consists of 2880 Foot, videlicet, in each Battalia 180 men and sixteen Battalia's.  
The Battle of succour is placed twenty paces behind the main Battle; it consists of 1040 men, there being eight several Battalia's, and each Battalia contains 130. The space or distance betwixt each of these Battalia's, from Flank to Flank, is twenty two paces, being large enough for two of the Battalia's of the main Battle to retreat into. View the Figure.  
There is also allowed for the impalement of the Flanks, to guard the Pallizadoes, 432 men; it being 32 paces from the Front to the Rear; and two Pikes and two Muskets in depth, comes to no less to be placed upon both the Flanks.  
There is also allowed 120 Shot to join with the Horse, to aid them upon all occasions, viz. on each Wing 60.  
To help Gunners, and to defend the Ordnance which is placed upon such a place of advantage, that the enemy cannot but with difficulty come at them, there is 14 men at each Platform; or there may as many as you please, be taken from the Battle of succour to guard the Ordnance, and also a quantity of Horse to aid and assist them.  
The thousand of Horse are thus disposed of; first, to Flanker the Forlorn Hopes there are 100 Next beyond the impalements upon either Flank are three Battles ranged: the first hath 200. the second, 150. and the third, 100  
Before the main Battle there are seven field-pieces placed, which are to scour the distance betwixt the two Forlorn Hopes; after they have wrought their effect, they are to be drawn through the divisions of the main Battle, and then placed before the Battle of succour; and when the main Battle is retraited into the Battle of succour, than they are to give fire again, and immediately to be drawn in the Rear of all, and there to be placed upon some hill, so that the Battle stooping, they may shoot over their heads, to disorder the enemy; or else the Battalia's must open suddenly, whereby the Ordnance shall have freedom to shoot.  
The Rear of this Army is defended by a large River, as by the foregoing Figure appeareth.   

CHAP. XX.  
A description of the ninth Figure, how to frame a Battle for Stratagem, environed with a Ditch, being very prevalent in the Plains, when the enemy predominates in Horse.  
IN this following Figure you may first observe the Ditch marked A to be six foot broad, and three foot deep; it hath on all four sides an entrance or way to sally in or out, of twenty paces broad, marked B, and are so placed to allure the enemy to enter them.  
You may likewise observe at every Passage five Battalia's, of three hundred men in each Battalia; there is a Piece of Ordnance placed behind every middle Battle; when the enemy is ready to enter any of these passages, than the middle Battle must open in the midst, dividing either half on each side of the passage, so as the Ordnance may play full in the face of the enemy: then the 400 Horse are to issue out upon the enemy, and to charge them in their disorders; for the same purpose they are placed in the midst, remote from the Foot, being divided into four Squadrons, in form of a Cross, standing ready faced towards the entrance of the passages, being 400 in each Battalia.  
The Foot are in all the Army only six thousand, each Battalia hath particularly 300 men apiece. If you have no Horse in the midst, then divide them only into eight Troops, placing them for Wings in an even Front, or on the Angleses: in so doing, the form of the Battle will be hollow, and the Battalia's that guard each passage will be but three apiece. The Figure of this discourse followeth in the next Page.  
The ninth Figure of the Battle for Stranagems.  
This may be a form of embattling very prevalent to secure a weak Army, that is compelled to fight, and hath no place of advantage to help them, but the open field and their own valours to trust unto.   

CHAP. XXI.  
A tenth form of imbattelling an Army, used by Henry the fourth of France against Duke Albertus of Austria, at his approach to raise the siege of Amiens. This Army consists of 12000 Foot and 4000 Horse.  
THis following Figure demonstrates unto your view nine Battalions, after this form marshaled: first, three of these Battalions were for the right Wing; three other for the main Battle; the other three for the left Wing.  
The first three Battalions of the right Wing are each of them flanked with Musketires containing a thousand Foot in each: before every of the said Battalions is placed nine Files of Musketires; three in the right Angle, three in the left, and three in the midst, before them; every File contains ten men in depth.  
The three Battalions for the main Battle are also flanked with Musketires, having nine Files placed before them, as the former had, only these Battalions contain as many more men as the former did, viz. two thousand in each.  
The three Battalions for the left Wing are likewise imbattelled (as the former Battles of the right Wing are) with Musketires before them; each Battalia contains a thousand men. There are also twelve field-pieces; upon each Wing there are planted six; viz. three foreright, and three Flank-wise, to annoy the enemy both in Front and Flank.  
The Horse are ranged without these, upon either Wing, somewhat oblique-wise, to encompass the enemy, being in number four thousand; and they are divided into three Battalia's; the first contains five hundred, the second three hundred, and the last two hundred.  
In the Rear of the Army was the King's Trenches strongly fortified, and guarded with three thousand Foot to defend him from the sallies of the Town, in which respect he needed no Seconds. View the Figure.   

CHAP. XXII.  
The eleventh form of imbattelling an Army, consisting of 30000 Foot, and 6000 Horse, being a most excellent strong form.  
THis subsequent Figure represents unto your view a Battle form with two Fronts or Faces: the foremost Battle is divided into eight principal Battalions, each Battalia containing nine hundred men (Pikes and Muskets) which make ninety Files, and ten deep in each. In these eight foremost Battalions are contained seven thousand and two hundred soldiers: the spaces or distances betwixt each Battalia in the Front, is four paces.  
The second Front is divided into four great Battalia's containing one thousand and eight hundred Pikes and Muskets in each, 
Note, there are four odd Files placed in the two middle Battles in the Front, the●e being five odd men in each Battle, which makes these four odd Files.  viz. one hundred and eighty Files, and ten deep: so that these four last Battalia's contain seven thousand and two hundred soldiers, as the foremost Battle did: the distance or spaces betwixt these four last Battalia's is twenty five paces.  
Likewise, the space or distance from the Front of the first Battle, unto the Front of the Battle in the Rear, is sixty paces. In the time of fight the General is to take his place before the Front of the middle Battle in the Rear; it being the place of greatest safety, and most commodious for him to view the defects, and to send his Commands about.  
These Battalions are impaled upon both the Flanks with one thousand five hundred and forty Pikes, viz. on each Flank seven hundred and seventy, they standing one hundred and ten in Breast or Rank, and seven deep.  
The Rear of the Battalia's hath four thousand seven hundred and sixteen Pikes for its impalement, they being placed but six deep in File.  
Upon the outside of the Impalement you may observe placed upon either Flank or Wing twenty four Troops of Shot in little squares; each Troop contains a hundred men: so that in both the Wings, being forty eight Troops of Shot, and a hundred in each Troop, amounts unto 4800.  
In the Front of all is placed eighteen Troops of Shot more in way of a Forlorn Hope; each Troop also consists of an hundred Shot, which amounts unto one thousand and eight hundred men; these are to disband themselves, and maintain skirmish with the enemy.  
There are four hundred Shot and five hundred Pikes to guard the Ordnance.  
There are also one thousand Pikes placed in each Wing, five hundred in a Troop; these are to aid the Horse or safeguard the Shot, either in the Wings or in the Forlorn Hope, as occasion shall be offered. Likewise there is allowed two hundred Shot and three hundred Pikes to guard the Carriages placed in the Rear.  
Lastly, there remains two hundred forty four Pikes to be employed as occasion shall offer, and necessity require.  
Now we are to observe, that when the great Ordnance upon either side have discharged, and that the enemy is approached near your Troops of Shot of the Forlorn Hope, than those Maniples of Shot which stand before the Ordnance, placed before the Battalia's in the Front, are to divide themselves into the void spaces upon either hand, so that the Ordnance may have free passage to play upon the enemy's Troop, and then the Shot may join together again.  
The Forlorn Hope is continually to be supplied with fresh Troops of Shot from the Flanks or Wings, and those Troops of the Forlorn Hope that have given fire, are to retreat betwixt the Wings of the Battle, and the Troops of Horse that are placed along by the Wings. So maintaining always the Flanks furnished, by this means they may maintain skirmish continually with fresh men, and the Battle never the less impaled.  
But after the enemy's Battle begins to approach near your own forces, than the Forlorn Hope must withdraw themselves, and the foremost Battle must bear the brunt.  
The six field-pieces placed amongst the Shot, after they have done their service, are to be drawn back into the space betwixt the two Battalia's or may be drawn into the Wings, and there may be guarded with those Troops of Shot, where they may perform excellent Service.  
But if the first main Battle should miscarry in the first encounter, so that their Battalia's be broken by the enemy, yet there are ample spaces betwixt the Battalia's of the second Battle to retreat into, and there to make head, and freshly to re-charge the enemy again: betwixt each Battalia in the Rear there must retreat two Battalia's of the Front, and upon each Flank one.  
The Troops of Horse are thus disposed; upon each side there are an hundred Horse to guard the Ordnance, which with the assistance of the Pikes and Shot, they are to secure themselves.  
Now there remains five thousand and eight hundred Horse, which are to be divided into several Battalia's: upon each Wing are to be placed two thousand and nine hundred, and they are again to be divided into three Battalia's at the least. View the Figure following, being the eleventh Figure.   

CHAP. XXIII.  
The twelfth form of imbattelling an Army consisting of 12000 Foot and 3000 Horse, partly imitating Monsieur Bellay in his military Discipline Pag. 75.  
THis form of imbattelling which followeth in this Discourse, was chiefly invented to deceive the enemy: for whereas it seemeth of narrow Front at the first view, yet the foremost Battle being retraited within the second Battle, and the Impalements upon each Flank, with the Forlorn Hopes being doubled one Rank into another, makes the Front of a far larger extent: so that the enemy having framed his Battle answerable, as he may suppose to encounter with this form, he shall find it otherwise: for this Battle will over-Wing his, and the Forlorn Hope being strengthened with Shot, and fortified with a competency of Pikes, will soon hemm in the enemies Battalia's on the Flanks, before they be aware of it; which by the help of those Troops of Curassiers, and seconded by the Carbines, will endanger to rout them.  
The order observed in Marshalling this Battle, is in this manner; first, there is on each Wing, before the Front of the main Battle, two Battalia's of Horse; each consisting of 252, which makes forty two Files, being ranged six deep; so that in the four Battles are contained 1008 Horse.  
The next is the main Battle of Foot, consisting of five Divisions; which hath in each five hundred and ten Pikes and Shot; in all the five Battalia's are contained 2550 men.  
The distance betwixt each Battalia or Division is 5 paces in breadth, and they have 51 in Rank or Breast, and 10 deep in File; the breadth of the whole Front from side to side of either impalement (the distances being added betwixt each Division) is 1560 paces broad.  
Next are three Battalia's placed 25 paces behind the first main Battle; these have contained in each of them 510, as the former had: so that the three Battalia's have 1530 soldiers in them.  
You may delude the enemy in making him believe your Forces are more than they are, by causing your second Battalia's to open their Files to their open order; and then they will seem as many men in the second Battle as is in the first.  
The Rear-Battel is likewise ordered 25 paces behind the second Battle, and that consists only of 2 Battalia's, and are placed upon the Flank, as by the Figure you may see, having a broad space to receive the two former Battles, if they should be constrained to retreat: these two last consist of 1020, viz, 510 soldiers in each; these two Rear-Battels may open their Files to their double distance, to make them seem far more than they are: but when they are ready to charge the enemy, they must fall into their order of three foot.  
The Impalements of each Flank of the Battle marked with the figures of 1 and 2, consist of 5 in Breast, & 153 in depth, so that each Wing of Impalement hath 665 Pikes.  
Likewise by the outside of the Pikes are the same quantity of Muskets ordered 5 in Breast, and 153 in depth, which amounts likewise to 665 Shot; it is marked with the figure 2. This Division of Shot is to be placed 5 paces from the Pikes: they must likewise open their Files very wide, that they may seem to equal the Front of the Battle; these must double one within another, as the main Battle shall retreat.  
Next this impalement the Forlorn Hope is placed, along by the side of it, marked with the figures 3 and 4; and these are to consist of Shot and Pikes as the figures 1 & 2 did: and first, the Shot hath 8 in Rank, and 153 in depth, so that each Wing takes up 1224 Shot; the Pikes you are to suppose, are ranked next the Shot the outside 5 paces from the Shot; they are 5 in Front or Breast, and 153 in depth, which amounts to in each, 665: these are to dilate their Files as the former.  
Beyond the Forlorn Hope are placed 700 Curassiers, ten paces from the former, as you may see at the figure 5. These are to order themselves in convenient Troops down by the ●lanks of the former.  
And 5 paces beyond these Curassiers are 300 Carbines, which must orderly range themselves in convenient Troops, as at the figure 6.  
In the Rear are four strong Redouts, well Pallizadoed, with field-pieces in them; in each several Redout there are one hundred and fifty soldiers.  
The Shot belonging to the main Battle are placed before the Pikes to shelter them, and to hide the Ordnance amongst them. When the enemy are within distance, than those Files of Shot which stand before the Ordnance are to divide themselves upon either hand, so that the Ordnance may suddenly give a volley upon the enemy's Troops; and when they have done their best, they are to be drawn into the Rear of the Battle. View the Figure following.   

CHAP. XXIIII.  
A form of imbattelling containing 15000 Foot, and 2000 Horse, with twenty field-pieces, the Pikes girdled with two Ranks of Musketires round about; the residue of the Shot are ordered in 188 Maniples.  
IN this form of imbattelling you may perceive the Pikes to be drawn into twenty four Divisions, each Division or Battalia containing three hundred soldiers, with convenient distances betwixt them. They are first impaled, or girdled round under the Pikes with one hundred and eighty Shot, which makes two Ranks: these are to give fire upon their knees, if the enemy's Horse should offer to charge the Battle of Pikes: at a convenient distance beyond this girdling, all the residue of the Shot are ranged in small Maniples, of thirty in each. Before the Front of Pikes you see twenty two Maniples of Shot, which are to disband themselves, and give fire upon the enemy, and are to be supplied from those Maniples placed in the Wings.  
These Maniples of Shot are thus ordered, for two reasons: For in the first place, the enemy cannot possibly assault the body of Pikes, but these Maniples of Shot are ready to give fire upon them: and the Pikes are so sheltered and shadowed from the enemy, that they cannot receive any damage: for indeed, so long as the Pikes stand firm, although the Shot should be routed, yet it cannot be said the Field is won; for the whole strength of an Army consists in the Pikes.  
Secondly, these Maniples may very easily be drawn on a sudden into greater Divisions, and as occasion shall be offered, may be joined with the Pikes; and the Pikes suddenly drawn into any form the General shall conceive best of; they being ordered in apt Divisions, with convenient distances betwixt each Battalia for that purpose. And if so be this Battle be pitched in such an advantageous ground that the enemy's Horse may not have too much freedom to wrong the Shot, this form, questionless, is very prevalent. Wherefore these Shot ought to have each man his Swines-Pike at his girdle, to stick down against the Horse: upon each corner of the Impalement is placed a Maniple of fifty Musketires. The Horse upon the out-Wings of the Shot are ranged in three grand Battalia's, one a good distance before the other: in the foremost is three hundred Harquebuziers; in the second, five hundred Carbines; and in the last, two hundred Curassiers: these upon occasion may march up together, and make one entire Front.  
The Ordnance are guarded upon each Wing with three hundred and fifty Shot, and one hundred and fifty Pikes: These Ordnance are placed upon places of advantage, to scour the enemy in what manner soever he shall make his approaches.  
It would be too tedious to discourse of the sundry forms this or any other form of Battle may be translated into: but the ingenious soldier, like that famous General Pyrrhus, must by his ingenuity frame in his imagination all kind of forms which may suit with the place they are to be fought in, and may be most prevalent against the enemy he hath to deal withal. But this you must take for a Maxim, as Sr. Francis Bacon well observed (in his advancement of Learning) that no massy body can possibly be moved without a kind of trepidation; and it holds good in this: for it is very dangerous to move or alter a form of Battle, not only to avoid fear, but confusion. Yet I confess diverse Generals have done it, as Caesar cast his form of imbattelling into a halfmoon: but extremity drove him unto it. The Figure hereof followeth upon the next Page.  
For otherwise, if a General orders his men in one kind of form to delude his enemy, and to cause him to order his Battle thereafter, yet he must be sure to Metamorphize it into that form he intends, before the enemy draws to near, least confusion follow.  
To avoid tediousness, these forms before demonstrated shall suffice. In the next Chapter following I shall further discourse of the nature of small divisions of Shot, and of diverse circumstances belonging to them, and afterwards I shall further discourse of the nature of Battles.   

CHAP. XXV.  
The use of small Maniples of Shot, with a general discourse of the lightarmed.  
IN the precedent descriptions of Imbattelling, 〈◊〉 may perceive two or three several forms of Battles where the S●●●t are ordered in small Troops by themselves; wherefore although it be not ordinary, yet I shall show the good use of them, by paralleling them with the lightarmed used in former ages, what strange conquests have been gained by them, as Historians have observed; wherefore we must first compare the body of an Army to the body of a Man that is compact of several parts, of which some parts are of more use than other; some parts being able to perform their function without the help of the other parts, and again some, except the other parts help, can do nothing to purpose of themselves.  
The armed are the strength of the Battle, and are the refuge for the rest in extremity; wherefore our Generals in this latter age join the Shot on each Wing of the Pikes for their safety, 
Aelian pag 65 cap. 17. Xenoph. Cyro●. lib. 7. cap. 188.  and in this kind they may work great effects, as Elian in his Tactics learnedly discusses; and Xenophon says, let there be never so many lightarmed, yet dare they not stand and abide the assault of a few armed; in which respect a place fit hath been sought for their service, to secure them from the access of the Horse, or of the enemy armed; wherefore Generals in former ages placed them sometimes behind their Phalange of Pikes, or else in the Wings betwixt the Horse and the armed Pikes, as these figures by me described shows; or if they skirmished loose before the Front, and chanced to be oppressed with the enemy, than they were to retreat into the intervals and so conveyed themselves behind the Phalange in safety: and as Leo reports, 
Leo c. 14. sect. 105.  the securing of the lightarmed in some place of strength either natural or artificial, will be most prevalent and advantageous; as namely some strong inclosiers being well, Hedged and Ditched, Rocks or steepy Hills, or the banks of Rivers or the like.  
How did the Prince of Wales, being to fight with the whole power of France at Poytiers, fortify his lightarmed, and safeguarded them with Hedges and Ditches, and other Strengths; so that the French Horse finding no access to disorder them, were overwhelmed with their storms of Shot, which those Maniples so placed, showered upon them?  
At the Battle of Agincourt there were two thousand English Shot placed in a Meadow fenced with a deep Ditch, 
Henry the fifth at the Battle of Agincourt.  from whence they so galled the French, which occasioned the Victory. The residue of the Shot had Stakes armed with iron pikes, which preserved them from the fury of the Chivalry, by which means they gained that famous Victory. By this you may see, that lightarmed soldiers, although they be divided from the body of Pikes, may be very efficacious to gain a Victory.  
Further, there is no enticing or training an enemy from his place of advantage, but by small Troops of Shot, which are to make a bravado, to toll them into some place of advantage: as Alexander did practise against the Tryballs, who had hid themselves in Woods; He sent his lightarmed from the body of his Pikes, and trained out the Barbarians; they being shrewdly wounded with their Shot in the Woods, threw themselves out to fall upon the Archers: Alexander immediately commands Philotus with the Horse of upper Macedonia to charge the enemies right Wing, upon which part they cast themselves out farthest; and Heraclides and Sopolis with the Horse of Boeotia, and Amphipolis the left; he having roughly charged them, put the Tryballs to flight, and vanquished them.  
Moreover, 
Leo cap. 14. sect. 104.  it is Leo his own advice; if the Army hath lightarmed men enough, (namely Shot) let them (saith he) before the Army joins, send their Shot furiously at the enemy; 
How the Shot ought to be used in the time of giving Battle.  but after the fight of the armed is begun, then pay their Flanks with your missive weapons; that at once both their Flanks may be assaulted. And indeed, in all ages, the Shot were the first that did begin the Battle, and for the most part, the chiefest means to gain victory at last.  
Further, the nature of Shot is to wound afar off. Wherefore a General, if he desires not to come near to join Battle, he may annoy his enemy afar off, without endangering his own forces; 
Liv. decad. 4. lib. 8. 1ST  as Livy makes mention of Cn. Manlius Volso, he warring against the Gallogrecians that fled into the mountains, attending the Romans coming, and there defending themselves by the advantage of the place; he prepared great plenty of Darters, Archers, and Slingers, and leaving his Legionary soldiers behind, led his lightarmed against the enemy, that possessed certain straits by which his Army must of necessity pass; after a small skirmish, the Gallogrecians being not sufficiently armed to defend the fury of their Shot, the lightarmed of the Romans forced the Passage, and followed them to their Camp; the Legionary soldiers being marched unto them for their aid, they won the Camp also.  
Of how much more efficacy are our Muskets at this day to perform greater achievements, if they be skilfully marshaled? wherefore upon many occasions, our Shot may be disjoined from the armed Pikes, and placed according to the wisdom of the General. For, as formerly I have said, so long as the body of Pikes stands in array, and remains steadfast in good order, no victory can be gotten against it: but if the Pikes should be dis-banded or disjointed from their proper place, there is nought else but an overthrow to be expected.  
Wherefore it cannot choose but be very good to place Shot before the Battalia's of Pikes, to shelter them; as you may see the like in some of those Battles which I have described: where the pricks stand for Musketires, and certain field-pieces placed amongst them to annoy the enemy. But this is best to be done when the enemy is a good distance from you; otherwise it may be hurtful: for when the enemy is ready to come to handy blows, than the Battalia's of Pikes must stand and endure the showering Shot of the lightarmed, and the Shot must shelter themselves amongst the Pikes.  
You may further observe the strange Conquests which have been achieved by certain Maniples of Shot which have been employed against the body of the Pikes, as appears by the example of the Egyptians in Crassus his Battle; who after the defait of part of his Army, 
Xenoph. Cyro ●●. 7. 178.  yet he would not yield to King Cyrus, although in all likelihood he had got the victory: wherefore Cyrus was first constrained to charge the Rear of their Battalia's of Pikes with his Horse, and being not able to break them, he had no way to perfect his Conquest, but by drawing his lightarmed or Shot, to direct their Volleys at them; the Egyptians being wounded, and many soldiers lost, they were constrained to yield themselves to the mercy of the enemy. By this you see that Maniples of Shot are very prevalent.  
But it may be objected, that lightarmed (as the Shot) of themselves are not able to repulse the Horse, but are subject to their fury, unless they be strengthened with Pikes, or have some convenient place of retreat, for their refuge and safety; as by the example of Crassus in Parthia, 
Plutarch in Crasso.  how the lightarmed were beaten in by the Parthian Horse, and through their discomfiture the Battalias of Pikes were likewise disheartened. And likewise Antony's retreat out of Persia; his lightarmed were constrained to shroud themselves from the Persian Horse within the Phalange of the armed.  
This Objection is true and undeniable; for the Shot of themselves are too weak for to resist the Horse, unless the wisdom of the General place them in such places of advantage in which they might secure themselves; or as in former times they did use to line their Horse-Troops with Shot, and then they wrought wonders: for it is impossible the enemy's Horse being so charged, 
Hir●ius de Be●● Afr●●.  should resist both: as an Historian reporteth of Caesar, that he having but a small number of Horse, and his Foot-Troops as few, was set upon by his enemy, who had lined his Horse-Troops with lightarmed Numidians: when the soldiers of Caesar advanced forwards to charge them, the enemy's Horse galloped away, and the Foot that lined them stood fast, and gave their Volleys at them, until their Horse, with a full Career, returned to their rescue: this kind of fight did much perplex Caesar, and would have confounded him, had he not retraited to the next hills from the fury of the enemy's Horse.  
Certainly there is no absolute way to secure the body of Pikes, but by impaling them with a quantity of Shot: for whereas in former ages they used Lances, and then the Pikes could make their parties good with them. But in these our days, Pistols, Carbines, and Harquebusses being in use, the Horse-Troops may advance up to the Pikes, and discharge upon them, and so fall off again in safety, were it not for the placing of Musketires about them.  
It may be further objected, that the lightarmed are not able to grapple with the armed Pikes, but that they will soon come within their Shot, and so confound them having spent their breath and powder.  
To this I answer, There is no fear of any damage the Pikes can do to the Shot of themselves, without the aid of Horse; because the lightarmed are nimble and quick, and seeking always advantage by changing of ground, whereby they cannot possibly be forced by the armed Foot, they being wearied and laden with their heavy Corslets and Pikes: neither can they make any great speed to come up to handie-blowes with the Shot, but they must run themselves into ruin by disorder. Wherefore the Shot need fear nothing but the Horse to trouble them. And by the way, it is to be supposed, the Horse are to be employed against their adversaries Troops, and shall not be at all turns at freedom to attend the excursions and dis-bandings of the Shot, but that the Shot will find time and fitting opportunity to work their effects, either against the Foot or Horse of their enemies, unless their own Troops serve them as Pompey's did at the Battle of Pharsalia, 
Lucan's Pharsalia.  who fled before they received a charge from Caesar's Troops.  
I may well compare a pitched Battle to a game at Irish; each Gamester must have a special eye, not only of his own, but of the adverse Tables, how he disposeth his men, what hits may be given, and how to bring home your own men in safety; and if a fore game cannot possibly be attained, than the wise Gamesters seek by policy to disband their men so that they may be hit, which in the winding up many times turns the wheel of Fortune, so that he that had lost, in all likelihood, hath now gained an aftergame beyond relief: for as in this game there are two principal things which attend the winner, viz. Cunning in handling his Dice, and Judgement in placing his men: so it is in a well fought Battle to achieve the victory. For I must compare Shot to the Dice, which by their cunning and quick discharge, and the multiplicity of volleys that one side gives more than the other, is for the most part a principal cause of victory. Wherefore, where most Shot are, or may be brought to fight, there is the most likelihood of success.  
What wonderful effects hath Shot wrought by discovering of suspected places, and by laying of Ambushcadoes? there being two kinds of Ambushments; as first, those that are cunningly laid to endamage the enemy's Battle in time of fight, which are to be compounded both of Pikes and Shot, and many times Horse are joined with them. These have fallen upon the Flanks or Rear of the enemy's Troops, and have much dismayed them: Or such Ambushes as are laid in Woods, Mountains, Forests, Rocks, Banks of Rivers, Caves, hollow Pits, Hills, deep Ways, and the like; these are usually either Muskets or Firelocks, and are fittest for that service; because their quickness and expedition giveth them advantage to assail their enemies, although the ground be never so unequal.  
And lastly, for the stopping guarding, or securing any Passage which the enemy may take for his advantage, if it be of any far distance from the Army, there are none so fit as the lightarmed (unless you have some Troops of Dragon's) for they may soon travel a long way riding behind the Horsemen, which most usually are sent with them for their succour: these may with far more speed and ease be conveyed than the Pikes, in regard their Arms are more cumbersome, and cannot but make great noise by their clattering, whereby the design may be discovered.  
Wherefore let us conclude, that Shot are the principal members (as the arms are to the body) of an Army, if they be wisely and advantageously placed and made use of.  
And to conclude this Chapter with the advice of Monsieur la Noüe: those Battles (saith he) that dare stand the third charge of the enemy, 
La No●e Pag. 380.  they shall never need to fear the rest; for he that first flieth is surest to perish; for then every cowardly Cur will run after, and worrye a whole flock of Sheep, which so long as they face him, and keep their standings, dares do nought but bark at them. And as formerly I have said, that at the famous Battle of Dreux a Battalia of valiant Swissers, which stood to their tackling, after all the rest of their Army was routed, taking their opportunity, charged their enemy, and gained the victory. And thus much concerning this subject, of the use and commodity of Maniples of Shot: the next Chapter shall more largely treat of all kinds of Battles, with such observations as the famous Generals in former ages observed as most advantageous.   

CHAP. XXVI.  
Divers and several Observations of the ancient Grecians in framing of Battles, with several uses and circumstances belonging to them: as also the order and rules, by going paces to know any seat or piece of ground, how to embattle either Horse or Foot thereon according to the proportion thereof.  
I Having formerly treated of diverse things considerable, both before and after Battle, and having described both by Word and Figure, several Forms: In this Chapter I intent to discourse more fully of the Nature of framing of Battles, with several uses and circumstances belonging unto them. And by the way, I shall touch such kind of Battles as the Ancients did frame for advantage to oppose one the other. And although (in this later age) experience hath found out stranger weapons than former ages were acquainted with, as the Musket and great Ordnance, and we have rejected the ancient Bows and Bills, whose form to embattle them, was far different from ours; yet we must retain their policy in distinguishing which form of Battle is most prevalent to oppose any kind of Figure that shall be by the enemy marshaled against us.  
Wherefore, first, take special observation, that there is no kind of imbattelling, but upon some special occasion, may be suddenly reduced and framed, into another form; and so haply from one form into diverse. Now the learned General is not to seek his principal skill when he should make use of it: and (as before I have said) if I should discourse of these several ways of reducing one form into another, it would deserve a Treatise by itself. Wherefore let us be content to be as brief as the subject shall permit, in discoursing of the advantages one kind of form of Imbattelling may have of another.  
Now both reason and experience tells us, that if a Battle be so framed that it may over-Front the enemies, 
Pag. 149. cap. 50.  there is great advantage in it, as Aelian in his Tactics doth plainly show: 
The over-Fronting Battle is termed by the Grecians, Hyperphalanges.  and this may be performed two ways especially: as first, if the breadth of the foremost or main Battle extends its Wings wider than the enemies; than it is easy either for the body of the main Battle to retreat orderly, and the two Wings to stand firm, whereby the enemy may be entrapped unawares: or otherwise, the Wings advancing forward; and this likewise may be two ways performed: either by having the outmost Maniples of the Wings double, the depth in File to the Body, which being advanced forwards towards the Flanks of the enemy, there will be ten Ranks before the Body, which may charge the enemy upon the Flanks: or else being of an even depth with the Body, the File-leader of the outmost File of each Wing is to advance a distance before the File-leader of the second File, and so the second before third, and the like of the rest of the Files inwards, towards the Body of the Battle, which causeth them to stand in apt form to charge the enemy's Flanks. So that reason shows, the charging an enemy in Front and Flank is odds, two to one.  
A second odds the Grecians found out, 
The overwinging Battle is termed of the Grecians, Hyperkerasis.  by framing their Battle called Hyperkerasis, and this only differs from the former, in that they advance forwards only but one Wing, which chargeth the enemy upon the Flank; and this is thus performed in a double respect, either because there is a want of men to extend the Front of the Battle in such breadth, as that they may over-Front them on both the Wings; or haply the situation will not permit them. But this, questionless, is a great advantage, and ought not to be neglected, if it possibly may be put in execution. These two are the only forms for advantage against a Battle merely of one Front.  
A third odds the Grecians found out; 
The Battle called 〈…〉  wherefore they invented a Battle accordingly, and termed it the Cyrte, it being a convex Battle: the intent of it was to delude the enemy: for it made a semblance of small Forces, by reason of the convexity of the Figure, it being a Maxim in Philosophy, that all round things seem far less than they are in compass; but being extended in length, they prove as much more as they seemed to be; because the rotundity of the forepart obscureth the exterior from the eye. And indeed it is the perfection of skill in a General, to have so much art in imbattelling, that he shall make show but of few Forces, but bring as many more hands to fight.  
A fourth odds the Grecians found out, 
The Battle termed Epicampios.  which was a form of imbattelling they termed Epicampios; and this was to oppose the former deluding form, it being a figure most apt to oppose the same: for as the former was a convex Battle, this was a concave; and no less deception to the eye, in regard the circumduction of the Front is like an embowing; for this Figure opening itself, will easily receive the orball form of the other into its concavity; or otherwise dilating itself on either Wing, the Front of it will equalise the former Battle in all respects. And this latter they made use of to entrap the Battle called the Horsemans' rhomb; for soon they would wrap them into their void space of their Front, as they charged them, and so galling them upon all sides, soon vanquish them.  
A fifth advantage they found out, 
The Battle called Amphistomus.  to oppose their enemy that charged them in the Front and Rear at once. Wherefore they framed their Battle sixteen deep in File: so that the half Files to the Rear did but face about, and they were ready to entertain the enemy both ways at their first approach; and this they termed the Phalange Amphistomus, having respect to the two Fronts: this kind of form was principally to entertain the charge of Horse.  
A sixth form of imbattelling they invented, which they termed Antistomus, and this did not much differ from the former; 
The Battle called Antistomus.  only this receives the charge upon either Flank, and the former upon the Front and Rear.  
A seventh form of imbattelling they invented, 
The Battle termed Diphalange Antistomus.  very advantageous to be opposed against the Horse-Battell, called the Wedge, and this they termed Diphalange Antistomus. The manner of the Battle called the Horsemans' Wedge, was to charge the Foot in the Front with such fury, that they would pierce and enter the most strong resistance: for the prevention thereof, they placed the ablest men in their middlemost Files; so that when the Horse charged them, each Flank divided itself by the middlemost File, faceing each towards other, and so made a lane for those Horses to pass betwixt them without any damage to themselves; yet they galled the Horse on both sides in their violent passage; the Foot standing on either side like two walls faceing inwards, gave them a fruitless passage: for otherwise a square Battle of Pikes were not able to resist the fury of this wedge-Battell.  
The eighth form of imbattelling which they invented, 
The Battle termed Diaphalange Peristomus.  was of great advantage to be opposed against the square Battle; and this they termed Diaphalange peristomus: the manner of it was thus. The two Wings opened themselves like a pair of Compasses, or otherwise dividing themselves into such a sufficient distance, as they might entrap and enclose the square Battle betwixt them. The square form of Battle fearing to be enclosed betwixt them, transform themselves into two marching Phalanges; and being thus divided, they direct one against the right, the other against the left Wing of the enemy.  
Likewise, if they did expect a charge upon both their Flanks, than they wisely provided for it; for they divided their Troops into two Phalanges, one sequenting the other; the first had all the Leaders in a right-hand deduction, and the following Phalange in a lefthand deduction: one having their Commanders in the right Flank, and the other in the left Flank: this form of imbattelling they termed Heterostomos: 
The Battle called Heterostomos, used upon a March.  that is when the Phalange proceedeth in a Wing, not by File but by Rank. These kind of Phalanges may march in a double, treble, or quadruple side, according to the place and part suspected, where the enemy should fall on. These deductions or Paragogies, if they begin the fight in Flank, do make their Front or length double to their depth: this last they invented to teach their soldiers to receive heedfully the charge on all parts; and it was used most upon a March: for accordingly they demeaned themselves as they understood the enemy's manner of approaching: for if the enemy marched his Army in a right deduction, viz. when the March extendeth itself out into a Wing, having the depth much exceeding the length; Then they invented another form of Battle which was advantageous to be opposed against the former; 
The Battle called Coelembolos, or hollow Wedge.  and they termed it Coelembolos or hollow wedge-Battell; and their framing of it was after this manner: viz. when the Antistomos Diphalange or double Phalange dis-joyneth and divideth the Wings in the Front; the Rear being still closed in manner of the letter V, the advantage is this; when the enemy approacheth with his right induction and chargeth at the midst of the aforesaid Battle, it suddenly opens its Front in the midst as before is demonstrated, and frustrates the charge of the enemy's Front, clasping them in, and circumventing the flanks of the enemies right induction.  
Then to prevent this great advantage; 
The Battle termed Triphalange.  they devised another form of Imbattelling which should over-march this; and they termed it a Triphalange, or treble Phalange. The manner of framing it was thus; they divided their forces into three Phalanges; two of them marching up in an even Front: But having both in their Front and Rear as large a division betwixt them as the Front of the Battle Coelembolos or hollow wedge-Battell; these two Phalanges charge the two Wings of the Coelembolos, and the third Phalange standeth with its Front even at the Rear of the two former Phalanges, ready to advance up in the space betwixt them; this last waiteth only for a time of advantage to give an onset, and they termed it the forbearing Phalange; this questionless, hath much advantage of the former.  
Lastly they invented a form of imbattelling called Phalagiophalange, 
The Battle called of the Greeks Phalagiophalange.  which they made use of to oppose the Horse-Battell termed Hetromekes, or the Hearse, of Horse; this Herse-Battell had the depth double to the length or breadth, and was profitable in many respects: for seeming to carry so few in so small a breadth, it deceiveth the enemy; and it did easily break the force of the Foot, with the thickness and strength of the imbattelling; and it might be led through strait passages without perceiving.  
The Foot-Battell before named which was to encounter with this Horse-Battell, did extend its Front very wide, and was very slender in depth; So that when the Horse did charge them, they could do no great damage if they broke through the midst of them: for there could nothing be lost but a little of the depth; the fury of the Horse could not be resisted by the multitude of Foot; but running through the midst of them, they spoiled some few men, and immediately were carried through them into the open field: and for this cause was the length much exceeding the depth. And now of latter days our modern Commanders have thought square forms of Battalia's to be fittest, and most proper and easy to be reduced into any other form.  
These examples of the Grecian Generals shall suffice to give a taste and light to the ingenious soldier how he may best contrive any form of imbattelling into what other form he pleaseth that may seem advantageous to entrap an enemy: and indeed, this aught to be the study of all Generals and Commanders, to have at their fingers ends a form of imbattelling that shall not only oppose, but be peculiar for advantage against any form of Battle the enemy shall be able to marshal. In the next Chapter I shall speak of such Orders and Rules which are to be used in pacing of ground, whereby may be known how to embattle an Army thereupon, be they either Horse or Foot.   

CHAP. XXVII.  
The Order and Rules which are to be observed by going paces to know any state or piece of ground how to embattle either Horse or Foot thereon, according to the proportion thereof.  
NOW for conclusion of this tedious Work which I have taken in hand to finish; There now only remains to speak of the Orders and Rules which are to be used by a Commander in pacing of ground, whereby may be known how to embattle his men thereupon, whether they be Horse or Foot, according to the proportion of the same, which by Arithmetical Rules are to be written.  
Wherefore it is necessary that the skilful Commander do acquaint himself with pacing the measure called the Geometrical pace; it contains five foot of length, and every foot is divided into twelve inches: this being often practised by ordinary going paces, whereby may be known how many steps make this pace after five foot to it: This being observed, it will prove very easy to know how many men may be imbattelled upon such a quantity of ground, or what quantity of Horse, or both, it being presupposed, they are not ignorant what due proportions and order is to be allowed to the said Men and Horse. Wherefore it being usual to allow to every Pikeman standing in form of Battle, three foot of ground in breadth, and seven foot of ground in depth; that is to say, three foot before him, three foot for behind him, and one foot of ground for his own station.  
Likewise for every Horse there is to be allowed five foot for breadth, ten foot for depth.  
Wherefore for example's sake, let us further suppose that we are constrained to make choice of a piece of ground to embattle our Army upon, containing in breadth four hundred and eight going paces, which after the rate of two going paces to one Geometrical pace (containing five foot) do make two hundred and four paces Geometrical.  
Likewise this piece of ground contains in depth one hundred seventy eight going paces, which makes eighty nine Geometrical paces, as by this subsequent Figure plainly appears.  
Now to know how many Battalia's may be placed a breast or breadth in the foremost main Battle, and how many in the Battle of succour, and how many in the Rear-Battell.  
Next we are to consider the distances or spaces which are to be left betwixt each Battalia as they stand in Breast, and also the distances or spaces of ground betwixt the Rear of the main Battle and the Front of the Battle of succour, and also betwixt the Rear of the Battle of succour, and the Front of the Rear-Battell.  
Then next is to be considered what quantity of men is sufficient to impale this piece of ground for the defence of the Foot from the enemy's Horse.  
Lastly, there is to be considered what quantity of Horse may conveniently be ranged upon the Flanks or Wings of this Battle. Wherefore observe, the distance betwixt the Battalia's is ten foot; the ground each soldier occupies in Breast is three foot, and in depth seven foot: The distance betwixt the Rear of the main Battle and the Front of the second Battle is at least twenty paces. The distance betwixt the Flanks of the Foot-Battell and the Horse is twenty paces at the least.  
The ground each Horse occupies in Rank or Breast is five foot, and in depth ten foot.  
Now having past the ground as aforesaid, and as this precedent Figure demonstrates; you are in the next place to bring those paces into feet: which you may do by multiplying the said paces by 5, and the product is 1020; then this 1020 feet being divided by 3 (which is the just distance each soldier takes for his station in Rank or Breast) the product is 340 men in Rank, for the Front of the main Battle.  
The ground being likewise eighty nine paces deep, there may be ranged three Battles one behind another, viz. the main Battle, and twenty paces behind that the Battle of succour is to be placed; and twenty paces behind the Battle of succour the Rear-Battell is to be placed: and lastly there is seven paces allowed for the Carriages to be placed in.  
The Battles are ranged but ten men in depth: Wherefore observe that you are to multiply 10 by 7 (for so many feet is allowed to each soldier to occupy his Arms in) the product is 70 feet: this 70 being again divided by 5 (for so many feet go to a Geometrical pace) the quotient will be 14 paces; and so many paces ten men occupy in depth or File.  
Next you must observe the Battle of succour is ranged twenty paces behind the former, and is likewise ten deep in File, which takes up as much ground as the former did: the Rear-Battell likewise is twenty paces behind the second Battle, and takes up as much ground as the former did in depth. And lastly, the seven paces of ground for the placing of the Carriages, being added to the former distances, make just eighty nine paces, which is the depth of the field.  
Now for the Impaling of this Battle both in Flanks and Rear, we are first to consider the quantity of paces the Flanks are in depth, which we find to be eighty nine; this being multiplied by 5, the product will be 445 feet; this being divided by 3, the quotient will be 148 and a little odd; this will impale one Rank down the side of the Flank of this Battle.  
And if you would have the impalement to consist of seven Ranks, then multiply the 148 by 7, and the product will be 1036: so many men must be employed to impale one of the Flanks seven deep: then again multiply 1036 by 2, and there will arise 2072 men, the just number to impale both the Flanks with seven Ranks of Pikes and Shot.  
The Rear of this Battle is 143 paces in breadth from the inmost Flanks of each impalement of the Wings: this 143 must be brought into feet by multiplying it by 5, which amounts to 715 feet; this 715 being likewise divided by the quantity of ground each soldier takes in Breast or Rank, being 3 foot, the quotient is 238 and one odd; this being multiplied again by 7 (for so many Ranks they must be in depth) the quotient will be (adding the 7 odd men) 1673: For so many men the Rear will take up to impale it with seven Ranks.  
Now in regard it is at the General's pleasure to order his form of imbattelling after what manner he sees best: therefore to show you a more plain example of this former discourse, let us suppose our strength of Foot to be 8000 Pikes and Shot, and 300 Horse, and that the space of ground before specified, is the field wherein I must order this Battle. And seeing it is the General's pleasure to divide the main Battle (in regard of the straightness of the ground) into three grand Battalia's, distinguished by the name of the right Wing, the Battle, and the left Wing: or Van, Battle, and Rear-ward.  
These grand Battalia's are to be divided into lesser Battalia's or Squadrons; as namely, the right Wing into two Squadrons, the Battle into four, and the left Wing into two; for the straightness of ground will not admit of more.  
The distances betwixt these Battalia's or Squadrons must be understood; as namely, betwixt the two Squadrons of either Wing is two paces distance, for the Shot to fall off into the Rear.  
The distance likewise betwixt the two Wings, and the Battle must be wider than the former, to distinguish betwixt them, which you may suppose to be three paces. The distance likewise betwixt the four Squadrons that the Battle is composed of, hath the same distance of two paces betwixt each, for the Shot to fall off into the Rear, as the Wings had.  
Betwixt the outmost File of each Wing, and the Impalement is likewise two paces; in both, four. Also the ground which the Impalement occupies being seven Ranks, is nine paces and odd feet; so that the ground which both the Impalements on each side takes up, comes to nineteen paces, adding thereto the odd feet.  
Betwixt the Impalement and the Horse upon the right Wing, is ten paces: also the distance betwixt the left Wing and the Horse, is likewise ten paces.  
The Space of ground the Horse takes up for their station, they being ranged but ten in Rank or Breast, is ten paces, allowing five foot for every Horse: upon both Flanks they take up twenty paces; and the space for their falling off, when they have discharged, must be one pace at least, on both the Wings two paces.  
Now these distances being accounted and summed up together, we may presently see how many soldiers may be placed in Rank or Breast in the foremost main Battle; the ground being but 204 paces broad. You having taken a survey of the distances betwixt each Squadron or Battalia, with the ground the Impalement of Shot and Pikes takes up, and the space between the Impalement and the Horse, with the ground the Horse takes up for their stations; you shall find it to be 81 paces, (being the nearest distances that possibly can be allowed, in regard of the narrowness of the ground). Now if you deduct 81 paces from 204, (which is the breadth of the ground) there will remain 123 paces, for to place their foremost main Battle in.  
These 123 paces being brought into feet by multiplying them by 5; the product will be 615. This again being divided by 3, (being the space each soldier takes to use his Arms in) the quotient shows that 205 men may stand in Rank or Breast in the foremost main Battle. This 205 being also multiplied by 10 (for so many men each File must have in depth) the product shows that the main Battle must consist of 2050 soldiers. These 2050 soldiers being divided by 8, (being the number of Battalia's in the main Battle) the quotient doth show there is 256 in each Battalia; only two odd men are to be joined with 30 Soldiers more, and to be distributed amongst the 8 Battalia's, viz. four men in each Battalia, to make the Files even, so that then there will be in each Battalia 260 soldiers, as the Figure demonstrates.  
Now it is to be supposed that there is depth enough in this piece of ground to embattle two such Battles more, one in the Rear of another, and may be allowed 20 paces in distance betwixt each Battle; and 7 paces in depth beside, for the Carriages to be placed in, as I shall show you.  
Wherefore observe, the foremost Battle hath ten men deep in File: this 10 must be multiplied by 7 (the space of ground each soldier occupyeth with his weapons before and behind him) and the product amounts to 70 foot; the two next Battles being of the same depth in file, takes up 210 foot of ground. To bring this into paces, you must divide the 210 by 5, (for so many foot goes to a pace) and the quotient will show you it to be 42 paces, these three Battles take up in depth: then to this 42 paces you must add the distance of 40 paces, which the two Battles towards the Rear are allowed them between the Rear of one Battle and the Front of the other, and 7 paces for the Carriage to be placed in, and you shall find the 89 paces in depth of ground just taken up.  
In the next place you may observe, that the second Battle (which is called the Battle of succour, and is placed 20 paces behind the foremost or main Battle) is divided into three grand Battalia's having in each Battalia 340 men, viz. in all three 1020: and are so placed with convenient distances for the foremost Battalia's to retreat between them; it being supposed that many of them will be slain before they be driven to make a retreat, whereby those distances will easily contain them.  
In the Rear Battle there is only 800 which are divided into two grand Battalia's of 400 in each, with a large space for the former Battles to retreat into.  
The Impalements, as before is showed, hath in the Rear 1633, and upon each Flank 1036; viz. in both Flanks 2072. All these being summed up together, you shall find 7605 men placed in all the Battalia's with the Impalement.  
Lastly, there remains 400 wanting five men, which may be employed to line the Horse, or to surprise the enemy's Ordnance, or for what other purposes the General shall think fit. Thus you see 8000 men marshaled in Battalia upon this piece of ground.  
The Horse are 300, divided into six Troops; viz. upon each Flank three Troops, and in each Troop 50 Horse; as before is showed.  
If you desire to know how many Horse may be ranged a Breast in Battalia upon this piece of ground; by the precedent Rule, you cannot err. And for explaining what hath been discoursed of, I hold it not amiss to exemplify it by Figure, as followeth.  

A Table, demonstrating the quantity of paces of Ground which any number of Soldiers, be they Foot or Horse, shall occupy for their stations, in Rank or Breast; whereby may be known how many men or Horse may be placed in single Rank or length, in the foremost Battle. And being in File 10 deep, the just number of them is likewise described; or the Horse 6 deep in File, the true number of them is to be known as followeth.  Paces Geometrical. The Soldiers standing in Breast or Rank. 10 deep in File. The number of Soldiers so placed. The Horse standing in Breast or Rank. Horse 6 deep in File. The number of Horse so placed. 
The use of this Table is described in the latter end of it.  3 5 10 50 3 6 18 6 10 10 100 6 6 36 9 15 10 150 9 6 54 12 20 10 200 12 6 72 15 25 10 250 15 6 90 18 30 10 300 18 6 108 21 35 10 350 21 6 126 24 40 10 400 24 6 144 27 45 10 450 27 6 162 30 50 10 500 30 6 180 33 55 10 550 33 6 198 36 60 10 600 36 6 216 39 65 10 650 39 6 234 42 70 10 700 42 6 252 45 75 10 750 45 6 270 48 80 10 800 48 6 288 51 85 10 850 51 6 306 54 90 10 900 54 6 324 57 95 10 950 57 6 342 60 100 10 1000 60 6 360 63 105 10 1050 63 6 378 66 110 10 1100 66 6 396 69 115 10 1150 69 6 414 72 120 10 1200 72 6 432 75 125 10 1250 75 6 450 78 130 10 1300 78 6 468 81 135 10 1350 81 6 486 84 140 10 1400 84 6 504 87 145 10 1450 87 6 522 90 150 10 1500 90 6 540 93 155 10 1550 93 6 558 96 160 10 1600 96 6 576 99 165 10 1650 99 6 594 102 170 10 1700 102 6 612 105 175 10 1750 105 6 630 108 180 10 1800 108 6 648 111 185 10 1850 111 6 666 114 190 10 1900 114 6 684 117 195 10 1950 117 6 702 120 200 10 20●0 120 6 720 123 205 10 205● 123 6 738 126 210 10 2100 126 6 756 129 215 10 215● 129 6 774 132 220 10 2200 13● 6 792 135 225 10 2250 135 6 810 138 230 10 2300 138 6 828 141 235 10 2350 141 6 846 144 240 10 2400 144 6 864 147 245 10 2450 147 6 882 150 250 10 2500 150 6 900 153 255 10 2550 153 6 918 156 260 10 2600 156 6 936 159 265 10 2650 159 6 954 162 270 10 2700 162 6 972 165 275 10 2750 165 6 99● 168 280 10 2800 168 6 1008 171 285 10 285● 171 6 1024 174 290 10 2900 174 6 1042 177 295 10 2950 177 6 1060 180 300 10 3000 180 6 1078 183 305 10 3050 183 6 1096 186 310 10 3100 186 6 1114 189 315 10 3150 189 6 1132 192 320 10 32●0 192 6 1150 195 325 10 3●50 195 6 1168 198 330 10 3300 198 6 1186 201 335 10 3350 201 6 1204 204 340 10 3400 204 6 1222 ●●● 345 10 3450 207 6 1242 21● 350 10 3500 210 6 1260 21● 355 10 355● 213 6 1278 216 360 10 3●●0 216 6 1296 219 365 10 3650 219 6 1314 222 370 10 3700 222 6 1332 225 375 10 3750 225 6 1350 228 380 10 3800 228 6 1368 231 385 10 3850 231 6 1386 2●4 390 10 3900 234 6 ●404 237 395 10 3950 237 6 1422 240 400 10 4000 240 6 1440 243 405 10 4050 243 6 1458 246 410 10 4100 246 6 1476 249 415 10 4150 249 6 1494 252 420 10 4200 252 6 1512 255 425 10 4250 255 6 1530 258 430 10 4300 258 6 1548 261 435 10 4350 261 6 1566 264 440 10 4400 264 6 1584. 267 445 10 4450 267 6 1602 270 450 10 4500 270 6 1620 273 455 10 4550 273 6 16●8 276 460 10 4600 276 6 1656 279 465 10 4650 279 6 1674 282 470 10 4700 282 6 1692 285 475 10 4750 285 6 1710 288 480 10 4800 288 6 1728 291 485 10 4850 291 6 1746 294 490 10 4900 294 6 1764 297 495 10 4950 297 6 1782 300 500 10 5000 300 6 1800 303 505 10 5050 303 6 1818 306 510 10 5100 306 6 1830 309 515 10 5150 309 6 1854 312 520 10 5200 312 6 1872 315 525 10 5250 315 6 1890 318 530 10 5300 318 6 1908 321 535 10 5350 321 6 1926 324 540 10 5400 324 6 1944 327 545 10 5450 327 6 1962 330 550 10 5500 330 6 1980 333 555 10 5550 333 6 1998 336 560 10 5600 336 6 2016 339 565 10 5650 339 6 2034 342 570 10 5700 342 6 2052 345 575 10 5750 345 6 2070 348 580 10 5800 348 6 2088 351 585 10 5850 351 6 2106 354 590 10 59●0 354 6 212● 357 595 10 5950 357 6 2142 360 600 10 6000 360 6 2160 363 605 10 6050 363 6 2178 366 610 10 6100 366 6 2196 369 615 10 6150 369 6 221● 372 620 10 6200 372 6 2232 375 625 10 6250 375 6 2250 378 630 10 6300 378 6 2268 381 635 10 6350 381 6 2286 384 640 10 6400 384 6 2304 387 645 10 6450 387 6 2322 390 650 10 6500 390 6 2340 393 655 10 6550 393 6 2358 396 660 10 6600 396 6 2376 399 665 10 6650 399 6 2394 402 670 10 6700 402 6 2412 405 675 10 6750 405 6 2430 408 680 10 6800 408 6 2448 411 685 10 6850 411 6 2466 414 690 10 6900 414 6 2484 417 695 10 6950 417 6 2502 420 700 10 7000 420 6 2520 423 705 10 7050 423 6 2538 426 710 10 7100 426 6 2556 429 715 10 7150 429 6 2574 432 720 10 7200 432 6 2592 435 725 10 7250 435 6 2610 438 730 10 7300 438 6 2628 441 735 10 7350 441 6 2646 444 740 10 7400 444 6 2664 447 745 10 7450 447 6 2682 450 750 10 7500 450 6 2700 453 755 10 7550 453 6 2718 456 760 10 7600 456 6 2736 459 765 10 7650 459 6 2754 462 770 10 7700 462 6 2772 465 775 10 7750 465 6 2790 468 780 10 7800 468 6 2808 471 785 10 7850 471 6 2826 474 790 10 7900 474 6 2844 477 795 10 7950 477 6 2862 480 800 10 8000 480 6 2880 483 805 10 8050 483 6 2898 486 810 10 8100 486 6 2916 489 815 10 8150 489 6 2934 492 820 10 8200 492 6 2952 495 825 10 8250 495 6 2970 498 830 10 8300 498 6 2988 501 835 10 8350 501 6 3006 504 840 10 8400 504 6 3024 507 845 10 8450 507 6 3042 510 850 10 8500 510 6 3060 513 855 10 8550 513 6 3078 516 860 10 8600 516 6 3096 519 865 10 8650 519 6 3114 522 870 10 8700 522 6 3132 525 875 10 8750 525 6 3150 528 880 10 9800 528 6 5168 531 885 10 9850 531 6 3186 534 890 10 8900 534 6 3204 537 895 10 8950 537 6 3222 540 900 10 9000 540 6 3240 543 905 10 9050 543 6 3258 546 910 10 9100 546 6 3276 549 915 10 9150 549 6 3294 552 920 10 9200 552 6 3312 555 925 10 9250 555 6 3330 558 930 10 9300 558 6 3348 561 935 10 9350 561 6 3366 564 940 10 9400 564 6 3384 567 945 10 9450 567 6 3402 570 950 10 9500 570 6 3420 573 955 10 9550 573 6 3438 576 960 10 9600 576 6 3456 579 965 10 9650 579 6 3474 582 970 10 9700 582 6 3492 585 975 10 9750 585 6 3510 588 980 10 9800 588 6 3528 591 985 10 9850 591 6 3546 594 990 10 9900 594 6 3564 597 995 10 9950 597 6 3582 600 1000 10 10000 600 6 3600 603 1005 10 10050 603 6 3618 606 1010 10 10100 606 6 3636 609 1015 10 10150 609 6 3654 612 1020 10 10200 612 6 3672 615 1025 10 10250 615 6 3690 618 1030 10 10300 618 6 3708 621 1035 10 10350 621 6 3726 624 1040 10 10400 624 6 3744 627 1045 10 10450 627 6 3762 630 1050 10 10500 630 6 3780 633 1055 10 10550 633 6 3798 636 1060 10 10600 636 6 3816 639 1065 10 10650 639 6 3834 642 1070 10 10700 642 6 3852 645 1075 10 10750 645 6 3870 648 1080 10 10800 648 6 3888 651 1085 10 10850 651 6 3906 654 1090 10 10900 654 6 392● 657 1095 10 10950 657 6 3942 660 1100 10 11000 660 6 3960 663 1105 10 11050 663 6 3978 666 1110 10 11100 666 6 3996 669 1115 10 11150 669 6 4014 672 1120 10 11200 672 6 40●● 675 1125 10 11250 675 6 4050 678 1130 10 11300 678 6 4068 681 1135 10 11350 681 6 4086 684 1140 10 11400 684 6 4104 687 1145 10 11450 687 6 4122 690 1150 10 11500 690 6 4140 693 1155 10 11550 693 6 4158 696 1160 10 11600 696 6 4176 699 1165 10 11650 699 6 4194 702 1170 10 11700 702 6 4212 705 1175 10 11750 705 6 4230 708 1180 10 11800 708 6 4248 711 1185 10 11850 711 6 4266 714 1190 10 11900 714 6 4284 717 1195 10 11950 717 6 4302 720 1200 10 12000 720 6 4320 723 1205 10 12050 723 6 4338 726 1210 10 12100 726 6 4356 729 1215 10 12150 729 6 4374 732 1220 10 12200 732 6 4392 735 1225 10 12250 735 6 4410 738 1230 10 12300 738 6 4428 741 1235 10 12350 741 6 4446 744 1240 10 12400 744 6 4464 747 1245 10 12450 747 6 4482 750 1250 10 12500 750 6 4500 753 1255 10 12550 753 6 4518 756 1260 10 12600 756 6 4536 759 1265 10 12650 759 6 4554 762 1270 10 12700 762 6 4572 765 1275 10 12750 765 6 4590 768 1280 10 12800 768 6 4608 771 1285 10 12850 771 6 4626 774 1290 10 12900 774 6 4644 777 1295 10 12950 777 6 4662 780 1300 10 13000 780 6 4680 783 1305 10 13050 783 6 4698 786 1310 10 13100 786 6 4716 789 1315 10 13150 789 6 4734 79● 1320 10 13200 792 6 4752 795 1325 10 13250 795 6 4770 798 1330 10 13300 798 6 4788 801 1335 10 13350 801 6 4806 804 1340 10 13400 804 6 4824 807 1345 10 13450 807 6 484● 810 1350 10 13500 810 6 4860 813 1355 10 13550 813 6 4878 816 1360 10 13600 816 6 4896 819 1365 10 13650 819 6 4914 822 1370 10 13700 822 6 4932 825 1375 10 13750 825 6 4950 828 1380 10 13800 828 6 4968 831 1385 10 13850 831 6 4986 834 1390 10 13900 834 6 5004 837 1395 10 13950 837 6 5022 840 1400 10 14000 840 6 5040 843 1405 10 14050 843 6 5058 846 1410 10 14100 846 6 5076 849 1415 10 14150 849 6 5094 852 1420 10 14200 852 6 5112 855 1425 10 14250 855 6 5130 858 1430 10 14300 858 6 5148 861 1435 10 14350 861 6 5166 864 1440 10 14400 864 6 5184 867 1445 10 14450 867 6 5202 870 1450 10 14500 870 6 5220 873 1455 10 14550 873 6 5238 876 1460 10 14600 876 6 5256 879 1465 10 14650 879 6 5274 882 1470 10 14700 882 6 5292 885 1475 10 14750 885 6 5310 888 1480 10 14800 888 6 5328 891 1485 10 14850 891 6 5346 894 1490 10 149●0 894 6 5364 897 1495 10 14950 897 6 5382 900 1500 10 15000 900 6 5400 903 1505 10 15050 903 6 5418 906 1510 10 15100 906 6 5436 909 1515 10 15150 909 6 5454 612 1520 10 15200 912 6 5472 915 1525 10 15250 915 6 5490 918 1530 10 15300 918 6 5508 921 1535 10 15350 921 6 5526 924 1540 10 15400 924 6 5544 927 1545 10 15450 927 6 5562 930 1550 10 15500 930 6 5580 933 1555 10 15550 933 6 5598 936 1560 10 15600 936 6 5616 939 1565 10 15650 939 6 5634 942 1570 10 15700 942 6 5652 945 1575. 10 15750 945 6 5670 948 1580 10 15800 948 6 5688 951 1585. 10 15850 951 6 5706 954 1590. 10 15900 954 6 5724 957 1595 10 15950 957 6 5742 960 1600 10 16000 960 6 5760 963 1605 10 16050 963 6 5778 96● 1610 10 16100 966 6 5796 9●9 1615 10 16150 969 6 5814 972 1620 10 16200 972 6 5832 975 1625 10 16250 975 6 5850 978 1630 10 16300 978 6 5868 981 1635 10 16350 981 6 5886 984 1640 10 16400 984 6 5904 987 1645 10 16450 987 6 5922 990 1650 10 16500 990 6 5940 99● 1655 10 16550 993 6 5958 996 1660 10 16600 996 6 5976 999 1665 10 16650 999 6 5994 1002 1670 10 16700 1002 6 6012 1005 1675 10 16750 1005 6 6030 1008 1680 10 16800 1008 6 6048 1011 1685 10 16850 1011 6 6066 1014 1690 10 16900 1014 6 6084 1017 1695 10 16950 1017 6 6102 1020 1700 10 17000 1020 6 6120 1023 1705 10 17050 1023 6 6138 1026 1710 10 17100 1026 6 6156 1029 1715 10 17150 1029 6 6174 1032 1720 10 17200 1032 6 6192 1035 1725 10 17250 1035 6 6210 1038 1730 10 17300 1038 6 6228 1041 1735 10 17350 1041 6 6246 1044 1740 10 17400 1044 6 6264 1047 1745 10 17450 1047 6 6282 1050 1750 10 17500 1050 6 6300 1053 1755 10 17550 1053 6 6318 1056 1760 10 17600 1056 6 6336 1059 1765 10 17650 1059 6 6354 1062 1770 10 17700 1062 6 6372 1065 1775 10 17750 1065 6 6390 1068 1780 10 17800 1068 6 6408 1071 1785 10 17850 1071 6 6426 1074 1790 10 17900 1074 6 6444 1077 1795 10 17950 1077 6 6462 1080 1800 10 18000 1080 6 6480 1083 1805 10 18050 1083 6 6498 1086 1810 10 18100 1086 6 6516 1089 1815 10 18150 1089 6 6534 1092 1820 10 18200 1092 6 6552 1095 1825 10 18250 1095 6 6570 1098 1830 10 18300 1098 6 6588 1101 1835 10 18350 1101 6 6606 1104 184● 10 18400 1104 6 6624 1107 1845 10 18450 1107 6 6642 1110 1850 10 18500 1110 6 6660 1113 1855 10 18550 1113 6 6678 1116 1860 10 18600 1116 6 6696 1119 1865 10 18650 1119 6 6714 1122 1870 10 18700 1122 6 6732 1125 1875 10 18750 1125 6 6750 1128 1880 10 18800 1128 6 6768 1131 1885 10 18850 1131 6 6786 1134 1890 10 18900 1134 6 6804 1137 1895 10 18950 1137 6 6822 1140 1900 10 19000 1140 6 6840 1143 1905 10 19050 1143 6 6858 1146 1910 10 19100 1146 6 6876 1149 1915 10 19150 1149 6 6894 1152 1920 10 19200 ●152 6 69●2 1155 1925 10 19250 1155 6 ●●30 1158 1930 1● 1930● 1158 6 6948 1161 1935 10 19350 1161 6 69●6 1164 1940 10 19400 1164 6 6984 1167 1945 10 19450 1167 6 7002 1170 1950 10 19500 1170 6 7020 1173 1955 10 1955● ●173 6 7038 1176 1960 10 19●●● 1176 6 7056 1179 1905 10 1905● 1179 6 7074 1182 1970 10 19700 1●82 6 7092 1185 1975 10 19750 1185 6 7110 1188 1980 10 19800 ●188 6 ●●28 1191 1985 10 19850 1191 6 71●6 1194 1990 10 19900 1194 6 ●●64 1197 1995 10 19950 1●●7 6 7182 1200 2000 10 20000 120● 6 7200 2400 4000 10 40000 2400 6 14400 3000 5000 10 50000 ●●00 6 18000 4000 6667 10 66670 4●●0 6 24000 5000 8333 10 83330 5000 6 30000  

The use of the precedent Table described.  
THis precedent Table is divided into seven Columes, each Column having its proper use set above it.  
In the first Column towards the left hand, you shall find the number of paces Geometrical (vice foot to each pace) placed.  
In the second Column you shall find the just number of men which those paces may contain in Breast or Rank, ●●cording as the first Column shall point to you, viz. each man taking up three foot for his particular station.  
In the third Column you shall find our ordinary way of placing our men 10 deep in File, fit for skirmish.  
The fourth Column points to you the whole number of men being ordered 10 deep in File.  
The fifth Column shows how many Horses may be placed upon so many paces of ground, as the Column of paces demonstrates; viz. each Horse takes up five foot for his station in Rank.  
The sixth Column shows the manner of placing of them six deep in File.  
The seventh Column shows the just number of Horse being ordered six deep in File. As for example; You have paced out 1002 Geometrical paces, which is 2004 of your ordinary going paces (taking but two foot and an half to each step.) Now if you would know how many men these forenamed paces may contain in Rank, you must first enter the Table, and in the first Column of the last Table-Page, right under the superscription of Paces Geometrical, you shall find 1002, and just against it, in the second Column towards your right hand, you shall find that 1670 men may be placed in Rank or Breast; and in the next Column, being the third, you shall find they are placed 10 deep in File; then casting but your eye into the fourth Column, you shall find the whole number of them to be 16700 men.  
Likewise if you would know how many Horses may be placed in Breast or Rank upon the forenamed quantity of paces, by casting your eye into the fifth Column you shall find 1002 Horses; and if they be ordered six deep in File, then look into the seventh Column, and you shall find the whole number to be 6012 Horses: after the same manner you may find out any other number.  
If you intent to order your Horse but five deep in File, then to know how many be of the whole number, you must multiply the number in the fifth Column by 5, and the product is the whole number.  
After the same manner, if you intent to impale the Flanks or Rear of your Battle, after you know the number of paces, as for example, Suppose it to be 801 paces; enter the Column of paces, and you shall find that 801 paces must have 1335 men to make one Rank for the Impalement; now if you would have seven Ranks, than you must multiply 1335 by 7, and the product will be 9345, the just whole number that the Impalement will take up, being it consists of seven Ranks.  
The reason why I have set down the paces Geometrical in the first Column, after a progressionall way, one number exceeding another by three, is because it fits even with the quantity of feet each Footman and Horseman occupyeth for his proper station in Rank or Breast: otherwise there would be odd feet, as in 2 paces (which consists of 10 feet) there can be but 3 Footmen placed, who must take up but 9 feet; so that there is an odd foot remaining, which would put all out of order. But in 3 paces there is 15 feet contained, wherein may be 5 men placed. Also in 3 pa●es there must be even 3 Horses placed, for a Horse taketh up in Breast or Rank an 〈◊〉 pace, containing 5 feet. Vale.     
FINIS.